Foreword

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence. It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control. This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle. A separate Warranty Information booklet explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle. Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have any questions, he will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to him.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these five important driving rules to help ensure a safe and complete trip for you and your passengers! NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions. ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle. ALWAYS review this Owners Manual for important safety information.

NOTES ON THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS OWNERS MANUAL

This owners manual contains descriptions and operating instructions for all systems, features and optional equipment that might appear in any model of this vehicle built for any destination in North America, including the continental United States, Canada and Hawaii. Therefore, you may very well find information in this manual that does not apply to your vehicle.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modification may not be covered under NISSAN warranties. All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or design without notice and without obligation.

1995 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD. TOKYO, JAPAN

Welcome To The World Of NISSAN

Nissan pioneered the use of electronics and computers in automobiles, and has led the industry in improving both performance and fuel efficiency through new engine designs and the use of synthetic materials to reduce vehicle weight. The company has also developed ways to build quality into its vehicles at each stage of the production process, both through extensive use of automation and most importantly through an awareness that people are the central element in quality control. From the time the parts arrived from our suppliers until you took delivery of your new Nissan, dozens of checks were made to ensure that only the best job was being done in producing and delivering your vehicle. Nissan also takes great care to ensure that when you take your Nissan to your dealer for maintenance, the service technician will perform his work according to the quality standards that have been established by the factory. Safety has also been built into your Nissan. As you know, seat belts are an integral part of the safety systems that will help protect you and your passengers in the event of a sudden stop or an accident. We urge you to use the belts every time you drive the vehicle. The Nissan story of growth and achievement reflects our major goal: to provide you, our customer, with a vehicle that is built with quality and craftsmanship a product that we can be proud to build and you can be proud to own.

AFW0001

Your new Nissan is the result of our dedication to produce the finest in safe, reliable and economical transportation. Your vehicle is the product of a successful worldwide company that manufactures cars and trucks in over 17 countries and distributes them in 170 countries. Nissan vehicles are designed and manufactured by Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. which was founded in Tokyo, Japan in 1933, and Nissan affiliates world wide, collectively growing to become the fifth largest automaker in the world. In addition to cars and trucks, Nissan also makes textile machinery, fork-lift trucks, marine engines, boats and other products. Nissan has made a substantial and growing investment in North America, starting with the opening of Nissan Motor Corporation U.S.A. in 1960 and continuing with the production of some cars and trucks at one of the worlds most

modern manufacturing facilities Nissan Motor Manufacturing Corporation U.S.A. in Smyrna, Tennessee, vehicle styling at Nissan Design International in San Diego, California, and engineering at Nissan Research and Development in Farmington Hills, Michigan. Nissan Motor Corporation U.S.A. and its dealers indirectly employ about 60,000 Americans. Nissan is also a substantial contributor to the Canadian economy. Nissan Canada Inc., its suppliers and over 170 dealers employ approximately 4,500 people. These include company employees and the staffs of Nissan dealers all across Canada. In addition, many Canadians work for companies that supply Nissan and Nissan dealers with materials and services ranging from operation of port facilities and transportation services, to the supply of lubricants, parts and accessories.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

NISSAN CARES ... Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSAN dealer can not assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions, please contact our (NISSANs) Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number: For U.S. mainland customers 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261) For Hawaii customers 531-0231 (Oahu Number) For Canada customers 1-800-387-0122 The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information: Your name, address, and telephone number Vehicle identification number (on dashboard) Date of purchase Current odometer reading Your NISSAN dealers name Your comments or questions OR

You can write to NISSAN with the information on the left at: For U.S. mainland customers Nissan Motor Corporation U.S.A. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 191 Gardena, California 90247 For Hawaii customers Nissan Motor Corporation in Hawaii 2880 Kilihau St. Honolulu, Hawaii 96819 For Canada customers Nissan Canada Inc. P.O. Box 1709, Station B Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4H6

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

Contents

Instruments and controls Pre-driving checks and adjustments Heater, air conditioner and audio system Starting and driving In case of emergency Appearance and interior care Do-it-yourself operations Maintenance schedule Technical and consumer information Index

1 Instruments and controls

Meters and gauges ................................................... 1-3 Warning/indicator light and buzzer............................ 1-6 Theft warning ............................................................ 1-9 Windshield wiper and washer switch ...................... 1-11 Rear window and outside mirror defogger switch ....................................................... 1-12 Headlight and turn signal switch ............................. 1-13 Cornering light ......................................................... 1-14 Instrument brightness control.................................. 1-14 Front fog light switch ............................................... 1-15 Hazard warning flasher switch ................................ 1-15 Heated seat ............................................................. 1-16 Cigarette lighter and ash trays................................ 1-17 Pocket ..................................................................... 1-17 Cup and card holders ............................................. 1-18 Power window ......................................................... 1-19 Sunroof .................................................................... 1-20 Clock ....................................................................... 1-21 Interior light ............................................................. 1-21 Front personal light ................................................. 1-22 Vanity mirror light .................................................... 1-22 Trunk light ............................................................... 1-23

Windshield wiper/washer switch (P.1-11) Instrument brightness control switch (P.1-14) Meters/gauges (P.1-3) Theft warning light (P.1-9) Cruise control main switch (P.4-12) Headlight and turn signal switch (P.1-13)

Hazard warning flasher switch (P.1-15) Ventilator (P.3-2) Heater/air conditioner control (P.3-3) Clock (P.1-21) Radio/cassette player (P.3-11)/CD player (P.3-21) Rear window and outside mirror defogger switch (P.1-12) Passenger air bag (P.2-17)

Hood release lever (P.2-8) Outside mirror remote control (P.2-36) Fuse box cover (P.7-21) Tilting steering wheel lock lever (P.2-35) Driver air bag (P.2-17) Ignition switch/steering lock (P.4-4) Cruise control set switch (P.4-12) Cigarette lighter (accessory) (P.1-17) Ash tray (P.1-17) Heated seat switch (P.1-16)

Glove box (P.2-8)

See the page indicated in parentheses for operating details.

SIC0169

1-2

METERS AND GAUGES

SIC0170

1-3

SIC0171

SIC0172

SIC0173

SPEEDOMETER
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (r/min).

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE

The gauge indicates the coolant temperature. The coolant temperature will vary with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.

ODOMETER
The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

TRIP ODOMETER
The trip odometer records the distance of individual trips. Before each trip, set the trip odometer to zero by pushing the RESET button.

When engine speed approaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.

1-4

If the gauge indicates over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. See In case of emergency section for immediate action required.

The indicator light comes on when the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the gauge reaches E. There should be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E.

SIC0174

FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the APPROXIMATE fuel level in the tank. The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hill. The gauge needle is designed to remain in approximately the same position, even when the ignition key is turned OFF. Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers Empty.

1-5

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHT AND BUZZER

or warning light Seat belt warning light Low washer fluid warning light Anti-lock brake warning light Engine oil pressure warning light CRUISE indicator light Air bag warning light

Turn signal/hazard indicator light High beam indicator light (blue) Charge warning light Door open warning light

or

Overdrive off indicator light Malfunction indicator light (MIL)

Checking bulbs
Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition key to ON without starting the engine. The following lights will come on: , or , , The following lights come on briefly and then go off: or , , If any light fails to come on, it may indicate a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system. Have the system repaired promptly.

Engine oil pressure warning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop. Running the engine with the oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine. The oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. See Engine oil in the Do-it-yourself operations section. Running the engine with the oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine.

Charge warning light

If the light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate that there is something wrong with the charging system. Turn the engine off and check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing or if the light remains on, see your NISSAN dealer immediately.

1-6

This means the system is operational. If any of the following conditions occur, the air bag needs servicing and your vehicle must be taken to your nearest authorized NISSAN dealer. 1. The air bag light does not come on for 7 seconds and then go off as described above. 2. The air bag light flashes intermittently or remains on. 3. The air bag light does not come on at all. Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental Restraint System may not function properly. For additional details on the Air Bag System, see Section 2.

Parking brake indicator The light comes on when the parking brake is applied. Low brake fluid warning The light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following: 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. See Brake and clutch fluid in the Do-it-yourself operations section.

Do not continue driving if the belt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors are not closed securely while the ignition key is ON.

Seat belt warning light and buzzer

The light and buzzer remind you to fasten seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition key is turned to ON, and will remain illuminated until the drivers seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the buzzer will sound for about six seconds unless the drivers seat belt is securely fastened. Refer to Seat belts in the Pre-driving checks and adjustments section for precautions on seat belt usage.

Low washer fluid warning light

This light comes on when the washer tank fluid is at a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary. See the Do-it-yourself operations section.

If the level is below the MINIMUM mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked at a NISSAN dealer. 2. If the brake fluid level is correct: Have the warning system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Air bag warning light

When the ignition key is in the ON or START position, the air bag light will illuminate for about 7 seconds and then turn off.

or

Brake warning light

Even if you judge it to be safe, have your vehicle towed because driving it

This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems.

1-7

could be dangerous. Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped could increase your stopping distance and require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

illuminate for about 2 seconds and then turn off. This means the system is operational.

Light reminder buzzer

A buzzer will sound when the driver side door is opened if the light switch is turned on (ignition switch is turned off). Turn the light switch off when you leave the vehicle.

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

The light flashes when the turn signal switch lever or hazard switch is turned on.

or

Anti-lock brake warning light

High beam indicator light (Blue)

This light comes on when the headlight high beam is on and goes out when the low beam is selected.

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

If the light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate there is something wrong with the anti-lock portion of the brake system. Have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. However if the light illuminates while starting the engine, it does not indicate a system malfunction. If an abnormality occurs in the system, the anti-lock function will cease but the ordinary brakes will continue to operate normally. If the light comes on while you are driving, contact your NISSAN dealer for repair.

Cruise indicator light

The light comes on while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control system. If the light flickers while the engine is running, it may indicate there is something wrong with the cruise control system. Have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer.

Key reminder buzzer

The buzzer will sound if the driver side door is opened while the key is left in the ignition switch (ignition switch is turned off). Remove the key and take it with you when leaving the vehicle.

Overdrive off indicator light

This light comes on when the overdrive switch is pushed to the OFF position. However when the ignition key is in the ON or START position and the overdrive switch is not in the OFF position, the light will

1-8

THEFT WARNING Malfunction indicator light (MIL)

If the MIL comes on or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control problem. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. Check and securely tighten the fuel filler cap, and have your vehicle checked as noted above.

Continued operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission control system which may affect your warranty coverage. Although the vehicle is still driveable, see your nearest NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. To avoid system damage, do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH (72 km/h). If possible, avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

IC0005

The theft warning system provides visual and audio alarm signals if parts of the vehicle are disturbed.

How to activate the theft warning system

1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. Close all windows. Close and lock all doors, hood and trunk lid. The doors can be locked either with or without the key. The system can be activated even if the windows are open.

1-9

3. Confirm that the indicator light comes on. The light will glow for about 30 seconds and then blink. The system is now activated. If, during this 30 second time period, the door is unlocked by the key or multi-remote controller, or the ignition key is turned to ACC, the system will not activate.

will activate with all doors, hood, trunk lid and back door locked and ignition key off. Turn the ignition key to ACC to turn the system off.

Theft warning system operation

The warning system will give the following alarm: The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently. In addition, the starter motor will not operate.
SIC0175

If the key is turned quickly when locking the door, the system may not activate. Furthermore, if the key is turned excessively to the unlock position, the system may be deactivated when the key is removed. If the indicator light fails to glow for 30 seconds, unlock the door once and lock it again. Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system

The alarm automatically turns off after 2 to 3 minutes; however, the alarm will reactivate if the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking a door or trunk lid with the key. The alarm is activated by: Unlocking the door or opening the trunk lid without using the key or multi-remote controller. (Even if the door is opened by releasing the door inside lock knob or the trunk lid is opened by operating the opener lever/button, the alarm is activated.) Opening the hood. Pushing in or pulling out of the key cylinder on the door or trunk lid.

1-10

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH How to stop alarm

The alarm will stop only by unlocking a door or trunk lid with the key or multi-remote controller. The alarm will not stop if the ignition switch is turned to ACC. If the system does not operate as described above, have it checked by your NISSAN dealer.

SIC0176

The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position. Push the lever down to operate the wiper. Intermittent operation can be adjusted from 3 to 21 seconds by turning the knob. (Type B only) Pull the lever toward you to operate the washer. Then the wiper will also operate several times. In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision. Warm windshield Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds. Do not operate the washer if the reservoir tank is dry.

1-11

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR DEFOGGER SWITCH

with the defroster before you wash the windshield.

SIC0177

To defog the rear window glass and outside mirrors, start the engine and push the switch on. (The indicator light will come on.) Push the switch again to turn the defogger off. It will automatically turn off in approximately 15 minutes.

When cleaning the inner side of the window, be careful not to scratch or damage the electrical conductors.

1-12

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Daytime light system (For Canada)
Even if the headlight control switch is off, the headlights high beams will illuminate after starting the engine. The headlights will be a little dimmer than they are with the headlight switch in the position. If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the daytime lights will not be illuminated. The daytime lights will illuminate once the parking brake is released. Thereafter, the daytime lights will not turn off when using the parking brake at stop signals, etc.

SIC0188

When the daytime light system is active, tail lights on your vehicle will not be on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

Lighting
Turn the switch to the position: The front clearance, side marker, tail, license plate and instrument lights will come on.

Turn the switch to the

position:

Passing signal
Pulling the lever toward you will turn on the headlight high beam.

Headlights will come on and all the other lights remain on. To select the high beam, push the lever forward. Pull it back to select the low beam.

1-13

CORNERING LIGHT Turn signal

Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signals cancel automatically.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL

Lane change signal

To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or down to the point where lights begin flashing.

IC1030

IC1284MA

The cornering light provides additional illumination toward the turning direction. The light will come on when the turn signal lever is moved to the right or left with the headlights on.

The instrument brightness control operates when the light switch is in the or position. Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instrument panel lights (except clock) and power window switch lights. When the control is turned to the right until a click sound is heard, the light intensity will be at maximum. When the control is turned to the left until a click sound is heard, the light will be turned off.

1-14

FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving. Turn signals do not work when the switch is operating. The flasher can be actuated with the ignition switch either off or on.

IC1292

SIC0178

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch to the position, then turn the switch to the position. To turn them off, turn the switch to the OFF position. The headlights must be on for the fog lights to operate.

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights will flash.

When stalled or stopped on the roadway under emergency conditions, move the vehicle well off the road. Do not use the switch while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic.

1-15

HEATED SEAT
For Low heat, press the top of the switch. For High heat, press the bottom of the switch. For No heat, the switch has a center OFF position between Low and High. The indicator light in the switch will illuminate when Low or High is selected. The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on. 3. When the vehicles interior is warmed, or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off. on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater. Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth. When cleaning the seat, never use benzine, thinner, or any similar materials. If any abnormalities are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch OFF and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer.

SIC0179

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The switches located on the center console can be operated independently of each other. 1. Start the engine.

The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running. 2. Selecting heat range.

Do not use the seat heater for extended periods, or when the seat is not occupied. Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated. Do not place anything hard or heavy

1-16

CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND ASH TRAYS

POCKET

The cigarette lighter should not be used while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation.

SIC0180

The cigarette lighter element is an accessory. A genuine NISSAN cigarette lighter or equivalent can be purchased from your local NISSAN dealer. The cigarette lighter operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. Push the lighter in all the way. When the lighter is heated, it will spring out. Return the lighter to its original position after use. The pocket should not be used while driving in order that full attention may be
SIC0181

1-17

CUP AND CARD HOLDERS

given to the driving operation.

Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger.

SIC0472

To accommodate different sized cups, remove the finisher.

The cup and card holders should not be used while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation.

1-18

POWER WINDOW

SIC0182

SIC0183

SIC0184

The power window only operates when the ignition key is in the ON position. To open or close the window, push down or pull up the switch and hold it. The main switch (driver side switches) will open or close all the windows.

The passenger side switch will open or close only the corresponding window. To open or close the window, hold the switch down or up.

Power window automatic switch

To fully open the driver side window, completely push down the switch and release it; it need not be held. The window will automatically open all the way. To stop the window, just pull up the switch toward the CLOSE side.

Locking passengers window

When the lock button is pushed in, only the driver side window can be opened or closed. Push it in again to cancel.

Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc. inside the vehicle before closing the windows. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches.

1-19

SUNROOF Sun shade

Open/close the sun shade by sliding it backward/forward. The shade will open automatically when the sunroof is opened. However, it must be closed manually.

Be extremely careful not to have any part of your body in the sunroof opening while it is closing.
IC1432

The sunroof will only operate when the ignition key is in the ON position.

Do not stand up or extend any portion of your body out of the opening while driving. Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from the sunroof before opening. Do not place any heavy object on the sunroof or surrounding area.
SIC0185

Sliding the sunroof

To open the roof, keep pressing the switch to the side. To close the roof, keep pressing the switch to side. the

Tilting the sunroof

To tilt up, first close the sunroof, then keep pushing the side of the tilt switch. To tilt down the sunroof, keep pushing the side.

If the sunroof does not close

Turn the ignition key to the OFF

1-20

CLOCK
position. 1. Remove the cover as illustrated. The shaft end of the sunroof motor will be visible. 2. Using the wrench supplied in the tool bag, turn the shaft clockwise to close the sunroof. If the sunroof does not tilt down, turn the shaft counterclockwise to tilt the sunroof down. Have the sunroof system checked and repaired by your NISSAN dealer.
AIC0500

INTERIOR LIGHT

IC1226

The digital clock displays time when the ignition key is in ACC or ON. If the power supply is disconnected, the clock will not indicate the correct time. Readjust the time.

The interior light has a three-position switch. When the switch is in the center k position, the light will illuminate when a door is opened.

Interior light timer

The interior light will stay on for about 30 seconds when: The drivers door is unlocked while the key is removed from the ignition switch. The key is removed from the ignition switch while the drivers door is closed. The key is removed from the ignition switch

Adjusting the time

Push the H button to adjust the hour. Push the M button to adjust the minute.

1-21

FRONT PERSONAL LIGHT

and the drivers door is opened and then closed. The timer is cancelled, and the interior light will turn off when: The drivers door is locked. The ignition switch is turned ON.

VANITY MIRROR LIGHT

IC1019

SIC0186

The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when the cover on the vanity mirror is opened.

IC1163

1-22

TRUNK LIGHT
The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the light will go off.

1-23

MEMO

1-24

2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Key ............................................................................ 2-2 Door locks ................................................................. 2-2 Multi-remote control system ...................................... 2-5 Hood release ............................................................. 2-8 Glove box lock .......................................................... 2-8 Trunk lid lock ............................................................. 2-9 Fuel filler lid lock ..................................................... 2-10 Seats ....................................................................... 2-12 Supplemental restraint system (Air bag system) ...................................................... 2-17 Caution and warning labels..................................... 2-21 Air bag warning light ............................................... 2-21 Seat belts ................................................................ 2-23 Child restraints for infants and small children......... 2-29 Tilting steering wheel .............................................. 2-35 Outside mirror remote control ................................. 2-36 Foldable outside mirrors.......................................... 2-36 Inside mirror ............................................................ 2-36

KEY
A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, this key can be duplicated by your NISSAN dealer or a lock smith shop.

DOOR LOCKS

SPA0083

SPA0084

The master key can be used for all the locks. Record the key number on the key number plate and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), NOT IN THE CAR. A key number plate is supplied with your key. Keep the plate in a safe place. NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate.

Locking front doors with key

To lock the door, turn the key towards the front of the vehicle. To unlock, turn it towards the rear. Locking the front door will simultaneously lock the other doors.

2-2

 Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out intruders.
SPA0085

Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic.

SPA0086

Locking the doors without key

To lock from the outside without a key, move the inside lock knob to the LOCK position. Then close the door. When locking the door this way, be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle. The inside lock knob cannot be set to the LOCK position with the front doors open and with the key in the ignition.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety locking helps prevent doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle. When the lever is in the lock position, the rear door can be opened only from the outside.

2-3

the LOCK position will lock all doors.

SPA0087

SPA0088

POWER DOOR LOCK

The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors simultaneously. Turning the front door key to the front of the vehicle will lock all doors. Turning the front door key one time to the rear of the vehicle will unlock the corresponding door. From that position, returning the key to Neutral (where the key can only be removed and inserted.) and turning it to the rear again within 5 seconds will unlock all doors. Pushing the front door inside lock knob to

Operating the lock-unlock switch will lock or unlock all doors.

2-4

MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, to open the drivers and front passengers windows, to release the trunk lid and to turn on or off the interior light by using the remote controller from outside the car. Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle before locking the doors and leaving it. The remote controller can operate at a distance of approximately 49 ft (15 m) from the vehicle. (The effective distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.) As many as four remote controllers can be used with one vehicle. For information concerning the purchase and use of additional remote controllers, contact your NISSAN dealer.

Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the remote controller. Do not allow the remote controller to become wet. Do not drop the remote controller. Do not strike the remote controller sharply against another object.
SPA0277

Do not place the remote controller for

2-5

an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140F (60C).

DOOR LOCK OPERATION

1. Remove the ignition key. 2. Close all doors. 3. Push the lock button on the remote controller. 4. The hazard indicator flashes twice. 5. All doors will lock. Although door locking with the remote controller can be confirmed by looking at the hazard indicator, always check to be sure that the doors are properly locked before leaving your vehicle.

The interior light can be turned off without waiting for 30 seconds by inserting the key into the ignition and turning it ON or by locking the doors with the remote controller or by pushing the interior light button.

PANIC ALARM OPERATION

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the alarm to call attention as follows: 1. Push the panic alarm button on the remote controller for longer than 1.5 seconds. 2. The theft warning alarm and headlight will stay on for 30 seconds. 3. The alarm will stop when any of the key functions on the remote controller are used. The remote controller will not function. When the key is inserted into the key switch. When the battery in the remote controller is dead. The distance between the remote controller and vehicle is more than approx. 49 ft (15 m).

OPENING THE DRIVERS AND FRONT PASSENGERS WINDOW

1. Push the unlock button on the remote controller for longer than 1.5 seconds after the drivers door is unlocked. 2. The drivers and front passengers window will open. The drivers and front passengers window will also open after all doors are unlocked with the remote controller. The drivers and front passengers window cannot be closed by using the remote controller.

DOOR UNLOCK OPERATION

1. Push the unlock button on the remote controller. 2. Only the driver side door will unlock. Push the unlock button on the remote controller again within 5 seconds. All doors will unlock. 3. The interior light will stay on for 30 seconds when the interior light switch is in the center k position.

TRUNK LID OPENER OPERATION

1. Push the trunk lid release button on the remote controller for longer than 0.5 second. 2. The trunk lid will open. The trunk lid will not open when the trunk lid cancel lever is in the CANCEL position. It can be opened only with the key.

2-6

Recommended battery: Sanyo CR2025 or equivalent 3. Close the lid securely. 4. Push the remote controller button two or three times to check its operation. If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement, perform step 4 above. An improperly disposed battery can harm the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal. The remote controller is water-proof; however, if it does get wet, immediately wipe completely dry. When changing batteries, do not let dust or oil get on the controller. FCC Notice:
SPA0090

modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the device.

BATTERY REPLACEMENT
Replace the battery as follows: 1. Open the lid using a suitable tool. 2. Replace the battery with a new one.

This device complies with FCC rules part 15. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference and (2) this device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device has been tested and complies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules. Changes or

2-7

HOOD RELEASE

GLOVE BOX LOCK

SPA0091 1 lo1. Pull the hood lock release handle k cated below the instrument panel; the hood will then spring up slightly. 2 at the front of the hood with 2. Pull the lever k your fingertips and raise the hood.

SPA0092

When locking or unlocking the glove box, use the master key. The glove box may be opened by pulling the handle.

3. When closing the hood, slowly close the hood and make sure it locks into place. Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

2-8

TRUNK LID LOCK

push the trunk lid down securely. Type B The trunk lid release button is located under the drivers arm rest. To open the trunk lid, push the release button. To close, push the trunk lid down securely.

SPA0094

Key operation
To open the trunk lid, turn the key clockwise. To close, lower and push the trunk lid down securely.

SPA0093

Trunk lid release operation

Type A The trunk lid release lever is located on the outside of the drivers seat. To open the trunk lid, pull up the trunk lid release lever. To close,

Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle.

2-9

FUEL FILLER LID LOCK

SPA0095

SPA0096

SPA0119

OPENER CANCEL LEVER FOR TRUNK LID

When the lever is in the CANCEL position, the trunk lid cannot be opened with the trunk lid release lever or handle. It can be opened only with the key.

Opener lever
Type A To open the fuel filler lid, pull the opener lever. To lock, close the fuel filler lid securely. Type B To open the fuel filler lid, push the opener lever down. To lock, close the fuel filler lid securely.

FUEL FILLER CAP

The fuel filler cap is a screw-on ratcheting type. Tighten the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are heard.

Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain conditions. Always stop engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling.

2-10

 Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the cap one-half turn and wait for any hissing sound to stop, to prevent fuel from spraying out and possible personal injury. Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury.
SPA0120

Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder while refueling. If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.

2-11

SEATS Reclining
Pull the lever up and lean back until the desired angle is obtained. To bring the seat back forward again, pull the lever and move your body forward. The seat back will move forward.

SPA0097

SEAT ADJUSTMENT

Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of control of the vehicle. After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked. The seatback should not be reclined

any more than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in the seat. If the seat is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased.

Forward and backward

Pull the lever up while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

2-12

SPA0099

SPA0098

Seat lifter (Drivers seat)

Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion to the desired position.

POWER SUPPORT SEAT

lap belt and being injured is increased. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They may inadvertently activate switches.

Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving. The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in the seat. If the seat is reclined, the risk of sliding under the

Operating tips
The motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate the switch.

2-13

 Do not operate the power support seatfor a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery.

Forward and backward

Moving the switch forward or rearward will slide the seat forward or rearward to the desired position.

Reclining
Move the recline switch rearward until the desired angle is obtained. To bring the seat back forward again, move the switch forward and move your body forward. The seat back will move forward.

SPA0100

SPA0101

Seat lifter (Drivers seat)

Push the front or rear end of the switch up or down to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion.

Lumbar support (Drivers seat)

Turn the lever forward or backward to adjust the seat lumbar area.

2-14

lower, push the lock knob and push the head restraint down.

SPA0014

HEAD RESTRAINT

Head restraints should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against whiplash injury. Do not remove them. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. Adjust the top of the head restraints level with the top of your ears. To raise the head restraint, just pull it up. To

2-15

SPA0102

REAR SEAT Center armrest and tray

Pull the armrest forward and lay it horizontal. Then release the lever (inset) and pull the tray forward (If so equipped). In this condition you

are able to gain access to the trunk room.

2-16

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (AIR BAG SYSTEM)

This Supplemental Restraint System section contains important information concerning the driver and passenger air bags. The Supplemental Restraint System Air Bag can help reduce impact force to the driver and to the front passenger in certain frontal collisions. The air bags are designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and passenger seat belts and are not a substitute for them. The seat belts should always be correctly worn and the driver and front passenger seated a suitable distance from the steering wheel and instrument panel. (See Seat belts for instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.) The air bags will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position. The seat belts and the air bags are most effective when you are sitting back and upright in the seat. Air bags inflate with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash and may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and use the seat belts.

SPA0043

SPA0044

The air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, roll over, or lower severity frontal collision; so always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

2-17

SPA0045

SPA0046

Never let children ride unrestrained as shown in the previous illustrations. Children may be severely injured or killed when the air bag inflates if they are not properly restrained. Also, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. See Child restraints for infants and small children for details.

2-18

as practical away from the steering wheel or dashboard. Since the air bag inflates quickly in order to help protect the occupant, the force of the air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against the air bag module during inflation. The air bag will deflate quickly after a collision. The air bags will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position.

SPA0103

Air bag system

The driver air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel; the front passenger air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. The air bag system is designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although it may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. It may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper air bag operation. When the air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke.

This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire, but care should be taken not to intentionally inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of breathing trouble should get fresh air promptly. Air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the occupant. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body. The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far

Right after inflation, several air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the air bag or damage to the air bag system. Tampering with the air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material

2-19

over the steering wheel pad and above the dashboard, or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system. Do not attach any objects to the steering wheel pad and to the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the air bag inflates. Work around and on the air bag system should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system. * SRS wiring harnesses are covered with yellow insulation either just before the harness connectors or for the complete harness, for easy

identification.

2-20

CAUTION AND WARNING LABELS

AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT

SPA0104

SPA0105

Caution and warning labels about the air bag system are placed in the vehicle.

The air bag light, displaying AIR BAG in the instrument panel, monitors the circuits of the air bag. The circuits monitored by the air bag light are the diagnosis sensor unit, air bag modules and all related wiring. When the ignition key is in the ON or START position, the air bag light will illuminate for about 7 seconds and then turn off. This means the system is operational.

2-21

If any of the following conditions occurs, the air bag needs servicing and should be taken to your nearest authorized NISSAN dealer: 1. The air bag light goes off within 7 seconds. 2. The air bag light flashes intermittently or remains on (after 7 seconds). 3. The air bag light does not come on at all. Under these conditions, the Supplemental Restraint System Air Bag will not operate properly. It must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest authorized NISSAN dealer.

ways be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle.

the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

Once the air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. The air bag module cannot be repaired. After an air bag inflates, the front instrument panel assembly should be replaced by your NISSAN dealer. The air bag system should be inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end portion of the vehicle or replaced if the air bag has inflated. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual. If you need to dispose of an air bag or scrap the vehicle, contact an authorized NISSAN dealer. Correct air bag disposal procedures are set forth in

Repair and replacement procedure

The air bag system is designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the air bag light will remain illuminated after inflation has occurred. Repair and replacement of the air bag system should be done only by authorized NISSAN dealers. To ensure long-term functioning, the system must be inspected 10 years after the date of manufacture noted on the certification label located on the driver side center pillar. When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the air bag system and related parts should be pointed out to the person conducting the maintenance. The ignition key should al-

2-22

SEAT BELTS PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE

Your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced if you are wearing your seat belt and it is properly adjusted. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes an air bag. Some states, provinces or territories require that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven. twisted. Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle. Do not allow more than one person to use the same belt. All seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware should be inspected by your NISSAN dealer after any collision. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts. If the seat belt warning lamp glows continuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. Be sure to observe the following cautions when using seat belts. Failure to do so could increase the chance and/or severity of injury in an accident. Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the belt under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Position the lap belt as low as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly.

Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be in appropriate child restraints. The belt should be adjusted properly and to a snug fit. Failure to do so will reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Do not wear the belt inside out or

CHILD SAFETY
Children need adults to help protect them. All U.S. states and provinces of Canada require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. (See Child restraints for infants and small children later in this section.) In addition, there are many types of child restraints available for larger children which should be used for maximum protection.

2-23

Infant or small child

NISSAN recommends that infants or small children be placed in child restraint systems that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint system that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturers instructions for installation and use.

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck, use the shoulder belt without the booster seat. Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is moving.

Pregnant women
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations. The lap belt should be worn snug and positioned as low as possible around the hips, not the waist.

Children
Children who are too large for child restraint systems should be seated and restrained by the seat belts which are provided. NISSAN recommends that children sit in the rear seat if possible. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. If the childs seating position has a shoulder belt that fits close to the face or neck, the use of a booster seat (commercially available) may help overcome this. The booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top, middle portion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Injured persons
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations.

2-24

MPA0002

SPA0106

SPA0118

3-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR

The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort when the vehicle is moving. Seat belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in the seat. If the seat is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased.

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until it snaps. The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion will permit the belt to move, and allow you some freedom of movement in the seat. 3. Position the lap belt portion low on the hips as shown. 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack. The front passenger side seat belt and rear

Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should wear a seat belt at all times.

Fastening the belts

1. Adjust the seat.

2-25

3-point seat belts have a cinching mechanism for child seat installation. It is referred to as the automatic locking mode. When the cinching mechanism is activated the seat belt cannot be withdrawn again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. Refer to Child restraints for infants and small children later in this section for more information.

Checking seat belt operation (3-point type with retractor)

Your seat belt retractors are designed to lock belt movement using two separate methods: 1) When the belt is pulled quickly from the retractor. 2) When the vehicle slows down rapidly. You can check their operation as follows: Grasp the shoulder belt and pull quickly forward. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement. If the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any questions about belt operation, see your NISSAN dealer.
PD1321

The automatic locking mode should be used only for child seat installation. During normal seat belt use by a passenger, the locking mode should not be activated. If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension.

Shoulder belt height adjustment (For front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. (See Precautions on seat belt usage.) To adjust, push the release button, and then move it to the desired position, so that the belt passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off of your shoulder.

Unfastening the belts

To unfasten the belt, press the button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract.

2-26

After adjustment, release the button and move it up and down to make sure the shoulder belt anchor is securely fixed in position.

SPA0278

SPA0279

2-POINT TYPE WITHOUT RETRACTOR (center position of rear seat) Fastening the belts
1. Insert the tongue into the buckle marked CENTER until it snaps.

2. To lengthen, hold the tongue at a right angle to the belt and pull on the belt. To shorten, pull the end of the belt attached to the belt clip away from the tongue, and then pull the belt clip to take up the slack.

2-27

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender is available which is compatible with the installed seat belts. The extender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. See your NISSAN dealer for assistance if the extender is required.

SPA0280

SPA0281

3. Position the lap belt low on the hips as illustrated.

Selecting correct set of belts

The center seat belt buckle and tongue are identified by the CENTER label. The center seat belt tongue can be fastened only into the center seat belt buckle.

Unfastening the belts

To unfasten the belt, press the button on the buckle.

Only NISSAN belt extenders, made by the same company which made the original equipment belts, should be used with NISSAN belts. Persons who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident.

2-28

CHILD RESTRAINTS FOR INFANTS AND SMALL CHILDREN SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
To clean the belt webbings, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpets. Then brush the webbing, wipe it with a cloth and allow it to dry in the shade. Do not allow the belts to retract until they are completely dry. Periodically check to see that the belt and the metal components such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire belt assembly should be replaced. Infants and small children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint while riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a child restraint can result in serious injury or death. Children and infants should never be carried on your lap. It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident. The child could be crushed between the adult and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the same seat belt around both your child and yourself. In general, child restraints are designed to be installed with a lap belt or the lap portion of a three-point type seat belt. Nissan recommends that the child restraint be installed in the rear seat. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. An improperly installed child restraint could lead to serious injury or death in an accident. Child restraints specially designed for infants and small children are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind: 1) Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. 2) Place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Always follow all recommended procedures. 3) Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicles seat belt system.

Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. A rear-facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat. See Installation on front passenger seat for details. Follow all of the child restraint manufacturers instructions for installation and use. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure to select one which will fit your child and vehicle. It may

2-29

not be possible to properly install some types of child restraints in your vehicle. Improper use of a child restraint can result in increased injuries for both the infant or child and other occupants in the vehicle. When your child restraint is not in use, store it in the trunk or keep it secured with a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown forward in case of a sudden stop or accident. After attaching a child restraint, test the restraint before you place the child in it. Tilt it from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds it in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. If the child restraint is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases. Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to fit the child restraint, but as

upright as possible. Remember that a child restraint left in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the child restraint. All U.S. states and provinces of Canada require that infants and small children be restrained in approved child restraints at all times while the vehicle is being operated. For a front facing child restraint, if the seat position where it is installed has a 3-point type lap/shoulder belt, check to make sure the shoulder belt does not go in front of the childs face or neck. If it does, put the shoulder belt behind the child restraint.
SPA0276

Installation on rear seat

Center lap belt Secure the child restraint with the lap belt as illustrated. Remove all slack in the lap belt for a very tight fit by pulling forcefully on the lap belt adjustment. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Tilt the restraint from side to side. If it is not secure, try to tighten the belt again, or put the restraint in another seat.

2-30

in a sudden stop or collision. When you install a child restraint in a rear outboard seat, follow these steps: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. It can be placed in a forward facing or rear facing direction, depending on the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manufacturers instructions. 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage.
PD1174 PD1331

Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for belt routing. 3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended and a click is heard. At this time, the belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). (It will revert back to emergency locking when the belt is fully retracted.) 4. Allow the belt to retract. A clicking sound will be heard as the belt retracts. This indicates that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. Pull down on the belt to remove any slack in the belt.

Installation on rear outboard seating positions

The 3-point belt on your vehicle is equipped with a locking mode retractor which must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to do so will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. It could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child

2-31

seat belt is allowed to wind back into the retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt may be used as normal and will only lock during a sudden stop or impact.

PD1332

APD0107

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the

Top strap child restraint

If your child restraint has a top strap, install the anchor bracket to the provided anchor point. Secure the child restraint with the center lap belt or the lap portion of an outboard 3-point belt and latch the top strap hook onto the appropriate anchor bracket. To install the anchor bracket, a metric bolt of the dimensions listed below must be used. Bolt diameter: 8.0 mm Bolt length: more than 1.18 in (30 mm) Thread pitch: 1.25 mm The top strap should be secured to the attach-

2-32

ing bolt which provides the straightest installation of the top strap. Child restraint anchor points are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses.

are pre-cut circles at each anchor point location that should break away from the shelf support material when pressure is applied to them. Remove the bolt after you feel the pre-cut circle separate from the shelf support material. 2. Cut a small slit through the parcel shelf fabric at the anchor point location. Reach through the fabric with a tool such as a pair of needle-nose pliers and remove the precut circle in the parcel shelf support material.
SPA0117

3. Install the bolt through the top strap hook and into the anchor point nut. 4. Be sure to follow all of the instructions that accompany the top strap attaching hardware. Your NISSAN dealer can assist you with the installation of your child restraint.

Anchor point locations

Anchor points are located under the rear parcel shelf finisher. To use attaching hardware for child restraints with top straps, follow these instructions carefully: 1. Open the trunk and find the anchor point nuts on the under side of the rear parcel shelf. Thread a bolt (8.0 mm diameter, 1.25 pitch) up through the nut behind the seating position where the child restraint will be installed and use it to break through the rear parcel shelf support material. There

2-33

possible. A child restraint with a top strap should not be used in the front passenger seat.

not be used in the front seat. 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage.

The 3-point belt in your vehicle is equipped with a locking mode retractor which must be used when installing a child restraint.
APD0503

Installation on front passenger seat

Failure to use the retractors locking mode may result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision. When you install a child restraint in the front seat, follow these steps: 1. Position the child restraint on the front passenger seat. It should be placed in a forward-facing direction only. Move the seat as far back from the instrument panel as possible. Always follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must

Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat. Air bags inflate with great force. A rear-facing child restraint could be struck by the air bag in a crash and could seriously injure or kill your child. If you install a forward-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat, place the passenger seat as far back as

2-34

TILTING STEERING WHEEL

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the lap belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.
PD1336

Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for belt routing. 3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended and a click is heard. At this time, the belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). (It will revert back to emergency locking when the belt is fully retracted.) 4. Allow the belt to retract. A clicking sound will be heard as the belt retracts. This indicates that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. Pull down on the belt to remove any slack in the belt.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is allowed to wind back into the retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt may be used as normal and will only lock during a sudden stop or impact.

SPA0111

Tilt operation
Push the lock lever and while holding it, adjust the steering wheel up or down to the desired position. Push the lock lever back into place to lock the steering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

2-35

OUTSIDE MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL

FOLDABLE OUTSIDE MIRRORS

INSIDE MIRROR

SPA0112

MPA0008

MPA0009

The outside mirror will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. Push the right or left end of the switch to select the right or left side mirror, then adjust using the control lever. Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear.

Push the outside mirror backward to fold it.

The night position will reduce glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

2-36

3 Heater, air conditioner and audio system

Ventilator ................................................................... 3-2 Heater and air conditioner......................................... 3-3 Automatic air conditioner .......................................... 3-9 Radio ....................................................................... 3-11 Antenna ................................................................... 3-22 CB radio or car phone ............................................ 3-23

VENTILATOR

SAA0040

SAA0041

Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction of ventilators.

3-2

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

ON position (Indicator light ON) Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the air recirculation button to the ON position when driving on a dusty road or to avoid traffic fumes and for maximum cooling when using the air conditioner.

SAA0042A

Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.

CONTROLS Fan control dial

This dial turns the fan on and off, and controls fan speed.

Temperature control lever

This lever allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air.

Air recirculation button

OFF position Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment. Use this position for normal heater, or air conditioner operation.

Air flow control buttons

These buttons allow you to select the air flow outlets.

3-3

Air conditioning button

This button is provided only for vehicles with air conditioner. Start the engine, move the fan control dial to the desired (1 to 4) position and push the air conditioning button to turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light will come on when the air conditioner is on. To stop the air conditioner, push the switch again to return it to the original position. The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

HEATER OPERATION Heating

This mode is used to direct hot air from the floor outlets. Some air will also come from the defrost vents. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position for normal heating. 2. Push the button in.

4. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position.

Defrosting or defogging
This mode is used to defrost/defog the windows. 1. Push the button in. 2. Turn on the fan control dial. 3. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position between the middle and the HOT position. To quickly remove ice or fog from the windows, turn on the fan control dial to 4 and the temperature control lever to the full HOT position. When the switch is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on to defog the windshield, and the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position between the middle and the HOT position. For quick heating, move the air recirculation button to the ON position. Be sure to return the air recirculation button to the OFF position for normal heating.

Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls should not be done while driving, in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation.

Ventilation
This mode directs outside air from the side and center vents. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in.

3. Turn on the fan control dial.

3-4

Bi-level heating
This mode directs outside air from the side and center vents and hot air from the floor outlets. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in. 3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Normally move the temperature control lever to the midpoint between HOT and COLD.

Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and air inlet in front of the windshield. This will improve heater operation. When the switch is pushed, the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION

Start the engine, move the fan control dial to the desired (1 to 4) position and push in the air conditioning button to activate the air conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions will be added to the heater operation.

Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs the windshield. 1. Push the button in. 2. Turn on the fan control dial. 3. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position between the middle and the HOT position.

The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in.

3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Push on the air conditioning button. The indicator light will come on. 5. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position. For quick cooling when the outside temperature is high, move the air recirculation

3-5

button to the ON position. Be sure to return the air recirculation button to the OFF position for normal cooling.

conditioner will automatically be turned on to defog the windshield, and the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

AIR FLOW CHART

The chart below shows the switch and lever positions for MAXIMUM and QUICK heating, cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation switch should be in the OFF position for normal cooling, heating and defrosting.

Dehumidified heating
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in.

Operating tips
Keep the windows and sun roof closed while the air conditioner is in operation. After parking in the sun, drive for two or three minutes with the windows open to vent hot air from the passenger compartment. Then, close the windows. This will allow the air conditioner to cool the interior more quickly. The air conditioning system should be operated for about ten minutes at least once a month. This helps prevent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication. If the coolant temperature gauge exceeds the HOT position, turn the air conditioning off. See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section for additional information.

3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Push on the air conditioning button. The indicator light will come on. 5. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position.

Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows and dehumidify. 1. Push the button in. 2. Turn on the fan control dial. 3. Push on the air conditioning button. The indicator light will come on. 4. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position. When the button is pushed, the air

3-6

SAA0058B

SAA0059B

3-7

SAA0060B

SAA0061B

3-8

AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER Heating (ECON mode)

The air conditioner does not activate. When you need to heat only, use this mode. 1. Push the ECON (ECONOMY) button on. (ECON will be displayed.) 2. Push the ture. temperature set button to set the desired tempera-

SAA0043B

The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically. Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature. Otherwise the system may not work properly. Not recommended if windows fog up.

Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner. The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

2. Push the ture.

temperature set button to set the desired tempera-

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (Auto mode)

This mode may be normally used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically. 1. Push the AUTO button on. (AUTO will be displayed.)

Adjust the temperature set button to about 75F (24C) for normal operation. The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.

Dehumidified defogging
1. Push the DEF button on. (The indicator light on the button will come on.) 2. Push the ture. temperature set button to set the desired tempera-

To quickly remove ice or fog from the outside of the windows, push the manual fan control button and set to the

3-9

maximum position

As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, push the AUTO button to return to the auto mode. When the DEF button is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 35F (2C) to defog the windshield, and the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

The air recirculation button will not be activated when the air conditioner is in DEF mode.

Operating tips
When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature warms up, the air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally.

Manual air flow control button MODE

Pushing the manual air flow control button selects the air outlet to: : : : Air flows from center and side ventilators. Air flows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets. Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

Manual fan speed control

Push the fan control button ally control the fan speed. to manu-

To turn system off

Push the OFF button.

Push the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.

Air recirculation button

Push the air recirculation button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator light on the switch will come on. Push it again to draw outside air into the passenger compartment. The indicator will go out.

3-10

RADIO Servicing air conditioner

The air conditioning system in your NISSAN vehicle is charged with a new refrigerant designed with the environment in mind. This new refrigerant will not harm the earths ozone layer. However, special charging equipment and lubricant are required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioning system. See AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT RECOMMENDATIONS in the TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION section of this manual. Your NISSAN dealer will be able to service your environmentally friendly air conditioning system. To turn the radio on, turn the ignition key to ACC or ON. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, turn the key to the ACC position. Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other external influences. Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences.

HA1011

The sensor on the instrument panel helps maintain a constant temperature; do not put anything on or around this sensor.

3-11

AM-FM RADIO WITH CASSETTE PLAYER Radio operation

Push the ON/VOL knob to listen to the radio and tune in the desired station. Pushing the button while the cassette tape is playing will turn off the cassette player and turn on the radio. Turn the ON/VOL knob to adjust the volume. Inserting a cassette tape into the cassette player while the radio is on will turn off the radio and turn on the cassette player. The electronic tuning radio has a DIVERSITY reception system. The FM signal can reflect off of buildings or mountains. This causes offensive noise. The DIVERSITY system employs two antennas; one is a rod type antenna and the other is a printed antenna on the rear window. This system automatically switches to the antenna which receives less noise. Thus the radio provides high quality reception.

Selecting the desired band

Push the band select button from AM to FM reception.
SAA0044

to change

The stereo indicator will glow during FM stereo

3-12

reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception.

SEEK tuning Push the SEEK/SCAN tuning button for less than 1.5 seconds. SEEK tuning begins from low to high frequencies and stops at the next broadcasting station.

Tuning

The radio should not be tuned while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation. Manual tuning Push down either manual tuning button. SCAN tuning Push the SEEK/SCAN tuning button for more than 1.5 seconds. SCAN tuning begins from low to high frequencies and stops at each broadcasting station for five seconds. Pushing the button again during this five second period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station.

AHA0040

Station memory operations

Six stations can be set for each band. 1. Tune to the desired station. 2. Push the desired select button for more

3-13

than 2 seconds. (For example, in the diagram ch2 is to be memorized. The radio mutes when the select button is pushed.) 3. The indicator ch2 will then come on and the sound will resume. Memorizing is now complete. 4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse blows, the radio memory will be cancelled. In that case, reset the desired stations.
HA1078

Cassette tape operation

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, then carefully insert the cassette tape into the tape door. The cassette tape will automatically pull into the player. Do not force the cassette tape into the tape door. Pressing strongly could cause player damage. The cassette tape will automatically change directions to play the other side when the first side is completed. To maintain good quality sound, NISSAN recommends that you use cassette tapes of 60 minutes or shorter in length. Cassette tapes should be removed from the player when not in use. Store cassettes in their protective cases and away from direct sunlight, heat, moisture and magnetic sources. Direct sunlight can cause the cassette to become deformed. The use of deformed cassettes may cause the cassette to jam in the player. Do not use cassettes that have labels

Adjusting tone quality

Push then turn the BASS and TREB (TREBLE) control knob to obtain the most pleasant sound.

Adjusting speaker sound balance

Push then pull the BAL (BALANCE) control knob to adjust the volume between the right and left speakers.

FADER volume control

Push then pull the FADER control knob to adjust the volume between the front and rear speakers.

3-14

which are peeling and loose. If used, the label could jam in the player. If a cassette has loose tape, insert a pencil through one of the cassette hubs and rewind the tape firmly around the hubs. Loose tape may cause tape jamming and wavering sound quality. Over a period of time, the playback head, capstan and pinch roller may collect a tape coating residue as the tape passes over the head. This residue accumulation can cause weak or wavering sound, and should be removed periodically with a head cleaning tape. If the residue is not removed periodically, the player may need to be disassembled for cleaning.

APS fast forwarding or APS rewinding the tape

Push either the APS FF or APS REW button while the cassette tape is playing. The tape will run quickly, and stop and play at the next program. The indicator light flashes on and off while searching the program. This system searches at the blank intervals between selections. If there is a blank interval within one program or there is no interval between programs, the system may not search correctly.

poration. DOLBY and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

Metal or chrome tape usage

The cassette player will be automatically set to high performance play when playing a metal or chrome cassette tape.

Ejecting the cassette tape

Push the eject button. The cassette tape will automatically come out.

Changing the direction of tape play

Push the PROG (program) select button.

Fast forwarding or rewinding the tape

Push either the FF (forward) or REW (rewind) button for the desired direction. The indicator light on the switch will come on.

Playing and stopping the cassette tape

Pushing the PLAY/STOP button while the cassette tape is playing stops the tape. Pushing the button again plays the tape.

Dolby NR (noise reduction)

Push the DOLBY NR button for Dolby NR encoded tapes to reduce high frequency tape noise. The indicator will come on. Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Cor-

3-15

AM-FM RADIO WITH CASSETTE PLAYER AND COMPACT DISC PLAYER (Bose audio system)
Head unit The radio has an FM Diversity reception system, which employs two antennas. One is a rod type antenna; the other is an antenna printed on the window. This system automatically switches to the antenna which is receiving less noise. The tape deck employs a permalloy head which allows for improved reproduction of high frequency ranges. Noise is also greatly reduced by the combined use of the Dolby NR (noise reduction) system. The auto loudness circuit enhances the low frequency range automatically in both radio reception and tape playback.

Power button
Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then push the POWER button while the system is off to call up the mode (radio, tape or CD) which was playing immediately before the system was turned off. When no CD or tape is loaded, the radio will come on. While the system is on, pushing the POWER button turns the system off.

SAA0045A

3-16

To turn the radio off, press the POWER button.

RADIO OPERATION FM/AM band select button

Pushing the FM/AM band select button will change the band. When FM/AM band select button is pushed while the ignition switch is at ACC or ON, the radio will come on at the station last played. The last station played will also come on when the power button is turned to ON.
HA1081

VOL (volume) control knob

Turn the VOLUME control knob to adjust the volume.

Adjusting tone quality

Push then turn the BASS and TREB (TREBLE) control knobs to obtain the most pleasant sound.

If a compact disc or tape is inserted when the power button is turned to ON, the compact disc or tape will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on. The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception.

Adjusting speaker sound balance

Push then pull the BAL (BALANCE) control knob to adjust the volume between the right and left speakers.

FADER volume control

Push then pull the FADER control knob to adjust the volume between the front and rear speakers.

3-17

TUNE button

SEEK tuning or Push the SEEK/SCAN tuning button for less than 1.5 seconds. SEEK tuning begins from low to high frequencies and stops at the next broadcasting station.

The radio should not be tuned while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation. Use these buttons for manual tuning. To move quickly through the channels, hold either of the tuning buttons down for more than 0.5 seconds.

SEEK/SCAN buttons
SCAN tuning Push the SEEK/SCAN tuning button or for more than 1.5 seconds. SCAN tuning begins from low to high frequencies and stops at each broadcasting station for five seconds. Pushing the button again during this five second period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station.

SAA0057

Station memory operations

Six stations can be set for each band. 1. Tune to the desired station. 2. Push the desired select button for more

3-18

than 1.5 seconds. (For example, in the diagram ch2 is to be memorized. The radio ceases emitting sounds when the select button is pushed.) 3. The indicator ch2 will then come on and the sound will resume. Memorizing is now complete. 4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse blows, the radio memory will be cancelled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

system is turned back on.

TAPE button
When this button is pushed with the system turned off and a tape loaded, the system will come on and the tape will play. When this button is pushed with either the radio or compact disc turned on and the tape loaded, the compact disc or the radio will automatically be turned off and the tape will play. While the tape is playing, pushing the TAPE button stops the tape. Pushing the button again allows the tape to play.

grams. The tape will advance the number of times the button is pushed (up to 9 programs). When the APS REW button is pushed once, the program being played starts over from the beginning. Push several times to fast rewind programs. The tape will go back the number of times the button is pushed. Either the indicator or will come on when the light APS FF or APS REW function is started. This system searches at the blank intervals between selections. If there is a blank interval within one program or there is no interval between programs, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location.

Cassette tape operation

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then lightly insert the cassette tape into the tape door. The cassette tape will be automatically pulled into the player. The radio or CD will turn off (if it is on) and the cassette tape will begin to play. Do not force the cassette tape into the tape door. Pressing strongly could cause player damage. If the system is turned off by pushing the button with the cassette tape still in the player, the tape will resume playing when the

FF (fast forward), REW (rewind) button

Push the FF (fast forward) button to fast forward the tape. To rewind the tape, push the REW (rewind) button. Either the indicator light or will come on when the FF or REW function is started.

PROG (program) button

Push the PROG (program) button to change the tape side while the tape is being played. The cassette tape will automatically change directions to play the other side when the first side is completed.

APS FF, APS REW button

When the APS FF button is pushed while the tape is being played, the next program will start to play from the beginning. Push the APS FF button several times to skip through pro-

3-19

Dolby NR (noise reduction) button

Push the DOLBY NR button for Dolby NR encoded tapes to reduce high frequency tape noise. The indicator will come on. Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. DOLBY and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

Cassette tapes should be removed from the player when not in use. Store cassettes in their protective cases and away from direct sunlight, heat, moisture or magnetic sources. Direct sunlight can cause the cassette to become deformed. The use of deformed cassettes may cause the cassette to jam in the player. Do not use cassettes that have peeling or loose labels. If used, the label could jam in the player. If a cassette has loose tape, insert a pencil through one of the cassette hubs and rewind the tape firmly. Loose tape may cause jamming and wavering sound quality. Over a period of time, the playback head, capstan and pinch roller may gather a tape coating residue as the tape passes over the head. This residue accumulation can cause a weak or wavering sound and should be removed periodically with a head cleaning tape. If the residue is not removed periodically, the player may need to be disassembled for cleaning.

Metal or chrome tape usage

The cassette player will be automatically set to high performance play when playing a metal or chrome cassette tape.

TAPE EJECT button

When this button is pushed with the tape loaded, the tape will be ejected. When the tape is ejected while it is being played, the system will be turned off.

Precautions on cassette player operation

To maintain good quality sound, NISSAN recommends that you use cassette tapes of 60 minutes or shorter in length.

3-20

COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER OPERATION

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up. The compact disc will be guided automatically into the slot and start playing. After loading the disc, the number of tracks on the disc and the play time will appear on the display. If the radio or tape is already operating, it will automatically turn off and the compact disc will play. Forcing in the compact disc will damage the player. If the system has been turned off while the compact disc was playing, pushing the POWER button will start the compact disc.

When this button is pushed while the compact disc is playing, the compact disc will stop playing. When this button is pushed with the compact disc stopped, the compact disc will start to play.

PROG (program) button

When this button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the play pattern will change as follows: ALL: All the programs will be played repeatedly in sequence. 1: Only one program (the one being played when the PROG button is pushed) will be repeated. RANDOM: Programs will be played at random, not following the sequence on the compact disc. The same program may be repeated twice. (no mark): All the programs will be played in sequence and stop when the last program is finished. When the compact disc is ejected, the play pattern will automatically change to ALL.

FF (fast forward), REW (rewind) button

When the FF (fast forward) or REW (rewind) button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the compact disc will return to normal play speed.

APS FF, APS REW button

When the APS FF button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the program next to the present one will start to play from its beginning. Push several times to skip through programs. The compact disc will advance the number of times the button is pushed. (When the last program on the compact disc is skipped through, the first program will be played.) When the APS REW button is pushed, the program being played returns to its beginning. Push several times to skip back through programs. The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pushed.

CD button
When this button is pushed with the system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play. When this button is pushed with the compact disc loaded but the tape or the radio playing, the tape or radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play.

3-21

ANTENNA CD EJECT button

When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be ejected. When this button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will come out and the system will turn off. If the compact disc comes out and is not removed, it will be pulled back into the slot to protect it. the temperature before use. Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.

Power antenna
The antenna will automatically extend when the radio is turned on, and retract when switched off. If the radio is left on, the antenna will retract and extend with the ignition key OFF-ON operation.

CD (DISC) indicator light

This light comes on when the compact disc is loaded.

During cold weather or rainy days, the player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely. The player may skip while driving on rough roads. The CD player sometimes cannot function when the compartment temperature is extremely high. Decrease

Before turning the radio on, make sure that there is no one near the antenna outlet and there is enough space for it to extend. To prevent damage, be sure that antenna is fully retracted before the vehicle enters an automated car wash. Dirt and other foreign matter on the power antenna rod may interrupt its operation. Clean the rod periodically with a damp cloth. This type of cleaning is especially important during the winter seasons in areas where road salt and other chemicals may be spread on road surfaces and splashed onto the antenna rod.

3-22

CB RADIO OR CAR PHONE

When installing a CB, ham radio or a car phone in your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following cautions, otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the MFI (Multiport Fuel Injection) system and other electronic parts.

Keep the antenna as far as possible away from the Engine Control Module. Also keep the antenna wire more than 8 inches (20 cm) away from the MFI harness. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness. Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer. Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body. For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

3-23

MEMO

3-24

4 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving...................... 4-2 Avoiding collision and rollover................................... 4-3 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving............................ 4-4 Ignition switch............................................................ 4-4 Before starting the engine......................................... 4-6 Driving with automatic transmission.......................... 4-6 Driving with manual transmission ............................. 4-9 Starting the engine .................................................. 4-10 Parking brake .......................................................... 4-11 Cruise control .......................................................... 4-12 Break-in schedule ................................................... 4-13 Economy hints......................................................... 4-14 Parking/Parking on hills........................................... 4-15 Precautions when driving ........................................ 4-16 Anti-lock brake system ............................................ 4-17 Cold weather driving cautions................................. 4-18

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING

longer than is absolutely necessary. Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time. Keep the trunk lid, or back door closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive in this manner for some reason, take the following steps. 1. Open all the windows. 2. Set the air recirculate switch OFF and the fan control at high to circulate the air. If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the trunk lid or the body, follow the manufacturers recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle. If a special body or other equipment is added for recreational or other usage, follow the manufacturers recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle. (Some recreational vehicle appliances such as stoves, refrigerator, heaters, etc. may also generate carbon monoxide.) The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever: a. The vehicle is raised for service. b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment. c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system. d. You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets alone in your vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.

EXHAUST GAS (Carbon Monoxide)

Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death. If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately. Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage for any

THREE WAY CATALYST

The three way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the converter are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

4-2

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER

hicle inspected promptly by an authorized NISSAN dealer. The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. While the engine is running, keep people or flammable materials away from the exhaust pipe. Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags, as they may burn easily. Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three way catalyst. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine. Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident. Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with any vehicle, a loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects, or cause the vehicle to rollover, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the Seat Belts section of this manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.

To help prevent damage

Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously reduce the three way catalysts ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants. Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the converter, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the ve-

4-3

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING

IGNITION SWITCH

Alcohol in the blood stream reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in the accident alcohol can increase the severity of injury. Nissan is committed to safe driving. But, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol related accidents. Although the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol. Remember, drinking and driving dont mix! And thats true for drugs too (over the counter, prescription, and illegal drugs). Dont drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

SSD0021

SSD0055

The switch includes an anti-theft steering lock device. LOCK Normal parking position (0) The ignition key can only be removed when the switch is in this position. On manual transmission models, to turn the ignition key to LOCK from ACC or ON, turn the key to OFF and press in the key release button, then turn the key to LOCK. In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/6 of a turn counterclockwise from the straight up position.

On automatic transmission models, the ignition lock is designed so that the key cannot be turned to LOCK and removed until the shift lever is moved to the P position. When removing the key from the ignition, make sure the shift lever is in the P position. If the shift lever is not returned to P (Park), the key cannot be moved toward LOCK. When the key cannot be turned toward the LOCK position, proceed as follows to remove the key: 1) Move the shift lever into the P position.

4-4

2) Turn the ignition key slightly in the ON direction. 3) Turn the key toward the LOCK position. 4) Remove the key. If the key is removed from the ignition switch, the shift lever cannot be moved from P (Park). The shift lever can be moved if the ignition switch is in the ACC position. The shift lever can also be moved if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed. There is an OFF position in between LOCK and ACC, although it does not show on the lock cylinder. When the ignition is in OFF the steering wheel is not locked. In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/6 of a turn counterclockwise from the straight up position. To lock the steering wheel, remove the key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steering wheel slightly right and left. Never remove the key while driving. If the key is removed, the steering wheel will lock. This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury. OFF (1) The engine can be turned off without locking the steering wheel. ACC (Accessories) (2) This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running. ON Normal operating position (3) This position turns on the ignition system and the electrical accessories.

START (4) This position activates the starter motor, starting the engine.

4-5

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear. Maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically, e.g., each time you check engine oil. Check that all windows and lights are clean. Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation. Lock all doors. Position seat and adjust head restraints. Adjust inside and outside mirrors. Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise. Check the operation of warning lights when key is turned to the ON (3) position.

DRIVING WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

The automatic transmission in your vehicle (if so equipped) is electronically controlled by a microcomputer to produce maximum power and smooth operation. Shown on the following pages are the recommended operating procedures for this transmission. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment. 2. Release the parking brake and foot brake, then gradually start the vehicle in motion. When the battery charge is low, the shift lever can be moved if the ignition switch is in the ACC position.

Starting the vehicle

After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal and push the shift lever button before shifting the selector lever to the R, N, D, 2 or 1 position. Be sure the vehicle is fully stopped before attempting to shift the selector lever. This automatic transmission is designed so that the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P to any drive position while the ignition switch is ON. The shift lever cannot be moved out of P and into any of the other gear positions if the key is turned to the LOCK position or if the key is removed from the switch. 1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and push the shift lever button to shift into a driving gear.

Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up. Avoid revving up the engine while the vehicle is stopped. This could cause unexpected vehicle movement.

Driving precautions
To help prevent transmission damage: Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P or N to R, D, 2 or 1. Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Never shift to P or R while vehicle is moving. When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by de-

4-6

pressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brakes should be used for this purpose.

Shifting from P (Park)

If the ignition switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed, but the shift lever still cannot be moved out of P (Park), follow these instructions: 1. Shut the engine off and remove the key. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Reinsert the ignition key and turn it clockwise to the ACC position. 4. Depress the brake pedal, move the gearshift lever to N (Neutral) and start the engine. 5. Check stop light operation.

SD1003M

Push the button to shift into P, R or from D to 2. All other positions can be selected without pushing the button. P (Park): Use this selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Always be sure the vehicle is at a complete stop. For maximum safety, depress the brake pedal, then push in the select lever button and move the lever to the P position. Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first, then shift the lever into the P position.

If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P position while the engine is running and the brake pedal depressed, the stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others. These instructions for starting the vehicle in N (Neutral) should only be used until service can be obtained. Never drive the vehicle if the

4-7

stoplights are not operating properly. R (Reverse): Use this position to back up. Always be sure the vehicle is completely stopped. With the brake pedal depressed, push in the select lever button and move the lever to the R position N (Neutral): Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to N and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving. D (Drive): Use this position for all normal forward driving. 2 (Second gear): Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades. Do not exceed 73 MPH (117 km/h) in the 2 position. 1 (Low gear): Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades.

Do not exceed 40 MPH (65 km/h) in the 1 position.

Accelerator downshift In D position

For rapid passing or hill climbing, fully depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into second gear or first gear, depending on the vehicle speed.

SD1007

Overdrive switch
ON: For normal driving, push the overdrive switch ON with the selector switch in the D position. The transmission is upshifted into OVERDRIVE as the vehicle speed increases.

The overdrive will not engage until the engine has warmed up. OFF: For driving up and down long slopes where engine braking would be advantageous, push the switch OFF . When cruising at a low speed or climbing a gentle slope, you may

4-8

DRIVING WITH MANUAL TRANSMISSION

feel uncomfortable shift shocks as the transmission shifts between 3rd and overdrive repeatedly. In this case, set the overdrive switch in the OFF position. The indicator light will come on at this time. When driving conditions change, reset the overdrive switch in the ON position. Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time with the overdrive switch set in the OFF position. This reduces the fuel economy. If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the Fail-safe system may be activated. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, turn the ignition key OFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then turn the key back to the ON position. The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have your NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair if necessary.
SSD0002

Fail-safe
When the Fail-safe operation occurs, the next time the key is turned to the ON position, the O/D OFF light will blink for approximately 8 seconds after coming on for 2 seconds. While the vehicle can be driven under these circumstances please note that the gears in the automatic transmission will be locked in third gear.

To change gears, fully depress the clutch pedal, then move the gearshift lever. After shifting, release the clutch slowly. On the 5-speed transmission model, you cannot shift directly from 5th gear into Reverse. First shift into Neutral, then into Reverse. If it is difficult to move the shift lever into Reverse or 1st, shift into Neutral, then release the clutch pedal and shift into Reverse or 1st again.

4-9

STARTING THE ENGINE Driving precautions

Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This may cause clutch damage. Stop your vehicle completely before shifting into reverse. Gear change 1st to 2nd 2nd to 3rd 3rd to 4th 4th to 5th MPH (km/h) 15 (24) 25 (40) 40 (64) 45 (72) 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Automatic transmission: Move the selector lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). (P preferred.) The shift lever cannot be moved out of P and into any of the other gear positions if the key is removed from the switch. The starter is designed not to operate if the selector lever is in one of the driving positions. Manual transmission: Move the gearshift lever to N (Neutral), and depress the clutch pedal to the floor while cranking the engine. The starter is designed not to operate unless the clutch pedal is depressed. 3. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to START. Release the key when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure. If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold or hot weather, depress the accelerator pedal and hold it to help start the engine.

Suggested maximum speed in each gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate. Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the highest gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits, and drive according to the road conditions, which will ensure safe operation. Do not overrev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control. Gear 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th MPH(km/h) 30 (50) 55 (90) 80 (130)

Suggested shift-up speeds

Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance. Actual shift-up speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather and individual driving habits. For normal acceleration in low altitude areas [less than 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:
Gear change 1st to 2nd 2nd to 3rd 3rd to 4th 4th to 5th ACCEL shift CRUISE shift point point MPH (km/h) MPH (km/h) 13 (24) 23 (40) 33 (58) 39 (64) 13 (24) 16 (29) 27 (48) 36 (63)

For quick acceleration when the engine is cold or in high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:

4-10

PARKING BRAKE
In the summer, when restarting the engine within 30 minutes after it has been stopped, keep the accelerator pedal fully depressed while starting.

Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged. 4. Warm-up Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather. To apply: pull the lever up. To release: pull the lever up slightly, push the button and lower completely. Before driving, be sure the parking brake warning light goes out.
SSD0018

4-11

CRUISE CONTROL
c) Turn the main switch off. Both the ON indicator and CRUISE lights will go out. If you depress the brake pedal while pushing the ACCEL set switch and reset at the cruising speed, turn the main switch off once and then turn it on again. The cruise control will automatically be cancelled if the vehicle slows down below approximately 8 MPH (13 km/h). Depress the clutch pedal (manual transmission), or move the selector lever to N (automatic transmission). The CRUISE light will go out. To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: a) Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET/COAST switch. b) Push and hold the ACCEL set switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch. c) Push, then quickly release the ACCEL set switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

SSD0019

The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 30 to 89 MPH (48 to 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. To turn on the cruise control, push the main switch on. The indicator light on the switch will come on. To set at cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the SET/COAST switch and release it. (The CRUISE light will come on.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.

To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed. The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the cruise control. To cancel the preset speed, follow either of these three methods: a) Push the cancel switch; The CRUISE light will go out. b) Tap the brake pedal; The CRUISE light will go out.

4-12

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: a) Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET/COAST switch and release it. b) Push and hold the SET/COAST switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed. c) Push, then quickly release the SET/COAST switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). To resume the preset speed, push and release the RESUME set switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 30 MPH (48 km/h). in very windy areas. During the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km), follow these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life. Do not drive over 55 MPH (90 km/h) and do not run the engine over 4,000 rpm. Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow. Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear. Avoid quick starts. Avoid hard braking as much as possible. Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km).

On manual transmission models, do not shift into neutral without depressing the clutch pedal when the cruise control is on. This could cause engine damage. If this happens, depress the clutch pedal and turn the main switch off immediately.

Precautions
Avoid using the cruise control when driving under the following conditions: when it is not possible to keep the vehicle at set speed. in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed. on winding roads, or hilly roads. on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)

4-13

ECONOMY HINTS
Keep your engine tuned up. Follow the recommended periodic maintenance schedule. Keep the tires inflated at the correct pressure. Low pressure will increase tire wear and waste fuel. Keep the front wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment will cause not only tire wear but also lower fuel economy. Air conditioner operation lowers fuel economy. Use the air conditioner only when necessary.
SD1001M

Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position. Drive at moderate speeds on the highway. Driving at high speed will lower fuel economy. Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a safe distance behind other vehicles. Use a proper gear range which suits road conditions. On level roads, shift into high gear as soon as possible. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

When cruising at highway speeds, it is more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to reduce drag.

4-14

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into the street when parked on a sloping drive way, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
1 HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: k

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.
2 HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: k

Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.
MSD0002

Automatic transmission models: Move the gearshift lever to the P (PARK) position.

HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO 3 CURB: k Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves. 4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove the key.

Do not park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags, as they may burn easily. 1. Firmly apply the parking brake. 2. Manual transmission models: Place the gearshift lever in the REVERSE position. When parking on an uphill grade, place the gearshift lever in the 1st position.

Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P (park) position. Make sure the shift lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the button at the end of the lever.

Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended. Never leave children unattended in

4-15

PRECAUTIONS WHEN DRIVING

the vehicle. Driving with vacuum assisted brake: The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and the stopping distance will be longer. Driving with the power assisted steering: The power assisted steering is designed to use a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering. If the engine stops or drive belt breaks, you will still have control of the vehicle. However, much greater steering effort is needed, especially in sharp turns or at low speeds. Wet brakes: When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking. To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat-up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly. Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the brake linings and pads faster and reduce gas mileage. To help save the brakes and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control. While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking actions or sudden acceleration could cause the wheels to skid.

4-16

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

The anti-lock brake system controls the brakes at each wheel so the wheels will not lock when braking abruptly or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing wheel lockup, the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving.

Self-test feature
The anti-lock brake system consists of electronic sensors, electric pumps, and hydraulic solenoids controlled by a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of any malfunction. If the computer senses any malfunction, it switches the antilock brake system OFF and turns on the ABS brake warning light in the dashboard. The brake system will then behave normally, but without anti-lock assistance. If the light comes on during the self check, or while you are driving, you should take your vehicle to your NISSAN dealer for repair at your earliest convenience.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. It is not necessary to pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances.

Normal operation
The anti-lock brake system will not operate at speeds below 3 to 6 MPH (5 to 10 km/h) to completely stop the vehicle. (The speeds will vary according to road conditions.) When the anti-lock system senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator (under the hood) rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure (like pumping the brakes very quickly). While the actuator is working, you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from the actuator under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the anti-lock system is working properly.

The anti-lock brake system is a sophisticated device, but is cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces, but remember that the stopping distance on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces, even with the anti-lock system. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the responsibility for safety of self and others rests in the hands of the driver. Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness. When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all 4 wheels. When installing a spare tire, make sure it is the proper size and type as specified on the tire placard. For tire placard location information, refer to

4-17

Tire placard in the Owners Manual index.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING CAUTIONS Freeing a frozen door lock

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer or glycerin to it through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole.

Tire equipment
1. The SUMMER tires are of a tread design to provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, Nissan recommends the use on all four wheels of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON tires. Please consult your Nissan dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability information. 2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some provinces and states prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires. 3. Snow chains may be used if desired. Make sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturers suggestions. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the

Anti-freeze
In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32F (0C), check anti-freeze (ethylene glycol base) to assure proper winter protection. For details, see Engine Cooling System in the Do-it-yourself operations section.

Battery
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. For details, see Battery in the Do-it-yourself operations section.

Draining of coolant water

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-freeze, drain the cooling system by opening the drain valves located under the radiator and on the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. See Changing Engine Coolant in the Do-it-yourself operations section.

4-18

fenders or undercarriage. In addition, drive at a reduced speed, otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected.

tion and accelerate gently. If accelerated too fast, the drive wheels will spin and will lose even more traction. Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement. Allow greater following distances on slippery roads. Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while actually on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers.

Engine block heater

Special winter equipment

It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter: 1. A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades. 2. A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support. 3. A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts. 4. Extra window washer fluid to refill the reservoir tank.

Do not use your heater with an ungrounded electrical system or twopronged (cheater) adapters. You can be injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection.

Driving on snow or ice

Wet ice (32F, 0C and freezing rain), very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have a lot less traction or grip under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded. Whatever the condition, drive with cau-

4-19

MEMO

4-20

5 In case of emergency

Flat tire ...................................................................... Jump starting............................................................. Push starting ............................................................. If your vehicle overheats ........................................... Tow truck towing .......................................................

5-2 5-6 5-8 5-8 5-9

FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below. and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road away from traffic. 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. 3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Shift the manual transmission into reverse (automatic transmission in P). 4. Turn off the engine.

Make sure that the parking brake is securely applied and the manual transmission is shifted into reverse (automatic transmission in P). Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is dangerous. Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance. Raise the hood to warn other traffic,
SCE0036

Getting the spare tire and tools

Remove jacking tools and spare tire from the storage area located inside the trunk as illustrated.

5-2

MCE0001

SCE0053

Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up.
SCE0037

Removing wheel caps

Do not use your hands to pry off wheel caps. Doing so could result in personal injury.

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and could cause personal injury.

5-3

CE1089

CE1092

Jacking up and removing tire

To help avoid personal injury, carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instructions. 1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point as illustrated above so that top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack up point. Align the jack head between the two notches in the front or the rear as shown. Also fit the groove of the jack head between the notches as shown.

The jack should be used on level firm ground. 2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground. 3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and then remove the tire. Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Use only the jack provided with your vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed only for lifting your vehicle during a tire change. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands as shown above.

5-4

 Use the correct jack up points; never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support. Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary. Never use blocks on or under the jack. Do not start or run engine while vehicle is on the jack. Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack. Do not raise the vehicle using a bumper jack.
SCE0039

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence as illustrated. As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench. Wheel nut tightening torque: 72 to 87 ft-lb (98 to 118 ) Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure. COLD pressure: After vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire placard affixed to the center console lid. Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been run for 600 miles (1,000 km) after installing the aluminum wheel.

Installing wheel
The T-type spare tire is designed for emergency use. See specific instructions under the heading Wheel and tire in the Do-ityourself operations section. 1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub. 2. Carefully put the wheel on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight. 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly until they are tight.

5-5

JUMP STARTING
To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be followed. Keep battery out of the reach of children.

If done incorrectly, jump starting can be hazardous. Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery.
SCE0040

5. Securely store the spare tire and jacking equipment in the vehicle. Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly secured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop. The T-type spare tire and small size spare tire are designed for emergency use. See specific instructions under the heading Wheel and tire in the Do-ityourself operations section.

Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, cloth or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulphuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water. A battery rated at above 12 volts should not be used for a booster. Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (e.g., goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other metal jewelry.

5-6

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so equipped). Cover the battery with an old cloth to reduce explosion hazard. 4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as illustrated.

does not start right away, turn the key off and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again. 7. After starting your engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable. 8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid.

Always connect positive (+) to positive (+) and negative () to body ground (e.g., strut mounting bolt, etc. not to the battery).
CE1005-A

Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury. 1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the two vehicles to bring their batteries into close proximity to each other. Do not allow the two vehicles to touch. 2. Apply parking brake. Move the shift lever to Neutral (On automatic transmission models, move the lever to P). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (light, heater, air conditioner, etc.).

Make sure that cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that clamps do not contact any other metal. 5. Start the engine of the other vehicle and let it run for a few minutes. 6. Keep the engine speed of the other vehicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start your engine in the normal manner.

Do not keep starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine

5-7

PUSH STARTING

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take the following steps: 4. Open the engine hood.

Automatic transmission models cannot be push started. This may cause transmission damage. Three-way catalyst equipped models should not be started by pushing since the three-way catalyst may be damaged. Never try to start the vehicle by towing it; when the engine starts, the forward surge could cause the vehicle to collide with the tow vehicle.

If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting burned. To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the radiator cap while the engine is still hot. When the radiator cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury. 1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the gearshift lever to neutral (automatic transmission to P). Do not stop the engine. 2. Turn off the air conditioner switch. Open all the windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed. 3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. Wait until no steam or coolant can be seen before proceeding. Be careful not to allow your hands, hair or clothing to come into contact with, or to get caught in, the running fan, belts, or motor fan. The fan motor can start at any time when the coolant temperature is high. If coolant is leaking, the cooling fan belt 5. If engine overheating is caused by climbing a long hill on a hot day, run the engine at a fast idle (approximately 1,500 rpm) until the temperature gauge indication returns to normal. 6. Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water.

5-8

TOW TRUCK TOWING

is missing or loose, or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine. 7. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the reservoir tank with the engine running. Add coolant to the reservoir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at the nearest NISSAN dealer. When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in Canada) and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from your NISSAN dealer. Local service operators will generally be familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends that you have a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions. position. This will result in damage to the steering lock mechanism. Move the gearshift lever to the neutral (N position). On automatic transmission models, to move the shift lever to the Neutral position, turn the ignition key to the OFF or ACC position. After moving the shift lever to the Neutral position, be sure to turn the ignition key to the OFF position. When towing with the rear wheels on the ground, release the parking brake. On automatic transmission models, to move the shift lever to the Neutral (N position), turn the ignition key to the OFF or ACC position. After moving the shift lever to the Neutral position, be sure to turn the ignition key to the OFF position. Attach safety chains for all towing.

When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and power train are in working condition. If any unit is damaged, a dolly must be used. When towing with the front wheels on the ground: Turn the ignition key to the OFF position and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never place the ignition key in the LOCK

5-9

wheels.

If you have to tow an automatic transmission model with four wheels on ground
Observe the following restricted towing speeds and distances. Speed: Below 30 MPH (50 km/h) Distance: Less than 40 miles (65 km)

CE1051

CE1052

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground as illustrated. Speed: Below 70MPH (115 km/h) Distance: Less than 500 miles (800 km)

Towing an automatic transmission model with rear wheels raised (with front wheels on the ground)

Never tow an automatic transmission model from the rear (i.e., backward) with four wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission.

Never tow an automatic transmission model with the rear wheels raised (with the front wheels on the ground) as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised, always use a towing dolly under the front

VEHICLE RECOVERY (Freeing a stuck vehicle)

Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle. Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steer-

5-10

ing, brake or cooling systems. Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull on the vehicle at a sideways angle. Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery.

5-11

MEMO

5-12

6 Appearance and interior care

Cleaning exterior and interior.................................... 6-2 Corrosion protection .................................................. 6-5

CLEANING EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR

inside a garage or in a covered area. When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover. Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover. door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt. A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots.

Waxing
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. After waxing, polishing is recommended to remove built-up residue and to avoid a weathered appearance. If you wish to wax your vehicle, only use a wax specified for use over clear coats, such as Nissan Liquid or Spray Wax. Your Nissan dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product. Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax. Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish. If the surface does not polish easily, use a road tar remover and wax again. Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

Washing
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap or detergent (a special vehicle soap or general purpose dish-washing liquid) mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

MAI0001

In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it. In the following cases, please wash your vehicle as soon as possible to protect the paint surface. After a rainfall After driving on coastal roads When things such as soot, bird droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface When dust or mud builds up on the surface Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle Do not use strong household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean water. Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be regularly cleaned. Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the

6-2

Removing spots
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at your NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store.

and a soft cloth will easily remove this film.

Underbody
In areas where road salt is used in winter, the underbody must be cleaned regularly. This will prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing underbody and suspension corrosion. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

When cleaning the inside of the window, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage electrical conductors or rear window defogger elements.

Cleaning alloy wheels

SAI0002

Cleaning glass
When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier to clean if the high-mounted stop light is removed first. Be careful when removing the high-mounted stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the high-mounted stop light wires. The high-mounted stop light must be properly reinstalled before driving your vehicle. Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner

Wash regularly, especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. Salt could discolor the wheel if not removed.

Chrome parts
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

Plastic parts
Plastic parts can be cleaned with a mild soap solution. If the dirt cannot be easily removed, use a plastic cleaner. Do not use solvents.

6-3

Cleaning interior
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry soft cloth. Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturers recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material.

Floor mats
The use of Genuine Nissan floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. No matter what mats are used, be sure they are fitted for your vehicle and are properly positioned in the footwell to prevent interference with pedal operation. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.

Seat belts
Never use benzine, thinner, or any similar material. The leather seats should be regularly coated with a leather wax like saddle soap. Never use car wax. Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer.
SAI0003

Floor mat positioning aid (Driver side only)

This model includes a front floor mat bracket to act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your vehicle model. The drivers side floor mat has a grommet hole incorporated in it. Simply position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in the floorpan contour. Periodically check to make certain that the mats are properly positioned.

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely before using them. Do not allow wet belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or chemical solvents since these may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.

6-4

CORROSION PROTECTION Most common factors contributing to vehicle corrosion:

1. The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas. 2. Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents. Temperature A temperature increase will accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated. Air pollution Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will also accelerate the disintegration of paint surfaces. Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle.

Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion:

Moisture Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle, and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion. Relative humidity Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used.

To protect your vehicle from corrosion:

Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean. Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible. Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation. Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible. NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

6-5

MEMO

6-6

7 Do-it-yourself operations

Precautions ............................................................... 7-2 Engine cooling system .............................................. 7-4 Engine oil .................................................................. 7-6 Automatic transmission fluid ..................................... 7-9 Power steering fluid ................................................ 7-10 Brake and clutch fluid ............................................. 7-11 Window washer fluid ............................................... 7-11 Battery ..................................................................... 7-12 Drive belts ............................................................... 7-13 Spark plug replacement .......................................... 7-14 Air cleaner filter ....................................................... 7-16 Wiper blades ........................................................... 7-17 Parking brake .......................................................... 7-18 Brake pedal ............................................................. 7-19 Brake booster .......................................................... 7-20 Clutch pedal ............................................................ 7-20 Fuses....................................................................... 7-20 Fusible links ............................................................ 7-22 Light bulbs ............................................................... 7-22 Wheels and tires ..................................................... 7-29

PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed. Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. Move the transmission control lever to neutral (N). Be sure the ignition key is OFF or LOCK when performing any replacement or repair. When the ignition key is in the ON or ACC position, the cooling fan may start to operate suddenly even when the engine is not running. Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn off the engine and wait until it cools down. If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts. It is advisable to remove ties and any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle. If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases. Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands. Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks away from fuel and battery. Never connect or disconnect either the battery or any transistorized component connector while the ignition is on. On gasoline engine models with the Multiport fuel injection system, the fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off. Failure to follow these or other common sense guidelines may lead to serious injury or vehicle damage. Improperly disposed motor oil and/or other vehicle fluids can hurt the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid. This Do-it-yourself operations section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform. You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect your warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, have it done by your NISSAN dealer.

7-2

CHECK LOCATIONS IN ENGINE COMPARTMENT

SDI0112

7-3

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, year-round, antifreeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors, therefore additional cooling system additives are not necessary. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. See precautions in If Your Vehicle Overheats found in the In case of emergency section.

When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only an ethylene glycol antifreeze with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze 50% softwater.
SDI0113

Outside C 35

temperature down to F 30

Antifreeze 50%

Soft water

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL With coolant reservoir

Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below MIN, add coolant up to the MAX level. If the reservoir tank is empty, check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir tank up to the MAX level. If the cooling system frequently requires

50%

The use of other types of coolant solutions may damage your cooling system. The radiator is equipped with a pressure cap. Use a NISSAN genuine cap or its equivalent when replacement is required. Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator.

7-4

coolant, have it checked by your NISSAN dealer.

Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheating.

To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. 1. Open the radiator cap and drain plug. 2. Open the drain plug on the engine block. 3. Flush the cooling system by running fresh water through the radiator. 4. Close the radiator drain plug and the drain plug on the engine block securely.
SDI0114

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

Major cooling system repairs should be performed by your NISSAN dealer. The service procedures can be found in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual.

5. See the Technical information section for cooling system capacity. Fill the radiator slowly with the proper mixture of coolant and water. Fill the reservoir tank up to the MAX level. Then install the radiator cap.

7-5

ENGINE OIL

SDI0138

SDI0115

6. Start the engine, and warm it up until the radiator fan operates. Then race the engine 2 or 3 times under no load. Watch the coolant temperature gauge for signs of overheating. 7. Stop the engine. After it completely cools down, refill the radiator up to the filler opening. Fill the reservoir tank up to the MAX level. 8. Check the radiator drain plug and the drain plug on the engine block for any sign of leakage.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply parking brake. 2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature. 3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way.

7-6

 It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.

SDI0116

SDI0139

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be between the H and L marks. If the oil level is below the L mark, remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening. Do not overfill. 6. Recheck oil level with dipstick.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature, and then turn it off. 3. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug. 4. Remove the oil filler cap.

Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating with insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.

7-7

5. Remove the drain plug with a wrench and completely drain the oil. If oil filter is to be changed, remove and replace it at this time. See Changing oil filter.

See the Technical information section for refill capacity. 8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around the drain plug. Correct as required. 9. Turn the engine off and wait several minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot.

Waste oil must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations. 6. Clean and re-install the drain plug and new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Drain plug tightening torque: 22 to 29 ft-lb (29 to 39 ) Do not use excessive force. 7. Refill engine with recommended oil and install the cap securely.

Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. Keep used engine oil out of reach of children.

SDI0140

CHANGING OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Turn the engine off. 3. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench. (Depending on the engine model, a special cap type wrench may be required. See your NISSAN dealer if in doubt.) Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

7-8

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS FOR CHECKING

Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil may be hot. 4. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with a clean rag. Be sure to remove any old rubber gasket remaining on the mounting surface of the engine. 5. Coat the rubber gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil. 6. Screw in the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten additionally more than 2/3 turn. Oil filter tightening torque: 10.85 to 15.19 ft-lb (14.7 to 20.6 ) 7. Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter. Correct as required. 8. Turn the engine off and wait several minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if necessary. When engine is running, keep hands and clothing away from any moving parts such as fan drive belt. Automatic transmission fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children. The fluid level should be checked using the HOT range on the dipstick after the following conditions have been met: The engine should be warmed up to operating temperature. The vehicle should be driven at least 5 minutes. The automatic transmission fluid should be warmed to between 122 and 176F (50 and 80C). The fluid can be checked at fluid temperatures of 86 to 122F (30 to 50C) using the COLD range on the dipstick after the engine is warmed up and before driving. However, the fluid should be re-checked using the HOT range. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the parking brake. 2. Start the engine and then move the selector lever through each gear range. Move the shift lever to P after you have moved it through all ranges.

SDI0117

7-9

POWER STEERING FLUID

NOTE: If the vehicle has been driven for a long time at high speeds, or in city traffic in hot weather, or if it is being used to pull a trailer, the accurate fluid level cannot be read. You should wait until the fluid has cooled down (about 30 minutes).

SDI0334

SDI0118

3. Check the fluid level with the engine idling. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean with lint-free paper. 5. Reinsert the dipstick into the charging pipe as far as it will go. 6. Remove the dipstick and note the reading. If the level is at the low side of either range, add fluid to the charging pipe. DO NOT OVERFILL. USE Nissan Matic D (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Genuine Nissan Automatic Transmission Fluid (Canada).

Check the fluid level in the reservoir tank. The fluid level should be checked using the HOT range at fluid temperatures of 122 to 176F (50 to 80C) or using the COLD range at fluid temperatures of 32 to 86F (0 to 30C).

Do not overfill. The recommended fluid is Type DEXRON TMII or equivalent.

7-10

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID

brake system and affect the vehicles stopping ability. Do not spill the fluid on painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, wash with water.

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

SDI0119

SDI0189

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is below the Min. line or the brake warning light comes on, add DOT 3 fluid up to the Max. line. If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be thoroughly checked by your NISSAN dealer.

Type A
Add fluid when the low washer fluid warning light comes on. Add a washer solvent to the water for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer anti-freeze. Follow the manufacturers instructions for the mixture ratio.

Use only new fluid. Old, inferior, or contaminated fluid may damage the brake and clutch systems. The use of improper fluids can damage the

7-11

BATTERY
washer solvent to the water for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer anti-freeze. Follow the manufacturers instructions for the mixture ratio. Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Any corrosion should be washed off with a solution of baking soda and water. Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened. If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative battery terminal cable to prevent discharge.

Do not substitute engine anti-freeze coolant for window washer solution. This may result in damage to the paint.

SDI0190

Do not expose the battery to flames or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas generated by battery action is explosive. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.

Type B
To check the fluid level, use your finger to plug the center hole of the cap/tube assembly (as shown above), then remove it from the tank. If there is no fluid in the tube, add fluid. Add a

7-12

DRIVE BELTS JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, see the In case of emergency section. If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. Contact your NISSAN dealer.

DI0137M

SDI0141

Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX. and MIN. lines. If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level to the indicator in each filler opening. Do not overfill. 1. Remove the cell plugs. 2. Add distilled water up to the MAX. level. 3. Tighten cell plugs. Be sure the ignition key is OFF. 1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying, oil adhesion or looseness. If the belt is in poor condition or loose, have it replaced or adjusted by your NISSAN dealer. 2. Have the belts checked regularly for condition and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual.

7-13

SPARK PLUG REPLACEMENT

Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.

Be sure to use the correct wrench to remove the plugs. An incorrect wrench can cause damage.

7-14

SDI0122

SDI0123

1. Remove the rocker cover ornament using a suitable hexagon wrench. (Front side) 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Loosen the ignition coil fixing bolts. And remove the ignition coil to give access to the spark plugs. 4. Remove the spark plugs with a spark plug wrench. The plug wrench has a rubber seal that holds the spark plug so that it will not fall when it is pulled out. Make sure that each spark plug is snugly fitted into the plug wrench.

5. Fit the new plugs, one at a time, into the spark plug wrench and install them. Turn each plug in several full turns by hand, then tighten with a spark plug wrench to the correct torque. Do not overtighten. Spark plug tightening torque: 14 to 22 ft-lb (20 to 29 )

6. Holding the ignition coil, re-connect each ignition coil to its proper spark plug by pushing it on until you feel a snap. 7. Tighten all ignition coils.

7-15

AIR CLEANER FILTER

SDI0124

SDI0145

SDI0121

Platinum-tipped spark plug

It is not necessary to replace the platinumtipped spark plugs as frequently as the conventional type spark plugs since they will last much longer. Follow the maintenance schedule but, do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping. Always replace with recommended platinum-tipped spark plugs.

Viscous paper type

The filter element should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance intervals shown in the Maintenance schedule section. When replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp cloth.

Operating the engine with the air cleaner off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if the engine back-

7-16

WIPER BLADES
fires. If it isnt there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Dont drive with it off, and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner off.

DI1018M

1) CLEANING If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer of if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield. Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water. Clean the blade by wiping it with a soaked in a washer solution or a detergent. Then rinse the blade with water. If your windshield is still not cloth mild clear clear

after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades. 2) REPLACEMENT 1. Pull the wiper arm. 2. Push the lock pin, then remove the wiper blade. 3. Insert the new wiper blade to the wiper arm until a click sounds.

7-17

PARKING BRAKE

After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position. Otherwise it may be damaged when the engine hood is opened. Make sure the wiper blade contacts the glass, otherwise the arm may be damaged from wind pressure.

SDI0125

From the released position, pull the parking brake lever up slowly and firmly. If the number of clicks is out of the range listed above, see your NISSAN dealer.

SDI0146

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle. This may cause clogging or improper windshield washer operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin.

7-18

BRAKE PEDAL
brakes. Apply the parking brake several times. Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For more information regarding brake inspections, see the appropriate maintenance schedule information in the Maintenance Schedule section of this manual.

See your NISSAN dealer and have it checked if the brake pedal height does not return to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched scraping or screeching sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard. Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system. The rear drum brakes (if so equipped) do not have audible wear indicators. Should you ever hear an unusually loud noise from the rear drum brakes, have them inspected as soon as possible by your NISSAN dealer.

DI1020MD

With the engine running, check the distance between the upper surface of the pedal and the metal floor. If it is out of the range shown above, see your NISSAN dealer.

Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes. The front disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied. The rear drum-type brakes self-adjust every time the parking brake is applied. If the brake pedal goes down farther than normal, it may be due to a lack of adjustment of the rear drum

7-19

BRAKE BOOSTER
Check the brake booster function as follows: 1. With the engine off, press and release the brake pedal several times. When brake pedal movement (distance of travel) remains the same from one pedal application to the next, continue on to the next step. 2. While depressing the brake pedal, start the engine. The pedal height should drop a little. 3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the engine. Keeping the pedal depressed for about 30 seconds, the pedal height should not change. 4. Run the engine for one minute without depressing the brake pedal, then turn it off. Depress the brake pedal several times. The pedal travel distance will decrease gradually with each depression as the vacuum is released from the booster. If the brakes do not operate properly, see your NISSAN dealer.

CLUTCH PEDAL

FUSES

DI1021MA

SDI0126

Press the pedal by hand and be sure the free travel is within the limits shown above. If free travel is too little or too much, see your NISSAN dealer.

Engine compartment
If the electrical equipment does not come on, check for a burned-out fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition key and headlight switch are OFF. 2. Open the engine hood. 3. Remove the fusible link cover. 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. 5. If the fuse is burned out, replace it with a new fuse.

7-20

Never use a fuse of higher amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. 6. If a new fuse burns out again, have the electrical system checked and repaired by your NISSAN dealer.

SDI0335

Passenger compartment
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for a burned-out fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition key and headlight switch are OFF. 2. Open the fuse box lid. 3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. 4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse. Never use a fuse of higher amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover.

5. If a new fuse opens again, have the electrical system checked and repaired by your NISSAN dealer.

7-21

FUSIBLE LINKS

LIGHT BULBS HEADLIGHTS

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. A bulb can be replaced from inside the engine compartment without removing the headlight assembly.

SDI0128

High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped. Hold the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope.

If any electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace only with genuine NISSAN parts.

Removing the headlight bulb

1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the rear end of the bulb. 3. Turn the bulb retaining ring counterclockwise until it is free from the headlight reflector, then remove it. 4. Remove the headlight bulb. Do not shake or rotate the bulb when removing it.

SDI0129

7-22

Replacing the headlight bulb

1. Insert the bulb into the headlight reflector with the flat side of the plastic base facing upward. 2. Install the bulb retaining ring and turn it clockwise until it stops. 3. Push the electrical connector into the bulb plastic base until it snaps and stops.

OTHER LIGHTS
Item Cornering/clearance Front turn signal light Front side marker light Front fog light Rear combination light Turn signal 27 27/8 27 3.8 5 27 10 10 2.7 3.4 1.4 161 158 1156 1156 1157 1156 194 Wattage (W) 27/8 27 3.8 55 Bulb No. 1157 1156 194

DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB. Use the same number and wattage as originally installed: Wattage 65/45 Bulb no. 9004 Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact your NISSAN dealer. Do not leave the bulb out of the headlight reflector for a long period of time as dust, moisture, and smoke may enter the headlight body and affect the performance of the headlight.

Stop/Tail Back-up Rear side marker light License plate light High-mounted stop light Interior light Front personal light Step light Trunk light Vanity mirror light

7-23

MDI0006

Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or cover.
SDI0130

7-24

SDI0131

7-25

SDI0132

7-26

SDI0133

7-27

SDI0333

SDI0134

7-28

WHEELS AND TIRES

pressures are shown on the tire placard affixed to the center console lid.

Types of tires

DI1033M

If you have a flat tire, see In case of emergency section.

Maximum inflation pressure

Do not exceed the maximum inflation pressures shown on the side wall of the tire.

Tire inflation pressure

Periodically check the tire pressure (including spare). Incorrect tire pressure may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling. Tire pressure should be checked when tires are COLD. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for three or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). COLD tire

The vehicle capacity weight is indicated on the tire placard. Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components. Before taking a long trip, or whenever you have loaded your vehicle heavily, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressure is at the specified level. Do not drive your vehicle over 85 MPH (140 km/h) unless it is equipped with high speed capability tires. Driving faster than 85 MPH (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury.

When changing or replacing tires, be sure all four tires are of the same type (i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and construction. Your NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability. Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire. All season tires NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some models to provide good performance for use all year around, including snowy and icy road conditions. All Season Tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

7-29

Summer tires NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance in snow and ice will be substantially reduced. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire sidewall. If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels. Snow tires If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Generally, snow tires will have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some provinces and states prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

Tire chains
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturers suggestions. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or undercarriage. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected. Never install tire chains on a T-type spare tire. Do not use the chains on dry roads.

DI1127MA

Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends that tires be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). Wheel nut tightening torque: 72 to 87 ft-lb (98 to 118 ) See Flat tire in the In case of emergency section for tire replacing procedures.

7-30

 After rotating the tires, adjust the tire pressure. Retighten the wheel nuts after the aluminum wheels have been run for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). Do not include the T-type spare tire or any other small size spare tire in the tire rotation.
MDI0004

may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the T-type spare tire, contact your NISSAN dealer.

Changing tires and wheels

When replacing a tire, use the same size, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. Recommended types and sizes are shown in Wheels and tires in the Technical information section. The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, snow chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury. If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels which have the same offset dimension. Wheels of a different offset could cause early tire wear, possibly degraded vehicle handling characteristics and/or interference with the brake discs/drums. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad/shoe wear.

Tire wear and damage

Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging, or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging, or deep cuts are found, the tire should be replaced. The original tires have a built-in tread wear indicator. When the wear indicator is visible, the tire should be replaced. Improper service for a T-type spare tire

7-31

corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead. Do not install a deformed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning. NISSAN recommends that the road wheels be waxed to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter.

Do not use tire chains on a T-type spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly on the T-type spare tire and may cause damage to the vehicle. When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, the T-type spare tire should be used on the rear wheel and the original tire used on the front wheels (drive wheels). Use tire chains only on the front two original tires. Tire tread of the T-type spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the original tire. Replace the T-type spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear. Because the T-type spare tire is smaller than the original tire, ground clearance is reduced. To avoid damage to the vehicle do not drive over obstacles. Also do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught. Do not use the T-type spare tire on other vehicles. Do not use more than one T-type

Spare tire (T-type spare tire)

Observe the following precautions if the T-type spare tire must be used, otherwise your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident.

Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required. Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the front wheels on the vehicle could lead to transmission damage.

The T-type spare tire should be used only for emergency. It should be replaced by the standard tire at the first opportunity. Drive carefully while the T-type spare tire is installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving. Periodically check tire inflation pressure, and always keep it at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar). Do not drive your vehicle at speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).

Care of wheels
Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance. Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed. Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels. Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or

7-32

spare tire at the same time.

7-33

MEMO

7-34

8 Maintenance schedule

General maintenance ................................................ 8-3 Periodic maintenance................................................ 8-5

Your new NISSAN has been designed to have minimum maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save you both time and money. However, some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your NISSANs good mechanical condition, as well as its emission and engine performance. It is the owners responsibility to make sure that the specified maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed. As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper maintenance care. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain.

However, under severe driving conditions, additional or more frequent maintenance will be required.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and tuned by an authorized NISSAN dealer. NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership training programs. They are completely qualified to work on NISSANs vehicles before they work on your vehicle, rather than after they have worked on it. You can be confident that your NISSAN dealers service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle in a reliable and economic way.

General maintenance
General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal dayto-day operation of the vehicle. They are essential if your vehicle is to continue to operate properly. It is your responsibility to perform these procedures regularly as prescribed. These checks or inspections can be done by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, your NISSAN dealer.

Periodic maintenance
The maintenance items listed in this part are required to be serviced at regular intervals.

8-2

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smell, be sure to check for the cause or have your NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you should notify your NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required. When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe the precautions in the Do-it-yourself operations section. Additional information on the following items with * is found in the Do-ityourself operations section. 7,500 miles (12,000 km). Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle pulls to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed. Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. Doors and engine hood Check that all doors and the engine hood operate smoothly as well as the trunk lid or back hatch. Also make sure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released. When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

INSIDE THE VEHICLE

The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc. Lights* Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim. Warning lights and buzzers/chimes Make sure that all warning lights and buzzers/chimes are operating properly. Windshield wiper and washer* Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak. Windshield defroster Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in good quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner. Steering wheel Check that it has the specified play. Be sure to check for changes in the steering conditions, such as excessive play, hard steering or strange noises. Seats Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to make sure they operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified. Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge periodically when at a service station, including the spare, and adjust to the specified pressure if necessary. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear. Wheel nuts* When checking the tires, make sure no nuts are missing, and check for any loose nuts. Tighten if necessary. Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every

8-3

head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks (if equipped) hold securely in all latched positions. Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt system (e.g. buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage. Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mats away from the pedal. Clutch pedal* Make sure the pedal operates smoothly and check that it has the proper free play. Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied. Brake pedal and booster* Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure it has the proper distance under it when depressed fully. Check the brake booster function. Be sure to keep floor mats away from the pedal. Parking brake* Check that the lever has the proper travel and make sure that the vehicle is held securely on a fairly steep hill when only the parking brake is applied. Automatic transaxle Park mechanism

Check that the brake pedal must be depressed for the selector lever to be moved from the P position. On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in the P position without applying any brakes.

dipstick after parking the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the engine. Be sure to wait a few minutes to allow the oil to drain back into the sump. Power steering fluid level* and lines Check the level in the reservoir tank with the engine off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. Automatic transaxle fluid level* Check the level on the dipstick after putting the selector lever in P with the engine idling. Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately locate the trouble and correct it. (See the carbon monoxide warning in the Starting and driving section) Underbody The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances, otherwise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, being careful to clean those areas where mud and dirt may accumulate. See the Appearance and interior care section for additional information.

UNDER THE HOOD AND VEHICLE

The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (e.g. each time you check the engine oil or refuel). Windshield washer fluid* Check that there is adequate fluid in the tank. Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level when the engine is cold. Radiator and hoses Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, deterioration or loose connections. Brake and clutch fluid levels* Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid levels are between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir. Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Engine drive belts* Make sure that no belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily. Engine oil level* Check the level on the

8-4

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately. To ensure smooth, trouble-free, safe and economical driving, NISSAN provides two different maintenance schedules that may be used, depending upon the conditions in which you usually drive. These schedules contain both distance and time intervals, up to 60,000 miles (96,000 km)/48 months. For most people, the odometer reading will indicate when service is needed. However, if you drive very little, your vehicle should be serviced at the regular time intervals shown in the schedule. After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, continue the periodic maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals. Driving in dusty conditions. Driving on rough, muddy, or salt spread roads. Towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier.

SCHEDULE 2
Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 2 if none of the driving conditions shown in Schedule 1 apply to your driving habits.

SCHEDULE 1
Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 1 if your driving habits frequently include one or more of the following driving conditions: Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km). Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing. Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go rush hour traffic. Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use.

8-5

SCHEDULE 1
Abbreviations: R = Replace I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 3.75 (6) 3 7.5 (12) 6 11.25 (18) 9 15 (24) 12 18.75 (30) 15

[
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 22.5 26.25 30 33.75 37.5 41.25 (36) (42) (48) (54) (60) (66) 18 21 24 27 30 33

]: At the mileage intervals only

45 48.75 (72) (78) 36 39 52.5 56.25 (84) (90) 42 45 60 (96) 48 I* [R] I* I* R* R R [R]

Emission control system maintenance

Drive belts See NOTE (1) Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) Vapor lines Fuel lines Fuel filter See NOTE (3)* Engine coolant See NOTE (4) Engine oil Engine oil filter (Use part No. 15208-31U00 or equivalent) Spark plugs (Use PLATINUM-TIPPED type) Intake & exhaust valve clearance See NOTE (5) [R] I* I*

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

NOTE: (1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. (2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required. (3) If vehicle is operated under extremely adverse weather conditions or in areas where ambient temperatures are either extremely low or extremely high, the filters might become clogged. In such an event, replace them immediately. (4) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. (5) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance. (6) Maintenance items and intervals with * are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

8-6

Abbreviations: I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.

MAINTENANCE OPERATION Miles x 1,000 Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) Months 3.75 (6) 3 7.5 11.25 (12) 6 (18) 9 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 15 18.75 22.5 26.25 (24) 12 (30) 15 (36) 18 (42) 21 30 33.75 37.5 41.25 (48) 24 (54) 27 (60) 30 (66) 33 45 48.75 52.5 56.25 (72) 36 (78) 39 (84) 42 (90) 45 60 (96) 48

Chassis and body maintenance

Brake lines & cables Brake pads, discs, drums & linings Manual & automatic transaxle oil Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Steering linkage ball joints & front suspension ball joints Exhaust system Front drive shaft boots Air bag system See NOTE (2). See NOTE (1). I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

NOTE: (1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. (2) Inspect the air bag system 10 years after the date of manufacture noted on the FMVSS certification label.

8-7

SCHEDULE 2
Abbreviations: R = Replace I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION Miles x 1,000 Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) Months 7.5 (12) 6 15 (24) 12 22.5 (36) 18 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 30 (48) 24 37.5 (60) 30 45 (72) 36 52.5 (84) 42 60 (96) 48 I* [R] I* I* See NOTE (2)* See NOTE (3) R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R* R R [R] See NOTE (4) [R] I* I*

]: At the mileage intervals only

Emission control system maintenance

Drive belts Air cleaner filter Vapor lines Fuel lines Fuel filter Engine coolant Engine oil Engine oil filter (Use part No. 15208-31U00 or equivalent) Spark plugs (Use PLATINUM-TIPPED type) Intake & exhaust valve clearance See NOTE (1)

NOTE: (1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. (2) If vehicle is operated under extremely adverse weather conditions or in areas where ambient temperatures are either extremely low or extremely high, the filters might become clogged. In such an event, replace them immediately. (3) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. (4) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance. (5) Maintenance items and intervals with * are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

8-8

Abbreviations: I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. MAINTENANCE OPERATION Miles x 1,000 Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) Months 7.5 (12) 6 15 (24) 12 22.5 (36) 18 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 30 (48) 24 37.5 (60) 30 45 (72) 36 52.5 (84) 42 60 (96) 48

Chassis and body maintenance

Brake lines & cables Brake pads, discs, drums & linings Manual & automatic transaxle oil Steering gear linkage, axle & suspension parts Exhaust system Front drive shaft boots Air bag system See NOTE (1). I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

NOTE: (1) Inspect the air bag system 10 years after the date of manufacture noted on the FMVSS certification label.

8-9

EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following items with * is found in the Do-ityourself operations section.

might become clogged. In such an event, replace the filter immediately. Engine coolant* Drain and flush the cooling system. Engine oil & oil filter* Under normal driving conditions, the engine oil and oil filter should be replaced in accordance with the maintenance schedule. However, under severe driving conditions, they may have to be replaced more frequently. Spark plugs* Replace with new plugs having the correct heat range. Intake & exhaust valve clearance Check and adjust the valve clearance.

Check the oil level and visually inspect for signs of leakage. Under severe driving conditions, the oil should be replaced at the specified interval. Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts, and drive shaft boots Check for damage, looseness and leakage of oil or grease. Under severe driving conditions, more frequent inspection should be performed. Steering linkage ball joints & front suspension ball joints Check the ball joints for damage, looseness and grease leakage. Exhaust system Visually check the exhaust pipes, muffler, and hangers for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, chafing, abrasion, deterioration, etc. Under severe driving conditions, inspection should be performed more frequently. Air bag system Check the air bag system components for proper attachment, damage, deformities, cracks rust, etc. Work around and on the air bag system should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer.

Emission control system maintenance

Drive belts* Check drive belts for wear, fraying or cracking and also for proper tension. Replace the drive belts if found damaged. Air cleaner filter Under normal driving conditions, the air cleaner filter should be replaced in accordance with the maintenance schedule. However, driving the vehicle in dusty areas may cause more rapid clogging of the element. Consequently, the element may have to be replaced more frequently. Vapor lines Check vapor lines and connections for failure or looseness. If leaks are found, replace them. Fuel lines Check the fuel hoses, piping and connections for leaks, looseness or deterioration. Replace any parts if they are damaged. Fuel filter If the vehicle is operated under extremely adverse weather conditions or in areas where ambient temperatures are either extremely low or extremely high, the filter

Chassis and body maintenance

Brake lines & cables Check the brake lines and hoses (including brake booster vacuum hoses, connections & check valve) and parking brake cables for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, chafing, abrasion, deterioration, etc. Brake pads, discs, drums & linings Check these and the other neighboring brake components for wear, deterioration and leaks. Under severe driving conditions, they may have to be inspected more frequently. Manual & automatic transaxle gear oil*

8-10

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ............................................................ 9-2 Engine ....................................................................... 9-7 Wheels and tires ....................................................... 9-8 Dimensions and weights ........................................... 9-8 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country ......................................... 9-9 Vehicle identification ................................................. 9-9 Installing license plate ............................................. 9-11 Vehicle loading information ..................................... 9-12 Trailer towing........................................................... 9-13 Uniform tire quality grading ..................................... 9-17 Emission control system warranty .......................... 9-18 Reporting safety defects (For U.S.A.)..................... 9-18

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure instructed in the Do-it-yourself operations section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (Approximate) US measure Fuel Engine oil (Refill) With oil filter Without oil filter Cooling system With reservoir Reservoir Manual transmission gear oil Automatic transmission fluid Power steering fluid Brake and clutch fluid Multi-purpose grease Air conditioning system refrigerant Air conditioning system lubricants *1: *2: *3: *4: Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in the Do-ityourself operations section. 9 qt 7/8 qt 7-1/2 qt 3/4 qt 8.5 0.8 Anti-freeze coolant (Ethylene glycol base) API GL-4*3 Nissan Matic D (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Genuine Nissan Automatic Transmission Fluid (Canada).*4 Type DEXRONTMII or equivalent Genuine Nissan Brake Fluid or equivalent*3 DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116) NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base) HFC-134a (R-134a) Nissan A/C System Oil Type S or exact equivalent 4-1/4 qt 3-7/8 qt 3-1/2 qt 3-1/4 qt 4.0 3.7 API SG or SH and Energy Conserving II*1, *2 API Certification Mark*1, *2 18-1/2 gal Imp measure 15-3/8 gal 70 Liter Recommended specifications Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (RON 96)

FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96) If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Research octane number 91) can be used. However, for maximum vehicle performance, the use of unleaded premium gasoline is recommended.

Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control devices and systems, and could also affect the warranty coverage. Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, since this will damage the three-way catalyst.

For further details, see Engine oil and oil filter recommendation. For further details, see Recommended SAE viscosity number. For more information regarding suitable fluids, contact a NISSAN dealer. Dexron III/Mercon or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental United States and Alaska contact a NISSAN dealer for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of Dexron III/Mercon or Dexron IIE/Mercon Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Reformulated Gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions.

9-2

Nissan supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence. If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage. The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline. If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a methanol blend, is used, it should contain no more than 10% oxygenate. (MTBE may, however, be added up to 15%.) If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may

cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in Nissan vehicles. If any undesirable driveability problems such as engine stalling and hard hot starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE. Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage.

Index) number in these high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)] such as: Colorado, Montana, New Mexico, Utah, Wyoming, northeastern Nevada, southern Idaho, western South Dakota, western Nebraska, and that part of Texas which is directly south of New Mexico. Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than stated above can cause persistent, heavy spark knock. (Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, have your dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible. Incorrect ignition timing will result in knocking, after-run or overheating. This in turn may cause excessive fuel consumption or damage to the engine. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked at a NISSAN dealer or other competent service facility. However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while

Aftermarket fuel additives

Nissan does not recommend the use of any fuel additives (i.e. fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvent or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine. Octane rating tips In most parts of North America, you should use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 or 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number. However, you may use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating as low as 85 AKI (Anti-Knock

9-3

accelerating or driving up hills. This is no cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load.

STI0077

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATION Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to chose the correct quality, and viscosity oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. Nissan recommends the use of a low friction oil (energy conserving oil) in order to improve fuel economy and conserve energy. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage. Only those engine oils with the American Petroleum Institute (API) CERTIFICATION

MARK on the front of the container should be used. This type of oil supersedes the existing API SG or SH and Energy Conserving II categories. If you cannot find engine oil with the CERTIFICATION MARK, an API SG or SH and Energy Conserving II oil with API Service Symbol may be used. An oil with a single designation SG or SH, or in combination with other categories (for example, SG/CC or SG/CD) may also be used if one with the API CERTIFICATION MARK cannot be found. Mineral based or synthetic type oils may be used in your NISSAN vehicle. These oils must

9-4

however, meet the API quality and SAE viscosity ratings specified for your vehicle. Do not mix mineral based and synthetic type oils in the engine at the same time.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new vehicle is equipped with a highquality genuine Nissan oil filter. When replacing, use the genuine oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in change intervals.

repeated short distance driving at cold outside temperatures, driving in dusty conditions, extensive idling, towing a trailer.

Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed. Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used.

Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Oil and filter other than the specified quality, or oil and filter change intervals longer than recommended could reduce engine life. Damage to engines caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the new Nissan vehicle warranties. Your engine was filled with a high quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle. Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes.

Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important that the engine oil viscosity be selected based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. The chart Recommended SAE viscosity number shows the recommended oil viscosities for the expected ambient temperatures. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage.

9-5

RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY NUMBER

Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations

The air conditioning system in this NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lubricant, Nissan A/C System Oil Type S or the exact equivalents. Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will cause severe damage and you will need to replace your vehicles entire air conditioning system. The new refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your NISSAN vehicle will not harm the earths ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earths atmosphere, certain governmental regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioning system service. Your NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioning system refrigerant. Contact your NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioning system.

TI1028-B

TI1002M

SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all temperatures. SAE 10W-30 viscosity oil may be used if the ambient temperature is above 0F (18C).

80W-90 is preferable for ambient temperatures below 104F (40C).

9-6

ENGINE
Model Type Cylinder arrangement Bore x Stroke Displacement Firing order Idle speed Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) CO percentage at idle speed Spark plug Spark plug gap Camshaft operation Alternator belt size Width x Length in (mm) 0.8409 x 43.11 (21.36 x 1,095) rpm degree/rpm [No air] % Standard Service option in (mm) Timing chain PFR5G-11 PFR4G-11, PFR6G-11 See the Emission Control Label on the underside of the hood. in (mm) cu in (cm3) VQ30DE Gasoline, 4-cycle 6-cylinder, V-slanted at 60 3.66 x 2.886 (93.0 x 73.3) 182.33 (2,988) 1-2-3-4-5-6*

The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

TI1009-A

9-7

WHEELS AND TIRES

Steel Offset Road wheel Aluminum Offset Conventional Tire size Spare *1: For CANADA *2: For U.S.A. *3: For models with Viscous LSD Conventional*1 T125/70D16*2 T125/90D16*2, *3 15 x 6.5JJ in (mm) 1.77 (45) P205/65R15 92S P205/65R15 92H P215/60R15 93H 15 x 6JJ in (mm) 1.57 (40)

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Sedan Overall length Overall width Overall height Front tread Rear tread Wheelbase Gross vehicle weight rating Gross axle weight rating Front Rear lb (kg) lb (kg) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) lb (kg) See the F.M.V.S.S. certification label on the drivers side lock pillar. 187.7 (4,768) 69.7 (1,770) 55.7 (1,415) 60.2 (1,530)*1 59.8 (1,520)*2 59.4 (1,510)*1 59.1 (1,500)*2 106.3 (2,700)

*1: For models with steel wheels *2: For models with aluminum wheels

9-8

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

When planning to travel in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicles engine. Using fuel with too low an octane/cetane rating may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded engine gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available. When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations. The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ. When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation, and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

STI0038

STI0040

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER PLATE

The vehicle identification number plate is attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (Chassis number)

The number is stamped as shown.

9-9

STI0047

STI0041

STI0042

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL

The F.M.V.S.S. certification label is affixed as shown.

EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is attached as shown.

9-10

INSTALLING LICENSE PLATE

STI0043

STI0044

TIRE PLACARD
The cold tire pressure is shown on the tire placard affixed to the center console lid.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL

The label is affixed inside of the hood as shown.

STI0045

Use the following steps to mount the license plate: 1. Make a hole in each plastic finisher (There are small marks on the bumper) using a 0.31 in (8 mm) drill. To avoid damaging the

9-11

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

threads behind the finisher, apply only light pressure to the drill. 2. Mount the license plate bracket. 3. Mount the license plate with the 0.24 in (6 mm) bolts. The bolts used to fasten the license plate to the bracket are not included in the attaching hardware that comes with the bracket. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle.

Determining vehicle load capacity

The load capacity of this vehicle is determined by weight, not by available cargo space. For example, a luggage rack, bike carrier, cartop carrier or similar equipment does not increase load carrying capacity of your vehicle. To determine vehicle load capacity: Vehicle weight can be determined by using a commercial-grade scale, found at places such as a truck stop, gravel quarry, grain elevator, or a scrap metal recycling facility. 1) Determine the curb weight of your vehicle. 2) Compare the curb weight amount to the GVWR specified for your vehicle to determine how much more weight your vehicle can carry. 3) After loading (cargo and passengers), reweigh your vehicle to determine if either GVWR or GAWR for your vehicle is exceeded. If GVWR is exceeded, remove cargo as necessary. If either the front or

Terms
It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle: Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not include passengers and cargo. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo.

9-12

TRAILER TOWING
rear GAWR is exceeded, shift the load or remove cargo as necessary. warranty.

Loading tips
The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the FMVSS Certification Label. Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.

Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury. Overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by your

TI1011M

Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember that towing a trailer will place additional loads on your vehicles engine, drive train, steering, braking and other systems. Information on trailer towing ability and the special equipment required should be obtained from your Nissan dealer. He can obtain a Nissan Trailer Towing Guide for you.

9-13

Maximum load limits

Maximum trailer loads Never allow the total trailer load to exceed 1,000 lb (454 kg). The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight. Towing loads greater than 1,000 lb (454 kg) or using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance.

Towing load/specification chart

MAXIMUM TOWING LOAD MAXIMUM TONGUE LOAD

Unit: lb (kg)

1,000 (454) 110 (49)

Trailer hitch
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer. Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle, to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks. Axle-mounted hitches should not be used. The hitch should not be attached to or affect the operation of the impact-absorbing bumper Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, etc. when the hitch is installed. To reduce the possibility of additional damage if your vehicle is struck from the rear, remove the hitch when not in use. After the hitch is removed, seal the bolt holes to prevent exhaust fumes, water or dust from entering the passenger compartment.

Vehicle damage and/or personal injury resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by NISSAN warranties. Information on trailer towing and required towing equipment should be obtained from dealers who specialize in providing trailers or other towing equipment. Tongue load Keep the tongue load between 9 and 11% of the total trailer load. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load.

TI1012M

Maximum gross vehicle weight/maximum gross axle weight The gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) shown on the F.M. V.S.S. certification label. The gross vehicle weight equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. In addition, front or rear gross axle weight must not exceed the gross axle weight rating (GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label.

9-14

 Regularly check that all hitch mounting bolts are securely mounted.

Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system, make sure it conforms to Federal and/or local regulations and that it is properly installed.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicles behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic. Steering stability, and braking performance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving. Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops. Avoid sharp turns or lane changes. Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed. Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not recommended; however, if you must do so, and if your vehicle is equipped with automatic transmission, first block the wheels and apply the parking brake, and then move the transmission shift lever into the P position. If you move the shift lever to the P position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake, transmission damage could occur. When going down a hill, shift into a lower gear and use the engine braking effect. When ascending a long grade, downshift

Tire pressures
When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the tire placard (located on the inside of the center console lid.) Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturers specifications.

Never connect a trailer brake system directly to the vehicle brake system.

Safety chain
Always use a suitable chain between your vehicle and the trailer. The chain should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave enough slack in the chain to permit turning corners.

Pre-towing tips
Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded and/or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down condition; check for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shifts while driving. Be certain your rear view mirrors conform to all federal, state or local regulations. If not, install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle.

Trailer lights
Trailer lights should comply with Federal and/or local regulations. When wiring the vehicle for towing, connect the stop and tail light pickup into the vehicle electrical circuit at a point between the sensor and stop light or light switch.

9-15

the transmission to a lower gear and reduce speed to reduce chances of engine overloading and/or overheating. If the engine coolant rises to an extremely high temperature when the air conditioning system is on, turn off the air conditioner. Coolant heat can be additionally vented by opening the windows, switching the fan control to high and setting the temperature control to the HOT position. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances. Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km). Have your vehicle serviced more often than at intervals specified in the recommended Maintenance Schedule. When making a turn, your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make a larger than normal turning radius during the turn. Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly causing vehicle sway. When being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect vehicle handling. If swaying does occur,

firmly grip the steering wheel, steer straight ahead, and immediately (but gradually) reduce vehicle speed. This combination will help stabilize the vehicle. Never increase speed. Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing while towing a trailer requires considerably more distance than normal passing. Remember the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes. To maintain engine braking efficiency and electrical charging performance, do not use fifth gear (manual transmission) or overdrive (automatic transmission). Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency. When towing a trailer, change oil in the transmission more frequently. See the Maintenance schedule.

9-16

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear
Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on tire wear rate when tested under controlled conditions on specified government test courses. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1-1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. However, relative tire performance depends on actual driving conditions, and may vary significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

The traction grade assigned to your vehicle tires is based on straight line braking traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.

Temperature A, B and C
Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C. They represent a tires resistance to heat build-up, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause tire material to degenerate, reducing tire life. Excessive temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a performance level which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades A and B represent higher levels of performance on laboratory test wheels than the minimum required by law.

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure problems.

Traction A, B and C
Traction grades are A (the highest), B and C. They represent a tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions, on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked with a C may have poor traction performance.

9-17

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY

Your NISSAN is covered by the following emission warranties.

For U.S.A.
1) Emission Defects Warranty 2) Emissions Performance Warranty

For Canada
Emission Control System Warranty Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your warranty information booklet that comes with your NISSAN. If you did not receive a warranty information booklet, or it has become lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to: Nissan Motor Corporation U.S.A. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 191 Gardena. Ca. 90247 Nissan Canada Inc. P.O. Box 1709, Station B Mississauga, Ontario, L4Y 4H6

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (For U.S.A.) If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, tollfree, at 1-800-NISSAN-1. In Hawaii call 531-0231.
9-18

bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you. Also available are Genuine NISSAN Service and Owners Manuals for older Nissan models.

A Genuine Nissan Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment procedures, this manual is the same one used by the factory trained technicians working at your Nissan dealership. Also available are Genuine NISSAN Owners Manuals. For current pricing and availability of a Genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Genuine NISSAN Owners Manual, contact:

In the U.S.A.: See your NISSAN dealer or contact: Dyment Distribution Services 20770 Westwood Dr. Strongsville OH 44136 In a hurry? Call 1-800-247-5321 and charge your purchase to Visa/Master Card. In Canada: To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owners Manual please contact your nearest NISSAN Dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN Dealer in your area call the Nissan Satisfaction Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a

9-19

MEMO

9-20

10 Index
A Air bag warning light ....................................... 2-21 Air cleaner filter............................................... 7-16 Air conditioner Air conditioner operation ............................. 3-5 Air conditioner specification label.............. 9-11 Automatic air conditioner............................. 3-9 Air flow chart ..................................................... 3-6 AM-FM radio with cassette player .................. 3-12 AM-FM radio with cassette player and compact disc player (Bose audio system) .................... 3-16 Antenna........................................................... 3-22 Anti-lock brake system ................................... 4-17 Automatic Automatic air conditioner............................. 3-9 Automatic transmission fluid ....................... 7-9 Driving with automatic transmission............ 4-6 Avoiding collision and rollover .......................... 4-3 B Battery............................................................. 7-12 Battery replacement.......................................... 2-7 Before starting the engine ................................ 4-6 Brake Anti-lock brake system .............................. 4-17 Brake and clutch fluid................................ 7-11 Brake booster ............................................ 7-20 Brake pedal ............................................... Brake wear indicators ........................ 1-8, Parking brake................................... 4-11, Break-in schedule ........................................... C D Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants... 9-2 Caution and warning labels ............................ 2-21 CB radio or car phone .................................... 3-23 Changing Changing engine coolant ............................ 7-5 Changing engine oil .................................... 7-7 Changing oil filter ........................................ 7-8 Checking engine coolant level.......................... 7-4 Checking engine oil level.................................. 7-6 Child restraints for infants and small children .... 229 Child safety ..................................................... 2-23 Child safety rear door lock................................ 2-3 Cigarette lighter and ash trays ....................... 1-17 Cleaning exterior and interior ........................... 6-2 Clock ............................................................... 1-21 Clutch pedal .................................................... 7-20 Cold weather driving cautions ........................ 4-18 Compact disc (CD) player operation .............. 3-21 Controls............................................................. 3-3 Coolant Changing engine coolant ............................ 7-5 Checking engine coolant level .................... 7-4 Defogger switch Rear window and outside mirror defogger switch......................................................... 1-12 Dimensions and weights................................... 9-8 Door lock operation .......................................... 2-6 Door locks ......................................................... 2-2 Door unlock operation ...................................... 2-6 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ................... 4-4 Drive belts ....................................................... 7-13 Driving Cold weather driving cautions................... 4-18 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving .............. 4-4 Driving with automatic transmission............ 4-6 Driving with manual transmission ............... 4-9 Precautions when driving .......................... 4-16 Precautions when starting and driving ........ 4-2 E Economy hints ................................................ 4-14 Emission control information label.................. 9-10 Emission control system warranty .................. 9-18 7-19 7-19 7-18 4-13 Engine coolant temperature gauge............. 1-4 Cornering light ................................................ 1-14 Corrosion protection ......................................... 6-5 Cruise control.................................................. 4-12 Cup and card holders ..................................... 1-18

Engine ............................................................... 9-7 Before starting the engine........................... 4-6 Changing engine coolant ............................ 7-5 Changing engine oil .................................... 7-7 Checking engine coolant level .................... 7-4 Checking engine oil level ............................ 7-6 Engine coolant temperature gauge............. 1-4 Engine cooling system ................................ 7-4 Engine oil..................................................... 7-6 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation.......................................... 9-4 Engine serial number ................................ 9-10 Starting the engine .................................... 4-10 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ...................... 4-2 Explanation of maintenance items.................. 8-10 F Flat tire .............................................................. 5-2 Fluid Automatic transmission fluid ....................... 7-9 Brake and clutch fluid................................ 7-11 Power steering fluid................................... 7-10 Window washer fluid ................................. 7-11 F.M.V.S.S. certification label........................... 9-10 Foldable outside mirrors ................................. 2-36 Front fog light switch ...................................... 1-15 Front personal light ......................................... 1-22 Fuel Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants .............................................. 9-2 Fuel filler cap............................................. 2-10 Fuel filler lid lock ....................................... 2-10 Fuel gauge .................................................. 1-5

Fuel recommendation.................................. 9-2 Fuses .............................................................. 7-20 Fusible links .................................................... 7-22 G Gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge............. Fuel gauge .................................................. Meters and gauges ..................................... General maintenance ....................................... Glove box lock .................................................. H Hazard warning flasher switch........................ 1-15 Head restraint ................................................. 2-15 Headlight and turn signal switch..................... 1-13 Headlights ....................................................... 7-22 Heated seat .................................................... 1-16 Heater operation ............................................... 3-4 Hood release .................................................... 2-8 I If your vehicle overheats .................................. 5-8 Ignition switch ................................................... 4-4 Inside mirror .................................................... 2-36 Installing license plate .................................... 9-11 Instrument brightness control ......................... 1-14 Interior light ..................................................... 1-21

J Jump starting ........................................... 5-6, 7-13 K Key.................................................................... 2-2

1-4 1-5 1-3 8-3 2-8

L License plate Installing license plate ............................... 9-11 Light Air bag warning light ................................. 2-21 Cigarette lighter and ash trays.................. 1-17 Cornering light ........................................... 1-14 Front fog light switch ................................. 1-15 Front personal light ................................... 1-22 Headlight and turn signal switch ............... 1-13 Headlights.................................................. 7-22 Interior light................................................ 1-21 Light bulbs ................................................. 7-22 Trunk light.................................................. 1-23 Vanity mirror light ...................................... 1-22 Warning/indicator light and buzzer.............. 1-6 Lock Anti-lock brake system .............................. 4-17 Child safety rear door lock .......................... 2-3 Clock.......................................................... 1-21 Door lock operation ..................................... 2-6 Door locks ................................................... 2-2 Door unlock operation ................................. 2-6 Fuel filler lid lock ....................................... 2-10 Glove box lock............................................. 2-8

10-2

Power door lock .......................................... 2-4 Trunk lid lock ............................................... 2-9 M Maintenance Explanation of maintenance items ............ 8-10 General maintenance .................................. 8-3 Periodic maintenance.................................. 8-5 Seat belt maintenance .............................. 2-29 Meters and gauges ........................................... 1-3 Mirror Foldable outside mirrors............................ 2-36 Inside mirror .............................................. 2-36 Outside mirror remote control ................... 2-36 Rear window and outside mirror defogger switch......................................................... 1-12 Vanity mirror light ...................................... 1-22 Multi-remote control system.............................. 2-5 O Odometer .......................................................... 1-4 Oil Changing engine oil .................................... 7-7 Changing oil filter ........................................ 7-8 Checking engine oil level ............................ 7-6 Engine oil..................................................... 7-6 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation.......................................... 9-4 Opener cancel lever for trunk lid .................... 2-10 Opening the drivers and front passengers window .............................................................. 2-6 Outside mirror remote control......................... 2-36

Overheat If your vehicle overheats ............................. 5-8 P Panic alarm operation....................................... 2-6 Parking Parking brake................................... 4-11, 7-18 Parking/parking on hills ............................. 4-15 Periodic maintenance ....................................... 8-5 Pocket ............................................................. 1-17 Power Power antenna .......................................... 3-22 Power door lock .......................................... 2-4 Power steering fluid................................... 7-10 Power window ........................................... 1-19 Precautions ....................................................... 7-2 Precautions on seat belt usage ................ 2-23 Precautions when driving .......................... 4-16 Precautions when starting and driving ........ 4-2 Push starting ..................................................... 5-8 R Radio............................................................... 3-11 AM-FM radio with cassette player ............ 3-12 AM-FM radio with cassette player and compact disc player (Bose audio system)............... 3-16 CB radio or car phone............................... 3-23 Radio operation ......................................... 3-17 Rear seat ........................................................ 2-16 Rear window and outside mirror defogger switch .............................................................. 1-12 Recommended SAE viscosity number ............. 9-5

Refrigerant recommendation ............................ 9-6 Reporting safety defects (For U.S.A.) ............ 9-18 S Safety Child safety................................................ 2-23 Child safety rear door lock .......................... 2-3 Reporting safety defects (For U.S.A.) ....... 9-18 Seat belt 2-point type without ................................... 2-27 3-point type seat belt with retractor .......... 2-25 Precautions on seat belt usage ................ 2-23 Seat belt extenders ................................... 2-28 Seat belt maintenance .............................. 2-29 Seat belts .................................................. 2-23 Seats............................................................... 2-12 Spark plug replacement.................................. 7-14 Speedometer .................................................... 1-4 Starting Before starting the engine........................... 4-6 Jump starting ..................................... 5-6, 7-13 Precautions when starting and driving ........ 4-2 Push starting ............................................... 5-8 Starting the engine .................................... 4-10 Steering Power steering fluid................................... 7-10 Tilting steering wheel ................................ 2-35 Sunroof ........................................................... 1-20 Supplemental restraint system (Air bag system) ........................................................... 2-17 Switch Front fog light switch ................................. 1-15 Hazard warning flasher switch .................. 1-15

10-3

Headlight and turn signal switch ............... 1-13 Ignition switch.............................................. 4-4 Rear window and outside mirror defogger switch......................................................... 1-12 Windshield wiper and washer switch ........ 1-11 T Tachometer ....................................................... 1-4 Theft warning .................................................... 1-9 Three way catalyst............................................ 4-2 Tilting steering wheel ...................................... 2-35 Timing chain ..................................................... 9-7 Tire Flat tire ........................................................ 5-2 Tire chains................................................. 7-30 Tire placard ............................................... 9-11 Uniform tire quality grading ....................... 9-15 Wheels and tires ................................ 7-29, 9-8 Tow truck towing............................................... 5-9 Towing Tow truck towing ......................................... 5-9 Towing load/specification chart ................. 9-14 Trailer towing............................................. 9-13 Trailer towing .................................................. 9-13 Transmission Automatic transmission fluid ....................... 7-9 Driving with automatic transmission............ 4-6 Driving with manual transmission ............... 4-9 Trip odometer ................................................... 1-4 Trunk lid lock .................................................... 2-9 Trunk lid opener operation ............................... 2-6 Trunk light ....................................................... 1-23

U Uniform tire quality grading............................. 9-17 V Vanity mirror light............................................ 1-22 Vehicle identification ......................................... 9-9 Vehicle identification number (Chassis number) ....................................................... 9-9 Vehicle identification number plate ............. 9-9 Vehicle loading information............................. 9-12 Vehicle recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle)............................................................ 5-10 Ventilator ........................................................... 3-2 W Warning Air bag warning light ................................. 2-21 Caution and warning labels....................... 2-21 Hazard warning flasher switch .................. 1-15 Theft warning............................................... 1-9 Warning/indicator light and buzzer.............. 1-6 Wheels and tires ..................................... 7-29, 9-8 Window washer fluid....................................... 7-11 Windshield wiper and washer switch.............. 1-11 Wiper Windshield wiper and washer switch ........ 1-11 Wiper blades ............................................. 7-17

10-4

GAS STATION INFORMATION Recommended fuel:

Unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96). If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Research octane number 91) can be used. However, for maximum vehicle performance, the use of unleaded premium gasoline is recommended.

QUICK REFERENCE Recommended engine oil specifications:

API SG or SH and Energy Conserving II API Certification Mark SAE 10W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for ambient temperatures above 0F (18C). See Engine oil and oil filter recommendation in the Technical and consumer information section. (page) In case of emergency.......................... 5-1 (Flat tire, engine will not start, overheating, towing) How to start the engine ....................... 4-1 Maintenance schedule......................... 8-1 Do-it-yourself operations .................... 7-1 Technical and consumer information ........................................... 9-1

Tire cold pressure:

See tire placard affixed to the center console lid.

Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control devices and systems, and could also affect the warranty coverage. Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, since this will damage the three way catalyst. For further details such as gasohol, see Fuel recommendation in the Technical and consumer Information section.

Recommended new vehicle break-in procedure:

During the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of vehicle use, follow the recommendations outlined in the BREAK-IN SCHEDULE Information found in the Starting and driving section of this Owners Manual. Follow these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life.

Hood release 2-8 Windshield washer fluid 7-12

Engine coolant 7-4 Meters and gauges 1-3 Engine oil 7-6

Seat 2-12 Trunk release (Type B) 2-9 Trunk release (Type A) 2-9 Seat belt 2-21

Audio system 3-11 Air conditioner 3-3

Key 2-2

Fuel 2-10, 9-2

Spare tire 5-2, 7-27

STI0046

Foreword
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence. It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control. This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle. A separate Warranty Information and Maintenance Log Booklet explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle and vehicle maintenance schedules. Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have any questions, he will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to him.

NOTES ON THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS OWNERS MANUAL IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS FOR SAFETY!
Follow these five important driving rules to help ensure a safe and complete trip for you and your passengers! NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions. ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle. ALWAYS review this Owners Manual for important safety information.
This owners manual contains descriptions and operating instructions for all systems, features and optional equipment that might appear in any model of this vehicle built for any destination in North America, including the continental United States, Canada and Hawaii. Therefore, you may very well find information in this manual that does not apply to your vehicle.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modification may not be covered under NISSAN warranties. All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or design without notice and without obligation.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways:

This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.

This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully.

SIC0697

If you see this symbol, it means Do not do this or Do not let this happen.

1996 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD. TOKYO, JAPAN

All rights reserved. No part of this Owners Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.

Welcome To The World Of NISSAN

Nissan pioneered the use of electronics and computers in automobiles, and has led the industry in improving both performance and fuel efficiency through new engine designs and the use of synthetic materials to reduce vehicle weight. The company has also developed ways to build quality into its vehicles at each stage of the production process, both through extensive use of automation and most importantly through an awareness that people are the central element in quality control. From the time the parts arrived from our suppliers until you took delivery of your new Nissan, dozens of checks were made to ensure that only the best job was being done in producing and delivering your vehicle. Nissan also takes great care to ensure that when you take your Nissan to your dealer for maintenance, the service technician will perform his work according to the quality standards that have been established by the factory. Safety has also been built into your Nissan. As you know, seat belts are an integral part of the safety systems that will help protect you and your passengers in the event of a sudden stop or an accident. We urge you to use the belts every time you drive the vehicle. The Nissan story of growth and achievement reflects our major goal: to provide you, our customer, with a vehicle that is built with quality and craftsmanship a product that we can be proud to build and you can be proud to own.

AFW0001

Your new Nissan is the result of our dedication to produce the finest in safe, reliable and economical transportation. Your vehicle is the product of a successful worldwide company that manufactures cars and trucks in over 17 countries and distributes them in 170 nations. Nissan vehicles are designed and manufactured by Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. which was founded in Tokyo, Japan in 1933, and Nissan affiliates world wide, collectively growing to become the fifth largest automaker in the world. In addition to cars and trucks, Nissan also makes textile machinery, fork-lift trucks, marine engines, boats and other products. Nissan has made a substantial and growing investment in North America, starting with the opening of Nissan Motor Corporation U.S.A. in 1960 and continuing with the production of some cars and trucks at one of the worlds most

modern manufacturing facilities, Nissan Motor Manufacturing Corporation U.S.A. in Smyrna, Tennessee, vehicle styling at Nissan Design International in San Diego, California, and engineering at Nissan Research and Development in Farmington Hills, Michigan. Nissan Motor Corporation U.S.A. and its dealers indirectly employ about 60,000 Americans. Nissan is also a substantial contributor to the Canadian economy. Nissan Canada Inc., its suppliers and over 170 dealers employ approximately 4,500 people. These include company employees and the staffs of Nissan dealers all across Canada. In addition, many Canadians work for companies that supply Nissan and Nissan dealers with materials and services ranging from operation of port facilities and transportation services, to the supply of lubricants, parts and accessories.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

NISSAN CARES ... Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSAN dealer can not assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions, please contact our (NISSANs) Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number: For U.S. mainland customers 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261) For Hawaii customers (808)836-0888 (Oahu Number) For Canada customers 1-800-387-0122 The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information: Your name, address, and telephone number Vehicle identification number (on dashboard) Date of purchase Current odometer reading Your NISSAN dealers name Your comments or questions OR

You can write to NISSAN with the information on the left at: For U.S. mainland and Alaska customers Nissan Motor Corporation U.S.A. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 191 Gardena, California 90248-0191 For Hawaii customers Nissan Motor Corporation in Hawaii 2880 Kilihau St. Honolulu, Hawaii 96819 For Canada customers Nissan Canada Inc. P.O. Box 1709, Station B Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4H6

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

Contents

Instruments and controls Pre-driving checks and adjustments Heater, air conditioner and audio system Starting and driving In case of emergency Appearance and interior care Do-it-yourself operations Maintenance schedule Technical and consumer information Index

1 Instruments and controls

Meters and gauges ................................................... 1-3 Warning/indicator light and buzzer............................ 1-6 Theft warning (If so equipped) ................................ 1-10 Windshield wiper and washer switch ...................... 1-12 Rear window and outside mirror defogger switch ....................................................... 1-13 Headlight and turn signal switch ............................. 1-14 Instrument brightness control.................................. 1-15 Front fog light switch (If so equipped) .................... 1-15 Hazard warning flasher switch ................................ 1-16 Heated seats (If so equipped)................................. 1-16

Cigarette lighter and ash trays................................ Pocket ..................................................................... Cup holder............................................................... Power window ......................................................... Sunroof (If so equipped) ......................................... Clock ....................................................................... Interior light ............................................................. Front personal light ................................................. Vanity mirror light .................................................... Trunk light ............................................................... Integrated HomeLink transmitter (If so equipped) .......................................................

1-17 1-18 1-19 1-19 1-21 1-22 1-22 1-23 1-23 1-23 1-24

Windshield wiper/washer switch (P.1-12) Instrument brightness control switch (P.1-15) Meters/gauges (P.1-3) Theft warning light (P.1-10) Cruise control main switch (P.4-13) Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch (P.1-14)

Hazard warning flasher switch (P.1-16) Ventilator (P.3-2) Heater/air conditioner control (P.3-3) Clock (P.1-22) Radio/cassette player (P.3-11)/CD player (P.3-26) Rear window and outside mirror defogger switch (P.1-13) Passenger supplemental air bag (P.2-17)

Hood release handle (P.2-8) Outside mirror remote control (P.2-39) Fuse box cover (P.7-22) Tilting steering wheel lock lever (P.2-38) Driver supplemental air bag (P.2-17) Ignition switch/steering lock (P.4-4) Cruise control set switch (P.4-13)

Glove box (P.2-8)

Ash tray (P.1-17) Cigarette lighter (accessory) (P.1-17) Heated seat switch (P.1-16)

See the page indicated in parentheses for operating details.

SIC0692

1-2

METERS AND GAUGES

SIC0711

1-3

SIC0171

SIC0172

SIC0173

SPEEDOMETER
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (r/min).

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE

The gauge indicates the coolant temperature. The coolant temperature will vary with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.

ODOMETER
The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

TRIP ODOMETER
The trip odometer records the distance of individual trips. Before each trip, set the trip odometer to zero by pushing the RESET button.

When engine speed approaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.

1-4

If the gauge indicates over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. See In case of emergency section for immediate action required.

The indicator light comes on when the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the gauge reaches E. There should be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E.

SIC0174

FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the APPROXIMATE fuel level in the tank. The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hill. The gauge needle is designed to remain in approximately the same position, even when the ignition key is turned OFF. Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers Empty.

1-5

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHT AND BUZZER

or warning light Seat belt warning light Low washer fluid warning light Anti-lock brake warning light Engine oil pressure warning light CRUISE indicator light Supplemental air bag warning light

Turn signal/hazard indicator light High beam indicator light (blue) Charge warning light Door open warning light

or

Overdrive off indicator light or Malfunction indicator light (MIL)

Checking bulbs
Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition key to ON without starting the engine. The following lights will come on: , or , , or The following lights come on briefly and then go off: or , , If any light fails to come on, it may indicate a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system. Have the system repaired promptly.

Engine oil pressure warning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop. The oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. See Engine oil in the Do-it-yourself operations section. Running the engine with the oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.

Charge warning light

If the light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate that there is something wrong with the charging system. Turn the engine off and check the alternator belt. If the

1-6

belt is loose, broken, missing or if the light remains on, see your NISSAN dealer immediately.

Supplemental air bag warning light

When the ignition key is in the ON or START position, the supplemental air bag light will illuminate for about 7 seconds and then turn off. This means the system is operational. If any of the following conditions occur, the supplemental air bag needs servicing and your vehicle must be taken to your nearest authorized NISSAN dealer. 1. The supplemental air bag light goes off within 7 seconds. 2. The supplemental air bag light flashes intermittently or remains on (after 7 seconds). 3. The supplemental air bag light does not come on at all. Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental Restraint System may not function properly. For additional details on the Supplemental Air Bag System, see Section 2.

accident.

Low washer fluid warning light (If so equipped)

This light comes on when the washer tank fluid is at a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary. See the Do-it-yourself operations section.

Do not continue driving if the belt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors are not closed securely while the ignition key is ON.

or

Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems. Parking brake indicator The light comes on when the parking brake is applied. Low brake fluid warning The light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following: 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. See Brake and clutch fluid in the Do-it-yourself operations section.

Seat belt warning light and buzzer

The light and buzzer remind you to fasten seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition key is turned to ON, and will remain illuminated until the drivers seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the buzzer will sound for about six seconds unless the drivers seat belt is securely fastened. Refer to Seat belts in the Pre-driving checks and adjustments section for precautions on seat belt usage.

If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the supplemental air bag will not operate in an

1-7

or
Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed. Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped could increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as greater pedal travel. If the level is below the MINIMUM mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked at a NISSAN dealer. 2. If the brake fluid level is correct: Have the warning system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Anti-lock brake warning light (If so equipped)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

The light flashes when the turn signal switch lever or hazard switch is turned on.

If the light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate there is something wrong with the anti-lock portion of the brake system. Have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. However if the light illuminates while starting the engine, it does not indicate a system malfunction. If an abnormality occurs in the system, the anti-lock function will cease but the ordinary brakes will continue to operate normally. If the light comes on while you are driving, contact your NISSAN dealer for repair.

High beam indicator light (Blue)

This light comes on when the headlight high beam is on and goes out when the low beam is selected.

Cruise indicator light

The light comes on while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control system. If the light flickers while the engine is running, it may indicate there is something wrong with the cruise control system. Have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer.

Overdrive off indicator light

This light comes on when the overdrive switch is pushed to the OFF position. However when the ignition key is in the ON or START position and the overdrive switch is not in the OFF position, the light will illuminate for about 2 seconds and then turn off. This means the system is operational.

Key reminder buzzer

The buzzer will sound if the driver side door is opened while the key is left in the ignition switch (ignition switch is turned off). Remove the key and take it with you when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder buzzer

A buzzer will sound when the driver side door is opened if the light switch is turned on

1-8

(ignition switch is turned off). Turn the light switch off when you leave the vehicle.

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Malfunction indicator light blinking An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To reduce or avoid emission control system damage: * do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH (72 km/h). * avoid hard acceleration or deceleration. * avoid steep uphill grades. * if possible, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed. The malfunction indicator light may stop blinking and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

indicator light to come on steady or blink. Examples are as follows: vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire. fuel filler cap was left off or improperly installed, allowing fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. If you suspect that you experienced one or both of the above conditions, drive the vehicle to an authorized NISSAN dealer and have the vehicle inspected. Avoid any unnecessary diagnosis during the service by informing the dealer of the conditions listed above that may have occurred.

or

Malfunction indicator light (MIL)

If the Malfunction indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control problem. The Malfunction indicator light will come on in one of two ways: Malfunction indicator light on steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission control system, which may affect your warranty coverage. Some conditions may cause the malfunction

1-9

THEFT WARNING (If so equipped)

4. Confirm that the indicator light comes on. The light will glow for about 30 seconds and then blink. The system is now activated. If, during this 30 second time period, the door is unlocked by the key or multi-remote controller, or the ignition key is turned to ACC, the system will not activate.

IC0005

SIC0175

The theft warning system provides visual and audio alarm signals if parts of the vehicle are disturbed.

How to activate the theft warning system

1. Close all windows. The system can be activated even if the windows are open. 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 3. Close and lock all doors, hood and trunk lid. The doors can be locked either with or without the key.

If the key is turned quickly when locking the door, the system may not activate. Furthermore, if the key is turned excessively to the unlock position, the system may be deactivated when the key is removed. If the indicator light fails to glow for 30 seconds, unlock the door once and lock it again. Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will activate with all doors, hood and trunk lid locked and ignition key off. Turn the ignition key to ACC to turn the system off.

1-10

Theft warning system operation

The warning system will give the following alarm: The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently. In addition, the starter motor will not operate. The alarm automatically turns off after 2 to 3 minutes; however, the alarm will reactivate if the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm is activated by: Unlocking the door or opening the trunk lid without using the key or multi-remote controller. (Even if the door is opened by releasing the door inside lock knob or the trunk lid is opened by operating the opener lever/button, the alarm is activated.) Opening the hood. Pushing in or pulling out of the key cylinder on the door or trunk lid.

scribed above, have it checked by your NISSAN dealer.

How to stop alarm

The alarm will stop only by unlocking a door or trunk lid with the key or multi-remote controller. The alarm will not stop if the ignition switch is turned to ACC. If the system does not operate as de-

1-11

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield.

SIC0176

The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position. Push the lever down to operate the wiper. Intermittent operation can be adjusted from 3 to 21 seconds by turning the knob. (Type B only) Pull the lever toward you to operate the washer. Then the wiper will also operate several times. The following could damage the washer system: Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds. Do not operate the washer if the reservoir tank is empty.

1-12

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR DEFOGGER SWITCH

When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defogger.

SIC0177

To defog the rear window glass and outside mirrors, start the engine and push the switch on. (The indicator light will come on.) Push the switch again to turn the defogger off. It will automatically turn off in approximately 15 minutes.

1-13

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Daytime running light system (For Canada)
The headlights automatically illuminate at a reduced intensity when the engine is started with the parking brake released. The daytime running lights operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position or in the position. Turn the headlight switch to the position for full illumination when driving at night. If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the daytime running lights do not illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate once the parking brake is released. The daytime running lights will remain on until the ignition switch is turned off.

SIC0188

Lighting
Turn the switch to the position: The front clearance, side marker, tail, license plate and instrument lights will come on.

Turn the switch to the

position:

When the daytime running light system is active, tail lights on your vehicle will not be on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

Headlights will come on and all the other lights remain on. To select the high beam, push the lever forward. Pull it back to select the low beam.

1-14

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL Passing signal

Pulling the lever toward you will turn on the headlight high beam.

FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH (If so equipped)

Turn signal
Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal

To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or down to the point where lights begin flashing.
IC1284MA IC1292

The instrument brightness control operates when the light switch is in the or position. Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instrument panel lights (except clock) and power window switch lights. When the control is turned to the right until a click sound is heard, the light intensity will be at maximum. When the control is turned to the left until a click sound is heard, the light will be turned off.

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch to the position, then turn the switch to the position. To turn them off, turn the switch to the OFF position. The headlights must be on for the fog lights to operate.

1-15

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic. Turn signals do not work when the switch is operating. The flasher can be actuated with the ignition switch either off or on.

HEATED SEATS (If so equipped)

SIC0178

SIC0693

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights will flash. Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving.

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The switches located on the center console can be operated independently of each other. 1. Start the engine.

When stalled or stopped on the roadway under emergency conditions, move the vehicle well off the road. Do not use the switch while moving

The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running. 2. Selecting heat range.

1-16

CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND ASH TRAYS

For Low heat, press the top of the switch. For High heat, press the bottom of the switch. For No heat, the switch has a center OFF position between Low and High. The indicator light in the switch will illuminate when Low or High is selected. The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on. 3. When the vehicles interior is warmed, or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off. on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater. Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth. When cleaning the seat, never use benzine, thinner, or any similar materials. If any abnormalities are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch OFF and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer.

SIC0694

The cigarette lighter element is an accessory. A genuine NISSAN cigarette lighter or equivalent can be purchased from your local NISSAN dealer. The cigarette lighter operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. Push the lighter in all the way. When the lighter is heated, it will spring out. Return the lighter to its original position after use.

Do not use the seat heater for extended periods, or when the seat is not occupied. Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated. Do not place anything hard or heavy

1-17

POCKET
given to the driving operation.

The cigarette lighter should not be used while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation.

The cigarette lighter socket is a power source for the cigarette lighter element only. The use of the cigarette lighter socket as a power source for any other accessory is not recommended.

SIC0181

The pocket should not be used while driving in order that full attention may be

1-18

CUP HOLDER

POWER WINDOW

Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger. Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.
SIC0695 SIC0182

The cup holder should not be used while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation.

Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc. inside the vehicle before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls and become trapped in a window. Unattended children could become

1-19

involved in serious accidents. The power window only operates when the ignition key is in the ON position. To open or close the window, push down or pull up the switch and hold it. The main switch (driver side switches) will open or close all the windows.

Locking passengers window

When the lock button is pushed in, only the driver side window can be opened or closed. Push it in again to cancel.
SIC0183 SIC0184

The passenger side switch will open or close only the corresponding window. To open or close the window, hold the switch down or up.

Automatic operation
To fully open the driver side window, completely push down the switch and release it; it need not be held. The window will automatically open all the way. To stop the window, just pull up the switch toward the CLOSE side. A light press on the switch will cause the window to open until the switch is released.

1-20

SUNROOF (If so equipped) Sun shade

Open/close the sun shade by sliding it backward/forward. The shade will open automatically when the sunroof is opened. However, it must be closed manually.

If the sunroof does not close

Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the sunroof.

IC1432

In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open sunroof. Always use seat belts and child restraints properly. Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the roof is closing.

The sunroof will only operate when the ignition key is in the ON position.

Sliding the sunroof

To open the roof, keep pressing the switch to the side. To close the roof, keep pressing the switch to side. the

Tilting the sunroof

To tilt up, first close the sunroof, then keep pushing the side of the tilt switch. To tilt down the sunroof, keep pushing the side.

Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from the sunroof before opening. Do not place any heavy object on the sunroof or surrounding area.

1-21

CLOCK

INTERIOR LIGHT
and the drivers door is opened and then closed. The timer is cancelled, and the interior light will turn off when: The drivers door is locked. The ignition switch is turned ON.

Leaving the interior light switch in the ON position for extended periods of time will result in a discharged battery.
AIC0500 IC1226

The digital clock displays time when the ignition key is in ACC or ON. If the power supply is disconnected, the clock will not indicate the correct time. Readjust the time.

The interior light has a three-position switch. When the switch is in the center k position, the light will illuminate when a door is opened.

Interior light timer

The interior light will stay on for about 30 seconds when: The drivers door is unlocked while the key is removed from the ignition switch. The key is removed from the ignition switch while the drivers door is closed. The key is removed from the ignition switch

Adjusting the time

Push the H button to adjust the hour. Push the M button to adjust the minute.

1-22

FRONT PERSONAL LIGHT

VANITY MIRROR LIGHT

TRUNK LIGHT
The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the light will go off.

IC1019

SIC0186

The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when the cover on the vanity mirror is opened.

IC1163-A

1-23

INTEGRATED HomeLink TRANSMITTER (If so equipped)

The Integrated HomeLink Transmitter provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device.

THE INTEGRATED HomeLink TRANSMITTER:

will operate garage doors, gates, home/ office lighting systems and security systems by storing and transmitting the programming information of your current handheld transmitters. is built-in and powered by your vehicles battery and charging system. No separate batteries are necessary.

Do not use this Integrated HomeLink Transmitter with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards (these standards became effective for models manufactured after April 1, 1982). A garage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse the door, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death.

SIC0696

PROGRAMMING THE HomeLink TRANSMITTER

During the programming procedure your garage door or security gate will open and close (if the transmitter is within range). Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage door, gate, etc. that you are programming. Your vehicles engine should be turned off while programming your transmitter.

1-24

The Integrated HomeLink Transmitter may not work with older garage door openers that do not meet current Federal Consumer Safety Standards. 1. Test the Integrated HomeLink Transmitter by pressing any button. The red indicator light should come on. If you have previously programmed a button proceed to step 3. 2. Clear all channels on the Integrated HomeLink Transmitter by holding down both outside buttons (#1 & #3) until the red light begins to flash rapidly (approximately 20 seconds). Then release both buttons. 3. Select which of the three Integrated HomeLink Transmitter buttons you want to program. 4. Hold your hand-held transmitter against the bottom surface of the Integrated HomeLink Transmitter so that you can still see the red indicator light. 5. Press the desired button until the red indicator light flashes slowly. Do not release the button. Continue holding and press the hand-held transmitter button through step 6.

6. Hold down both buttons until the red indicator light on the Integrated HomeLink Transmitter flashes rapidly (This may take 1-90 seconds). Then release both buttons. The rapid flashing means that the transmitter has been successfully programmed to match your handheld transmitter. You can now use the Integrated HomeLink Transmitter instead of your hand-held transmitter. Note to Canadian users: Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required many hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting after one or two seconds, even though you continue to hold down the button. If you think you have one of these hand-held transmitters, you should press and re-press the transmitter button every 2 seconds without ever releasing the integrated HomeLink Transmitter button. The indicator light on the Integrated HomeLink Transmitter should blink rapidly indicating a successful programming procedure. If it returns to the slow blink of program mode, continue to periodically reactivate your handheld transmitter until a successful programming procedure is indicated by the rapidly flashing indicator light.

OPERATING THE TRANSMITTER

To operate, simply press the appropriate button on the Integrated HomeLink Transmitter. The red indicator light illuminates while the signal is being transmitted. The effective transmission range of the Integrated HomeLink Transmitter may differ from your hand-held transmitter.

PROGRAMMING PROBLEM DIAGNOSIS

Be sure to keep your original hand-held transmitter for possible reprogramming if necessary. Make sure batteries in the hand-held transmitter are fully charged. Hold your hand-held transmitter against the bottom surface of the Integrated HomeLink Transmitter so that you can still see the red indicator light. Hold buttons for duration of the programming without interruption. Rotate your hand-held transmitter endover-end and program again. For best results, place the end opposite the battery compartment against the Integrated

1-25

HomeLink ming.

Transmitter when program-

flashes rapidly for 1 to 2 seconds, then remains on, your garage door opener has a rolling code system. To operate your Rolling Code garage door opener from your HomeLink Transmitter, follow these steps: 1. Program your hand held transmitter to the HomeLink Transmitter by following the procedures outlined above (if not yet programmed). 2. Program your garage door opener receiver to recognize your HomeLink Transmitter (The HomeLink Transmitter follows the same procedure to train to the receiver as your hand held transmitter did when it was first installed): a) Remove the cover panel from your garage door opener receiver. The receiver should be located by the garage door opener motor. b) Locate the training button on the garage door opener receiver. The exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand. If you have difficulty locating the training button, reference your garage door opener manual. If you have difficulty programming your garage door opener equipped

SPA0609

ROLLING CODES (If so equipped)

If your hand held transmitter appears to train to the HomeLink Transmitter, but does not open your garage door, and your garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, your garage door opener may have a Code Protected or Rolling Code feature. This type of system will change the code of your garage door opener every time you open or close your garage door. To determine if you have one of these systems, depress the button on the HomeLink Transmitter that you have just programmed. If the LED on the HomeLink Transmitter

1-26

with a rolling code system to recognize the HomeLink Transmitter with the Rolling Code feature, call NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department. c) Press the training button on the garage door opener receiver for 1 to 2 seconds. d) Return to the HomeLink Transmitter in the vehicle, and depress the programmed HomeLink button for the duration of the fast blink on the HomeLink Transmitter (1 to 2 seconds). Release the button, and re-press to confirm that the system has trained. e) Your garage door opener should now recognize your HomeLink Transmitter. You may use either your HomeLink Transmitter or your original hand held transmitter to open your garage door.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMING INFORMATION

Should you sell your vehicle, be sure to clear the channels of the Integrated HomeLink Transmitter. To clear the channels, simultaneously hold down the outside two buttons (#1 & #3) until the red indicator light begins to flash rapidly (approximately 20 seconds). This will clear all three buttons. Individual buttons cannot be cleared, but can be reprogrammed at any time by following the programming procedures described above.

15. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference and (2) This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the device. DOC: ISTC 1763K1313 FCC I.D.: CB2V67690

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS EVER STOLEN

If your vehicle has been stolen, you should change the codes of any device that was programmed into the Integrated HomeLink Transmitter as soon as possible. Consult the owners manual of each device, or call the manufacturer or dealer of those devices. When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the Integrated HomeLink Transmitter with your new transmitter information. FCC Notice: This device complies with FCC rules part

1-27

MEMO

1-28

2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Key ............................................................................ 2-2 Door locks ................................................................. 2-2 Multi-remote control system (If so equipped) ........... 2-5 Hood release ............................................................. 2-8 Glove box lock .......................................................... 2-8 Trunk lid lock ............................................................. 2-9 Fuel filler lid lock ..................................................... 2-10 Seats ....................................................................... 2-12 Supplemental restraint system (Supplemental air bag system) ............................... 2-17 Supplemental air bag warning labels...................... 2-22 Supplemental air bag warning light......................... 2-22 Seat belts ................................................................ 2-24 Child restraints for infants and small children......... 2-31 Tilting steering wheel .............................................. 2-38 Outside mirror remote control ................................. 2-39 Foldable outside mirrors.......................................... 2-39 Inside mirror ............................................................ 2-40

KEY
A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, this key can be duplicated by your NISSAN dealer or a lock smith shop.

DOOR LOCKS

SPA0083

SPA0084

The master key can be used for all the locks. Record the key number on the key number plate and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), NOT IN THE CAR. A key number plate is supplied with your key. Keep the plate in a safe place. NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate.

Locking front doors with key

To lock the door, turn the key towards the front of the vehicle. To unlock, turn it towards the rear. Locking the front door will simultaneously lock the other doors.

2-2

 Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out intruders.
SPA0085

Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

SPA0086

Locking the doors without key

To lock from the outside without a key, move the inside lock knob to the LOCK position. Then close the door. When locking the door this way, be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle. The inside lock knob cannot be set to the LOCK position with the front doors open and with the key in the ignition.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety locking helps prevent doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle. When the lever is in the lock position, the rear door can be opened only from the outside.

2-3

the LOCK position will lock all doors.

SPA0087

SPA0088

POWER DOOR LOCK

The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors simultaneously. Turning the front door key to the front of the vehicle will lock all doors. Turning the front door key one time to the rear of the vehicle will unlock the corresponding door. From that position, returning the key to Neutral (where the key can only be removed and inserted.) and turning it to the rear again within 5 seconds will unlock all doors. Pushing the front door inside lock knob to

Operating the lock-unlock switch will lock or unlock all doors.

Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

2-4

MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM (If so equipped)

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, to open the drivers and front passengers windows, to release the trunk lid and to turn on or off the interior light by using the remote controller from outside the car. Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle before locking the doors and leaving it. The remote controller can operate at a distance of approximately 49 ft (15 m) from the vehicle. (The effective distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.) As many as four remote controllers can be used with one vehicle. For information concerning the purchase and use of additional remote controllers, contact your NISSAN dealer.

Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the remote controller. Do not allow the remote controller to become wet. Do not drop the remote controller. Do not strike the remote controller sharply against another object.
SPA0277

Do not place the remote controller for

2-5

an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140F (60C).

DOOR LOCK OPERATION

1. Remove the ignition key. 2. Close all doors. 3. Push the lock button on the remote controller. 4. The hazard indicator flashes twice. 5. All doors will lock. Although door locking with the remote controller can be confirmed by looking at the hazard indicator, always check to be sure that the doors are properly locked before leaving your vehicle.

The interior light can be turned off without waiting for 30 seconds by inserting the key into the ignition and turning it ON or by locking the doors with the remote controller or by pushing the interior light button.

PANIC ALARM OPERATION

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the alarm to call attention as follows: 1. Push the panic alarm button on the remote controller for longer than 1.5 seconds. 2. The theft warning alarm and headlight will stay on for 30 seconds. 3. The alarm will stop when any of the key functions on the remote controller are used. The remote controller will not function. When the key is inserted into the key switch. When the battery in the remote controller is dead. The distance between the remote controller and vehicle is more than approx. 49 ft (15 m).

OPENING THE DRIVERS AND FRONT PASSENGERS WINDOW

1. Push the unlock button on the remote controller for longer than 1.5 seconds after the drivers door is unlocked. 2. The drivers and front passengers window will open. The drivers and front passengers window will also open after all doors are unlocked with the remote controller. The drivers and front passengers window cannot be closed by using the remote controller.

DOOR UNLOCK OPERATION

1. Push the unlock button on the remote controller. 2. Only the driver side door will unlock. Push the unlock button on the remote controller again within 5 seconds. All doors will unlock. 3. The interior light will stay on for 30 seconds when the interior light switch is in the center k position.

TRUNK LID OPENER OPERATION

1. Push the trunk lid release button on the remote controller for longer than 0.5 second. 2. The trunk lid will open. The trunk lid will not open when the trunk lid cancel lever is in the CANCEL position. It can be opened only with the key.

2-6

Recommended battery: Sanyo CR2025 or equivalent 3. Close the lid securely. 4. Push the remote controller button two or three times to check its operation. If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement, perform step 4 above. An improperly disposed battery can harm the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal. The remote controller is water-resistant; however, if it does get wet, immediately wipe completely dry. When changing batteries, do not let dust or oil get on the controller. FCC Notice: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of the device.

SPA0090

BATTERY REPLACEMENT
Replace the battery as follows: 1. Open the lid using a suitable tool. 2. Replace the battery with a new one.

2-7

HOOD RELEASE

GLOVE BOX LOCK

SPA0466 1 lo1. Pull the hood lock release handle k cated below the instrument panel; the hood will then spring up slightly. 2 at the front of the hood with 2. Pull the lever k your fingertips and raise the hood.

SPA0092

When locking or unlocking the glove box, use the master key. Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident. If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury, do not open the hood. The glove box may be opened by pulling the handle.

3. When closing the hood, slowly close the hood and make sure it locks into place.

Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

2-8

TRUNK LID LOCK

push the trunk lid down securely. Type B The trunk lid release button is located under the drivers arm rest. To open the trunk lid, push the release button. To close, push the trunk lid down securely.

SPA0094

Key operation
To open the trunk lid, turn the key clockwise. To close, lower and push the trunk lid down securely.

SPA0093

Trunk lid release operation

Type A The trunk lid release lever is located on the outside of the drivers seat. To open the trunk lid, pull up the trunk lid release lever. To close,

Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See Exhaust Gas in the Starting and driving section.

2-9

FUEL FILLER LID LOCK

SPA0095

SPA0096

SPA0119

OPENER CANCEL LEVER FOR TRUNK LID

When the lever is in the CANCEL position, the trunk lid cannot be opened with the trunk lid release lever or handle. It can be opened only with the key.

Opener lever
Type A To open the fuel filler lid, pull the opener lever. To lock, close the fuel filler lid securely. Type B To open the fuel filler lid, push the opener lever down. To lock, close the fuel filler lid securely.

FUEL FILLER CAP

The fuel filler cap is a screw-on ratcheting type. Tighten the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are heard.

Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or

2-10

sparks near the vehicle when refueling. Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the cap one-half turn and wait for any hissing sound to stop, to prevent fuel from spraying out and possible personal injury. Then remove the cap. Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury.

SPA0120

Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder while refueling.

If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the malfunction indicator light (MIL) may come on.

2-11

SEATS SEAT ADJUSTMENT

Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of control of the vehicle. After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked.
SPA0472 SPA0473

Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

For most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly. See Precautions on seat belt usage later in this chapter.

2-12

SPA0097

SPA0099

Forward and backward

Pull the lever up while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

Seat lifter (Drivers seat)

Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion to the desired position.

Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean back. To bring the seatback forward again, pull the lever and move your body forward. The seatback moves forward.

2-13

Forward and backward

Moving the switch forward or backward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position.

Reclining
Move the recline switch backward until the desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback forward again, move the switch forward and move your body forward. The seatback will move forward.

SPA0098

POWER SUPPORT SEAT (If so equipped)

Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

Operating tips
Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operations. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. The motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate the switch. Do not operate the power support seat for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery.

2-14

SPA0100

SPA0467

SPA0014

Seat lifter (Drivers seat)

Push the front or rear end of the switch up or down to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion.

Lumbar support (Drivers seat)

Turn the lever forward or backward to adjust the seat lumbar area.

HEAD RESTRAINT
To raise the head restraint, just pull it up. To lower, push the lock knob and push the head restraint down. Adjust the top of the head restraints level with the top of your ears.

Head restraints should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident. Do not remove them. Check the adjust-

2-15

ment after someone else uses the seat.

SPA0102

REAR SEAT Center armrest and tray

Pull the armrest forward and lay it horizontal. Then release the lever (inset) and pull the tray forward (If so equipped). In this condition you

are able to gain access to the trunk room.

2-16

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEM)

This Supplemental Restraint System section contains important information concerning the driver and passenger supplemental air bags. The Supplemental Restraint System Air Bag can help reduce impact force to the driver and to the front passenger in certain frontal collisions. The supplemental air bags are designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and passenger seat belts and are not a substitute for them. The seat belts should always be correctly worn and the driver and front passenger seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel and instrument panel. (See Seat belts for instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.) After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

SPA0504

SPA0505

The supplemental air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, roll over, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

The seat belts and the supplemental air bags are most effective when you are sitting back and upright in the seat. Supplemental air bags inflate with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash and may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the supplemental air bag if you are up

2-17

SPA0476

SPA0477

SPA0478

against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always use the seat belts. Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the supplemental air bag inflates.

SPA0479

2-18

 Never let children ride unrestrained. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations. Children may be severely injured or killed when the supplemental air bag inflates if they are not properly restrained.
SPA0480 SPA0482

Also, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating supplemental air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. See Child restraints for infants and small children for details.

SPA0481

SPA0483

2-19

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or dashboard. Since the supplemental air bag inflates quickly in order to help protect the occupant, the force of the supplemental air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against the supplemental air bag module during inflation. The supplemental air bag will deflate quickly after a collision. After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

SPA0103A

Supplemental air bag system

The driver supplemental air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel; the front passenger supplemental air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. The supplemental air bag system is designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although it may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. It may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental air bag operation. When the supplemental air bag inflates, a fairly

loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire, but care should be taken not to intentionally inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of breathing trouble should get fresh air promptly. Supplemental air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the occupant. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating supplemental air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Supplemental air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.

Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental air bag inflates. Right after inflation, several supple-

2-20

mental air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system. Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicles electrical system, suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the supplemental air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the dashboard, or by installing additional trim material around the supplemental air bag system.

Work around and on the supplemental air bag system should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the supplemental air bag system. The SRS wiring harnesses are covered with yellow insulation either just before the harness connectors or for the complete harness, for easy identification. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the supplemental air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual.

2-21

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT

SPA0104A

SPA0105

Warning labels about the supplemental air bag system are placed in the vehicle.

The supplemental air bag light, displaying AIR BAG in the instrument panel, monitors the circuits of the supplemental air bag. The circuits monitored by the supplemental air bag light are the diagnosis sensor unit, supplemental air bag modules and all related wiring. When the ignition key is in the ON or START position, the supplemental air bag light will illuminate for about 7 seconds and then turn off. This means the system is operational.

2-22

If any of the following conditions occurs, the supplemental air bag needs servicing: 1. The supplemental air bag light goes off within 7 seconds. 2. The supplemental air bag light flashes intermittently or remains on (after 7 seconds). 3. The supplemental air bag light does not come on at all. Under these conditions, the Supplemental Restraint System Air Bag may not operate properly. It must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest authorized NISSAN dealer.

inflation has occurred. Repair and replacement of the supplemental air bag system should be done only by authorized NISSAN dealers. To ensure long-term functioning, the system must be inspected 10 years after the date of manufacture noted on the certification label located on the driver side center pillar. When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the supplemental air bag system and related parts should be pointed out to the person conducting the maintenance. The ignition key should always be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle.

should be inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end portion of the vehicle. If you need to dispose of a supplemental air bag or scrap the vehicle, contact an authorized NISSAN dealer. Correct supplemental air bag disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the supplemental air bag will not operate in an accident.

Repair and replacement procedure

The supplemental air bag system is designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag light will remain illuminated after

Once the supplemental air bag has inflated, the supplemental air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. The supplemental air bag module should be replaced by an authorized NISSAN dealer. The supplemental air bag module cannot be repaired. The supplemental air bag system

2-23

SEAT BELTS PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE

Your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced if you are wearing your seat belt and it is properly adjusted. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag. Some states, provinces or territories require that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SPA0506

SPA0485

Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be properly restrained and, if appropriate, in a child restraint. The belt should be adjusted properly and to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly. Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the belt behind your backs under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Position the lap belt as low and snug

2-24

 Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts. If the seat belt warning lamp glows continuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. All seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware should be inspected by your NISSAN dealer after any collision. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Infants and children need special protection. The vehicles seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints. All U.S. states and provinces of Canada require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. (See Child restraints for infants and small children later in this section.) In addition, there are many types of child restraints available for larger children which should be used for maximum protection.

SPA0486

as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident. Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle. Do not wear the belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness. Do not allow more than one person to use the same belt.

Infant or small child CHILD SAFETY

Children need adults to help protect them. NISSAN recommends that infants or small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-

2-25

facturers instructions for installation and use.

Children
Children who are too large for child restraint systems should be seated and restrained by the seat belts which are provided. NISSAN recommends that children sit in the rear seat if possible. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. If the childs seating position has a shoulder belt that fits close to the face or neck, the use of a booster seat (commercially available) may help overcome this. The booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top, middle portion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck, use the shoulder belt without the booster seat. Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is moving. The child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident.

PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations. The lap belt should be worn snug and positioned as low as possible around the hips, not the waist.

SPA0492

INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations.

3-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR

Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should wear a seat belt at all times.

Fastening the belts

1. Adjust the seat.

2-26

and adjust the seat belt properly.

SPA0493

PD1024M

Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. For most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until it snaps. The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion will permit the belt to move, and allow you some freedom of movement in the seat. 3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown. 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack. The front passenger side seat belt and rear

2-27

3-point seat belts have a cinching mechanism for child seat installation. It is referred to as the automatic locking mode. When the cinching mechanism is activated the seat belt cannot be withdrawn again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. Refer to Child restraints for infants and small children later in this section for more information. The automatic locking mode should be used only for child seat installation. During normal seat belt use by a passenger, the locking mode should not be activated. If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension.

Checking seat belt operation (3-point type with retractor)

Your seat belt retractors are designed to lock belt movement using two separate methods: 1) When the belt is pulled quickly from the retractor. 2) When the vehicle slows down rapidly. You can check their operation as follows: Grasp the shoulder belt and pull quickly forward. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement. If the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any questions about belt operation, see your NISSAN dealer.
PD1321-A

Unfastening the belts

To unfasten the belt, press the button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract.

Shoulder belt height adjustment (For front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. (See Precautions on seat belt usage.) To adjust, squeeze the release buttons, and then move it to the desired position, so that the belt passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off of your shoulder.

2-28

After adjustment, release the button and check that it does not move up and down to make sure the shoulder belt anchor is securely fixed in position.

SPA0281

SPA0278

2-POINT TYPE WITHOUT RETRACTOR (center position of rear seat) Selecting correct set of belts
The center seat belt buckle and tongue are identified by the CENTER mark. The center seat belt tongue can be fastened only into the center seat belt buckle.

Fastening the belts

1. Insert the tongue into the buckle marked CENTER until it snaps.

2-29

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender is available which is compatible with the installed seat belts. The extender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. See your NISSAN dealer for assistance if the extender is required.

SPA0469

SPA0280

2. To lengthen, hold the tongue at a right angle to the belt and pull on the belt. To shorten, pull the end of the belt attached to the belt clip away from the tongue, and then pull the belt clip to take up the slack.

3. Position the lap belt low and snug on the hips as illustrated.

Unfastening the belts

To unfasten the belt, press the button on the buckle.

Only NISSAN belt extenders, made by the same company which made the original equipment belts, should be used with NISSAN belts. Persons who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident.

2-30

CHILD RESTRAINTS FOR INFANTS AND SMALL CHILDREN SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
To clean the seat belt webbings, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpets. Then brush the webbing, wipe it with a cloth and allow it to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry. If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth. Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire belt assembly should be replaced. Infants and small children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint while riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a child restraint can result in serious injury or death. Children and infants should never be carried on your lap. It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident. The child could be crushed between the adult and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the same seat belt around both your child and yourself. Nissan recommends that the child restraint be installed in the rear seat. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. An improperly installed child restraint could lead to serious injury or death in an accident. In general, child restraints are designed to be installed with a lap belt or the lap portion of a three-point type seat belt. Child restraints specially designed for infants and small children are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind: 1) Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. 2) Check that child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicles seat and seat belt system. Choose a child restraint that meets the guidelines of the Society of Automotive Engineers recommended practice J1819 for child restraint installation. 3) If the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Always follow all recommended procedures. All U.S. states and provinces of Canada require that infants and small children be restrained in approved child restraints at all times while the vehicle is being operated.

2-31

tioned to fit the child restraint, but as upright as possible. Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating supplemental air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. A rear-facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat. See Installation on front passenger seat for details. Improper use of a child restraint can result in increased injuries for both the infant or child and other occupants in the vehicle. Follow all of the child restraint manufacturers instructions for installation and use. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure to select one which will fit your child and vehicle. It may not be possible to properly install some types of child restraints in your vehicle. If the child restraint is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases. Adjustable seatbacks should be posi After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Tilt it from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. For a front facing child restraint, if the seat position where it is installed has a 3-point type lap/shoulder belt, check to make sure the shoulder belt does not go in front of the childs face or neck. If it does, put the shoulder belt behind the child restraint. When your child restraint is not in use, keep it secured with a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown around in case of a sudden stop or accident. Remember that a child restraint left in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the child restraint.

2-32

facturers instructions for belt routing. 3. Remove all slack in the lap belt for a very tight fit by pulling forcefully on the lap belt adjustment. 4. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. 5. If it is not secure, try to tighten the belt again, or put the restraint in another seat. 6. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use.
SPA0276 PD1174

Installation on rear center seating position

When you install a child restraint in a rear center seat, follow these steps: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat as illustrated. It can be placed in a front facing or rear facing direction, depending on the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manufacturers instructions. 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-

2-33

in a sudden stop or collision. When you install a child restraint in a rear outboard seat, follow these steps: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. It can be placed in a front facing or rear facing direction, depending on the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manufacturers instructions. 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage.
PD1331

Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for belt routing. 3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended and a click is heard. At this time, the belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It will revert back to emergency locking when the belt is fully retracted. 4. Allow the belt to retract. A clicking sound will be heard as the belt retracts. This indicates that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. Pull up on the belt to remove any slack in the belt.

PD1332

Installation on rear outboard seating positions

The 3-point belt on your vehicle is equipped with a locking mode retractor which must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to do so will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. It could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.

2-34

After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is allowed to wind back into the retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt may be used as normal and will only lock during a sudden stop or impact.

Bolt length: more than 1.18 in (30 mm) Thread pitch: 1.25 mm The top strap should be secured to the attaching bolt which provides the straightest installation of the top strap.

APD0107

Child restraint anchor points are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses.

Top strap child restraint

If your child restraint has a top strap, install the anchor bracket to the provided anchor point. The top strap anchor bracket is available through your NISSAN dealer. Part No. 88894-89900 Secure the child restraint with the center lap belt or the lap portion of an outboard 3-point belt and latch the top strap hook onto the appropriate anchor bracket. To install the anchor bracket, a metric bolt of the dimensions listed below must be used. Bolt diameter: 8.0 mm

2-35

are pre-cut circles at each anchor point location that should break away from the shelf support material when pressure is applied to them. Remove the bolt after you feel the pre-cut circle separate from the shelf support material. 2. Cut a small slit through the parcel shelf fabric at the anchor point location. Reach through the fabric with a tool such as a pair of needle-nose pliers and remove the precut circle in the parcel shelf support material.
SPA0117

3. Install the bolt through the top strap hook and into the anchor point nut. 4. Be sure to follow all of the instructions that accompany the top strap attaching hardware. Your NISSAN dealer can assist you with the installation of your child restraint.

Anchor point locations

Anchor points are located under the rear parcel shelf finisher. To use attaching hardware for child restraints with top straps, follow these instructions carefully: 1. Open the trunk and find the anchor point nuts on the under side of the rear parcel shelf. Thread a bolt (8.0 mm diameter, 1.25 pitch) up through the nut behind the seating position where the child restraint will be installed and use it to break through the rear parcel shelf support material. There

2-36

 Failure to use the retractors locking mode may result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision. When you install a child restraint in the front seat, follow these steps: 1. Position the child restraint on the front passenger seat. It should be placed in a front-facing direction only. Move the seat as far back from the instrument panel as possible. Always follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat. 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage.

SPA0487

SPA0483

Installation on front passenger seat

If you install a front-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat, place the passenger seat as far back as possible. A child restraint with a top strap should not be used in the front passenger seat. The 3-point belt in your vehicle is equipped with a locking mode retractor which must be used when installing a child restraint.

Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat. Supplemental air bags inflate with great force. A rear-facing child restraint could be struck by the supplemental air bag in a crash and could seriously injure or kill your child.

2-37

TILTING STEERING WHEEL

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the lap belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.
PD1336

Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for belt routing. 3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended and a click is heard. At this time, the belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). (It will revert back to emergency locking when the belt is fully retracted.) 4. Allow the belt to retract. A clicking sound will be heard as the belt retracts. This indicates that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. Pull up on the belt to remove any slack in the belt.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is allowed to wind back into the retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt may be used as normal and will only lock during a sudden stop or impact.

SPA0111

Tilt operation
Push the lock lever and while holding down, adjust the steering wheel up or down to the desired position. Push the lock lever back into place to lock the steering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

2-38

OUTSIDE MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL

Push the right or left end of the switch to select the right or left outside mirror, then adjust using the control lever.

FOLDABLE OUTSIDE MIRRORS

SPA0112

MPA0008

Push the outside mirror backward to fold it.

Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects. The outside mirror will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

2-39

INSIDE MIRROR

SPA0470

The night position will reduce glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

2-40

3 Heater, air conditioner and audio system

Ventilator ................................................................... 3-2 Heater and air conditioner......................................... 3-3 Automatic air conditioner (if so equipped) ................ 3-9 Radio ....................................................................... 3-11 Antenna ................................................................... 3-28 CB radio or car phone ............................................ 3-29

VENTILATOR

SAA0040

SAA0041

Center ventilators
Adjust the air flow direction of ventilators.

Side ventilators
Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction of ventilators. : This symbol indicates that the vents are closed when the vent switch is moved to the left. : This symbol indicates that the vents are open when the vent switch is moved to the right.

3-2

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER CONTROLS Fan control dial

This dial turns the fan on and off, and controls fan speed.

Air flow control buttons

These buttons allow you to select the air flow outlets. Air flows from center and side ventilators.
SAA0042A

Air flows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets. Air flows mainly from foot outlets. Air flows from defroster outlets and foot outlets. Air flows mainly from defroster outlets.

animals. The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets alone in your vehicle. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls should not be done while driving, in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation.

Temperature control lever

This lever allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air.

3-3

Air recirculation button

OFF position Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment. Use the off position for normal heater, or air conditioner operation. ON position (Indicator light ON) Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the air recirculation button to the ON position when driving on a dusty road or to avoid traffic fumes and for maximum cooling when using the air conditioner.

HEATER OPERATION Heating

This mode is used to direct hot air from the floor outlets. Some air will also come from the defrost vents. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position for normal heating. 2. Push the button in.

4. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position.

Defrosting or defogging
This mode is used to defrost/defog the windows. 1. Push the button in. 2. Turn on the fan control dial. 3. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position between the middle and the HOT position. To quickly remove ice or fog from the windows, turn on the fan control dial to 4 and the temperature control lever to the full HOT position. When the switch is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on to defog the windshield, and the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position between the middle and the HOT position. For quick heating, move the air recirculation button to the ON position. Be sure to return the air recirculation button to the OFF position for normal heating.

Air conditioning button

This button is provided only for vehicles with air conditioner. Start the engine, move the fan control dial to the desired (1 to 4) position and push the air conditioning button to turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light will come on when the air conditioner is on. To stop the air conditioner, push the switch again to return it to the original position. The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Ventilation
This mode directs outside air from the side and center vents. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in.

3. Turn on the fan control dial.

3-4

Bi-level heating
This mode directs outside air from the side and center vents and hot air from the floor outlets. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in. 3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Normally move the temperature control lever to the midpoint between HOT and COLD.

Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and air inlet in front of the windshield. This will improve heater operation. When the switch is pushed, the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION

Start the engine, move the fan control dial to the desired (1 to 4) position and push in the air conditioning button to activate the air conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions will be added to the heater operation.

Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in. 3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Push on the air conditioning button. The indicator light will come on. 5. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position. For quick cooling when the outside temperature is high, move the air recirculation button to the ON position. Be sure to return the air recirculation button to the OFF position for normal cooling.

Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs the windshield. 1. Push the button in. 2. Turn on the fan control dial. 3. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position between the middle and the HOT position.

3-5

Dehumidified heating
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in.

Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

AIR FLOW CHART

The chart below shows the switch and lever positions for MAXIMUM and QUICK heating, cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation switch should be in the OFF position for normal cooling, heating and defrosting.

Operating tips
Keep the windows and sun roof closed while the air conditioner is in operation. After parking in the sun, drive for two or three minutes with the windows open to vent hot air from the passenger compartment. Then, close the windows. This will allow the air conditioner to cool the interior more quickly. The air conditioning system should be operated for about ten minutes at least once a month. This helps prevent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication. If the coolant temperature gauge exceeds the HOT position, turn the air conditioning off. See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section for additional information.

3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Push on the air conditioning button. The indicator light will come on. 5. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position.

Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows and dehumidify. 1. Push the button in.

2. Turn on the fan control dial. 3. Push on the air conditioning button. The indicator light will come on. 4. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position. When the button is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on to defog the windshield, and the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off.

3-6

SAA0058C

SAA0059C

3-7

SAA0060C

SAA0061C

3-8

AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER (if so equipped)

Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner.

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (Auto mode)

This mode may be normally used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically. 1. Push the AUTO button on. (AUTO will be displayed.)
SAA0043B

2. Push the ture.

temperature set button to set the desired tempera-

animals. The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets alone in your vehicle. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls should not be done while driving, in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation.

Adjust the temperature set button to about 75F (24C) for normal operation. The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.

Heating (ECON mode)

The air conditioner does not activate. When you need to heat only, use this mode. 1. Push the ECON (ECONOMY) button on. (ECON will be displayed.)

3-9

2. Push the ture.

temperature set button to set the desired tempera-

The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically. Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature. Otherwise the system may not work properly. Not recommended if windows fog up.

turned on at outside temperatures above 35F (2C) to defog the windshield, and the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

selects the air outlet to: : : : Air flows from center and side ventilators. Air flows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets. Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

Manual fan speed control

Push the fan control button ally control the fan speed. to manu-

To turn system off

Push the OFF button.

Operating tips
When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature warms up, the air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally.

Dehumidified defogging
1. Push the DEF button on. (The indicator light on the button will come on.) 2. Push the ture. temperature set button to set the desired temperaor fog from the push the manual and set to the .

Push the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.

Air recirculation button

Push the air recirculation button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator light on the switch will come on. Push it again to draw outside air into the passenger compartment. The indicator will go out. The air recirculation button will not be activated when the air conditioner is in DEF mode.

To quickly remove ice outside of the windows, fan control button maximum position

As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, push the AUTO button to return to the auto mode. When the DEF button is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be

Manual air flow control button MODE

Pushing the manual air flow control button

3-10

RADIO Servicing air conditioner

The air conditioning system in your NISSAN vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind. This refrigerant will not harm the earths ozone layer. However, special charging equipment and lubricant are required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioning system. See AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT RECOMMENDATIONS in the TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION section of this manual. Your NISSAN dealer will be able to service your environmentally friendly air conditioning system. To turn the radio on, turn the ignition key to ACC or ON. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, turn the key to the ACC position. Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other external influences. Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences.

HA1011

The sensor on the instrument panel helps maintain a constant temperature; do not put anything on or around this sensor.

3-11

FM/AM RADIO WITH CASSETTE PLAYER Radio operation

Push the ON/VOL knob to listen to the radio and tune in the desired station. Pushing the button while the cassette tape is playing will turn off the cassette player and turn on the radio. Turn the ON/VOL knob to adjust the volume. Inserting a cassette tape into the cassette player while the radio is on will turn off the radio and turn on the cassette player. The electronic tuning radio has a DIVERSITY reception system. The FM signal can reflect off of buildings or mountains. This causes offensive noise. The DIVERSITY system employs two antennas; one is a rod type antenna and the other is a printed antenna on the rear window. This system automatically switches to the antenna which receives less noise. Thus the radio provides high quality reception.

Selecting the desired band

Push the band select button change from AM to FM reception.
SAA0044B

to

The stereo indicator will glow during FM stereo

3-12

reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception.

SEEK tuning Push the SEEK/SCAN tuning button for less than 1.5 seconds. SEEK tuning begins from low to high frequencies and stops at the next broadcasting station.

Tuning

The radio should not be tuned while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation. Manual tuning Push down either manual tuning button. SCAN tuning Push the SEEK/SCAN tuning button for more than 1.5 seconds. SCAN tuning begins from low to high frequencies and stops at each broadcasting station for five seconds. Pushing the button again during this five second period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station.

AHA0040

Station memory operations

Six stations can be set for each band. 1. Tune to the desired station. 2. Push the desired select button for more

3-13

than 2 seconds. (For example, in the diagram ch2 is to be memorized. The radio mutes when the select button is pushed.) 3. The indicator ch2 will then come on and the sound will resume. Memorizing is now complete. 4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse blows, the radio memory will be cancelled. In that case, reset the desired stations.
HA1078

Cassette tape operation

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, then carefully insert the cassette tape into the tape door. The cassette tape will automatically pull into the player.

Do not force the cassette tape into the tape door. This could cause player damage. The cassette tape will automatically change directions to play the other side when the first side is completed. To maintain good quality sound, NISSAN recommends that you use cassette tapes of 60 minutes or shorter in length. Cassette tapes should be removed from the player when not in use. Store cassettes in their protective cases and away from direct sunlight, heat, moisture and magnetic sources. Direct sunlight can cause the cassette to become deformed. The use of deformed

Adjusting tone quality

Push then turn the BASS and TREB (TREBLE) control knob to obtain the most pleasant sound.

Adjusting speaker sound balance

Push then pull the BAL (BALANCE) control knob to adjust the volume between the right and left speakers.

FADER volume control

Push then pull the FADER control knob to adjust the volume between the front and rear speakers.

3-14

cassettes may cause the cassette to jam in the player. Do not use cassettes that have labels which are peeling and loose. If used, the label could jam in the player. If a cassette has loose tape, insert a pencil through one of the cassette hubs and rewind the tape firmly around the hubs. Loose tape may cause tape jamming and wavering sound quality. Over a period of time, the playback head, capstan and pinch roller may collect a tape coating residue as the tape passes over the head. This residue accumulation can cause weak or wavering sound, and should be removed periodically with a head cleaning tape. If the residue is not removed periodically, the player may need to be disassembled for cleaning.

Fast forwarding or rewinding the tape

Push either the FF (forward) or REW (rewind) button for the desired direction. The indicator light on the switch will come on.

Playing and stopping the cassette tape

Pushing the PLAY/STOP button while the cassette tape is playing stops the tape. Pushing the button again plays the tape.

APS fast forwarding or APS rewinding the tape

Push either the APS (automatic program search) FF or APS REW button while the cassette tape is playing. The tape will run quickly, and stop and play at the next program. The indicator light flashes on and off while searching the program. This system searches at the blank intervals between selections. If there is a blank interval within one program or there is no interval between programs, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location.

Dolby NR (noise reduction)

Push the DOLBY NR button for Dolby NR encoded tapes to reduce high frequency tape noise. The indicator will come on. Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. DOLBY and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

Metal or chrome tape usage

The cassette player will be automatically set to high performance play when playing a metal or chrome cassette tape.

Changing the direction of tape play

Push the PROG (program) select button.

Ejecting the cassette tape

Push the eject button. The cassette tape will automatically come out.

3-15

FM-AM RADIO WITH CASSETTE PLAYER Radio operation

Push the POWER/VOLUME control knob to listen to the radio and tune in the desired station. Push the FM-AM band select button while the cassette tape is playing will turn off the cassette player and turn on the radio. Turn the POWER/VOLUME control knob to adjust the volume. Inserting a cassette tape into the cassette player while the radio is on will turn off the radio and turn on the cassette player. The radio has a diversity reception system. The FM signal can reflect off of buildings or mountains. This causes offensive noise. The diversity system employs two antennas; one is a rod type antenna and the other is a printed antenna on the rear window. This system automatically switches to the antenna which receives less noise. Thus the radio provides high quality reception.

Selecting the desired band

SAA0233

Push the band select button FM-AM band

3-16

select to change the reception as follows: FM1 , FM2 , AM The stereo indicator will glow during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception.

SEEK tuning or Push the SEEK/SCAN tuning button for less than 1.5 seconds. SEEK tuning begins and stops at the next broadcasting station.

Tuning

The radio should not be tuned while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation. Manual tuning Push down either manual tuning button or . SCAN tuning Push the SEEK/SCAN tuning button or for more than 1.5 seconds. SCAN tuning begins and stops at each broadcasting station for five seconds. Pushing the button again during this five second period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station.
SAA0234

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (FM1 and FM2). Six stations can be set for the AM band. 1. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK/SCAN or TUNE button.

3-17

2. Push the desired station select button for more than 1.5 seconds. (For example, in the diagram ch2 is to be memorized. The radio mutes when the select button is pushed.) 3. Other buttons can be set in the same manner. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse blows, the radio memory will be cancelled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

SAA0235

Adjusting tone quality and speaker sound balance

Push the AUDIO switch to change the display as follows: BAS , TRE , FAD , BAL BAS (bass) and TRE (treble) adjust the tone quality by pushing the control button or to the most pleasing level. The indicator light will show the level of the tone quality. FAD (fader) adjusts the speaker sound balance between the front and rear speakers, and BAL (balance) adjusts the speaker sound balance between the right

and left speakers by pushing the control button. The indicator light will show the level of the speaker sound balance.

Cassette tape operation

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, then carefully insert the cassette tape into the tape door. The cassette tape will automatically pull into the player.

3-18

 Do not use cassettes that have labels which are peeling and loose. If used, the label could jam in the player. Do not force the cassette tape into the tape door. This could cause player damage. The cassette tape will automatically change directions to play the other side when the first side is completed. The indicator light will run when the tape is playing. If a cassette has loose tape, insert a pencil through one of the cassette hubs and rewind the tape firmly around the hubs. Loose tape may cause tape jamming and wavering sound quality. Over a period of time, the playback head, capstan and pinch roller may collect a tape coating residue as the tape passes over the head. This residue accumulation can cause weak or wavering sound, and should be removed periodically with a head cleaning tape. If the residue is not removed periodically, the player may need to be disassembled for cleaning.

APS fast forwarding or APS rewinding the tape

Push either the APS (automatic program search) FF or APS REW button while the cassette tape is playing. The tape will run quickly, and stop and play at the next program. The indicator light will run with quick intervals when the APS FF or APS REW function is started. This system searches at the blank intervals between selections. If there is a blank interval within one program or there is no interval between programs, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location.

Precautions on cassette player operation

To maintain good quality sound, NISSAN recommends that you use cassette tapes of 60 minutes or shorter in length. Cassette tapes should be removed from the player when not in use. Store cassettes in their protective cases and away from direct sunlight, heat, moisture and magnetic sources. Direct sunlight can cause the cassette to become deformed. The use of deformed cassettes may cause the cassette to jam in the player.

Changing the direction of tape play

Push the PROG (program) select button.

Fast forwarding or rewinding the tape

Push either the FF (forward) or REW (rewind) button for the desired direction. The indicator light will run with quick intervals when the FF or REW function is started.

Playing and stopping the cassette tape

Pushing the PLAY/STOP button while the cassette tape is playing stops the tape. Pushing the button again plays the tape.

Dolby NR (noise reduction)

Push the DOLBY NR button for Dolby NR encoded tapes to reduce high frequency tape noise. The indicator will come on.

3-19

Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. DOLBY and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

Metal or chrome tape usage

The cassette player will be automatically set to high performance play when playing a metal or chrome cassette tape.

Ejecting the cassette tape

Push the EJECT button. The cassette tape will automatically come out.

3-20

SAA0204

3-21

FM-AM RADIO WITH CASSETTE PLAYER AND COMPACT DISC PLAYER AUDIO MAIN OPERATION
Head unit The radio has an FM Diversity reception system, which employs two antennas. One is a rod type antenna; the other is an antenna printed on the window. This system automatically switches to the antenna which is receiving less noise. The tape deck employs a permalloy head which allows for improved reproduction of high frequency ranges. Noise is also greatly reduced by the combined use of the Dolby NR (noise reduction) system.

To turn the radio off, press the POWER/ VOLUME knob. Turn the POWER/VOLUME control knob to adjust the volume.

SAA0194

Adjusting tone quality

Push then turn the BASS and TREB (TREBLE) control knobs to obtain the most pleasant sound.

Power/Volume control
Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then push the POWER/VOLUME knob while the system is off to call up the mode (radio, tape or CD) which was playing immediately before the system was turned off. When no CD or tape is loaded, the radio will come on. While the system is on, pushing the POWER/VOLUME knob turns the system off.

3-22

RADIO OPERATION FMAM band select button

Pushing the FMAM band select button will change the band. When FMAM band select button is pushed while the ignition switch is at ACC or ON, the radio will come on at the station last played. The last station played will also come on when the power knob is turned to ON.
SAA0190

TUNE button

The radio should not be tuned while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation. Use these buttons for manual tuning. If the TUNE button is pushed for less than 0.5 seconds, the frequency moves by an increment of 1 step. To move quickly through the channels, hold either of the TUNE buttons down for more than 0.5 seconds.

Adjusting speaker sound balance

Push then pull the BAL (BALANCE) control knob to adjust the volume between the right and left speakers.

If a compact disc or tape is inserted when the power knob is turned to ON, the compact disc or tape will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on. The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception.

Fader volume control

Push then pull the FADER control knob to adjust the volume between the front and rear speakers.

3-23

SEEK/SCAN tuning buttons

SEEK tuning Push the SEEK/SCAN tuning button or for less than 1.5 seconds. SEEK tuning begins from low to high frequencies and stops at the next broadcasting station. SCAN tuning Push the SEEK/SCAN tuning button or for more than 1.5 seconds. SCAN tuning begins from low to high frequencies and stops at each broadcasting station for five seconds. Pushing the button again during this five seconds period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station. If the SEEK/SCAN tuning button is not pushed within five seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station.

Station memory operations

SAA0191

3-24

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band. Six stations can be set for the AM band. 1. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK/SCAN or TUNE button. 2. Push the desired station select button for more than 1.5 seconds. (For example, in the diagram ch2 is to be memorized. The radio ceases emitting sounds when the select button is pushed.) 3. The indicator ch2 will then come on and the sound will resume. Memorizing is now complete. 4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse blows, the radio memory will be cancelled. In that case, reset the desired stations. Do not force the cassette tape into the tape door. This could cause player damage. If the system is turned off by pushing the POWER/VOLUME knob with the cassette tape still in the player, the tape will resume playing when the system is turned back on.

REW (rewind) button. Either the indicator light , , or will come on when the FF or REW function is started.

APS (automatic program search) FF, APS REW button

When the APS FF button is pushed while the tape is being played, the next program will start to play from the beginning. Push the APS FF button several times to skip through programs. The tape will advance the number of times the button is pushed (up to 9 programs). When the APS REW button is pushed once, the program being played starts over from the beginning. Push several times to fast rewind programs. The tape will go back the number of times the button is pushed. Either the indicator light , , or will come on when the APS FF or APS REW function is started. This system searches for the blank intervals between selections. If there is a blank interval within one program or there is no interval between programs, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location.

TAPE button
When this button is pushed with the system turned off and a tape loaded, the system will come on and the tape will play. When this button is pushed with either the radio or compact disc turned on and the tape loaded, the compact disc or the radio will automatically be turned off and the tape will play. While the tape is playing, pushing the TAPE button stops the tape. Pushing the button again allows the tape to play.

CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then lightly insert the cassette tape into the tape door. The cassette tape will be automatically pulled into the player. The radio or CD will turn off (if it is on) and the cassette tape will begin to play.

FF (fast forward), REW (rewind) button

Push the FF (fast forward) button to fast forward the tape. To rewind the tape, push the

3-25

PROG (program) button

Push the PROG (program) button to change the tape side while the tape is being played. The cassette tape will automatically change directions to play the other side when the first side is completed.

Precautions on cassette tape player operation

To maintain good quality sound, NISSAN recommends that you use cassette tapes of 60 minutes or shorter in length. Cassette tapes should be removed from the player when not in use. Store cassettes in their protective cases and away from direct sunlight, heat, moisture or magnetic sources. Direct sunlight can cause the cassette to become deformed. The use of deformed cassettes may cause the cassette to jam in the player. Do not use cassettes that have peeling or loose labels. If used, the label could jam in the player. If a cassette has loose tape, insert a pencil through one of the cassette hubs and rewind the tape firmly. Loose tape may cause jamming and wavering sound quality. Over a period of time, the playback head, capstan and pinch roller may gather a tape coating residue as the tape passes over the head. This residue ac-

cumulation can cause a weak or wavering sound and should be removed periodically with a head cleaning tape. If the residue is not removed periodically, the player may need to be disassembled for cleaning.

Dolby NR (noise reduction) button

Push the DOLBY NR button for Dolby NR encoded tapes to reduce high frequency tape noise. The indicator will come on. Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. DOLBY and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER OPERATION

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up. The compact disc will be guided automatically into the slot and start playing. After loading the disc, the number of tracks on the disc and the play time will appear on the display. If the radio or tape is already operating, it will automatically turn off and the compact disc will play.

Metal or chrome tape usage

The cassette player will be automatically set to high performance play when playing a metal or chrome cassette tape.

TAPE EJECT button

When this button is pushed with the tape loaded, the tape will be ejected. When the tape is ejected while it is being played, the system will be turned off.

Do not force the compact disc into the slot. This could damage the player. If the system has been turned off while the compact disc was playing, pushing the

3-26

POWER/VOLUME knob will start the compact disc. 8 cm diameter compact discs can also be used without an adapter.

APS (automatic program search) FF, APS REW button

When the APS FF button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the program next to the present one will start to play from its beginning. Push several times to skip through programs. The compact disc will advance the number of times the button is pushed. (When the last program on the compact disc is skipped through, the first program will be played.) When the APS REW button is pushed, the program being played returns to its beginning. Push several times to skip back through programs. The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pushed.

disc. The same program may be repeated twice. (no mark): All the programs will be played in sequence and stop when the last program is finished. When the compact disc is ejected, the play pattern will automatically change to ALL.

CD button
When this button is pushed with the system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play. When this button is pushed with the compact disc loaded but the tape or the radio playing, the tape or radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play. When this button is pushed while the compact disc is playing, the compact disc will stop playing. When this button is pushed with the compact disc stopped, the compact disc will start to play.

CD EJECT button
When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be ejected. When this button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will come out and the system will turn off.

PROG (program) button

When this button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the play pattern will change as follows: ALL: All the programs will be played repeatedly in sequence. 1: Only one program (the one being played when the PROG (program) button is pushed) will be repeated. RANDOM: Programs will be played at random, not following the sequence on the compact

FF (fast forward), REW (rewind) button

When the FF (fast forward) or REW (rewind) button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the compact disc will return to normal play speed.

3-27

ANTENNA
If the compact disc comes out and is not removed, it will be pulled back into the slot to protect it. (without 8 cm diameter compact discs) Do not use an 8 cm CD adapter as this will cause malfunction.

Power antenna
The antenna will automatically extend when the radio is turned on, and retract when switched off. If the radio is left on, the antenna will retract and extend with the ignition key OFF-ON operation.

DISC indicator light

This light comes on when the compact disc is loaded.

During cold weather or rainy days, the player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely. The player may skip while driving on rough roads. The CD player sometimes cannot function when the compartment temperature is extremely high. Decrease the temperature before use. Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.

Before turning the radio on, make sure that there is no one near the antenna outlet and there is enough space for it to extend. To prevent damage, be sure that antenna is fully retracted before the vehicle enters an automated car wash. Dirt and other foreign matter on the power antenna rod may interrupt its operation. Clean the rod periodically with a damp cloth. This type of cleaning is especially important during the winter seasons in areas where road salt and other chemicals may be spread on road surfaces and splashed onto the antenna rod.

3-28

CB RADIO OR CAR PHONE

When installing a CB, ham radio or a car phone in your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following cautions, otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the MFI (Multiport Fuel Injection) system and other electronic parts.

Keep the antenna as far as possible away from the Engine Control Module. Also keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the MFI harness. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness. Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer. Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body. For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

3-29

MEMO

3-30

4 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving...................... 4-2 Avoiding collision and rollover................................... 4-3 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving............................ 4-4 Ignition switch............................................................ 4-4 Before starting the engine......................................... 4-6 Starting the engine .................................................... 4-6 Driving with automatic transmission.......................... 4-7 Driving with manual transmission ........................... 4-10 Parking brake .......................................................... 4-12 Cruise control .......................................................... 4-13 Break-in schedule ................................................... 4-15 Economy hints......................................................... 4-15 Parking/Parking on hills........................................... 4-16 Power steering system............................................ 4-17 Brake system .......................................................... 4-17 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) (If so equipped)....... 4-18 Cold weather driving ............................................... 4-19

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING

Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time. Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets alone in your vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. Keep the trunk lid, or back door closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive in this manner for some reason, take the following steps. 1. Open all the windows. 2. Set the air recirculate switch OFF and the fan control at high to circulate the air. 3. Be sure the rear seat armrest and tray are closed. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death. If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately. Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage. If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the trunk lid or the body, follow the manufacturers recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle. If a special body or other equipment is added for recreational or other usage, follow the manufacturers recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle. (Some recreational vehicle appliances such as stoves, refrigerator, heaters, etc. may also generate carbon monoxide.) The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever: a. The vehicle is raised for service. b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment. c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system. d. You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

EXHAUST GAS (Carbon Monoxide)

THREE WAY CATALYST

The three way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the converter are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

4-2

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER

by an authorized NISSAN dealer. The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people or flammable materials away from the exhaust pipe. Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire. Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three way catalyst. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident. Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with any vehicle, a loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects, or cause the vehicle to rollover, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the Seat Belts section of this manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.

Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline seriously reduce the three way catalysts ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants. Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the converter, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected promptly

4-3

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING

IGNITION SWITCH
To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steering wheel slightly right and left.

Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the blood stream reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgment. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in the accident alcohol can increase the severity of injury.
SSD0021

Never remove the key while driving. If the key is removed, the steering wheel will lock. This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

Nissan is committed to safe driving. But, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol related accidents. Although the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol. Remember, drinking and driving dont mix! And thats true for drugs too (over the counter, prescription, and illegal drugs). Dont drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

The switch includes an anti-theft steering lock device. LOCK Normal parking position (0) The ignition key can only be removed when the switch is in this position. On manual transmission models, to turn the ignition key to LOCK from ACC or ON, turn the key to OFF and press in the key release button, then turn the key to LOCK. In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/6 of a turn counterclockwise from the straight up position. To lock the steering wheel, remove the key.

4-4

1) Move the selector lever into the P position. 2) Turn the ignition key slightly in the ON direction. 3) Turn the key toward the LOCK position. 4) Remove the key. If the key is removed from the ignition switch, the selector lever cannot be moved from P (Park). The selector lever can be moved if the ignition switch is in the ACC position. The selector lever can also be moved if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed. There is an OFF position in between LOCK and ACC, although it does not show on the lock cylinder. When the ignition is in OFF the steering wheel is not locked. In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/6 of a turn counterclockwise from the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, remove the key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steering wheel slightly right and left.

Never remove the key while driving. If the key is removed, the steering wheel will lock. This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury. OFF (1) The engine can be turned off without locking the steering wheel. ACC (Accessories) (2) This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running. ON Normal operating position (3) This position turns on the ignition system and the electrical accessories.

SSD0055

On automatic transmission models, the ignition lock is designed so that the key cannot be turned to LOCK and removed until the selector lever is moved to the P position. When removing the key from the ignition, make sure the selector lever is in the P position. If the selector lever is not returned to P (Park), the key cannot be moved toward LOCK. When the key cannot be turned toward the LOCK position, proceed as follows to remove the key:

4-5

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

START (4) This position activates the starter motor, starting the engine. Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear. Maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically, e.g., each time you check engine oil. Check that all windows and lights are clean. Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation. Lock all doors. Position seat and adjust head restraints. Adjust inside and outside mirrors. Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise. Check the operation of warning lights when key is turned to the ON (3) position.

STARTING THE ENGINE

1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Automatic transmission: Move the selector lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). (P preferred.) The selector lever cannot be moved out of P and into any of the other gear positions if the key is removed from the switch. The starter is designed not to operate if the selector lever is in one of the driving positions. Manual transmission: Move the gearshift lever to N (Neutral), and depress the clutch pedal to the floor while cranking the engine. The starter is designed not to operate unless the clutch pedal is depressed. 3. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to START. Release the key when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure. If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold or hot weather, depress the accelerator pedal and hold it to help start the engine.

4-6

DRIVING WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

In the summer, when restarting the engine within 30 minutes after it has been stopped, keep the accelerator pedal fully depressed while starting. The automatic transmission in your vehicle is electronically controlled by a microcomputer to produce maximum power and smooth operation. Shown on the following pages are the recommended operating procedures for this transmission. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment. 1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and shift into a driving gear. 2. Release the parking brake and foot brake, then gradually start the vehicle in motion.

Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, turn the key off and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged. 4. Warm-up Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather.

Starting the vehicle

After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal and push the selector lever button before shifting the selector lever to the R, N, D, 2 or 1 position. Be sure the vehicle is fully stopped before attempting to shift the selector lever. This automatic transmission is designed so that the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P to any drive position while the ignition switch is ON. The selector lever cannot be moved out of P and into any of the other gear positions if the key is turned to the LOCK position or if the key is removed from the switch. When the battery charge is low, the selector lever can be moved if the ignition switch is in the ACC position.

Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P or N to R, D, 2 or 1. Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident. Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up. On slippery roads, do not down shift. This may cause a loss of control. Never shift to P or R while vehicle is moving. This could cause an accident.

4-7

Shifting from P (Park)

When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brakes should be used for this purpose. If the ignition switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed, but the selector lever still cannot be moved out of P (Park), follow these instructions: 1. Shut the engine off and remove the key. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Reinsert the ignition key and turn it clockwise to the ACC position. 4. Depress the brake pedal, move the selector lever to N (Neutral) and start the engine.
SD1003M

5. Check stop light operation.

Push the button to shift into P, R or from D to 2. All other positions can be selected without pushing the button. P (Park): Use this selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Always be sure the vehicle is at a complete stop. For maximum safety, depress the brake pedal, then push in the select lever button and move the lever to the P position. Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first, then shift the lever into the P position. If the selector lever cannot be moved from the P position while the engine is running and the brake pedal depressed, the stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others. These instructions for starting the vehicle in N (Neutral) should only be used until service can be obtained. Never drive the vehicle if the stop lights are not operating properly.

4-8

R (Reverse): Use this position to back up. Always be sure the vehicle is completely stopped. With the brake pedal depressed, push in the select lever button and move the lever to the R position N (Neutral): Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to N and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving. D (Drive): Use this position for all normal forward driving. 2 (Second gear): Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades. Do not exceed 73 MPH (117 km/h) in the 2 position. 1 (Low gear): Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades. Do not exceed 40 MPH (65 km/h) in the 1 position.

Accelerator downshift In D position

For rapid passing or hill climbing, fully depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into second gear or first gear, depending on the vehicle speed.

SD1007

Overdrive switch
ON: For normal driving, push the overdrive switch ON with the selector switch in the D position. The transmission is upshifted into OVERDRIVE as the vehicle speed increases.

The overdrive will not engage until the engine has warmed up. OFF: For driving up and down long slopes where engine braking would be advantageous, push the switch OFF . When cruising at a low speed or climbing a gentle slope, you may

4-9

DRIVING WITH MANUAL TRANSMISSION

feel uncomfortable shift shocks as the transmission shifts between 3rd and overdrive repeatedly. In this case, set the overdrive switch in the OFF position. The indicator light will come on at this time. When driving conditions change, reset the overdrive switch in the ON position. Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time with the overdrive switch set in the OFF position. This reduces the fuel economy. If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the Fail-safe system may be activated. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, turn the ignition key OFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then turn the key back to the ON position. The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have your NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair if necessary.
SSD0002

Fail-safe
When the Fail-safe operation occurs, the next time the key is turned to the ON position, the O/D OFF light will blink for approximately 8 seconds after coming on for 2 seconds. While the vehicle can be driven under these circumstances please note that the gears in the automatic transmission will be locked in third gear.

To change gears, fully depress the clutch pedal, then move the shift lever. After shifting, release the clutch slowly. On the 5-speed transmission model, you cannot shift directly from 5th gear into Reverse. First shift into Neutral, then into Reverse. If it is difficult to move the shift lever into Reverse or 1st, shift into Neutral, then release the clutch pedal and shift into Reverse or 1st again.

4-10

 Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear. This may cause a loss of control or engine damage.

for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance. Actual shift-up speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather and individual driving habits. For normal acceleration in low altitude areas [less than 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:
Gear change 1st to 2nd 2nd to 3rd 3rd to 4th ACCEL shift CRUISE shift point point MPH (km/h) MPH (km/h) 13 (24) 23 (40) 33 (58) 39 (64) 13 (24) 16 (29) 27 (48) 36 (63)

Suggested maximum speed in each gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate. Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the highest gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits, and drive according to the road conditions, which will ensure safe operation. Do not overrev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control. Gear 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th MPH (km/h) 30 (50) 55 (90) 80 (130)

Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This may cause clutch damage. Stop your vehicle completely before shifting into reverse. When the vehicle is stopped for a duration, for example at a stop light, shift to Neutral and release the clutch pedal with the foot brake applied.

4th to 5th

For quick acceleration when the engine is cold or in high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]: Gear change 1st to 2nd 2nd to 3rd 3rd to 4th 4th to 5th MPH (km/h) 15 (24) 25 (40) 40 (64) 45 (72)

Suggested shift-up speeds

Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds

4-11

PARKING BRAKE
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out.

Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident. Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle.
SSD0018

To apply: pull the lever up. To release: 1. Firmly apply foot brake. 2. Manual transmission models: Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position. Automatic transmission models: Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position. 3. While pulling up on the lever slightly, push the button and lower completely.

Do not use the gear shift in place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged. Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle. They could release the parking brake and cause an accident.

4-12

CRUISE CONTROL
c) Turn the main switch off. Both the ON indicator and CRUISE lights will go out. If you depress the brake pedal while pushing the ACCEL set switch and reset at the cruising speed, turn the main switch off once and then turn it on again. The cruise control will automatically be cancelled if the vehicle slows down below approximately 8 MPH (13 km/h). Depress the clutch pedal (manual transmission), or move the selector lever to N (automatic transmission). The CRUISE light will go out. To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: a) Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET/COAST switch. b) Push and hold the ACCEL set switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch. c) Push, then quickly release the ACCEL set switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

SSD0019

The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 30 to 89 MPH (48 to 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. To turn on the cruise control, push the main switch on. The indicator light on the switch will come on. To set at cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the SET/COAST switch and release it. (The CRUISE light will come on.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.

To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed. The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the cruise control. To cancel the preset speed, follow either of these three methods: a) Push the cancel switch; The CRUISE light will go out. b) Tap the brake pedal; The CRUISE light will go out.

4-13

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: a) Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET/COAST switch and release it. b) Push and hold the SET/COAST switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed. c) Push, then quickly release the SET/COAST switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). To resume the preset speed, push and release the RESUME set switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 30 MPH (48 km/h).

while pushing the RES/ACCEL, COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch (located on the steering wheel). To properly set the cruise control system, perform the preceding steps in the order indicated.

Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions: it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed. in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed. on winding or hilly roads. on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.). in very windy areas. Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

On manual transmission models, do not shift into neutral without depressing the clutch pedal when the cruise control is on. This could cause engine damage. If this happens, depress the clutch pedal and turn the main switch off immediately.

Precautions
If the cruise control system malfunctions, it cancels automatically. The cruise indicator light in the instrument panel then blinks to warn the driver. If the cruise indicator light blinks, turn the cruise control main switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. The cruise indicator light may blink when the cruise control main switch is turned on

4-14

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
During the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km), follow these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life. Do not drive over 55 MPH (90 km/h) and do not run the engine over 4,000 rpm. Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow. Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear. Avoid quick starts. Avoid hard braking as much as possible. Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km).

ECONOMY HINTS
Keep your engine tuned up. Follow the recommended periodic maintenance schedule. Keep the tires inflated at the correct pressure. Low pressure will increase tire wear and waste fuel. Keep the front wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment will cause not only tire wear but also lower fuel economy. Air conditioner operation lowers fuel economy. Use the air conditioner only when necessary.
SD1001M

Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position. Drive at moderate speeds on the highway. Driving at high speed will lower fuel economy. Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a safe distance behind other vehicles. Use a proper gear range which suits road conditions. On level roads, shift into high gear as soon as possible. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

When cruising at highway speeds, it is more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to reduce drag.

4-15

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
far forward as it can go and cannot be moved. 3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into the street when parked on a sloping drive way, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
1 HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: k

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.
2 HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: k MSD0002

Automatic transmission models: Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position.

Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb. HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO 3 CURB: k Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves. 4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove the key.

Do not park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire. 1. Firmly apply the parking brake. 2. Manual transmission models: Place the shift lever in the REVERSE position. When parking on an uphill grade, place the shift lever in the 1st position.

Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into the P position (automatic) or in appropriate gear (manual). Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. Make sure the shift lever has been pushed as

4-16

POWER STEERING SYSTEM

The power assisted steering is designed to use a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering. Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. If the engine stops or drive belt breaks, you will still have control of the vehicle. However, much greater steering effort is needed, especially in sharp turns or at low speeds.

BRAKE SYSTEM
The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit develops a problem, you will still have braking at two wheels. Vacuum assisted brake The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and the stopping distance will be longer. Wet brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking. To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat-up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly. Using the brakes Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This overheats the brakes, increases wear on the brake linings and pads, and reduces gas mileage. To help save the brakes and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and

4-17

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) (If so equipped)

downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control. The anti-lock brake system controls the brakes at each wheel so the wheels will not lock when braking abruptly or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing wheel lockup, the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces. very quickly). While the actuator is working, you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from the actuator under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the anti-lock system is working properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving.

While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident.

Self-test feature
The anti-lock brake system consists of electronic sensors, electric pumps, and hydraulic solenoids controlled by a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of any malfunction. If the computer senses any malfunction, it switches the antilock brake system OFF and turns on the ABS brake warning light in the dashboard. The brake system will then behave normally, but without anti-lock assistance. If the light comes on during the self check, or while you are driving, you should take your vehicle to your NISSAN dealer for repair at your earliest convenience.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances.

Normal operation
The anti-lock brake system will not operate at speeds below 3 to 6 MPH (5 to 10 km/h) to completely stop the vehicle. (The speeds will vary according to road conditions.) When the anti-lock system senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator (under the hood) rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure (like pumping the brakes

4-18

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

Tire placard in the Owners Manual index. The anti-lock brake system is a sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces, but remember that the stopping distance on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces, even with the anti-lock system. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the responsibility for safety of self and others rests in the hands of the driver. Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness. When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all 4 wheels. When installing a spare tire, make sure it is the proper size and type as specified on the tire placard. For tire placard location information, refer to

Freeing a frozen door lock

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer or glycerin to it through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole.

Anti-freeze
In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32F (0C), check anti-freeze (ethylene glycol base) to assure proper winter protection. For details, see Engine Cooling System in the Do-it-yourself operations section.

Battery
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. For details, see Battery in the Do-it-yourself operations section.

Draining of coolant water

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-freeze, drain the cooling system by opening the drain valves located under the radiator and on the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. See Changing Engine Coolant in the Do-it-yourself operations section.

4-19

Tire equipment
1. SUMMER tires are of a tread design to provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, Nissan recommends the use on all four wheels of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON tires. Please consult your Nissan dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability information. 2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some provinces and states prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires. 3. Tire chains may be used if desired. Make sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturers suggestions. Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are in-

stalled according to the chain manufacturers suggestions. Use only SAE Class S chains. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected. Never install tire chains on a T-type spare tire. Do not use tire chains on dry roads.

4. Extra window washer fluid to refill the reservoir tank.

Driving on snow or ice

Wet ice (32F, 0C and freezing rain), very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have a lot less traction or grip under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded. Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with care gently. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction. Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement. Allow greater following distances on slippery roads. Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch

Special winter equipment

It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter: 1. A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades. 2. A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support. 3. A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

4-20

of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while actually on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads. Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle.

Engine block heater/Engine heater (If so equipped)

An engine block heater/engine heater to assist extreme cold temperature starting is available through your NISSAN dealer.

Do not use your heater with an ungrounded electrical system or twopronged (cheater) adapters. You can be injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection.

4-21

MEMO

4-22

5 In case of emergency

Flat tire ...................................................................... 5-2 Jump starting............................................................. 5-7 Push starting ............................................................. 5-9 If your vehicle overheats ........................................... 5-9 Tow truck towing ..................................................... 5-10

FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below. is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous. Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road away from traffic. 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. 3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Shift the manual transmission into reverse (automatic transmission in P). 4. Turn off the engine. 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance. 6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

SCE0036

Make sure that the parking brake is securely applied and the manual transmission is shifted into reverse (automatic transmission in P). Never change tires when the vehicle

Getting the spare tire and tools

Remove jacking tools and spare tire from the storage area located inside the trunk as illustrated.

5-2

MCE0001

SCE0053

Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up.
SCE0037

Removing wheel caps

Do not use your hands to pry off wheel caps. Doing so could result in personal injury.

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and could cause personal injury.

5-3

CE1089

CE1092

Jacking up and removing tire

Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instructions. 1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point as illustrated above so that top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack up point. Align the jack head between the two notches in the front or the rear as shown. Also fit the groove of the jack head between the notches as shown.

The jack should be used on level firm ground. 2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground. 3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands as shown above. Remove the wheel nuts, and then remove the tire. Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Use only the jack provided with your vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed only for lifting your vehicle during a tire change. Use the correct jack up points; never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support.

5-4

 Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary. Never use blocks on or under the jack. Do not start or run engine while vehicle is on the jack. Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack. Never run the engine with the wheels off the ground. It may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differential carriers. Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident. Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose. As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench. Wheel nut tightening torque: 72 to 87 ft-lb (98 to 118 Nm) Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure. COLD pressure: After vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire placard affixed to the center console lid. Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been run for 600 miles (1,000 km) after

SCE0039

Installing wheel
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub. 2. Carefully put the wheel on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight. 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly until they are tight. 4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence as illustrated.

5-5

installing the aluminum wheel.

under the heading Wheel and tire in the Do-it-yourself operations section.

SCE0040

5. Securely store the spare tire and jacking equipment in the vehicle.

Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly secured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop. The T-type spare tire and small size spare tire are designed for emergency use. See specific instructions

5-6

JUMP STARTING
To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be followed. Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump-starting. Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause serious injury. Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it.

If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle. Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery. Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, cloth or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulphuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water. Keep battery out of the reach of children. The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.

5-7

 Always connect positive (+) to positive (+) and negative () to body ground (e.g., strut mounting bolt, etc. not to the battery). Make sure that cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that clamps do not contact any other metal.
SCE0154A

5. Start the engine of the other vehicle and let it run for a few minutes. 6. Keep the engine speed of the other vehicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start your engine in the normal manner.

Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury. 1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the two vehicles to bring their batteries into close proximity to each other. Do not allow the two vehicles to touch. 2. Apply parking brake. Move the shift lever to Neutral (On automatic transmission models, move the lever to P). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (light, heater, air conditioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so equipped). Cover the battery with an old cloth to reduce explosion hazard. 4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as illustrated.

Do not keep starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, turn the key off and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

5-8

PUSH STARTING
7. After starting your engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable. 8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid. Automatic transmission models cannot be push started. This may cause transmission damage. Three-way catalyst equipped models should not be started by pushing since the three-way catalyst may be damaged. Never try to start the vehicle by towing it; when the engine starts, the forward surge could cause the vehicle to collide with the tow vehicle.

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take the following steps:

Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause a vehicle fire. To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the radiator cap while the engine is still hot. When the radiator cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury. Do not open the hood if steam is coming out. 1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the gearshift lever to neutral (automatic transmission to P). Do not stop the engine. 2. Turn off the air conditioner switch. Open all the windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum

5-9

TOW TRUCK TOWING

hot and fan control to high speed. 3. If engine overheating is caused by climbing a long hill on a hot day, run the engine at a fast idle (approximately 1,500 rpm) until the temperature gauge indication returns to normal. 4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. Wait until no steam or coolant can be seen before proceeding. 5. Open the engine hood. Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or to get caught in, belts, or motor fan. The fan motor can start at any time when the coolant temperature is high. 7. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the reservoir tank with the engine running. Add coolant to the reservoir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at the nearest NISSAN dealer. When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in Canada) and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from your NISSAN dealer. Local service operators will generally be familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends that you have a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions.

If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting burned. 6. Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine.

Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed. Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck.

When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and power train are in working condition. If any unit is damaged, a dolly must be used.

5-10

 When towing with the front wheels on the ground: Turn the ignition key to the OFF position and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never place the ignition key in the LOCK position. This will result in damage to the steering lock mechanism. Move the shift lever to the neutral (N position). On automatic transmission models, to move the selector lever to the Neutral position, turn the ignition key to the OFF or ACC position. After moving the selector lever to the Neutral position, be sure to turn the ignition key to the OFF position. When towing with the rear wheels on the ground, release the parking brake. On automatic transmission models, to move the selector lever to the Neutral (N position), turn the ignition key to the OFF or ACC position. After moving the shift lever to the

Neutral position, be sure to turn the ignition key to the OFF position. Attach safety chains for all towing.

CE1051

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground as illustrated. Speed: Below 70 MPH (115 km/h) Distance: Less than 500 miles (800 km)

5-11

wheels.

ing, brake or cooling systems. Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull on the vehicle at an angle. Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery. Stand clear of an stuck vehicle.

If you have to tow an automatic transmission model with four wheels on ground
Observe the following restricted towing speeds and distances. Speed: Below 30 MPH (50 km/h) Distance: Less than 40 miles (65 km)

CE1052

Towing an automatic transmission model with rear wheels raised (with front wheels on the ground)

Never tow an automatic transmission model from the rear (i.e., backward) with four wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission.

Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.

Never tow an automatic transmission model with the rear wheels raised (with the front wheels on the ground) as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised, always use a towing dolly under the front

VEHICLE RECOVERY (Freeing a stuck vehicle)

Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle. Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steer-

5-12

6 Appearance and interior care

Cleaning exterior and interior.................................... 6-2 Corrosion protection .................................................. 6-5

CLEANING EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area. When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover. Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover. must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so that the paint surface is not scratched or damaged. Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of clean water. Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be regularly cleaned. Make sure that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt. Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle. Do not use strong household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents. Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted. Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care

Washing
Thoroughly rinse surface dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and plenty of clean water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap such as Nissan Car Wash, or a general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

MAI0001

In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it. In the following cases, please wash your vehicle as soon as possible to protect the paint surface. After a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain After driving on coastal roads When contaminants such as soot, bird droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface When dust or mud builds up on the surface

Waxing
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. After waxing, polishing is recommended to remove built-up residue and to avoid a weathered appearance. If you wish to wax your vehicle, only use a wax specified for use over clear coats, such as Nissan Liquid or Spray Wax. Your Nissan

6-2

dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product. Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax. Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish. If the surface does not polish easily, use a road tar remover and wax again. Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

Underbody
In areas where road salt is used in winter, the underbody must be cleaned regularly. This will prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing underbody and suspension corrosion. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

SAI0014

Removing spots
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at your NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store.

Cleaning glass
When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier to clean if the high-mounted stop light is removed first. Be careful when removing the high-mounted stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the high-mounted stop light wires. The high-mounted stop light must be properly reinstalled before driving your vehicle. Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner

6-3

could discolor the wheel if not removed.

Chrome parts
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish. Never use benzine, thinner, or any similar material. The leather seats should be regularly coated with a leather wax like saddle soap. Never use car wax. Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer.

Cleaning interior
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry soft cloth. Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturers recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material.

SAI0002A

and a soft cloth will easily remove this film.

When cleaning the inside of the window, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the rear window defogger.

Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels

Wash regularly, especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. Salt

6-4

CORROSION PROTECTION Floor mats

The use of Genuine Nissan floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. No matter what mats are used, be sure they are fitted for your vehicle and are properly positioned in the footwell to prevent interference with pedal operation. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.

Most common factors contributing to vehicle corrosion:

1. The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas. 2. Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents.

Seat belts
SAI0012

Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion:

Moisture Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle, and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion. Relative humidity Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used.

Floor mat positioning aid (Driver side only)

This model includes a front floor mat bracket to act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your vehicle model. The drivers side floor mat has a grommet hole incorporated in it. Simply position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in the floorpan contour. Periodically check to make certain that the mats are properly positioned.

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely before using them.

Do not allow wet belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or chemical solvents since these may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.

6-5

Temperature A temperature increase will accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated. Air pollution Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will also accelerate the disintegration of paint surfaces.

ment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom. Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

To protect your vehicle from corrosion:

Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean. Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible. Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation. Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible.

NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compart-

6-6

7 Do-it-yourself operations

Maintenance precautions .......................................... 7-2 Engine cooling system .............................................. 7-5 Engine oil .................................................................. 7-7 Automatic transmission fluid ................................... 7-10 Power steering fluid ................................................ 7-11 Brake and clutch fluid ............................................. 7-12 Window washer fluid ............................................... 7-12 Battery ..................................................................... 7-13 Drive belts ............................................................... 7-15 Spark plug replacement .......................................... 7-15 Air cleaner filter ....................................................... 7-17 Wiper blades ........................................................... 7-18 Parking brake .......................................................... 7-19 Brake pedal ............................................................. 7-20 Brake booster .......................................................... 7-21 Clutch pedal ............................................................ 7-21 Fuses....................................................................... 7-21 Fusible links ............................................................ 7-23 Light bulbs ............................................................... 7-23 Wheels and tires ..................................................... 7-30

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed. If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts. It is advisable to remove necktie and any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle. If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases. Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands. Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks away from fuel and the battery. The fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off.

Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn off the engine and wait until it cools down. Never connect or disconnect either the battery or any transistorized component connector while the ignition key is on. Never leave the engine or the automatic transmission related component harness connector disconnected while the ignition key is on. Avoid direct contact with used engine oil. Improperly disposed motor oil and/or other vehicle fluids can hurt the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid. This Do-it-yourself operations section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform. You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could af-

Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. For a manual transmission, move the shift lever to Neutral. For an automatic transmission, move the selector lever to P (Park). Be sure the ignition key is OFF or LOCK when performing any parts replacement or repairs. Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition key is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan.

7-2

fect your warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, have it done by your NISSAN dealer.

7-3

CHECK LOCATIONS IN ENGINE COMPARTMENT

SDI0495

7-4

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, year-round, antifreeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors, therefore additional cooling system additives are not necessary. fluid escaping from the radiator. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. See precautions in If Your Vehicle Overheats found in the In case of emergency section. The radiator is equipped with a pressure cap. Use a genuine cap or its equivalent when replacement is required.

When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only an ethylene glycol antifreeze with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% distilled water. The use of other types of coolant solutions may damage your engine cooling system.
Outside C 35 temperature down to F 30 50% 50%

SDI0113

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL With coolant reservoir

Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below MIN, add coolant up to the MAX level. If the reservoir tank is empty, check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir tank up to the MAX level. If the engine cooling system frequently

Antifreeze

Distilled water

Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure

7-5

requires coolant, have it checked by your NISSAN dealer.

Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheating.

To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. 1. Open the radiator cap and drain plug. 2. Open the drain plug on the engine block. 3. Flush the cooling system by running fresh water through the radiator. 4. Close the radiator drain plug and the drain plug on the engine block securely.
SDI0114

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

Major cooling system repairs should be performed by your NISSAN dealer. The service procedures can be found in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual.

5. See the Technical information section for cooling system capacity. Fill the radiator slowly with the proper mixture of coolant and water. Fill the reservoir tank up to the MAX level. Then install the radiator cap.

7-6

ENGINE OIL

SDI0138

SDI0115

6. Start the engine, and warm it up until the radiator fan operates. Then race the engine 2 or 3 times under no load. Watch the coolant temperature gauge for signs of overheating. 7. Stop the engine. After it completely cools down, refill the radiator up to the filler opening. Fill the reservoir tank up to the MAX level. 8. Check the radiator drain plug and the drain plug on the engine block for any sign of leakage.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply parking brake. 2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature. 3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way.

7-7

Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating with insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.

SDI0534

SDI0139

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be between the H and L marks. If the oil level is below the L mark, remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening. Do not overfill. 6. Recheck oil level with dipstick. It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature. 3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. 4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug. 5. Remove the oil filler cap.

7-8

6. Remove the drain plug with a wrench and completely drain the oil. If oil filter is to be changed, remove and replace it at this time. See Changing oil filter.

9. Start the engine. Check for leakage around the drain plug. Correct as required. 10.Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary. 11.Dispose of waste oil in the proper manner.

Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot. Waste oil must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations. 7. Clean and re-install the drain plug and new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Drain plug tightening torque: 22 to 29 ft-lb (29 to 39 Nm) Do not use excessive force. 8. Refill engine with recommended oil and install the cap securely. See the Technical information section for refill capacity. Never pull out the dipstick while filling the engine with oil. Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. Keep used engine oil out of reach of children.

SDI0140

CHANGING OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Turn the engine off. 3. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench. (Depending on the engine model, a special cap type wrench may be required. See your NISSAN dealer if in doubt.) Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

7-9

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS FOR CHECKING

Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil may be hot. 4. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with a clean rag. Be sure to remove any old rubber gasket remaining on the mounting surface of the engine. 5. Coat the rubber gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil. 6. Screw in the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten additionally more than 2/3 turn. Oil filter tightening torque: 10.85 to 15.19 ft-lb (14.7 to 20.6 Nm) 7. Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter. Correct as required. 8. Turn the engine off and wait several minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if necessary. When engine is running, keep hands, jewelry and clothing away from any moving parts such as cooling fan and drive belt. Automatic transmission fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children. The fluid level should be checked using the HOT range on the dipstick after the following conditions have been met: The engine should be warmed up to operating temperature. The vehicle should be driven at least 5 minutes. The automatic transmission fluid should be warmed to between 122 and 176F (50 and 80C). The fluid can be checked at fluid temperatures of 86 to 122F (30 to 50C) using the COLD range on the dipstick after the engine is warmed up and before driving. However, the fluid should be re-checked using the HOT range. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the parking brake. 2. Start the engine and then move the selector lever through each gear range. Move the shift lever to P after you have moved it through all ranges.

SDI0117

7-10

POWER STEERING FLUID

DO NOT OVERFILL. USE ONLY NISSAN Matic D (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Genuine NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (Canada). DexronTMIII/MerconTM or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental United States and Alaska contact a NISSAN dealer for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of DexronTMIII/MerconTM or DexronTMIIE/MerconTM Automatic Transmission Fluid. NOTE: If the vehicle has been driven for a long time at high speeds, or in city traffic in hot weather, or if it is being used to pull a trailer, the accurate fluid level cannot be read. You should wait until the fluid has cooled down (about 30 minutes).

SDI0496

SDI0118

3. Check the fluid level with the engine idling. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean with lint-free paper. 5. Reinsert the dipstick into the charging pipe as far as it will go. 6. Remove the dipstick and note the reading. If the level is at the low side of either range, add fluid to the charging pipe.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir tank. The fluid level should be checked using the HOT range at fluid temperatures of 122 to 176F (50 to 80C) or using the COLD range at fluid temperatures of 32 to 86F (0 to 30C).

Do not overfill. Use type DEXRONTMIIE, DEXRONTMIII or equivalent.

7-11

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID

ability.

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

Do not spill the fluid on painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, wash with water.

SDI0119

SDI0189

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is below the Min. line or the brake warning light comes on, add DOT 3 fluid up to the Max. line. If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be thoroughly checked by your NISSAN dealer.

Type A
Add fluid when the low washer fluid warning light comes on. Add a washer solvent to the water for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer anti-freeze. Follow the manufacturers instructions for the mixture ratio.

Use only new fluid. Old, inferior, or contaminated fluid may damage the brake and clutch systems. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehicles stopping

7-12

BATTERY
Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Any corrosion should be washed off with a solution of baking soda and water. Anti-freeze is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children. Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened. If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative battery terminal cable to prevent discharge.

Do not substitute engine anti-freeze coolant for window washer solution. This may result in damage to the paint.
SDI0497

Type B
To check the fluid level, use your finger to plug the center hole of the cap (as shown above), then remove it from the tank. If there is no fluid in the tube, add fluid. Add a washer solvent to the water for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer anti-freeze. Follow the manufacturers instructions for the mixture ratio.

Do not expose the battery to flames or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas generated by battery action is explosive. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry. Keep the battery out of the reach of

7-13

children.

JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see the In case of emergency section. If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. Contact your NISSAN dealer.

DI0137M

Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX. and MIN. lines. If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level to the indicator in each filler opening. Do not overfill. 1. Remove the cell plugs. 2. Add distilled water up to the MAX. level. 3. Tighten cell plugs.

7-14

DRIVE BELTS

SPARK PLUG REPLACEMENT

Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.

Be sure to use the correct wrench to remove the plugs. An incorrect wrench can cause damage.
SDI0141

Be sure the ignition key is OFF. The engine could rotate unexpectedly. 1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying, oil adhesion or looseness. If the belt is in poor condition or loose, have it replaced or adjusted by your NISSAN dealer. 2. Have the belts checked regularly for condition and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual.

7-15

SDI0122

SDI0123

1. Remove the rocker cover ornament using a suitable hexagon wrench. (Front side) 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Loosen the ignition coil fixing bolts. And remove the ignition coil to give access to the spark plugs. 4. Remove the spark plugs with a spark plug wrench. The plug wrench has a rubber seal that holds the spark plug so that it will not fall when it is pulled out. Make sure that each spark plug is snugly fitted into the plug wrench.

5. Fit the new plugs, one at a time, into the spark plug wrench and install them. Turn each plug in several full turns by hand, then tighten with a spark plug wrench to the correct torque. Do not overtighten. Spark plug tightening torque: 14 to 22 ft-lb (20 to 29 Nm)

6. Holding the ignition coil, re-connect each ignition coil to its proper spark plug by pushing it on until you feel a snap. 7. Tighten all ignition coils.

7-16

AIR CLEANER FILTER

SDI0498

SDI0145

SDI0121

Platinum-tipped spark plug

It is not necessary to replace the platinumtipped spark plugs as frequently as the conventional type spark plugs since they will last much longer. Follow the maintenance schedule but, do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping. Always replace with recommended platinum-tipped spark plugs.

The filter element should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance intervals shown in the Maintenance schedule section. When replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp cloth.

Operating the engine with the air cleaner off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if the engine backfires. If it is not there, and the engine

7-17

WIPER BLADES
backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner off.

DI1018M

1) CLEANING If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield. Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water. Clean the blade by wiping it with a soaked in a washer solution or a detergent. Then rinse the blade with water. If your windshield is still not cloth mild clear clear

after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades. 2) REPLACEMENT 1. Pull the wiper arm. 2. Push the lock pin, then remove the wiper blade. 3. Insert the new wiper blade to the wiper arm until a click sounds.

7-18

PARKING BRAKE

After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position. Otherwise it may be damaged when the engine hood is opened. Make sure the wiper blade contacts the glass, otherwise the arm may be damaged from wind pressure.

SDI0125

From the released position, pull the parking brake lever up slowly and firmly. If the number of clicks is out of the range listed above, see your NISSAN dealer.

SDI0146

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle. This may cause clogging or improper windshield washer operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin.

7-19

BRAKE PEDAL

See your NISSAN dealer and have it checked if the brake pedal height does not return to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched scraping or screeching sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard. Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system. Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For more information regarding brake inspections, see the appropriate maintenance schedule information in the Maintenance Schedule section of this manual.

DI1020MD

With the engine running, check the distance between the upper surface of the pedal and the metal floor. If it is out of the range shown above, see your NISSAN dealer.

Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes. The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied.

7-20

BRAKE BOOSTER
Check the brake booster function as follows: 1. With the engine off, press and release the brake pedal several times. When brake pedal movement (distance of travel) remains the same from one pedal application to the next, continue on to the next step. 2. While depressing the brake pedal, start the engine. The pedal height should drop a little. 3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the engine. Keeping the pedal depressed for about 30 seconds, the pedal height should not change. 4. Run the engine for one minute without depressing the brake pedal, then turn it off. Depress the brake pedal several times. The pedal travel distance will decrease gradually with each depression as the vacuum is released from the booster. If the brakes do not operate properly, see your NISSAN dealer.

CLUTCH PEDAL

FUSES

DI1021MC

SDI0126

Press the pedal by hand and be sure the free travel is within the limits shown above. If free travel is too little or too much, see your NISSAN dealer.

Engine compartment

Never use a fuse of higher amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire. If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition key and headlight switch are OFF.

7-21

2. Open the engine hood. 3. Remove the fusible link cover. 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. 5. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse. 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by your NISSAN dealer.

SDI0335

Passenger compartment

2. Pull to open the fuse box lid. 3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. 4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse. 5. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by your NISSAN dealer.

Never use a fuse of higher amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire. If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition key and the headlight switch are OFF.

7-22

FUSIBLE LINKS

LIGHT BULBS HEADLIGHTS

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. A bulb can be replaced from inside the engine compartment without removing the headlight assembly.

SDI0128

High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped. Hold the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope.

If any electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace only with genuine NISSAN parts.

Removing the headlight bulb

1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the rear end of the bulb. 3. Turn the bulb retaining ring counterclockwise until it is free from the headlight reflector, then remove it. 4. Remove the headlight bulb. Do not shake or rotate the bulb when removing it.

SDI0129

7-23

Replacing the headlight bulb

1. Insert the bulb into the headlight reflector with the flat side of the plastic base facing upward. 2. Install the bulb retaining ring and turn it clockwise until it stops. 3. Push the electrical connector into the bulb plastic base until it snaps and stops. 4. Connect the battery negative cable.

OTHER LIGHTS
Item Clearance Front turn signal light Front side marker light Front fog light Rear combination light Turn signal Stop/Tail 27 27/8 18 3.8 5 27 10 10 2.7 3.4 1.4 161 158 1156 1156 1157 921 194 Wattage (W) 27/8 27 3.8 55 Bulb No. 1157 1156 194

DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB. Use the same number and wattage as originally installed: Wattage 65/45 Bulb no. 9004 Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact your NISSAN dealer. Do not leave the bulb out of the headlight reflector for a long period of time as dust, moisture, and smoke may enter the headlight body and affect the performance of the headlight.

Back-up Rear side marker light License plate light High-mounted stop light Interior light Front personal light Step light Trunk light Vanity mirror light

7-24

MDI0006

Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or cover.
SDI0499

7-25

SDI0131A

7-26

SDI0132

7-27

SDI0501

SDI0502

SDI0503

7-28

SDI0568

SDI0504A

7-29

WHEELS AND TIRES

pressures are shown on the tire placard affixed to the center console lid.

SDI0333

DI1033M

If you have a flat tire, see In case of emergency section.

The vehicle capacity weight is indicated on the tire placard. Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components. Before taking a long trip, or whenever you have loaded your vehicle heavily, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressure is at the specified level. Do not drive your vehicle over 85 MPH (140 km/h) unless it is equipped with high speed capability tires. Driving faster than 85 MPH (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury.

Maximum inflation pressure

Do not exceed the maximum inflation pressures shown on the side wall of the tire.

Tire inflation pressure

Periodically check the tire pressure (including spare). Incorrect tire pressure may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling. Tire pressure should be checked when tires are COLD. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for three or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). COLD tire

7-30

Types of tires

Summer tires NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance in snow and ice will be substantially reduced. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire sidewall. If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels. Snow tires If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Generally, snow tires will have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some provinces and states prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

Tire chains
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturers suggestions. Use only SAE class S chains. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or undercarriage. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected. Never install tire chains on a T-type spare tire. Do not use the chains on dry roads.

When changing or replacing tires, be sure all four tires are of the same type (i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and construction. Your NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability. Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire. All season tires NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some models to provide good performance for use all year around, including snowy and icy road conditions. All Season Tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

7-31

 After rotating the tires, adjust the tire pressure. Retighten the wheel nuts after the aluminum wheels have been run for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). Do not include the T-type spare tire or any other small size spare tire in the tire rotation.
DI0048-B MDI0004

Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends that tires be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). Wheel nut tightening torque: 72 to 87 ft-lb (98 to 118 Nm) See Flat tire in the In case of emergency section for tire replacing procedures.

Tire wear and damage

Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging, or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging, or deep cuts are found, the tire should be replaced. The original tires have a built-in tread wear indicator. When the wear indicator is visible, the tire should be replaced. Improper service for a T-type spare tire

7-32

may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the T-type spare tire, contact your NISSAN dealer.

Changing tires and wheels

When replacing a tire, use the same size, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. Recommended types and sizes are shown in Wheels and tires in the Technical information section.

which have the same offset dimension. Wheels of a different offset could cause early tire wear, possibly degraded vehicle handling characteristics and/or interference with the brake discs. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad wear. Do not install a deformed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning.

Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed. Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels. Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead. NISSAN recommends that the road wheels be waxed to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter.

Spare tire (T-type spare tire)

Observe the following precautions if the T-type spare tire must be used, otherwise your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident.

The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury. If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels

Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required. Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the front wheels on the vehicle could lead to transmission damage.

The T-type spare tire should be used only for emergency. It should be replaced by the standard tire at the first opportunity. Drive carefully while the T-type spare tire is installed.

Care of wheels
Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance.

7-33

Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving. Periodically check tire inflation pressure, and always keep it at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar). Do not drive your vehicle at speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h). Do not use tire chains on a T-type spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly on the T-type spare tire and may cause damage to the vehicle. When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, the T-type spare tire should be used on the rear wheel and the original tire used on the front wheels (drive wheels). Use tire chains only on the front two original tires. Tire tread of the T-type spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the original tire. Replace the T-type spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear. Because the T-type spare tire is smaller than the original tire, ground clearance is reduced. To avoid dam-

age to the vehicle do not drive over obstacles. Also do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught. Do not use the T-type spare tire on other vehicles. Do not use more than one T-type spare tire at the same time. Do not tow a trailer while the T-type spare tire is installed.

7-34

8 Maintenance schedule

General maintenance ................................................ 8-3 Periodic maintenance................................................ 8-5

Your new NISSAN has been designed to have minimum maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save you both time and money. However, some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your NISSANs good mechanical condition, as well as its emission and engine performance. It is the owners responsibility to make sure that the specified maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed. As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper maintenance care. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain.

However, under severe driving conditions, additional or more frequent maintenance will be required.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and tuned by an authorized NISSAN dealer. NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership training programs. They are completely qualified to work on NISSANs vehicles before they work on your vehicle, rather than after they have worked on it. You can be confident that your NISSAN dealers service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle in a reliable and economic way.

General maintenance
General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal dayto-day operation of the vehicle. They are essential if your vehicle is to continue to operate properly. It is your responsibility to perform these procedures regularly as prescribed. These checks or inspections can be done by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, your NISSAN dealer.

Periodic maintenance
The maintenance items listed in this part are required to be serviced at regular intervals.

8-2

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smell, be sure to check for the cause or have your NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you should notify your NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required. When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe the precautions in the Do-it-yourself operations section. Additional information on the following items with * is found in the Do-ityourself operations section. 7,500 miles (12,000 km). Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle pulls to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed. Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. Doors and engine hood Check that all doors and the engine hood operate smoothly as well as the trunk lid or back hatch. Also make sure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released. When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

INSIDE THE VEHICLE

The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc. Lights* Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim. Warning lights and buzzers/chimes Make sure that all warning lights and buzzers/chimes are operating properly. Windshield wiper and washer* Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak. Windshield defroster Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in good quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner. Steering wheel Check that it has the specified play. Be sure to check for changes in the steering conditions, such as excessive play, hard steering or strange noises. Seats Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to make sure they operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified. Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge periodically when at a service station, including the spare, and adjust to the specified pressure if necessary. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear. Wheel nuts* When checking the tires, make sure no nuts are missing, and check for any loose nuts. Tighten if necessary. Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every

8-3

head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks (if equipped) hold securely in all latched positions. Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt system (e.g. buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage. Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mats away from the pedal. Clutch pedal* Make sure the pedal operates smoothly and check that it has the proper free play. Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied. Brake pedal and booster* Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure it has the proper distance under it when depressed fully. Check the brake booster function. Be sure to keep floor mats away from the pedal. Parking brake* Check that the lever has the proper travel and make sure that the vehicle is held securely on a fairly steep hill when only the parking brake is applied. Automatic transaxle Park mechanism

Check that the brake pedal must be depressed for the selector lever to be moved from the P position. On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in the P position without applying any brakes.

dipstick after parking the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the engine. Be sure to wait a few minutes to allow the oil to drain back into the sump. Power steering fluid level* and lines Check the level in the reservoir tank with the engine off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. Automatic transaxle fluid level* Check the level on the dipstick after putting the selector lever in P with the engine idling. Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately locate the trouble and correct it. (See the carbon monoxide warning in the Starting and driving section) Underbody The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances, otherwise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, being careful to clean those areas where mud and dirt may accumulate. See the Appearance and interior care section for additional information.

UNDER THE HOOD AND VEHICLE

The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (e.g. each time you check the engine oil or refuel). Windshield washer fluid* Check that there is adequate fluid in the tank. Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level when the engine is cold. Radiator and hoses Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, deterioration or loose connections. Brake and clutch fluid levels* Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid levels are between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir. Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Engine drive belts* Make sure that no belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily. Engine oil level* Check the level on the

8-4

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately. To ensure smooth, trouble-free, safe and economical driving, NISSAN provides two different maintenance schedules that may be used, depending upon the conditions in which you usually drive. These schedules contain both distance and time intervals, up to 60,000 miles (96,000 km)/48 months. For most people, the odometer reading will indicate when service is needed. However, if you drive very little, your vehicle should be serviced at the regular time intervals shown in the schedule. After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, continue the periodic maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals. Driving in dusty conditions. Driving on rough, muddy, or salt spread roads. Towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier.

SCHEDULE 2
Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 2 if none of the driving conditions shown in Schedule 1 apply to your driving habits.

SCHEDULE 1
Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 1 if your driving habits frequently include one or more of the following driving conditions: Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km). Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing. Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go rush hour traffic. Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use.

8-5

SCHEDULE 1
Abbreviations: R = Replace I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 3.75 (6) 3 7.5 (12) 6 11.25 (18) 9 15 (24) 12 18.75 (30) 15

[
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 22.5 26.25 30 33.75 37.5 41.25 (36) (42) (48) (54) (60) (66) 18 21 24 27 30 33

]: At the mileage intervals only

45 48.75 (72) (78) 36 39 52.5 56.25 (84) (90) 42 45 60 (96) 48 I* [R] I* I* R* R R [R]

Emission control system maintenance

Drive belts See NOTE (1) Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) Vapor lines Fuel lines Fuel filter See NOTE (3)* Engine coolant See NOTE (4) Engine oil Engine oil filter (Use part No. 15208-31U00 or equivalent) Spark plugs (Use PLATINUM-TIPPED type) Intake & exhaust valve clearance See NOTE (5) [R] I* I*

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

NOTE: (1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. (2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required. (3) If vehicle is operated under extremely adverse weather conditions or in areas where ambient temperatures are either extremely low or extremely high, the filters might become clogged. In such an event, replace them immediately. (4) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. (5) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance. (6) Maintenance items and intervals with * are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

8-6

Abbreviations: I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.

MAINTENANCE OPERATION Miles x 1,000 Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) Months 3.75 (6) 3 7.5 11.25 (12) 6 (18) 9 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 15 18.75 22.5 26.25 (24) 12 (30) 15 (36) 18 (42) 21 30 33.75 37.5 41.25 (48) 24 (54) 27 (60) 30 (66) 33 45 48.75 52.5 56.25 (72) 36 (78) 39 (84) 42 (90) 45 60 (96) 48

Chassis and body maintenance

Brake lines & cables Brake pads, discs, drums & linings Manual & automatic transaxle oil Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Steering linkage ball joints & front suspension ball joints Exhaust system Front drive shaft boots Supplemental air bag system See NOTE (2). See NOTE (1). I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

NOTE: (1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. (2) Inspect the supplemental air bag system 10 years after the date of manufacture noted on the FMVSS certification label.

8-7

SCHEDULE 2
Abbreviations: R = Replace I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION Miles x 1,000 Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) Months 7.5 (12) 6 15 (24) 12 22.5 (36) 18 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 30 (48) 24 37.5 (60) 30 45 (72) 36 52.5 (84) 42 60 (96) 48 I* [R] I* I* See NOTE (2)* See NOTE (3) R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R* R R [R] See NOTE (4) [R] I* I*

]: At the mileage intervals only

Emission control system maintenance

Drive belts Air cleaner filter Vapor lines Fuel lines Fuel filter Engine coolant Engine oil Engine oil filter (Use part No. 15208-31U00 or equivalent) Spark plugs (Use PLATINUM-TIPPED type) Intake & exhaust valve clearance See NOTE (1)

NOTE: (1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. (2) If vehicle is operated under extremely adverse weather conditions or in areas where ambient temperatures are either extremely low or extremely high, the filters might become clogged. In such an event, replace them immediately. (3) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. (4) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance. (5) Maintenance items and intervals with * are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

8-8

Abbreviations: I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. MAINTENANCE OPERATION Miles x 1,000 Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) Months 7.5 (12) 6 15 (24) 12 22.5 (36) 18 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 30 (48) 24 37.5 (60) 30 45 (72) 36 52.5 (84) 42 60 (96) 48

Chassis and body maintenance

Brake lines & cables Brake pads, discs, drums & linings Manual & automatic transaxle oil Steering gear linkage, axle & suspension parts Exhaust system Front drive shaft boots Supplemental air bag system See NOTE (1). I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

NOTE: (1) Inspect the supplemental air bag system 10 years after the date of manufacture noted on the FMVSS certification label.

8-9

EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following items with * is found in the Do-ityourself operations section.

might become clogged. In such an event, replace the filter immediately. Engine coolant* Drain and flush the cooling system. Engine oil & oil filter* Under normal driving conditions, the engine oil and oil filter should be replaced in accordance with the maintenance schedule. However, under severe driving conditions, they may have to be replaced more frequently. Spark plugs* Replace with new plugs having the correct heat range. Intake & exhaust valve clearance Check and adjust the valve clearance.

Check the oil level and visually inspect for signs of leakage. Under severe driving conditions, the oil should be replaced at the specified interval. Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts, and drive shaft boots Check for damage, looseness and leakage of oil or grease. Under severe driving conditions, more frequent inspection should be performed. Steering linkage ball joints & front suspension ball joints Check the ball joints for damage, looseness and grease leakage. Exhaust system Visually check the exhaust pipes, muffler, and hangers for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, chafing, abrasion, deterioration, etc. Under severe driving conditions, inspection should be performed more frequently. Supplemental air bag system Check the supplemental air bag system components for proper attachment, damage, deformities, cracks rust, etc. Work around and on the supplemental air bag system should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer.

Emission control system maintenance

Drive belts* Check drive belts for wear, fraying or cracking and also for proper tension. Replace the drive belts if found damaged. Air cleaner filter Under normal driving conditions, the air cleaner filter should be replaced in accordance with the maintenance schedule. However, driving the vehicle in dusty areas may cause more rapid clogging of the element. Consequently, the element may have to be replaced more frequently. Vapor lines Check vapor lines and connections for failure or looseness. If leaks are found, replace them. Fuel lines Check the fuel hoses, piping and connections for leaks, looseness or deterioration. Replace any parts if they are damaged. Fuel filter If the vehicle is operated under extremely adverse weather conditions or in areas where ambient temperatures are either extremely low or extremely high, the filter

Chassis and body maintenance

Brake lines & cables Check the brake lines and hoses (including brake booster vacuum hoses, connections & check valve) and parking brake cables for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, chafing, abrasion, deterioration, etc. Brake pads, discs, drums & linings Check these and the other neighboring brake components for wear, deterioration and leaks. Under severe driving conditions, they may have to be inspected more frequently. Manual & automatic transaxle gear oil*

8-10

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ............................................................ 9-2 Engine ....................................................................... 9-8 Wheels and tires ....................................................... 9-9 Dimensions and weights ........................................... 9-9 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country ....................................... 9-10 Vehicle identification ............................................... 9-10 Installing license plate ............................................. 9-12 Vehicle loading information ..................................... 9-13 Trailer towing........................................................... 9-14 Uniform tire quality grading ..................................... 9-18 Emission control system warranty .......................... 9-19 Reporting safety defects (For U.S.A.)..................... 9-19 Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test (For U.S.A.) ............................................. 9-19

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure instructed in the Do-it-yourself operations section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (Approximate) US measure Fuel Engine oil (Refill) With oil filter Without oil filter Cooling system With reservoir Reservoir Manual transmission gear oil Automatic transmission fluid Power steering fluid Brake and clutch fluid Multi-purpose grease Air conditioning system refrigerant Air conditioning system lubricants Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in the Do-ityourself operations section. 9 qt 7/8 qt 7-1/2 qt 3/4 qt 8.5 0.8 Anti-freeze coolant (Ethylene glycol base) API GL-4*2 Nissan Matic D (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Genuine Nissan Automatic Transmission Fluid (Canada).*3 Type DEXRON equivalent
TM

FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96) If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Research octane number 91) can be used. However, for maximum vehicle performance, the use of unleaded premium gasoline is recommended.

Imp measure 15-3/8 gal 70

Liter

Recommended specifications Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (RON 96) API SG or SH and Energy Conserving II*1, *2 API Certification Mark*1, *2

18-1/2 gal

4-1/4 qt 3-7/8 qt

3-1/2 qt 3-1/4 qt

4.0 3.7

IIE, DEXRON

TM

III or

Genuine Nissan Brake Fluid or equivalent*4 DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116) NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base) HFC-134a (R-134a) Nissan A/C System Oil Type S or exact equivalent

Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control devices and systems, and could also affect the warranty coverage. Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, since this will damage the three-way catalyst.

*1: For further details, see Engine oil and oil filter recommendation. *2: For further details, see Recommended SAE viscosity number. *3: DexronTMIII/MerconTM or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental United States and Alaska contact a NISSAN dealer for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of DexronTMIII/MerconTM or DexronTMIIE/MerconTM Automatic Transmission Fluid. *4: For more information regarding suitable fluids, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions.

9-2

Nissan supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence. Nissan does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager. If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage. The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline. If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a methanol blend, is used, it should contain no more than 10% oxygenate. (MTBE may, however, be added up to 15%.) If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should also contain a suitable amount of appro-

priate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in Nissan vehicles. If any undesirable driveability problems such as engine stalling and hard hot starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE. Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage.

Octane rating tips In most parts of North America, you should use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 or 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number. However, you may use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating as low as 85 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number in these high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)] such as: Colorado, Montana, New Mexico, Utah, Wyoming, northeastern Nevada, southern Idaho, western South Dakota, western Nebraska, and that part of Texas which is directly south of New Mexico. Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than stated above can cause persistent, heavy spark knock. (Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, have your dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible. Incorrect ignition timing will result in knocking, after-run or overheating. This in turn may cause excessive fuel consumption or damage

Aftermarket fuel additives

Nissan does not recommend the use of any fuel additives (i.e. fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvent or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine.

9-3

to the engine. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked at a NISSAN dealer or other competent service facility. However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is no cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load.

STI0077

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATION Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct quality, and viscosity oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. Nissan recommends the use of a low friction oil (energy conserving oil) in order to improve fuel economy and conserve energy. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage. Only those engine oils with the American Petroleum Institute (API) CERTIFICATION

MARK on the front of the container should be used. This type of oil supersedes the existing API SG or SH and Energy Conserving II categories. If you cannot find engine oil with the CERTIFICATION MARK, an API SG or SH and Energy Conserving II oil with API Service Symbol may be used. An oil with a single designation SG or SH, or in combination with other categories (for example, SG/CC or SG/CD) may also be used if one with the API CERTIFICATION MARK cannot be found. Mineral based or synthetic type oils may be used in your NISSAN vehicle. These oils must

9-4

however, meet the API quality and SAE viscosity ratings specified for your vehicle. Do not mix mineral based and synthetic type oils in the engine at the same time.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new vehicle is equipped with a highquality genuine Nissan oil filter. When replacing, use the genuine oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in change intervals.

repeated short distance driving at cold outside temperatures, driving in dusty conditions, extensive idling, towing a trailer.

Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed. Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used.

Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Oil and filter other than the specified quality, or oil and filter change intervals longer than recommended could reduce engine life. Damage to engines caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the new Nissan vehicle warranties. Your engine was filled with a high quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle. Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes.

Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important that the engine oil viscosity be selected based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. The chart Recommended SAE viscosity number shows the recommended oil viscosities for the expected ambient temperatures. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage.

9-5

RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY NUMBER

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioning system in this NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lubricant, Nissan A/C System Oil Type S or the exact equivalents.

Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will cause severe damage and you will need to replace your vehicles entire air conditioning system. The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your NISSAN vehicle will not harm the earths ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earths atmosphere, certain governmental regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioning system service. Your NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioning system refrigerant.

TI1028-B

TI1002M

SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all ambient temperatures. SAE 10W-30 viscosity oil may be used if the ambient temperature is above 0F (18C).

80W-90 is preferable for ambient temperatures below 104F (40C).

9-6

Contact your NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioning system.

9-7

ENGINE
Model Type Cylinder arrangement Bore x Stroke Displacement Firing order Idle speed Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) CO percentage at idle speed Spark plug Spark plug gap Camshaft operation Alternator belt size Width x Length in (mm) 0.8409 x 43.11 (21.36 x 1,095) rpm degree/rpm [No air] % Standard Service option in (mm) Timing chain PFR5G-11 PFR4G-11, PFR6G-11 See the Emission Control Label on the underside of the hood. in (mm) cu in (cm3) VQ30DE Gasoline, 4-cycle 6-cylinder, V-slanted at 60 3.66 x 2.886 (93.0 x 73.3) 182.33 (2,988) 1-2-3-4-5-6*

The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

TI1009-A

9-8

WHEELS AND TIRES

Steel Offset Road wheel Aluminum Offset Conventional Tire size Spare *1: For CANADA *2: For U.S.A. *3: For models with Viscous LSD Conventional*1 T125/70D16*2 T125/90D16*2, *3 15 x 6JJ in (mm) 1.57 (40) 15 x 6.5JJ 16 x 6.5JJ in (mm) 1.77 (45) P205/65R15 92S P205/65R15 92H P215/55R16 91H

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Sedan Overall length Overall width Overall height Front tread Rear tread Wheelbase Gross vehicle weight rating Gross axle weight rating Front Rear lb (kg) lb (kg) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) lb (kg) See the F.M.V.S.S. certification label on the drivers side lock pillar. 189.4 (4,810) 69.7 (1,770) 55.7 (1,415) 60.2 (1,530)*1 59.8 (1,520)*2 59.4 (1,510)*1 59.1 (1,500)*2 106.3 (2,700)

*1: For models with steel wheels *2: For models with aluminum wheels

9-9

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

When planning to travel in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicles engine. Using fuel with too low an octane rating may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded engine gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available. When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations. The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ. When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation, and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

STI0038

STI0040

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER PLATE

The vehicle identification number plate is attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (Chassis number)

The number is stamped as shown.

9-10

STI0047

STI0041

STI0042

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL

The F.M.V.S.S. certification label is affixed as shown.

EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is attached as shown.

9-11

INSTALLING LICENSE PLATE

STI0043

STI0044

TIRE PLACARD
The cold tire pressure is shown on the tire placard affixed to the center console lid.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is affixed inside of the hood as shown.

STI0104

Use the following steps to mount the license plate: 1. Mount the license plate bracket with 0.24 in (6 mm) diameter by 0.55 in (14 mm) long tapping screws.

9-12

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

2. Mount the license plate with the 0.24 in (6 mm) bolts. The bolts used to fasten the license plate to the bracket are not included in the bracket assembly. maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle.

Determining vehicle load capacity

The load capacity of this vehicle is determined by weight, not by available cargo space. For example, a luggage rack, bike carrier, cartop carrier or similar equipment does not increase load carrying capacity of your vehicle. To determine vehicle load capacity: Vehicle weight can be determined by using a commercial-grade scale, found at places such as a truck stop, gravel quarry, grain elevator, or a scrap metal recycling facility. 1) Determine the curb weight of your vehicle. 2) Compare the curb weight amount to the GVWR specified for your vehicle to determine how much more weight your vehicle can carry. 3) After loading (cargo and passengers), reweigh your vehicle to determine if either GVWR or GAWR for your vehicle is exceeded. If GVWR is exceeded, remove cargo as necessary. If either the front or rear GAWR is exceeded, shift the load or

Terms
It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle: Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not include passengers and cargo. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) -

9-13

TRAILER TOWING
remove cargo as necessary. warranty.

Loading tips
The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the FMVSS Certification Label. Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.

Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury. Overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by your

TI1011M

Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember that towing a trailer will place additional loads on your vehicles engine, drive train, steering, braking and other systems. Information on trailer towing ability and the special equipment required should be obtained from your Nissan dealer. He can obtain a Nissan Trailer Towing Guide for you.

9-14

Maximum load limits

Maximum trailer loads Never allow the total trailer load to exceed 1,000 lb (454 kg). The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight. Towing loads greater than 1,000 lb (454 kg) or using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance.

Towing load/specification chart

MAXIMUM TOWING LOAD MAXIMUM TONGUE LOAD

Unit: lb (kg)

1,000 (454) 110 (49)

Trailer hitch
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer. Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle, to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

Vehicle damage and/or personal injury resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by NISSAN warranties. Information on trailer towing and required towing equipment should be obtained from dealers who specialize in providing trailers or other towing equipment. Tongue load Keep the tongue load between 9 and 11% of the total trailer load. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load.

TI1012M

Maximum gross vehicle weight/maximum gross axle weight The gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) shown on the F.M. V.S.S. certification label. The gross vehicle weight equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. In addition, front or rear gross axle weight must not exceed the gross axle weight rating (GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label. Do not use axle-mounted hitches. The hitch should not be attached to or affect the operation of the impactabsorbing bumper Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, etc. when the hitch is installed. To reduce the possibility of additional damage if your vehicle is struck from the rear, where practical, remove the

9-15

hitch when not in use. Remove the receiver when not in use. After the hitch is removed, seal the bolt holes to prevent exhaust fumes, water or dust from entering the passenger compartment. Regularly check that all hitch mounting bolts are securely mounted.

Trailer lights
Trailer lights should comply with Federal and/or local regulations. When wiring the vehicle for towing, connect the stop and tail light pickup into the vehicle electrical circuit at a point between the sensor and stop light or light switch.

load shifts while driving. Be certain your rear view mirrors conform to all federal, state or local regulations. If not, install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicles behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic. Steering stability, and braking performance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.

Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system, make sure it conforms to Federal and/or local regulations and that it is properly installed.

Tire pressures
When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the tire placard (located on the inside of the center console lid.) Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturers specifications.

Never connect a trailer brake system directly to the vehicle brake system.

Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops. Avoid sharp turns or lane changes. Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed. Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not recommended; however, if you must do so, and if your vehicle is equipped with automatic transmission, first block the wheels and apply the parking brake, and then move the transmission shift lever into the P position. If you move the shift lever to the P position before blocking the

Safety chain
Always use a suitable chain between your vehicle and the trailer. The chain should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave enough slack in the chain to permit turning corners.

Pre-towing tips
Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded and/or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down condition; check for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent

9-16

wheels and applying the parking brake, transmission damage could occur. When going down a hill, shift into a lower gear and use the engine braking effect. When ascending a long grade, downshift the transmission to a lower gear and reduce speed to reduce chances of engine overloading and/or overheating. If the engine coolant rises to an extremely high temperature when the air conditioning system is on, turn off the air conditioner. Coolant heat can be additionally vented by opening the windows, switching the fan control to high and setting the temperature control to the HOT position. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances. Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km). Have your vehicle serviced more often than at intervals specified in the recommended Maintenance Schedule. When making a turn, your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make a larger than normal turning radius during the turn.

Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly causing vehicle sway. When being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect vehicle handling. If swaying does occur, firmly grip the steering wheel, steer straight ahead, and immediately (but gradually) reduce vehicle speed. This combination will help stabilize the vehicle. Never increase speed. Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing while towing a trailer requires considerably more distance than normal passing. Remember the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes. To maintain engine braking efficiency and electrical charging performance, do not use fifth gear (manual transmission) or overdrive (automatic transmission). Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency. When towing a trailer, change oil in the transmission more frequently. See the Maintenance schedule.

9-17

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear
Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on tire wear rate when tested under controlled conditions on specified government test courses. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1-1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. However, relative tire performance depends on actual driving conditions, and may vary significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

The traction grade assigned to your vehicle tires is based on straight line braking traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.

Temperature A, B and C
Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C. They represent a tires resistance to heat build-up, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause tire material to degenerate, reducing tire life. Excessive temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a performance level which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades A and B represent higher levels of performance on laboratory test wheels than the minimum required by law.

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure problems.

Traction A, B and C
Traction grades are A (the highest), B and C. They represent a tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions, on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked with a C may have poor traction performance.

9-18

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY

Your NISSAN is covered by the following emission warranties.

For U.S.A.
1) Emission Defects Warranty 2) Emissions Performance Warranty

For Canada
Emission Control System Warranty Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information and Maintenance Log Booklet that comes with your NISSAN. If you did not receive a Warranty Information and Maintenance Log Booklet, or it has become lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to: Nissan Motor Corporation U.S.A. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 191 Gardena. CA. 90248-0191 Nissan Canada Inc. P.O. Box 1709, Station B Mississauga, Ontario, L4Y 4H6

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (For U.S.A.) If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, tollfree, at 1-800-NISSAN-1. In Hawaii call (808) 836-0888.
9-19

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (For U.S.A.)

Due to legal requirements in some states/ areas, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the ready condition for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system. The vehicle is set to the ready condition when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle. If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a not ready condition. Before taking the I/M test, drive the vehicle through the following pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. If you cannot or do not want to perform the driving pattern, an NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.

Always drive the vehicle in a safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws. 1. Start the engine when the engine coolant temperature gauge needle points to C. Allow the engine to idle until the gauge needle points between the C and H (normal operating temperature).

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h), then quickly release the accelerator pedal completely and keep it released for at least 6 seconds. 3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of 53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96 km/h) for at least 5 minutes. 4. Stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 at least one more time. If step 1, 2 or 3 is interrupted, repeat the preceding step. Any safe driving mode is acceptable between steps. Do not stop the engine until step 3 is completed.

9-20

bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you. Also available are Genuine NISSAN Service and Owners Manuals for older Nissan models.

A Genuine Nissan Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment procedures, this manual is the same one used by the factory trained technicians working at your Nissan dealership. Also available are Genuine NISSAN Owners Manuals. For current pricing and availability of a Genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Genuine NISSAN Owners Manual, contact:

In the U.S.A.: See your NISSAN dealer or contact: Dyment Distribution Services 20770 Westwood Dr. Strongsville OH 44136 In a hurry? Call 1-800-247-5321 and charge your purchase to Visa/Master Card. In Canada: To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owners Manual please contact your nearest NISSAN Dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN Dealer in your area call the Nissan Satisfaction Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a

9-21

MEMO

9-22

10 Index
A Air bag system (See Supplemental restraint system) .......................................................... 2-17 Air bag warning light (See Supplemental air bag warning light) ................................................. 2-22 Air cleaner filter............................................... 7-17 Air conditioner Air conditioner operation ............................. 3-5 Air conditioner specification label.............. 9-12 Automatic air conditioner (If so equipped) .. 3-9 Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations ............................................. 9-6 Air flow chart ..................................................... 3-6 Antenna........................................................... 3-28 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) (If so equipped) .. 418 Audio main operation...................................... 3-23 Automatic Automatic air conditioner (If so equipped) .. 3-9 Automatic transmission fluid ..................... 7-10 Driving with automatic transmission............ 4-7 Avoiding collision and rollover .......................... 4-3 B Battery............................................................. 7-13 Battery replacement.......................................... 2-7 Before starting the engine ................................ 4-6 Brake Anti-lock brake system (ABS) (If so equipped)................................................... Brake and clutch fluid................................ Brake booster ............................................ Brake pedal ............................................... Brake system............................................. Brake wear indicators ........................ 1-9, Parking brake................................... 4-12, Break-in schedule ........................................... C Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants... 9-2 Cargo (See Vehicle loading information) ..................................................... 9-13 Cassette tape player operation....................... 3-25 CB radio or car phone .................................... 3-29 Changing Changing engine coolant ............................ 7-6 Changing engine oil .................................... 7-8 Changing oil filter ........................................ 7-9 Checking engine coolant level.......................... 7-5 Checking engine oil level.................................. 7-7 Child restraints for infants and small children .... 231 Child safety rear door lock................................ 2-3 Cigarette lighter and ash trays ....................... 1-17 Cleaning exterior and interior ........................... 6-2 Clearing the programming information ........... 1-26 Clock ............................................................... 1-22 Clutch pedal .................................................... 7-21 Cold weather driving ....................................... 4-19 Compact disc (CD) player operation .............. 3-26 Controls............................................................. 3-3 Coolant Changing engine coolant ............................ 7-6 Checking engine coolant level .................... 7-5 Engine coolant temperature gauge............. 1-4 Corrosion protection ......................................... 6-5 Cruise control.................................................. 4-13 Cup holder ...................................................... 1-19 D Defogger switch Rear window and outside mirror defogger switch......................................................... 1-13 Dimensions and weights................................... 9-9 Door lock operation .......................................... 2-6 Door locks ......................................................... 2-2 Door unlock operation ...................................... 2-6 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ................... 4-4 Drive belts ....................................................... 7-15 Driving Cold weather driving ................................. 4-19 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving .............. 4-4 Driving with automatic transmission............ 4-7 Driving with manual transmission ............. 4-10

4-18 7-12 7-21 7-20 4-17 7-20 7-19 4-15

Precautions when starting and driving ........ 4-2 E Economy hints ................................................ 4-15 Emission control information label.................. 9-11 Emission control system warranty .................. 9-19 Engine ............................................................... 9-8 Before starting the engine........................... 4-6 Changing engine coolant ............................ 7-6 Changing engine oil .................................... 7-8 Checking engine coolant level .................... 7-5 Checking engine oil level ............................ 7-7 Engine coolant temperature gauge............. 1-4 Engine cooling system ................................ 7-5 Engine oil..................................................... 7-7 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation.......................................... 9-4 Engine serial number ................................ 9-11 Starting the engine ...................................... 4-6 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ...................... 4-2 Explanation of maintenance items.................. 8-10 F Flat tire .............................................................. 5-2 Fluid Automatic transmission fluid ..................... 7-10 Brake and clutch fluid................................ 7-12 Power steering fluid................................... 7-11 Window washer fluid ................................. 7-12 FM/AM radio with cassette player .................. 3-12 FM-AM radio with cassette player .................. 3-16

FM-AM radio with cassette player and compact disc player ........................................ 3-22 F.M.V.S.S. certification label........................... 9-11 Foldable outside mirrors ................................. 2-39 Front fog light switch (If so equipped) ............ 1-15 Front personal light ......................................... 1-23 Fuel Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants .............................................. 9-2 Fuel filler cap............................................. 2-10 Fuel filler lid lock ....................................... 2-10 Fuel gauge .................................................. 1-5 Fuel recommendation.................................. 9-2 Fuses .............................................................. 7-21 Fusible links .................................................... 7-23 G

Hood release .................................................... 2-8 I If your vehicle is ever stolen........................... 1-26 If your vehicle overheats .................................. 5-9 Ignition switch ................................................... 4-4 Injured persons ............................................... 2-26 Inside mirror .................................................... 2-40 Installing license plate .................................... 9-12 Instrument brightness control ......................... 1-15 Integrated HomeLink transmitter

(If so equipped).......................................... 1-24

Interior light ..................................................... 1-22 J Jump starting ........................................... 5-7, 7-14

Gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge............. Fuel gauge .................................................. Meters and gauges ..................................... General maintenance ....................................... Glove box lock .................................................. H

1-4 1-5 1-3 8-3 2-8

K Key.................................................................... 2-2 L License plate Installing license plate ............................... Light Front fog light switch (If so equipped)................................................... Front personal light ................................... Headlight and turn signal switch ............... Headlights.................................................. Interior light................................................

9-12

Hazard warning flasher switch........................ 1-16 Head restraint ................................................. 2-15 Headlight and turn signal switch..................... 1-14 Headlights ....................................................... 7-23 Heated seats (If so equipped) ........................ 1-16 Heater operation ............................................... 3-4

1-15 1-23 1-14 7-23 1-22

10-2

Light bulbs ................................................. 7-23 Supplemental air bag warning light........... 2-22 Trunk light.................................................. 1-23 Vanity mirror light ...................................... 1-23 Warning/indicator light and buzzer.............. 1-6 Lock Anti-lock brake system (ABS) (If so equipped)................................................... 4-18 Child safety rear door lock .......................... 2-3 Door lock operation ..................................... 2-6 Door locks ................................................... 2-2 Door unlock operation ................................. 2-6 Fuel filler lid lock ....................................... 2-10 Glove box lock............................................. 2-8 Power door lock .......................................... 2-4 Trunk lid lock ............................................... 2-9 Luggage (See Vehicle loading information) . 9-13 M Maintenance Explanation of maintenance items ............ 8-10 General maintenance .................................. 8-3 Maintenance precautions ............................ 7-2 Periodic maintenance.................................. 8-5 Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test (For U.S.A.) ........................................ 9-19 Seat belt maintenance .............................. 2-31 Meters and gauges ........................................... 1-3 Mirror Foldable outside mirrors............................ 2-39 Inside mirror .............................................. 2-40 Outside mirror remote control ................... 2-39

Rear window and outside mirror defogger switch......................................................... 1-13 Vanity mirror light ...................................... 1-23 Multi-remote control system (If so equipped) ... 2-5 O Odometer .......................................................... 1-4 Oil Changing engine oil .................................... 7-8 Changing oil filter ........................................ 7-9 Checking engine oil level ............................ 7-7 Engine oil..................................................... 7-7 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation.......................................... 9-4 Opener cancel lever for trunk lid .................... 2-10 Opening the drivers and front passengers window .............................................................. 2-6 Operating the transmitter ................................ 1-25 Outside mirror remote control......................... 2-39 Overheat If your vehicle overheats ............................. 5-9 P Panic alarm operation....................................... 2-6 Parking Parking brake................................... 4-12, 7-19 Parking/parking on hills ............................. 4-16 Periodic maintenance ....................................... 8-5 Pocket ............................................................. 1-18 Power Power antenna .......................................... 3-29 Power door lock .......................................... 2-4

Power steering fluid................................... 7-11 Power steering system.............................. 4-17 Power support seat (If so equipped)......... 2-14 Power window ........................................... 1-19 Precautions Maintenance precautions ............................ 7-2 Precautions on seat belt usage ................ 2-24 Precautions when starting and driving ........ 4-2 Pregnant women............................................. 2-26 Programming problem diagnosis .................... 1-25 Programming the HomeLink

transmitter .................................................. 1-24

Push starting ..................................................... 5-9 R Radio............................................................... 3-11 CB radio or car phone............................... 3-29 FM/AM radio with cassette player............. 3-12 FM-AM radio with cassette player......................................................... 3-16 FM-AM radio with cassette player and compact disc player .................................. 3-22 Radio operation ......................................... 3-23 Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test (For U.S.A.)..................................................... 9-19 Rear seat ........................................................ 2-16 Rear window and outside mirror defogger switch .............................................................. 1-13 Recommended SAE viscosity number ............. 9-6 Refrigerant recommendation ............................ 9-6 Reporting safety defects (For U.S.A.) ............ 9-19 Rolling codes (If so equipped)........................ 1-26

10-3

S Safety Child safety rear door lock .......................... 2-3 Reporting safety defects (For U.S.A.) ....... 9-19 Seat adjustment .............................................. 2-12 Seat belt 2-point type without retractor .................... 2-29 3-point type seat belt with ......................... 2-26 Precautions on seat belt usage ................ 2-24 Seat belt extenders ................................... 2-30 Seat belt maintenance .............................. 2-31 Seat belts .................................................. 2-24 Seats ............................................................... 2-12 Spark plug replacement.................................. 7-15 Speedometer .................................................... 1-4 Starting Before starting the engine........................... 4-6 Jump starting ..................................... 5-7, 7-14 Precautions when starting and driving ........ 4-2 Push starting ............................................... 5-9 Starting the engine ...................................... 4-6 Steering Power steering fluid................................... 7-11 Power steering system.............................. 4-17 Tilting steering wheel ................................ 2-38 Sunroof (If so equipped) ................................. 1-21 Supplemental air bag warning light ................ 2-22 Supplemental restraint system (Supplemental air bag system) .................................................... 2-17 Switch Front fog light switch (If so equipped) ...... 1-15 Hazard warning flasher switch .................. 1-16 Headlight and turn signal switch ............... 1-14

Ignition switch.............................................. 4-4 Rear window and outside mirror defogger switch......................................................... 1-13 Windshield wiper and washer switch ........ 1-12 T Tachometer ....................................................... 1-4 Theft warning (If so equipped)........................ 1-10 Three way catalyst............................................ 4-2 Tilting steering wheel ...................................... 2-38 Timing chain ..................................................... 9-8 Tire Flat tire ........................................................ 5-2 Tire chains................................................. 7-31 Tire placard ............................................... 9-12 Tire pressure ............................................. 7-30 Uniform tire quality grading ....................... 9-18 Wheels and tires ................................ 7-30, 9-9 Tow truck towing............................................. 5-10 Towing Tow truck towing ....................................... 5-10 Towing load/specification chart ................. 9-15 Trailer towing............................................. 9-14 Trailer towing .................................................. 9-14 Transmission Automatic transmission fluid ..................... 7-10 Driving with automatic transmission............ 4-7 Driving with manual transmission ............. 4-10 Trip odometer ................................................... 1-4 Trunk lid lock .................................................... 2-9 Trunk lid opener operation ............................... 2-6 Trunk light ....................................................... 1-23

U Uniform tire quality grading............................. 9-18 V Vanity mirror light............................................ 1-23 Vehicle identification ....................................... 9-10 Vehicle identification number (Chassis number) ..................................................... 9-10 Vehicle identification number plate ........... 9-10 Vehicle loading information............................. 9-13 Vehicle recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle)............................................................ 5-12 Ventilator ........................................................... 3-2 W Warning Hazard warning flasher switch .................. 1-16 Supplemental air bag warning labels ........ 2-22 Supplemental air bag warning light........... 2-22 Theft warning (If so equipped) .................. 1-10 Warning/indicator light and buzzer.............. 1-6 Wheels and tires ..................................... 7-30, 9-9 Window washer fluid....................................... 7-12 Windshield wiper and washer switch.............. 1-12 Wiper Windshield wiper and washer switch ........ 1-12 Wiper blades ............................................. 7-18

10-4

GAS STATION INFORMATION Recommended fuel:

Unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96). If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Research octane number 91) can be used. However, for maximum vehicle performance, the use of unleaded premium gasoline is recommended.

QUICK REFERENCE Recommended engine oil specifications:

API SG or SH and Energy Conserving II API Certification Mark SAE 10W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for ambient temperatures above 0F (18C). See Engine oil and oil filter recommendation in the Technical and consumer information section. (page) In case of emergency.......................... 5-1 (Flat tire, engine will not start, overheating, towing) How to start the engine ....................... 4-1 Maintenance schedule......................... 8-1 Do-it-yourself operations .................... 7-1 Technical and consumer information ........................................... 9-1

Tire cold pressure:

See tire placard affixed to the center console lid.

Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control devices and systems, and could also affect the warranty coverage. Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, since this will damage the three way catalyst. For further details such as gasohol, see Fuel recommendation in the Technical and consumer Information section.

Recommended new vehicle break-in procedure:

During the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of vehicle use, follow the recommendations outlined in the BREAK-IN SCHEDULE Information found in the Starting and driving section of this Owners Manual. Follow these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life.

Hood release 2-8 Windshield washer fluid 7-12

Engine coolant 7-5 Meters and gauges 1-3 Engine oil 7-7

Seat 2-12 Trunk release (Type B) 2-9 Trunk release (Type A) 2-9 Seat belt 2-24

Audio system 3-11 Air conditioner 3-3

Key 2-2

Fuel 2-10, 9-2

Spare tire 5-2, 7-30

STI0046

Foreword
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence. It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control. This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle. A separate Warranty Information and Maintenance Log Booklet explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle and vehicle maintenance schedules. Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have any questions, he will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to him.

READ FIRST THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Before driving your vehicle please read your Owners Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modification may not be covered under NISSAN warranties.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers! Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Always observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions. Always use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat. Always provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle. Always review this Owners Manual for important safety information.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for all options available on this model. Therefore, you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle. All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or design at any time without notice.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways:

This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.
SIC0697

This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means Do not do this or Do not let this happen.

1997 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD. TOKYO, JAPAN

All rights reserved. No part of this Owners Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.

Welcome To The World Of NISSAN

transportation services to the supply of lubricants, parts and accessories. NISSAN pioneered the use of electronics and computers in automobiles, and has led the industry in improving both performance and fuel efficiency through new engine designs and the use of synthetic materials to reduce vehicle weight. The company has also developed ways to build quality into its vehicles at each stage of the production process, both through extensive use of automation and most importantly through an awareness that people are the central element in quality control. From the time the parts arrived from our suppliers until you took delivery of your new Nissan, dozens of checks were made to ensure that only the best job was being done in producing and delivering your vehicle. NISSAN also takes great care to ensure that when you take your NISSAN to your dealer for maintenance, the service technician will perform his work according to the quality standards that have been established by the factory. Safety has also been built into your NISSAN. As you know, seat belts are an integral part of the safety systems that will help protect you and your passengers in the event of a sudden stop or an accident. We urge you to use the seat belts every time you drive the vehicle. The NISSAN story of growth and achievement reflects our major goal: to provide you, our customer, with a vehicle that is built with quality and craftsmanship a product that we can be proud to build and you can be proud to own.

AFW0001

Your new NISSAN is the result of our dedication to produce the finest in safe, reliable and economical transportation. Your vehicle is the product of a successful worldwide company that manufactures cars and trucks in over 17 countries and distributes them in 170 nations. NISSAN vehicles are designed and manufactured by Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. which was founded in Tokyo, Japan in 1933, and NISSAN affiliates world wide, collectively growing to become the fifth largest automaker in the world. In addition to cars and trucks, NISSAN also makes textile machinery, fork-lift trucks, marine engines, boats and other products. NISSAN has made a substantial and growing investment in North America, starting with the opening of Nissan Motor Corporation U.S.A. in 1960 and continuing with the production of some

cars and trucks at one of the worlds most modern manufacturing facilities, Nissan Motor Manufacturing Corporation U.S.A. in Smyrna, Tennessee, vehicle styling at Nissan Design International in San Diego, California, and engineering at Nissan Research and Development in Farmington Hills, Michigan. Nissan Motor Corporation U.S.A. and its dealers indirectly employ about 60,000 Americans. NISSAN is also a substantial contributor to the Canadian economy. Nissan Canada Inc., its suppliers and over 170 dealers employ approximately 4,500 people. These include company employees and the staffs of NISSAN dealers all across Canada. In addition, many Canadians work for companies that supply NISSAN and NISSAN dealers with materials and services ranging from operation of port facilities and

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

NISSAN CARES ... Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions, please contact our (NISSANs) Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number: For U.S. mainland customers 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261) For Hawaii customers (808) 836-0888 (Oahu Number) For Canada customers 1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information: Your name, address, and telephone number Vehicle identification number (on dashboard) Date of purchase Current odometer reading Your NISSAN dealers name Your comments or questions OR

You can write to NISSAN with the information on the left at: For U.S. mainland and Alaska customers Nissan Motor Corporation U.S.A. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 191 Gardena, California 90248-0191 For Hawaii customers Nissan Motor Corporation in Hawaii 2880 Kilihau St. Honolulu, Hawaii 96819 For Canada customers Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

Table of Contents

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Instruments and controls Pre-driving checks and adjustments Heater, air conditioner and audio systems Starting and driving In case of emergency Appearance and care Do-it-yourself Maintenance Technical and consumer information Index

1 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Seats ......................................................................... 1-2 Supplemental restraint system.................................. 1-7 Seat belts ................................................................ 1-17 Child restraints ........................................................ 1-25

SEATS FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT

Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of control of the vehicle. After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked.
SSS0095

Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

For most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly. See Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section.

1-2

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SPA0097

SPA0099

Forward and backward

Pull the lever up while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean back. To bring the seatback forward again, pull the lever and move your body forward. The seatback moves forward.

Seat lifter (Drivers seat)

Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion to the desired position.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-3

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT

Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operations. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

SPA0098

Forward and backward Operating tips

The motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate the switch. Do not operate the power support seat for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery. Moving the switch forward or backward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position.

Reclining
Move the recline switch backward until the desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback forward again, move the switch forward and move your body forward. The seatback will move forward.

1-4

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SPA0100

SPA0467

SPA0014

Seat lifter (Drivers seat)

Push the front or rear end of the switch up or down to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion.

Lumbar support (Drivers seat)

The lumbar support feature provides lower back support to the driver. Move the lever up or down to adjust the seat lumbar area.

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT

To raise the head restraint, simply pull it up. To lower, push the lock knob and push the head restraint down. Adjust the head restraints so the top is level with the tops of your ears.

Head restraints should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident. Do not remove them. Check the adjustSeats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-5

ment after someone else uses the seat.

it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. Pull the armrest forward until it is horizontal.

SSS0067

ARMREST

Properly secure all cargo to help prevent

1-6

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) section contains important information concerning the driver and passenger supplemental air bags and supplemental side air bags. Supplemental air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the face and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions. Supplemental side air bag system (if so equipped): This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the driver and front passenger in certain side impact collisions. The supplemental side air bag is designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. These supplemental restraint systems are designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and front passenger seat belts and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the driver and front passenger seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and front door finishers. (See Seat belts later in this section for instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.)

After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-7

SSS0096

The supplemental air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, roll over, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

The seat belts and the supplemental air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. Supplemental air bags inflate with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash and may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the supplemental air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and use the seat belts.

1-8

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SSS0098

SSS0006

Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the supplemental air bag inflates.

SSS0007

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-9

 Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations. Children may be severely injured or killed when the supplemental air bag or supplemental side air bag inflates if they are not properly restrained. Also never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating supplemental air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. For additional information, see Child restraints later in this section.

SSS0008

SSS0099

SSS0009

SSS0100

1-10

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

back of the front seat. If the supplemental side air bag inflates, the occupant may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with supplemental side air bag inflation.

SSS0101

SSS0064

Supplemental side air bag equipped models: The supplemental side air bag ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear impact or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

The seat belts and the supplemental side air bag are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. Supplemental side air bag inflates with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the supplemental side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seat to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatSeats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-11

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or dash board. Since the supplemental air bags inflates quickly in order to help protect the front occupants, the force of the supplemental air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against the supplemental air bag module during inflation. The supplemental air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over. After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

SSS0066

Supplemental air bag system

The driver supplemental air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel; the front passenger supplemental air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. The supplemental air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental air bag operation. When the supplemental air bag inflates, a fairly

loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire, but care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. Supplemental air bags along with the use of seat belts, helps to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating supplemental air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Supplemental air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.

Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental air bag inflates. Right after inflation, several supple-

1-12

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

mental air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system. Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicles electrical system, suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the supplemental air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad, above the dashboard, or by installing additional trim material around the supplemental air bag system.

Work around and on the supplemental air bag system should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the supplemental air bag system. * The SRS wiring harnesses are covered with yellow insulation either just before the harness connectors or over the complete harness for easy identification. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the supplemental air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual.

are similar to those of a higher severity side impact. It is designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. It may not inflate in certain side collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental side air bag operation. When the supplemental side air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire, but care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. Supplemental side air bags along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating supplemental side air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the supplemental side air bag. Since the supplemental side air bag inflates quickly in order to help protect the front occupants, the force of the supplemental side air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against the supplemental side air bag module during inflation. The supplemental side air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over.

Supplemental side air bag system

The supplemental side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats. The supplemental side air bag (on the driver or front passenger seat) is designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although it may inflate if the forces in another type of collision

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-13

After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicles electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the supplemental side air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the front seats assembly by placing material near the seatback of the front seat, or by installing additional trim material around the supplemental side air bag system. Work around and on the supplemental side air bag system should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the supplemental side air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harnesses are covered with yellow insulation either just before the harness connectors or over the complete harness for easy identification. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the supplemental side air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual.

Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental side air bag inflates. Right after inflation, several supplemental side air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental side air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental side air bag or damage to the supplemental side air bag system.

1-14

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SPA0104A

SPA0431

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light, displaying AIR BAG in the instrument panel, monitors the circuits of the supplemental air bag and supplemental side air bag systems. The circuits monitored by the supplemental air bag warning light are the diagnosis sensor unit, satellite sensors, supplemental air bag modules, supplemental side air bag modules and all related wiring. After turning the ignition key to the ON, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will
Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-15

turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. If any of the following conditions occur, the supplemental air bag and supplemental side air bag systems needs servicing: The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on and remain on for 7 seconds and then go off as described above. The supplemental air bag light flashes intermittently or remains on (after 7 seconds). The supplemental air bag light does not come on at all. Under these conditions, the supplemental air bags or supplemental side air bags may not operate properly. It must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest authorized NISSAN dealer.

one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light will remain illuminated after inflation has occurred. Repair and replacement of these supplemental systems should be done only by authorized NISSAN dealers. To ensure long-term functioning, these systems must be inspected 10 years after the date of manufacture noted on the certification label located on the driver side center pillar. When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the supplemental air bags, supplemental side air bags and related parts should be pointed out to the person conducting the maintenance. The ignition key should always be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle.

authorized NISSAN dealer. The supplemental air bag module or supplemental side air bag module cannot be repaired. The supplemental air bag and supplemental side air bag systems should be inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle. If you need to dispose of these supplemental systems or scrap the vehicle, contact an authorized NISSAN dealer. Correct disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the supplemental air bag or supplemental side air bag system will not operate in an accident.

Repair and replacement procedure

The supplemental air bags or supplemental side air bags are designed to inflate on a

Once the supplemental air bag or supplemental side air bag has inflated, the supplemental air bag module or supplemental side air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. The supplemental air bag module or supplemental side air bag module should be replaced by an

1-16

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SEAT BELTS PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE

Your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced if you are wearing your seat belt and it is properly adjusted. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag. Most states, provinces or territories require that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0013

SSS0012

Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be properly restrained and, if appropriate, in a child restraint. The belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly. Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the belt behind your backs under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Position the lap belt as low and snug

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-17

recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.

CHILD SAFETY
SSS0016 SSS0014

Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly restrained. The proper restraint depends on the childs size. Generally, infants (up to about 1 year and less than 20 lb (9 kg) should be placed in rear facing child restraints. Front facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear facing child restraints.

as possible around the hips, not the waist. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident. Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle. Do not wear the belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness. Do not allow more than one person to use the same belt.

Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts. If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. All seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision by your NISSAN dealer. NISSAN

Infants and children need special protection. The vehicles seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip

1-18

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints. All US states and provinces of Canada require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. (See Child restraints later in this section.) In addition, there are many types of child restraints available for larger children which should be used for maximum protection. NISSAN recommends that all preteens and children be restrained in the rear seat if possible. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (air bag system) for the front passenger (see Supplemental Restraint System earlier in this section for precautions).

dards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturers instructions for installation and use.

Larger children
Children who are too large for child restraint systems should be seated and restrained by the seat belts which are provided. If the childs seating position has a shoulder belt that fits close to the face or neck, the use of a booster seat (commercially available) may help overcome this. The booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top, middle portion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck, use the shoulder belt without the booster seat.

Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is moving. The child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident.

PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations. The lap belt should be worn snug and positioned as low as possible around the hips, not the waist.

INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations.

Infants and small children

NISSAN recommends that infants and small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety StanSeats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-19

SSS0018

SSS0020

SSS0102

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR

Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident

you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. For most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly.

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until it snaps. The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion will permit the belt to move, and allow you some freedom of movement in the seat.

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat.

1-20

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

The automatic locking mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by a passenger, the locking mode should not be activated. If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension.

SSS0061

SSS0021

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown. 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack. The front passenger side seat belt and rear three-point seat belts have a cinching mechanism for child restraint installation. It is referred to as the automatic locking mode. When the cinching mechanism is activated the seat belt cannot be withdrawn again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. For additional information, see Child restraints later in this section.

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the belt, press the button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract.

Checking seat belt operation

Your seat belt retractors are designed to lock belt movement using two separate methods: when the belt is pulled quickly from the retractor. when the vehicle slows down rapidly. You can check their operation as follows: grasp the shoulder belt and pull quickly
Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-21

forward. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement. If the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any questions about belt operation, see your NISSAN dealer. After adjustment, release the buttons and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position. The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident.

PD1321-A

Shoulder belt height adjustment (For front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. (See Precautions on seat belt usage earlier in this section.) To adjust, squeeze the release buttons, and then move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position, so that the belt passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off of your shoulder. Release the adjustment buttons to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.

1-22

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SPA0281

SSS0103

SSS0024

TWO-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITHOUT RETRACTOR (CENTER OF REAR SEAT) Selecting correct set of seat belts
The center seat belt buckle and tongue are identified by the CENTER mark. The center seat belt tongue can be fastened only into the center seat belt buckle.

Fastening the seat belts

1. Insert the tongue into the buckle marked CENTER until it snaps.

2. To lengthen, hold the tongue at a right angle to the belt and pull on the belt. To shorten, pull the end of the belt attached to the belt clip away from the tongue, and then pull the belt clip to take up the slack.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-23

SSS0025

SSS0060

SSS0026

3. Position the lap belt low and snug on the hips as illustrated.

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the belt, press the button on the buckle.

1-24

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

CHILD RESTRAINTS SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender is available which is compatible with the installed seat belts. The extender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. See your NISSAN dealer for assistance if the extender is required.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

To clean the seat belt webbings, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpets. Then brush the webbing, wipe it with a cloth and allow it to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry. If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth. Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire belt assembly should be replaced.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS

Infants and small children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint while riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a child restraint can result in serious injury or death. Infants and small children should never be carried on your lap. It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident. The child could be crushed between the adult and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the same seat belt around both your child and yourself. Never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating supplemental air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. A rear facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat. NISSAN recommends that the child restraint be installed in the rear seat.

Only NISSAN belt extenders, made by the same company which made the original equipment belts, should be used with NISSAN belts. Persons who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-25

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. An improperly installed child restraint could lead to serious injury or death in an accident. In general, child restraints are designed to be installed with a lap belt or the lap portion of a three-point type seat belt. Child restraints for infants and children of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind: choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. check that child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicles seat and seat belt system. Choose a child restraint that meets the guidelines of the Society of Automotive Engineers recommended practice J1819 for child restraint installation. if the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child re-

straint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Always follow all recommended procedures. All US states and provinces of Canada require that infants and small children be restrained in approved child restraints at all times while the vehicle is being operated.

injured in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases. Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to fit the child restraint, but as upright as possible. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Tilt it from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. For a front facing child restraint, if the seat position where it is installed has a three-point type lap/shoulder belt, check to make sure the shoulder belt does not go in front of the childs face or neck. If it does, put the shoulder belt behind the child restraint. If you must install a front facing child restraint in the front seat, see later in Child restraints for installation on front passenger seat. When your child restraint is not in use, store it in the trunk or keep it

Improper use of a child restraint can result in increased injuries for both the infant or child and other occupants in the vehicle. Follow all of the child restraint manufacturers instructions for installation and use. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure to select one which will fit your child and vehicle. It may not be possible to properly install some types of child restraints in your vehicle. If the child restraint is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being

1-26

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

secured with a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown around in case of a sudden stop or accident.

Remember that a child restraint left in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the child restraint.
SSS0104 SSS0029

INSTALLATION ON REAR SEAT CENTER POSITION Front facing

When you install a child restraint in a rear center seat, follow these steps: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat as illustrated. It can be placed in a front facing or rear facing direction, depending on the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manufacturers instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for belt routing.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-27

SSS0105

SSS0031

SSS0033

3. Remove all slack in the lap belt for a very tight fit by pulling forcefully on the lap belt adjustment.

4. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. 5. If it is not secure, try to tighten the belt again, or put the restraint in another seat. 6. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use.

Rear facing
When you install a child restraint in a rear center seat, follow these steps: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat as illustrated. The direction of the child restraint depends on the type of the child restraint and the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manufacturers instructions.

1-28

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SSS0035

SSS0036

SSS0106

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for belt routing.

3. Remove all slack in the lap belt for a very tight fit by pulling forcefully on the lap belt adjustment.

4. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. 5. If it is not secure, try to tighten the belt again, or put the restraint in another seat. 6. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-29

INSTALLATION ON REAR SEAT OUTBOARD POSITIONS

The three-point belt on your vehicle is equipped with a locking mode retractor which must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to do so will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. It could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision.

SSS0041

SSS0043

Front facing
When you install a child restraint in a rear outboard seat, follow these steps: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. It can be placed in a front facing direction, depending on the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manufacturers instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for belt routing.

1-30

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SSS0107

SSS0062

SSS0108

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts back to emergency locking mode when the belt is fully retracted.

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-31

After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is allowed to wind back into the retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt only locks during a sudden stop or impact.

SSS0044

SSS0046

Rear facing
When you install a child restraint in a rear outboard seat, follow these steps: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. The direction of the child restraint depends on the type of the child restraint and the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manufacturers instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for belt routing.

1-32

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SSS0045A

SSS0109

SSS0110

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts back to emergency locking mode when the belt is fully retracted.

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-33

After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is allowed to wind back into the retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt only locks during a sudden stop or impact.

Bolt diameter: 8.0 mm Bolt length: more than 1.18 in (30 mm) Thread pitch: 1.25 mm Secure the top strap to the attaching bolt which provides the straightest installation of the top strap.

SSS0068

TOP STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT

If your child restraint has a top strap, it must be secured to the provided anchor point. Anchor bracket hardware must be installed. The top strap anchor bracket is available through your NISSAN dealer. Part No. 88894-89900 Secure the child restraint with the center lap belt or the lap portion of an outboard threepoint belt and latch the top strap hook onto the appropriate anchor bracket. To install the anchor bracket, a metric bolt of the dimensions listed below must be used.

Child restraint anchor points are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses.

1-34

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

There are pre-cut circles at each anchor point location that should break away from the shelf support material when pressure is applied to them. Remove the bolt after you feel the pre-cut circle separate from the shelf support material. 2. Cut a small slit through the parcel shelf fabric at the anchor point location. Reach through the fabric with a tool such as a pair of needle-nose pliers and remove the precut circle in the parcel shelf support material.
SPA0117

3. Install the bolt through the top strap hook and into the anchor point nut. 4. Be sure to follow all of the instructions that accompany the top strap attaching hardware. Your NISSAN dealer can assist you with the installation of your child restraint.

SSS0058

Anchor point locations

Anchor points are located under the rear parcel shelf finisher. To use attaching hardware for child restraints with top straps, follow these instructions carefully: 1. Open the trunk and find the anchor point nuts on the under side of the rear parcel shelf. Thread a bolt (8.0 mm diameter, 1.25 mm pitch) up through the nut behind the seating position where the child restraint will be installed and use it to break through the rear parcel shelf support material.

INSTALLATION ON FRONT PASSENGER SEAT

Never install a rear facing child restraint in the front passenger seat. Supplemental air bags inflate with great force. A rear facing child restraint could be struck by the supplemental air bag in a crash and could seriously injure or kill your child.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-35

 Failure to use the retractors locking mode may result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The child restraint could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision.

SSS0100

SSS0112

NISSAN recommends that child restraints be installed in the rear seat. However, if you must install a front facing child restraint in the front passenger seat, move the passenger seat to the rearmost position. A child restraint with a top strap should not be used in the front passenger seat. The three-point belt in your vehicle is equipped with a locking mode retractor which must be used when installing a child restraint.

Front facing
If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, follow these steps: 1. Position the child restraint on the front passenger seat. It should be placed in a front facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Always follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat.

1-36

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SSS0055

SSS0113

SSS0056

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for belt routing.

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts back to emergency locking mode when the belt is fully retracted.

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt to remove any slack in the belt.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-37

After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is allowed to wind back into the retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt only locks during a sudden stop or impact.

SSS0114

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the lap belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.

1-38

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel ....................................................... 2-2 Meters and gauges ................................................... 2-3 Warning/indicator lights and buzzers ........................ 2-7 Security system (if so equipped)............................. 2-11 Windshield wiper and washer switch ...................... 2-13 Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defogger switch ....................................................... 2-14 Headlight and turn signal switch ............................. 2-15 Front fog light switch (if so equipped)..................... 2-16 Hazard warning flasher switch ................................ 2-17 Horn......................................................................... 2-17 Heated seats (if so equipped)................................. 2-18

Cigarette lighter and ashtray................................... Storage .................................................................... Windows .................................................................. Sunroof (if so equipped) ......................................... Clock ....................................................................... Interior light ............................................................. Personal light .......................................................... Vanity mirror light (if so equipped).......................... Trunk light ............................................................... Integrated HomeLink transmitter (if so equipped) .......................................................

2-19 2-19 2-22 2-24 2-25 2-25 2-26 2-26 2-27 2-27

INSTRUMENT PANEL
Windshield wiper/washer switch (P.2-13) Instrument brightness control switch (P.2-15) Meters/gauges (P.2-3) Theft warning light (P.2-11) (if so equipped) Cruise control main switch (P.5-13) Hazard warning flasher switch (P.2-17) Ventilator (P.4-2) Heater/air conditioner control (P.4-3) Clock (P.2-25) Radio/cassette player (P.4-13)/CD player (P.4-19) Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defogger switch (P.2-14) Passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-7) Headlight, fog light (if so equipped) and turn signal switch (P.2-15)

Hood release handle (P.3-9) Outside mirror remote control (P.3-14) Fuse box cover (P.8-23) Tilting steering wheel lock lever (P.3-13) Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-7) Ignition switch/steering lock (P.5-5) Cruise control set switch (P.5-12) Cigarette lighter (accessory) (P.2-19) Heated seat switch (P.2-18) (if so equipped) Ash tray (P.2-19) Glove box (P.2-22)

See the page indicated in parentheses for operating details.

SIC0875

2-2

Instruments and controls

METERS AND GAUGES

SIC0876

Instruments and controls

2-3

Changing the display: Pushing the reset button changes the display as follows: ODO , TRIP A , TRIP B , ODO Resetting the trip odometer: Pushing the reset button for more than 1 second resets the trip odometer to zero.

SIC0877

SIC0878

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in miles per hour.

TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (r/min).

Odometer
The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven. When engine speed approaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.

Twin trip odometer

The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.

2-4

Instruments and controls

If the gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. See If your vehicle overheats in the 6. In case of emergency section.

SIC0173

SIC0879

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant temperature will vary with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.

FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank. The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hill. The gauge needle is designed to remain in approximately the same position, even when the ignition key is turned OFF. Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers Empty.

Instruments and controls

2-5

The low fuel warning light comes on when the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the gauge reaches E. There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E.

2-6

Instruments and controls

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND BUZZERS

Engine oil pressure warning light Charge warning light Door open warning light Seat belt warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Low washer fluid warning light (if so equipped) or or Brake warning light Anti-lock brake warning light (if so equipped) Turn signal/hazard indicator light High beam indicator light (Blue) Cruise indicator light Malfunction indicator light (MIL)

Low fuel warning light Overdrive off indicator light

CHECKING BULBS
Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition key to ON without starting the engine. The following lights will come on: , or , , The following lights come on briefly and then go off: or , , If any light fails to come on, it may indicate a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system. Have the system repaired promptly.

WARNING LIGHTS Engine oil pressure warning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop. The oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. See Engine oil in the 8. Do-it-yourself section. Running the engine with the oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.

Charge warning light

If the light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate that there is something wrong with the charging system. Turn the engine off and check the alternator belt. If the
Instruments and controls

2-7

belt is loose, broken, missing or if the light remains on, see your NISSAN dealer immediately.

Supplemental air bag warning light

After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag light will illuminate. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. If any of the following conditions occur, the supplemental air bag needs servicing and your vehicle must be taken to your nearest authorized NISSAN dealer. The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on and remain on for 7 seconds and then go off as described above. The supplemental air bag light flashes intermittently or remains on (after 7 seconds). The supplemental air bag light does not come on at all. Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental Restraint System may not function properly. For additional details on the Supplemental Air Bag System, see Section 2. If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the supplemental air bag or supplemental side air bag system (if so equipped) will not operate in an accident.

Do not continue driving if the belt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors are not closed securely while the ignition key is ON.

Low washer fluid warning light (if so equipped)

This light comes on when the washer tank fluid is at a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary. See Window washer fluid in the 8. Do-it-yourself section.

Seat belt warning light and buzzer

The light and buzzer remind you to fasten seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition key is turned to ON, and will remain illuminated until the drivers seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the buzzer will sound for about 6 seconds unless the drivers seat belt is securely fastened. See Seat belts in the 1. Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems section for precautions on seat belt usage.

or

Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems. Parking brake indicator: When the ignition key is in the ON position, the light comes on when the parking brake is applied. Low brake fluid warning: The light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with

2-8

Instruments and controls

the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following: 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. See Brake and clutch fluid in the Do-it-yourself section.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warning system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

There will be a small reserve of fuel remaining in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E.

or

Anti-lock brake warning light (if so equipped)

INDICATOR LIGHTS Overdrive off indicator light

This light comes on during driving when the overdrive switch is pressed to prevent overdrive operation. The O/D OFF indicator light comes on for 2 seconds each time the ignition key is turned ON. This shows the light is functioning properly. If the O/D OFF indicator light blinks for approximately 8 seconds after coming on for 2 seconds, have your NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair it if necessary. The automatic transmission is equipped with an electronic fail-safe mode. This system allows the vehicle to be driven even in the event of damage to the electrical circuits. If this occurs, the gears automatically engage and lock into third gear. See the Driving the vehicle in the 5. Starting and driving section for fail-safe before visiting your NISSAN dealer.
Instruments and controls

Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed. Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or low brake fluid level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as greater pedal travel. If the brake fluid level is below the MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked at a NISSAN dealer.

After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the light will illuminate. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate there is something wrong with the anti-lock portion of the brake system. Have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. However if the light illuminates while starting the engine, it does not indicate a system malfunction. If an abnormality occurs in the system, the anti-lock function will cease but the ordinary brakes will continue to operate normally. If the light comes on while you are driving, contact your NISSAN dealer for repair.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel in the tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E.

2-9

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

The light flashes when the turn signal switch lever or hazard switch is turned on.

emission control system malfunction has been detected. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer. Malfunction indicator light blinking An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To reduce or avoid emission control system damage: a) Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH (72 km/h). b) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration. c) Avoid steep uphill grades. d) If possible, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed. The malfunction indicator light may stop blinking and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

High beam indicator light (Blue)

This light comes on when the headlight high beam is on and goes out when the low beam is selected.

Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission control system. Some conditions may cause the malfunction indicator light to come on steady or blink. Examples are as follows: vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire. fuel filler cap was left off or improperly installed, allowing fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. If you suspect that you experienced one or both of the above conditions, drive the vehicle to an authorized NISSAN dealer and have the vehicle inspected. Avoid any unnecessary diagnosis during the service by informing the dealer of the conditions listed above that may have occurred.

Cruise indicator light

The light comes on while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control system. If the light flickers while the engine is running, it may indicate there is something wrong with the cruise control system. Have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer.

Malfunction indicator light (MIL)

If the malfunction indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control problem. The malfunction indicator light will come on in one of two ways: Malfunction indicator light on steady An

2-10

Instruments and controls

SECURITY SYSTEM (if so equipped) BUZZERS Key reminder buzzer

The buzzer will sound if the driver side door is opened while the key is left in the ignition switch (ignition switch is turned off). Remove the key and take it with you when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder buzzer

A buzzer will sound when the driver side door is opened if the light switch is turned on (ignition switch is turned off). Turn the light switch off when you leave the vehicle.
IC0005

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

THEFT WARNING
The theft warning system provides visual and audio alarm signals if parts of the vehicle are disturbed.

Instruments and controls

2-11

How to activate the theft warning system

1. Close all windows. The system can be activated even if the windows are open. 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 3. Close and lock all doors, hood and trunk lid. The doors can be locked either with or without the key. Multi-remote controller equipped models: Close and lock all doors, hood and trunk lid. Lock all doors by the key or pressing the button on the multi-remote controller. At this time, the hazard indicators flash twice to indicate all doors are locked. 4. Confirm that the SECURITY indicator light comes on. The SECURITY light glows for about 30 seconds and then begins to flash once every 3 seconds. The system is now activated. If, during this 30 second time period, the door is unlocked by the key or the multi-remote controller, or the ignition key is turned to ACC or ON, the system will not activate. If the key is turned slowly toward the front of the vehicle when locking the door, the system may not activate. If the

key is returned beyond the vertical position toward the rear of the vehicle to remove the key, the system may be deactivated. If the indicator light fails to glow for 30 seconds, unlock the door once and lock it again. Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will activate with all doors, hood and trunk lid locked and ignition key off. Turn the ignition key to ACC to turn the system off.

SIC0175

Theft warning system operation

The warning system will give the following alarm: The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently. In addition, the starter motor will not operate. The alarm automatically turns off after 2 to 3 minutes. However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking a door or trunk lid with the key, or by pressing the button on the multi-remote controller. The alarm is activated by: Opening the door or trunk lid without using the key (even if the door is unlocked by

Security indicator light

2-12

Instruments and controls

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

releasing the door inside lock switch) or opening the trunk lid by operating the opener release button. Opening the hood. Pushing in or pulling out of the key cylinder on the door or trunk lid.

How to stop alarm

The alarm will stop only by unlocking a door or trunk lid with the key, or by pressing the button on multi-remote controller. The alarm will not stop if the ignition switch is turned to ACC or ON. If the system does not operate as described above, have it checked by your NISSAN dealer.
SIC0176

The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position. Push the lever down to operate the wiper. Intermittent operation can be adjusted from 3 to 21 seconds by turning the knob. (Type B only) Pull the lever toward you to operate the washer. Then the wiper will also operate several times. In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield.

Instruments and controls

2-13

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR (if so equipped) DEFOGGER SWITCH

The following could damage the washer system: Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds. Do not operate the washer if the reservoir tank is empty.

When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defogger.

SIC0177

To defog/defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors, start the engine and push the switch on. The indicator light will come on. Push the switch again to turn the defogger off. It will automatically turn off in approximately 15 minutes.

2-14

Instruments and controls

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

IC1284MA

Instrument brightness control

The instrument brightness control operates when the light switch is in the or position. Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instrument panel lights (except clock) and power window switch lights. When the control is turned to the right until a click sound is heard, the light intensity will be at maximum. When the control is turned to the left until a click sound is heard, the light will be turned off.

SIC0188

HEADLIGHT SWITCH Lighting

Turn the switch to the position: The front clearance, side marker, tail, license

plate and instrument lights will come on. Turn the switch to the position:

Headlights will come on and all the other lights remain on.

Instruments and controls

2-15

FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped) Headlight beam select

To select the high beam, push the lever forward. Pull it back to select the low beam. When the daytime running light system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

Passing signal
Pulling the lever toward you will flash the headlight high beam.

Daytime running light system (Canada only)

The headlights automatically illuminate at a reduced intensity when the engine is started with the parking brake released. The daytime running lights operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position or in the position. Turn the headlight switch to the position for full illumination when driving at night. If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the daytime running lights do not illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate once the parking brake is released. The daytime running lights will remain on until the ignition switch is turned off.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Turn signal

Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signals cancel automatically.
SIC0880

Lane change signal

To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or down to the point where lights begin flashing.

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight position, then turn the switch to the switch to the position. To turn them off, turn the switch to the OFF position. The headlights must be on for the fog lights to operate.

2-16

Instruments and controls

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

Do not use the switch while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic. Turn signals do not work when the switch is operating. The flasher can be actuated with the ignition switch either off or on.

HORN

SIC0178

SIC0909

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights will flash. Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving.

To sound the horn, push the center pad area of the steering wheel.

When stalled or stopped on the roadway under emergency conditions, move the vehicle well off the road.

Instruments and controls

2-17

HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)

2. Select heat range. For low heat, press the top of the switch. For high heat, press the bottom of the switch. For no heat, the switch has a center OFF position between low and high. The indicator light in the switch will illuminate when low or high is selected. The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on. 3. When the vehicles interior is warmed, or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off. on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater. Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth. When cleaning the seat, never use benzine, thinner, or any similar materials. If any abnormalities are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer.

SIC0693

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The switches located on the center console can be operated independently of each other. 1. Start the engine.

The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running.

Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat. Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated. Do not place anything hard or heavy

2-18

Instruments and controls

CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND ASHTRAY

STORAGE

The cigarette lighter should not be used while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation.

SIC0694

The cigarette lighter element is an accessory. A genuine NISSAN cigarette lighter or equivalent can be purchased from your local NISSAN dealer. The cigarette lighter operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. Push the lighter in all the way. When the lighter is heated, it will spring out. Return the lighter to its original position after use.

The cigarette lighter socket is a power source for the cigarette lighter element only. The use of the cigarette lighter socket as a power source for any other accessory is not recommended.

SIC0181

TRAYS

The storage tray should not be used

Instruments and controls

2-19

while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation.

SIC0883

Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place

cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. Pull the armrest forward and lay it horizontal. Then release the lever (inset) and pull the tray

2-20

Instruments and controls

forward (if so equipped). In this condition you are able to gain access to the trunk room. Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger. Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.
SIC0881

CUP HOLDER

The cup holder should not be used while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation.

Instruments and controls

2-21

WINDOWS

SPA0092

SIC0882

SIC0182

GLOVE BOX
When locking or unlocking the glove box, use the master key. The glove box may be opened by pulling the handle.

CONSOLE BOX Card holder

POWER WINDOWS

The card holder should not be used while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation. Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc. inside the vehicle before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls and become trapped in a window.

2-22

Instruments and controls

Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents. The power window only operates when the ignition key is in the ON position. To open or close the window, push down or pull up the switch and hold it. The main switch (driver side switches) will open or close all the windows.

SIC0183

SIC0184

The passenger side switch will open or close only the corresponding window. To open or close the window, hold the switch down or up.

Automatic operation
To fully open the driver side window, completely push down the switch and release it; it need not be held. The window will automatically open all the way. To stop the window, just pull up the switch toward the close side. A light press on the switch will cause the window to open until the switch is released.

Locking passengers windows

When the lock button is pushed in, only the driver side window can be opened or closed. Push it in again to cancel.

Instruments and controls

2-23

SUNROOF (if so equipped)

down the side. sunroof, keep pushing the Do not place any heavy object on the sunroof or surrounding area.

Sun shade
Open or close the sun shade by sliding it backward or forward. The shade will open automatically when the sunroof is opened. However, it must be closed manually.

If the sunroof does not close

Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the sunroof.

IC1432

AUTOMATIC SUNROOF
The sunroof will only operate when the ignition key is in the ON position.

In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open sunroof. Always use seat belts and child restraints. Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the sunroof is closing.

Sliding the sunroof

To open the roof, keep pressing the switch to the side. To close the roof, keep pressing the switch to the side.

Tilting the sunroof

To tilt up, first close the sunroof, then keep pushing the side of the tilt switch. To tilt

Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from the sunroof before opening.

2-24

Instruments and controls

CLOCK

INTERIOR LIGHT
and the drivers door is opened and then closed. The timer is cancelled, and the light will turn off when: The drivers door is locked. The ignition switch is turned ON.

Leaving the light switch in the ON position for extended periods of time will result in a discharged battery.
SIC0910 IC1226

The digital clock displays time when the ignition key is in ACC or ON. If the power supply is disconnected, the clock will not indicate the correct time. Readjust the time.

CEILING
The light has a three-position switch. When the switch is in the center k position, the light will illuminate when a door is opened. The light will stay on for about 30 seconds when: The key is removed from the ignition switch while the drivers door is closed. The drivers door is unlocked while the key is removed from the ignition switch. The key is removed from the ignition switch
Instruments and controls

ADJUSTING THE TIME

Push the H button to adjust the hour. Push the M button to adjust the minute.

2-25

PERSONAL LIGHT

VANITY MIRROR LIGHT (if so equipped)

IC1019-B

IC1163-B

SIC0186

The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when the cover on the vanity mirror is opened.

2-26

Instruments and controls

TRUNK LIGHT
The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the light will go off.

INTEGRATED HomeLink TRANSMITTER (if so equipped)

The Integrated HomeLink Transmitter provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device. THE INTEGRATED HomeLink TER: TRANSMIT-

Will operate garage doors, gates, home/ office lighting systems and security systems by storing and transmitting the programming information of your current handheld transmitters. Is built-in and powered by your vehicles battery and charging system. No separate batteries are necessary.

Do not use this Integrated HomeLink Transmitter with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards (these standards became effective for models manufactured after April 1, 1982). A garage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse the door, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death.

Instruments and controls

2-27

The Integrated HomeLink Transmitter may not work with older garage door openers that do not meet current Federal Consumer Safety Standards. 1. Test the Integrated HomeLink Transmitter by pressing any button. The red indicator light should come on. If you have previously programmed a button proceed to step 3. 2. Clear all channels on the Integrated HomeLink Transmitter by holding down both outside buttons (#1 & #3) until the red light begins to flash rapidly (approximately 20 seconds). Then release both buttons. 3. Select which of the three Integrated HomeLink Transmitter buttons you want to program. 4. Hold your hand-held transmitter against the bottom surface of the Integrated HomeLink Transmitter so that you can still see the red indicator light. 5. Press the desired button until the red indicator light flashes slowly. Do not release the button. Continue holding and press the hand-held transmitter button through step 6. 6. Hold down both buttons until the red indicator light on the Integrated HomeLink

Transmitter flashes rapidly (This may take 1-90 seconds). Then release both buttons. The rapid flashing means that the transmitter has been successfully programmed to match your hand-held transmitter. You can now use the Integrated HomeLink Transmitter instead of your hand-held transmitter. Note to Canadian users: Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required many hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting after 1 or 2 seconds, even though you continue to hold down the button. If you think you have one of these hand-held transmitters, you should press and re-press the transmitter button every 2 seconds without ever releasing the integrated HomeLink Transmitter button. The indicator light on the Integrated HomeLink Transmitter should blink rapidly indicating a successful programming procedure. If it returns to the slow blink of program mode, continue to periodically reactivate your hand-held transmitter until a successful programming procedure is indicated by the rapidly flashing indicator light.

SIC0696

PROGRAMMING THE HomeLink TRANSMITTER

During the programming procedure your garage door or security gate will open and close (if the transmitter is within range). Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage door, gate, etc. that you are programming. Your vehicles engine should be turned off while programming your transmitter.

2-28

Instruments and controls

OPERATING THE TRANSMITTER

To operate, simply press the appropriate button on the Integrated HomeLink Transmitter. The red indicator light illuminates while the signal is being transmitted. The effective transmission range of the Integrated HomeLink Transmitter may differ from your hand-held transmitter.

flashes rapidly for 1 to 2 seconds, then remains on, your garage door opener has a rolling code system. To operate your rolling code garage door opener from your HomeLink Transmitter, follow these steps: 1. Program your hand held transmitter to the HomeLink Transmitter by following the procedures outlined above (if not yet programmed). 2. Program your garage door opener receiver to recognize your HomeLink Transmitter (The HomeLink Transmitter follows the same procedure to train to the receiver as your hand held transmitter did when it was first installed): a) Remove the cover panel from your garage door opener receiver. The receiver should be located by the garage door opener motor. b) Locate the training button on the garage door opener receiver. The exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand. If you have difficulty locating the training button, reference your garage door opener manual. If you have difficulty programming your garage door opener equipped
Instruments and controls

PROGRAMMING PROBLEM DIAGNOSIS

Be sure to keep your original hand-held transmitter for possible reprogramming if necessary. Make sure batteries in the hand-held transmitter are fully charged. Hold your hand-held transmitter against the bottom surface of the Integrated HomeLink Transmitter so that you can still see the red indicator light. Hold buttons for duration of the programming without interruption. Rotate your hand-held transmitter endover-end and program again. For best results, place the end opposite the battery compartment against the Integrated HomeLink Transmitter when programming.
SPA0609

ROLLING CODES (if so equipped)

If your hand held transmitter appears to train to the HomeLink Transmitter, but does not open your garage door, and your garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, your garage door opener may have a code protected or rolling code feature. This type of system will change the code of your garage door opener every time you open or close your garage door. To determine if you have one of these systems, depress the button on the HomeLink Transmitter that you have just programmed. If the LED on the HomeLink Transmitter

2-29

with a rolling code system to recognize the HomeLink Transmitter with the rolling code feature, call NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department. c) Press the training button on the garage door opener receiver for 1 to 2 seconds. d) Return to the HomeLink Transmitter in the vehicle, and depress the programmed HomeLink button for the duration of the fast blink on the HomeLink Transmitter (1 to 2 seconds). Release the button, and re-press to confirm that the system has trained. e) Your garage door opener should now recognize your HomeLink Transmitter. You may use either your HomeLink Transmitter or your original hand held transmitter to open your garage door.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION

Should you sell your vehicle, be sure to clear the channels of the Integrated HomeLink Transmitter. To clear the channels, simultaneously hold down the outside two buttons (#1 & #3) until the red indicator light begins to flash rapidly (approximately 20 seconds). This will clear all three buttons. Individual buttons cannot be cleared, but can be reprogrammed at any time by following the programming procedures described above.

FCC Notice: This device complies with FCC rules part 15. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference and (2) This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the device. DOC: ISTC 1763K1313 FCC I.D.: CB2V67690

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle has been stolen, you should change the codes of any device that was programmed into the Integrated HomeLink Transmitter as soon as possible. Consult the owners manual of each device, or call the manufacturer or dealer of those devices. When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the Integrated HomeLink Transmitter with your new transmitter information.

2-30

Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys .......................................................................... 3-2 Doors ......................................................................... 3-2 Multi-remote control system (if so equipped)............ 3-5 Hood .......................................................................... 3-9 Trunk lid .................................................................... 3-9 Fuel filler lid ............................................................. 3-11 Steering wheel ........................................................ 3-13 Mirrors ..................................................................... 3-13

KEYS
A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, this key can be duplicated by your NISSAN dealer or a lock smith shop.

DOORS

Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out intruders. Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

SPA0658

The master key can be used for all the locks. Record the key number on the key number plate and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the car. A key number plate is supplied with your key. Keep the plate in a safe place. NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate.

3-2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

 Turning the front door key one time to the rear of the vehicle will unlock the corresponding door. From that position, returning the key to neutral (where the key can only be removed and inserted.) and turning it to the rear again within 5 seconds will unlock all doors.

SPA0084

SPA0085

LOCKING WITH KEY Power

The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors simultaneously. Turning the front door key to the front of the vehicle will lock all doors.

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB Power

Pushing the front door inside lock knob to the lock position will lock all doors. To lock from the outside without a key, move the inside lock knob to the LOCK position. Then close the door. When locking the door this way, be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle. The inside lock knob cannot be set to the LOCK position with the front doors open and
Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-3

with the key in the ignition.

SPA0088

SPA0086

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Operating the lock-unlock switch will lock or unlock all doors.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety locking helps prevent doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle. When the lever is in the lock position, the rear door can be opened only from the outside.

Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic.

3-4

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM (if so equipped)

Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

SPA0277

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-5

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, to open the drivers and front passengers windows, to release the trunk lid and to turn on or off the interior light by using the remote controller from outside the car. Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle before locking the doors and leaving it. The remote controller can operate at a distance of approximately 49 ft (15 m) from the vehicle. (The effective distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.) As many as four remote controllers can be used with one vehicle. For information concerning the purchase and use of additional remote controllers, contact your NISSAN dealer.

an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140F (60C).

when the interior light switch is in the center k position. The interior light can be turned off without waiting for 30 seconds by inserting the key into the ignition or locking the doors with the multiremote controller or by pushing the interior light button to OFF.

HOW TO USE MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM Locking doors

1. Remove the ignition key. 2. Close all of the doors. 3. Push the controller. button on the multi-remote

Opening the drivers and front passengers windows

1. Push the button on the multi-remote controller for longer than 1.5 seconds after the drivers door is unlocked. 2. The drivers and front passengers windows open. The drivers and front passengers windows also open after all doors are unlocked with the multi-remote controller. The drivers and front passengers windows cannot be closed by using the multi-remote controller.

4. The hazard indicators flash twice. 5. All of the doors lock. When the button is pushed with all doors locked, the hazard indicator flashes twice as a reminder that the doors are already locked.

Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the remote controller. Do not allow the remote controller to become wet. Do not drop the remote controller. Do not strike the remote controller sharply against another object. Do not place the remote controller for

Unlocking doors
1. Push the button on the multi-remote controller. Only the driver side door unlocks. 2. Push the button on the multi-remote controller again within 5 seconds. The passenger doors unlock. 3. The interior light will stay on for 30 seconds

3-6

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Releasing the trunk lid

1. Push the button on the multi-remote controller for longer than 0.5 second. 2. The trunk lid opens. The trunk lid will not open when the trunk lid cancel lever is in the CANCEL position. It can be opened only with the key. See Trunk lid later in this section for cancel lever.

button is pushed for longer The than 1.5 seconds on the multi-remote controller.

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to call attention as follows: 1. Push the button on the multi-remote controller for longer than 1.5 seconds. 2. The panic alarm and headlight will stay on for 30 seconds. 3. The panic alarm stops when: It has run for 30 seconds, or The or or the button is pressed,
SPA0090

BATTERY REPLACEMENT
Replace the battery as follows: 1. Open the lid using a suitable tool. 2. Replace the battery with a new one.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-7

Recommended battery: Sanyo CR2025 or equivalent 3. Close the lid securely. 4. Push the remote controller button two or three times to check its operation. If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement, perform step 4 above. An improperly disposed battery can harm the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal. The remote controller is water-resistant; however, if it does get wet, immediately wipe completely dry. When changing batteries, do not let dust or oil get on the controller. FCC Notice: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

3-8

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

HOOD

TRUNK LID

Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See Precautions when starting and driving in the 5. Starting and driving section for exhaust gas.

SPA0466

1 lo1. Pull the hood lock release handle k cated below the instrument panel; the hood will then spring up slightly. 2 at the front of the hood with 2. Pull the lever k your fingertips and raise the hood.

Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident. If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood.

3. When closing the hood, slowly close the hood and make sure it locks into place.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-9

push the trunk lid down securely. Type B: The trunk lid release button is located under the drivers arm rest. To open the trunk lid, push the release button. To close, push the trunk lid down securely.

SPA0095

Cancel lever
When the lever is in the cancel position, the trunk lid cannot be opened with the trunk lid release lever or handle. It can be opened only with the key.
SPA0093

OPENER OPERATION
Type A: The trunk lid release lever is located on the outside of the drivers seat. To open the trunk lid, pull up the trunk lid release lever. To close,

3-10

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

FUEL FILLER LID

SPA0094

SPA0096

KEY OPERATION
To open the trunk lid, turn the key clockwise. To close, lower and push the trunk lid down securely.

OPENER OPERATION
Type A: To open the fuel filler lid, pull the opener lever. To lock, close the fuel filler lid securely. Type B: To open the fuel filler lid, push the opener lever down. To lock, close the fuel filler lid securely.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-11

overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle.
SPA0653

FUEL FILLER CAP

The fuel filler cap is a screw-on ratcheting type. Tighten the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are heard. Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder while refueling.

handled. Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling. Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the cap one-half turn, and wait for any hissing sound to stop to prevent fuel from spraying out and possible personal injury. Then remove the cap. Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel

Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mis-

If fuel is spilled on the car body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage. Tighten until the cap clicks. Failure to tighten the fuel cap properly may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate. If this occurs, it will be necessary to take your vehicle in for service by an authorized NISSAN dealer.

3-12

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

STEERING WHEEL

MIRRORS

SPA0111

SPA0470

TILT OPERATION
Push the lock lever and while holding down, adjust the steering wheel up or down to the desired position. Push the lock lever back into place to lock the steering wheel in place.

INSIDE MIRROR
The night position will reduce glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-13

ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. Push the right or left end of the switch to select the right or left outside mirror, then adjust using the control lever.

SPA0112

MPA0008

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

Foldable outside mirrors

Push the outside mirror backward to fold it.

Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects. The outside mirror will operate only when the

3-14

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

4 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Ventilators ................................................................. 4-2 Heater and air conditioner (Manual) ........................ 4-3 Heater and air conditioner (Automatic) (if so equipped) ......................................................... 4-9 Servicing air conditioner.......................................... 4-12 Audio system........................................................... 4-12 CB radio or car phone ............................................ 4-25

VENTILATORS

SAA0040

SAA0041

Adjust the air flow direction of ventilators.

Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction of ventilators. : This symbol indicates that the vents are closed when the vent switch is moved to the left. : This symbol indicates that the vents are open when the vent switch is moved to the right.

4-2

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (Manual) CONTROLS Fan control dial

This dial turns the fan on and off, and controls fan speed.

Air flow control buttons

These buttons allow you to select the air flow outlets. Air flows from center and side ventilators.
SAA0042A

Air flows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets. Air flows mainly from foot outlets. Air flows from defroster outlets and foot outlets. Air flows mainly from defroster outlets.

animals. The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets alone in your vehicle. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls should not be done while driving, in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation.

Temperature control lever

This lever allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air.

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-3

Air recirculation button

OFF position: Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment. Use the off position for normal heater, or air conditioner operation. ON position (Indicator light ON): Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the air recirculation button to the ON position when driving on a dusty road or to avoid traffic fumes and for maximum cooling when using the air conditioner.

HEATER OPERATION Heating

This mode is used to direct hot air from the floor outlets. Some air will also come from the defrost vents. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position for normal heating. 2. Push the button in.

4. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position.

Defrosting or defogging
This mode is used to defrost/defog the windows. 1. Push the button in. 2. Turn on the fan control dial. 3. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position between the middle and the HOT position. To quickly remove ice or fog from the windows, turn on the fan control dial to 4 and the temperature control lever to the full HOT position. When the button is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on to defog the windshield, and the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position between the middle and the HOT position. For quick heating, move the air recirculation button to the ON position. Be sure to return the air recirculation button to the OFF position for normal heating.

Air conditioning button

This button is provided only for vehicles with air conditioner. Start the engine, move the fan control dial to the desired (1 to 4) position and push the air conditioning button to turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light will come on when the air conditioner is on. To stop the air conditioner, push the switch again to return it to the original position. The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Ventilation
This mode directs outside air from the side and center vents. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in.

3. Turn on the fan control dial.

4-4

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Bi-level heating
This mode directs outside air from the side and center vents and hot air from the floor outlets. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in. 3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Normally move the temperature control lever to the midpoint between HOT and COLD.

Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and air inlet in front of the windshield. This will improve heater operation. When the button is pushed, the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION

Start the engine, move the fan control dial to the desired (1 to 4) position and push in the air conditioning button to activate the air conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions will be added to the heater operation.

Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in. 3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Push on the air conditioning button. The indicator light will come on. 5. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position. For quick cooling when the outside temperature is high, move the air recirculation button to the ON position. Be sure to return the air recirculation button to the OFF position for normal cooling.

Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs the windshield. 1. Push the button in. 2. Turn on the fan control dial. 3. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position between the middle and the HOT position.

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-5

Dehumidified heating
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in.

Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

AIR FLOW CHARTS

The chart below shows the button and lever positions for maximum and quick heating, cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation button should be in the OFF position for normal cooling, heating and defrosting.

Operating tips
Keep the windows and sun roof closed while the air conditioner is in operation. After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3 minutes with the windows open to vent hot air from the passenger compartment. Then, close the windows. This will allow the air conditioner to cool the interior more quickly. The air conditioning system should be operated for about 10 minutes at least once a month. This helps prevent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication. If the coolant temperature gauge exceeds the HOT position, turn the air conditioning off. For additional information, see If your vehicle overheats in the 6. In case of emergency section.

3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Push on the air conditioning button. The indicator light will come on. 5. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position.

Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows and dehumidify. 1. Push the button in.

2. Turn on the fan control dial. 3. Push on the air conditioning button. The indicator light will come on. 4. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position. When the button is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on to defog the windshield, and the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off.

4-6

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

SAA0058C

SAA0059C

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-7

SAA0060C

SAA0061C

4-8

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (Automatic) (if so equipped)

SAA0257

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-9

AUTOMATIC OPERATION
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets alone in your vehicle. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls should not be done while driving, in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation. Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner.

or ture.

to set the desired tempera-

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO)

This mode may be normally used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically. 1. Push the AUTO button on. (AUTO will be displayed.) 2. Push or ture. Adjust the temperature set button to about 75F (24C) for normal operation. The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically. the temperature set button to set the desired tempera-

The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically. Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature. Otherwise the system may not work properly. Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defogging
1. Push the DEF button on. (The indicator light on the button will come on.) 2. Push or ture. To quickly remove ice or fog from the outside of the windows, push the manual fan control button and set to the maximum position . As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, push the AUTO button to return to the auto mode. When the DEF button is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 35F the temperature set button to set the desired tempera-

Heating (ECON)
The air conditioner does not activate. When you need to heat only, use this mode. 1. Push the ECON (Economy) button on. (ECON will be displayed.) 2. Push the temperature set button

4-10

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

(2C) to defog the windshield, and the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

: : : :

Air flows from center and side ventilators. Air flows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets. Air flows mainly from foot outlets. Air flow from defroster and foot outlets.

MANUAL OPERATION Fan speed control

Push the fan control button control the fan speed. to manually

To turn system off

Push the OFF button.

OPERATING TIPS
When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature warms up, the air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally.
HA1011

Push the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.

Air recirculation
Push the air recirculation button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator light on the switch will come on. Push it again to draw outside air into the passenger compartment. The indicator will go out. The air recirculation button will not be activated when the air conditioner is in DEF mode.

The sensor on the instrument panel helps maintain a constant temperature; do not put anything on or around this sensor.

Air flow control

Pushing the manual air flow control button selects the air outlet to:
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-11

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

The air conditioning system in your NISSAN vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind. This refrigerant will not harm the earths ozone layer. However, special charging equipment and lubricant are required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioning system. See Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the 10. Technical and consumer information section for air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations. Your NISSAN dealer will be able to service your environmentally friendly air conditioning system.

AUDIO SYSTEM RADIO

To turn the radio on, turn the ignition key to ACC or ON. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, turn the key to the ACC position. Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other external influences. Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences.

The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced technician with proper equipment.

4-12

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

FM-AM RADIO WITH CASSETTE PLAYER Audio main operation

Power/Volume control: Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, then push the Power/Volume control knob. The mode (radio or cassette) which was playing immediately before the system was turned off resumes playing. When no cassette is loaded, the radio comes on. Pushing the Power/Volume control knob again turns the system off. Turn the Power/Volume control knob to adjust the volume.

SAA0263

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-13

FM-AM radio operation

FM-AM band select: Push the FM-AM band select button to listen to the radio and tune in the desired station. Pushing the FM-AM band select button will change the band FM1, FM2 or AM. The FM stereo indicator, ST illuminates during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception. TUNE (Tuning):
SAA0235

Adjusting tone quality and speaker balance: To adjust BASSTREBFADERBAL (Bass, Treble, Fader, Balance), press the AUDIO button until the desired mode (BAS, TRE, FAD or BAL) appears in the display. Press the or button to adjust BASS and TREB to the desired level. Use the or button to adjust FADER or BAL modes. FADER adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and BAL adjusts the sound level between the right and left speakers.

After 10 seconds, the radio or cassette tape display reappears. Once the sound quality is set to the desired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedly until the radio or cassette tape display appears.

The radio should not be tuned while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation. Push either manual tuning button . SEEK/SCAN tuning: Push the SEEK/SCAN tuning button or for less than 1.5 seconds. SEEK tuning begins from high to low or low to high frequencies and stops at the next broadcasting station. Pushing the button again continues the SEEK function. Once the highest broadcasting or

Radio/Cassette tape priority mode

In this mode, the radio station illuminates in the display during radio operation. During cassette tape operation, TAPE illuminates in the display.

4-14

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

station is reached, the radio continues in the SEEK mode at the lowest broadcast station. Push the SEEK/SCAN tuning button or for more than 1.5 seconds. SCAN illuminates in the display window. SCAN tuning begins from high to low or low to high frequencies and stops at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again during this 5 second period stops SCAN tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.

Station memory operations: Six stations can be set for the AM band. 12 stations can be set for the FM band (six for FM1, six for FM2). 1. Push the FM-AM band select button to select AM, FM1, or FM2. The selected band illuminates in the display. 2. Tune to the desired station. 3. Push the desired select than 1.5 seconds. For illustrations ch2 is to be radio mutes when the pushed. button for more example, in the memorized. The select button is

4. When the sound resumes, memorizing is complete. 5. Other station select buttons can be set in the same manner. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the radio fuse opens, the radio memory is cancelled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

Cassette tape player operation

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, then carefully insert a cassette tape into the tape door.
SAA0264

The cassette tape automatically pulls into the player. The word TAPE and moving digital
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-15

squares illuminate on the right side of the display window.

Do not use cassettes with labels which are peeling and loose. If used, the label could jam in the player. If a cassette has loose tape, insert a pencil through one of the cassette hubs and rewind the tape firmly around the hubs. Loose tape may cause tape jamming and wavering sound quality. Over a period of time, the playback head, capstan and pinch roller may collect a tape coating residue as the tape is played. This residue accumulation can cause weak or wavering sound, and should be removed periodically with a head cleaning tape. If the residue is not removed periodically, the player may need to be disassembled for cleaning. PLAY/STOP: Push the PLAY/STOP button while the cassette tape is playing to stop the tape. Push the button again to play the tape. FF (fast forward), REW (rewind): Push either the FF or REW button for the desired direction. The FF or REW symbol illuminates in the display.

To stop the FF or REW function, press the FF or REW button again, or the PLAY/STOP button. APS (automatic program search) FF, APS REW: Push either the APS FF or APS REW button while the cassette tape is playing. The tape runs quickly, stops, then plays the next selection. Either the FF or REW symbol flashes in the display while searching for the selection. This system searches at the blank intervals between selections. If there is a blank interval within one selection or there is no interval between selections, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location. PROG (program): Push the PROG button. The moving digital squares illuminate on either the right or left side of the display window to indicate the side of program play. Dolby NR (Noise Reduction): Push the Dolby NR button for Dolby NR encoded tapes to reduce high frequency tape noise. The indicator light comes on. Dolby NR is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

Do not force the cassette tape into the tape door. This could cause player damage. The cassette tape automatically changes directions to play the other side when the first side is complete. At this time, the moving digital squares illuminate on the left side of the display window. Precaution on cassette player operation: To maintain good quality sound, NISSAN recommends using cassette tapes of 60 minutes or shorter in length. Cassette tapes should be removed from the player when not in use. Store cassettes in their protective cases and away from direct sunlight, heat, moisture and magnetic sources. Direct sunlight can cause the cassette to become deformed. The use of deformed cassettes may cause the cassette to jam in the player.

4-16

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

DOLBY NR and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Metal or chrome tape usage: The cassette player is automatically set to high performance play when playing a metal or chrome cassette tape. Ejecting the cassette tape: Push the EJECT button. The cassette tape automatically comes out.

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-17

SAA0204A

4-18

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

FM-AM RADIO WITH CASSETTE PLAYER AND COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Bose) Audio main operation
Head unit The radio has an FM diversity reception system, which employs two antennas. One is a rod type antenna; the other is an antenna printed on the window. This system automatically switches to the antenna which is receiving less noise. The tape deck employs a permalloy head which allows for improved reproduction of high frequency ranges. Noise is also greatly reduced by the combined use of the Dolby NR (Noise Reduction) system. Power/Volume control: Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then push the POWER/VOLUME control knob while the system is off to call up the mode (radio, tape or CD) which was playing immediately before the system was turned off. When no CD or tape is loaded, the radio will come on. While the system is on, pushing the POWER/VOLUME control knob turns the system off. To turn the radio off, press the POWER/

VOLUME control knob. Turn the POWER/VOLUME control knob to adjust the volume.

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-19

the radio will come on at the station last played. The last station played will also come on when the power knob is turned to ON. If a compact disc or tape is inserted when the power knob is turned to ON, the compact disc or tape will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on. The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception.
SAA0256

TUNE (Tuning):

Adjusting tone quality and speaker balance: To adjust BASS, TREB (Treble), BAL (Balance) and FADER the control knobs must be released from their stowed positions. Pushing the knobs once moves them to the released position. In the released position, the knobs control tone quality. Turn the control knobs to adjust BASS and TREB to the most pleasing level. From the released position, the knobs must be pulled out in order to control BAL and FADER. BAL adjusts the sound level between the right

and left speakers, and FADER adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers. Once sound quality is set to the desired levels, return the control knobs to the stowed position by pushing them in completely and releasing. The radio should not be tuned while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation. Use these buttons for manual tuning. To move quickly through the channels, hold either of the TUNE buttons down for more than 0.5 seconds.

FM-AM radio operation

FMAM band select: Pushing the FMAM band select button will change the band. When FMAM band select button is pushed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON,

4-20

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

SEEK/SCAN tuning: SEEK tuning: Push the SEEK/SCAN tuning button or for less than 1.5 seconds. SEEK tuning begins from high to low or low to high frequencies and stops at the next broadcasting station. SCAN tuning : Push the SEEK/SCAN tuning button or for more than 1.5 seconds. SCAN tuning begins from high to low or low to high frequencies and stops at each broadcasting station for five seconds. Pushing the button again during this 5 seconds period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station. If the SEEK/SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station.

Station memory operations: Twelve stations can be set for the FM band. Six stations can be set for the AM band. 1. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK/SCAN or TUNE button. 2. Push the desired station select button for more than 1.5 seconds. (For example, in the diagram ch2 is to be memorized. The radio mutes when the select button is pushed.) 3. The indicator ch2 will then come on and the sound will resume. Memorizing is now complete. 4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse blows, the radio memory will be cancelled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

Cassette tape player operation

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then lightly insert the cassette tape into the tape door. The cassette tape will be automatically pulled into the player.
SAA0191

The radio or CD will turn off (if it is on) and the cassette tape will begin to play.
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-21

 Do not use cassettes that have peeling or loose labels. If used, the label could jam in the player. Do not force the cassette tape into the tape door. This could cause player damage. If the system is turned off by pushing the POWER/VOLUME control knob with the cassette tape still in the player, the tape will resume playing when the system is turned back on. Precautions on cassette tape player operation: To maintain good quality sound, NISSAN recommends that you use cassette tapes of 60 minutes or shorter in length. Cassette tapes should be removed from the player when not in use. Store cassettes in their protective cases and away from direct sunlight, heat, moisture or magnetic sources. Direct sunlight can cause the cassette to become deformed. The use of deformed cassettes may cause the cassette to jam in the player. If a cassette has loose tape, insert a pencil through one of the cassette hubs and rewind the tape firmly. Loose tape may cause jamming and wavering sound quality. Over a period of time, the playback head, capstan and pinch roller may gather a tape coating residue as the tape passes over the head. This residue accumulation can cause a weak or wavering sound and should be removed periodically with a head cleaning tape. If the residue is not removed periodically, the player may need to be disassembled for cleaning. PLAY/STOP: When this button is pushed with the system turned off and a tape loaded, the system will come on and the tape will play. When this button is pushed with either the radio or compact disc turned on and the tape loaded, the compact disc or the radio will automatically be turned off and the tape will play.

While the tape is playing, pushing the TAPE button stops the tape. Pushing the button again allows the tape to play. FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind): Push the FF button to fast forward the tape. To rewind the tape, push the REW button. Either the indicator light , , or will come on when the FF or REW function is started. APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS REW: When the APS FF button is pushed while the tape is being played, the next program will start to play from the beginning. Push the APS FF button several times to skip through programs. The tape will advance the number of times the button is pushed (up to nine programs). When the APS REW button is pushed once, the program being played starts over from the beginning. Push several times to fast rewind programs. The tape will go back the number of times the button is pushed. Either the indicator light , , or will come on when the APS FF or APS REW function is started. This system searches for the blank intervals

4-22

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

between selections. If there is a blank interval within one program or there is no interval between programs, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location. PROG (Program): Push the PROG button to change the tape side while the tape is being played. The cassette tape will automatically change directions to play the other side when the first side is completed. Dolby NR (Noise Reduction): Push the Dolby NR button for Dolby NR encoded tapes to reduce high frequency tape noise. The indicator will come on. Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby NR and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Metal or chrome tape usage: The cassette player will be automatically set to high performance play when playing a metal or chrome cassette tape. TAPE EJECT: When this button is pushed with the tape loaded, the tape will be ejected.

When the tape is ejected while it is being played, the system will be turned off.

be guided automatically into the slot and start playing. After loading the disc, the number of tracks on the disc and the play time will appear on the display. If the radio or tape is already operating, it will automatically turn off and the compact disc will play.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

During cold weather or rainy days, the player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely. The player may skip while driving on rough roads. The CD player sometimes cannot function when the compartment temperature is extremely high. Decrease the temperature before use. Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight. Do not use an 8 cm CD adapter as this will cause malfunction. Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up. The compact disc will

Do not force the compact disc into the slot. This could damage the player. If the system has been turned off while the compact disc was playing, pushing the POWER/VOLUME control knob will start the compact disc. 8 cm diameter compact discs can also be used without an adapter. PLAY/STOP: When this button is pushed with the system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play. When this button is pushed with the compact disc loaded but the tape or the radio playing, the tape or radio will automatically be turned
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-23

off and the compact disc will start to play. When this button is pushed while the compact disc is playing, the compact disc will stop playing. When this button is pushed with the compact disc stopped, the compact disc will start to play. FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind): When the FF or REW button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the compact disc will return to normal play speed. APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS REW: When the APS FF button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the program next to the present one will start to play from its beginning. Push several times to skip through programs. The compact disc will advance the number of times the button is pushed. (When the last program on the compact disc is skipped through, the first program will be played.) When the APS REW button is pushed, the program being played returns to its beginning. Push several times to skip back through programs. The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pushed.

PROG (Program): When the PROG button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the play pattern will change as follows: ALL: All the programs will be played repeatedly in sequence. 1: Only one program (the one being played when the PROG button is pushed) will be repeated. RANDOM: Programs will be played at random, not following the sequence on the compact disc. The same program may be repeated twice. (no mark): All the programs will be played in sequence and stop when the last program is finished. When the compact disc is ejected, the play pattern will automatically change to ALL. CD EJECT: When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be ejected. When this button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will come out and the system will turn off.

If the compact disc comes out and is not removed, it will be pulled back into the slot to protect it. (without 8 cm diameter compact discs) DISC indicator light: This light comes on when the compact disc is loaded.

4-24

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

CB RADIO OR CAR PHONE ANTENNA Manual antenna

The manual antenna cannot be shortened, but can be removed. When you need to remove the antenna, turn its base counterclockwise. ing is especially important during the winter seasons in areas where road salt and other chemicals may be spread on road surfaces and splashed onto the antenna rod. When installing a CB, ham radio or a car phone in your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following cautions, otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the MFI (Multiport Fuel Injection) system and other electronic parts.

Power antenna (if so equipped)

The antenna will automatically extend when the radio is turned on, and retract when switched off. If the radio is left on, the antenna will retract and extend with the ignition key OFF-ON operation. Keep the antenna as far as possible away from the Engine Control Module. Also keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the MFI harness. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness. Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer. Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body. For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

Before turning the radio on, make sure that there is no one near the antenna outlet and there is enough space for it to extend. To prevent damage, be sure that antenna is fully retracted before the vehicle enters an automated car wash. Dirt and other foreign matter on the power antenna rod may interrupt its operation. Clean the rod periodically with a damp cloth. This type of clean-

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-25

MEMO

4-26

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving...................... 5-2 Ignition switch............................................................ 5-4 Before starting the engine......................................... 5-6 Starting the engine .................................................... 5-6 Driving the vehicle..................................................... 5-7 Parking brake .......................................................... 5-12 Cruise control .......................................................... 5-12 Break-in schedule ................................................... 5-14 Increasing fuel economy ......................................... 5-15 Parking/parking on hills ........................................... 5-16 Power steering ........................................................ 5-17 Brake system .......................................................... 5-17 Cold weather driving ............................................... 5-19

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING

Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time. Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets alone in your vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. Keep the trunk lid, closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with the trunk lid open, follow these precautions: 1. Open all the windows. 2. Set the air recirculation switch OFF and the fan control at 4 (high) to circulate the air. 3. Be sure the rear seat armrest and tray are closed. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death. If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately. Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage. If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the trunk lid or the body, follow the manufacturers recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle. If a special body or other equipment is added for recreational or other usage, follow the manufacturers recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle. (Some recreational vehicle appliances such as stoves, refrigerator, heaters, etc. may also generate carbon monoxide.) The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever: a. The vehicle is raised for service. b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment. c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system. d. You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

EXHAUST GAS (Carbon monoxide)

THREE WAY CATALYST

The three way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the converter are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

5-2

Starting and driving

spected promptly by an authorized NISSAN dealer. The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust pipe. Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire. Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three way catalyst. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.

trol could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects, or cause the vehicle to rollover, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt. See Seat Belts in the 1. Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems section. And also instruct your passengers to do so.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER

Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline seriously reduce the three way catalysts ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants. Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle in-

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident. Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with any vehicle, a loss of con-

Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgment. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in the accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury.
Starting and driving

5-3

IGNITION SWITCH
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. But, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol related accidents. Although the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol. Remember, drinking and driving dont mix! And thats true for drugs too (over the counter, prescription, and illegal drugs). Dont drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.
SSD0055

Never remove the key while driving. If the key is removed, the steering wheel will lock. This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
On automatic transmission models, the ignition lock is designed so that the key cannot be turned to LOCK and removed until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park) position. When removing the key from the ignition, make sure the selector lever is in the P (Park) position. If the selector lever is not returned to P (Park) position, the key cannot be moved toward LOCK. When the key cannot be turned toward the

5-4

Starting and driving

LOCK position, proceed as follows to remove the key: 1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park) position. 2. Turn the ignition key slightly in the ON direction. 3. Turn the key toward the LOCK position. 4. Remove the key. If the key is removed from the ignition switch, the selector lever cannot be moved from P (Park) position. The selector lever can be moved if the ignition switch is in the ACC position. The selector lever can also be moved if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed. There is an OFF position in between LOCK and ACC, although it does not show on the lock cylinder. When the ignition is in OFF the steering wheel is not locked. In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/6 of a turn counterclockwise from the straight up position. To lock the steering wheel, remove the key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steering wheel slightly right and left.

SSD0021

MANUAL TRANSMISSION
On manual transmission models, to turn the ignition key to LOCK from ACC or ON, turn the key to OFF and press in the key release button, then turn the key to LOCK. In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/6 of a turn counterclockwise from the straight up position. To lock the steering wheel, remove the key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steering wheel slightly right and left.

Starting and driving

5-5

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE KEY POSITIONS

The switch includes an anti-theft steering lock device. LOCK (Normal parking position) (0) The ignition key can only be removed when the switch is in this position. OFF (1) The engine can be turned off without locking the steering wheel. ACC (Accessories) (2) This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running. ON (Normal operating position) (3) This position turns on the ignition system and the electrical accessories. START (4) This position activates the starter motor, starting the engine. Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear. Maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically, e.g., each time you check engine oil. Check that all windows and lights are clean. Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation. Lock all doors. Position seat and adjust head restraints. Adjust inside and outside mirrors. Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise. Check the operation of warning lights when key is turned to the ON (3) position.

STARTING THE ENGINE

1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Automatic transmission: Move the selector lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). (P preferred.) The selector lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) position and into any of the other gear positions if the key is removed from the switch. The starter is designed not to operate if the selector lever is in one of the driving positions. Manual transmission: Move the shift lever to N (Neutral) position, and depress the clutch pedal to the floor while cranking the engine. The starter is designed not to operate unless the clutch pedal is depressed. 3. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to START. Release the key when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure. If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold or hot weather, depress the accelerator pedal and hold it to help start the engine.

5-6

Starting and driving

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

In the summer, when restarting the engine within 30 minutes after it has been stopped, keep the accelerator pedal fully depressed while starting.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The automatic transmission in your vehicle is electronically controlled by a transmission control module to produce maximum power and smooth operation. Shown on the following pages are the recommended operating procedures for this transmission. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment.

1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and shift into a driving gear. 2. Release the parking brake and foot brake, then gradually start the vehicle in motion.

Do not operate the starter for more than 10 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, turn the key off and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged. 4. Warm-up Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather.

Starting the vehicle

After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal and push the selector lever button before shifting the selector lever to the R, N, D, 2 or 1 position. Be sure the vehicle is fully stopped before attempting to shift the selector lever. This automatic transmission is designed so that the foot brake pedal must be depressed before shifting from P (Park) position to any drive position while the ignition switch is ON. The selector lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) position and into any of the other gear positions if the key is removed from the switch.

Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P or N to R, D, 2 or 1. Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident. Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up. On slippery roads, do not downshift. This may cause a loss of control. Never shift to P or R while vehicle is moving. This could cause an accident.

Starting and driving

5-7

the parking brake first, then shift the lever into the P (Park) position. When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brakes should be used for this purpose. R (Reverse): Use this position to back up. Always be sure the vehicle is completely stopped. With the brake pedal depressed, push in the select lever button and move the lever to the R (Reverse) position N (Neutral): Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to N (Neutral) position and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving. D (Drive): Use this position for all normal forward driving. 2 (Second gear): Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades. Do not exceed 73 MPH (117 km/h) in the 2 (Second gear) position. 1 (Low gear): Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades.

SD1003M

Shifting
Push the button to shift into P, R or from D to 2. All other positions can be selected without pushing the button. P (Park): Use this selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Always be sure the vehicle is at a complete stop. For maximum safety, depress the brake pedal, then push in the select lever button and move the lever to the P (Park) position. Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply

5-8

Starting and driving

Do not exceed 40 MPH (65 km/h) in the 1 (Low gear) position.

Shifting from P (Park)

If the ignition switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed, but the selector lever still cannot be moved out of P (Park) position, follow these instructions: 1. Shut the engine off and remove the key. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Reinsert the ignition key and turn it clockwise to the ACC position. 4. Depress the brake pedal, move the selector lever to N (Neutral) position and start the engine. 5. Check stop light operation.

(Neutral) position should only be used until service can be obtained. Never drive the vehicle if the stop lights are not operating properly.

Accelerator downshift In D position

For rapid passing or hill climbing, fully depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into second gear or first gear, depending on the vehicle speed.

SSD0110

Overdrive switch
Each time your vehicle is started, the transmission is automatically reset to overdrive ON. ON: For normal driving the overdrive switch is engaged. The transmission is upshifted into overdrive as the vehicle speed increases. The overdrive does not engage until the engine has warmed up.

If the selector lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position while the engine is running and the brake pedal depressed, the stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others. These instructions for starting the vehicle in N

Starting and driving

5-9

OFF: Changed for driving up and down long slopes where engine braking would be advantageous, push the overdrive switch. The O/D OFF light illuminates. When cruising at a low speed or climbing a gentle slope, you may feel uncomfortable shift shocks as the transmission shifts between third and overdrive repeatedly. In this case, press the overdrive switch. The O/D OFF indicator light comes on at this time. When driving conditions change, press the overdrive switch again. The O/D OFF indicator light goes out. Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time with the O/D OFF light illuminated. This reduces the fuel economy.

ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be activated. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, turn the ignition key OFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then turn the key back to the ON position. The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have your NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair if necessary.
SSD0002

MANUAL TRANSMISSION Shifting

To change gears, fully depress the clutch pedal, then move the shift lever. After shifting, release the clutch slowly. On the five-speed transmission model, you cannot shift directly from fifth gear into the R (Reverse) position. First shift into the N (Neutral) position, then into the R (Reverse) position. If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R (Reverse) or 1 (Low gear), shift into N (Neutral), then release the clutch pedal and shift

Fail-safe
When the fail-safe operation occurs, the next time the key is turned to the ON position, the O/D OFF light will blink for approximately 8 seconds after coming on for 2 seconds. While the vehicle can be driven under these circumstances please note that the gears in the automatic transmission will be locked in third gear. If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-

5-10

Starting and driving

into R (Reverse) or 1 (Low gear) again.

Suggested up-shift speeds

Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance. Actual up-shift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather and individual driving habits. For normal acceleration in low altitude areas [less than 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:
Gear change 1st to 2nd 2nd to 3rd 3rd to 4th 4th to 5th ACCEL shift point MPH (km/h) 13 (24) 23 (40) 33 (58) 39 (64) CRUISE shift point MPH (km/h) 13 (24) 16 (29) 27 (48) 36 (63)

Suggested maximum speed in each gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate. Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the highest gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits, and drive according to the road conditions, which will ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control.
Gear 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th MPH (km/h) 30 (50) 55 (90) 80 (130)

Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear. This may cause a loss of control or engine damage.

Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This may cause clutch damage. Stop your vehicle completely before shifting into R (Reverse). When the vehicle is stopped for a duration, for example at a stop light, shift to N (Neutral) and release the clutch pedal with the foot brake applied.

For quick acceleration when the engine is cold or in high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:
Gear change 1st to 2nd 2nd to 3rd 3rd to 4th 4th to 5th MPH 15 25 40 45 (km/h) (24) (40) (64) (72)

Starting and driving

5-11

PARKING BRAKE
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out.

CRUISE CONTROL

Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions: Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident. Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle.
SSD0018

it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed. in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed. on winding or hilly roads. on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.). in very windy areas. Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

To apply: pull the lever up. To release: 1. Firmly apply foot brake. 2. Automatic transmission models: Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position. Manual transmission models: Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position. 3. While pulling up on the lever slightly, push the button and lower completely.

Do not use the gear shift in place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged. Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle. They could release the parking brake and cause an accident.

On manual transmission models, do not shift into N (Neutral) without depressing the clutch pedal when the cruise control is on. This could cause engine damage. If this happens, depress the clutch pedal and turn the main switch off immediately.

5-12

Starting and driving

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL

If the cruise control system malfunctions, it cancels automatically. The cruise indicator light in the instrument panel then blinks to warn the driver. If the cruise indicator light blinks, turn the cruise control main switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. The cruise indicator light may blink when the cruise control main switch is turned on while pushing the RES/ACCEL, COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch (located on the steering wheel). To properly set the cruise control system, perform the preceding steps in the order indicated.

SSD0019B

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 30 to 89 MPH (48 to 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. To turn on the cruise control, push the main switch on. The indicator light on the switch will come on. To set at cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. (The CRUISE light will come on.) Take your foot off

the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed. To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed. The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the cruise control. To cancel the preset speed, follow either of these three methods:

Starting and driving

5-13

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
a) Push the cancel switch; The CRUISE light will go out. b) Tap the brake pedal; The CRUISE light will go out. c) Turn the main switch off. Both the ON indicator and CRUISE lights will go out. If you depress the brake pedal while pushing the RES/ACCEL set switch and reset at the cruising speed, turn the main switch off once and then turn it on again. The cruise control will automatically be cancelled if the vehicle slows down below approximately 8 MPH (13 km/h). Depress the clutch pedal (manual transmission), or move the selector lever to N (Neutral) position (automatic transmission). The CRUISE light will go out. To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: a) Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the COAST/SET switch. b) Push and hold the RES/ACCEL set switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch. c) Push, then quickly release the RES/ACCEL set switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: a) Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. b) Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed. c) Push, then quickly release the COAST/ SET switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES/ACCEL set switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 30 MPH (48 km/h). During the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km), follow these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life. Do not drive over 55 MPH (90 km/h) and do not run the engine over 4,000 rpm. Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow. Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear. Avoid quick starts. Avoid hard braking as much as possible. Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km).

5-14

Starting and driving

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

Keep your engine tuned up. Follow the recommended periodic maintenance schedule. Keep the tires inflated at the correct pressure. Low pressure will increase tire wear and waste fuel. Keep the front wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment will cause not only tire wear but also lower fuel economy. Air conditioner operation lowers fuel economy. Use the air conditioner only when necessary.
SD1001M

Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position. Drive at moderate speeds on the highway. Driving at high speed will lower fuel economy. Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a safe distance behind other vehicles. Use a proper gear range which suits road conditions. On level roads, shift into high gear as soon as possible. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

When cruising at highway speeds, it is more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to reduce drag.

Starting and driving

5-15

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
expectedly or roll away and result in an accident. Make sure the automatic transmission selector lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the button at the end of the lever. 3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into the street when parked on a sloping drive way, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
MSD0002 1 HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: k

Do not park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire. 1. Firmly apply the parking brake. 2. Automatic transmission models: Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position. Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) position. When parking on an uphill grade, place the shift lever in the 1 (Low gear) position.

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.
2 HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: k

Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P (Park) for automatic transmission models or in an appropriate gear for manual transmission models. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move un-

Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb. HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO 3 CURB: k Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves.

5-16

Starting and driving

POWER STEERING
4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove the key. The power assisted steering is designed to use a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering. If the engine stops or drive belt breaks, you will still have control of the vehicle. However, much greater steering effort is needed, especially in sharp turns or at low speeds.

BRAKE SYSTEM
The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit develops a problem, you will still have braking at two wheels. Vacuum assisted brake The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and the stopping distance will be longer. Wet brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking. To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat-up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly. Using the brakes Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This overheats the brakes, increases wear on the brake linings and pads, and reduces gas mileage. To help save the brakes and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and
Starting and driving

Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be much harder to operate.

5-17

downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control.

ning on slippery surfaces.

Self-test feature
The anti-lock brake system consists of electronic sensors, electric pumps, and hydraulic solenoids controlled by a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of any malfunction. If the computer senses any malfunction, it switches the antilock brake system OFF and turns on the ABS warning light in the dashboard. The brake system will then behave normally, but without anti-lock assistance. If the light comes on during the self check, or while you are driving, you should take your vehicle to your NISSAN dealer for repair at your earliest convenience.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident. If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder.

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances.

Normal operation
The anti-lock brake system will not operate at speeds below 3 to 6 MPH (5 to 10 km/h) to completely stop the vehicle. (The speeds will vary according to road conditions.) When the anti-lock system senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator (under the hood) rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure (like pumping the brakes very quickly). While the actuator is working, you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from the actuator under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the anti-lock system is working properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) (if so equipped)

The anti-lock brake system controls the brakes at each wheel so the wheels will not lock when braking abruptly or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing wheel lockup, the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spin-

5-18

Starting and driving

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

hicle identification in the 10. Technical and consumer information section for tire placard location.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer or glycerin to it through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole.

The anti-lock brake system is a sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces, but remember that the stopping distance on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces, even with the anti-lock system. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the responsibility for safety of self and others rests in the hands of the driver. Tire type and condition of tires may also affect braking effectiveness. When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels. When installing a spare tire, make sure it is the proper size and type as specified on the tire placard. See Ve-

ANTI-FREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32F (0C), check anti-freeze (ethylene glycol base) to assure proper winter protection. For additional information, see Engine Cooling System in the 8. Do-it-yourself section.

BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. For additional information, see Battery in the 8. Do-ityourself section.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-freeze, drain the cooling system by opening the drain valves located under the radiator and on the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. See Engine cooling system in
Starting and driving

5-19

the 8. Do-it-yourself section for changing engine coolant.

TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires are of a tread design to provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels. Please consult your NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability information. 2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some provinces and states prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires. 3. Tire chains may be used if desired. Make sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturers suggestions. Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before

installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturers suggestions. Use only SAE Class S chains. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected. Never install tire chains on a T-type spare tire. Do not use tire chains on dry roads.

a shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts. extra window washer fluid to refill the reservoir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

Wet ice (32F, 0C and freezing rain), very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have a lot less traction or grip under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded. Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction. Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement. Allow greater following distances on slippery roads. Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter: a scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades. a sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support.

5-20

Starting and driving

These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while actually on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads. Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so equipped)

An engine block heater to assist extreme cold temperature starting is available through your NISSAN dealer.

Do not use your heater with an ungrounded electrical system or twopronged (cheater) adapters. You can be injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection.

Starting and driving

5-21

MEMO

5-22

Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Flat tire ...................................................................... 6-2 Jump starting............................................................. 6-7 Push starting ............................................................. 6-9 If your vehicle overheats ........................................... 6-9 Towing your vehicle ................................................ 6-10

FLAT TIRE CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below. Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous. Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road away from traffic. 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. 3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Shift the manual transmission into R (Reverse) position (automatic transmission in P (Park) position). 4. Turn off the engine. 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance. 6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

MCE0001

Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up.

Make sure that the parking brake is securely applied and the manual transmission is shifted into R (Reverse), or the automatic transmission into P (Park).

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and could cause personal injury.

6-2

In case of emergency

SCE0207A

Removing wheel cover

SCE0036

SCE0037

Do not use your hands to pry off wheel caps. Doing so could result in personal injury.

Getting the spare tire and tools

Remove jacking tools and spare tire from the storage area located inside the trunk as illustrated.

In case of emergency

6-3

CE1089

CE1092

Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire

Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instructions. 1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point as illustrated above so that top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack up point. Align the jack head between the two notches in the front or the rear as shown. Also fit the groove of the jack head between the notches as shown.

The jack should be used on level firm ground. 2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground. 3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands as shown above. Remove the wheel nuts, and then remove the tire. Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Use only the jack provided with your vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed only for lifting your vehicle during a tire change. Use the correct jack up points; never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support.

6-4

In case of emergency

 Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary. Never use blocks on or under the jack. Do not start or run engine while vehicle is on the jack, as it may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slid differential carriers. Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack.
SCE0039

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident. Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose. As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench. Wheel nut tightening torque: 72 to 87 ft-lb (98 to 118 Nm) Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure. COLD pressure: After vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire placard affixed to the center console lid. Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle
In case of emergency

Installing the spare tire

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub. 2. Carefully put the wheel on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight. 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly until they are tight. 4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence as illustrated.

6-5

has been run for 600 miles (1,000 km) after installing the aluminum wheel.

gency use. See Tires and wheels in the 8. Do-it-yourself section.

SCE0040

Stowing the damaged tire and tools

Securely store the spare tire and jacking equipment in the vehicle.

Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly secured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop. The T-type spare tire and small size spare tire are designed for emer-

6-6

In case of emergency

JUMP STARTING
To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be followed. Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting. Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause serious injury. Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it.

If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle. Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery. Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, cloth or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulphuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water. Keep battery out of the reach of children. The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.

In case of emergency

6-7

 Always connect positive (+) to positive (+) and negative () to body ground (for example, strut mounting bolt, etc. not to the battery). Make sure that cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that clamps do not contact any other metal.
SCE0154A

5. Start the engine of the other vehicle and let it run for a few minutes. 6. Keep the engine speed of the other vehicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start your engine in the normal manner.

Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury. 1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the two vehicles to bring their batteries into close proximity to each other. Do not allow the two vehicles to touch. 2. Apply parking brake. Move the shift lever to

the N (Neutral) position (On automatic transmission models, move the selector lever to the P (Park) position). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (light, heater, air conditioner, etc.). 3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so equipped). Cover the battery with an old cloth to reduce explosion hazard. 4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as illustrated.

Do not keep starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, turn the key off and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

6-8

In case of emergency

PUSH STARTING
7. After starting your engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable. 8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid. Automatic transmission models cannot be push started. This may cause transmission damage. Three way catalyst equipped models should not be started by pushing since the three way catalyst may be damaged. Never try to start the vehicle by towing it; when the engine starts, the forward surge could cause the vehicle to collide with the tow vehicle.

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause a vehicle fire. To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the radiator cap while the engine is still hot. When the radiator cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury. Do not open the hood if steam is coming out. If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take the following steps: 1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position (automatic transmission to the P (Park) position). Do not stop the engine. 2. Turn off the air conditioner switch. Open all the windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot
In case of emergency

6-9

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

and fan control to high speed. 3. If engine overheating is caused by climbing a long hill on a hot day, run the engine at a fast idle (approximately 1,500 rpm) until the temperature gauge indication returns to normal. 4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. Wait until no steam or coolant can be seen before proceeding. 5. Open the engine hood. Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or to get caught in the cooling fan, or drive belt. The fan motor can start at any time when the coolant temperature is high. 7. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the reservoir tank with the engine running. Add coolant to the reservoir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at the nearest NISSAN dealer. When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in Canada) and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from your NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions.

If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting burned. 6. Visually check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine.

Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed. Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck.

When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system, and powertrain are in working condition. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used.

6-10

In case of emergency

 Always attach safety chains before towing. Always release the parking brake when towing with the rear wheels on the ground. When towing manual transmission models with the front wheels on the ground (If you do not use a towing dolly): Turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never place the ignition key in the LOCK position. This will result in damage to the steering lock mechanism. Move the gearshift lever to the N (Neutral) position.
SCE0202

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground as illustrated.
In case of emergency

6-11

and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised, always use a towing dollies under the front wheels. Never tow an automatic transmission model from the rear (that is, backward) with four wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission.

Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (Freeing a stuck vehicle)

Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle. Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or cooling systems.
SCE0199

Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull on the vehicle at an angle. Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery. Stand clear of an stuck vehicle.

Never tow an automatic transmission models with the front wheels on the ground as this may cause serious

6-12

In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ....................................................... 7-2 Cleaning interior ........................................................ 7-4 Corrosion protection .................................................. 7-5

CLEANING EXTERIOR
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area. When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover. Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover. cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so that the paint surface is not scratched or damaged. Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of clean water. Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be regularly cleaned. Make sure that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt. Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle. Do not use strong household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents. Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted. Avoid using tight-napped or rough

WASHING
Thoroughly rinse surface dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and plenty of clean water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap such as Nissan Car Wash, or a general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

MAI0001

In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it. In the following cases, please wash your vehicle as soon as possible to protect the paint surface. After a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain After driving on coastal roads When contaminants such as soot, bird droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface When dust or mud builds up on the surface

WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. After waxing, polishing is recommended to remove built-up residue and to avoid a weathered appearance. If you wish to wax your vehicle, only use a wax specified for use over clear coats, such as Nissan Liquid or Spray Wax. Your Nissan

7-2

Appearance and care

dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product. Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax. Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish. If the surface does not polish easily, use a road tar remover and wax again. Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, the underbody must be cleaned regularly. This will prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing underbody and suspension corrosion. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

SAI0014A

REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at your NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store.

GLASS
When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier to clean if the high-mounted stop light is removed first. Be careful when removing the high-mounted stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the high-mounted stop light wires. The high-mounted stop light must be properly reinstalled before driving your vehicle. Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner
Appearance and care

7-3

CLEANING INTERIOR
and a soft cloth will easily remove this film. Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry soft cloth. Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturers recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material. pedal operation. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.

When cleaning the inside of the window, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the rear window defogger.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash regularly, especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. Salt could discolor the wheel if not removed. Never use benzine, thinner, or any similar material. The leather seats should be regularly coated with a leather wax like saddle soap. Never use car wax. Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer.

CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

Floor mats
The use of Genuine Nissan floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. No matter what mats are used, be sure they are fitted for your vehicle and are properly positioned in the footwell to prevent interference with

7-4

Appearance and care

CORROSION PROTECTION SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely before using them.

MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION:

The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas. Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents.

Do not allow wet belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or chemical solvents since these may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.
SAI0012

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION: Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle, and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.

Floor mat positioning aid (Driver side only)

This model includes a front floor mat bracket to act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your vehicle model. The drivers side floor mat has a grommet hole incorporated in it. Simply position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in the floorpan contour. Periodically check to make certain that the mats are properly positioned.

Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used.
Appearance and care

7-5

Temperature
A temperature increase will accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated. NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom. Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them. Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders. In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically. For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, consult your local NISSAN dealer.

Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will also accelerate the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION:

Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean. Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible. Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation. Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible.

7-6

Appearance and care

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions .......................................... 8-2 Engine compartment check locations ....................... 8-4 Engine cooling system .............................................. 8-5 Engine oil .................................................................. 8-8 Automatic transaxle fluid ......................................... 8-10 Power steering fluid ................................................ 8-12 Brake and clutch fluid ............................................. 8-12 Window washer fluid ............................................... 8-13 Battery ..................................................................... 8-14 Drive belts ............................................................... 8-15 Spark plugs ............................................................. 8-16 Air cleaner ............................................................... 8-18 Windshield wiper blades ......................................... 8-18 Parking brake and brake pedal............................... 8-20 Clutch pedal ............................................................ 8-21 Fuses....................................................................... 8-21 Lights....................................................................... 8-24 Tires and wheels ..................................................... 8-31

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed. If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts. It is advisable to remove necktie and any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle. Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle. If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases. Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands. Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks away from fuel and the battery. On gasoline engine models with the Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System, the fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off.

Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. For a manual transmission, move the shift lever to N (Neutral) position. For an automatic transmission, move the selector lever to P (Park) position. Be sure the ignition key is OFF or LOCK when performing any parts replacement or repairs. Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition key is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan.

Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn off the engine and wait until it cools down. Never connect or disconnect either the battery or any transistorized component connector while the ignition key is on. Never leave the engine or the automatic transmission related component harness connector disconnected while the ignition key is on. Avoid direct contact with used engine oil. Improperly disposed motor oil and/or other vehicle fluids can hurt the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid. This 8. Do-it-yourself section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

8-2

Do-it-yourself

You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect your warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, have it done by your NISSAN dealer.

Do-it-yourself

8-3

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

SDI0495A

8-4

Do-it-yourself

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, year-round, antifreeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors, therefore additional cooling system additives are not necessary. fluid escaping from the radiator. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. See If your vehicle overheats in the 6. In case of emergency section. The radiator is equipped with a pressure cap. Use only a genuine cap as a replacement. When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only an ethylene glycol antifreeze with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% distilled water. The use of other types of coolant solutions may damage your engine cooling system.
Outside C 35 temperature down to F 30 50% 50%

SDI0747

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below MIN, add coolant up to the MAX level. If the reservoir tank is empty, check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir tank up to the MAX level. If the engine cooling system frequently
Do-it-yourself

Antifreeze

Distilled water

Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure

8-5

requires coolant, have it checked by your NISSAN dealer.

Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheating.

To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. 1. Open the radiator cap and drain plug. 2. Open the drain plug on the engine block. 3. Flush the cooling system by running fresh water through the radiator. 4. Close the radiator drain plug and the drain plug on the engine block securely.
SDI0114

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

Major cooling system repairs should be performed by your NISSAN dealer. The service procedures can be found in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual.

8-6

Do-it-yourself

5. See Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the 10. Technical and consumer information section for cooling system capacity. Fill the radiator slowly with the proper mixture of coolant and water. Fill the reservoir tank up to the MAX level. Then install the radiator cap.

SDI0138

6. Start the engine, and warm it up until the radiator fan operates. Then race the engine two or three times under no load. Watch the coolant temperature gauge for signs of overheating. 7. Stop the engine. After it completely cools down, refill the radiator up to the filler opening. Fill the reservoir tank up to the MAX level. 8. Check the radiator drain plug and the drain plug on the engine block for any sign of leakage.

Do-it-yourself

8-7

ENGINE OIL

Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating with insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.

SDI0115

SDI0534

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply parking brake. 2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature. 3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be between the H and L marks. If the oil level is below the L mark, remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening. Do not overfill. 6. Recheck oil level with dipstick. It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.

8-8

Do-it-yourself

6. Remove the drain plug with a wrench and completely drain the oil. If oil filter is to be changed, remove and replace it at this time. See later in Engine oil for changing engine oil filter.

9. Start the engine. Check for leakage around the drain plug. Correct as required. 10.Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary. 11.Dispose of waste oil in the proper manner.

Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot. Waste oil must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations. 7. Clean and re-install the drain plug and new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Drain plug tightening torque: 22 to 29 ft-lb (29 to 39 Nm) Do not use excessive force. 8. Refill engine with recommended oil and install the cap securely. See Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the 10. Technical and consumer information section for refill capacity.
Do-it-yourself

SDI0139

Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. Keep used engine oil out of reach of children.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature. 3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. 4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug. 5. Remove the oil filler cap.

8-9

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil may be hot. 4. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with a clean rag. Be sure to remove any old rubber gasket remaining on the mounting surface of the engine. 5. Coat the rubber gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil. 6. Screw in the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten additionally more than 2/3 turn. Oil filter tightening torque: 10.85 to 15.19 ft-lb (14.7 to 20.6 Nm) 7. Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter. Correct as required. 8. Turn the engine off and wait several minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if necessary. When engine is running, keep hands, jewelry and clothing away from any moving parts such as cooling fan and drive belt. Automatic transmission fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children.

SDI0140

SDI0748

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Turn the engine off. 3. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench. (Depending on the engine model, a special cap type wrench may be required. See your NISSAN dealer if in doubt.) Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

8-10

Do-it-yourself

TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS FOR CHECKING

The fluid level should be checked using the HOT range on the dipstick after the following conditions have been met: a) the engine should be warmed up to operating temperature. b) the vehicle should be driven at least 5 minutes. c) the automatic transmission fluid should be warmed to between 122 and 176F (50 and 80C). The fluid can be checked at fluid temperatures of 86 to 122F (30 to 50C) using the COLD range on the dipstick after the engine is warmed up and before driving. However, the fluid should be re-checked using the HOT range. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the parking brake. 2. Start the engine and then move the selector lever through each gear range. Move the selector lever to P (Park) position after you have moved it through all ranges. Do not overfill. Use only NISSAN Matic D (Continental US and Alaska) or genuine automatic transmission fluid (Canada). DexronTMIII/MerconTM or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental US and Alaska contact a NISSAN dealer for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of DexronTM III/MerconTM automatic transmission fluid. NOTE: If the vehicle has been driven for a long time at high speeds, or in city traffic in hot weather, or if it is being used to pull a trailer, the accurate fluid level cannot be read. You should wait until the fluid has cooled down (about 30 minutes).

SDI0496

3. Check the fluid level with the engine idling. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean with lint-free paper. 5. Reinsert the dipstick into the charging pipe as far as it will go. 6. Remove the dipstick and note the reading. If the level is at the low side of either range, add fluid to the charging pipe.

Do-it-yourself

8-11

POWER STEERING FLUID

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID

ability.

Do not spill the fluid on painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, wash with water.

SDI0118

SDI0119

Check the fluid level in the reservoir tank. The fluid level should be checked using the HOT range at fluid temperatures of 122 to 176F (50 to 80C) or using the COLD range at fluid temperatures of 32 to 86F (0 to 30C).

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is below the MIN line or the brake warning light comes on, add DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be thoroughly checked by your NISSAN dealer.

Do not overfill. Use type DEXRONTMIII or equivalent.

Use only new fluid. Old, inferior, or contaminated fluid may damage the brake and clutch systems. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehicles stopping

8-12

Do-it-yourself

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

Anti-freeze is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children.

Do not substitute engine anti-freeze coolant for window washer solution. This may result in damage to the paint.
SDI0189 SDI0497

Type A: Add fluid when the low washer fluid warning light comes on. Add a washer solvent to the water for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer anti-freeze. Follow the manufacturers instructions for the mixture ratio.

Type B: To check the fluid level, use your finger to plug the center hole of the cap (as shown above), then remove it from the tank. If there is no fluid in the tube, add fluid. Add a washer solvent to the water for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer anti-freeze. Follow the manufacturers instructions for the mixture ratio.

Do-it-yourself

8-13

BATTERY
Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Any corrosion should be washed off with a solution of baking soda and water. Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened. If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the () negative battery terminal cable to prevent discharge. children.

Do not expose the battery to flames or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas generated by battery action is explosive. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry. Keep the battery out of the reach of

DI0137M

Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX and MIN lines. If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level to the indicator in each filler opening. Do not overfill. 1. Remove the cell plugs. 2. Add distilled water up to the MAX level. 3. Tighten cell plugs.

8-14

Do-it-yourself

DRIVE BELTS
If jump starting is necessary, see Jump starting the 6. In case of emergency section. If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. Contact your NISSAN dealer.

SDI0141

Be sure the ignition key is OFF. The engine could rotate unexpectedly. 1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying, oil adhesion or looseness. If the belt is in poor condition or loose, have it replaced or adjusted by your NISSAN dealer. 2. Have the belts checked regularly for condition and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual.
Do-it-yourself

8-15

SPARK PLUGS

Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.

Be sure to use the correct wrench to remove the plugs. An incorrect wrench can cause damage.
SDI0122

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

1. Remove the rocker cover ornament using a suitable hexagon wrench. (Front side) 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Loosen the ignition coil fixing bolts. And remove the ignition coil to give access to the spark plugs. 4. Remove the spark plugs with a spark plug wrench. The plug wrench has a rubber seal that holds the spark plug so that it will not fall when it is pulled out. Make sure that each

spark plug is snugly fitted into the plug wrench. 5. Fit the new plugs, one at a time, into the spark plug wrench and install them. Turn each plug in several full turns by hand, then tighten with a spark plug wrench to the correct torque. Do not overtighten. Spark plug tightening torque: 14 to 22 ft-lb (20 to 29 Nm)

8-16

Do-it-yourself

SDI0123

SDI0498

SDI0145

6. Holding the ignition coil, re-connect each ignition coil to its proper spark plug by pushing it on until you feel a snap. 7. Tighten all ignition coils.

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace the platinumtipped spark plugs as frequently as the conventional type spark plugs since they will last much longer. Follow the maintenance schedule but, do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping. Always replace with recommended platinum-tipped spark plugs.

Do-it-yourself

8-17

AIR CLEANER
engine backfires. If it is not there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner off. Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury.

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield. Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water. Clean the blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blade with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.

SDI0121

The filter element should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance intervals. See Periodic maintenance schedules in the 9. Maintenance section for maintenance intervals. When replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp cloth.

Operating the engine with the air cleaner off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if the

8-18

Do-it-yourself

DI1018M

REPLACEMENT
1. Pull the wiper arm. 2. Push the lock pin, then remove the wiper blade. 3. Insert the new wiper blade to the wiper arm until a click sounds. After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position. Otherwise it may be damaged when the engine hood is opened. Make sure the wiper blade contacts the glass, otherwise the arm may be damaged from wind pressure.
SDI0146

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle. This may cause clogging or improper windshield washer operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin.
Do-it-yourself

8-19

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE PEDAL

See your NISSAN dealer and have it checked if the brake pedal height does not return to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched scraping or screeching sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard. Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system. Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For additional information, see Periodic maintenance schedules in the 9. Maintenance section for maintenance intervals.

SDI0125

DI1020MD

CHECKING PARKING BRAKE

From the released position, pull the parking brake lever up slowly and firmly. If the number of clicks is out of the range listed above, see your NISSAN dealer.

CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL

With the engine running, check the distance between the upper surface of the pedal and the metal floor. If it is out of the range shown above, see your NISSAN dealer.

Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes. The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied.

8-20

Do-it-yourself

CLUTCH PEDAL BRAKE BOOSTER

Check the brake booster function as follows: 1. With the engine off, press and release the brake pedal several times. When brake pedal movement (distance of travel) remains the same from one pedal application to the next, continue on to the next step. 2. While depressing the brake pedal, start the engine. The pedal height should drop a little. 3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the engine. Keeping the pedal depressed for about 30 seconds, the pedal height should not change. 4. Run the engine for one minute without depressing the brake pedal, then turn it off. Depress the brake pedal several times. The pedal travel distance will decrease gradually with each depression as the vacuum is released from the booster. If the brakes do not operate properly, see your NISSAN dealer.

FUSES

Never use a fuse of higher amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire.

DI1021MC

Press the pedal by hand and be sure the free travel is within the limits shown above. If free travel is too little or too much, see your NISSAN dealer.

Do-it-yourself

8-21

system checked and repaired by your NISSAN dealer.

SDI0126

SDI0128

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition key and headlight switch are OFF. 2. Open the engine hood. 3. Remove the fusible link cover. 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. 5. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse. 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

Fusible links
If any electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace only with genuine NISSAN parts.

8-22

Do-it-yourself

SDI0335

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition key and the headlight switch are OFF. 2. Pull to open the fuse box lid. 3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. 4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse. 5. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by your NISSAN dealer.
Do-it-yourself

8-23

LIGHTS

SDI0735

8-24

Do-it-yourself

HEADLIGHTS
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. A bulb can be replaced from inside the engine compartment without removing the headlight assembly.

Replacing the headlight bulb

1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the rear end of the bulb. 3. Turn the bulb retaining ring counterclockwise until it is free from the headlight reflector, then remove it. 4. Remove the headlight bulb. Do not shake or rotate the bulb when removing it. 5. Insert the bulb into the headlight reflector with the flat side of the plastic base facing upward. 6. Install the bulb retaining ring and turn it clockwise until it stops. 7. Push the electrical connector into the bulb plastic base until it snaps and stops. 8. Connect the battery negative cable.

High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped. Hold the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope.

SDI0129

Do-it-yourself

8-25

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) 27/8 27 3.8 55 Bulb No. 1157 1156 194

Do not touch the bulb. Use the same number and wattage as originally installed: Wattage 65/45 Bulb no. 9004 Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact your NISSAN dealer. Do not leave the bulb out of the headlight reflector for a long period of time as dust, moisture, and smoke may enter the headlight body and affect the performance of the headlight.

Clearance Front turn signal light Front side marker light Front fog light (if so equipped) Rear combination light Turn signal Stop/Tail Back-up Side marker light License plate light High-mounted stop light (if so equipped) Interior light Front personal light Step light Trunk light Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)

27 27/8 18 3.8 5 18 10 10 2.7 3.4 1.4

1156 1157 921 194

921

161 158

8-26

Do-it-yourself

MDI0006

Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or cover.

Do-it-yourself

8-27

SDI0131A

8-28

Do-it-yourself

SDI0736

SDI0737

SDI0503A

Do-it-yourself

8-29

SDI0784

8-30

Do-it-yourself

TIRES AND WHEELS

SDI0333A

DI1033M

If you have a flat tire, see Flat tire in the 6. In case of emergency section.

TIRE PRESSURE Maximum inflation pressure

Do not exceed the maximum inflation pressures shown on the side wall of the tire.

Tire inflation pressure

Periodically check the tire pressure (including spare). Incorrect tire pressure may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling. Tire pressure should be checked when tires are COLD. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven
Do-it-yourself

SDI0756

8-31

less than 1 mile (1.6 km). COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire placard affixed to the center console lid.

ing faster than 85 MPH (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury.

Snow tires have better snow traction than all season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

TYPES OF TIRES
Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident. The vehicle capacity weight is indicated on the tire placard. Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components. Before taking a long trip, or whenever you have loaded your vehicle heavily, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressure is at the specified level. Do not drive your vehicle over 85 MPH (140 km/h) unless it is equipped with high speed capability tires. DrivWhen changing or replacing tires, be sure all four tires are of the same type (i.e., summer, all season or snow) and construction. Your NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability. Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance in snow and ice will be substantially reduced. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire sidewall. If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of snow or all season tires on all four wheels.

Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Generally, snow tires will have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire. If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of snow or all season tires on all four wheels.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies all season tires on some models to provide good performance for use all year around, including snowy and icy road conditions. All season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall.

8-32

Do-it-yourself

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some provinces and states prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturers suggestions. Use only SAE class S chains. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or undercarriage. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected. Never install tire chains on a T-type spare tire. Do not use the chains on dry roads.

DI0048-B

CHANGING TIRES AND WHEELS Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends that tires be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). Wheel nut tightening torque: 72 to 87 ft-lb (98 to 118 Nm) See Flat tire in the 6. In case of emergency section for tire replacing procedures.

Do-it-yourself

8-33

 After rotating the tires, adjust the tire pressure. Retighten the wheel nuts after the aluminum wheels have been run for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). Do not include the T-type spare tire or any other small size spare tire in the tire rotation.
MDI0004

may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the T-type spare tire, contact your NISSAN dealer.

Replacing tires and wheels

When replacing a tire, use the same size, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. See Specifications in the 10. Technical and consumer information section for recommended types and sizes of tires and wheels.

Tire wear and damage

Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging, or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging, or deep cuts are found, the tire should be replaced. The original tires have a built-in tread wear indicator. When the wear indicator is visible, the tire should be replaced. Improper service for a T-type spare tire

The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury. If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels

8-34

Do-it-yourself

which have the same offset dimension. Wheels of a different offset could cause early tire wear, possibly degraded vehicle handling characteristics and/or interference with the brake discs. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad wear. Do not install a deformed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning. The use of retread tire is not recommended.

Care of wheels
Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance. Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed. Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels. Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead. NISSAN recommends that the road wheels be waxed to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter. The T-type spare tire should be used only for emergency. It should be replaced by the standard tire at the first opportunity. Drive carefully while the T-type spare tire is installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving. Periodically check tire inflation pressure, and always keep it at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar). Do not drive your vehicle at speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h). Do not use tire chains on a T-type spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly on the T-type spare tire and may cause damage to the vehicle. When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, the T-type spare tire should be used on the rear wheel and the original tire used on the front wheels (drive wheels). Use tire chains only on the front two original tires.
Do-it-yourself

Spare tire (T-type spare tire)

Observe the following precautions if the T-type spare tire must be used, otherwise your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident.

Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required. Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the front wheels on the vehicle could lead to transmission damage.

8-35

 Tire tread of the T-type spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the original tire. Replace the T-type spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear. Because the T-type spare tire is smaller than the original tire, ground clearance is reduced. To avoid damage to the vehicle do not drive over obstacles. Also do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught. Do not use the T-type spare tire on other vehicles. Do not use more than one T-type spare tire at the same time. Do not tow a trailer while the T-type spare tire is installed.

8-36

Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance

General maintenance ................................................ 9-3 Periodic maintenance schedules .............................. 9-5

Your new NISSAN has been designed to have minimum maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save you both time and money. However, some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your NISSANs good mechanical condition, as well as its emission and engine performance. It is the owners responsibility to make sure that the specified maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed. As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper maintenance care. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain. General maintenance: General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal dayto-day operation of the vehicle. They are essential if your vehicle is to continue to operate properly. It is your responsibility to perform these procedures regularly as prescribed. These checks or inspections can be done by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, your NISSAN dealer. Periodic maintenance: The maintenance items listed in this part are required to be serviced at regular intervals.

However, under severe driving conditions, additional or more frequent maintenance will be required. Where to go for service: If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and tuned by an authorized NISSAN dealer. NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership training programs. They are completely qualified to work on NISSANs vehicles before they work on your vehicle, rather than after they have worked on it. You can be confident that your NISSAN dealers service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle in a reliable and economic way.

9-2

Maintenance

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smell, be sure to check for the cause or have your NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you should notify your NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required. When performing any checks or maintenance work, see Maintenance precautions in the 8. Do-it-yourself section. sure no nuts are missing, and check for any loose nuts. Tighten if necessary. Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle pulls to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed. Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. Doors and engine hood: Check that all doors and the engine hood operate smoothly as well as the trunk lid or back hatch. Also make sure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released. When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc. Lights*: Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim. Warning lights and buzzers: Make sure that all warning lights and buzzers are operating properly. Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak. Windshield defroster: Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in good quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner. Steering wheel: Check for changes in the steering conditions, such as excessive free play, hard steering or strange noises.

EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following items with * is found in the 8. Do-ityourself section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified. Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge periodically when at a service station, including the spare, and adjust to the specified pressure if necessary. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear. Wheel nuts*: When checking the tires, make

Maintenance

9-3

Seats: Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks (if equipped) hold securely in all latched positions. Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage. Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mats away from the pedal. Clutch pedal*: Make sure the pedal operates smoothly and check that it has the proper free play. Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied. Brake pedal and booster*: Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure it has the proper distance under it when depressed fully. Check the brake booster function. Be sure to

keep floor mats away from the pedal. Parking brake*: Check that the lever has the proper travel and make sure that the vehicle is held securely on a fairly steep hill when only the parking brake is applied. Automatic transaxle P (Park) position mechanism: Check that the brake pedal must be depressed for the selector lever to be moved from the P (Park) position. On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

Brake and clutch fluid levels*: Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid levels are between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir. Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily. Engine oil level*: Check the level on the dipstick after parking the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the engine. Be sure to wait a few minutes to allow the oil to drain back into the sump. Power steering fluid level* and lines: Check the level in the reservoir tank with the engine off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. Automatic transaxle fluid level*: Check the level on the dipstick after putting the selector lever in P (Park) position with the engine idling. Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately locate the trouble and correct it.

Under the hood and the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel). Windshield washer fluid*: Check that there is adequate fluid in the tank. Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level when the engine is cold. Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, deterioration or loose connections.

9-4

Maintenance

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

(See Precautions when starting and driving in the 5. Starting and driving section for exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).) Underbody: The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances, otherwise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, being careful to clean those areas where mud and dirt may accumulate. For additional information, see Cleaning exterior in the 7. Appearance and care section. Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately. To ensure smooth, trouble-free, safe and economical driving, NISSAN provides two different maintenance schedules that may be used, depending upon the conditions in which you usually drive. These schedules contain both distance and time intervals, up to 60,000 miles (96,000 km)/48 months. For most people, the odometer reading will indicate when service is needed. However, if you drive very little, your vehicle should be serviced at the regular time intervals shown in the schedule. After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, continue the periodic maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals. taxi or door-to-door delivery use. driving in dusty conditions. driving on rough, muddy, or salt spread roads. towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier.

SCHEDULE 2
Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 2 if none of the driving conditions shown in Schedule 1 apply to your driving habits.

SCHEDULE 1
Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 1 if your driving habits frequently include one or more of the following driving conditions: repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km). repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing. operating in hot weather in stop-and-go rush hour traffic. extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police,
Maintenance

9-5

SCHEDULE 1
Abbreviations: R = Replace I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 3.75 (6) 3 7.5 (12) 6 11.25 (18) 9 15 (24) 12 18.75 (30) 15

[
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 22.5 26.25 30 33.75 37.5 41.25 (36) (42) (48) (54) (60) (66) 18 21 24 27 30 33

]: At the mileage intervals only

45 48.75 (72) (78) 36 39 52.5 56.25 (84) (90) 42 45 60 (96) 48 I* [R] I* I* R* R R [R]

Emission control system maintenance

Drive belts See NOTE (1) Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) EVAP vapor lines Fuel lines Fuel filter See NOTE (3)* Engine coolant See NOTE (4) Engine oil Engine oil filter (Use part No. 15208-31U00 or equivalent) Spark plugs (Use PLATINUM-TIPPED type) Intake & exhaust valve clearance See NOTE (5) [R] I* I*

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

NOTE: (1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. (2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required. (3) If vehicle is operated under extremely adverse weather conditions or in areas where ambient temperatures are either extremely low or extremely high, the filters might become clogged. In such an event, replace them immediately. (4) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. (5) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance. (6) Maintenance items and intervals with * are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

9-6

Maintenance

Abbreviations: I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.

MAINTENANCE OPERATION Miles x 1,000 Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) Months 3.75 (6) 3 7.5 11.25 (12) 6 (18) 9 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 15 18.75 22.5 26.25 (24) 12 (30) 15 (36) 18 (42) 21 30 33.75 37.5 41.25 (48) 24 (54) 27 (60) 30 (66) 33 45 48.75 52.5 56.25 (72) 36 (78) 39 (84) 42 (90) 45 60 (96) 48

Chassis and body maintenance

Brake lines & cables Brake pads & discs Manual & automatic transaxle oil Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Exhaust system Front drive shaft boots Supplemental air bag system See NOTE (2). See NOTE (1). I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

NOTE: (1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. (2) Inspect the supplemental air bag system 10 years after the date of manufacture noted on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label.

Maintenance

9-7

SCHEDULE 2
Abbreviations: R = Replace I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION Miles x 1,000 Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) Months 7.5 (12) 6 15 (24) 12 22.5 (36) 18 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 30 (48) 24 37.5 (60) 30 45 (72) 36 52.5 (84) 42 60 (96) 48 I* [R] I* I* See NOTE (2)* See NOTE (3) R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R* R R [R] See NOTE (4) [R] I* I*

]: At the mileage intervals only

Emission control system maintenance

Drive belts Air cleaner filter EVAP vapor lines Fuel lines Fuel filter Engine coolant Engine oil Engine oil filter (Use part No. 15208-31U00 or equivalent) Spark plugs (Use PLATINUM-TIPPED type) Intake & exhaust valve clearance See NOTE (1)

NOTE: (1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. (2) If vehicle is operated under extremely adverse weather conditions or in areas where ambient temperatures are either extremely low or extremely high, the filters might become clogged. In such an event, replace them immediately. (3) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. (4) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance. (5) Maintenance items and intervals with * are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

9-8

Maintenance

Abbreviations: I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. MAINTENANCE OPERATION Miles x 1,000 Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) Months 7.5 (12) 6 15 (24) 12 22.5 (36) 18 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 30 (48) 24 37.5 (60) 30 45 (72) 36 52.5 (84) 42 60 (96) 48

Chassis and body maintenance

Brake lines & cables Brake pads & discs Manual & automatic transaxle oil Steering gear linkage, axle & suspension parts Exhaust system Front drive shaft boots Supplemental air bag system See NOTE (1). I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

NOTE: (1) Inspect the supplemental air bag system 10 years after the date of manufacture noted on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label.

Maintenance

9-9

EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following items with * is found in the 8. Do-ityourself section.

Fuel filter: If the vehicle is operated under extremely adverse weather conditions or in areas where ambient temperatures are either extremely low or extremely high, the filter might become clogged. In such an event, replace the filter immediately. Engine coolant*: Drain and flush the cooling system. Engine oil & oil filter*: Under normal driving conditions, the engine oil and oil filter should be replaced in accordance with the maintenance schedule. However, under severe driving conditions, they may have to be replaced more frequently. Spark plugs*: Replace with new plugs having the correct heat range. Intake & exhaust valve clearance: Check the valve clearance if valve noise increases.

Brake pads & discs: Check these and the other neighboring brake components for wear, deterioration and leaks. Under severe driving conditions, they may have to be inspected more frequently. Manual & automatic transaxle fluid*: Check the fluid level and visually inspect for signs of leakage. Under severe driving conditions, the oil should be replaced at the specified interval. Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts, and drive shaft boots: Check for damage, looseness and leakage of oil or grease. Under severe driving conditions, more frequent inspection should be performed. Exhaust system: Visually check the exhaust pipes, muffler, and hangers for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, chafing, abrasion, deterioration, etc. Under severe driving conditions, inspection should be performed more frequently. Supplemental air bag, and supplemental side air bag (if so equipped) systems: Maintenance for the supplemental air bags or supplemental side air bags should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer.

Emission control system maintenance

Drive belts*: Check drive belts for wear, fraying or cracking and also for proper tension. Replace the drive belts if found damaged. Air cleaner filter: Under normal driving conditions, the air cleaner filter should be replaced in accordance with the maintenance schedule. However, driving the vehicle in dusty areas may cause more rapid clogging of the element. Consequently, the element may have to be replaced more frequently. EVAP vapor lines: Check EVAP vapor lines and connections for failure or looseness. If leaks are found, replace them. Fuel lines: Check the fuel hoses, piping and connections for leaks, looseness or deterioration. Replace any parts if they are damaged.

Chassis and body maintenance

Brake lines & cables: Check the brake lines and hoses (including brake booster vacuum hoses, connections & check valve) and parking brake cables for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, chafing, abrasion, deterioration, etc.

9-10

Maintenance

MEMO

Maintenance

9-11

MEMO

9-12

Maintenance

10 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants .......................................................... 10-2 Specifications .......................................................... 10-7 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country ....................................... 10-9 Vehicle identification ............................................... 10-9 Installing front license plate................................... 10-11 Vehicle loading information ................................... 10-12 Towing a trailer ..................................................... 10-13 Uniform tire quality grading ................................... 10-17 Emission control system warranty ........................ 10-18 Reporting safety defects (US only) ....................... 10-18 Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test (US only)................................................ 10-18

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure instructed in the 8. Do-it-yourself section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (Approximate) US measure Fuel Engine oil (Refill) With oil filter Without oil filter Cooling system With reservoir Reservoir Manual transmission gear oil Automatic transmission fluid Power steering fluid Brake and clutch fluid Multi-purpose grease Air conditioning system refrigerant Air conditioning system lubricants Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in the 8. Do-ityourself section. 9 qt 7/8 qt 7-1/2 qt 3/4 qt 8.5 0.8 Anti-freeze coolant (Ethylene glycol base) API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 80W-90 only Nissan Matic D (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Genuine Nissan Automatic Transmission Fluid (Canada).*3 Type DEXRONTMIII or equivalent Genuine Nissan Brake Fluid*4 or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116) NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base) HFC-134a (R-134a) Nissan A/C System Oil Type S or exact equivalent 4-1/4 qt 3-7/8 qt 3-1/2 qt 3-1/4 qt 4.0 3.7 API SG or SH and Energy Conserving II*1, *2 API Certification Mark*1, *2 18-1/2 gal Imp measure 15-3/8 gal 70 Liter Recommended specifications Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (RON 96)

FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96) If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Research octane number 91) can be used. However, for maximum vehicle performance, the use of unleaded premium gasoline is recommended.

Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control devices and systems, and could also affect the warranty coverage. Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, since this will damage the three-way catalyst.

*1: For additional information, see later in Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants for engine oil and oil filter recommendation. *2: For additional information, see later in Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants for recommended SAE viscosity number. *3: DexronTMIII/MerconTM or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental United States and Alaska contact a NISSAN dealer for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of DexronTMIII/MerconTM automatic transmission fluid. *4: Available in mainland US through your NISSAN.

Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions.

10-2

Technical and consumer information

NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager. If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage. The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline. If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a methanol blend, is used, it should contain no more than 10% oxygenate. (MTBE may, however, be added up to 15%.) If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should

also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles. If any undesirable driveability problems such as engine stalling and hard hot starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE. Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage.

Octane rating tips

In most parts of North America, you should use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 or 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number. However, you may use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating as low as 85 AKI number in these high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)] such as: Colorado, Montana, New Mexico, Utah, Wyoming, northeastern Nevada, southern Idaho, western South Dakota, western Nebraska, and that part of Texas which is directly south of New Mexico. Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than stated above can cause persistent, heavy spark knock. (Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, have your dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible. Incorrect ignition timing will result in knocking, after-run or overheating. This in turn may cause excessive fuel consumption or damage
Technical and consumer information

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of any fuel additives (i.e. fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvent or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine.

10-3

to the engine. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked at a NISSAN dealer or other competent service facility. However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is no cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load.

STI0077

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATION Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct quality, and viscosity oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. NISSAN recommends the use of a low friction oil (energy conserving oil) in order to improve fuel economy and conserve energy. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage. Only those engine oils with the American Petroleum Institute (API) certification mark on the

front of the container should be used. This type of oil supersedes the existing API SG or SH and Energy Conserving II categories. If you cannot find engine oil with the certification mark, an API SG or SH and Energy Conserving II oil with API service symbol may be used. An oil with a single designation SG or SH, or in combination with other categories (for example, SG/CC or SG/CD) may also be used if one with the API certification mark cannot be found. Mineral based or synthetic type oils may be used in your NISSAN vehicle. These oils must however, meet the API quality and SAE vis-

10-4

Technical and consumer information

cosity ratings specified for your vehicle. Do not mix mineral based and synthetic type oils in the engine at the same time.

Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Oil and filter other than the specified quality, or oil and filter change intervals longer than recommended could reduce engine life. Damage to engines caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the new NISSAN vehicle warranties. Your engine was filled with a high quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle. Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes. repeated short distance driving at cold outside temperatures, driving in dusty conditions, extensive idling, towing a trailer.

Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed. Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important that the engine oil viscosity be selected based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. The recommended SAE viscosity number chart shows the recommended oil viscosities for the expected ambient temperatures. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new vehicle is equipped with a highquality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use the genuine oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in change intervals.

Technical and consumer information

10-5

RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY NUMBER

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioning system in this NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lubricant, Nissan A/C System Oil Type S or the exact equivalents.

your air conditioning system.

Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will cause severe damage and you will need to replace your vehicles entire air conditioning system. The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your NISSAN vehicle will not harm the earths ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earths atmosphere, certain governmental regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioning system service. Your NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioning system refrigerant. Contact your NISSAN dealer when servicing

TI1028-B

SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all ambient temperatures. SAE 10W-30 viscosity oil may be used if the ambient temperature is above 0F (18C).

10-6

Technical and consumer information

SPECIFICATIONS ENGINE
Model Type Cylinder arrangement Bore x Stroke Displacement Firing order Idle speed Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) CO percentage at idle speed Spark plug Spark plug gap Camshaft operation Alternator belt size Width x Length in (mm) 0.8409 x 43.11 (21.36 x 1,095) rpm degree/rpm [No air] % Standard Service option in (mm) Timing chain PFR5G-11 PFR4G-11, PFR6G-11 See the emission control label on the underside of the hood. in (mm) cu in (cm3) VQ30DE Gasoline, 4-cycle 6-cylinder, V-slanted at 60 3.66 x 2.886 (93.0 x 73.3) 182.33 (2,988) 1-2-3-4-5-6*

The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

TI1009-A

Technical and consumer information

10-7

TIRES AND WHEELS

Steel Offset Road wheel Aluminum Offset Conventional Tire size Spare *1: For CANADA *2: For US *3: For models with Viscous LSD Conventional*1 T125/70D16*2 T125/90D16*2, *3 15 x 6JJ in (mm) 1.57 (40) 15 x 6.5JJ 16 x 6.5JJ in (mm) 1.77 (45) P205/65R15 92S P205/65R15 92H P215/55R16 91H

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Sedan Overall length Overall width Overall height Front tread Rear tread Wheelbase Gross vehicle weight rating Gross axle weight rating Front Rear lb (kg) lb (kg) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) lb (kg) See the F.M.V.S.S. certification label on the drivers side lock pillar. 189.4 (4,810) 69.7 (1,770) 55.7 (1,415) 60.2 (1,530)*1 59.8 (1,520)*2 59.4 (1,510)*1 59.1 (1,500)*2 106.3 (2,700)

*1: For models with steel wheels *2: For models with aluminum wheels

10-8

Technical and consumer information

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

When planning to travel in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicles engine. Using fuel with too low an octane rating may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded engine gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available. When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations. The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ. When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation, and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

STI0038

STI0040

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number plate is attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (Chassis number)

The number is stamped as shown.

Technical and consumer information

10-9

STI0047

STI0041

STI0042

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (F.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is attached as shown.

10-10

Technical and consumer information

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

STI0043

STI0044

TIRE PLACARD
The cold tire pressure is shown on the tire placard affixed to the center console lid.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is affixed inside of the hood as shown.

STI0104

Use the following steps to mount the license plate: 1. Mount the license plate bracket with 0.24 in (6 mm) diameter by 0.55 in (14 mm) long tapping screws.
Technical and consumer information

10-11

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

2. Mount the license plate with the 0.24 in (6 mm) bolts. The bolts used to fasten the license plate to the bracket are not included in the bracket assembly. maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle.

DETERMINING VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

The load capacity of this vehicle is determined by weight, not by available cargo space. For example, a luggage rack, bike carrier, cartop carrier or similar equipment does not increase load carrying capacity of your vehicle. To determine vehicle load capacity:

TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle: Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not include passengers and cargo. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) -

Vehicle weight can be determined by using a commercial-grade scale, found at places such as a truck stop, gravel quarry, grain elevator, or a scrap metal recycling facility. 1. Determine the curb weight of your vehicle. 2. Compare the curb weight amount to the GVWR specified for your vehicle to determine how much more weight your vehicle can carry. 3. After loading (cargo and passengers), reweigh your vehicle to determine if either GVWR or GAWR for your vehicle is exceeded. If GVWR is exceeded, remove

10-12

Technical and consumer information

TOWING A TRAILER
cargo as necessary. If either the front or rear GAWR is exceeded, shift the load or remove cargo as necessary. your vehicle. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by your warranty.

LOADING TIPS
The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label. Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.

Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury. Overloading can shorten the life of

TI1011M

Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember that towing a trailer will place additional loads on your vehicles engine, drive train, steering, braking and other systems. Information on trailer towing ability and the special equipment required should be obtained from your Nissan dealer. He can obtain a Nissan Trailer Towing Guide for you.

Technical and consumer information

10-13

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed 1,000 lb (454 kg). The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight. Towing loads greater than 1,000 lb (454 kg) or using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART Unit: lb (kg) MAXIMUM TOWING LOAD MAXIMUM TONGUE LOAD 1,000 (454) 110 (49)

TOWING SAFETY Trailer hitch

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer. Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle, to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

Vehicle damage and/or personal injury resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by NISSAN warranties. Information on trailer towing and required towing equipment should be obtained from dealers who specialize in providing trailers or other towing equipment.

TI1012M

Maximum gross vehicle weight/ maximum gross axle weight

The gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle must not exceed. GVWR shown on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label. The gross vehicle weight equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. In addition, front or rear gross axle weight must not exceed GAWR shown on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label.

Do not use axle-mounted hitches. The hitch should not be attached to or affect the operation of the impactabsorbing bumper Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, etc. when the hitch is installed.

Tongue load
Keep the tongue load between 9 and 11% of the total trailer load. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load.

10-14

Technical and consumer information

 To reduce the possibility of additional damage if your vehicle is struck from the rear, where practical, remove the hitch when not in use. Remove the receiver when not in use. After the hitch is removed, seal the bolt holes to prevent exhaust fumes, water or dust from entering the passenger compartment. Regularly check that all hitch mounting bolts are securely mounted.

leave enough slack in the chain to permit turning corners.

sible causes of either condition. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shifts while driving. Be certain your rear view mirrors conform to all federal, state or local regulations. If not, install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle.

Trailer lights
Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or local regulations. When wiring the vehicle for towing, connect the stop and tail light pickup into the vehicle electrical circuit at a point between the sensor and stop light or light switch.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicles behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic. Steering stability, and braking performance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.

Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system, make sure it conforms to federal and/or local regulations and that it is properly installed.

Tire pressures
When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the tire placard (located on the inside of the center console lid.) Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturers specifications.

Never connect a trailer brake system directly to the vehicle brake system.

Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops. Avoid sharp turns or lane changes. Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed. Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not recommended; however, if you must do so, and if your vehicle is equipped with automatic transmission, first block the wheels and apply the parking brake, and
Technical and consumer information

Pre-towing tips
Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded and/or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down condition; check for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other pos-

Safety chain
Always use a suitable chain between your vehicle and the trailer. The chain should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to

10-15

then move the transmission selector lever into the P (Park) position. If you move the selector lever to the P (Park) position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake, transmission damage could occur. When going down a hill, shift into a lower gear and use the engine braking effect. When ascending a long grade, downshift the transmission to a lower gear and reduce speed to reduce chances of engine overloading and/or overheating. If the engine coolant rises to an extremely high temperature when the air conditioning system is on, turn off the air conditioner. Coolant heat can be additionally vented by opening the windows, switching the fan control to high and setting the temperature control to the HOT position. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances. Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km). Have your vehicle serviced more often than at intervals specified in the recommended maintenance schedule. When making a turn, your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your

vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make a larger than normal turning radius during the turn. Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly causing vehicle sway. When being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect vehicle handling. If swaying does occur, firmly grip the steering wheel, steer straight ahead, and immediately (but gradually) reduce vehicle speed. This combination will help stabilize the vehicle. Never increase speed. Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing while towing a trailer requires considerably more distance than normal passing. Remember the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes. To maintain engine braking efficiency and electrical charging performance, do not use fifth gear (manual transmission) or overdrive (automatic transmission). Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency.

When towing a trailer, change oil in the transmission more frequently. See Periodic maintenance schedules in the 9. Maintenance section.

10-16

Technical and consumer information

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear
Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on tire wear rate when tested under controlled conditions on specified government test courses. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1-1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. However, relative tire performance depends on actual driving conditions, and may vary significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

The traction grade assigned to your vehicle tires is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C
Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C. They represent a tires resistance to heat build-up, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause tire material to degenerate, reducing tire life. Excessive temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a performance level which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades A and B represent higher levels of performance on laboratory test wheels than the minimum required by law.

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Technical and consumer information

10-17

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY

Your NISSAN is covered by the following emission warranties. For US: Emission Defects Warranty Emissions Performance Warranty For Canada: Emission Control System Warranty Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information and Maintenance Log Booklet that comes with your NISSAN. If you did not receive a Warranty Information and Maintenance Log Booklet, or it has become lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to: Nissan Motor Corporation U.S.A. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 191 Gardena. CA. 90248-0191 Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US only) If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, tollfree, at 1-800-NISSAN-1. In Hawaii call (808) 836-0888.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US only)

Due to legal requirements in some states/ areas, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the ready condition for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system. The vehicle is set to the ready condition when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle. If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a not ready condition. Before taking the I/M test, drive the vehicle through the following pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. If you cannot or do not want to perform the driving pattern, an NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.

Always drive the vehicle in a safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws. 1. Start the engine when the engine coolant temperature gauge needle points to C. Allow the engine to idle until the gauge needle points between the C and H (normal operating temperature).

10-18

Technical and consumer information

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h), then quickly release the accelerator pedal completely and keep it released for at least 6 seconds. 3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of 53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96 km/h) for at least 5 minutes. 4. Stop the vehicle. 5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h) and maintain the speed for 20 seconds. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 3 times. 7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h) and maintain the speed for at least 3 minutes. 8. Stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. 9. Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least one more time. If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeat the preceding step. Any safe driving mode is acceptable between steps. Do not stop the engine until step 7 is completed.

Technical and consumer information

10-19

bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you. Also available are Genuine NISSAN Service and Owners Manuals for older Nissan models.

A Genuine Nissan Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment procedures, this manual is the same one used by the factory trained technicians working at your Nissan dealership. Also available are Genuine NISSAN Owners Manuals. For current pricing and availability of a Genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Genuine NISSAN Owners Manual, contact:

In the U.S.A.: See your NISSAN dealer or contact: Dyment Distribution Services 20770 Westwood Dr. Strongsville OH 44136 In a hurry? Call 1-800-247-5321 and charge your purchase to Visa/Master Card. In Canada: To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owners Manual please contact your nearest NISSAN Dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN Dealer in your area call the Nissan Satisfaction Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a

10-20

Technical and consumer information

11 Index
A ABS ................................................................. 5-18 Adjusting the time ........................................... 2-25 Adjustment Front manual seat ....................................... 1-2 Front power seat ......................................... 1-4 Head restraint.............................................. 1-5 Shoulder belt ............................................. 1-22 Air bag System....................................................... 1-12 System, Side ............................................. 1-13 Warning label ............................................ 1-15 Warning light ...................................... 1-15, 2-8 Air cleaner....................................................... 8-18 Air conditioner Automatic..................................................... 4-9 Manual......................................................... 4-3 Operation, Manual....................................... 4-5 Servicing.................................................... 4-12 Specification label ................................... 10-11 Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations............................. 10-6 Aluminum alloy wheels, Cleaning..................... 7-4 Anchor point location, Top strap..................... 1-35 Antenna........................................................... 4-25 Anti-freeze, Cold weather ............................... 5-19 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)........................ 5-18 Appearance care Exterior ........................................................ 7-2 Interior ......................................................... 7-4 Armrest ............................................................. 1-6 Ashtray ............................................................ 2-19 Audio system .................................................. 4-12 Automatic Operation, Air conditioner ......................... 4-10 Sunroof, Operation .................................... 2-24 Transaxle fluid ........................................... 8-10 Transmission, Driving.................................. 5-7 Avoiding collision and rollover .......................... 5-3 B Battery Cold weather ............................................. 5-19 Maintenance .............................................. 8-14 Replacement, Multi-remote control ............. 3-7 Before starting the engine ................................ 5-6 Belt Drive .......................................................... 8-15 Extender, Seat........................................... 1-25 Height adjustment, Shoulder..................... 1-22 Maintenance, Seat .................................... 1-25 Seat ........................................................... 1-17 Brake Booster ...................................................... 8-21 Fluid........................................................... 8-12 Parking ...................................................... 5-12 Pedal ......................................................... 8-20 System....................................................... 5-17 Warning light ............................................... 2-8 Break-in schedule ........................................... 5-14 Bulb Checking...................................................... 2-7 Indicator....................................................... 2-9 Replacement ............................................. 8-25 Warning light ............................................... 2-7 Buzzer ............................................................. 2-11 C Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricant .. 10-2 Car phone ....................................................... 4-25 Carbon monoxide, Exhaust gas ....................... 5-2 Cassette tape player operation....................... 4-15 Cassette tape player operation, with compact disc (CD) player type ............................................. 4-21 Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst............ 5-2 CB radio or car phone .................................... 4-25 Ceiling light ..................................................... 2-25 Certification label, F.M.V.S.S........................ 10-10 Chain, Tire ...................................................... 8-33 Changing A flat tire ...................................................... 6-2 Engine coolant............................................. 8-6 Engine oil..................................................... 8-9 Engine oil filter........................................... 8-10

Tire and wheel........................................... 8-33 Checking Brake pedal ............................................... 8-20 Bulb ............................................................. 2-7 Engine coolant level .................................... 8-5 Engine oil level ............................................ 8-8 Parking brake ............................................ 8-20 Seat belt operation, Three-point ............... 1-21 Child restraint.................................................. 1-25 Installation on front seat............................ 1-35 Installation on rear seat center ................. 1-27 Installation on rear seat outboard ............. 1-30 Precaution ................................................. 1-25 Top strap ................................................... 1-34 Child safety Rear door lock............................................. 3-4 Seat belt .................................................... 1-18 Chrome parts, Cleaning.................................... 7-4 Cigarette lighter and ashtray .......................... 2-19 Circuit breaker, Fusible link ............................ 8-22 Cleaner, Air ..................................................... 8-18 Cleaning Exterior ........................................................ 7-2 Interior ......................................................... 7-4 Clock ............................................................... 2-25 Adjusting.................................................... 2-25 Clutch Fluid........................................................... 8-12 Pedal ......................................................... 8-21 Cold weather driving ....................................... 5-19 Compact disc (CD) Player operation ........................................ 4-23 Player operation, with cassette player type............................................................ 4-23

Console box .................................................... 2-22 Controls, Heater and manual air conditioner.... 4-3 Cooling system, Engine .................................... 8-5 Corrosion protection ......................................... 7-5 Cruise control.................................................. 5-12 Operation................................................... 5-13 Cup holder ...................................................... 2-21 D Defogger switch, Rear window and outside mirror............................................................... 2-14 Dimensions and weights, Vehicle................... 10-8 Door .................................................................. 3-2 Door open warning light ................................... 2-8 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ................... 5-3 Drive belt......................................................... 8-15 Driving Cold weather ............................................. 5-19 On snow or ice .......................................... 5-20 Precaution ................................................... 5-2 The vehicle .................................................. 5-7 Drugs ................................................................ 5-3 E Economy, Fuel ................................................ 5-15 Emission control Information label...................................... 10-10 System warranty...................................... 10-18 Engine Block heater .............................................. 5-21 Compartment check location....................... 8-4 Coolant heater........................................... 5-21

Coolant temperature gauge ........................ 2-5 Cooling system............................................ 8-5 Oil ................................................................ 8-8 Oil and oil filter recommendation .............. 10-4 Overheat...................................................... 6-9 Serial number .......................................... 10-10 Specifications ............................................ 10-7 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ...................... 5-2 Explanation of maintenance items .......... 9-3, 9-10 Exterior and interior light, Replacement ......... 8-26 F F.M.V.S.S. certification label......................... 10-10 Fastening the seat belt Three-point ................................................ 1-20 Two-point................................................... 1-23 Filling, Fuel filler lid ......................................... 3-11 Filter, Air ......................................................... 8-18 Flasher switch, Hazard warning ..................... 2-17 Flat tire .............................................................. 6-2 Floor mats, Cleaning ........................................ 7-4 Fluid Automatic transaxle................................... 8-10 Brake ......................................................... 8-12 Engine ......................................................... 8-8 Power steering .......................................... 8-12 Window washer ......................................... 8-13 Fog light switch ............................................... 2-16 Front Fog light switch ......................................... 2-16 Interior light................................................ 2-26 Manual seat adjustment .............................. 1-2 Power seat adjustment................................ 1-4

11-2

Fuel Economy.................................................... 5-15 Filler cap.................................................... 3-12 Filler lid ...................................................... 3-11 Gauge.......................................................... 2-5 Recommendation ...................................... 10-2 Fuse ................................................................ 8-21 Fusible link ...................................................... 8-22 G Garage door opener, Integrated HomeLink ...................................................... 2-27 Gas cap, Fuel filler ......................................... 3-12 Gas economy, Fuel ........................................ 5-15 Gauge ............................................................... 2-3 Engine coolant temperature ........................ 2-5 Fuel.............................................................. 2-5 Speedometer and odometer ....................... 2-4 Tachometer ................................................. 2-4 General maintenance ................................ 9-2, 9-3 Glass, Cleaning ................................................ 7-3 Glove box........................................................ 2-22 H Hazard warning flasher switch........................ 2-17 Head restraint adjustment ................................ 1-5 Headlamp, Replacement ................................ 8-25 Headlight Replacement ............................................. 8-25 Switch ........................................................ 2-15 Heated seat .................................................... 2-18

Heater and air conditioner (Manual) ...................................................... 4-3 (Automatic) .................................................. 4-9 Heater operation Manual air conditioner................................. 4-4 HomeLink ...................................................... 2-27 Hood ................................................................. 3-9 Horn ................................................................ 2-17 How to stop alarm, Theft warning .................. 2-13 How to use multi-remote control system .......... 3-6 I Identification, Vehicle ...................................... 10-9 Ignition switch ................................................... 5-4 Indicator light .................................................... 2-9 Infants and small children, Seat belt .............. 1-19 Information label, Emission........................... 10-10 Injured persons, Seat belt .............................. 1-19 Inside mirror .................................................... 3-13 Installing front license plate .......................... 10-11 Instrument panel ............................................... 2-2 Integrated HomeLink transmitter .................. 2-27 Interior light ..................................................... 2-25 Replacement ............................................. 8-26 J Jump starting .................................................... 6-7 K Key.................................................................... 3-2 Position, Ignition switch............................... 5-6

Key operation, Trunk lid ................................. 3-11 Keyless entry, Multi-remote control .................. 3-5 L Label, Air bag warning.................................... 1-15 Lamp, Replacement........................................ 8-24 Larger children, Seat belt ............................... 1-19 License plate, Installing ................................ 10-11 Light Air bag warning ......................................... 1-15 Front fog light switch ................................. 2-16 Headlight replacement .............................. 8-25 Headlight switch ........................................ 2-15 Indicator....................................................... 2-9 Interior ....................................................... 2-25 Personal .................................................... 2-26 Replacement ............................................. 8-25 Trunk ......................................................... 2-27 Vanity......................................................... 2-26 Warning ....................................................... 2-7 Loading information, Vehicle ........................ 10-12 Loading tips .................................................. 10-13 Lock, Door ........................................................ 3-2 Locking with Inside lock knob .......................................... 3-3 Key .............................................................. 3-3 Power door lock switch ............................... 3-4 Low fuel warning light ....................................... 2-9 Lubricant, Capacities and recommended ....... 10-2

11-3

M Maintenance General ................................................ 9-2, 9-3 Item .................................................... 9-3, 9-10 Periodic........................................................ 9-5 Precaution ................................................... 8-2 Seat belt .................................................... 1-25 Manual Front seat adjustment ................................. 1-2 Operation, Air conditioner ......................... 4-11 Transmission, Driving................................ 5-10 Meter And gauge ................................................... 2-3 Speedometer and odometer ....................... 2-4 Tachometer ................................................. 2-4 Mirror............................................................... 3-13 Inside ......................................................... 3-13 Outside ...................................................... 3-14 Multi-remote control system.............................. 3-5 N New vehicle, Break-in ..................................... 5-14 O Odometer .......................................................... 2-4 Oil Automatic transaxle................................... 8-10 Brake ......................................................... 8-12 Engine ......................................................... 8-8 Filter recommendation............................... 10-4 Power steering .......................................... 8-12

Opener operation Fuel filler lid ............................................... 3-11 Trunk lid..................................................... 3-10 Operating tips, Automatic air conditioner........................................ 4-5, 4-6, 4-11 Operation, Cruise control................................ 5-13 Outside mirror ................................................. 3-14 Overheat ........................................................... 6-9 P Parking Brake ......................................................... 5-12 Brake and brake pedal.............................. 8-20 Parking/parking on hills .................................. 5-16 Pedal Brake ......................................................... 8-20 Clutch ........................................................ 8-21 Periodic maintenance ....................................... 9-5 Personal light .................................................. 2-26 Power Front seat adjustment ................................. 1-4 Seat operating tips ...................................... 1-4 Steering ..................................................... 5-17 Steering fluid ............................................. 8-12 Window...................................................... 2-22 Precaution Maintenance ................................................ 8-2 On child restraint ....................................... 1-25 On cruise control ....................................... 5-13 On seat belt usage.................................... 1-17 On supplemental restraint system .............. 1-7 When starting and driving ........................... 5-2 Pregnant women, Seat belt ............................ 1-19

Push starting ..................................................... 6-9 R Radio............................................................... 4-12 With cassette player.................................. 4-13 With cassette player and compact disc (CD) player......................................................... 4-19 Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test (US only) ....................................................... 10-18 Rear Door lock, Child safety ................................ 3-4 Window and outside mirror defogger switch......................................................... 2-14 Recommended Fuel/lubricant ............................................. 10-2 SAE viscosity number ............................... 10-6 Recovery, Freeing a stuck vehicle ................. 6-12 Refrigerant, air conditioning............................ 10-6 Registering your vehicle in another country ... 10-9 Release Hood ............................................................ 3-9 Trunk lid....................................................... 3-9 Remote keyless entry, Multi-remote control ............................................................... 3-5 Reporting safety defects (US only)............... 10-18 Restraint, Child ............................................... 1-25 Rollover ............................................................. 5-3 Rotation, Tire .................................................. 8-33 S Safety Belt ............................................................ 1-17

11-4

Child seat belt ........................................... 1-18 Defects, Reporting................................... 10-18 Towing ..................................................... 10-14 Seat................................................................... 1-2 Heated ....................................................... 2-18 Seat adjustment Front manual ............................................... 1-2 Front power ................................................. 1-4 Seat belt.......................................................... 1-17 Cleaning ...................................................... 7-5 Extender .................................................... 1-25 Maintenance .............................................. 1-25 Operation, Three-point .............................. 1-21 Precautions................................................ 1-17 Warning light and buzzer ............................ 2-8 With retractor, Three-point ........................ 1-20 Without retractor, Two-point...................... 1-23 Selecting correct set of seat belt .................... 1-23 Servicing air conditioner ................................. 4-12 Setting, Clock.................................................. 2-25 Shoulder belt height adjustment (For front seats) .............................................................. 1-22 Side air bag system ........................................ 1-13 Sound system, Audio system ......................... 4-12 Sound, Buzzer ................................................ 2-11 Spark plug....................................................... 8-16 Specifications .................................................. 10-7 Speedometer and odometer ............................. 2-4 Starting Automatic transmission ............................... 5-4 Jump............................................................ 6-7 Manual transmission ................................... 5-5 Precaution ................................................... 5-2 Push ............................................................ 6-9

The engine .................................................. 5-6 Steering Power ........................................................ 5-17 Wheel ........................................................ 3-13 Storage ........................................................... 2-19 Stuck, Vehicle recovery .................................. 6-12 Sun shade....................................................... 2-24 Sunroof ........................................................... 2-24 Supplemental Air bag system .......................................... 1-12 Air bag warning label ................................ 1-15 Air bag warning light .......................... 1-15, 2-8 Restraint system.......................................... 1-7 Restraint system, Precautions .................... 1-7 Side air bag system .................................. 1-13 Switch Front fog light ............................................ 2-16 Hazard warning ......................................... 2-17 Headlight ................................................... 2-15 Ignition ......................................................... 5-4 Rear window and outside mirror defoggor .................................................... 2-14 Turn signal................................................. 2-16 T Tachometer ....................................................... 2-4 Temperature gauge, Engine coolant ................ 2-5 Theft warning .................................................. 2-11 Three way catalyst............................................ 5-2 Three-point type seat belt with retractor......... 1-20 Tire.................................................................. 8-31 Chain ......................................................... 8-33 Changing ................................................... 8-33

Equipment, Cold weather.......................... 5-20 Flat............................................................... 6-2 Placard .................................................... 10-11 Pressure .................................................... 8-31 Quality grading ........................................ 10-17 Rotation ..................................................... 8-33 Type........................................................... 8-32 Tires, Specifications........................................ 10-8 Top strap child restraint .................................. 1-34 Towing A trailer .................................................... 10-13 Safety ...................................................... 10-14 Your vehicle............................................... 6-10 Trailer, Towing .............................................. 10-13 Transmitter Integrated HomeLink ............................... 2-27 Multi-remote control..................................... 3-5 Traveling or registering your vehicle in another country ............................................................ 10-9 Tray................................................................. 2-19 Trunk Lid................................................................ 3-9 Light........................................................... 2-27 Turn signal switch ........................................... 2-16 Two-point type seat belt without retractor (Center of rear seat) .................................................... 1-23 Type of tire...................................................... 8-32 U Underbody, Cleaning ........................................ 7-3 Unfastening the seat belt Three-point ................................................ 1-21 Two-point................................................... 1-24

11-5

Uniform tire quality grading........................... 10-17 V Vanity mirror light............................................ 2-26 Vehicle Identification .............................................. 10-9 Loading information................................. 10-12 Ventilator ........................................................... 4-2 Viscosity number ............................................ 10-6 W Warning Buzzer, Seat belt......................................... 2-8 Flasher switch ........................................... 2-17 Label, Air bag ............................................ 1-15 Light............................................................. 2-7 Light, Air bag...................................... 1-15, 2-8 Light, Brake ................................................. 2-8 Light, Door open.......................................... 2-8 Light, Low fuel ............................................. 2-9 Light, Seat belt ............................................ 2-8 Theft .......................................................... 2-11 Warranty, Emission control........................... 10-18 Washer switch, Windshield............................. 2-13 Washing ............................................................ 7-2 Waxing .............................................................. 7-2 Weights, Vehicle ............................................. 10-8 Wheel .............................................................. 8-31 Wheels, Specifications.................................... 10-8 Window ........................................................... 2-22 Power ........................................................ 2-22 Washer fluid .............................................. 8-13

Windshield wiper and washer switch.............. Windshield wiper blade................................... Winter equipment............................................ Wiper Blade ......................................................... Windshield .................................................

2-13 8-18 5-20 8-18 2-13

11-6

GAS STATION INFORMATION FUEL RECOMMENDATION:

Unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96). If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Research octane number 91) can be used. However, for maximum vehicle performance, the use of unleaded premium gasoline is recommended.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

API SG or SH and Energy Conserving II API certification mark SAE 10W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for ambient temperatures above 0F (18C). See Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the 10. Technical and consumer information section for engine oil and oil filter recommendation.

COLD TIRE PRESSURES:

See tire placard affixed to the center console lid.

Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control devices and systems, and could also affect the warranty coverage. Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, since this will damage the three way catalyst. For additional information, see Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the 10. Technical and consumer information section.

NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURES RECOMMENDATION:

During the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of vehicle use, follow the recommendations outlined in the Break-in schedule Information found in the 5. Starting and driving section of this Owners Manual. Follow these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life.

Hood release 3-9 Windshield washer fluid 8-13

Engine coolant 8-5 Meters and gauges 2-3 Engine oil 8-8

Seat 1-2 Trunk release (Type B) 3-9 Trunk release (Type A) 3-9 Seat belt 1-17

Audio system 4-12 Air conditioner 4-3

Key 3-2

Fuel 3-11, 10-2

Spare tire 6-2, 8-31

STI0046

Foreword
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence. It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control. This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle. A separate Warranty Information and Maintenance Log Booklet explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle and vehicle maintenance schedules. Additionally, a separate Customer Care/Lemon Law Booklet will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, as well as clarify your rights under your states lemon law. Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have any questions, he will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to him.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers! Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Always observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions. Always use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat. Always provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle. Always review this Owners Manual for important safety information. This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modification may not be covered under NISSAN warranties.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for all options available on this model. Therefore, you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle. All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or design at any time without notice.

READ FIRST THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Before driving your vehicle please read your Owners Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways:

This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.
SIC0697

This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means Do not do this or Do not let this happen.

1998 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD. TOKYO, JAPAN

All rights reserved. No part of this Owners Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.

Welcome To The World Of NISSAN

transportation services to the supply of lubricants, parts and accessories. NISSAN pioneered the use of electronics and computers in automobiles, and has led the industry in improving both performance and fuel efficiency through new engine designs and the use of synthetic materials to reduce vehicle weight. The company has also developed ways to build quality into its vehicles at each stage of the production process, both through extensive use of automation and most importantly through an awareness that people are the central element in quality control. From the time the parts arrived from our suppliers until you took delivery of your new Nissan, dozens of checks were made to ensure that only the best job was being done in producing and delivering your vehicle. NISSAN also takes great care to ensure that when you take your NISSAN to your dealer for maintenance, the service technician will perform his work according to the quality standards that have been established by the factory. Safety has also been built into your NISSAN. As you know, seat belts are an integral part of the safety systems that will help protect you and your passengers in the event of a sudden stop or an accident. We urge you to use the seat belts every time you drive the vehicle. The NISSAN story of growth and achievement reflects our major goal: to provide you, our customer, with a vehicle that is built with quality and craftsmanship a product that we can be proud to build and you can be proud to own.

AFW0001

Your new NISSAN is the result of our dedication to produce the finest in safe, reliable and economical transportation. Your vehicle is the product of a successful worldwide company that manufactures cars and trucks in over 17 countries and distributes them in 170 nations. NISSAN vehicles are designed and manufactured by Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. which was founded in Tokyo, Japan in 1933, and NISSAN affiliates world wide, collectively growing to become the fifth largest automaker in the world. In addition to cars and trucks, NISSAN also makes textile machinery, fork-lift trucks, marine engines, boats and other products. NISSAN has made a substantial and growing investment in North America, starting with the opening of Nissan Motor Corporation U.S.A. in 1960 and continuing with the production of some

cars and trucks at one of the worlds most modern manufacturing facilities, Nissan Motor Manufacturing Corporation U.S.A. in Smyrna, Tennessee, vehicle styling at Nissan Design International in San Diego, California, and engineering at Nissan Research and Development in Farmington Hills, Michigan. NISSAN and its dealers indirectly employ about 60,000 Americans. NISSAN is also a substantial contributor to the Canadian economy. Nissan Canada Inc., its suppliers and over 150 dealers employ approximately 4,500 people. These include company employees and the staffs of NISSAN dealers all across Canada. In addition, many Canadians work for companies that supply NISSAN and NISSAN dealers with materials and services ranging from operation of port facilities and

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

NISSAN CARES ... Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions, please contact our (NISSANs) Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number:

For U.S. mainland customers 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261) For Hawaii customers (808) 836-0888 (Oahu Number) For Canada customers 1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information: Your name, address, and telephone number Vehicle identification number (on dashboard) Date of purchase Current odometer reading Your NISSAN dealers name Your comments or questions OR

You can write to NISSAN with the information on the left at: For U.S. mainland and Alaska customers Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 191 Gardena, California 90248-0191 For Hawaii customers Nissan Motor Corporation in Hawaii 2880 Kilihau St. Honolulu, Hawaii 96819 For Canada customers Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

Table of Contents

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems Instruments and controls Pre-driving checks and adjustments Heater, air conditioner and audio systems Starting and driving In case of emergency Appearance and care Do-it-yourself Maintenance Technical and consumer information Index

1 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Seats ......................................................................... 1-2 Front manual seat adjustment .................................. 1-2 Front power seat adjustment .................................... 1-4 Head restraint adjustment ......................................... 1-5 Armrest ...................................................................... 1-6 Supplemental restraint system.................................. 1-6 Precautions on supplemental restraint system ......... 1-6 Supplemental air bag warning labels...................... 1-15 Supplemental air bag warning light......................... 1-15 Seat belts ................................................................ 1-17 Precautions on seat belt usage .............................. 1-17 Child safety ............................................................. 1-19 Pregnant women ..................................................... Injured persons ....................................................... Three-point type seat belt with retractor ................. Seat belt extenders ................................................. Seat belt maintenance ............................................ Child restraints ........................................................ Precautions on child restraints................................ Installation on rear seat outboard or center positions .................................................................. Top strap child restraint .......................................... Installation on front passenger seat........................ 1-20 1-20 1-20 1-23 1-23 1-24 1-24 1-25 1-30 1-32

SEATS FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT

Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of control of the vehicle. After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked.
SSS0133

Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

For most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly. See Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section.

1-2

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SPA0097

SPA0099

Forward and backward

Pull the lever up while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean back. To bring the seatback forward again, pull the lever and move your body forward. The seatback moves forward.

Seat lifter (Drivers seat)

Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion to the desired position.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-3

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT

Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operations. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

SPA0098

Forward and backward Operating tips

The motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate the switch. Do not operate the power support seat for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery. Moving the switch forward or backward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position.

Reclining
Move the recline switch backward until the desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback forward again, move the switch forward and move your body forward. The seatback will move forward.

1-4

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SPA0100

SPA0467

SSS0125

Seat lifter (Drivers seat)

Push the front or rear end of the switch up or down to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion.

Lumbar support (Drivers seat)

The lumbar support feature provides lower back support to the driver. Move the lever up or down to adjust the seat lumbar area.

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT

To raise the head restraint, simply pull it up. To lower, push the lock knob and push the head restraint down. Adjust the head restraints so the top is level with the tops of your ears.

Head restraints should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident. Do not remove them. Check the adjustSeats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-5

ment after someone else uses the seat.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) section contains important information concerning the driver and passenger supplemental air bags, supplemental side air bags and pre-tensioner seat belt. Supplemental air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the face and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions. Supplemental side air bag system (if so equipped): This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the driver and front passenger in certain side impact collisions. The supplemental side air bag is designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. These supplemental restraint systems are designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and front passenger seat belts and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the driver and front passenger seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and front door finishers. (See Seat belts later in this section for

SSS0067

ARMREST
Pull the armrest forward until it is horizontal.

1-6

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.) After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

SSS0131

The supplemental air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, roll over, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents. The seat belts and the supplemental air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in

the seat. Supplemental air bags inflate with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash and may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the supplemental air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and use the seat belts.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-7

SSS0132

SSS0006

Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the supplemental air bag inflates.

SSS0007

1-8

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

 Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations. Children may be severely injured or killed when the supplemental air bag or supplemental side air bag inflates if they are not properly restrained. Also never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating supplemental air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. For additional information, see Child restraints later in this section.

SSS0008

SSS0099

SSS0009

SSS0100

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-9

back of the front seat. If the supplemental side air bag inflates, the occupant may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with supplemental side air bag inflation.

SSS0101

SSS0064

Supplemental side air bag equipped models: The supplemental side air bag ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear impact or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

The seat belts and the supplemental side air bag are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. Supplemental side air bag inflates with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the supplemental side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seat to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seat

1-10

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or dash board. Since the supplemental air bags inflates quickly in order to help protect the front occupants, the force of the supplemental air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against the supplemental air bag module during inflation. The supplemental air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over. After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

SPA0649B

Supplemental air bag system

The driver supplemental air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel; the front passenger supplemental air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. The supplemental air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental air bag operation. When the supplemental air bag inflates, a fairly

loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire, but care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. Supplemental air bags along with the use of seat belts, helps to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating supplemental air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Supplemental air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.

Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental air bag inflates. Right after inflation, several supple-

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-11

mental air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system. Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicles electrical system, suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the supplemental air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad, above the dashboard, or by installing additional trim material around the supplemental air bag system.

Work around and on the supplemental air bag system should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the supplemental air bag system. * The SRS wiring harnesses are covered with yellow insulation either just before the harness connectors or over the complete harness for easy identification. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the supplemental air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual.

inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity side impact. It is designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. It may not inflate in certain side collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental side air bag operation. When the supplemental side air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire, but care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. Supplemental side air bags along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating supplemental side air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the supplemental side air bag. Since the supplemental side air bag inflates quickly in order to help protect the front occupants, the force of the supplemental side air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against the supplemental side air bag module during infla-

Supplemental side air bag system

The supplemental side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats. The supplemental side air bag (on the driver or front passenger seat) is designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although it may

1-12

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

tion. The supplemental side air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over. After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

bag or damage to the supplemental side air bag system. Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicles electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the supplemental side air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the front seats assembly by placing material near the seatback of the front seat, or by installing additional trim material around the supplemental side air bag system. Work around and on the supplemental side air bag system should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used

on the supplemental side air bag system. * The SRS wiring harnesses are covered with yellow insulation either just before the harness connectors or over the complete harness for easy identification. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the supplemental side air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual.

Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental side air bag inflates. Right after inflation, several supplemental side air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental side air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental side air

Pre-tensioner seat belt system (For front seats)

The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be reused after activation. It must be replaced together with the retractor as a unit. If the vehicle becomes involved in a frontal collision but the pre-tensioner is not activated, be sure to have the pre-tensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced by your NISSAN dealer.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-13

 No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pre-tensioner seat belt system. This is to prevent accidental activation of the pre-tensioner seat belt or damage to the pre-tensioner seat belt operation. Tampering with the pretensioner seat belt system may result in serious personal injury. Work around and on the pretensioner system should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner seat belt system. If you need to dispose of the pretensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact an authorized NISSAN dealer. Correct pre-tensioner disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt system activates in conjunction with the supplemental air bag. Working with the seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt the instant the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, thereby restraining seat occupants. The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat belts retractor. These seat belts are used the same as conventional seat belts. When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. The smoke is not harmful, but care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking. If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensioner system, the seat belt warning light will flash intermittently after the ignition key is turned to the ON or START position. In this case, the pre-tensioner seat belt will not function properly. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat belt system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual.

1-14

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SPA0945

SPA0431

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light, displaying AIR BAG in the instrument panel, monitors the circuits of the supplemental air bag and supplemental side air bag systems. The circuits monitored by the supplemental air bag warning light are the diagnosis sensor unit, satellite sensors, supplemental air bag modules, supplemental side air bag modules and all related wiring. After turning the ignition key to the ON, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will
Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-15

turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. If any of the following conditions occur, the supplemental air bag and supplemental side air bag systems needs servicing: The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on and remain on for 7 seconds and then go off as described above. The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently or remains on (after 7 seconds). The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all. Under these conditions, the supplemental air bags or supplemental side air bags may not operate properly. It must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest authorized NISSAN dealer.

side air bags are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light will remain illuminated after inflation has occurred. Repair and replacement of these supplemental systems should be done only by authorized NISSAN dealers. To ensure long-term functioning, these systems must be inspected 10 years after the date of manufacture noted on the certification label located on the driver side center pillar. When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the supplemental air bags, supplemental side air bags and related parts should be pointed out to the person conducting the maintenance. The ignition key should always be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle.

bag module should be replaced by an authorized NISSAN dealer. The supplemental air bag module or supplemental side air bag module cannot be repaired. The supplemental air bag and supplemental side air bag systems should be inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle. If you need to dispose of these supplemental systems or scrap the vehicle, contact an authorized NISSAN dealer. Correct disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the supplemental air bag or supplemental side air bag system will not operate in an accident.

Repair and replacement procedure

The supplemental air bags or supplemental

Once the supplemental air bag or supplemental side air bag has inflated, the supplemental air bag module or supplemental side air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. The supplemental air bag module or supplemental side air

1-16

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SEAT BELTS PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE

Your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced if you are wearing your seat belt and it is properly adjusted. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag. Most states, provinces or territories require that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0134

Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be properly restrained and, if appropriate, in a child restraint. The belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly. Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the belt behind your back under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Position the lap belt as low and snug

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-17

SSS0136

SSS0016

as possible around the hips, not the waist. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident. Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle. Do not wear the belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness. Do not allow more than one person to use the same belt.

Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts. If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. Once the pre-tensioner seat belt has activated, it cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor. See your NISSAN dealer.

Removal and installation of the pretensioner seat belt system components should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. All seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision by your NISSAN dealer. recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and con-

1-18

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

facing child restraints. Front facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear facing child restraints.

This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (air bag system) for the front passenger (see Supplemental Restraint System earlier in this section for precautions).

SSS0014

Infants and children need special protection. The vehicles seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints. All US states and provinces of Canada require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. (See Child restraints later in this section.) In addition, there are many types of child restraints available for larger children which should be used for maximum protection. NISSAN recommends that all preteens and children be restrained in the rear seat if possible. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

Infants and small children

NISSAN recommends that infants and small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturers instructions for installation and use.

Larger children
Children who are too large for child restraint systems should be seated and restrained by the seat belts which are provided. If the childs seating position has a shoulder belt that fits close to the face or neck, the use of a booster seat (commercially available) may help overcome this. The booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top, middle portion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

tinue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.

CHILD SAFETY
Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly restrained. The proper restraint depends on the childs size. Generally, infants (up to about 1 year and less than 20 lb (9 kg) should be placed in rear

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-19

Standards. Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck, use the shoulder belt without the booster seat.

Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is moving. The child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident.

PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations. The lap belt should be worn snug and positioned as low as possible around the hips, not the waist.

SSS0018

SSS0020

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR

INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations.

Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident

you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. For most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly.

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat.

1-20

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

The automatic locking mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by a passenger, the locking mode should not be activated. If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension.

SSS0102

SSS0061

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until it snaps. The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion will permit the belt to move, and allow you some freedom of movement in the seat.

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown. 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack. The front passenger and rear seat belts have a cinching mechanism for child restraint installation. It is referred to as the automatic locking mode. When the cinching mechanism is activated the seat belt cannot be withdrawn again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. For additional information, see Child restraints later in this section.
Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-21

forward. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement. If the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any questions about belt operation, see your NISSAN dealer.

SSS0021

SSS0122

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the belt, press the button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract.

Center of rear seat

Selecting correct set of seat belts: The center seat belt buckle is identified by the CENTER mark. The center seat belt tongue can be fastened only into the center seat belt buckle.

Checking seat belt operation

Your seat belt retractors are designed to lock belt movement using two separate methods: when the belt is pulled quickly from the retractor. when the vehicle slows down rapidly. You can check their operation as follows: grasp the shoulder belt and pull quickly

1-22

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

 After adjustment, release the buttons and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position. The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident.

Only NISSAN belt extenders, made by the same company which made the original equipment belts, should be used with NISSAN belts. Persons who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident.

PD1321-A

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

To clean the seat belt webbings, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpets. Then brush the webbing, wipe it with a cloth and allow it to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry. If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth. Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components such as

Shoulder belt height adjustment (For front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. (See Precautions on seat belt usage earlier in this section.) To adjust, squeeze the release buttons, and then move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position, so that the belt passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off of your shoulder. Release the adjustment buttons to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender is available which is compatible with the installed seat belts. The extender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. See your NISSAN dealer for assistance if the extender is required.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-23

CHILD RESTRAINTS
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire belt assembly should be replaced.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. An improperly installed child restraint could lead to serious injury or death in an accident. In general, child restraints are designed to be installed with the lap portion of a three-point type seat belt. Child restraints for infants and children of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind: choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicles seat and seat belt system. Choose a child restraint that meets the guidelines of the Society of Automotive Engineers recommended practice J1819 for child restraint installation. if the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child re-

Infants and small children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint while riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a child restraint can result in serious injury or death. Infants and small children should never be carried on your lap. It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident. The child could be crushed between the adult and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the same seat belt around both your child and yourself. Never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating supplemental air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. A rear facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat. NISSAN recommends that the child restraint be installed in the rear seat.

1-24

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

straint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Always follow all recommended procedures. All US states and provinces of Canada require that infants and small children be restrained in approved child restraints at all times while the vehicle is being operated.

Improper use of a child restraint can result in increased injuries for both the infant or child and other occupants in the vehicle. Follow all of the child restraint manufacturers instructions for installation and use. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure to select one which will fit your child and vehicle. It may not be possible to properly install some types of child restraints in your vehicle. If the child restraint is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases.

Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to fit the child restraint, but as upright as possible. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Tilt it from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. For a front facing child restraint, if the seat position where it is installed has a three-point type lap/shoulder belt, check to make sure the shoulder belt does not go in front of the childs face or neck. If it does, put the shoulder belt behind the child restraint. If you must install a front facing child restraint in the front seat, see later in Child restraints for installation on front passenger seat. When your child restraint is not in use, store it in the trunk or keep it secured with a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown around in case of a sudden stop or accident.

Remember that a child restraint left in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the child restraint.

INSTALLATION ON REAR SEAT OUTBOARD OR CENTER POSITIONS

The three-point belt on your vehicle is equipped with a locking mode retractor which must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to do so will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. It could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-25

SSS0041A

SSS0123

SSS0043

Front facing
When you install a child restraint in a rear outboard or center seat, follow these steps: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. It can be placed in a front facing direction, depending on the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manufacturers instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for belt routing.

1-26

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SSS0107

SSS0062

SSS0108

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts back to emergency locking mode when the belt is fully retracted.

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-27

seat belt is allowed to wind back into the retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt only locks during a sudden stop or impact.

SSS0044A

SSS0124

Rear facing
When you install a child restraint in a rear outboard or center seat, follow these steps: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. The direction of the child restraint depends on the type of the child restraint and the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manufacturers instructions.

1-28

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SSS0046

SSS0045A

SSS0109

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for belt routing.

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts back to emergency locking mode when the belt is fully retracted.

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt to remove any slack in the belt.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-29

seat belt is allowed to wind back into the retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt only locks during a sudden stop or impact.

SSS0110

SSS0127

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the

TOP STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT

If your child restraint has a top strap, it must be secured to the provided anchor point. Anchor bracket hardware must be installed. The top strap anchor bracket is available through your NISSAN dealer. Part No. 88894-89900 Secure the child restraint with the lap portion of a three-point belt and latch the top strap hook onto the appropriate anchor bracket. To install the anchor bracket, a metric bolt of the dimensions listed below must be used.

1-30

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Bolt diameter: 8.0 mm Bolt length: more than 1.18 in (30 mm) Thread pitch: 1.25 mm Secure the top strap to the attaching bolt which provides the straightest installation of the top strap.

There are pre-cut circles at each anchor point location that should break away from the shelf support material when pressure is applied to them. Remove the bolt after you feel the pre-cut circle separate from the shelf support material. 2. Cut a small slit through the parcel shelf fabric at the anchor point location. Reach through the fabric with a tool such as a pair of needle-nose pliers and remove the precut circle in the parcel shelf support material.
SPA0117

Child restraint anchor points are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses.

3. Install the bolt through the top strap hook and into the anchor point nut. 4. Be sure to follow all of the instructions that accompany the top strap attaching hardware. Your NISSAN dealer can assist you with the installation of your child restraint.

Anchor point locations

Anchor points are located under the rear parcel shelf finisher. To use attaching hardware for child restraints with top straps, follow these instructions carefully: 1. Open the trunk and find the anchor point nuts on the under side of the rear parcel shelf. Thread a bolt (8.0 mm diameter, 1.25 mm pitch) up through the nut behind the seating position where the child restraint will be installed and use it to break through the rear parcel shelf support material.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-31

 Failure to use the retractors locking mode may result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The child restraint could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision.

SSS0129

INSTALLATION ON FRONT PASSENGER SEAT

Never install a rear facing child restraint in the front passenger seat. Supplemental air bags inflate with great force. A rear facing child restraint could be struck by the supplemental air bag in a crash and could seriously injure or kill your child.

NISSAN recommends that child restraints be installed in the rear seat. However, if you must install a front facing child restraint in the front passenger seat, move the passenger seat to the rearmost position. A child restraint with a top strap should not be used in the front passenger seat. The three-point belt in your vehicle is equipped with a locking mode retractor which must be used when installing a child restraint.

1-32

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SSS0135

SSS0055

SSS0113

Front facing
If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, follow these steps: 1. Position the child restraint on the front passenger seat. It should be placed in a front facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Always follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for belt routing.

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts back to emergency locking mode when the belt is fully retracted.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-33

After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is allowed to wind back into the retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt only locks during a sudden stop or impact.

SSS0056

SSS0114

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the lap belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.

1-34

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

MEMO

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-35

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel ....................................................... 2-2 Meters and gauges ................................................... 2-3 Speedometer and odometer ..................................... 2-4 Tachometer ............................................................... 2-4 Engine coolant temperature gauge........................... 2-5 Fuel gauge ................................................................ 2-5 Warning/indicator lights and chimes ......................... 2-7 Checking bulbs.......................................................... 2-7 Warning lights ........................................................... 2-7 Indicator lights ........................................................... 2-9 Chimes .................................................................... 2-11 Security system ....................................................... 2-12 Theft warning (if so equipped) ................................ 2-12 Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System ....................... 2-13 Windshield wiper and washer switch ...................... 2-15 Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defogger switch ....................................................... 2-16 Headlight and turn signal switch ............................. 2-17 Headlight switch ...................................................... 2-17 Turn signal switch ................................................... 2-18 Front fog light switch (if so equipped)..................... 2-18 Hazard warning flasher switch ................................ 2-19 Horn......................................................................... 2-19 Heated seats (if so equipped)................................. 2-20

Traction control system (TCS) cancel switch (if so equipped) ....................................................... Cigarette lighter and ashtray................................... Storage .................................................................... Trays ....................................................................... Cup holder............................................................... Glove box ................................................................ Console box ............................................................ Windows .................................................................. Power windows ....................................................... Sunroof (if so equipped) ......................................... Automatic sunroof ................................................... Clock ....................................................................... Adjusting the time ................................................... Interior light ............................................................. Ceiling ..................................................................... Personal light .......................................................... Vanity mirror light (if so equipped).......................... Trunk light ............................................................... Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver (if so equipped) ....................................................... Programming HomeLink ........................................ Canadian programming...........................................

2-21 2-21 2-22 2-22 2-24 2-24 2-25 2-25 2-25 2-26 2-26 2-27 2-27 2-28 2-28 2-28 2-29 2-29 2-30 2-31 2-31

Operating the integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver.............................................................. 2-31 Programming problem Diagnosis ....................... 2-31 Clearing the programmed information .................... 2-32

Rolling code programming ...................................... 2-32 Reprogramming a single HomeLink button .......... 2-32 If your vehicle is stolen ........................................... 2-33

INSTRUMENT PANEL
Windshield wiper/washer switch (P.2-15) Traction control system (TCS) cancel switch (if so equipped) (P.2-21) Hazard warning flasher switch (P.2-19) Ventilator (P.4-2) Instrument brightness control switch (P.2-17) Meters/gauges (P.2-3) Theft warning light (P.2-12) (if so equipped) Cruise control main switch (P.5-14) Headlight, fog light (if so equipped) and turn signal switch (P.2-17) Heater/air conditioner control (P.4-3) Clock (P.2-27) Radio/cassette player (P.4-13)/CD player (P.4-19) Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defogger switch (P.2-16) Passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-6)

Hood release handle (P.3-8) Outside mirror remote control (P.3-13) Fuse box cover (P.8-23) Tilting steering wheel lock lever (P.3-12) Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-6) Ignition switch/steering lock (P.5-4) Cruise control set switch (P.5-14) Cigarette lighter (accessory) (P.2-21) Heated seat switch (P.2-20) (if so equipped) Ashtray (P.2-21) Glove box (P.2-24)

See the page indicated in parentheses for operating details.

SIC1064

2-2

Instruments and controls

METERS AND GAUGES

SIC0876

Instruments and controls

2-3

Changing the display: Pushing the reset button changes the display as follows: ODO , TRIP A , TRIP B , ODO Resetting the trip odometer: Pushing the reset button for more than 1 second resets the trip odometer to zero.

SIC0877

SIC0878

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (r/min).

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer/twin trip odometer are displayed when the ignition key is in the ON position. The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips. When engine speed approaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.

2-4

Instruments and controls

If the gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. See If your vehicle overheats in the 6. In case of emergency section.

SIC0173

SIC0879

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant temperature will vary with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.

FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank. The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hill. The gauge needle is designed to remain in approximately the same position, even when the ignition key is turned OFF. Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers Empty.

Instruments and controls

2-5

The low fuel warning light comes on when the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the gauge reaches E. There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E.

If the vehicle is driven with the fuel level very low, the malfunction indicator light may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After driving for a while, the light should remain off. If the light remains on, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see the Malfunction indicator light (MIL) later in this section.

2-6

Instruments and controls

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND CHIMES

Engine oil pressure warning light Charge warning light Door open warning light Seat belt warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Low washer fluid warning light (if so equipped) or or Brake warning light Anti-lock brake warning light (if so equipped) High beam indicator light (Blue) Cruise indicator light Malfunction indicator light (MIL) Traction control system indicator light (if so equipped) Slip indicator light (if so equipped)

Low fuel warning light Overdrive off indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator light

CHECKING BULBS
Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition key to ON without starting the engine. The following lights will come on: , or , , , , The following lights come on briefly and then go off: or , , If any light fails to come on, it may indicate a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system. Have the system repaired promptly.

WARNING LIGHTS Engine oil pressure warning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop. The oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. See Engine oil in the 8. Do-it-yourself section. Running the engine with the oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.

Charge warning light

If the light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate that there is something wrong with the charging system. Turn the
Instruments and controls

2-7

engine off and check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing or if the light remains on, see your NISSAN dealer immediately.

supplemental air bag systems section for precautions on seat belt usage. If the seat belt warning light blinks, there may be something wrong with the pre-tensioner seat belt. In this case, the pre-tensioner will not operate properly. Have it checked by your NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see Supplemental restraint system in the 1. Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems section.

flashes intermittently or remains on (after 7 seconds). The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all. Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental Restraint System may not function properly. For additional information, see Supplemental restraint system in the 1. Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems section.

Do not continue driving if the belt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors are not closed securely while the ignition key is ON.

Supplemental air bag warning light

After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light will illuminate. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. If any of the following conditions occur, the supplemental air bag needs servicing and your vehicle must be taken to your nearest authorized NISSAN dealer. The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on and remain on for 7 seconds and then go off as described above. The supplemental air bag warning light

Seat belt warning light and chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition key is turned to ON, and will remain illuminated until the drivers seat belt is fastened. (When the ignition key is turned to ON with the drivers seat belt fastened, the light will illuminate for about 7 seconds and then go off.) At the same time, the chime will sound for about 6 seconds unless the drivers seat belt is securely fastened. See Seat belts in the 1. Seats, restraints and

If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the supplemental air bag or supplemental side air bag system (if so equipped) will not operate in an accident.

Low washer fluid warning light (if so equipped)

This light comes on when the washer tank fluid is at a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary. See Window washer fluid in the 8. Do-it-yourself section.

or

Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake

2-8

Instruments and controls

and the foot brake systems. Parking brake indicator: When the ignition key is in the ON position, the light comes on when the parking brake is applied. Low brake fluid warning light: The light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following: 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. See Brake and clutch fluid in the Do-it-yourself section.

pedal effort as well as greater pedal travel. If the brake fluid level is below the MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked at a NISSAN dealer. 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warning system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

brakes will continue to operate normally. If the light comes on while you are driving, contact your NISSAN dealer for repair.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel in the tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E. There will be a small reserve of fuel remaining in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E.

or

Anti-lock brake warning light (if so equipped)

INDICATOR LIGHTS Overdrive off indicator light

This light comes on during driving when the overdrive switch is pressed to prevent overdrive operation. The O/D OFF indicator light comes on for 2 seconds each time the ignition key is turned ON. This shows the light is functioning properly. If the O/D OFF indicator light blinks for approximately 8 seconds after coming on for 2 seconds, have your NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair it if necessary. The automatic transmission is equipped with an electronic fail-safe mode. This system alInstruments and controls

Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed. Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or low brake fluid level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater

After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the light will illuminate. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate there is something wrong with the anti-lock portion of the brake system. Have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. However if the light illuminates while starting the engine, it does not indicate a system malfunction. If an abnormality occurs in the system, the anti-lock function will cease but the ordinary

2-9

lows the vehicle to be driven even in the event of damage to the electrical circuits. If this occurs, the gears automatically engage and lock into third gear. See the Driving the vehicle in the 5. Starting and driving section for fail-safe before visiting your NISSAN dealer.

Malfunction indicator light (MIL)

If the malfunction indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control problem. The malfunction indicator light may also come on steady or blink if the fuel filler cap has not been closed tightly or if the fuel tank is nearly empty. Check to make sure the fuel cap is secure and that you have at least 3 US gallons (14 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank. After driving for a while, the light should remain off if no other potential emission control system problem exists. Operation The malfunction indicator light will come on in one of two ways: Malfunction indicator light on steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer. Malfunction indicator light blinking An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system.

To reduce or avoid emission control system damage: a) Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH (72 km/h). b) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration. c) Avoid steep uphill grades. d) If possible, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed. The malfunction indicator light may stop blinking and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

The light flashes when the turn signal switch lever or hazard switch is turned on.

High beam indicator light (Blue)

This light comes on when the headlight high beam is on and goes out when the low beam is selected.

Cruise indicator light

The light comes on while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control system. If the light flickers while the engine is running, it may indicate there is something wrong with the cruise control system. Have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer.

Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission control system.

Traction control system indicator light (if so equipped)

The traction control system indicator light should come on when you turn the ignition key

2-10

Instruments and controls

to ON. The light will go off as you start the engine. If the indicator light does not come on or go off, have the TCS checked by your NISSAN dealer. If the light stays on or comes on when you are driving, there may be a problem with your traction control system and it may not operate properly. Have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. The traction control system indicator light may come on for the following reasons. a) If the system is turned off by pressing the button on the instrument panel, the indicator light will come on and stay on. To turn the system back on, press the button again. The indicator light will go off. b) If engine speed is above 4,000 rpm in a selected gear. Use D range on low friction road surfaces. If the traction control system indicator light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on, have your vehicle checked by your NISSAN dealer.

control system is limiting wheel spin. Slippery road conditions may exist if the slip indicator light blinks on. If this happens, adjust your driving accordingly. You may feel or hear the system working, but this is normal. The light will blink on for a few seconds after the traction control system stops limiting wheel spin. The slip indicator light also comes on when you turn the ignition key to ON. The light will go off as you start the engine. If the light does not come on or go off, have the TCS checked by your NISSAN dealer. The traction control system operates in all transmission shift lever positions. But the system can upshift the transmission only as high as the indicated shift lever position.

Light reminder chime

A chime will sound when the driver side door is opened if the light switch is in the or position (ignition switch is turned off). Turn the light switch off when you leave the vehicle.

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

CHIMES Key reminder chime

The chime will sound if the driver side door is opened while the key is left in the ignition switch (ignition switch is turned off). Remove the key and take it with you when leaving the vehicle.

Slip indicator light (if so equipped)

This light will blink on when your traction

Instruments and controls

2-11

SECURITY SYSTEM
Your vehicle has two types of security system, as follows: Theft warning (if so equipped) Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System The security condition will be shown by the security indicator light.

How to activate the theft warning system

1. Close all windows. The system can be activated even if the windows are open. 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 3. Close and lock all doors, hood and trunk lid. The doors can be locked either with or without the key. Multi-remote controller equipped models: Close and lock all doors, hood and trunk lid. Lock all doors by the key or pressing the button on the multi-remote controller. At this time, the hazard indicators flash twice to indicate all doors are locked. 4. Confirm that the SECURITY indicator light comes on. The SECURITY light glows for about 30 seconds and then blink. The system is now activated. If, during this 30 second time period, the door is unlocked by the key or the multi-remote controller, or the ignition key is turned to ACC or ON, the system will not activate. If the key is turned slowly toward the front of the vehicle when locking the door, the system may not activate. If the

THEFT WARNING (if so equipped)

The theft warning system provides visual and audio alarm signals if parts of the vehicle are disturbed.
SIC0175

Security indicator light

2-12

Instruments and controls

key is returned beyond the vertical position toward the rear of the vehicle to remove the key, the system may be deactivated. If the indicator light fails to glow for 30 seconds, unlock the door once and lock it again. Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will activate with all doors, hood and trunk lid locked and ignition key off. Turn the ignition key to ACC to turn the system off.

opening the trunk lid by operating the opener release button. Opening the hood. Pushing in or pulling out of the key cylinder on the door or trunk lid.

engine using the following procedures: 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 5 seconds. 3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again. 4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key. If the no start condition still occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices. Statement related to section 15 of FCC rules for Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System (CONT UNIT-IMMOBILIZER, ANT ASSY-IMMOBILIZER) This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) This device may not cause hanmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Instruments and controls

How to stop alarm

The alarm will stop only by unlocking a door or trunk lid with the key, or by pressing the button on multi-remote controller. The alarm will not stop if the ignition switch is turned to ACC or ON. If the system does not operate as described above, have it checked by your NISSAN dealer.

Theft warning system operation

The warning system will give the following alarm: The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently. The alarm automatically turns off after 2 to 3 minutes. However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking a door or trunk lid with the key, or by pressing the button on the multi-remote controller. The alarm is activated by: Opening the door or trunk lid without using the key (even if the door is unlocked by releasing the door inside lock switch) or

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM

The Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key. If the engine fails to start using the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key (for example, when interference is caused by another Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key, an automated toll road device or automated payment device on the key ring), restart the

2-13

that you have when visiting your NISSAN dealer for service.

SIC0175

Security indicator light

This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This function indicates the security systems equipped on the vehicle are operational. If Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the ignition key is in the ON position. If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, see your NISSAN dealer for Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System service as soon as possible. Please bring all Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System keys

2-14

Instruments and controls

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

The following could damage the washer system: Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds. Do not operate the washer if the reservoir tank is empty.

SIC0176

The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position. Push the lever down to operate the wiper. Intermittent operation can be adjusted from 3 to 21 seconds by turning the knob. (Type B only) Pull the lever toward you to operate the washer. Then the wiper will also operate several times. In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield.

Instruments and controls

2-15

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR (if so equipped) DEFOGGER SWITCH

When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defogger.

SIC0177

To defog/defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors, start the engine and push the switch on. The indicator light will come on. Push the switch again to turn the defogger off. It will automatically turn off in approximately 15 minutes.

2-16

Instruments and controls

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

IC1284MA

Instrument brightness control

The instrument brightness control operates when the light switch is in the or position. Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instrument panel lights (except clock) and power window switch lights. When the control is turned to the right until a click sound is heard, the light intensity will be at maximum. When the control is turned to the left until a click sound is heard, the light will be turned off.

SIC0188

HEADLIGHT SWITCH Lighting

Turn the switch to the position: The front clearance, side marker, tail, license

plate and instrument lights will come on. Turn the switch to the position:

Headlights will come on and all the other lights remain on.

Instruments and controls

2-17

FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped) Headlight beam select

To select the high beam, push the lever forward. Pull it back to select the low beam. When the daytime running light system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

Passing signal
Pulling the lever toward you will flash the headlight high beam.

Daytime running light system (Canada only)

The headlights automatically illuminate at a reduced intensity when the engine is started with the parking brake released. The daytime running lights operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position or in the position. Turn the headlight switch to the position for full illumination when driving at night. If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the daytime running lights do not illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate once the parking brake is released. The daytime running lights will remain on until the ignition switch is turned off.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Turn signal

Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signals cancel automatically.
SIC0880

Lane change signal

To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or down to the point where lights begin flashing.

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight position, then turn the switch to the switch to the position. To turn them off, turn the switch to the OFF position. The headlights must be on for the fog lights to operate.

2-18

Instruments and controls

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic. Turn signals do not work when the switch is operating. The flasher can be actuated with the ignition switch either off or on.

HORN

SIC0178

SIC0909

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights will flash. Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving.

To sound the horn, push the center pad area of the steering wheel.

When stalled or stopped on the roadway under emergency conditions, move the vehicle well off the road. Do not use the switch while moving
Instruments and controls

2-19

HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)

The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on. 3. When the vehicles interior is warmed, or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off. should be removed immediately with a dry cloth. When cleaning the seat, never use benzine, thinner, or any similar materials. If any abnormalities are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer.

The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running.
SIC0693

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The switches located on the center console can be operated independently of each other. 1. Start the engine. 2. Select heat range. For low heat, press the top of the switch. For high heat, press the bottom of the switch. For no heat, the switch has a center OFF position between low and high. The indicator light in the switch will illuminate when low or high is selected.

Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat. Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated. Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater. Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

2-20

Instruments and controls

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS) CANCEL SWITCH (if so equipped)

CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND ASHTRAY

The cigarette lighter should not be used while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation.

SIC1065

SIC0694

To cancel the Traction Control System (TCS), push the TCS cancel switch. The indicator will come on. Push it again to turn the system back on. See Traction control system in the 5. Starting and driving section.

The cigarette lighter element is an accessory. A genuine NISSAN cigarette lighter or equivalent can be purchased from your local NISSAN dealer. The cigarette lighter operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. Push the lighter in all the way. When the lighter is heated, it will spring out. Return the lighter to its original position after use.

The cigarette lighter socket is a power source for the cigarette lighter element only. The use of the cigarette lighter socket as a power source for any other accessory is not recommended.

Instruments and controls

2-21

STORAGE
while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation.

SIC0181

TRAYS

The storage tray should not be used

2-22

Instruments and controls

Pull the armrest forward and lay it horizontal. Then release the lever (inset) and pull the tray forward (if so equipped). In this condition you are able to gain access to the trunk room.

SIC0883

Properly secure all cargo to help prevent

it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
Instruments and controls

2-23

 Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger. Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.
SIC0881 SPA0092

CUP HOLDER

GLOVE BOX
When locking or unlocking the glove box, use the master key.

The cup holder should not be used while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation.

The glove box may be opened by pulling the handle.

Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

2-24

Instruments and controls

WINDOWS
Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents. The power window only operates when the ignition key is in the ON position. To open or close the window, push down or pull up the switch and hold it. The main switch (driver side switches) will open or close all the windows.

SIC0882

SIC0182

CONSOLE BOX Card holder

POWER WINDOWS

The card holder should not be used while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation.

Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc. inside the vehicle before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls and become trapped in a window.
Instruments and controls

2-25

SUNROOF (if so equipped)

SIC0183

SIC0184

IC1432

The passenger side switch will open or close only the corresponding window. To open or close the window, hold the switch down or up.

Automatic operation
To fully open the driver side window, completely push down the switch and release it; it need not be held. The window will automatically open all the way. To stop the window, just pull up the switch toward the close side. A light press on the switch will cause the window to open until the switch is released.

AUTOMATIC SUNROOF
The sunroof will only operate when the ignition key is in the ON position.

Locking passengers windows

When the lock button is pushed in, only the driver side window can be opened or closed. Push it in again to cancel.

Sliding the sunroof

To open the roof, press and hold the switch to the side. To close the roof, press and hold the switch to the side.

Tilting the sunroof

To tilt up, first close the sunroof, then press and hold the side of the tilt switch. To tilt

2-26

Instruments and controls

CLOCK
down the sunroof, press and hold the side. Do not place any heavy object on the sunroof or surrounding area.

Sun shade
Open or close the sun shade by sliding it backward or forward. The shade will open automatically when the sunroof is opened. However, it must be closed manually.

If the sunroof does not close

Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the sunroof.

In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open sunroof. Always use seat belts and child restraints. Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the sunroof is closing.

SIC0910

The digital clock displays time when the ignition key is in ACC or ON. If the power supply is disconnected, the clock will not indicate the correct time. Readjust the time.

ADJUSTING THE TIME

Push the H button to adjust the hour. Push the M button to adjust the minute.

Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from the sunroof before opening.
Instruments and controls

2-27

INTERIOR LIGHT
and the drivers door is opened and then closed. The timer is cancelled, and the light will turn off when: The drivers door is locked. The ignition switch is turned ON.

PERSONAL LIGHT

Leaving the light switch in the ON position for extended periods of time will result in a discharged battery.
IC1226 IC1019-B

CEILING
The light has a three-position switch. When the switch is in the center k position, the light will illuminate when a door is opened. The light will stay on for about 30 seconds when: The key is removed from the ignition switch while the drivers door is closed. The drivers door is unlocked while the key is removed from the ignition switch. The key is removed from the ignition switch

2-28

Instruments and controls

VANITY MIRROR LIGHT (if so equipped)

TRUNK LIGHT
The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the light will go off.

IC1163-B

SIC0186

The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when the cover on the vanity mirror is opened.

Instruments and controls

2-29

INTEGRATED HomeLink UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

The Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device. Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver: Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) devices such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and security systems. Is powered by your vehicles battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehicles battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink will retain all programming. Once the Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures (i.e., new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes. For additional information, refer to Programming the Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver later in this section. Transceiver. Do not use the Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models manufactured after April 1, 1982). A garage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death. During programming, your garage door or gate may open or close. Make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate that you are programming. Your vehicles engine should be turned off while programming the Integrated HomeLink Universal

2-30

Instruments and controls

3. Using both hands, simultaneously push the hand-held transmitter button and the desired HomeLink button. Do not release the buttons until step 4 has been completed. NOTE: Some garage door openers may require the procedures noted under Canadian Programming. 4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapid flashing light indicates the Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver has been successfully programmed. To program the remaining two buttons, follow steps 2 through 4. If, after repeated attempts, you do not successfully program the Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver to learn the signal of the hand-held transmitter, refer to Rolling Code Programming later in this section.

and hold the HomeLink button (note steps 2 through 4 under Programming HomeLink ) while you press and re-press (cycle) your hand-held transmitter every 2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly (indicating successful programming). NOTE: If programming a garage door opener, etc., it is advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener components.

SPA0609A

PROGRAMMING HomeLink
1. With the ignition key in the OFF position, press and hold the two outside buttons, and release when the indicator light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds). This procedure erases the factory set default codes and does not have to be followed when programming additional hand-held transmitters. 2. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter (from the device you wish to train) approximately 2 to 5 inches (50 to 127 mm) away from the surface of HomeLink keeping the indicator light in view.

OPERATING THE INTEGRATED HomeLink UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver (once programmed) may now be used to activate the garage door, etc. To operate, simply press the appropriate programmed Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver button. The red indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.

CANADIAN PROGRAMMING
Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 seconds. To program your hand-held transmitter to HomeLink , continue to press

PROGRAMMING PROBLEM-DIAGNOSIS
If the HomeLink does not quickly learn the hand-held transmitter information:
Instruments and controls

2-31

 replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries. position the hand-held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink surface. press and hold both the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons without interruption. position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 inches (50 to 127 mm) away from the HomeLink surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink is not programmed within that time, try holding the transmitter in another position - keeping the indicator light in view at all times. If you continue to have programming difficulties, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department. The phone numbers are located in the Foreword of this Owners Manual.

indicator light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).

ROLLING CODE PROGRAMMING

Rolling code garage door openers (or other rolling code devices) which are code protected and manufactured after 1996, may be determined by the following. A. Reference the garage door opener Owners Manual for verification. B. The hand-held transmitter appears to program the Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver but does not activate the garage door. C. Press and hold the trained HomeLink button. If the garage door opener has the rolling code feature, the HomeLink indicator light will flash rapidly, then remains on after 2 seconds. To program the Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver to a garage door opener with the rolling code feature, follow these instructions after completing the Programming HomeLink (the aid of a second person may make the following procedures quicker and easier). 1. Locate the training button on the garage door opener motor unit. Exact location and

color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand. If there is difficulty locating the training button, reference the garage door opener Owners Manual. 2. Press the training button on the garage door opener motor unit (which may activate a training light). NOTE: Following step 2, there are 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3. 3. Firmly press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Press and release the HomeLink button a second time to complete the training process. (Some garage door openers may require you to do this procedure a third time to complete the training.) The garage door opener should now recognize the Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver and activate when the HomeLink button is pressed. The remaining two buttons may now be programmed (if not yet programmed, follow steps 2 through 4 in the Programming HomeLink procedures earlier in this section).

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION

Individual buttons cannot be cleared, however to clear all programming, press and hold the two outside buttons and release when the

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HomeLink BUTTON

To reprogram an Integrated HomeLink Uni-

2-32

Instruments and controls

versal Transceiver button, complete the following. 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do not release the button until step 4 has been completed. 2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after 20 seconds), position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 inches (50 to 127 mm) away from the HomeLink surface. 3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button. 4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly, release both buttons. The Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink buttons.

manufacturer or dealer of those devices for additional information. When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the Integrated Universal Transceiver with HomeLink your new transmitter information. FCC Notice: This device complies with FCC rules part 15. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference and (2) This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the device. DOC: ISTC 1763K1313 FCC I.D.: CB2V67690

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the codes of any non-rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink . Consult the Owners Manual of each device or call the
Instruments and controls

2-33

MEMO

2-34

Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys .......................................................................... Doors ......................................................................... Locking with key........................................................ Locking with inside lock knob ................................... Locking with power door lock switch ........................ Child safety rear door lock ........................................ Multi-remote control system (if so equipped)............ How to use multi-remote control system .................. Battery replacement .................................................. Hood .......................................................................... Trunk lid ....................................................................

3-2 3-3 3-3 3-3 3-4 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9

Opener operation ...................................................... 3-9 Key operation .......................................................... 3-10 Fuel filler lid ............................................................. 3-10 Opener operation .................................................... 3-10 Fuel filler cap........................................................... 3-11 Steering wheel ........................................................ 3-12 Tilt operation ........................................................... 3-12 Mirrors ..................................................................... 3-12 Inside mirror ............................................................ 3-12 Outside mirrors........................................................ 3-13

KEYS
your key number plate. A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, this key can be duplicated by your NISSAN dealer. The key number is necessary when you need extra Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. As many as 5 Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one vehicle. New keys must be registered to the Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle by your NISSAN dealer. At this time, you should bring all Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because the registration process will erase all memory of the Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System components.

SPA0658

SPA0662A

The master key can be used for all the locks. Record the key number on the key number plate and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the car. A key number plate is supplied with your key. Keep the plate in a safe place. NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate. A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, this key can be duplicated by your NISSAN dealer or a locksmith shop.

Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System KEY Master keys (if so equipped): You can only drive your vehicle using the master keys which are registered to the Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in the key head. Never leave these keys in the vehicle. Record the key number on the key number plate supplied with your keys and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. NISSAN does not record any key number so it is very important to keep track of

3-2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

DOORS

Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out intruders. Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.
SPA0084 SPA0085

LOCKING WITH KEY Power

The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors simultaneously. Turning the front door key to the front of the vehicle will lock all doors. Turning the front door key one time to the rear of the vehicle will unlock the corresponding door. From that position, returning the key to neutral (where the key can only be removed and inserted) and turning it to the rear again within 5 seconds will unlock all doors.

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB Power

Pushing the front door inside lock knob to the lock position will lock all doors. To lock from the outside without a key, move the inside lock knob to the LOCK position. Then close the door. When locking the door this way, be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle. The inside lock knob cannot be set to the LOCK position with the front doors open and
Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-3

with the key in the ignition.

SPA0088

SPA0086

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Operating the lock-unlock switch will lock or unlock all doors.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety locking helps prevent doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle. When the lever is in the lock position, the rear door can be opened only from the outside.

Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic.

3-4

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM (if so equipped)

Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

SPA0277

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-5

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, to open the drivers and front passengers windows, to release the trunk lid and to turn on or off the interior light by using the remote controller from outside the car. Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle before locking the doors and leaving it. The remote controller can operate at a distance of approximately 49 ft (15 m) from the vehicle. (The effective distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.) As many as four remote controllers can be used with one vehicle. For information concerning the purchase and use of additional remote controllers, contact your NISSAN dealer.

an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140F (60C).

when the interior light switch is in the center k position. The interior light can be turned off without waiting for 30 seconds by inserting the key into the ignition or locking the doors with the multiremote controller or by pushing the interior light button to OFF.

HOW TO USE MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM Locking doors

1. Remove the ignition key. 2. Close all of the doors. 3. Push the controller. button on the multi-remote

Opening the drivers and front passengers windows

1. Push the button on the multi-remote controller for longer than 1.5 seconds after the drivers door is unlocked. 2. The drivers and front passengers windows open. The drivers and front passengers windows also open after all doors are unlocked with the multi-remote controller. The drivers and front passengers windows cannot be closed by using the multi-remote controller.

4. All of the doors lock. 5. The hazard indicators flash twice. When the button is pushed with all doors locked, the hazard indicator flashes twice as a reminder that the doors are already locked.

Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the remote controller. Do not allow the remote controller to become wet. Do not drop the remote controller. Do not strike the remote controller sharply against another object. Do not place the remote controller for

Unlocking doors
1. Push the button on the multi-remote controller. Only the driver side door unlocks. 2. Push the button on the multi-remote controller again within 5 seconds. The passenger doors unlock. 3. The interior light will stay on for 30 seconds

Releasing the trunk lid

1. Push the button on the multi-remote controller for longer than 0.5 second with the key removed from the key cylinder. 2. The trunk lid opens.

3-6

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The trunk lid will not open when the trunk lid cancel lever is in the CANCEL position. It can be opened only with the key. See Trunk lid later in this section for cancel lever.

Recommended battery: Sanyo CR2025 or equivalent 3. Close the lid securely. 4. Push the remote controller button two or three times to check its operation. If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement, perform step 4 above. An improperly disposed battery can harm the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal. The remote controller is water-resistant; however, if it does get wet, immediately wipe completely dry. When changing batteries, do not let dust or oil get on the controller. FCC Notice:
SPA0090

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to call attention as follows: 1. Push the button on the multi-remote controller for longer than 1.5 seconds. 2. The panic alarm and headlight will stay on for 30 seconds. 3. The panic alarm stops when: It has run for 30 seconds, or The or or the button is pressed,

The button is pushed for longer than 1.5 seconds on the multi-remote controller. The button is pushed for longer than 0.5 seconds on the multi-remote controller.

BATTERY REPLACEMENT
Replace the battery as follows: 1. Open the lid using a suitable tool. 2. Replace the battery with a new one.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interPre-driving checks and adjustments

3-7

HOOD
ference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

SPA0466 1 lo1. Pull the hood lock release handle k cated below the instrument panel; the hood will then spring up slightly. 2 at the front of the hood with 2. Pull the lever k your fingertips and raise the hood.

3. When closing the hood, slowly close the hood and make sure it locks into place.

Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident. If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood.

3-8

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

TRUNK LID
push the trunk lid down securely. Type B: Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See Precautions when starting and driving in the 5. Starting and driving section for exhaust gas. The trunk lid release button is located under the drivers arm rest. To open the trunk lid, push the release button. To close, push the trunk lid down securely.

SPA0093

OPENER OPERATION
Type A: The trunk lid release lever is located on the outside of the drivers seat. To open the trunk lid, pull up the trunk lid release lever. To close,
Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-9

FUEL FILLER LID

SPA0095

SPA0094

SPA0096

Cancel lever
When the lever is in the cancel position, the trunk lid cannot be opened with the trunk lid release lever or handle. It can be opened only with the key.

KEY OPERATION
To open the trunk lid, turn the key clockwise. To close, lower and push the trunk lid down securely.

OPENER OPERATION
Type A: To open the fuel filler lid, pull the opener lever. To lock, close the fuel filler lid securely. Type B: To open the fuel filler lid, push the opener lever down. To lock, close the fuel filler lid securely.

3-10

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle.
SPA0653

FUEL FILLER CAP

The fuel filler cap is a screw-on ratcheting type. Tighten the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are heard. Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder while refueling.

handled. Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling. Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the cap one-half turn, and wait for any hissing sound to stop to prevent fuel from spraying out and possible personal injury. Then remove the cap. Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel

If fuel is spilled on the car body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage. Tighten until the cap clicks. Failure to tighten the fuel cap properly may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate. If this occurs, securely close the fuel filler cap. After driven for a while, the light should remain off. If the light remains on, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer. For addiPre-driving checks and adjustments

Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mis-

3-11

STEERING WHEEL
tional information, see the Malfunction indicator light (MIL) in the 2. Instruments and controls section.

MIRRORS

SPA0111

SPA0470

TILT OPERATION
Push the lock lever and while holding down, adjust the steering wheel up or down to the desired position. Push the lock lever back into place to lock the steering wheel in place.

INSIDE MIRROR
The night position will reduce glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

3-12

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. Push the right or left end of the switch to select the right or left outside mirror, then adjust using the control lever.

SPA0112

MPA0008

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

Foldable outside mirrors

Push the outside mirror backward to fold it.

Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects. The outside mirror will operate only when the
Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-13

MEMO

3-14

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

4 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Ventilators ................................................................. 4-2 Heater and air conditioner (Manual) ......................... 4-3 Controls ..................................................................... 4-3 Heater operation ....................................................... 4-4 Air conditioner operation ........................................... 4-5 Air flow charts ........................................................... 4-6 Heater and air conditioner (Automatic) ..................... 4-9 Automatic operation ................................................ 4-10 Manual operation .................................................... 4-11 Ambient temperature switch (AMB) ........................ 4-11

Operating tips .......................................................... 4-11 Servicing air conditioner.......................................... 4-12 Audio system........................................................... 4-12 Radio ....................................................................... 4-12 FM-AM radio with cassette player .......................... 4-13 FM-AM radio with cassette player and compact disc (CD) player (Bose) .................................................. 4-19 Antenna ................................................................... 4-24 CB radio or car phone ............................................ 4-25

VENTILATORS

SAA0040

SAA0041

Adjust the air flow direction of ventilators.

Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction of ventilators. : This symbol indicates that the vents are closed when the vent switch is moved to the left. : This symbol indicates that the vents are open when the vent switch is moved to the right.

4-2

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (Manual) CONTROLS Fan control dial

This dial turns the fan on and off, and controls fan speed.

Air flow control buttons

These buttons allow you to select the air flow outlets. Air flows from center and side ventilators.
SAA0042A

Air flows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets. Air flows mainly from foot outlets. Air flows from defroster outlets and foot outlets. Air flows mainly from defroster outlets.

animals. The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets alone in your vehicle. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls should not be done while driving, in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation.

Temperature control lever

This lever allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air.

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-3

Air recirculation button

OFF position: Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment. Use the off position for normal heater, or air conditioner operation. ON position (Indicator light ON): Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the air recirculation button to the ON position when driving on a dusty road or to avoid traffic fumes and for maximum cooling when using the air conditioner.

HEATER OPERATION Heating

This mode is used to direct hot air from the floor outlets. Some air will also come from the defrost vents. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position for normal heating. 2. Push the button in.

4. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position.

Defrosting or defogging
This mode is used to defrost/defog the windows. 1. Push the button in. 2. Turn on the fan control dial. 3. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position between the middle and the HOT position. To quickly remove ice or fog from the windows, turn on the fan control dial to 4 and the temperature control lever to the full HOT position. When the button is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on to defog the windshield, and the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position between the middle and the HOT position. For quick heating, move the air recirculation button to the ON position. Be sure to return the air recirculation button to the OFF position for normal heating.

Air conditioning button

This button is provided only for vehicles with air conditioner. Start the engine, move the fan control dial to the desired (1 to 4) position and push the air conditioning button to turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light will come on when the air conditioner is on. To stop the air conditioner, push the switch again to return it to the original position. The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Ventilation
This mode directs outside air from the side and center vents. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in.

3. Turn on the fan control dial.

4-4

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Bi-level heating
This mode directs outside air from the side and center vents and hot air from the floor outlets. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in.

button is pushed, the air When the recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

the ON position. Be sure to return the air recirculation button to the OFF position for normal cooling.

Dehumidified heating
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION

Start the engine, move the fan control dial to the desired (1 to 4) position and push in the air conditioning button to activate the air conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions will be added to the heater operation.

3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Normally move the temperature control lever to the midpoint between HOT and COLD.

3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Push on the air conditioning button. The indicator light will come on. 5. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position.

Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs the windshield. 1. Push the button in.

Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in. 3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Push on the air conditioning button. The indicator light will come on. 5. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position. For quick cooling when the outside temperature is high, move the air recirculation button to

Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows and dehumidify. 1. Push the button in. 2. Turn on the fan control dial. 3. Push on the air conditioning button. The indicator light will come on. 4. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position. When the button is pushed, the air con-

2. Turn on the fan control dial. 3. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position between the middle and the HOT position.

Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and air inlet in front of the windshield. This will improve heater operation.

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-5

ditioner will automatically be turned on to defog the windshield, and the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

positions for maximum and quick heating, cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation button should be in the OFF position for normal cooling, heating and defrosting.

Operating tips
Keep the windows and sun roof closed while the air conditioner is in operation. After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3 minutes with the windows open to vent hot air from the passenger compartment. Then, close the windows. This will allow the air conditioner to cool the interior more quickly. The air conditioning system should be operated for about 10 minutes at least once a month. This helps prevent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication. If the coolant temperature gauge exceeds the HOT position, turn the air conditioning off. For additional information, see If your vehicle overheats in the 6. In case of emergency section.

AIR FLOW CHARTS

The chart below shows the button and lever

4-6

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

SAA0058C

SAA0059C

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-7

SAA0060C

SAA0061C

4-8

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (Automatic)

SAA0304

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-9

AUTOMATIC OPERATION
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets alone in your vehicle. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls should not be done while driving, in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation. Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner.

or ture.

to set the desired tempera-

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO)

This mode may be normally used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically. 1. Push the AUTO button on. (AUTO will be displayed.) 2. Push or ture. Adjust the temperature set button to about 75F (24C) for normal operation. The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically. the temperature set button to set the desired tempera-

The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically. Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature. Otherwise the system may not work properly. Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defogging
1. Push the DEF button on. (The indicator light on the button will come on.) 2. Push or ture. To quickly remove ice or fog from the outside of the windows, push the manual fan control button and set to the maximum position . As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, push the AUTO button to return to the auto mode. When the DEF button is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 35F the temperature set button to set the desired tempera-

Heating (ECON)
The air conditioner does not activate. When you need to heat only, use this mode. 1. Push the ECON (Economy) button on. (ECON will be displayed.) 2. Push the temperature set button

4-10

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

(2C) to defog the windshield, and the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

: : : :

Air flows from center and side ventilators. Air flows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets. Air flows mainly from foot outlets. Air flow from defroster and foot outlets.

MANUAL OPERATION Fan speed control

Push the fan control button control the fan speed. to manually

To turn system off

Push the OFF button.

Push the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SWITCH (AMB)

Push the ambient temperature switch. The outside ambient temperature will be displayed for approximately 5 seconds.

HA1011

Air recirculation
Push the air recirculation button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator light on the switch will come on. Push it again to make the air inlet controlled automatically (FRESH, REC/PRE and RECIRCULATION). The indicator will go out. The air recirculation button will not be activated when the air conditioner is in DEF mode.

OPERATING TIPS
When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature warms up, the air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally.

The sensor on the instrument panel helps maintain a constant temperature; do not put anything on or around this sensor.

Air flow control

Pushing the manual air flow control button selects the air outlet to:
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-11

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

The air conditioning system in your NISSAN vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind. This refrigerant will not harm the earths ozone layer. However, special charging equipment and lubricant are required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioning system. See Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the 10. Technical and consumer information section for air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations. Your NISSAN dealer will be able to service your environmentally friendly air conditioning system.

AUDIO SYSTEM RADIO

To turn the radio on, turn the ignition key to ACC or ON. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, turn the key to the ACC position. Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other external influences. Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences.

The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced technician with proper equipment.

4-12

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

FM-AM RADIO WITH CASSETTE PLAYER Audio main operation

Power/Volume control: Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, then push the Power/Volume control knob. The mode (radio or cassette) which was playing immediately before the system was turned off resumes playing. When no cassette is loaded, the radio comes on. Pushing the Power/ Volume control knob again turns the system off. Turn the Power/Volume control knob to adjust the volume.

SAA0263

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-13

FM-AM radio operation

FM-AM band select: Push the FM-AM band select button to listen to the radio and tune in the desired station. Pushing the FM-AM band select button will change the band FM1, FM2 or AM. The FM stereo indicator, ST illuminates during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception. TUNE (Tuning):
SAA0235

Adjusting tone quality and speaker balance: To adjust BASSTREBFADERBAL (Bass, Treble, Fader, Balance), press the AUDIO button until the desired mode (BAS, TRE, FAD or BAL) appears in the display. Press the or button to adjust BASS and TREB to the desired level. Use the or button to adjust FADER or BAL modes. FADER adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and BAL adjusts the sound level between the right and left speakers.

After 10 seconds, the radio or cassette tape display reappears. Once the sound quality is set to the desired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedly until the radio or cassette tape display appears.

The radio should not be tuned while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation. Push either manual tuning button . SEEK/SCAN tuning: Push the SEEK/SCAN tuning button or for less than 1.5 seconds. SEEK tuning begins from high to low or low to high frequencies and stops at the next broadcasting station. Pushing the button again continues the SEEK function. Once the highest broadcasting or

Radio/Cassette tape priority mode

In this mode, the radio station illuminates in the display during radio operation. During cassette tape operation, TAPE illuminates in the display.

4-14

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

station is reached, the radio continues in the SEEK mode at the lowest broadcast station. Push the SEEK/SCAN tuning button or for more than 1.5 seconds. SCAN illuminates in the display window. SCAN tuning begins from high to low or low to high frequencies and stops at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again during this 5 second period stops SCAN tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.

Station memory operations: Six stations can be set for the AM band. 12 stations can be set for the FM band (six for FM1, six for FM2). 1. Push the FM-AM band select button to select AM, FM1, or FM2. The selected band illuminates in the display. 2. Tune to the desired station. 3. Push the desired select than 1.5 seconds. For illustrations ch2 is to be radio mutes when the pushed. button for more example, in the memorized. The select button is

4. When the sound resumes, memorizing is complete. 5. Other station select buttons can be set in the same manner. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the radio fuse opens, the radio memory is cancelled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

Cassette tape player operation

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, then carefully insert a cassette tape into the tape door.
SAA0264

The cassette tape automatically pulls into the player. The word TAPE and moving digital
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-15

squares illuminate on the right side of the display window.

Do not use cassettes with labels which are peeling and loose. If used, the label could jam in the player. If a cassette has loose tape, insert a pencil through one of the cassette hubs and rewind the tape firmly around the hubs. Loose tape may cause tape jamming and wavering sound quality. Over a period of time, the playback head, capstan and pinch roller may collect a tape coating residue as the tape is played. This residue accumulation can cause weak or wavering sound, and should be removed periodically with a head cleaning tape. If the residue is not removed periodically, the player may need to be disassembled for cleaning. PLAY/STOP: Push the PLAY/STOP button while the cassette tape is playing to stop the tape. Push the button again to play the tape. FF (fast forward), REW (rewind): Push either the FF or REW button for the desired direction. The FF or REW symbol illuminates in the display.

To stop the FF or REW function, press the FF or REW button again, or the PLAY/STOP button. APS (automatic program search) FF, APS REW: Push either the APS FF or APS REW button while the cassette tape is playing. The tape runs quickly, stops, then plays the next selection. Either the FF or REW symbol flashes in the display while searching for the selection. This system searches at the blank intervals between selections. If there is a blank interval within one selection or there is no interval between selections, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location. PROG (program): Push the PROG button. The moving digital squares illuminate on either the right or left side of the display window to indicate the side of program play. Dolby NR (Noise Reduction): Push the Dolby NR button for Dolby NR encoded tapes to reduce high frequency tape noise. The indicator light comes on. Dolby NR is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

Do not force the cassette tape into the tape door. This could cause player damage. The cassette tape automatically changes directions to play the other side when the first side is complete. At this time, the moving digital squares illuminate on the left side of the display window. Precaution on cassette player operation: To maintain good quality sound, NISSAN recommends using cassette tapes of 60 minutes or shorter in length. Cassette tapes should be removed from the player when not in use. Store cassettes in their protective cases and away from direct sunlight, heat, dust, moisture and magnetic sources. Direct sunlight can cause the cassette to become deformed. The use of deformed cassettes may cause the cassette to jam in the player.

4-16

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

DOLBY NR and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Metal or chrome tape usage: The cassette player is automatically set to high performance play when playing a metal or chrome cassette tape. Ejecting the cassette tape: Push the EJECT button. The cassette tape automatically comes out.

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-17

SAA0302

4-18

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

FM-AM RADIO WITH CASSETTE PLAYER AND COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Bose) Audio main operation
Head unit The radio has an FM diversity reception system, which employs two antennas. One is a rod type antenna; the other is an antenna printed on the window. This system automatically switches to the antenna which is receiving less noise. The tape deck employs a permalloy head which allows for improved reproduction of high frequency ranges. Noise is also greatly reduced by the combined use of the Dolby NR (Noise Reduction) system. The auto loudness circuit enhances the low frequency range automatically in both radio reception and tape and CD playback. ONOFF/Volume control: Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then push the ONOFF/VOL control knob while the system is off to call up the mode (radio, tape or CD) which was playing immediately before the system was turned off. When no CD or tape is loaded, the radio will come on. While the system is on, pushing the ONOFF/VOL con-

trol knob turns the system off. To turn the radio off, press the ONOFF/VOL control knob. Turn the ONOFF/VOL control knob to adjust the volume.

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-19

If a compact disc or tape is playing when the FM/AM band select button is turned to ON, the compact disc or tape will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on. The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception. TUNE (Tuning):

SAA0305

Adjusting tone quality and speaker balance: To adjust BASS, TRE (Treble), BAL (Balance) and FAD (Fader), press the AUDIO button until the desired mode BAS, TRE, FAD or BAL appears in the display. Press the or button to adjust Bass (BAS) and Treble (TRE) to the desired level. Use the or button also to adjust Fader (FAD) or Balance (BAL) modes. FAD adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and BAL adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers. After 10 seconds, the radio or cassette tape display reappears. Once the sound quality is set to the desired level, press

the AUDIO button repeatedly until the radio or cassette tape display appears.

FM-AM radio operation

FM/AM band select: Pushing the FM/AM band select button will change the band FM1, FM2 or AM. When FM/AM band select button is pushed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON, the radio will come on at the station last played. The last station played will also come on when the power knob is turned to ON.

The radio should not be tuned while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation. Use these buttons for manual tuning. To move quickly through the channels, hold either of the TUNE buttons down for more than 0.5 seconds. SEEK/SCAN tuning: SEEK tuning: Push the SEEK/SCAN tuning button or for less than 1.5 seconds. SEEK tuning begins from high to low or low to high frequen-

4-20

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

cies and stops at the next broadcasting station. SCAN tuning: Push the SEEK/SCAN tuning button or for more than 1.5 seconds. SCAN tuning begins from high to low or low to high frequencies and stops at each broadcasting station for 10 seconds. Pushing the button again during this 10 seconds period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station. If the SEEK/SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 10 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station.

Station memory operations: Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (six for FM1, six for FM2). Six stations can be set for the AM band. 1. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK/SCAN or TUNE button. 2. Push the desired station select button for more than 1.5 seconds. (For example, in the diagram ch2 is to be memorized. The radio mutes when the select button is pushed.) 3. The indicator ch2 will then come on and the sound will resume. Memorizing is now complete. 4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse blows, the radio memory will be cancelled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

Cassette tape player operation

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then lightly insert the cassette tape into the tape door. The cassette tape will be automatically pulled into the player.
SAA0303

The radio or CD will turn off (if it is on) and the cassette tape will begin to play.
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-21

or loose labels. If used, the label could jam in the player. Do not force the cassette tape into the tape door. This could cause player damage. If the system is turned off by pushing the ONOFF/VOL control knob with the cassette tape still in the player, the tape will resume playing when the system is turned back on. Precautions on cassette tape player operation: To maintain good quality sound, NISSAN recommends that you use cassette tapes of 60 minutes or shorter in length. Cassette tapes should be removed from the player when not in use. Store cassettes in their protective cases and away from direct sunlight, heat, dust, moisture or magnetic sources. Direct sunlight can cause the cassette to become deformed. The use of deformed cassettes may cause the cassette to jam in the player. Do not use cassettes that have peeling If a cassette has loose tape, insert a pencil through one of the cassette hubs and rewind the tape firmly. Loose tape may cause jamming and wavering sound quality. Over a period of time, the playback head, capstan and pinch roller may gather a tape coating residue as the tape passes over the head. This residue accumulation can cause a weak or wavering sound and should be removed periodically with a head cleaning tape. If the residue is not removed periodically, the player may need to be disassembled for cleaning. PLAY: When the TAPE button is pushed with the system turned off and a tape loaded, the system will come on and the tape will play. When the TAPE button is pushed with either the radio or compact disc turned on and the tape loaded, the compact disc or the radio will automatically be turned off and the tape will play.

FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind): (fast forward) button to fast Push the forward the tape. To rewind the tape, push the (rewind) button. Either the FF or REW symbol illuminates on the right side of the display window. To stop the FF or REW function, press the (fast forward) or (rewind) again, or the TAPE button. APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS REW: When the (APS FF) button is pushed while the tape is being played, the next program will start to play from the beginning. Push the (APS FF) button several times to skip through programs. The tape will advance the number of times the button is pushed (up to nine programs). When the (APS REW) button is pushed once, the program being played starts over from the beginning. Push the (APS REW) button several times to skip back several selections. The tape will go back the number of times the button is pushed. Either the FF or REW symbol flashes on the right side of the display window while searching for the selection. This system searches for the blank intervals

4-22

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

between selections. If there is a blank interval within one program or there is no interval between programs, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location. PROG (Program): Push the PROG button to change the tape side while the tape is being played. The cassette tape will automatically change directions to play the other side when the first side is completed. Dolby NR (Noise Reduction): Push the Dolby NR button for Dolby NR encoded tapes to reduce high frequency tape noise. The indicator will come on. Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby NR and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Metal or chrome tape usage: The cassette player will be automatically set to high performance play when playing a metal or chrome cassette tape. TAPE EJECT: When this button is pushed with the tape loaded, the tape will be ejected.

When the tape is ejected while it is being played, the system will be turned off.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

During cold weather or rainy days, the player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely. The player may skip while driving on rough roads. The CD player sometimes cannot function when the compartment temperature is extremely high. Decrease the temperature before use. Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight. CDs that are of poor quality, dirty, scratched, or covered with fingerprints may not work properly. Do not use an 8 cm CD adapter as this will cause malfunction.

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up. The compact disc will be guided automatically into the slot and start playing. After loading the disc, the number of tracks on the disc and the play time will appear on the display. If the radio or tape is already operating, it will automatically turn off and the compact disc will play.

Do not force the compact disc into the slot. This could damage the player. If the system has been turned off while the compact disc was playing, pushing the ONOFF/VOL control knob will start the compact disc. 8 cm diameter compact discs can also be used without an adapter. PLAY: When the CD/CHG button is pushed with the system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play.
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-23

When the CD/CHG button is pushed with the compact disc loaded but the tape or the radio playing, the tape or radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play. FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind): When the (fast forward) or (rewind) button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the compact disc will return to normal play speed. APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS REW: When the (APS FF) button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the program next to the present one will start to play from its beginning. Push several times to skip through programs. The compact disc will advance the number of times the button is pushed. (When the last program on the compact disc is skipped through, the first program will be played.) When the (APS REW) button is pushed, the program being played returns to its beginning. Push several times to skip back through programs. The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pushed.

PROG (Program): When the PROG button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the play pattern will change as follows: no mark: All the programs will be played repeatedly in sequence. 1: Only one program (the one being played when the PROG button is pushed) will be repeated. RANDOM: Programs will be played at random, not following the sequence on the compact disc. The same program may be repeated twice. When the compact disc is ejected, the play pattern will automatically change to no mark. CD EJECT: When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be ejected. When this button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will come out and the system will turn off. If the compact disc comes out and is not removed, it will be pulled back into the slot

to protect it. (without 8 cm diameter compact discs) CD IN indicator: CD IN indicator appears on the display when the CD is loaded with the system on.

ANTENNA Manual antenna

The manual antenna cannot be shortened, but can be removed. When you need to remove the antenna, turn the antenna rod counterclockwise. To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna nut clockwise. Tighten the antenna rod to specification using a suitable tool, such as an openend wrench. The antenna rod tightening specification is 3.4 to 3.6 Nm (30 to 32 in-lb). Do not use pliers to tighten the antenna as they can leave marks on the antenna surface. The antenna rod cannot be hand tightened to the proper specification.

Always properly tighten the antenna rod during installation or the antenna rod may bend or break during vehicle

4-24

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

CB RADIO OR CAR PHONE

operation. splashed onto the antenna rod. When installing a CB, ham radio or a car phone in your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following cautions, otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the MFI (Multiport Fuel Injection) system and other electronic parts.

Power antenna (if so equipped)

The antenna will automatically extend when the radio is turned on, and retract when switched off. If the radio is left on, the antenna will retract and extend with the ignition key OFF-ON operation.

Before turning the radio on, make sure that there is no one near the antenna outlet and there is enough space for it to extend. To prevent damage, be sure that antenna is fully retracted before the vehicle enters an automated car wash. Dirt and other foreign matter on the power antenna rod may interrupt its operation. Clean the rod periodically with a damp cloth. This type of cleaning is especially important during the winter seasons in areas where road salt and other chemicals may be spread on road surfaces and

Keep the antenna as far as possible away from the Engine Control Module. Also keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the MFI harness. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness. Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer. Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body. For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-25

MEMO

4-26

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving...................... 5-2 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) .............................. 5-2 Three way catalyst .................................................... 5-2 Avoiding collision and rollover................................... 5-3 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving............................ 5-3 Ignition switch............................................................ 5-4 Automatic transmission ............................................. 5-4 Manual transmission ................................................. 5-5 Key positions ............................................................. 5-6 Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System (if so equipped) .................................................................. 5-6 Before starting the engine......................................... 5-6 Starting the engine .................................................... 5-7 Driving the vehicle..................................................... 5-7 Automatic transmission ............................................. 5-7 Manual transmission ............................................... 5-11 Parking brake .......................................................... 5-12 Cruise control .......................................................... 5-13 Precautions on cruise control.................................. 5-13

Cruise control operations ........................................ Break-in schedule ................................................... Increasing fuel economy ......................................... Parking/parking on hills ........................................... Power steering ........................................................ Brake system .......................................................... Anti-lock brake system (ABS) (if so equipped) ....................................................... Traction control system (if so equipped)................. Cold weather driving ............................................... Freeing a frozen door lock ...................................... Anti-freeze ............................................................... Battery ..................................................................... Draining of coolant water ........................................ Tire equipment ........................................................ Special winter equipment ........................................ Driving on snow or ice ............................................ Engine block heater (if so equipped) ......................

5-14 5-15 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 5-18 5-19 5-20 5-20 5-20 5-20 5-20 5-20 5-21 5-21 5-21

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING

Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time. Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets alone in your vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. Keep the trunk lid, closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with the trunk lid open, follow these precautions: 1. Open all the windows. 2. Set the air recirculation switch OFF and the fan control at 4 (high) to circulate the air. 3. Be sure the rear seat armrest and tray are closed. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death. If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately. Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage. If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the trunk lid or the body, follow the manufacturers recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle. If a special body or other equipment is added for recreational or other usage, follow the manufacturers recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle. (Some recreational vehicle appliances such as stoves, refrigerator, heaters, etc. may also generate carbon monoxide.) The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever: a. The vehicle is raised for service. b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment. c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system. d. You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

EXHAUST GAS (Carbon monoxide)

THREE WAY CATALYST

The three way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the converter are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

5-2

Starting and driving

spected promptly by an authorized NISSAN dealer. The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust pipe. Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire. Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three way catalyst. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.

trol could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects, or cause the vehicle to rollover, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt. See Seat Belts in the 1. Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems section. And also instruct your passengers to do so.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER

Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline seriously reduce the three way catalysts ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants. Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle in-

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident. Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with any vehicle, a loss of con-

Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgment. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in the accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury.
Starting and driving

5-3

IGNITION SWITCH
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. But, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol related accidents. Although the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol. Remember, drinking and driving dont mix! And thats true for drugs too (over the counter, prescription, and illegal drugs). Dont drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

Never remove the key while driving. If the key is removed, the steering wheel will lock. This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

SSD0055

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
On automatic transmission models, the ignition lock is designed so that the key cannot be turned to LOCK and removed until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park) position. When removing the key from the ignition, make sure the selector lever is in the P (Park) position. If the selector lever is not returned to P (Park) position, the key cannot be moved toward LOCK. When the key cannot be turned toward the

5-4

Starting and driving

LOCK position, proceed as follows to remove the key: 1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park) position. 2. Turn the ignition key slightly in the ON direction. 3. Turn the key toward the LOCK position. 4. Remove the key. If the key is removed from the ignition switch, the selector lever cannot be moved from P (Park) position. The selector lever can be moved if the ignition switch is in the ACC position. This allows the vehicle to be moved if the battery is discharged. The selector lever can also be moved if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed. There is an OFF position in between LOCK and ACC, although it does not show on the lock cylinder. When the ignition is in OFF the steering wheel is not locked. In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/6 of a turn counterclockwise from the straight up position. To lock the steering wheel, remove the key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steer-

ing wheel slightly right and left.

SSD0021

MANUAL TRANSMISSION
On manual transmission models, to turn the ignition key to LOCK from ACC or ON, turn the key to OFF and press in the key release button, then turn the key to LOCK. In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/6 of a turn counterclockwise from the straight up position. To lock the steering wheel, remove the key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steering wheel slightly right and left.

Starting and driving

5-5

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE KEY POSITIONS

The switch includes an anti-theft steering lock device. LOCK (Normal parking position) (0) The ignition key can only be removed when the switch is in this position. OFF (1) The engine can be turned off without locking the steering wheel. ACC (Accessories) (2) This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running. ON (Normal operating position) (3) This position turns on the ignition system and the electrical accessories. START (4) This position activates the starter motor, starting the engine. the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key. If the engine fails to start using the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key (for example, when interference is caused by another Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key, an automated toll road device or automated payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedures: 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 5 seconds. 3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again. 4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key. If the no start condition still occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices. Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear. Maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically, e.g., each time you check engine oil. Check that all windows and lights are clean. Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation. Lock all doors. Position seat and adjust head restraints. Adjust inside and outside mirrors. Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise. Check the operation of warning lights when key is turned to the ON (3) position.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (if so equipped)

The Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of

5-6

Starting and driving

STARTING THE ENGINE

1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Automatic transmission: Move the selector lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). (P preferred.) The selector lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) position and into any of the other gear positions if the key is removed from the switch. The starter is designed not to operate if the selector lever is in one of the driving positions. Manual transmission: Move the shift lever to N (Neutral) position, and depress the clutch pedal to the floor while cranking the engine. The starter is designed not to operate unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed. 3. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to START. Release the key when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure. If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold or hot weather, depress the accelerator pedal and hold it to help start the engine. In the summer, when restarting the engine within 30 minutes after it has been stopped, keep the accelerator pedal fully depressed while starting.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

The automatic transmission in your vehicle is electronically controlled by a transmission control module to produce maximum power and smooth operation. Shown on the following pages are the recommended operating procedures for this transmission. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment.

Do not operate the starter for more than 10 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, turn the key off and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged. 4. Warm-up Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather.

Starting the vehicle

After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal and push the selector lever button before shifting the selector lever to the R, N, D, 2 or 1 position. Be sure the vehicle is fully stopped before attempting to shift the selector lever. This automatic transmission is designed so that the foot brake pedal must be depressed before shifting from P (Park) position to any drive position while the ignition switch is ON. The selector lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) position and into any of the other gear positions if the key is removed from the switch.
Starting and driving

5-7

1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and shift into a driving gear. 2. Release the parking brake and foot brake, then gradually start the vehicle in motion. When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brakes should be used for this purpose.

Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P or N to R, D, 2 or 1. Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident. Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up. On slippery roads, do not downshift. This may cause a loss of control. Never shift to P or R while vehicle is moving. This could cause an accident.

SD1003M

Shifting
Push the button to shift into P, R or from D to 2. All other positions can be selected without pushing the button. P (Park): Use this selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Always be sure the vehicle is at a complete stop. For maximum safety, depress the brake pedal, then push in the select lever button and move the lever to the P (Park) position. Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply

5-8

Starting and driving

the parking brake first, then shift the lever into the P (Park) position. R (Reverse): Use this position to back up. Always be sure the vehicle is completely stopped. With the brake pedal depressed, push in the select lever button and move the lever to the R (Reverse) position N (Neutral): Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to N (Neutral) position and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving. D (Drive): Use this position for all normal forward driving. 2 (Second gear): Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades. Do not exceed 73 MPH (117 km/h) in the 2 (Second gear) position. 1 (Low gear): Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades.

Do not exceed 40 MPH (65 km/h) in the 1 (Low gear) position.

Shifting from P (Park)

If the ignition switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed, but the selector lever still cannot be moved out of P (Park) position, follow these instructions: 1. Shut the engine off and remove the key. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Reinsert the ignition key and turn it clockwise to the ACC position. 4. Depress the brake pedal, move the selector lever to N (Neutral) position and start the engine. 5. Check stop light operation.

(Neutral) position should only be used until service can be obtained. Never drive the vehicle if the stop lights are not operating properly.

Accelerator downshift In D position

For rapid passing or hill climbing, fully depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into second gear or first gear, depending on the vehicle speed.

If the selector lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position while the engine is running and the brake pedal depressed, the stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others. These instructions for starting the vehicle in N
Starting and driving

5-9

OFF: Changed for driving up and down long slopes where engine braking would be advantageous, push the overdrive switch. The O/D OFF light illuminates. When cruising at a low speed or climbing a gentle slope, you may feel uncomfortable shift shocks as the transmission shifts between third and overdrive repeatedly. In this case, press the overdrive switch. The O/D OFF indicator light comes on at this time. When driving conditions change, press the overdrive switch again. The O/D OFF indicator light goes out. Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time with the O/D OFF light illuminated. This reduces the fuel economy.

ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be activated. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, turn the ignition key OFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then turn the key back to the ON position. The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have your NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair if necessary.

SSD0110

Overdrive switch
Each time your vehicle is started, the transmission is automatically reset to overdrive ON. ON: For normal driving the overdrive switch is engaged. The transmission is upshifted into overdrive as the vehicle speed increases. The overdrive does not engage until the engine has warmed up.

Fail-safe
When the fail-safe operation occurs, the next time the key is turned to the ON position, the O/D OFF light will blink for approximately 8 seconds after coming on for 2 seconds. While the vehicle can be driven under these circumstances please note that the gears in the automatic transmission will be locked in third gear. If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-

5-10

Starting and driving

into R (Reverse) or 1 (Low gear) again.

Suggested up-shift speeds

Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance. Actual up-shift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather and individual driving habits. For normal acceleration in low altitude areas [less than 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]: Gear change 1st to 2nd 2nd to 3rd 3rd to 4th 4th to 5th ACCEL shift point MPH (km/h) 13 (21) 23 (37) 33 (53) 39 (63) CRUISE shift point MPH (km/h) 13 (21) 16 (26) 27 (43) 36 (58)

Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear. This may cause a loss of control or engine damage.
SSD0002

MANUAL TRANSMISSION Shifting

To change gears, fully depress the clutch pedal, then move the shift lever. After shifting, release the clutch slowly. On the five-speed transmission model, you cannot shift directly from fifth gear into the R (Reverse) position. First shift into the N (Neutral) position, then into the R (Reverse) position. If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R (Reverse) or 1 (Low gear), shift into N (Neutral), then release the clutch pedal and shift

Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This may cause clutch damage. Stop your vehicle completely before shifting into R (Reverse). When the vehicle is stopped for a duration, for example at a stop light, shift to N (Neutral) and release the clutch pedal with the foot brake applied.

For quick acceleration when the engine is cold or in high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]: Gear change 1st to 2nd 2nd to 3rd 3rd to 4th 4th to 5th MPH 15 25 40 45 (km/h) (24) (40) (64) (72)

Starting and driving

5-11

PARKING BRAKE Suggested maximum speed in each gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate. Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the highest gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits, and drive according to the road conditions, which will ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control. Gear 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th MPH (km/h) 30 (48) 55 (88) 80 (128) To apply: pull the lever up. To release: 1. Firmly apply foot brake. 2. Automatic transmission models: Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position. Manual transmission models: Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position. 3. While pulling up on the lever slightly, push the button and lower completely. Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident. Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle.
SSD0018

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out.

Do not use the gear shift in place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged. Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle. They could release the parking brake and cause an accident.

5-12

Starting and driving

CRUISE CONTROL PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL

Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions: it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed. in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed. on winding or hilly roads. on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.). in very windy areas. Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident. If the cruise control system malfunctions, it cancels automatically. The cruise indicator light in the instrument panel then blinks to warn the driver. If the cruise indicator light blinks, turn the cruise control main switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. The cruise indicator light may blink when the cruise control main switch is turned on while pushing the RES/ACCEL, COAST/ SET, or CANCEL switch (located on the steering wheel). To properly set the cruise control system, perform the preceding steps in the order indicated.

On manual transmission models, do not shift into N (Neutral) without depressing the clutch pedal when the cruise control is on. This could cause engine damage. If this happens, depress the clutch pedal and turn the main switch off immediately.
Starting and driving

5-13

a) Push the cancel switch; The CRUISE light will go out. b) Tap the brake pedal; The CRUISE light will go out. c) Turn the main switch off. Both the ON indicator and CRUISE lights will go out. If you depress the brake pedal while pushing the RES/ACCEL set switch and reset at the cruising speed, turn the main switch off once and then turn it on again. The cruise control will automatically be cancelled if the vehicle slows down below approximately 8 MPH (13 km/h). Depress the clutch pedal (manual transmission), or move the selector lever to N (Neutral) position (automatic transmission). The CRUISE light will go out. To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: a) Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the COAST/SET switch. b) Push and hold the RES/ACCEL set switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch. c) Push, then quickly release the RES/ACCEL

SSD0019B

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 30 to 89 MPH (48 to 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. To turn on the cruise control, push the main switch on. The indicator light on the switch will come on. To set at cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. (The CRUISE light will come on.) Take your foot off

the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed. To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed. The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the cruise control. To cancel the preset speed, follow either of these three methods:

5-14

Starting and driving

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
set switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: a) Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. b) Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed. c) Push, then quickly release the COAST/ SET switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES/ACCEL set switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 30 MPH (48 km/h). During the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km), follow these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life. Do not drive over 55 MPH (90 km/h) and do not run the engine over 4,000 rpm. Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow. Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear. Avoid quick starts. Avoid hard braking as much as possible. Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km).

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

SD1001M

Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position. Drive at moderate speeds on the highway. Driving at high speed will lower fuel economy. Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a safe distance behind other vehicles. Use a proper gear range which suits road conditions. On level roads, shift into high gear as soon as possible. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
Starting and driving

5-15

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
Keep your engine tuned up. Follow the recommended periodic maintenance schedule. Keep the tires inflated at the correct pressure. Low pressure will increase tire wear and waste fuel. Keep the front wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment will cause not only tire wear but also lower fuel economy. Air conditioner operation lowers fuel economy. Use the air conditioner only when necessary. When cruising at highway speeds, it is more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to reduce drag. Do not park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire. Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. 1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
MSD0002

2. Automatic transmission models: Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position. Manual transmission models: Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) position. When parking on an uphill grade, place the shift lever in the 1 (Low gear) position.

5-16

Starting and driving

POWER STEERING
2 HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: k

Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P (Park) for automatic transmission models or in an appropriate gear for manual transmission models. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. Make sure the automatic transmission selector lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the button at the end of the lever. 3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into the street when parked on a sloping drive way, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
1 HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: k

Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb. HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO 3 CURB: k Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves. 4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove the key.

The power assisted steering is designed to use a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering. If the engine stops or drive belt breaks, you will still have control of the vehicle. However, much greater steering effort is needed, especially in sharp turns or at low speeds.

If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be much harder to operate.

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.

Starting and driving

5-17

BRAKE SYSTEM
The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit develops a problem, you will still have braking at two wheels. Vacuum assisted brake The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and the stopping distance will be longer. Wet brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking. To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat-up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly. Using the brakes Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This overheats the brakes, increases wear on the brake linings and pads, and reduces gas mileage. To help save the brakes and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control. ning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident. If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder.

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances.

Normal operation
The anti-lock brake system will not operate at speeds below 3 to 6 MPH (5 to 10 km/h) to completely stop the vehicle. (The speeds will vary according to road conditions.) When the anti-lock system senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator (under the hood) rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure (like pumping the brakes very quickly). While the actuator is working, you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from the actuator under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the anti-lock system is working properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) (if so equipped)

The anti-lock brake system controls the brakes at each wheel so the wheels will not lock when braking abruptly or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing wheel lockup, the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spin-

5-18

Starting and driving

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (if so equipped) Self-test feature

The anti-lock brake system consists of electronic sensors, electric pumps, and hydraulic solenoids controlled by a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of any malfunction. If the computer senses any malfunction, it switches the antilock brake system OFF and turns on the ABS warning light in the dashboard. The brake system will then behave normally, but without anti-lock assistance. If the light comes on during the self check, or while you are driving, you should take your vehicle to your NISSAN dealer for repair at your earliest convenience. the stopping distance on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces, even with the anti-lock system. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the responsibility for safety of self and others rests in the hands of the driver. Tire type and condition of tires may also affect braking effectiveness. When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels. When installing a spare tire, make sure it is the proper size and type as specified on the tire placard. See Vehicle identification in the 10. Technical and consumer information section for tire placard location. On slippery surfaces such as wet asphalt roads, vehicle wheels may spin when the vehicle is accelerated. This wheel spin reduces acceleration, or causes the vehicle to swerve, thus decreasing vehicle stability. The traction control system helps limit wheel spin on slippery roads. The system operates only if it senses one or both of the front wheels spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the system reduces engine power and may also upshift the transmission to help limit wheel spin. Indicator light If a malfunction occurs in the traction control system, the SLIP and indicator lights come on in the meter panel. As long as these warning lights are on, the traction control function is canceled. The vehicle will behaves like a model without the traction control system.

The anti-lock brake system is a sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces, but remember that

The traction control system is most effective when the transmission gear selector is in the D position. If you drive in gear 1 or 2 with the TCS on, this could cause the three way catalyst to overheat and be damaged.
Starting and driving

5-19

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

To avoid this, the TCS will automatically turn off. Shifting the gear selector to D will reactivate the TCS.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer or glycerin to it through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole.

the 8. Do-it-yourself section for changing engine coolant.

TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires are of a tread design to provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels. Please consult your NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability information. 2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some provinces and states prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires. 3. Tire chains may be used if desired. Make sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturers suggestions. Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before

ANTI-FREEZE
This system is designed to prevent the wheels from spinning. However, it does not prevent vehicle slipping or spinning due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Be especially careful when driving on slippery surfaces and always drive safely. In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32F (0C), check anti-freeze (ethylene glycol base) to assure proper winter protection. For additional information, see Engine Cooling System in the 8. Do-it-yourself section.

BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. For additional information, see Battery in the 8. Do-ityourself section.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-freeze, drain the cooling system by opening the drain valves located under the radiator and on the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. See Engine cooling system in

5-20

Starting and driving

installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturers suggestions. Use only SAE Class S chains. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected. Never install tire chains on a T-type spare tire. Do not use tire chains on dry roads.

a shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts. extra window washer fluid to refill the reservoir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter: a scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades. a sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support.

Wet ice (32F, 0C and freezing rain), very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have a lot less traction or grip under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded. Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction. Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement. Allow greater following distances on slippery roads. Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These may appear on an otherwise

clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while actually on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads. Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so equipped)

An engine block heater to assist extreme cold temperature starting is available through your NISSAN dealer.

Do not use your heater with an ungrounded electrical system or twopronged (cheater) adapters. You can be injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection.

Starting and driving

5-21

MEMO

5-22

Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Flat tire ...................................................................... Changing a flat tire.................................................... Jump starting............................................................. Push starting .............................................................

6-2 6-2 6-7 6-9

If your vehicle overheats ......................................... Towing your vehicle ................................................ Towing recommended by NISSAN ......................... Vehicle recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle).............

6-10 6-11 6-11 6-12

FLAT TIRE CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below. Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous. Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road away from traffic. 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. 3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Shift the manual transmission into R (Reverse) position (automatic transmission in P (Park) position). 4. Turn off the engine. 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance. 6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

MCE0001

Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up.

Make sure that the parking brake is securely applied and the manual transmission is shifted into R (Reverse), or the automatic transmission into P (Park).

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and could cause personal injury.

6-2

In case of emergency

SCE0207A

Removing wheel cover

SCE0036

SCE0037

Do not use your hands to pry off wheel caps. Doing so could result in personal injury.

Getting the spare tire and tools

Remove jacking tools and spare tire from the storage area located inside the trunk as illustrated.

In case of emergency

6-3

SCE0053

CE1089

Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire

Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instructions. 1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point as illustrated above so that top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack up point. Align the jack head between the two notches in the front or the rear as shown. Also fit the groove of the jack head between the notches as shown.

6-4

In case of emergency

 Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary. Never use blocks on or under the jack. Do not start or run engine while vehicle is on the jack, as it may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slid differential carriers. Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack.
CE1092

The jack should be used on level firm ground. 2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground. 3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands as shown above. Remove the wheel nuts, and then remove the tire. Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Use only the jack provided with your vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed only for lifting your vehicle during a tire change. Use the correct jack up points; never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support.
In case of emergency

6-5

has been run for 600 miles (1,000 km) after installing the aluminum wheel. Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident. Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose. As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench. Wheel nut tightening torque: 72 to 87 ft-lb (98 to 118 Nm) Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure. COLD pressure: After vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire placard affixed to the center console lid. Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle

SCE0039

Installing the spare tire

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub. 2. Carefully put the wheel on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight. 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly until they are tight. 4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence as illustrated.

6-6

In case of emergency

JUMP STARTING
gency use. See Tires and wheels in the 8. Do-it-yourself section. To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be followed.

If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle. Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery. Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, cloth or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulphuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water. Keep battery out of the reach of children. The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.
In case of emergency

SCE0040

Stowing the damaged tire and tools

Securely store the spare tire and jacking equipment in the vehicle.

Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly secured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop. The T-type spare tire and small size spare tire are designed for emer-

6-7

 Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting. Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause serious injury. Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it.

SCE0154A

Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury. 1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the two vehicles to bring their batteries into close proximity to each other. Do not allow the two vehicles to touch. 2. Apply parking brake. Move the shift lever to

the N (Neutral) position (On automatic transmission models, move the selector lever to the P (Park) position). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (light, heater, air conditioner, etc.). 3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so equipped). Cover the battery with an old cloth to reduce explosion hazard. 4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as illustrated.

6-8

In case of emergency

PUSH STARTING
7. After starting your engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable. Always connect positive (+) to positive (+) and negative () to body ground (for example, strut mounting bolt, etc. not to the battery). Make sure that cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that clamps do not contact any other metal. 5. Start the engine of the other vehicle and let it run for a few minutes. 6. Keep the engine speed of the other vehicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start your engine in the normal manner. 8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid. Automatic transmission models cannot be push started. This may cause transmission damage. Three way catalyst equipped models should not be started by pushing since the three way catalyst may be damaged. Never try to start the vehicle by towing it; when the engine starts, the forward surge could cause the vehicle to collide with the tow vehicle.

Do not keep starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, turn the key off and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

In case of emergency

6-9

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

and fan control to high speed. Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause a vehicle fire. To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the radiator cap while the engine is still hot. When the radiator cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury. Do not open the hood if steam is coming out. If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take the following steps: 1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position (automatic transmission to the P (Park) position). Do not stop the engine. 2. Turn off the air conditioner switch. Open all the windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting burned. 6. Visually check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine. 3. If engine overheating is caused by climbing a long hill on a hot day, run the engine at a fast idle (approximately 1,500 rpm) until the temperature gauge indication returns to normal. 4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. Wait until no steam or coolant can be seen before proceeding. 5. Open the engine hood. Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or to get caught in the cooling fan, or drive belt. The fan motor can start at any time when the coolant temperature is high. 7. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the reservoir tank with the engine running. Add coolant to the reservoir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at the nearest NISSAN dealer.

6-10

In case of emergency

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in Canada) and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from your NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions. Always attach safety chains before towing.

Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed. Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck.
SCE0202

When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system, and powertrain are in working condition. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground as illustrated.
In case of emergency

6-11

 Always release the parking brake when towing with the rear wheels on the ground. When towing manual transmission models with the front wheels on the ground (If you do not use a towing dolly): Turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never place the ignition key in the LOCK position. This will result in damage to the steering lock mechanism. Move the gearshift lever to the N (Neutral) position.
SCE0199

and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised, always use a towing dollies under the front wheels. Never tow an automatic transmission model from the rear (that is, backward) with four wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (Freeing a stuck vehicle)

Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle. Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or cooling systems. Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull on the vehicle at an angle. Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery. Stand clear of an stuck vehicle.

Never tow an automatic transmission models with the front wheels on the ground as this may cause serious

6-12

In case of emergency

Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.

In case of emergency

6-13

MEMO

6-14

In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ....................................................... Washing .................................................................... Waxing ...................................................................... Removing spots ........................................................ Underbody ................................................................. Glass ......................................................................... Aluminum alloy wheels.............................................. Chrome parts ............................................................ Cleaning interior ........................................................

7-2 7-2 7-2 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-4 7-4 7-4

Floor mats ................................................................. Seat belts .................................................................. Corrosion protection .................................................. Most common factors contributing to vehicle corrosion.................................................................... Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion.................................................................... To protect your vehicle from corrosion .....................

7-4 7-5 7-5 7-5 7-5 7-6

CLEANING EXTERIOR
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area. When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover. Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover. cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so that the paint surface is not scratched or damaged. Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of clean water. Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be regularly cleaned. Make sure that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt. Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle. Do not use strong household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents. Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted. Avoid using tight-napped or rough

WASHING
Thoroughly rinse surface dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and plenty of clean water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap such as Nissan Car Wash, or a general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

MAI0001

In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it. In the following cases, please wash your vehicle as soon as possible to protect the paint surface. After a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain After driving on coastal roads When contaminants such as soot, bird droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface When dust or mud builds up on the surface

WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. After waxing, polishing is recommended to remove built-up residue and to avoid a weathered appearance. If you wish to wax your vehicle, only use a wax specified for use over clear coats, such as Nissan Liquid or Spray Wax. Your Nissan

7-2

Appearance and care

dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product. Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax. Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish. If the surface does not polish easily, use a road tar remover and wax again. Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

SAI0014A

REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at your NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store.

GLASS
When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier to clean if the high-mounted stop light is removed first. Be careful when removing the high-mounted stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the high-mounted stop light wires. The high-mounted stop light must be properly reinstalled before driving your vehicle. Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner
Appearance and care

UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, the underbody must be cleaned regularly. This will prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing underbody and suspension corrosion. Before the winter period and again in the

7-3

CLEANING INTERIOR
and a soft cloth will easily remove this film. Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry soft cloth. Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturers recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material. pedal operation. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.

When cleaning the inside of the window, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the rear window defogger.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash regularly, especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. Salt could discolor the wheel if not removed. Never use benzine, thinner, or any similar material. The leather seats should be regularly coated with a leather wax like saddle soap. Never use car wax. Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer.

CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

FLOOR MATS
The use of Genuine Nissan floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. No matter what mats are used, be sure they are fitted for your vehicle and are properly positioned in the footwell to prevent interference with

7-4

Appearance and care

CORROSION PROTECTION SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely before using them.

MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION:

The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas. Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents.

Do not allow wet belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or chemical solvents since these may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.
SAI0012

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION: Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle, and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.

Floor mat positioning aid (Driver side only)

This model includes a front floor mat bracket to act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your vehicle model. The drivers side floor mat has a grommet hole incorporated in it. Simply position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket through the floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in the floorpan contour. Periodically check to make certain that the mats are properly positioned.

Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used.
Appearance and care

7-5

Temperature
A temperature increase will accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated. NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom. Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them. Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders. In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically. For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, consult your local NISSAN dealer.

Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will also accelerate the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION:

Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean. Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible. Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation. Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible.

7-6

Appearance and care

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions .......................................... 8-2 Engine compartment check locations ....................... 8-4 Engine cooling system .............................................. 8-5 Checking engine coolant level .................................. 8-5 Changing engine coolant .......................................... 8-6 Engine oil .................................................................. 8-7 Checking engine oil level .......................................... 8-7 Changing engine oil .................................................. 8-8 Changing engine oil filter .......................................... 8-9 Automatic transmission fluid ................................... 8-10 Temperature conditions for checking...................... 8-10 Power steering fluid ................................................ 8-11 Brake and clutch fluid ............................................. 8-12 Window washer fluid ............................................... 8-12 Battery ..................................................................... 8-13 Drive belts ............................................................... 8-15 Spark plugs ............................................................. 8-15 Replacing spark plugs............................................. 8-16 Air cleaner ............................................................... 8-17

Windshield wiper blades ......................................... Cleaning .................................................................. Replacement ........................................................... Parking brake and brake pedal............................... Checking parking brake .......................................... Checking brake pedal ............................................. Brake booster .......................................................... Clutch pedal ............................................................ Fuses....................................................................... Engine compartment ............................................... Passenger compartment ......................................... Lights....................................................................... Headlights ............................................................... Exterior and interior lights ....................................... Tires and wheels ..................................................... Tire pressure ........................................................... Types of tires .......................................................... Tire chains............................................................... Changing tires and wheels......................................

8-18 8-18 8-19 8-20 8-20 8-20 8-21 8-21 8-21 8-22 8-23 8-24 8-25 8-26 8-31 8-31 8-32 8-33 8-33

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed. If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts. It is advisable to remove necktie and any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle. Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle. If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases. Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands. Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks away from fuel and the battery. On gasoline engine models with the Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System, the fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off.

Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. For a manual transmission, move the shift lever to N (Neutral) position. For an automatic transmission, move the selector lever to P (Park) position. Be sure the ignition key is OFF or LOCK when performing any parts replacement or repairs. Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition key is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan.

Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn off the engine and wait until it cools down. Never connect or disconnect either the battery or any transistorized component connector while the ignition key is on. Never leave the engine or the automatic transmission related component harness connector disconnected while the ignition key is on. Avoid direct contact with used engine oil. Improperly disposed motor oil and/or other vehicle fluids can hurt the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid. This 8. Do-it-yourself section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

8-2

Do-it-yourself

You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect your warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, have it done by your NISSAN dealer.

Do-it-yourself

8-3

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

SDI0495A

8-4

Do-it-yourself

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, year-round, antifreeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors, therefore additional cooling system additives are not necessary.

Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. See If your vehicle overheats in the 6. In case of emergency section. The radiator is equipped with a pressure cap. Use only a genuine cap as a replacement.
SDI0747

When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only a genuine NISSAN antifreeze coolant or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized water/distilled water. The use of other types of coolant solutions may damage your engine cooling system.
Outside temperature down to C 35 F 30 50% Demineralized water/ distilled water 50%

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below MIN, add coolant up to the MAX level. If the reservoir tank is empty, check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir tank up to the MAX level. If the engine cooling system frequently requires coolant, have it checked by your NISSAN dealer.
Do-it-yourself

Antifreeze

8-5

 Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheating.

To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. 1. Open the radiator cap and drain plug. 2. Open the drain plug on the engine block. 3. Flush the cooling system by running fresh water through the radiator. 4. Close the radiator drain plug and the drain plug on the engine block securely.
SDI0114

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

Major cooling system repairs should be performed by your NISSAN dealer. The service procedures can be found in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual.

5. See Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the 10. Technical and consumer information section for cooling system capacity. Fill the radiator slowly with the proper mixture of coolant and water. Fill the reservoir tank up to the MAX level. Then install the radiator cap.

8-6

Do-it-yourself

ENGINE OIL

SDI0138

SDI0115

6. Start the engine, and warm it up until the radiator fan operates. Then race the engine two or three times under no load. Watch the coolant temperature gauge for signs of overheating. 7. Stop the engine. After it completely cools down, refill the radiator up to the filler opening. Fill the reservoir tank up to the MAX level. 8. Check the radiator drain plug and the drain plug on the engine block for any sign of leakage.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply parking brake. 2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature. 3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way.

Do-it-yourself

8-7

Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating with insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.

SDI0534

SDI0139

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be between the H and L marks. If the oil level is below the L mark, remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening. Do not overfill. 6. Recheck oil level with dipstick. It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature. 3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. 4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug. 5. Remove the oil filler cap.

8-8

Do-it-yourself

6. Remove the drain plug with a wrench and completely drain the oil. If oil filter is to be changed, remove and replace it at this time. See later in Engine oil for changing engine oil filter.

depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine. 9. Start the engine. Check for leakage around the drain plug. Correct as required.

Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot. Waste oil must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations. 7. Clean and re-install the drain plug and new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Drain plug tightening torque: 22 to 29 ft-lb (29 to 39 Nm) Do not use excessive force. 8. Refill engine with recommended oil and install the cap securely. See Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the 10. Technical and consumer information section for drain and refill capacity. The drain and refill capacity

10.Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary. 11.Dispose of waste oil in the proper manner.
SDI0140

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. Keep used engine oil out of reach of children. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Turn the engine off. 3. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench. (Depending on the engine model, a special cap type wrench may be required. See your NISSAN dealer if in doubt.) Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

Do-it-yourself

8-9

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS FOR CHECKING

Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil may be hot. 4. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with a clean rag. Be sure to remove any old rubber gasket remaining on the mounting surface of the engine. 5. Coat the rubber gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil. 6. Screw in the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten additionally more than 2/3 turn. Oil filter tightening torque: 10.85 to 15.19 ft-lb (14.7 to 20.6 Nm) 7. Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter. Correct as required. 8. Turn the engine off and wait several minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if necessary. When engine is running, keep hands, jewelry and clothing away from any moving parts such as cooling fan and drive belt. Automatic transmission fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children. The fluid level should be checked using the HOT range on the dipstick after the following conditions have been met: a) the engine should be warmed up to operating temperature. b) the vehicle should be driven at least 5 minutes. c) the automatic transmission fluid should be warmed to between 122 and 176F (50 and 80C). The fluid can be checked at fluid temperatures of 86 to 122F (30 to 50C) using the COLD range on the dipstick after the engine is warmed up and before driving. However, the fluid should be re-checked using the HOT range. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the parking brake. 2. Start the engine and then move the selector lever through each gear range. Move the selector lever to P (Park) position after you have moved it through all ranges.

SDI0748

8-10

Do-it-yourself

POWER STEERING FLUID

Do not overfill. Use only NISSAN Matic D (Continental US and Alaska) or genuine automatic transmission fluid (Canada). DexronTMIII/MerconTM or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental US and Alaska contact a NISSAN dealer for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of DexronTM III/MerconTM automatic transmission fluid. NOTE: If the vehicle has been driven for a long time at high speeds, or in city traffic in hot weather, or if it is being used to pull a trailer, the accurate fluid level cannot be read. You should wait until the fluid has cooled down (about 30 minutes).

SDI0496

SDI0118

3. Check the fluid level with the engine idling. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean with lint-free paper. 5. Reinsert the dipstick into the charging pipe as far as it will go. 6. Remove the dipstick and note the reading. If the level is at the low side of either range, add fluid to the charging pipe.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir tank. The fluid level should be checked using the HOT range at fluid temperatures of 122 to 176F (50 to 80C) or using the COLD range at fluid temperatures of 32 to 86F (0 to 30C).

Do not overfill. Use type DEXRONTMIII or equivalent.

Do-it-yourself

8-11

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID

ability.

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

Do not spill the fluid on painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, wash with water.

SDI0119

SDI0189

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is below the MIN line or the brake warning light comes on, add DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be thoroughly checked by your NISSAN dealer.

Type A: Add fluid when the low washer fluid warning light comes on. Add a washer solvent to the water for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer anti-freeze. Follow the manufacturers instructions for the mixture ratio.

Use only new fluid. Old, inferior, or contaminated fluid may damage the brake and clutch systems. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehicles stopping

8-12

Do-it-yourself

BATTERY
Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Any corrosion should be washed off with a solution of baking soda and water. Anti-freeze is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children. Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened. If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the () negative battery terminal cable to prevent discharge.

Do not substitute engine anti-freeze coolant for window washer solution. This may result in damage to the paint.
SDI0497

Type B: To check the fluid level, use your finger to plug the center hole of the cap (as shown above), then remove it from the tank. If there is no fluid in the tube, add fluid. Add a washer solvent to the water for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer anti-freeze. Follow the manufacturers instructions for the mixture ratio.

Do not expose the battery to flames or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas generated by battery action is explosive. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry. Keep the battery out of the reach of
Do-it-yourself

8-13

children.

If jump starting is necessary, see Jump starting the 6. In case of emergency section. If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. Contact your NISSAN dealer.

DI0137M

Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX and MIN lines. If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level to the indicator in each filler opening. Do not overfill. 1. Remove the cell plugs. 2. Add distilled water up to the MAX level. 3. Tighten cell plugs.

8-14

Do-it-yourself

DRIVE BELTS

SPARK PLUGS

Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.

Be sure to use the correct wrench to remove the plugs. An incorrect wrench can cause damage.
SDI0141

Be sure the ignition key is OFF. The engine could rotate unexpectedly. 1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying, oil adhesion or looseness. If the belt is in poor condition or loose, have it replaced or adjusted by your NISSAN dealer. 2. Have the belts checked regularly for condition and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual.
Do-it-yourself

8-15

SDI0122

SDI0123

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

1. Remove the rocker cover ornament using a suitable hexagon wrench. (Front side) 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Loosen the ignition coil fixing bolts. And remove the ignition coil to give access to the spark plugs. 4. Remove the spark plugs with a spark plug wrench. The plug wrench has a rubber seal that holds the spark plug so that it will not fall when it is pulled out. Make sure that each

spark plug is snugly fitted into the plug wrench. 5. Fit the new plugs, one at a time, into the spark plug wrench and install them. Turn each plug in several full turns by hand, then tighten with a spark plug wrench to the correct torque. Do not overtighten. Spark plug tightening torque: 14 to 22 ft-lb (20 to 29 Nm)

6. Holding the ignition coil, re-connect each ignition coil to its proper spark plug by pushing it on until you feel a snap. 7. Tighten all ignition coils.

8-16

Do-it-yourself

AIR CLEANER

SDI0498

SDI0145

SDI0121

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace the platinumtipped spark plugs as frequently as the conventional type spark plugs since they will last much longer. Follow the maintenance schedule but, do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping. Always replace with recommended platinum-tipped spark plugs.

The filter element should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance intervals. See Periodic maintenance schedules in the 9. Maintenance section for maintenance intervals. When replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp cloth.

Operating the engine with the air cleaner off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if the
Do-it-yourself

8-17

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

engine backfires. If it is not there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner off. Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury.

CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield. Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water. Clean the blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blade with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.

8-18

Do-it-yourself

DI1018M

REPLACEMENT
1. Pull the wiper arm. 2. Push the lock pin, then remove the wiper blade. 3. Insert the new wiper blade to the wiper arm until a click sounds. After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position. Otherwise it may be damaged when the engine hood is opened. Make sure the wiper blade contacts the glass, otherwise the arm may be damaged from wind pressure.
SDI0146

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle. This may cause clogging or improper windshield washer operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin.
Do-it-yourself

8-19

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE PEDAL

See your NISSAN dealer and have it checked if the brake pedal height does not return to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched scraping or screeching sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard. Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system. Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For additional information, see Periodic maintenance schedules in the 9. Maintenance section for maintenance intervals.

SDI0125

DI1020MD

CHECKING PARKING BRAKE

From the released position, pull the parking brake lever up slowly and firmly. If the number of clicks is out of the range listed above, see your NISSAN dealer.

CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL

With the engine running, check the distance between the upper surface of the pedal and the metal floor. If it is out of the range shown above, see your NISSAN dealer.

Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes. The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied.

8-20

Do-it-yourself

CLUTCH PEDAL BRAKE BOOSTER

Check the brake booster function as follows: 1. With the engine off, press and release the brake pedal several times. When brake pedal movement (distance of travel) remains the same from one pedal application to the next, continue on to the next step. 2. While depressing the brake pedal, start the engine. The pedal height should drop a little. 3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the engine. Keeping the pedal depressed for about 30 seconds, the pedal height should not change. 4. Run the engine for one minute without depressing the brake pedal, then turn it off. Depress the brake pedal several times. The pedal travel distance will decrease gradually with each depression as the vacuum is released from the booster. If the brakes do not operate properly, see your NISSAN dealer.

FUSES

Never use a fuse of higher amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire.

DI1021MC

Press the pedal by hand and be sure the free travel is within the limits shown above. If free travel is too little or too much, see your NISSAN dealer.

Do-it-yourself

8-21

system checked and repaired by your NISSAN dealer.

SDI0126

SDI0128

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition key and headlight switch are OFF. 2. Open the engine hood. 3. Remove the fusible link cover. 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. 5. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse. 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

Fusible links
If any electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace only with genuine NISSAN parts.

8-22

Do-it-yourself

SDI0335

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition key and the headlight switch are OFF. 2. Pull to open the fuse box lid. 3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. 4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse. 5. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by your NISSAN dealer.
Do-it-yourself

8-23

LIGHTS

SDI0735

8-24

Do-it-yourself

HEADLIGHTS
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. A bulb can be replaced from inside the engine compartment without removing the headlight assembly.

Replacing the headlight bulb

1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the rear end of the bulb. 3. Turn the bulb retaining ring counterclockwise until it is free from the headlight reflector, then remove it. 4. Remove the headlight bulb. Do not shake or rotate the bulb when removing it. 5. Insert the bulb into the headlight reflector with the flat side of the plastic base facing upward. 6. Install the bulb retaining ring and turn it clockwise until it stops. 7. Push the electrical connector into the bulb plastic base until it snaps and stops. 8. Connect the battery negative cable. Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact your NISSAN dealer.

High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped. Hold the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope.

SDI0129

Do-it-yourself

8-25

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) 27/8 27 3.8 55 Bulb No. 1157 1156 194

Do not touch the bulb. Use the same number and wattage as originally installed: Wattage 65/45 Bulb no. 9004 Do not leave the bulb out of the headlight reflector for a long period of time as dust, moisture, and smoke may enter the headlight body and affect the performance of the headlight.

Clearance Front turn signal light Front side marker light Front fog light (if so equipped) Rear combination light Turn signal Stop/Tail Back-up Side marker light License plate light High-mounted stop light (if so equipped) Interior light Front personal light Step light Trunk light Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)

27 27/8 18 3.8 5 18 10 10 2.7 3.4 1.4

1156 1157 921 194

921

161 158

8-26

Do-it-yourself

MDI0006

Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or cover.

Do-it-yourself

8-27

SDI0131A

8-28

Do-it-yourself

SDI0736

SDI0737

SDI0503A

Do-it-yourself

8-29

SDI0784

8-30

Do-it-yourself

TIRES AND WHEELS

SDI0333A

DI1033M

If you have a flat tire, see Flat tire in the 6. In case of emergency section.

TIRE PRESSURE Maximum inflation pressure

Do not exceed the maximum inflation pressures shown on the side wall of the tire.

Tire inflation pressure

Periodically check the tire pressure (including spare). Incorrect tire pressure may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling. Tire pressure should be checked when tires are COLD. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven
Do-it-yourself

SDI0756

8-31

less than 1 mile (1.6 km). COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire placard affixed to the center console lid.

ing faster than 85 MPH (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury.

Snow tires have better snow traction than all season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

TYPES OF TIRES
Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident. The vehicle capacity weight is indicated on the tire placard. Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components. Before taking a long trip, or whenever you have loaded your vehicle heavily, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressure is at the specified level. Do not drive your vehicle over 85 MPH (140 km/h) unless it is equipped with high speed capability tires. DrivWhen changing or replacing tires, be sure all four tires are of the same type (i.e., summer, all season or snow) and construction. Your NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability. Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance in snow and ice will be substantially reduced. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire sidewall. If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of snow or all season tires on all four wheels.

Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Generally, snow tires will have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire. If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of snow or all season tires on all four wheels.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies all season tires on some models to provide good performance for use all year around, including snowy and icy road conditions. All season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall.

8-32

Do-it-yourself

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some provinces and states prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

After rotating the tires, adjust the tire pressure. Retighten the wheel nuts after the aluminum wheels have been run for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). Do not include the T-type spare tire or any other small size spare tire in the tire rotation.
DI0048-B

TIRE CHAINS
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturers suggestions. Use only SAE class S chains. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or undercarriage. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected. Never install tire chains on a T-type spare tire. Do not use the chains on dry roads.

CHANGING TIRES AND WHEELS Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends that tires be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). Wheel nut tightening torque: 72 to 87 ft-lb (98 to 118 Nm) See Flat tire in the 6. In case of emergency section for tire replacing procedures.

Do-it-yourself

8-33

may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the T-type spare tire, contact your NISSAN dealer.

Replacing tires and wheels

When replacing a tire, use the same size, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. See Specifications in the 10. Technical and consumer information section for recommended types and sizes of tires and wheels.
MDI0004

which have the same offset dimension. Wheels of a different offset could cause early tire wear, possibly degraded vehicle handling characteristics and/or interference with the brake discs. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad wear. Do not install a deformed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning. The use of retread tire is not recommended.

Tire wear and damage

Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging, or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging, or deep cuts are found, the tire should be replaced. The original tires have a built-in tread wear indicator. When the wear indicator is visible, the tire should be replaced. Improper service for a T-type spare tire

The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury. If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels

Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required. Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the front wheels on the vehicle could lead to transmission damage.

8-34

Do-it-yourself

Care of wheels
Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance. Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed. Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels. Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead. NISSAN recommends that the road wheels be waxed to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter. The T-type spare tire should be used only for emergency. It should be replaced by the standard tire at the first opportunity. Drive carefully while the T-type spare tire is installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving. Periodically check the T-type spare tire inflation pressure, and always keep it at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar). Do not drive your vehicle at speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h). Do not use tire chains on a T-type spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly on the T-type spare tire and may cause damage to the vehicle. When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, the T-type spare tire should be used on the rear wheel and the original tire used on the front wheels (drive wheels). Use tire chains only on the front two original tires.

Tire tread of the T-type spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the original tire. Replace the T-type spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear. Because the T-type spare tire is smaller than the original tire, ground clearance is reduced. To avoid damage to the vehicle do not drive over obstacles. Also do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught. Do not use the T-type spare tire on other vehicles. Do not use more than one T-type spare tire at the same time. Do not tow a trailer while the T-type spare tire is installed.

Spare tire (T-type spare tire)

US only. Canadian vehicles are equipped with a full size spare tire. Observe the following precautions if the T-type spare tire must be used, otherwise your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident.

Do-it-yourself

8-35

MEMO

8-36

Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance

General maintenance ................................................ 9-3 Explanation of maintenance items ............................ 9-3 Periodic maintenance schedules .............................. 9-5

Schedule 1 ................................................................ 9-5 Schedule 2 ................................................................ 9-5 Explanation of maintenance items .......................... 9-10

Your new NISSAN has been designed to have minimum maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save you both time and money. However, some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your NISSANs good mechanical condition, as well as its emission and engine performance. It is the owners responsibility to make sure that the specified maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed. As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper maintenance care. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain. General maintenance: General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal dayto-day operation of the vehicle. They are essential if your vehicle is to continue to operate properly. It is your responsibility to perform these procedures regularly as prescribed. These checks or inspections can be done by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, your NISSAN dealer. Periodic maintenance: The maintenance items listed in this part are required to be serviced at regular intervals.

However, under severe driving conditions, additional or more frequent maintenance will be required. Where to go for service: If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and tuned by an authorized NISSAN dealer. NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership training programs. They are completely qualified to work on NISSANs vehicles before they work on your vehicle, rather than after they have worked on it. You can be confident that your NISSAN dealers service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle in a reliable and economic way.

9-2

Maintenance

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smell, be sure to check for the cause or have your NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you should notify your NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required. When performing any checks or maintenance work, see Maintenance precautions in the 8. Do-it-yourself section. sure no nuts are missing, and check for any loose nuts. Tighten if necessary. Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle pulls to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed. Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. Doors and engine hood: Check that all doors and the engine hood operate smoothly as well as the trunk lid or back hatch. Also make sure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released. When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently. The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc. Lights*: Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim. Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that all warning lights and chimes are operating properly. Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak. Windshield defroster: Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in good quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner. Steering wheel: Check for changes in the steering conditions, such as excessive free play, hard steering or strange noises. Seats: Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly
Maintenance

EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following items with * is found in the 8. Do-ityourself section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified. Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge periodically when at a service station, including the spare, and adjust to the specified pressure if necessary. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear. Wheel nuts*: When checking the tires, make

Inside the vehicle

9-3

and that the locks (if equipped) hold securely in all latched positions. Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage. Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mats away from the pedal. Clutch pedal*: Make sure the pedal operates smoothly and check that it has the proper free play. Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied. Brake pedal and booster*: Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure it has the proper distance under it when depressed fully. Check the brake booster function. Be sure to keep floor mats away from the pedal. Parking brake*: Check that the lever has the proper travel and make sure that the vehicle is held securely on a fairly steep hill when only

the parking brake is applied. Automatic transmission P (Park) position mechanism: Check that the brake pedal must be depressed for the selector lever to be moved from the P (Park) position. On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily. Engine oil level*: Check the level on the dipstick after parking the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the engine. Be sure to wait a few minutes to allow the oil to drain back into the sump. Power steering fluid level* and lines: Check the level in the reservoir tank with the engine off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. Automatic transmission fluid level*: Check the level on the dipstick after putting the selector lever in P (Park) position with the engine idling. Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately locate the trouble and correct it. (See Precautions when starting and driving in the 5. Starting and driving section for exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).) Underbody: The underbody is frequently ex-

Under the hood and the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel). Windshield washer fluid*: Check that there is adequate fluid in the tank. Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level when the engine is cold. Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, deterioration or loose connections. Brake and clutch fluid levels*: Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid levels are between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir. Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. It

9-4

Maintenance

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

posed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances, otherwise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, being careful to clean those areas where mud and dirt may accumulate. For additional information, see Cleaning exterior in the 7. Appearance and care section. Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately. To ensure smooth, trouble-free, safe and economical driving, NISSAN provides two different maintenance schedules that may be used, depending upon the conditions in which you usually drive. These schedules contain both distance and time intervals, up to 60,000 miles (96,000 km)/48 months. For most people, the odometer reading will indicate when service is needed. However, if you drive very little, your vehicle should be serviced at the regular time intervals shown in the schedule. After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, continue the periodic maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals. taxi or door-to-door delivery use. driving in dusty conditions. driving on rough, muddy, or salt spread roads. towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier.

SCHEDULE 2
Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 2 if none of the driving conditions shown in Schedule 1 apply to your driving habits.

SCHEDULE 1
Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 1 if your driving habits frequently include one or more of the following driving conditions: repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km). repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing. operating in hot weather in stop-and-go rush hour traffic. extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police,
Maintenance

9-5

Schedule 1
Abbreviations: R = Replace I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 3.75 (6) 3 7.5 (12) 6 11.25 (18) 9 15 (24) 12 18.75 (30) 15

[
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 22.5 26.25 30 33.75 37.5 41.25 (36) (42) (48) (54) (60) (66) 18 21 24 27 30 33

]: At the mileage intervals only

45 48.75 (72) (78) 36 39 52.5 56.25 (84) (90) 42 45 60 (96) 48 I* [R] I* I* R* R R [R]

Emission control system maintenance

Drive belts See NOTE (1) Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) EVAP vapor lines Fuel lines Fuel filter See NOTE (3)* Engine coolant See NOTE (4) Engine oil Engine oil filter (Use part No. 15208-31U00 or equivalent) Spark plugs (Use PLATINUM-TIPPED type) Intake & exhaust valve clearance See NOTE (5) [R] I* I*

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

NOTE: (1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. (2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required. (3) If vehicle is operated under extremely adverse weather conditions or in areas where ambient temperatures are either extremely low or extremely high, the filters might become clogged. In such an event, replace them immediately. (4) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. (5) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance. (6) Maintenance items and intervals with * are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

9-6

Maintenance

Schedule 1
Abbreviations: I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION Miles x 1,000 Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) Months 3.75 (6) 3 7.5 11.25 (12) 6 (18) 9 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 15 18.75 22.5 26.25 (24) 12 (30) 15 (36) 18 (42) 21 30 33.75 37.5 41.25 (48) 24 (54) 27 (60) 30 (66) 33 45 48.75 52.5 56.25 (72) 36 (78) 39 (84) 42 (90) 45 60 (96) 48

Chassis and body maintenance

Brake lines & cables Brake pads & discs Manual transmission oil & automatic transmission fluid Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Exhaust system Front drive shaft boots Supplemental air bag system See NOTE (2). See NOTE (1). I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

NOTE: (1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. (2) Inspect the supplemental air bag system 10 years after the date of manufacture noted on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label.

Maintenance

9-7

Schedule 2
Abbreviations: R = Replace I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION Miles x 1,000 Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) Months 7.5 (12) 6 15 (24) 12 22.5 (36) 18 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 30 (48) 24 37.5 (60) 30 45 (72) 36 52.5 (84) 42 60 (96) 48 I* [R] I* I* See NOTE (2)* See NOTE (3) R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R* R R [R] See NOTE (4) [R] I* I*

]: At the mileage intervals only

Emission control system maintenance

Drive belts Air cleaner filter EVAP vapor lines Fuel lines Fuel filter Engine coolant Engine oil Engine oil filter (Use part No. 15208-31U00 or equivalent) Spark plugs (Use PLATINUM-TIPPED type) Intake & exhaust valve clearance See NOTE (1)

NOTE: (1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. (2) If vehicle is operated under extremely adverse weather conditions or in areas where ambient temperatures are either extremely low or extremely high, the filters might become clogged. In such an event, replace them immediately. (3) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. (4) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance. (5) Maintenance items and intervals with * are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

9-8

Maintenance

Schedule 2
Abbreviations: I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. MAINTENANCE OPERATION Miles x 1,000 Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) Months 7.5 (12) 6 15 (24) 12 22.5 (36) 18 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 30 (48) 24 37.5 (60) 30 45 (72) 36 52.5 (84) 42 60 (96) 48

Chassis and body maintenance

Brake lines & cables Brake pads & discs Manual transmission oil & automatic transmission fluid Steering gear linkage, axle & suspension parts Exhaust system Front drive shaft boots Supplemental air bag system See NOTE (1). I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

NOTE: (1) Inspect the supplemental air bag system 10 years after the date of manufacture noted on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label.

Maintenance

9-9

EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following items with * is found in the 8. Do-ityourself section.

extremely adverse weather conditions or in areas where ambient temperatures are either extremely low or extremely high, the filter might become clogged. In such an event, replace the filter immediately. Engine coolant*: Drain and flush the cooling system. Engine oil & oil filter*: Under normal driving conditions, the engine oil and oil filter should be replaced in accordance with the maintenance schedule. However, under severe driving conditions, they may have to be replaced more frequently. Spark plugs*: Replace with new plugs having the correct heat range. Intake & exhaust valve clearance: Check the valve clearance if valve noise increases.

deterioration and leaks. Under severe driving conditions, they may have to be inspected more frequently. Manual transmission oil & automatic transmission fluid*: Check the fluid level and visually inspect for signs of leakage. Under severe driving conditions, the oil should be replaced at the specified interval. Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts, and drive shaft boots: Check for damage, looseness and leakage of oil or grease. Under severe driving conditions, more frequent inspection should be performed. Exhaust system: Visually check the exhaust pipes, muffler, and hangers for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, chafing, abrasion, deterioration, etc. Under severe driving conditions, inspection should be performed more frequently. Supplemental air bag, and supplemental side air bag (if so equipped) systems: Maintenance for the supplemental air bags or supplemental side air bags should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer.

Emission control system maintenance

Drive belts*: Check drive belts for wear, fraying or cracking and also for proper tension. Replace the drive belts if found damaged. Air cleaner filter: Under normal driving conditions, the air cleaner filter should be replaced in accordance with the maintenance schedule. However, driving the vehicle in dusty areas may cause more rapid clogging of the element. Consequently, the element may have to be replaced more frequently. EVAP vapor lines: Check EVAP vapor lines and connections for failure or looseness. If leaks are found, replace them. Fuel lines: Check the fuel hoses, piping and connections for leaks, looseness or deterioration. Replace any parts if they are damaged. Fuel filter: If the vehicle is operated under

Chassis and body maintenance

Brake lines & cables: Check the brake lines and hoses (including brake booster vacuum hoses, connections & check valve) and parking brake cables for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, chafing, abrasion, deterioration, etc. Brake pads & discs: Check these and the other neighboring brake components for wear,

9-10

Maintenance

10 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ......... 10-2 Fuel recommendation ............................................. 10-3 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation................. 10-5 Recommended SAE viscosity number.................... 10-6 Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations .................................................... 10-6 Specifications .......................................................... 10-7 Engine ..................................................................... 10-7 Tires and wheels ..................................................... 10-8 Dimensions and weights ......................................... 10-8 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country ....................................................... 10-9 Vehicle identification ............................................... 10-9 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate................ 10-9 Vehicle identification number (Chassis number) .................................................... 10-9 Engine serial number ............................................ 10-10

F.M.V.S.S. certification label ................................. Emission control information label ........................ Tire placard ........................................................... Air conditioner specification label.......................... Installing front license plate................................... Vehicle loading information ................................... Terms .................................................................... Determining vehicle load capacity ........................ Loading tips ........................................................... Towing a trailer ..................................................... Maximum load limits.............................................. Towing safety ........................................................ Uniform tire quality grading ................................... Emission control system warranty ........................ Reporting safety defects (US only) ....................... Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test (US only) ...............................................................

10-10 10-10 10-11 10-11 10-11 10-12 10-12 10-12 10-13 10-13 10-14 10-14 10-17 10-18 10-18 10-18

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure instructed in the 8. Do-it-yourself section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (Approximate) US measure Fuel Engine oil*6 Drain and refill With oil filter change Without oil filter change Cooling system With reservoir Reservoir Manual transmission gear oil Automatic transmission fluid Power steering fluid Brake and clutch fluid Multi-purpose grease Air conditioning system refrigerant Air conditioning system lubricants Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in the 8. Do-it-yourself section. 9 qt 7/8 qt 7-1/2 qt 3/4 qt 8.5 0.8 Genuine NISSAN anti-freeze coolant or equivalent API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 80W-90 only Nissan Matic D (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Genuine Nissan Automatic Transmission Fluid (Canada).*4 Type DEXRONTMIII or equivalent Genuine Nissan Brake Fluid*5 or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116) NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base) HFC-134a (R-134a)*7 Nissan A/C System Oil Type S or exact equivalent 4-1/4 qt 3-7/8 qt 3-1/2 qt 3-1/4 qt 4.0 3.7 API Certification Mark*2, *3 API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving II or API grade SJ, Energy Conserving*2, *3 ILSAC grade GF-II*2, *3 18-1/2 gal Imp measure 15-3/8 gal Liter 70 Recommended specifications Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (RON 96)*1

*1: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for fuel recommendation. *2: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for engine oil and oil filter recommendation. *3: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for recommended SAE viscosity number. *4: DexronTMIII/MerconTM or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental United States and Alaska contact a NISSAN dealer for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of DexronTMIII/MerconTM automatic transmission fluid. *5: Available in mainland US through your NISSAN dealer. *6: For additional information, see Engine oil in the 8. Do-it-yourself section for changing engine oil. *7: For additional information, see Vehicle identification in this section for air conditioner specification label.

10-2

Technical and consumer information

FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96) If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Research octane number 91) can be used. However, for maximum vehicle performance, the use of unleaded premium gasoline is recommended.

NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager. If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage. The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline. If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a methanol blend, is used, it should contain no more than 10% oxygenate. (MTBE may, however, be added up to 15%.) If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should

also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles. If any undesirable driveability problems such as engine stalling and hard hot starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE. Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage.

Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control devices and systems, and could also affect the warranty coverage. Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, since this will damage the three-way catalyst.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of any fuel additives (i.e. fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvent or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions.

Technical and consumer information

10-3

Octane rating tips

In most parts of North America, you should use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 or 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number. However, you may use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating as low as 85 AKI number in these high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)] such as: Colorado, Montana, New Mexico, Utah, Wyoming, northeastern Nevada, southern Idaho, western South Dakota, western Nebraska, and that part of Texas which is directly south of New Mexico. Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than stated above can cause persistent, heavy spark knock. (Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, have your dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible. Incorrect ignition timing will result in knocking, after-run or overheating. This in turn may cause excessive fuel consumption or damage

to the engine. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked at a NISSAN dealer or other competent service facility. However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is no cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load.

10-4

Technical and consumer information

however, meet the API quality and SAE viscosity ratings specified for your vehicle. Do not mix mineral based and synthetic type oils in the engine at the same time.

Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed. Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used.
STI0077

Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important that the engine oil viscosity be selected based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. The recommended SAE viscosity number chart shows the recommended oil viscosities for the expected ambient temperatures. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage.

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATION Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct quality, and viscosity oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. NISSAN recommends the use of a low friction oil (energy conserving oil) in order to improve fuel economy and conserve energy. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage. Only those engine oils with the American Petroleum Institute (API) certification mark on the

front of the container should be used. This type of oil supersedes the existing API SG or SH and Energy Conserving II categories. If you cannot find engine oil with the API certification mark, use an API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving II or API grade SJ, Energy conserving oil. An oil with a single designation SG or SH, or in combination with other categories (for example, SG/CC or SG/CD) may also be used if one with the API certification mark cannot be found. An ILSAC grade GF-II oil can also be used. Mineral based or synthetic type oils may be used in your NISSAN vehicle. These oils must

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new vehicle is equipped with a highquality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use the genuine oil filter or its equivalent
Technical and consumer information

10-5

for the reason described in change intervals.

Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Oil and filter other than the specified quality, or oil and filter change intervals longer than recommended could reduce engine life. Damage to engines caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the new NISSAN vehicle warranties. Your engine was filled with a high quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle. Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes. repeated short distance driving at cold outside temperatures, driving in dusty conditions, extensive idling, towing a trailer.

RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY NUMBER

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioning system in this NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lubricant, Nissan A/C System Oil Type S or the exact equivalents.

Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will cause severe damage and you will need to replace your vehicles entire air conditioning system. The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your NISSAN vehicle will not harm the earths ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earths atmosphere, certain governmental regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioning system service. Your NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioning system refrigerant. Contact your NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioning system.

TI1028-B

SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all ambient temperatures. SAE 10W-30 viscosity oil may be used if the ambient temperature is above 0F (18C).

10-6

Technical and consumer information

SPECIFICATIONS ENGINE
Model Type Cylinder arrangement Bore x Stroke Displacement Firing order Idle speed Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) CO percentage at idle speed Spark plug Spark plug gap Camshaft operation Alternator belt size Width x Length in (mm) 0.8409 x 43.11 (21.36 x 1,095) rpm degree/rpm [No air] % Standard Service option in (mm) Timing chain PFR5G-11 PFR4G-11, PFR6G-11 See the emission control label on the underside of the hood. in (mm) cu in (cm3) VQ30DE Gasoline, 4-cycle 6-cylinder, V-slanted at 60 3.66 x 2.886 (93.0 x 73.3) 182.33 (2,988) 1-2-3-4-5-6*

The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

TI1009-A

Technical and consumer information

10-7

TIRES AND WHEELS

Steel Offset Road wheel Aluminum Offset Conventional Tire size Spare *1: For CANADA *2: For US *3: For models with Viscous LSD Conventional*1 T125/70D16*2 T125/90D16*2, *3 15 x 6JJ in (mm) 1.57 (40) 15 x 6.5JJ 16 x 6.5JJ in (mm) 1.77 (45) P205/65R15 92S P205/65R15 92H P215/55R16 91H

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Sedan Overall length Overall width Overall height Front tread Rear tread Wheelbase Gross vehicle weight rating Gross axle weight rating Front Rear lb (kg) lb (kg) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) lb (kg) See the F.M.V.S.S. certification label on the drivers side lock pillar. 189.4 (4,810) 69.7 (1,770) 55.7 (1,415) 60.2 (1,530)*1 59.8 (1,520)*2 59.4 (1,510)*1 59.1 (1,500)*2 106.3 (2,700)

*1: For models with steel wheels *2: For models with aluminum wheels

10-8

Technical and consumer information

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

When planning to travel in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicles engine. Using fuel with too low an octane rating may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded engine gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available. When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations. The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ. When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation, and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

STI0038

STI0040

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number plate is attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (Chassis number)

The number is stamped as shown.

Technical and consumer information

10-9

STI0047

STI0041

STI0042

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (F.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is attached as shown.

10-10

Technical and consumer information

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

STI0043

STI0044

TIRE PLACARD
The cold tire pressure is shown on the tire placard affixed to the center console lid.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is affixed inside of the hood as shown.

STI0104

Use the following steps to mount the license plate: 1. Mount the license plate bracket with 0.24 in (6 mm) diameter by 0.55 in (14 mm) long tapping screws.
Technical and consumer information

10-11

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

2. Mount the license plate with the 0.24 in (6 mm) bolts. The bolts used to fasten the license plate to the bracket are not included in the bracket assembly. maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle.

DETERMINING VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

The load capacity of this vehicle is determined by weight, not by available cargo space. For example, a luggage rack, bike carrier, cartop carrier or similar equipment does not increase load carrying capacity of your vehicle. To determine vehicle load capacity:

TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle: Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not include passengers and cargo. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) -

Vehicle weight can be determined by using a commercial-grade scale, found at places such as a truck stop, gravel quarry, grain elevator, or a scrap metal recycling facility. 1. Determine the curb weight of your vehicle. 2. Compare the curb weight amount to the GVWR specified for your vehicle to determine how much more weight your vehicle can carry. 3. After loading (cargo and passengers), reweigh your vehicle to determine if either GVWR or GAWR for your vehicle is exceeded. If GVWR is exceeded, remove

10-12

Technical and consumer information

TOWING A TRAILER
cargo as necessary. If either the front or rear GAWR is exceeded, shift the load or remove cargo as necessary. your vehicle. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by your warranty.

LOADING TIPS
The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label. Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.

Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury. Overloading can shorten the life of

TI1011M

Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember that towing a trailer will place additional loads on your vehicles engine, drive train, steering, braking and other systems. Information on trailer towing ability and the special equipment required should be obtained from your Nissan dealer. He can obtain a Nissan Trailer Towing Guide for you.

Technical and consumer information

10-13

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed 1,000 lb (454 kg). The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight. Towing loads greater than 1,000 lb (454 kg) or using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART Unit: lb (kg) MAXIMUM TOWING LOAD MAXIMUM TONGUE LOAD 1,000 (454) 110 (49)

TOWING SAFETY Trailer hitch

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer. A genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available from your NISSAN dealer (Canada only). Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle, to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

Vehicle damage and/or personal injury resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by NISSAN warranties. Information on trailer towing and required towing equipment should be obtained from dealers who specialize in providing trailers or other towing equipment.

TI1012M

Maximum gross vehicle weight/ maximum gross axle weight

The gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle must not exceed. GVWR shown on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label. The gross vehicle weight equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. In addition, front or rear gross axle weight must not exceed GAWR shown on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label.

Tongue load
Keep the tongue load between 9 and 11% of the total trailer load. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load.

Do not use axle-mounted hitches. The hitch should not be attached to or affect the operation of the impactabsorbing bumper Do not modify the vehicle exhaust

10-14

Technical and consumer information

system, brake system, etc. when the hitch is installed. To reduce the possibility of additional damage if your vehicle is struck from the rear, where practical, remove the hitch when not in use. Remove the receiver when not in use. After the hitch is removed, seal the bolt holes to prevent exhaust fumes, water or dust from entering the passenger compartment. Regularly check that all hitch mounting bolts are securely mounted.

crossed and should be attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave enough slack in the chain to permit turning corners.

condition; check for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shifts while driving. Be certain your rear view mirrors conform to all federal, state or local regulations. If not, install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle.

Trailer lights
Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or local regulations. When wiring the vehicle for towing, connect the stop and tail light pickup into the vehicle electrical circuit at a point between the sensor and stop light or light switch.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicles behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic. Steering stability, and braking performance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.

Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system, make sure it conforms to federal and/or local regulations and that it is properly installed.

Tire pressures
When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the tire placard (located on the inside of the center console lid.) Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturers specifications.

Never connect a trailer brake system directly to the vehicle brake system.

Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops. Avoid sharp turns or lane changes. Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed. Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not recommended; however, if you must do so, and if your vehicle is equipped
Technical and consumer information

Pre-towing tips
Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded and/or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down

Safety chain
Always use a suitable chain between your vehicle and the trailer. The chain should be

10-15

with automatic transmission, first block the wheels and apply the parking brake, and then move the transmission selector lever into the P (Park) position. If you move the selector lever to the P (Park) position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake, transmission damage could occur. When going down a hill, shift into a lower gear and use the engine braking effect. When ascending a long grade, downshift the transmission to a lower gear and reduce speed to reduce chances of engine overloading and/or overheating. If the engine coolant rises to an extremely high temperature when the air conditioning system is on, turn off the air conditioner. Coolant heat can be additionally vented by opening the windows, switching the fan control to high and setting the temperature control to the HOT position. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances. Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km). Have your vehicle serviced more often than at intervals specified in the recommended maintenance schedule.

When making a turn, your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make a larger than normal turning radius during the turn. Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly causing vehicle sway. When being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect vehicle handling. If swaying does occur, firmly grip the steering wheel, steer straight ahead, and immediately (but gradually) reduce vehicle speed. This combination will help stabilize the vehicle. Never increase speed. Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing while towing a trailer requires considerably more distance than normal passing. Remember the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes. To maintain engine braking efficiency and electrical charging performance, do not use fifth gear (manual transmission) or overdrive (automatic transmission). Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the

brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency. When towing a trailer, change oil in the transmission more frequently. See Periodic maintenance schedules in the 9. Maintenance section.

10-16

Technical and consumer information

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear
Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on tire wear rate when tested under controlled conditions on specified government test courses. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1-1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. However, relative tire performance depends on actual driving conditions, and may vary significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

The traction grade assigned to your vehicle tires is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C
Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C. They represent a tires resistance to heat build-up, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause tire material to degenerate, reducing tire life. Excessive temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a performance level which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades A and B represent higher levels of performance on laboratory test wheels than the minimum required by law.

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Technical and consumer information

10-17

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY

Your NISSAN is covered by the following emission warranties. For US: Emission Defects Warranty Emissions Performance Warranty For Canada: Emission Control System Warranty Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information and Maintenance Log Booklet that comes with your NISSAN. If you did not receive a Warranty Information and Maintenance Log Booklet, or it has become lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to: Nissan North America Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 191 Gardena. CA. 90248-0191 Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US only) If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, tollfree, at 1-800-NISSAN-1. In Hawaii call (808) 836-0888.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US only)

Due to legal requirements in some states/ areas, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the ready condition for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system. The vehicle is set to the ready condition when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle. If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a not ready condition. Before taking the I/M test, drive the vehicle through the following pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. If you cannot or do not want to perform the driving pattern, an NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.

Always drive the vehicle in a safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws. 1. Start the engine when the engine coolant temperature gauge needle points to C. Allow the engine to idle until the gauge needle points between the C and H (normal operating temperature).

10-18

Technical and consumer information

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h), then quickly release the accelerator pedal completely and keep it released for at least 6 seconds. 3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of 53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96 km/h) for at least 5 minutes. 4. Stop the vehicle. 5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h) and maintain the speed for 20 seconds. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 3 times. 7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h) and maintain the speed for at least 3 minutes. 8. Stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. 9. Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least one more time. If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeat the preceding step. Any safe driving mode is acceptable between steps. Do not stop the engine until step 7 is completed.

Technical and consumer information

10-19

NISSAN representative will assist you. Also available are Genuine NISSAN Service and Owners Manuals for older Nissan models.

A Genuine Nissan Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment procedures, this manual is the same one used by the factory trained technicians working at your Nissan dealership. Also available are Genuine NISSAN Owners Manuals. For current pricing and availability of a Genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Genuine NISSAN Owners Manual, contact:

In the U.S.A.: See your NISSAN dealer or contact: Dyment Distribution Services 20770 Westwood Dr. Strongsville OH 44136 In a hurry? Call 1-800-247-5321 and charge your purchase to Visa/Master Card. In Canada: To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owners Manual please contact your nearest NISSAN Dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN Dealer in your area call the Nissan Satisfaction Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual

10-20

Technical and consumer information

11 Index
A ABS (Anti-lock brake system)......................... 5-18 Air bag Warning labels........................................... 1-15 Warning light ...................................... 1-15, 2-8 Air bag system (See supplemental restraint system) ........ 1-11 Side (See supplemental side air bag system) ...................................................... 1-12 Air cleaner housing filter ................................. 8-17 Air conditioner Air conditioner operation...................... 4-3, 4-9 Air conditioner service ................ 4-3, 4-9, 4-12 Air conditioner specification label .......................................... 4-3, 4-9, 10-11 Air conditioner system refrigerant and lubrication recommendations ............... 4-3, 4-9 Heater and air conditioner (automatic) (if so equipped) ........................................... 4-9 Heater and air conditioner controls ............. 4-3 Servicing air conditioner.............................. 4-3 Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations............................. 10-6 Air flow charts............................................ 4-6, 4-9 Alcohol drugs and driving ................................. 5-3 AM-FM radio with cassette player .................. 4-12 AM-FM radio with cassette player and compact disc player ........................................ 4-12 AM-FM radio with compact disc player .......... 4-12 Ambient temperature switch (AMB), Air conditioner ................................................. 4-11 Anchor point locations Top tether strap......................................... 1-31 Antenna Manual....................................................... 4-24 Power ........................................................ 4-24 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)........................ 5-18 Appearance care Exterior appearance care............................ 7-2 Interior appearance care ............................. 7-4 Armrest ............................................................. 1-6 Ashtray (See cigarette lighter and ashtray).... 2-21 Audio system .................................................. 4-12 Automatic Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ........... 8-10 Driving with automatic transmission............ 5-7 Sunroof ...................................................... 2-26 Avoiding collision and rollover .......................... 5-3 B Battery............................................................. 8-13 Battery replacement, (See multi-remote control system) ............................................................. 3-7 Before starting the engine ................................ 5-6 Belts (See drive belts) .................................... 8-15 Brake Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ................... 5-18 Brake and clutch fluid................................ 8-12 Brake booster ............................................ 8-21 Brake pedal ............................................... 8-20 Brake pedal check..................................... 8-20 Parking brake check ........................ 5-12, 8-20 Parking brake operation ............................ 5-12 System....................................................... 5-18 Warning light ............................................... 2-8 Break-in schedule ........................................... 5-15 Bulb check/instrument panel ............................ 2-7 Bulb replacement ............................................ 8-24 C Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants......................................................... 10-2 Car phone ....................................................... 4-25 Cassette player (See audio system) .............. 4-15 Cassette tape operation ................................. 4-12 Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst............ 5-2 CB radio or car phone .................................... 4-25 Child restraints ................................................ 1-24 Installation on front passenger seat.......... 1-32 Precautions on child restraints.................. 1-24 Top tether strap anchor point locations .... 1-31 With top tether strap.................................. 1-30 Child safety ..................................................... 1-19 Child safety rear door lock................................ 3-4 Chimes ............................................................ 2-11 Cigarette lighter (accessory) and ashtray....... 2-21 Circuit breaker, Fusible link ............................ 8-22

Cleaning exterior and interior ........................... 7-4 Clock ............................................................... 2-27 Clutch Clutch pedal .............................................. 8-21 Fluid........................................................... 8-12 Cold weather driving ....................................... 5-20 Compact Disc (CD) player (See audio system) ........................................................... 4-23 Compact disc (CD) player operation .............. 4-12 Compact spare tire ......................................... 8-35 Console box .................................................... 2-25 Controls Audio controls............................................ 4-12 Audio controls (rear).................................. 4-12 Audio controls (steering wheel)................. 4-12 Heater and air conditioner controls ............. 4-3 Heater and air conditioner controls (automatic)................................................... 4-9 Heater and semiautomatic air conditioner ................................................... 4-3 Coolant Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants ................................................... 10-2 Changing engine coolant ............................ 8-6 Checking engine coolant level .................... 8-5 Corrosion protection ......................................... 7-5 Cruise control.................................................. 5-13 Cup holder ...................................................... 2-24 D Daytime running light system ......................... 2-18 Defogger switch, Rear window and outside mirror defogger switch .................................... 2-16

Dimensions and weights................................. 10-8 Door ajar warning light...................................... 2-8 Drive belts ....................................................... 8-15 Driving Cold weather driving ................................. 5-20 Driving with automatic transmission............ 5-7 Driving with manual transmission ............. 5-11 Precautions when starting and driving ........ 5-2 E Economy, Fuel ................................................ 5-15 Emission control information label................ 10-10 Emission control system warranty ................ 10-18 Engine Before starting the engine........................... 5-6 Block heater .............................................. 5-21 Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants ................................................... 10-2 Changing engine coolant ............................ 8-6 Changing engine oil .................................... 8-8 Changing engine oil filter ............................ 8-9 Checking engine coolant............................. 8-5 Checking engine oil level ............................ 8-7 Coolant temperature gauge ........................ 2-5 Engine compartment check locations ......... 8-4 Engine cooling system ................................ 8-5 Engine oil..................................................... 8-7 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation... 10-5 Engine oil viscosity.................................... 10-5 Engine serial number .............................. 10-10 Engine specifications................................. 10-7 If your engine overheats ........................... 6-10 Starting the engine ...................................... 5-7

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ...................... 5-2 F F.M.V.S.S. certification label......................... 10-10 Filter, Air cleaner housing filter....................... 8-17 Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) ............................................................. 2-19 Flat tire .............................................................. 6-2 Floor mat cleaning ............................................ 7-4 Fluid Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ........... 8-10 Brake and clutch fluid................................ 8-12 Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants ................................................... 10-2 Engine coolant............................................. 8-5 Engine oil..................................................... 8-7 Power steering fluid................................... 8-11 Window washer fluid ................................. 8-12 Fog light switch ............................................... 2-18 Front manual seat adjustment .......................... 1-2 Front power seat adjustment ............................ 1-4 Fuel Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants ................................................... 10-2 Filler cap.................................................... 3-10 Filler lid ...................................................... 3-10 Filler lid and cap........................................ 3-10 Filler lid opener lever................................. 3-10 Fuel economy............................................ 5-15 Fuel octane rating ..................................... 10-3 Fuel recommendation................................ 10-3 Gauge.......................................................... 2-5 Fuses .............................................................. 8-21

11-2

Fusible links .................................................... 8-22 G

Horn ................................................................ 2-19 How to stop alarm, Theft warning .................. 2-13 I

Garage door opener, Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver ..................................... 2-30 Gas cap .......................................................... 3-10 Gauge ............................................................... 2-3 Engine coolant temperature gauge............. 2-5 Fuel gauge .................................................. 2-5 Odometer..................................................... 2-4 Speedometer ............................................... 2-4 Tachometer ................................................. 2-4 General maintenance ................................ 9-2, 9-3 Glove box........................................................ 2-24 Glove box lock ................................................ 2-24 H Hazard warning flasher switch........................ 2-19 Head restraints ................................................. 1-5 Headlamps, (Bulb replacement) ..................... 8-25 Headlight switch.............................................. 2-17 Headlights, (Bulb replacement) ...................... 8-25 Heated seats................................................... 2-20 Heater Engine coolant heater ............................... 5-21 Heater and air conditioner (automatic) (if so equipped) ........................................... 4-9 Heater and air conditioner controls ............. 4-3 Heater operation.......................................... 4-3 Operation, Semiautomatic air conditioner ... 4-4 HomeLink Universal Transceiver.................. 2-30 Hood, release ................................................... 3-8

Ignition switch ................................................... 5-4 Automatic transmission models .................. 5-4 Key positions ............................................... 5-6 Manual transmission models....................... 5-5 Indicator lights and chimes (See warning/ indicator lights and chimes) .............................. 2-9 Inside mirror .................................................... 3-12 Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test................. 10-18 Instrument panel ............................................... 2-2 Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver ..................................................... 2-30 Interior and cargo light.................................... 2-28 Interior light ..................................................... 2-28 Interior light replacement ................................ 8-26 J Jump starting .................................................... 6-7 K Keyless entry, (See multi-remote control system) ............................................................. 3-5 Keys .................................................................. 3-2 L Label, Air conditioner specification label ...... 10-11 Label, Emission control information label..... 10-10

Label, F.M.V.S.S. certification label.............. 10-10 Labels Air bag warning labels............................... 1-15 Air conditioner specification label ........ 4-3, 4-9 Engine serial number .............................. 10-10 Vehicle identification number (VIN)........... 10-9 Lamp replacement .......................................... 8-24 License plate, Installing front license plate... 10-11 Light Air bag warning light ................................. 1-15 Bulb replacement ...................................... 8-24 Fog light switch ......................................... 2-18 Headlamps (Bulb replacement)................. 8-25 Headlight switch ........................................ 2-17 Headlights (Bulb replacement).................. 8-25 Interior and cargo light .............................. 2-28 Interior light................................................ 2-28 Personal light............................................. 2-28 Trunk light.................................................. 2-29 Vanity mirror light ...................................... 2-29 Warning/indicator lights and chimes .... 2-7, 2-9 Lights, Exterior and interior light replacement .................................................... 8-26 Loading information (See vehicle loading information) ................................................... 10-12 Lock Door locks ................................................... 3-3 Glove box lock........................................... 2-24 Power door lock .......................................... 3-3 Trunk lid lock opener lever.......................... 3-9 Low fuel warning light ....................................... 2-9

11-3

M Maintenance Battery ....................................................... 8-13 Explanation of maintenance items..... 9-3, 9-10 General maintenance........................... 9-2, 9-3 Inside the vehicle ................................. 9-2, 9-3 Maintenance precautions ............................ 8-2 Outside the vehicle .............................. 9-2, 9-3 Periodic maintenance schedules ................ 9-5 Seat belt maintenance .............................. 1-23 Manual antenna .............................................. 4-24 Manual front seat adjustment ........................... 1-2 Meters and gauges ........................................... 2-3 Mirror Inside mirror .............................................. 3-12 Outside mirror............................................ 3-13 Outside mirror control................................ 3-13 Outside mirrors.......................................... 3-13 Multi-remote control system.............................. 3-5 N New vehicle break-in ...................................... 5-15 O Odometer .......................................................... 2-4 Oil Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants ................................................... 10-2 Changing engine oil .................................... 8-8 Changing engine oil filter ............................ 8-9 Checking engine oil level ............................ 8-7

Engine oil..................................................... 8-7 Engine oil viscosity.................................... 10-5 Outside mirror ................................................. 3-13 Outside mirror control ..................................... 3-13 Outside mirrors ............................................... 3-13 Overdrive switch ............................................. 5-10 Overheat, If your vehicle overheats................ 6-10 P Parking Brake check............................................... 8-20 Parking brake check.................................. 5-12 Parking brake operation ............................ 5-12 Parking/parking on hills ............................. 5-12 Parking/parking on hills .................................. 5-16 Periodic maintenance schedules ...................... 9-5 Personal light .................................................. 2-28 Power Front seat adjustment ................................. 1-4 Power antenna .......................................... 4-24 Power door lock .......................................... 3-3 Power steering fluid................................... 8-11 Power steering system.............................. 5-17 Power windows ......................................... 2-25 Pre-tensioner seat belt system ....................... 1-14 Precautions Cruise control precautions ........................ 5-13 Maintenance precautions ............................ 8-2 On child restraints ..................................... 1-24 On seat belt usage.................................... 1-17 On supplemental restraint system .............. 1-6 Precautions when starting and driving ........ 5-2

Push starting ..................................................... 6-9 R Radio AM-FM radio with cassette player ............ 4-12 AM-FM radio with cassette player and compact disc player .................................. 4-12 AM-FM radio with compact disc player..... 4-12 Cassette player operation ......................... 4-12 CB radio or car phone ..................... 4-12, 4-25 Compact disc (CD) player operation......... 4-12 Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test (USA only) .................................................... 10-18 Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock...... 3-4 Rear window and outside mirror defogger switch .............................................................. 2-16 Registering your vehicle in another country ... 10-9 Remote keyless entry, (See multi-remote control system) ................................................. 3-5 Reporting safety defects (USA only) ............ 10-18 Rollover ............................................................. 5-3 S Safety Child seat belts.......................................... 1-19 Reporting safety defects (USA only)....... 10-18 Towing safety .......................................... 10-14 Seat adjustment Front manual seat adjustment .................... 1-2 Front power seat adjustment ...................... 1-4 Seat belt extenders......................................... 1-23 Seat belt maintenance .................................... 1-23

11-4

Seat belt warning light .................................... 1-17 Seat belt warning light and chime .................... 2-8 Seat belt(s) Child safety................................................ 1-19 Infants and small children ......................... 1-19 Injured persons.......................................... 1-20 Larger children .......................................... 1-19 Pre-tensioner seat belt system ................. 1-14 Precautions on seat belt usage ................ 1-17 Pregnant women ....................................... 1-20 Seat belt cleaning........................................ 7-5 Seat belts .................................................. 1-17 Three-point type with retractor .................. 1-20 Seat(s) Heated seats ............................................. 2-20 Seats ........................................................... 1-2 Security system (See theft warning)............... 2-12 Servicing air conditioner................... 4-3, 4-9, 4-12 Shifting Automatic transmission ............................... 5-7 Manual transmission ................................. 5-11 Shoulder belt height adjustment, For front seats ............................................................... 1-23 Side air bag system (See supplemental side air bag system) .................................................... 1-12 Spark plugs ..................................................... 8-15 Speedometer .................................................... 2-4 Starting Before starting the engine........................... 5-6 Jump starting............................................... 6-7 Precautions when starting and driving ........ 5-2 Push starting ............................................... 6-9 Starting the engine ...................................... 5-7

Steering Power steering fluid................................... 8-11 Power steering system.............................. 5-17 Tilting steering wheel ................................ 3-12 Storage ........................................................... 2-22 Sun shade....................................................... 2-27 Sunroof, Automatic sunroof ............................ 2-26 Supplemental air bag system ......................... 1-11 Supplemental air bag warning labels ............. 1-15 Supplemental air bag warning light......... 1-15, 2-8 Supplemental restraint system ......................... 1-6 Precautions on supplemental restraint system ......................................................... 1-6 Supplemental side air bag system ................. 1-12 Switch Fog light switch ......................................... 2-18 Hazard warning flasher switch .................. 2-19 Headlight switch ........................................ 2-17 Ignition switch.............................................. 5-4 Ignition switch automatic transmission models ......................................................... 5-4 Ignition switch manual transmission models ......................................................... 5-5 Overdrive switch........................................ 5-10 Rear window and outside mirror defogger switch......................................................... 2-16 Traction control system cancel switch ...... 2-21 Turn signal switch ..................................... 2-18 T Tachometer ....................................................... 2-4 Temperature gauge, Engine coolant temperature gauge ........................................... 2-5

Theft warning .................................................. 2-12 Three way catalyst............................................ 5-2 Tilting steering wheel ...................................... 3-12 Tire Flat tire ........................................................ 6-2 Spare tire................................................... 8-35 Tire chains................................................. 8-33 Tire placard ............................................. 10-11 Tire pressure ............................................. 8-31 Tire rotation ............................................... 8-33 Type of tires .............................................. 8-32 Uniform tire quality grading ..................... 10-17 Wheel/tire size........................................... 10-8 Wheels and tires ....................................... 8-31 Top tether strap child restraints...................... 1-30 Towing Tow truck towing ....................................... 6-11 Towing a trailer........................................ 10-13 Towing load/specification chart ............... 10-13 Towing safety .......................................... 10-14 Traction control system (TCS) cancel switch .................................................. 2-21 Trailer towing ................................................ 10-13 Transceiver, Integrated HomeLink Universal ......................................................... 2-30 Transmission Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ........... 8-10 Driving with automatic transmission............ 5-7 Driving with manual transmission ............. 5-11 Transmitter, (See multi-remote control system) ............................................................. 3-5 Traveling or registering your vehicle in another country ............................................................ 10-9 Trunk lid lock opener lever ............................... 3-9

11-5

Trunk light ....................................................... 2-29 Turn signal switch ........................................... 2-18 U Underbody cleaning .......................................... 7-3 Uniform tire quality grading........................... 10-17 V Vanity mirror light............................................ 2-29 Vehicle Dimensions and weights ........................... 10-8 Identification number (VIN) ....................... 10-9 Loading information................................. 10-12 Recovery, (freeing a stuck vehicle)........... 6-12 Ventilators ......................................................... 4-2 W Warning Hazard warning flasher switch .................. 2-19 Theft warning............................................. 2-12 Warning labels, Air bag warning labels .......... 1-15 Warning light Air bag warning light .......................... 1-15, 2-8 Brake warning light...................................... 2-8 Door ajar...................................................... 2-8 Low fuel warning light ................................. 2-9 Seat belt warning light and chime............... 2-8 Warning/indicator lights and chimes................. 2-7 Warranty, Emission control system warranty ........................................................ 10-18

Washer switch, Windshield wiper and washer switch .............................................................. 2-15 Washing ............................................................ 7-2 Waxing .............................................................. 7-2 Weights (See dimensions and weights) ......... 10-8 Wheel/tire size ................................................ 10-8 Wheels and tires ............................................. 8-31 Window washer fluid....................................... 8-12 Window(s) Cleaning ...................................................... 7-3 Power windows ......................................... 2-25 Windshield wiper and washer switch.............. 2-15 Wiper Blades........................................................ 8-18 Windshield wiper and washer switch ........ 2-15

11-6

GAS STATION INFORMATION FUEL RECOMMENDATION:

Unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96). If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Research octane number 91) can be used. However, for maximum vehicle performance, the use of unleaded premium gasoline is recommended.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

API Certification Mark API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving II or API grade SJ, Energy Conserving ILSAC grade GF-II SAE 10W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for ambient temperatures above 0F (18C). See Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants in the 10. Technical and consumer information section for engine oil and oil filter recommendation.

COLD TIRE PRESSURES:

Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control devices and systems, and could also affect the warranty coverage. Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, since this will damage the three way catalyst. For additional information, see Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the 10. Technical and consumer information section. See tire placard affixed to the center console lid.

NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURES RECOMMENDATION:

During the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of vehicle use, follow the recommendations outlined in the Break-in schedule Information found in the 5. Starting and driving section of this Owners Manual. Follow these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life.

Windshield washer fluid 8-12

Engine coolant 8-5 Meters and gauges 2-3 Engine oil 8-8 Hood release 3-8 Seat 1-2 Trunk release (Type B) 3-9 Trunk release (Type A) 3-9 Seat belt 1-17 Audio system 4-12 Air conditioner 4-3

Key 3-2

Fuel 3-10, 10-2

Spare tire 6-2, 8-35

STI0167

Foreword
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence. It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control. This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle. A separate Warranty Information and Maintenance Log Booklet (in U.S.), Warranty and Roadside Assistance Information booklet (in Canada) explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle and vehicle maintenance schedules. Additionally, a separate Customer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, as well as clarify your rights under your states lemon law. Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have any questions, he will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to him. tenance requirements, assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modification may not be covered under NISSAN warranties.

WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS FOR SAFETY!
Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers! Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Always observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions. Always use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat. Always provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle. Always review this Owners Manual for important safety information.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for all options available on this model. Therefore, you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle. All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or design at any time without notice.

READ FIRST THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Before driving your vehicle please read your Owners Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and main-

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways:

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

WARNING
Engine Exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.
SIC0697

CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means Do not do this or Do not let this happen.

2000 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD. TOKYO, JAPAN

All rights reserved. No part of this Owners Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.

Welcome To The World Of NISSAN

portation services to the supply of lubricants, parts and accessories. NISSAN pioneered the use of electronics and computers in automobiles, and has led the industry in improving both performance and fuel efficiency through new engine designs and the use of synthetic materials to reduce vehicle weight. The company has also developed ways to build quality into its vehicles at each stage of the production process, both through extensive use of automation and most importantly through an awareness that people are the central element in quality control. From the time the parts arrived from our suppliers until you took delivery of your new Nissan, dozens of checks were made to ensure that only the best job was being done in producing and delivering your vehicle. NISSAN also takes great care to ensure that when you take your NISSAN to your dealer for maintenance, the service technician will perform his work according to the quality standards that have been established by the factory. Safety has also been built into your NISSAN. As you know, seat belts are an integral part of the safety systems that will help protect you and your passengers in the event of a sudden stop or an accident. We urge you to use the seat belts every time you drive the vehicle. The NISSAN story of growth and achievement reflects our major goal: to provide you, our customer, with a vehicle that is built with quality and craftsmanship a product that we can be proud to build and you can be proud to own.

AFW0001

Your new NISSAN is the result of our dedication to produce the finest in safe, reliable and economical transportation. Your vehicle is the product of a successful worldwide company that manufactures cars and trucks in over 17 countries and distributes them in 170 nations. NISSAN vehicles are designed and manufactured by Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. which was founded in Tokyo, Japan in 1933, and NISSAN affiliates world wide, collectively growing to become the fifth largest automaker in the world. In addition to cars and trucks, NISSAN also makes textile machinery, fork-lift trucks, marine engines, boats and other products. NISSAN has made a substantial and growing investment in North America, starting with the opening of Nissan Motor Corporation U.S.A. in 1960 and continuing with the production of some

cars and trucks at one of the worlds most modern manufacturing facilities, Nissan Motor Manufacturing Corporation U.S.A. in Smyrna, Tennessee, vehicle styling at Nissan Design International in San Diego, California, and engineering at Nissan Research and Development in Farmington Hills, Michigan. NISSAN and its dealers indirectly employ about 60,000 Americans. NISSAN is also a substantial contributor to the Canadian economy. Nissan Canada Inc., its suppliers and over 140 dealers employ approximately 4,500 people. These include company employees and the staffs of NISSAN dealers all across Canada. In addition, many Canadians work for companies that supply NISSAN and NISSAN dealers with materials and services ranging from operation of port facilities and trans-

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

NISSAN CARES ... Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions, please contact our (NISSANs) Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number:

For U.S. mainland customers 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261) For Hawaii customers (808) 836-0888 (Oahu Number) For Canadian customers 1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information: Your name, address, and telephone number Vehicle identification number (on dashboard) Date of purchase Current odometer reading Your NISSAN dealers name Your comments or questions OR

You can write to NISSAN with the information on the left at: For U.S. mainland and Alaska customers Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 191 Gardena, California 90248-0191 For Hawaii customers Nissan Motor Corporation in Hawaii 2880 Kilihau St. Honolulu, Hawaii 96819 For Canada customers Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

Table of Contents

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems Instruments and controls Pre-driving checks and adjustments Heater, air conditioner and audio systems Starting and driving In case of emergency Appearance and care Do-it-yourself Maintenance Technical and consumer information Index

1 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Seats ......................................................................... 1-2 Front manual seat adjustment .................................. 1-2 Front power seat adjustment .................................... 1-4 Folding rear seat ...................................................... 1-6 Head restraint adjustment ......................................... 1-7 Armrest ...................................................................... 1-8 Supplemental restraint system.................................. 1-8 Precautions on supplemental restraint system ......... 1-8 Supplemental air bag warning labels...................... 1-18 Supplemental air bag warning light......................... 1-19 Seat belts ................................................................ 1-20 Precautions on seat belt usage .............................. 1-20 Child safety ............................................................. Pregnant women ..................................................... Injured persons ....................................................... Three-point type seat belt with retractor ................. Seat belt extenders ................................................. Seat belt maintenance ............................................ Child restraints ........................................................ Precautions on child restraints................................ Installation on rear seat outboard or center positions .................................................................. Top tether strap child restraint (if so equipped)...... Installation on front passenger seat........................ 1-22 1-23 1-24 1-24 1-27 1-27 1-28 1-28 1-30 1-35 1-36

SEATS FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT

WARNING
Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of control of the vehicle. After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked.

SSS0133

WARNING
Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

For most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly. See Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section.

1-2

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SPA0097

SPA0099A

Forward and backward

Pull the lever up while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean back. To bring the seatback forward again, pull the lever and move your body forward. The seatback moves forward.

Seat lifter (Drivers seat)

Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion to the desired position.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-3

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT

WARNING
Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

SPA0467

Lumbar support (Drivers seat)

The lumbar support feature provides lower back support to the driver. Move the lever up or down to adjust the seat lumbar area.

Operating tips
The motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate the switch. Do not operate the power support seat for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery.

1-4

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SSS0148

SSS0147

Forward and backward

Moving the switch forward or backward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position.

Reclining
Move the recline switch backward until the desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback forward again, move the switch forward and move your body forward. The seatback will move forward.

Seat lifter (Drivers seat)

Push the front or rear end of the switch up or down to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-5

levers are in lock position for security of the trunk.

WARNING
When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain that they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured in the right position, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
SPA0467

Lumbar support (Drivers seat)

The lumbar support feature provides lower back support to the driver. Move the lever up or down to adjust the seat lumbar area.

Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraint can be extremely dangerous in an accident or sudden stop.
SSS0149

FOLDING REAR SEAT Interior trunk access

The trunk can be readily accessible from the rear seat for loading and unloading, as shown. Rear seats will not fold when the lock

Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

1-6

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

 Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked with the rear seatback securely latched when not in use, and prevent childrens access to car keys.

ment after someone else uses the seat.

SSS0125

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT

To raise the head restraint, just pull it up. To lower, push the lock knob and push the head restraint down.

WARNING
Head restraints should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident. Do not remove them. Check the adjust-

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-7

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) section contains important information concerning the driver and passenger supplemental air bags, supplemental side air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts. Supplemental front air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the face and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions. Supplemental side air bag system (if so equipped): This system can help cushion the impact force to the head and the chest area of the driver and front passenger in certain side impact collisions. The supplemental side air bag is designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. These supplemental restraint systems are designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and front passenger seat belts and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the driver and front passenger seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and front door finishers. (See Seat belts later in this section for

SSS0164

Adjust the head restraints so the top is level with the top of your ears.

SSS0150

ARMREST
Pull the armrest forward until it is horizontal.

1-8

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.) After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

SSS0131

WARNING
The supplemental front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, roll over, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents. The seat belts and the supplemental front air bags are most effective when

you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. Front air bags inflate with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash and may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the supplemental front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-9

wheel or instrument panel. Always use the seat belts. Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the supplemental front air bag inflates.

SSS0132

1-10

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SSS0006

SSS0008

SSS0099

SSS0007

SSS0009

SSS0100

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-11

WARNING
Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations. Children may be severely injured or killed when the supplemental front air bag or supplemental side air bag inflates if they are not properly restrained. Also never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating supplemental front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. For additional information, see Child restraints later in this section.

SSS0101

SSS0140

WARNING
Supplemental equipped): side air bag (if so

The supplemental side air bag ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear impact or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

The seat belts and the supplemental side air bag are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The side air bag inflates with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seat to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illus-

1-12

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SSS0159

SSS0162

trations. When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the supplemental side air bag inflates, the occupant may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with supplemental side air bag inflation.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-13

Supplemental front air bags along with the use of seat belts, helps to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags and supplemental side air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body. The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or dash board. Since the supplemental front air bags inflates quickly in order to help protect the front occupants, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against the air bag module during inflation. The air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over. After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

SSS0151B

Supplemental front air bag system

The driver supplemental air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel; the front passenger supplemental air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. These systems are designed to meet optional certification requirements under U.S. regulations. They are also permitted in Canada. The optional certification allows front air bags to be designed to inflate somewhat less forcefully than previously. However, all of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed. The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental air bag operation. When the supplemental front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire, but care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.

1-14

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

WARNING
Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental front air bag inflates. Right after inflation, several air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental front air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the air bag or damage to the air bag system. Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicles electrical system, suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper

operation of the supplemental air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad, above the dashboard, or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system. Work around and on the supplemental front air bag system should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system. * The SRS wiring harnesses are covered with yellow insulation either just

before the harness connectors or over the complete harness for easy identification. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the supplemental front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-15

When the supplemental side air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire, but care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. Supplemental side air bags along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the head and the chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries.
SSS0165

WARNING
Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental side air bag inflates. Right after inflation, several supplemental side air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental side air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the side air bag or damage to the side air bag system. Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicles electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the supplemental side air bag sys-

Supplemental side air bag system (if so equipped)

The supplemental side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats. The supplemental side air bag (on the driver or front passenger seat) is designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although it may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity side impact. It is designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. It may not inflate in certain side collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental side air bag operation.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the supplemental side air bag. Since the side air bag inflates quickly in order to help protect the front occupants, the force of the side air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against the side air bag module during inflation. The side air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over. After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

1-16

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

tem. Tampering with the supplemental side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the front seats assembly by placing material near the seatback of the front seat, or by installing additional trim material around the side air bag system. Work around and on the supplemental side air bag system should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag system. * The SRS wiring harnesses are covered with yellow insulation either just before the harness connectors or over the complete harness for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the supplemental side air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual.

operation. Tampering with the pretensioner seat belt system may result in serious personal injury. Work around and on the pretensioner system should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner seat belt system. If you need to dispose of the pretensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact an authorized NISSAN dealer. Correct pre-tensioner disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury. The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt system activates in conjunction with the supplemental front air bag. Working with the seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt the instant the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of

Pre-tensioner seat belt system (For front seats)

WARNING
The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be reused after activation. It must be replaced together with the retractor as a unit. If the vehicle becomes involved in a frontal collision but the pre-tensioner is not activated, be sure to have the pre-tensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced by your NISSAN dealer. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pre-tensioner seat belt system. This is to prevent accidental activation of the pre-tensioner seat belt or damage to the pre-tensioner seat belt

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-17

collisions, thereby restraining seat occupants. The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat belts retractor. These seat belts are used the same as conventional seat belts. When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. The smoke is not harmful, but care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking. If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensioner system, the supplemental air bag warning light will not come on, will flash intermittently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on after the ignition key has been turned to the ON or START position. In this case, the pretensioner seat belt may not function properly. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat belt system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual.

SPA0945A

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

1-18

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SPA1097

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light, displaying in the instrument panel, monitors the circuits of the supplemental front air bag and supplemental side air bag systems, and pre-tensioner seat belt. The circuits monitored by the air bag warning light are the diagnosis sensor unit, satellite sensors, front air bag modules, side air bag modules and all related wiring, and pre-tensioner seat belt. After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning

light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. If any of the following conditions occur, the supplemental front air bag system, supplemental side air bag system, and pre-tensioner seat belt need servicing: The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds. The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently. The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all. Under these conditions, the supplemental front air bags, supplemental side air bags and/or pre-tensioner seat belt may not operate properly. They must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest authorized NISSAN dealer.

Repair and replacement procedure

The supplemental front air bags, supplemental side air bags and pre-tensioner seat belt are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light will remain illuminated after inflation has occurred. Repair and replacement of these systems should be done only by authorized NISSAN dealers. To ensure long-term functioning, these systems must be inspected 10 years after the date of manufacture noted on the certification label located on the driver side center pillar. When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the supplemental front air bags, supplemental side air bags, related parts and pre-tensioner seat belt should be pointed out to the person conducting the maintenance. The ignition key should always be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the supplemental front air bag system, supplemental side air bag system and/or pre-tensioner seat belt will not operate in an accident.

WARNING
Once the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag and/or pre-

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-19

SEAT BELTS
tensioner seat belt has in flated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. The module should be replaced by an authorized NISSAN dealer. The supplemental front air bag module or supplemental side air bag module cannot be repaired. The supplemental front air bag system, supplemental side air bag system and pre-tensioner seat belt should be inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle. If you need to dispose of these supplemental systems or scrap the vehicle, contact an authorized NISSAN dealer. Correct disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Serice Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE

Your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced if you are wearing your seat belt and it is properly adjusted. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag. Most states, provinces or territories require that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

1-20

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

 Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible around the hips, not the waist. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident. Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle. Do not wear the belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness.
SSS0134

Do not allow more than one person to use the same belt. Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts. If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. Once the pre-tensioner seat belt has activated, it cannot be reused and

WARNING
Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be properly restrained and, if appropriate, in a child restraint. The belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly. Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the belt behind your back under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-21

SSS0136

SSS0016

must be replaced together with the retractor. See your NISSAN dealer. Removal and installation of the pretensioner seat belt system components should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. All seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision by your NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be

replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.

CHILD SAFETY
Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly restrained. The proper restraint depends on the childs size. Generally, infants (up to about 1 year and less than 20 lb (9 kg) should be placed in rear facing child restraints. Front facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear facing child restraints.

1-22

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

All US states and provinces of Canada require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. (See Child restraints later in this section.) In addition, there are many types of child restraints available for larger children which should be used for maximum protection. NISSAN recommends that all preteens and children be restrained in the rear seat if possible. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
SSS0014

systems should be seated and restrained by the seat belts which are provided. If the childs seating position has a shoulder belt that fits close to the face or neck, the use of a booster seat (commercially available) may help overcome this. The booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top, middle portion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck, use the shoulder belt without the booster seat.

WARNING
Infants and children need special protection. The vehicles seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints.

This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (air bag system) for the front passenger (see Supplemental Restraint System earlier in this section for precautions).

Infants and small children

NISSAN recommends that infants and small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturers instructions for installation and use.

WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is moving. The child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident or a sudden stop.

Larger children
Children who are too large for child restraint

PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women
Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-23

use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug, and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations.
SSS0018 SSS0020

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING
Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident

you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. For most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly.

1-24

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

The automatic locking mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by a passenger, the locking mode should not be activated. If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension.

WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain that seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured in the right position, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

SSS0102

SSS0061

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. 2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until it snaps. The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion will permit the belt to move, and allow you some freedom of movement in the seat.

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown. 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack. The front passenger and rear seat belts have a cinching mechanism for child restraint installation. It is referred to as the automatic locking mode. When the cinching mechanism is activated the seat belt cannot be withdrawn again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. For additional information, see Child restraints later in this section.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-25

forward. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement. If the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any questions about belt operation, see your NISSAN dealer.

SSS0021

SPA0829

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the belt, press the button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract.

Center of rear seat

Selecting correct set of seat belts: The center seat belt buckle is identified by the CENTER mark. The center seat belt tongue can be fastened only into the center seat belt buckle.

Checking seat belt operation

Your seat belt retractors are designed to lock belt movement using two separate methods: when the belt is pulled quickly from the retractor. when the vehicle slows down rapidly. You can check their operation as follows: grasp the shoulder belt and pull quickly

1-26

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

WARNING
After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the shoulder belt down to make sure it is securely fixed in position. The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident.

WARNING
Only NISSAN belt extenders, made by the same company which made the original equipment belts, should be used with NISSAN belts. Persons who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident.

SSS0152

Shoulder belt height adjustment (For front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best suited for you. (See Precautions on seat belt usage earlier in this section.) To lower, push the release button, and then move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position, so that the belt passes over the shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position. To raise, move the adjuster up to the desired position without pushing the button.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

To clean the seat belt webbings, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpets. Then brush the webbing, wipe it with a cloth and allow it to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry. If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth. Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components such as

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender is available which is compatible with the installed seat belts. The extender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. See your NISSAN dealer for assistance if the extender is required.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-27

CHILD RESTRAINTS
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire belt assembly should be replaced.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS

WARNING
Infants and small children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint while riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a child restraint can result in serious injury or death. Infants and small children should never be carried on your lap. It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident. The child could be crushed between the adult and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the same seat belt around both your child and yourself. Never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating supplemental air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. A rear facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat.

NISSAN recommends that the child restraint be installed in the rear seat. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. An improperly installed child restraint could lead to serious injury or death in an accident. In general, child restraints are designed to be installed with the lap portion of a three-point type seat belt. Child restraints for infants and children of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind: choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicles seat and seat belt system. Choose a child restraint that meets the guidelines of the Society of Automotive Engineers recom-

1-28

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

mended practice J1819 for child restraint installation. if the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Always follow all recommended procedures. All US states and Canadian provinces require that infants and small children be restrained in approved child restraints at all times while the vehicle is being operated.

WARNING
Improper use of a child restraint can result in increased injuries for both the infant or child and other occupants in the vehicle. Follow all of the child restraint manufacturers instructions for installation and use. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure to select one which will fit your child and vehicle. It may not be possible to properly install

some types of child restraints in your vehicle. If the child restraint is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases. Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to fit the child restraint, but as upright as possible. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Tilt it from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. For a front facing child restraint, check to make sure the shoulder belt does not go in front of the childs face or neck. If it does, put the shoulder belt behind the child restraint. If you must install a front facing child restraint in the front seat, see instructions later in this section.

When your child restraint is not in use, store it in the trunk or keep it secured with a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown around in case of a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION
Remember that a child restraint left in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the child restraint.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-29

INSTALLATION ON REAR SEAT OUTBOARD OR CENTER POSITIONS

WARNING
The three-point belt on your vehicle is equipped with a locking mode retractor which must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to do so will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. It could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision.

SSS0153

SSS0154

Front facing
When you install a child restraint in a rear outboard or center seat, follow these steps: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. It can be placed in a front facing direction, depending on the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manufacturers instructions.

1-30

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SSS0043

SSS0107

SSS0062

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for belt routing.

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts back to emergency locking mode when the belt is fully retracted.

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt to remove any slack in the belt.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-31

retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt only locks during a sudden stop or impact.

SSS0108

SSS0155

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is allowed to wind back into the

Rear facing
When you install a child restraint in a rear outboard or center seat, follow these steps: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. The direction of the child restraint depends on the type of the child restraint and the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manufacturers instructions.

1-32

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SSS0156

SSS0046

SSS0045A

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for belt routing.

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts back to emergency locking mode when the belt is fully retracted.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-33

retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt only locks during a sudden stop or impact.

SSS0109

SSS0110

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is allowed to wind back into the

1-34

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

WARNING
The child restraint anchor point is designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstance is it to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses.

Anchor point locations

SSS0157

Anchor points are located on the rear parcel shelf finisher. When installing a top strap child restraint on the rear seat for the first time, consult your NISSAN dealer for details.

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT (if so equipped)

If your child restraint has a top tether strap, it must be secured to the provided anchor point. First, secure the child restraint with the lap portion of the rear seat belt. Remove the anchor cover from the anchor point which is located directly behind the child seat. Secure the top tether strap to the anchor bracket. Keep the removed cover in a secured place to prevent loss or damage to the cover.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-35

ing a child restraint. Failure to use the retractors locking mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The child restraint could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision.

SSS0129

INSTALLATION ON FRONT PASSENGER SEAT

WARNING
Never install a rear facing child restraint in the front passenger seat. Supplemental air bags inflate with great force. A rear facing child restraint could be struck by the supplemental air bag in a crash and could seriously injure or kill your child.

NISSAN recommends that child restraints be installed in the rear seat. However, if you must install a front facing child restraint in the front passenger seat, move the passenger seat to the rearmost position. A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat. The three-point belt in your vehicle is equipped with a locking mode retractor which must be used when install-

1-36

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SSS0135

SSS0055

SSS0113

Front facing
If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, follow these steps: 1. Position the child restraint on the front passenger seat. It should be placed in a front facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Always follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for belt routing.

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts back to emergency locking mode when the belt is fully retracted.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-37

seat belt is allowed to wind back into the retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt only locks during a sudden stop or impact.

SSS0056

SSS0114

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the lap belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the

1-38

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

MEMO

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-39

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel ....................................................... 2-2 Meters and gauges ................................................... 2-3 Speedometer and odometer ..................................... 2-4 Tachometer ............................................................... 2-4 Engine coolant temperature gauge........................... 2-5 Fuel gauge ................................................................ 2-5 Warning/indicator lights and chimes ......................... 2-7 Checking bulbs.......................................................... 2-7 Warning lights ........................................................... 2-7 Indicator lights ........................................................... 2-9 Chimes .................................................................... 2-11 Security systems ..................................................... 2-12 Theft warning (if so equipped) ................................ 2-12 Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System ....................... 2-13 Windshield wiper and washer switch ...................... 2-15 Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defogger switch ....................................................... 2-16 Headlight and turn signal switch ............................. 2-17 Headlight switch ...................................................... 2-17 Turn signal switch ................................................... 2-19 Fog light switch (if so equipped) ............................. 2-19 Hazard warning flasher switch ................................ 2-20 Horn......................................................................... 2-20 Heated seats (if so equipped)................................. 2-21

Traction control system (TCS) cancel switch (if so equipped) ....................................................... Power outlet ............................................................ Cigarette lighter and ashtray (accessory) ............... Storage .................................................................... Trays ....................................................................... Glasses case........................................................... Cup holder............................................................... Glove box ................................................................ Console box ............................................................ Luggage net (if so equipped) .................................. Windows .................................................................. Power windows ....................................................... Sunroof (if so equipped) ......................................... Automatic sunroof ................................................... Clock ....................................................................... Adjusting the time ................................................... Interior light ............................................................. Ceiling ..................................................................... Personal light .......................................................... Vanity mirror light (if so equipped).......................... Trunk light ............................................................... Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver (if so equipped) .......................................................

2-22 2-22 2-23 2-23 2-23 2-24 2-24 2-25 2-26 2-26 2-27 2-27 2-29 2-29 2-30 2-30 2-30 2-30 2-31 2-32 2-33 2-33

Programming HomeLink ........................................ 2-34 Programming HomeLink for Canadian customers ................................................................ 2-34 Operating the integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver.............................................................. 2-35

Programming problem-Diagnosis............................ Clearing the programmed information .................... Rolling code programming ...................................... Reprogramming a single HomeLink button .......... If your vehicle is stolen ...........................................

2-35 2-35 2-35 2-36 2-36

INSTRUMENT PANEL
Windshield wiper/washer switch (P.2-15) Traction control system (TCS) cancel switch (if so equipped) (P.2-22) Cruise control main switch (P.5-14) Meters/gauges (P.2-3) Instrument brightness control switch (P.2-18) Headlight, fog light (if so equipped) and turn signal switch (P.2-17) Ventilator (P.4-2) Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defogger switch (P.2-16) Heater/air conditioner control (P.4-3) Clock (P.2-30) Security indicator light (P.2-12) Radio/cassette player (P.4-14)/CD player (P.4-19) Passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-8)

Fuse box cover (P.8-23) Outside mirror remote control (P.3-13) Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-8) Tilting steering wheel lock lever (P.3-12) Cruise control set switch (P.5-14) Ignition switch/steering lock (P.5-4) Power outlet (P.2-22) or cigarette lighter (accessory) (P.2-23) Hazard warning flasher switch (P.2-20)

Glove box (P.2-25)

Tray (P.2-23) or ashtray (accessory) (P.2-23)

See the page indicated in parentheses for operating details.

SIC1225

2-2

Instruments and controls

METERS AND GAUGES

SIC1321

Instruments and controls

2-3

Changing the display: Pushing the reset knob changes the display as follows: TRIP A , TRIP B , TRIP A Resetting the trip odometer: Pushing the reset knob for more than 1 second resets the trip odometer to zero. You can change the display of the trip odometer between A and B and reset them while the odometers are illuminated for about 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned off.

SIC1227

SIC1249

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (r/min).

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer/twin trip odometer are displayed when the ignition key is in the ON position. The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.

CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.

2-4

Instruments and controls

CAUTION
If the gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. See If your vehicle overheats in the 6. In case of emergency section for immediate action required.
SIC0173 SIC0879

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant temperature will vary with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.

FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank. The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hill. The gauge needle is designed to move to the E (Empty) position when the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers Empty.

Instruments and controls

2-5

The low fuel warning light comes on when the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the gauge reaches E. There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E.

CAUTION
If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving trips, the lamp should turn off. If the lamp remains on after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see the Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) later in this section.

2-6

Instruments and controls

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND CHIMES

Engine oil pressure warning light Charge warning light Door open warning light Seat belt warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Low washer fluid warning light (if so equipped) or or Brake warning light Anti-lock brake warning light (if so equipped) Cruise main switch indicator light Cruise set indicator light Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) Traction control system indicator light (if so equipped) Slip indicator light (if so equipped)

Low fuel warning light Overdrive off indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator light High beam indicator light (Blue)

CHECKING BULBS
Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition key to ON without starting the engine. The following lights will come on: , or , , , ,

WARNING LIGHTS Engine oil pressure warning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop. The oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. See Engine oil in the 8. Do-it-yourself section.

CAUTION
Running the engine with the oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.

The following lights come on briefly and then go off: , or , If any light fails to come on, it may indicate a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system. Have the system repaired promptly.

Charge warning light

If the light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate that there is something wrong with the charging system. Turn the
Instruments and controls

2-7

engine off and check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing or if the light remains on, see your NISSAN dealer immediately.

Supplemental air bag warning light

After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light will illuminate. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. If any of the following conditions occur, the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt needs servicing and your vehicle must be taken to your nearest authorized NISSAN dealer. The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds. The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently. The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all. Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental Restraint System and/or the pre-tensioner seat belt may not function properly. For additional information, see Supplemental restraint system in the 1. Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems section.

WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the supplemental air bag system, supplemental side air bag system (if so equipped) and/or pretensioner seat belt will not operate in an accident.

CAUTION
Do not continue driving if the belt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors are not closed securely while the ignition key is ON.

Low washer fluid warning light (if so equipped)

This light comes on when the washer tank fluid is at a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary. See Window washer fluid in the 8. Do-it-yourself section.

Seat belt warning light and chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition key is turned to ON, and will remain illuminated until the drivers seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime will sound for about 6 seconds unless the drivers seat belt is securely fastened. See Seat belts in the 1. Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems section for precautions on seat belt usage.

or

Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems. Parking brake indicator: When the ignition key is in the ON position, the light comes on when the parking brake is applied.

2-8

Instruments and controls

Low brake fluid warning light: The light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following: 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. See Brake and clutch fluid in the Do-it-yourself section.

If the brake fluid level is below the MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked at a NISSAN dealer. 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warning system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If the light comes on while you are driving, contact your NISSAN dealer for repair.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel in the tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E. There will be a small reserve of fuel remaining in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E.

WARNING
Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous. Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or low brake fluid level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as greater pedal travel.

or

Anti-lock brake warning light (if so equipped)

INDICATOR LIGHTS Overdrive off indicator light

This light comes on during driving when the overdrive switch is pressed to prevent overdrive operation. The O/D OFF indicator light comes on for 2 seconds each time the ignition key is turned ON. This shows the light is functioning properly. If the O/D OFF indicator light blinks for approximately 8 seconds after coming on for 2 seconds, have your NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair it if necessary. The automatic transmission is equipped with an electronic fail-safe mode. This system allows the vehicle to be driven even in the event of damage to the electrical circuits. If this
Instruments and controls

After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the light will illuminate. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate there is something wrong with the anti-lock portion of the brake system. Have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. However if the light illuminates while starting the engine, it does not indicate a system malfunction. If an abnormality occurs in the system, the anti-lock function will cease but the ordinary brakes will continue to operate normally.

2-9

occurs, the gears automatically engage and lock into third gear. See the Driving the vehicle in the 5. Starting and driving section for fail-safe before visiting your NISSAN dealer.

indicate there is something wrong with the cruise control system. Have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer.

Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control problem. The malfunction indicator lamp may also come on steady if the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel filler cap is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least three gallons of fuel in the fuel tank. After a few driving trips, the lamp should turn off if no other potential emission control system problem exists. Operation The malfunction indicator lamp will come on in one of two ways: Malfunction indicator lamp on steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected. Check the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the

lamp should turn off after vehicle. The a few driving trips. If the lamp does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer. Malfunction indicator lamp blinking An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To reduce or avoid emission control system damage: a) Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH (72 km/h). b) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration. c) Avoid steep uphill grades. d) If possible, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed. The malfunction indicator lamp may stop blinking and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

The light flashes when the turn signal switch lever or hazard switch is turned on.

High beam indicator light (Blue)

This light comes on when the headlight high beam is on and goes out when the low beam is selected.

Cruise main switch indicator light

The light comes on when the cruise control main switch is pushed. The light goes out when the main switch is pushed again. When the cruise main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise control system is operational.

Cruise set indicator light

The light comes on while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control system. If the light blinks while the engine is running, it may

CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without

2-10

Instruments and controls

having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission control system.

button again. The indicator light will go off. b) If engine speed is above 4,000 rpm in a selected gear. Use D range on low friction road surfaces. If the traction control system indicator light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on, have your vehicle checked by your NISSAN dealer.

positions. But the system can upshift the transmission only as high as the indicated shift lever position.

CHIMES Key reminder chime

The chime will sound if the driver side door is opened while the key is left in the ignition switch (ignition switch is turned off). Remove the key and take it with you when leaving the vehicle.

Traction control system indicator light (if so equipped)

The traction control system indicator light should come on when you turn the ignition key to ON. The light will go off as you start the engine. If the indicator light does not come on or go off, have the TCS checked by your NISSAN dealer. If the light stays on or comes on when you are driving, there may be a problem with your traction control system and it may not operate properly. Have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. The traction control system indicator light may come on for the following reasons. a) If the system is turned off by pressing the button on the instrument panel, the indicator light will come on and stay on. To turn the system back on, press the

Slip indicator light (if so equipped)

This light will blink on when your traction control system is limiting wheel spin. Slippery road conditions may exist if the slip indicator light blinks on. If this happens, adjust your driving accordingly. You may feel or hear the system working, but this is normal. The light will blink on for a few seconds after the traction control system stops limiting wheel spin. The slip indicator light also comes on when you turn the ignition key to ON. The light will go off as you start the engine. If the light does not come on or go off, have the TCS checked by your NISSAN dealer. The traction control system operates in all transmission shift lever

Light reminder chime

The headlights will turn off when the front door is opened with the light switch on unless the ignition key is in the ON position. When you turn the headlight switch ON again after the lights automatically turn off and when you open the drivers door, the lights will not turn off automatically and a chime will sound instead. See the battery saver system under Headlight switch in this section for details. Make sure to turn the light switch off when you leave the vehicle.

Seat belt warning chime

The chime will sound for about 6 seconds
Instruments and controls

2-11

SECURITY SYSTEMS
unless the drivers seat belt is securely fastened.

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

IC0005

SIC1228

Your vehicle has two types of security systems, as follows: Theft warning (if so equipped) Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System The security condition will be shown by the security indicator light.

Security indicator light

This light will indicate for the theft warning system and the Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer system. This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This function indicates the security systems equipped on the vehicle are operational.

THEFT WARNING (if so equipped)

The theft warning system provides visual and audio alarm signals if parts of the vehicle are disturbed.

How to activate the theft warning system

1. Close all windows.

2-12

Instruments and controls

The system can be activated even if the windows are open. 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 3. Close and lock all doors, hood and trunk lid. The doors can be locked either with or without the key. Multi-remote controller equipped models: Close and lock all doors, hood and trunk lid. Lock all doors by the key or pressing the LOCK button on the multi-remote controller. At this time, the hazard indicators flash twice to indicate all doors are locked. 4. Confirm that the SECURITY indicator light comes on. The SECURITY light glows for about 30 seconds and then blink. The system is now activated. If, during this 30 second time period, the door is unlocked by the key or the multi-remote controller, or the ignition key is turned to ACC or ON, the system will not activate. If the key is turned slowly toward the front of the vehicle when locking the door, the system may not activate. If the key is returned beyond the vertical position toward the rear of the vehicle to remove the key, the system may be deactivated. If the indicator light fails to glow for 30 seconds, unlock the door

once and lock it again. Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will activate with all doors, hood and trunk lid locked and ignition key off. Turn the ignition key to ACC to turn the system off.

Opening the hood.

How to stop alarm

The alarm will stop only by unlocking a door or trunk lid with the key, or by pressing the UNLOCK button on multi-remote controller. The alarm will not stop if the ignition switch is turned to ACC or ON. If the system does not operate as described above, have it checked by your NISSAN dealer.

Theft warning system operation

The warning system will give the following alarm: The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently. The alarm automatically turns off after 2 to 3 minutes. However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking a door or trunk lid with the key, or by pressing the UNLOCK button on the multi-remote controller. The alarm is activated by: Opening the door without using the key or multi-remote controller. Opening the trunk lid without using the key or multi-remote controller or opening the trunk lid by operating the opener release button.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM

The Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key. If the engine fails to start using the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key, it may be due to interference caused by another Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key, an automated toll road device or automated payment device on the key ring. Restart the engine using the following procedures: 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK
Instruments and controls

2-13

position and wait approximately 5 seconds. 3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again. 4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key. If this procedure allows the engine to start, NISSAN recommends placing the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices. Statement related to section 15 of FCC rules for Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System (CONT ASSY-IMMOBILIZER) This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
SIC1228

Security indicator light

If Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the ignition key is in the ON position. If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, see your NISSAN dealer for Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System service as soon as possible. Please bring all Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have when visiting your NISSAN dealer for service.

2-14

Instruments and controls

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

CAUTION
The following could damage the washer system: Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds. Do not operate the washer if the reservoir tank is empty.

SIC0176

The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition key is in the ON position. Push the lever down to operate the wiper. Intermittent operation can be adjusted from 2 to 13 seconds by turning the knob. (Type B only) Pull the lever toward you to operate the washer. Then the wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield.

Instruments and controls

2-15

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR (if so equipped) DEFOGGER SWITCH

CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defogger.

SIC1231

To defog/defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors, start the engine and push the switch on. The indicator light will come on. Push the switch again to turn the defogger off. It will automatically turn off in approximately 15 minutes.

2-16

Instruments and controls

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

When the light switch is turned to the position, the headlight low or high beam will turn off. Turn the switch to the position: The front clearance, side marker, tail, license plate and instrument lights will come on. Turn the switch to the position: Headlights will come on and all the other lights remain on.

SIC1229

HEADLIGHT SWITCH Lighting

Turn the switch to the AUTO position: When the ignition key is in the ON or ACC

position, the tail light, headlight, instrument light and other lights turn on automatically, depending on the brightness of the surroundings. When the ignition key is turned to the OFF position, the light will turn off automatically.
Instruments and controls

2-17

passengers door is opened in this condition. When the headlight switch remains in the or position after the lights automatically turn off, the lights will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position from the OFF position.

CAUTION
When you turn on the headlight switch after the lights automatically turn off, the lights will not turn off automatically. Be sure to turn the light switch to the OFF position when you leave the vehicle for extended periods of time, otherwise the battery will go dead. Never leave the light switch on when the engine is not running for extended periods of time.

SIC1230

IC1284MA

Be sure not to put anything on top of the photo sensor located on the top left-hand side of the instrument panel. The photo sensor controls the autolamp; if it is covered, the photo sensor reacts as if it is dark and the headlights will illuminate.

Instrument brightness control

The instrument brightness control operates when the light switch is in the or position. Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instrument panel lights (except clock) and power window switch lights. When the control is turned to the right until a click sound is heard, the light intensity will be at maximum. When the control is turned to the left until a click sound is heard, the light will be turned off.

Battery saver system

When the headlight switch is in the or position while the ignition switch is in the ON position, the lights (including the front fog light) will automatically turn off 45 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position. However, the lights will turn off if the drivers or front

2-18

Instruments and controls

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped) Headlight beam select

To select the high beam, push the lever forward. Pull it back to select the low beam.

WARNING
When the daytime running light system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

Passing signal
Pulling the lever toward you will flash the headlight high beam.

Daytime running light system (Canada only)

The headlights automatically illuminate at a reduced intensity when the engine is started with the parking brake released. The daytime running lights operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position or in the position. Turn the headlight switch to the position for full illumination when driving at night. If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the daytime running lights do not illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate once the parking brake is released. The daytime running lights will remain on until the ignition switch is turned off.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Turn signal

Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signals cancel automatically.
SIC0880

Lane change signal

To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or down to the point where lights begin flashing.

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch to the position, then turn the switch to the position. To turn them off, turn the switch to the OFF position. The headlights must be on for the fog lights to operate.

Instruments and controls

2-19

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic. Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on. The flasher can be actuated with the ignition switch either off or on.
SIC1232

HORN

SIC1280

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights will flash. Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving.

To sound the horn, push the center pad area of the steering wheel.

WARNING
If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road.

2-20

Instruments and controls

HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)

The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on. 3. When the vehicles interior is warmed, or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off. Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth. When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, thinner, or any similar materials. If any abnormalities are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION
The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running. Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat. Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated. Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.

SIC0693

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The switches located on the center console can be operated independently of each other. 1. Start the engine. 2. Select heat range. For low heat, press the top of the switch. For high heat, press the bottom of the switch. For no heat, the switch has a center OFF position between low and high. The indicator light in the switch will illuminate when low or high is selected.

Instruments and controls

2-21

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS) CANCEL SWITCH (if so equipped)

POWER OUTLET
draw. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory. Use this power outlet with the engine running. (If the engine is stopped, this could result in a discharged battery.) Avoid using when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defogger is on. Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure to turn off the power switch of electrical accessory being used or the ACC power of the vehicle. Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may blow. When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water to contact the socket.

SIC1065

SIC1237

To cancel the Traction Control System (TCS), push the TCS cancel switch. The indicator will come on. Push it again to turn the system back on. See Traction control system in the 5. Starting and driving section.

The power outlet is for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones.

CAUTION
Use caution as the socket and plug may be hot during or immediately after use. This power outlet is not designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power

2-22

Instruments and controls

CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND ASHTRAY (accessory)

STORAGE

WARNING
The cigarette lighter should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

CAUTION
The cigarette lighter socket is a power source for the cigarette lighter element only. The use of the cigarette lighter socket as a power source for any other accessory is not recommended.

SIC1233

SIC1243

The cigarette lighter element is an accessory. A genuine NISSAN cigarette lighter unit can be purchased from your local NISSAN dealer. The cigarette lighter operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. Push the lighter in all the way. When the lighter is heated, it will spring out. Return the lighter to its original position after use.

TRAYS

WARNING
The storage tray should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

Instruments and controls

2-23

CAUTION
Do not use for anything other than glasses. Do not leave glasses in the glasses case while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the glasses.

SIC1238

SIC1279A

GLASSES CASE
The glasses case can be opened by pushing the button.

CUP HOLDER

WARNING
The cup holder should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. For larger cups, remove the inside tray.

WARNING
The glasses case should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

2-24

Instruments and controls

SIC1235

SPA0388

CAUTION
Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger. Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.

GLOVE BOX
When locking or unlocking the glove box, use the master key. The glove box may be opened by pulling the handle.

WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

Instruments and controls

2-25

SIC1242A

CARGO NET (if so equipped)

The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargo area from moving around while your vehicle is driven. To install the cargo net, attach the hooks to the retainers.
SIC1236

CONSOLE BOX

To remove the cargo net, detach the hooks from the cargo net retainers.

WARNING
The center console box should not be

used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

2-26

Instruments and controls

WINDOWS

WARNING
Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Be sure to secure hooks into the retainers. The cargo restrained in the net must not exceed 30 lb (13.6 kg) or the net may not stay secured.

and become trapped in a window. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents. The power windows operate when the ignition key is in the ON position and for about 45 seconds, after the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. If the drivers door or the front passengers door is opened during this period of about 45 seconds, power to the windows is canceled.
SIC0929

POWER WINDOWS

To open or close the window, push down or pull up the switch and hold it. The main switch (driver side switches) will open or close all the windows.

WARNING
Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc. inside the vehicle before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls
Instruments and controls

2-27

The auto reverse function can be activated when the drivers window is closed by automatic operation when the ignition key is in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window occurs.

WARNING
SIC0627B SPA0980

The passenger side switch will open or close only the corresponding window. To open or close the window, hold the switch down or up.

Automatic operation
To fully open or close the drivers side window, completely press or lift the switch and release it; it need not be held. The window will automatically open or close all the way. To stop the window, just press the switch on the opposite side.

Locking passengers windows

When the lock button is pushed in, only the driver side window can be opened or closed. Push it in again to cancel.

There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window.

Auto reverse function (For drivers window)

If the control unit detects something caught in the drivers window as it moves up, the window will be immediately lowered.

2-28

Instruments and controls

SUNROOF (if so equipped)

To close the roof, press and hold the switch to side. the

WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the sunroof.

Automatic operation
To fully open or close the roof, completely press the switch to the or side and release it; it need not be held. The roof will automatically open or close all the way. To stop the roof, just press the switch toward the opposite. A light press on the switch will cause the roof to open or close until the switch is released.
SIC1293

Tilting the sunroof

To tilt up, first close the sunroof, then press and hold the side of the tilt switch. To tilt down the sunroof, press and hold the side.

AUTOMATIC SUNROOF
The sunroof will only operate when the ignition key is in the ON position. The automatic sunroof is operational for about 45 seconds, even if the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. If the drivers door or the front passengers door is opened during this period of about 45 seconds, power to the sunroof is canceled.

Auto reverse function (When closing the sunroof)

If the control unit detects something caught in the sunroof as it moves to the front, the sunroof will immediately open backward. The auto reverse function can be activated when the sunroof is closed by automatic operation when the ignition key is in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the sunroof occurs.

Sun shade
Open or close the sun shade by sliding it backward or forward. The shade will open automatically when the sunroof is opened. However, it must be closed manually.

Sliding the sunroof

To open the roof, press and hold the switch to the side.

Instruments and controls

2-29

CLOCK

INTERIOR LIGHT

WARNING
In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open sunroof. Always use seat belts and child restraints. Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the sunroof is closing.
SIC0910 IC1226

CAUTION
Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from the sunroof before opening. Do not place any heavy object on the sunroof or surrounding area.

The digital clock displays time when the ignition key is in ACC or ON. If the power supply is disconnected, the clock will not indicate the correct time. Readjust the time.

CEILING
The ceiling light has a three-position switch. When the switch is in the center k position, the light will illuminate when a door is opened. The light will stay on for about 30 seconds when: The doors are unlocked by the multi-remote controller while all doors are closed and locked with the key in the ignition switch. The drivers door is unlocked while the key is removed from the ignition switch and all doors are closed and locked.

ADJUSTING THE TIME

Push the H button to adjust the hour. Push the M button to adjust the minute.

If the sunroof does not close

Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the sunroof.

2-30

Instruments and controls

PERSONAL LIGHT
The drivers door is opened and then closed while the key is removed from the ignition switch. The key is removed from the ignition switch while all doors are closed. The ceiling light will turn off while the 30 second timer is activated, when: The drivers door is locked either with the multi-remote controller, a key, the door lock knob, or the lock-unlock switch. The ignition switch is turned ON. When the interior light switch or personal light switch is in the ON position, the interior, personal, vanity mirror and trunk lights will automatically turn off 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position. To turn on the light again, insert the key into the ignition switch and move it to the ON position. After the above procedure, the interior, personal, vanity mirror or trunk lights will automatically turn off 10 minutes after the latest operation of the following with the ignition switch in the ACC or OFF position: Opening or closing any door or trunk lid Locking or unlocking the drivers door Inserting or removing a key from the ignition switch These lights will turn on again when any of the above operations is performed after the lights have turned off automatically. (The lights will turn off 10 minutes after the latest operation of the above as well.)

CAUTION
Turn off the interior, personal and vanity mirror lights when you leave the vehicle. Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

IC1019-B

When the interior light or the personal light switch is in the ON position, the interior, personal, vanity mirror and trunk lights will automatically turn off 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position. To turn on the light again, insert the key into the ignition switch and move it to the ON position. After the above procedure, the interior, personal, vanity mirror or trunk lights will automatically turn off 10 minutes after the latest operation of the following with the ignition switch in the ACC or OFF position: Opening or closing any door or trunk lid
Instruments and controls

2-31

VANITY MIRROR LIGHT (if so equipped)

vanity mirror lights when you leave the vehicle. Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

IC1163-B

SIC0186

Locking or unlocking the drivers door Inserting or removing a key from the ignition switch These lights will turn on again when any of the above operations is performed after the lights have turned off automatically. (The lights will turn off 10 minutes after the latest operation of the above as well.)

The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when the cover on the vanity mirror is opened. When the interior light or the personal light switch is in the ON position, the interior, personal, vanity mirror and trunk lights will automatically turn off 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position. To turn on the light again, insert the key into the ignition switch and move it to the ON position.

CAUTION
Turn off the interior, personal and

2-32

Instruments and controls

TRUNK LIGHT
The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the light will go off. When the interior light or the personal light switch is in the ON position, the interior, personal, vanity mirror and trunk lights will automatically turn off 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position. To turn on the light again, insert the key into the ignition switch and move it to the ON position.

INTEGRATED HomeLink UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

The Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device. Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver: Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) devices such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and security systems. Is powered by your vehicles battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehicles battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink will retain all programming. Once the Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures (i.e., new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes. For additional information, refer to Programming HomeLink later in this section.

WARNING
Do not use the Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models manufactured after April 1, 1982). A garage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death. During programming, your garage door or gate may open or close. Make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate that you are programming. Your vehicles engine should be turned off while programming the In-

Instruments and controls

2-33

tegrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver.

3. Using both hands, simultaneously push the hand-held transmitter button and the desired HomeLink button. Do not release the buttons until step 4 has been completed. NOTE: Some garage door openers may require the procedures noted under Canadian Programming. 4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapid flashing light indicates the Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver has been successfully programmed. To program the remaining two buttons, follow steps 2 through 4. If, after repeated attempts, you do not successfully program the Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver to learn the signal of the hand-held transmitter, refer to Rolling Code Programming later in this section.

SPA0609A

PROGRAMMING HomeLink
1. With the ignition key in the OFF position, press and hold the two outside buttons, and release when the indicator light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds). This procedure erases the factory set default codes and does not have to be followed when programming additional hand-held transmitters. 2. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter (from the device you wish to train) approximately 2 to 5 inches (50 to 127 mm) away from the surface of HomeLink keeping the indicator light in view.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 seconds. To program your hand-held

2-34

Instruments and controls

transmitter to HomeLink , continue to press and hold the HomeLink button (note steps 2 through 4 under Programming HomeLink ) while you press and re-press (cycle) your hand-held transmitter every 2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly (indicating successful programming). NOTE: If programming a garage door opener, etc., it is advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener components.

replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries. position the hand-held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink surface. press and hold both the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons without interruption. position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 inches (50 to 127 mm) away from the HomeLink surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink is not programmed within that time, try holding the transmitter in another position - keeping the indicator light in view at all times. If you continue to have programming difficulties, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department. The phone numbers are located in the Foreword of this Owners Manual.

indicator light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).

ROLLING CODE PROGRAMMING

Rolling code garage door openers (or other rolling code devices) which are code protected and manufactured after 1996, may be determined by the following. A. Reference the garage door opener Owners Manual for verification. B. The hand-held transmitter appears to program the Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver but does not activate the garage door. C. Press and hold the trained HomeLink button. If the garage door opener has the rolling code feature, the HomeLink indicator light will flash rapidly, then remains on after 2 seconds. To program the Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver to a garage door opener with the rolling code feature, follow these instructions after completing the Programming HomeLink (the aid of a second person may make the following procedures quicker and easier). 1. Locate the training button on the garage door opener motor unit. Exact location and
Instruments and controls

OPERATING THE INTEGRATED HomeLink UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver (once programmed) may now be used to activate the garage door, etc. To operate, simply press the appropriate programmed Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver button. The red indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.

PROGRAMMING PROBLEM-DIAGNOSIS
If the HomeLink does not quickly learn the hand-held transmitter information:

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION

Individual buttons cannot be cleared, however to clear all programming, press and hold the two outside buttons and release when the

2-35

color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand. If there is difficulty locating the training button, reference the garage door opener Owners Manual. 2. Press the training button on the garage door opener motor unit (which may activate a training light). NOTE: Following step 2, there are 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3. 3. Firmly press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Press and release the HomeLink button a second time to complete the training process. (Some garage door openers may require you to do this procedure a third time to complete the training.) The garage door opener should now recognize the Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver and activate when the HomeLink button is pressed. The remaining two buttons may now be programmed (if not yet programmed, follow steps 2 through 4 in the Programming HomeLink procedures earlier in this section).

versal Transceiver button, complete the following. 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do not release the button until step 4 has been completed. 2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after 20 seconds), position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 inches (50 to 127 mm) away from the HomeLink surface. 3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button. 4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly, release both buttons. The Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink buttons.

manufacturer or dealer of those devices for additional information. When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the Integrated Universal Transceiver with HomeLink your new transmitter information. FCC Notice: This device complies with FCC rules part 15. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference and (2) This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the device. DOC: ISTC 1763K1313 FCC I.D.: CB2V67690

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the codes of any non-rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink . Consult the Owners Manual of each device or call the

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HomeLink BUTTON

To reprogram an Integrated HomeLink Uni-

2-36

Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys .......................................................................... Doors ......................................................................... Locking with key........................................................ Locking with inside lock knob ................................... Locking with power door lock switch ........................ Child safety rear door lock ........................................ Multi-remote control system (if so equipped)............ How to use multi-remote control system .................. Battery replacement .................................................. Hood .......................................................................... Trunk lid ....................................................................

3-2 3-2 3-3 3-3 3-3 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-7 3-8 3-9

Opener operation ...................................................... 3-9 Key operation .......................................................... 3-10 Fuel filler lid ............................................................. 3-10 Opener operation .................................................... 3-10 Fuel filler cap........................................................... 3-11 Steering wheel ........................................................ 3-12 Tilt operation ........................................................... 3-12 Sun visors ............................................................... 3-12 Mirrors ..................................................................... 3-13 Inside mirror ............................................................ 3-13 Outside mirrors........................................................ 3-13

KEYS
safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. NISSAN does not record any key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate. A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, this key can be duplicated by your NISSAN dealer. Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System KEY Master and Security keys: The key number is necessary when you need extra Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. As many as 5 Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one vehicle. New keys must be registered to the Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle by your NISSAN dealer. At this time, you should bring all Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because the registration process will erase all memory of the Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System components.

DOORS

WARNING
Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out intruders. Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

SIC1239

You can only drive your vehicle using the master or security keys which are registered to the Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in the key head. The master key can be used for all the locks. The security key cannot be used for the trunk lid or glove box locks. To protect belongings when you leave a key with someone, give them the security key only. Never leave these keys in the vehicle. Record the key number on the key number plate supplied with your keys and keep it in a

3-2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA0084

SPA0085

SPA0944

LOCKING WITH KEY Power

The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors simultaneously. Turning the drivers door key to the front of the vehicle will lock all doors. Turning the drivers door key one time to the rear of the vehicle will unlock the corresponding door. From that position, returning the key to neutral (where the key can only be removed and inserted) and turning it to the rear again within 5 seconds will unlock all doors.

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

To individually lock the doors from the outside move the inside lock knob to the LOCK position, then close the door. To unlock, pull up the inside lock knob to the unlock position. When locking the door without a key, be sure not to leave the key inside the vehicle.

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

All door locks will be engaged when the power door lock switch is moved to the LOCK position with the drivers or front passengers door open. Then close the door and all doors will be locked. When the power door lock switch is moved to the LOCK position with front doors open while a key is in the ignition switch, all doors will lock once and then unlock automatically.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-3

MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM (if so equipped)

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors to release the trunk lid and activate the panic alarm by using the remote controller from outside the vehicle. Before locking the doors, make sure the key is not left in the vehicle. The remote controller can operate at a distance of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. (The effective distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.) As many as four remote controllers can be used with one vehicle. For information concerning the purchase and use of additional remote controllers, contact your NISSAN dealer. The multi-remote controller will not function when: the battery is dead, the distance between the vehicle and the remote controller is over 33 ft (10 m). The panic alarm will not activate when the key is in the ignition switch. Do not allow the remote controller to become wet. Do not drop the remote controller. Do not strike the remote controller sharply against another object. Do not place the remote controller for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140F (60C). If a multi-remote controller is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that controller. This will prevent the controller from unauthorized use to unlock the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, please contact an authorized NISSAN dealer.

SPA0086

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety locking helps prevent doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle. When the lever is in the lock position, the rear door can be opened only from the outside.

HOW TO USE MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM Setting hazard and horn chirp mode
This vehicle is set in hazard and horn chirp mode when you first receive the vehicle. In hazard and horn chirp mode, when the LOCK button is pushed, the hazard indicator

CAUTION
The following conditions or occurrences will damage the remote controller.

3-4

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

flashes twice and the horn chirps once. When the UNLOCK button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes once. If hazard and horn chirp mode is not necessary, you can switch to normal mode by following the switching procedure. In normal mode, when the LOCK button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes twice. When the UNLOCK button is pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the horn operates. (Switching procedure) Push the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the multi-remote controller simultaneously for more than 2 seconds to switch from one mode to the other. When pushing the buttons to set normal mode, the hazard indicator flashes 3 times. When pushing the buttons to set hazard and horn chirp mode, the hazard indicator flashes once and the horn chirps once.
SPA0982

Locking doors
1. Remove the ignition key.*1 2. Close all the doors.*2 3. Push the LOCK button on the multi-remote controller. 4. All the doors will lock. All of the doors will lock when the LOCK button on the multi-remote controller is pushed even though a door remains open and/or the ignition key is in the ON position.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once. When the LOCK button is pushed with all doors locked, the hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once as a reminder that the doors are already locked. *1: Doors lock with the remote controller while a key is in the ignition switch. However, the panic alarm will not activate when the key is in the ignition switch. *2: Doors lock with the remote controller while any door is open. However, hazard and horn chirp mode will not function.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-5

2. Keep pushing the UNLOCK button on the multi-remote controller or push the button again within 5 seconds. All doors unlock The hazard indicator flashes once if all doors are completely closed. The interior light can be turned off without waiting for 30 seconds by turning the ignition switch to the ON position or by locking the doors with the multi-remote controller.

Releasing the trunk lid

1. Push the trunk button on the multi-remote controller for longer than 0.5 second with the key removed from the key cylinder. 2. The trunk lid opens. The trunk lid will not open when the trunk lid cancel lever is in the CANCEL position. It can be opened only with the key.
SPA0981

See Trunk lid later in this section for cancel lever.

Unlocking doors
1. Push the UNLOCK button on the multiremote controller once. Only the drivers door unlocks

The hazard indicator flashes once if all doors are completely closed. The interior light turns on and the light timer activates for 30 seconds when the switch is in the center k position.

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the alarm to call attention as follows: 1. Push the PANIC button on the remote

3-6

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

controller for longer than 0.5 seconds. 2. The theft warning alarm and headlights will stay on for 30 seconds. 3. The panic alarm stops when: It has run for 30 seconds, or The LOCK or the UNLOCK button is pressed, or The panic button is pushed on the multiremote controller for longer than 0.5 seconds.

Recommended battery: Sanyo CR2025 or equivalent Make sure that the side faces the bottom case. 3. Close the lid securely. 4. Push the remote controller button two or three times to check its operation. See your NISSAN dealer if you need any assistance for replacement. If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement, perform step 4 above. Be careful not to touch a circuit board and a battery terminal. An improperly disposed battery can harm the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.
SPA1046

The remote controller is water-resistant; however, if it does get wet, immediately wipe completely dry. When changing batteries, do not let dust or oil get on the controller. FCC Notice: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer compliance
Pre-driving checks and adjustments

BATTERY REPLACEMENT
Replace the battery as follows: 1. Open the lid using a suitable tool. 2. Replace the battery with a new one.

3-7

HOOD
could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

SPA0984 1 lo1. Pull the hood lock release handle k cated below the instrument panel; the hood will then spring up slightly. 2 at the front of the hood 2. Move the lever k with your fingertips and raise the hood.

WARNING
Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident. If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood.

3. When closing the hood, slowly close the hood and make sure it locks into place.

3-8

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

TRUNK LID

WARNING
Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See Precautions when starting and driving in the 5. Starting and driving section for exhaust gas. Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked with the trunk closed when not in use, and prevent childrens access to car keys.

SPA0095

Cancel lever
When the lever is in the cancel position, the trunk lid cannot be opened with the trunk lid release button. It can be opened only with the key.
SPA0985

OPENER OPERATION
The trunk lid release button is located under the drivers arm rest. To open the trunk lid, pull the release handle. To close, push the trunk lid down securely.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-9

FUEL FILLER LID

SPA0992

SPA0986

KEY OPERATION
To open the trunk lid, turn the key clockwise. To close, lower and push the trunk lid down securely.

OPENER OPERATION
To open the fuel filler lid, push the opener switch. To lock, close the fuel filler lid securely.

3-10

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle.

SPA0653

FUEL FILLER CAP

The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type. Tighten the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are heard. Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder while refueling.

ously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling. Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the cap one-half turn, and wait for any hissing sound to stop to prevent fuel from spraying out and possible personal injury. Then remove the cap. Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank

CAUTION
If fuel is spilled on the car body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage. Tighten until the fuel filler cap clicks. Failure to tighten the fuel filler cap properly may cause the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to illuPre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING
Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seri-

3-11

STEERING WHEEL
minate. If the lamp illuminates because the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The lamp should turn off after a few driving trips. If the lamp does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see the Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) in the 2. Instruments and controls section.

SUN VISORS

SPA0234

SPA0991

TILT OPERATION
Pull the lock lever and while holding down, adjust the steering wheel up or down to the desired position. Push the lock lever back into place to lock the steering wheel in place.

CAUTION
Store the main sun visor after storing the extension sun visor.

WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

3-12

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

MIRRORS
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. Turn the control knob to right or left to select the right or left outside mirror, then adjust.

SPA0470

SPA0987

INSIDE MIRROR
The night position will reduce glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you at night.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING
Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects. The outside mirror will operate only when the
Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING
Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

3-13

MPA0008

Foldable outside mirrors

Push the outside mirror backward to fold it.

3-14

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

4 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Ventilators ................................................................. 4-2 Heater and air conditioner (Manual) ......................... 4-3 Controls ..................................................................... 4-3 Heater operation ....................................................... 4-4 Air conditioner operation ........................................... 4-5 Air flow charts ........................................................... 4-6 Heater and air conditioner (Automatic) (if so equipped) .................................................................. 4-9 Automatic operation .................................................. 4-9 Manual operation .................................................... 4-10 Ambient temperature switch (AMB) ........................ 4-11

Operating tips .......................................................... 4-11 Servicing air conditioner.......................................... 4-11 Audio system........................................................... 4-12 FM radio reception .................................................. 4-12 AM radio reception .................................................. 4-13 FM-AM radio with cassette player .......................... 4-14 FM-AM radio with cassette player and compact disc (CD) player .............................................................. 4-19 Antenna ................................................................... 4-24 Car phone or CB radio ........................................... 4-25

VENTILATORS

SAA0373

SAA0374

Adjust the air flow direction of ventilators.

Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction of ventilators. : This symbol indicates that the vents are closed when the vent switch is moved to the left. : This symbol indicates that the vents are open when the vent switch is moved to the right.

4-2

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (Manual) CONTROLS Fan control dial

This dial turns the fan on and off, and controls fan speed.

Air flow control buttons

These buttons allow you to select the air flow outlets. Air flows from center and side ventilators.
SAA0383

Air flows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets. Air flows mainly from foot outlets. Air flows from defroster outlets and foot outlets. Air flows mainly from defroster outlets.

WARNING
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. Do not leave children, impaired adults, or pets alone in your vehicle. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or

animals. Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls should not be done while driving, so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

Temperature control lever

This lever allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air.

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-3

Air recirculation button

OFF position: Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment. Use the off position for normal heater, or air conditioner operation. ON position (Indicator light ON): Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the air recirculation button to the ON position when driving on a dusty road or to avoid traffic fumes and for maximum cooling when using the air conditioner.

HEATER OPERATION Heating

This mode is used to direct hot air from the floor outlets. Some air will also come from the defrost vents. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position for normal heating. 2. Push the button in.

4. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position.

Defrosting or defogging
This mode is used to defrost/defog the windows. 1. Push the button in. 2. Turn on the fan control dial. 3. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position between the middle and the HOT position. To quickly remove ice or fog from the windows, turn on the fan control dial to 4 and the temperature control lever to the full HOT position. When the button is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on to defog the windshield, and the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position between the middle and the HOT position. For quick heating, move the air recirculation button to the ON position. Be sure to return the air recirculation button to the OFF position for normal heating.

Air conditioning button

This button is provided only for vehicles with air conditioner. Start the engine, move the fan control dial to the desired (1 to 4) position and push the air conditioning button to turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light will come on when the air conditioner is on. To stop the air conditioner, push the switch again to return it to the original position. The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Ventilation
This mode directs outside air from the side and center vents. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in.

3. Turn on the fan control dial.

4-4

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Bi-level heating
This mode directs outside air from the side and center vents and hot air from the floor outlets. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in. 3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Normally move the temperature control lever to the midpoint between HOT and COLD.

recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

recirculation button to the OFF position for normal cooling.

Dehumidified heating
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION

Start the engine, move the fan control dial to the desired (1 to 4) position and push in the air conditioning button to activate the air conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions will be added to the heater operation.

3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Push on the air conditioning button. The indicator light will come on. 5. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position.

Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs the windshield. 1. Push the button in. 2. Turn on the fan control dial. 3. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position between the middle and the HOT position.

Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in. 3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Push on the air conditioning button. The indicator light will come on. 5. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position. For quick cooling when the outside temperature is high, move the air recirculation button to the ON position. Be sure to return the air

Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows and dehumidify. 1. Push the button in. 2. Turn on the fan control dial. 3. Push on the air conditioning button. The indicator light will come on. 4. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position. When the button is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on to deHeater, air conditioner and audio systems

Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and air inlet in front of the windshield. This will improve heater operation. When the button is pushed, the air

4-5

fog the windshield, and the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

quick heating, cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation button should be in the OFF position for normal cooling, heating and defrosting.

Operating tips
Keep the windows and sun roof closed while the air conditioner is in operation. After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3 minutes with the windows open to vent hot air from the passenger compartment. Then, close the windows. This will allow the air conditioner to cool the interior more quickly. The air conditioning system should be operated for about 10 minutes at least once a month. This helps prevent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication. If the coolant temperature gauge exceeds the HOT position, turn the air conditioning off. For additional information, see If your vehicle overheats in the 6. In case of emergency section.

AIR FLOW CHARTS

The charts on the following pages show the button and lever positions for maximum and

4-6

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

SAA0375

SAA0376

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-7

SAA0377

SAA0378

4-8

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (Automatic) (if so equipped)

On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls should not be done while driving, so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION
SAA0379

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO)

This mode may be normally used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

WARNING
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is run-

ning. Do not leave children, impaired adults, or pets alone in your vehicle.

4-9

1. Push the AUTO button on. (AUTO will be displayed.) 2. Turn the temperature set dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature. Adjust the temperature set dial to about 75F (24C) for normal operation. The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.

Dehumidified defogging
1. Push the DEF button on. (The indicator light on the button will come on.) 2. Turn the temperature set dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature. To quickly remove ice or fog from the outside of the windows, push the manual fan control button and set to the maximum position . As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, push the AUTO button to return to the auto mode. When the DEF button is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 23F (5C) to defog the windshield, and the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

Push the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.

Air recirculation
Push the air recirculation button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator light on the switch will come on. Push it again to make the air inlet controlled automatically (FRESH, REC/FRE and RECIRCULATION). The indicator will go out. The air recirculation button will not be activated when the air conditioner is in DEF mode.

Heating (ECON)
The air conditioner does not activate. When you need to heat only, use this mode. 1. Push the ECON (Economy) button on. (ECON will be displayed.) 2. Turn the temperature set dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature. The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically. Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature. Otherwise the system may not work properly. Not recommended if windows fog up.

Air flow control

Pushing the manual air flow control button selects the air outlet to: : : : : Air flows from center and side ventilators. Air flows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets. Air flows mainly from foot outlets. Air flow from defroster and foot outlets.

MANUAL OPERATION Fan speed control

Push the fan control button control the fan speed. to manually

To turn system off

Push the OFF button.

4-10

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SWITCH (AMB)

Push the ambient temperature switch. The outside ambient temperature will be displayed for approximately 5 seconds. The ambient temperature sensor is located in front of the radiator. The sensor may be affected by road or engine heat, wind direction and other driving conditions. The display may differ from the actual ambient temperature or the temperature displayed on various signs or billboards. The air conditioning system in your NISSAN vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind. This refrigerant will not harm the earths ozone layer. However, special charging equipment and lubricant are required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioning system. See Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the 10. Technical and consumer information section for air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations.
HA1011

OPERATING TIPS
When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature warms up, the air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally.

The sensor on the instrument panel helps maintain a constant temperature; do not put anything on or around this sensor.

Your NISSAN dealer will be able to service your environmentally friendly air conditioning system.

WARNING
The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced technician with proper equipment.

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-11

AUDIO SYSTEM
Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON and press the power on switch to turn on the radio. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, the key should be turned to the ACC position. Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other external influences. Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences. Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may influence radio reception quality. change. Buildings, terrain, signal distance and interference from other vehicles can work against ideal reception. Described below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception.

Radio reception
Your radio system is equipped with state-ofthe-art electronic circuits to enhance radio reception. These circuits are designed to extend reception range, and to enhance the quality of that reception. However there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even when the finest equipment is used. These characteristics are completely normal in a given reception area, and do not indicate any malfunction in your radio system. Remember that a moving vehicle is not the ideal place to listen to a radio. Because of the movement, reception conditions will constantly

SAA0306

FM RADIO RECEPTION
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to 30 miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM having slightly more range than stereo FM. External influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is within 25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same characteristics as light. For example they will reflect off objects. Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away

4-12

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

from a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade and/or drift. Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to antenna position, usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter, static or flutter can be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the treble control counterclockwise to reduce treble response. Multipath reception: Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time. The signals may cancel each other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.

power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

AM RADIO RECEPTION
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can bend around objects and skip along the ground. In addition, the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of these characteristics. AM signals are also subject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver. Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings. It can also occur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist. Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-13

FM-AM RADIO WITH CASSETTE PLAYER Audio main operation

Power/Volume control: Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, then push the Power/Volume control knob. The mode (radio or cassette) which was playing immediately before the system was turned off resumes playing. When no cassette is loaded, the radio comes on. Pushing the Power/ Volume control knob again turns the system off. Turn the Power/Volume control knob to adjust the volume.

SAA0263

4-14

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

FM-AM radio operation

FM-AM band select: Push the FM-AM band select button to listen to the radio and tune in the desired station. Pushing the FM-AM band select button will change the band FM1, FM2 or AM. The FM stereo indicator, ST illuminates during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception. TUNE (Tuning):
SAA0235

Adjusting tone quality and speaker balance: To adjust BASSTREBFADERBAL (Bass, Treble, Fader, Balance), press the AUDIO button until the desired mode (BAS, TRE, FAD or BAL) appears in the display. Press the or button to adjust BASS and TREB to the desired level. Use the or button to adjust FADER or BAL modes. FADER adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and BAL adjusts the sound level between the right and left speakers. After 10 seconds, the radio or cassette tape

display reappears. Once the sound quality is set to the desired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedly until the radio or cassette tape display appears.

WARNING
The radio should not be tuned while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Push either manual tuning button . SEEK/SCAN tuning: Push the SEEK/SCAN tuning button or for less than 1.5 seconds. SEEK tuning begins from high to low or low to high frequencies and stops at the next broadcasting staHeater, air conditioner and audio systems

Radio/Cassette tape priority mode

In this mode, the radio station illuminates in the display during radio operation. During cassette tape operation, TAPE illuminates in the display.

or

4-15

tion. Pushing the button again continues the SEEK function. Once the highest broadcasting station is reached, the radio continues in the SEEK mode at the lowest broadcast station. Push the SEEK/SCAN tuning button or for more than 1.5 seconds. SCAN illuminates in the display window. SCAN tuning begins from high to low or low to high frequencies and stops at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again during this 5 second period stops SCAN tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.

Station memory operations: Six stations can be set for the AM band. 12 stations can be set for the FM band (six for FM1, six for FM2). 1. Push the FM-AM band select button to select AM, FM1, or FM2. The selected band illuminates in the display. 2. Tune to the desired station. 3. Push the desired select than 1.5 seconds. For illustrations ch2 is to be radio mutes when the pushed. button for more example, in the memorized. The select button is

4. When the sound resumes, memorizing is complete. 5. Other station select buttons can be set in the same manner. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the radio fuse opens, the radio memory is cancelled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

Cassette tape player operation

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, then carefully insert a cassette tape into the tape door.
SAA0264

The cassette tape automatically pulls into the player. The word TAPE and moving digital

4-16

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

squares illuminate on the right side of the display window.

Do not use cassettes with labels which are peeling and loose. If used, the label could jam in the player. If a cassette has loose tape, insert a pencil through one of the cassette hubs and rewind the tape firmly around the hubs. Loose tape may cause tape jamming and wavering sound quality. Over a period of time, the playback head, capstan and pinch roller may collect a tape coating residue as the tape is played. This residue accumulation can cause weak or wavering sound, and should be removed periodically with a head cleaning tape. If the residue is not removed periodically, the player may need to be disassembled for cleaning. PLAY/STOP: Push the PLAY/STOP button while the cassette tape is playing to stop the tape. Push the button again to play the tape.

FF (fast forward), REW (rewind): Push either the FF or REW button for the desired direction. The FF or REW symbol illuminates in the display. To stop the FF or REW function, press the FF or REW button again, or the PLAY/STOP button. APS (automatic program search) FF, APS REW: Push either the APS FF or APS REW button while the cassette tape is playing. The tape runs quickly, stops, then plays the next selection. Either the FF or REW symbol flashes in the display while searching for the selection. This system searches at the blank intervals between selections. If there is a blank interval within one selection or there is no interval between selections, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location. PROG (program): Push the PROG button. The moving digital squares illuminate on either the right or left side of the display window to indicate the side of program play.
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

CAUTION
Do not force the cassette tape into the tape door. This could cause player damage. The cassette tape automatically changes directions to play the other side when the first side is complete. At this time, the moving digital squares illuminate on the left side of the display window. Precaution on cassette player operation: To maintain good quality sound, NISSAN recommends using cassette tapes of 60 minutes or shorter in length. Cassette tapes should be removed from the player when not in use. Store cassettes in their protective cases and away from direct sunlight, heat, dust, moisture and magnetic sources. Direct sunlight can cause the cassette to become deformed. The use of deformed cassettes may cause the cassette to jam in the player.

4-17

Dolby NR (Noise Reduction): Push the Dolby NR button for Dolby NR encoded tapes to reduce high frequency tape noise. The indicator light comes on. Dolby NR is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. DOLBY NR and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Metal or chrome tape usage: The cassette player is automatically set to high performance play when playing a metal or chrome cassette tape. Ejecting the cassette tape: Push the EJECT button. The cassette tape automatically comes out.

4-18

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

FM-AM RADIO WITH CASSETTE PLAYER AND COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER Audio main operation
Head unit The radio has an FM diversity reception system, which employs two antennas. One is a rod type antenna; the other is an antenna printed on the window. This system automatically switches to the antenna which is receiving less noise. The tape deck employs a permalloy head which allows for improved reproduction of high frequency ranges. Noise is also greatly reduced by the combined use of the Dolby NR (Noise Reduction) system. The auto loudness circuit enhances the low frequency range automatically in both radio reception and tape and CD playback. ONOFF/Volume control: Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then push the ONOFF/VOL control knob while the system is off to call up the mode (radio, tape or CD) which was playing immediately before the system was turned off. When no CD or tape is loaded, the radio will come on. While the system is on, pushing the ONOFF/VOL conHeater, air conditioner and audio systems

SAA0380

4-19

When FM/AM band select button is pushed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON, the radio will come on at the station last played. The last station played will also come on when the power knob is turned to ON. If a compact disc or tape is playing when the FM/AM band select button is turned to ON, the compact disc or tape will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on.
SAA0381

trol knob turns the system off. To turn the radio off, press the ONOFF/VOL control knob. Turn the ONOFF/VOL control knob to adjust the volume. Adjusting tone quality and speaker balance: To adjust BASS, TRE (Treble), BAL (Balance) and FAD (Fader), press the AUDIO button until the desired mode BAS, TRE, FAD or BAL appears in the display. Press the or button to adjust Bass (BAS) and Treble (TRE) to the desired level. Use the or

button also to adjust Fader (FAD) or Balance (BAL) modes. FAD adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and BAL adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers. After 10 seconds, the radio or cassette tape display reappears. Once the sound quality is set to the desired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedly until the radio or cassette tape display appears.

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception. TUNE (Tuning):

WARNING
The radio should not be tuned while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Use these buttons for manual tuning. To move quickly through the channels, hold either of the

FM-AM radio operation

FM/AM band select: Pushing the FM/AM band select button will change the band FM1, FM2 or AM.

4-20

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

TUNE buttons down for more than 0.5 seconds. SEEK/SCAN tuning: SEEK tuning: Push the SEEK/SCAN tuning button or for less than 1.5 seconds. SEEK tuning begins from high to low or low to high frequencies and stops at the next broadcasting station. SCAN tuning: Push the SEEK/SCAN tuning button or for more than 1.5 seconds. SCAN tuning begins from high to low or low to high frequencies and stops at each broadcasting station for 10 seconds. Pushing the button again during this 10 seconds period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station. If the SEEK/SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 10 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station.

Station memory operations: Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (six for FM1, six for FM2). Six stations can be set for the AM band. 1. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK/SCAN or TUNE button. 2. Push the desired station select button for more than 1.5 seconds. (For example, in the diagram ch2 is to be memorized. The radio mutes when the select button is pushed.) 3. The indicator ch2 will then come on and the sound will resume. Memorizing is now complete. 4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse blows, the radio memory will be cancelled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

Cassette tape player operation

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then lightly insert the cassette tape into the tape door. The cassette tape will be automatically pulled into the player.
SAA0382

The radio or CD will turn off (if it is on) and the cassette tape will begin to play.
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-21

CAUTION
Do not force the cassette tape into the tape door. This could cause player damage. If the system is turned off by pushing the ONOFF/VOL control knob with the cassette tape still in the player, the tape will resume playing when the system is turned back on. Precautions on cassette tape player operation: To maintain good quality sound, NISSAN recommends that you use cassette tapes of 60 minutes or shorter in length. Cassette tapes should be removed from the player when not in use. Store cassettes in their protective cases and away from direct sunlight, heat, dust, moisture or magnetic sources. Direct sunlight can cause the cassette to become deformed. The use of deformed cassettes may cause the cassette to jam in the player. Do not use cassettes that have peeling

or loose labels. If used, the label could jam in the player. If a cassette has loose tape, insert a pencil through one of the cassette hubs and rewind the tape firmly. Loose tape may cause jamming and wavering sound quality. Over a period of time, the playback head, capstan and pinch roller may gather a tape coating residue as the tape passes over the head. This residue accumulation can cause a weak or wavering sound and should be removed periodically with a head cleaning tape. If the residue is not removed periodically, the player may need to be disassembled for cleaning. PLAY: When the TAPE button is pushed with the system turned off and a tape loaded, the system will come on and the tape will play. When the TAPE button is pushed with either the radio or compact disc turned on and the tape loaded, the compact disc or the radio will automatically be turned off and the tape will play.

FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind): (fast forward) button to fast Push the forward the tape. To rewind the tape, push the (rewind) button. Either the FF or REW symbol illuminates on the right side of the display window. To stop the FF or REW function, press the (fast forward) or (rewind) again, or the TAPE button. APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS REW: When the (APS FF) button is pushed while the tape is being played, the next program will start to play from the beginning. Push the (APS FF) button several times to skip through programs. The tape will advance the number of times the button is pushed (up to nine programs). When the (APS REW) button is pushed once, the program being played starts over from the beginning. Push the (APS REW) button several times to skip back several selections. The tape will go back the number of times the button is pushed. Either the FF or REW symbol flashes on the right side of the display window while searching for the selection. This system searches for the blank intervals

4-22

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

between selections. If there is a blank interval within one program or there is no interval between programs, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location. PROG (Program): Push the PROG button to change the tape side while the tape is being played. The cassette tape will automatically change directions to play the other side when the first side is completed. Dolby NR (Noise Reduction): Push the Dolby NR button for Dolby NR encoded tapes to reduce high frequency tape noise. The indicator will come on. Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby NR and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Metal or chrome tape usage: The cassette player will be automatically set to high performance play when playing a metal or chrome cassette tape. TAPE EJECT: When this button is pushed with the tape loaded, the tape will be ejected.

When the tape is ejected while it is being played, the system will be turned off.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

Recordable compact discs (CD-R) may not function properly in the CD player. Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up. The compact disc will be guided automatically into the slot and start playing. After loading the disc, the number of tracks on the disc and the play time will appear on the display. If the radio or tape is already operating, it will automatically turn off and the compact disc will play.

CAUTION
During cold weather or rainy days, the player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely. The player may skip while driving on rough roads. The CD player sometimes cannot function when the compartment temperature is extremely high. Decrease the temperature before use. Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight. CDs that are of poor quality, dirty, scratched, or covered with fingerprints may not work properly. Do not use an 8 cm CD adapter as this will cause malfunction.

CAUTION
Do not force the compact disc into the slot. This could damage the player. If the system has been turned off while the compact disc was playing, pushing the ONOFF/VOL control knob will start the compact disc. 8 cm diameter compact discs can also be used without an adapter.
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-23

PLAY: When the CD/CHG button is pushed with the system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play. When the CD/CHG button is pushed with the compact disc loaded but the tape or the radio playing, the tape or radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play. FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind): When the (fast forward) or (rewind) button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the compact disc will return to normal play speed. APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS REW: When the (APS FF) button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the program next to the present one will start to play from its beginning. Push several times to skip through programs. The compact disc will advance the number of times the button is pushed. (When the last program on the compact disc is skipped through, the first program

(APS REW) will be played.) When the button is pushed, the program being played returns to its beginning. Push several times to skip back through programs. The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pushed. PROG (Program): When the PROG button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the play pattern will change as follows: no mark: All the programs will be played repeatedly in sequence. 1: Only one program (the one being played when the PROG button is pushed) will be repeated. RANDOM: Programs will be played at random, not following the sequence on the compact disc. The same program may be repeated twice. When the compact disc is ejected, the play pattern will automatically change to no mark. CD EJECT: When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be ejected.

When this button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will come out and the system will turn off. If the compact disc comes out and is not removed, it will be pulled back into the slot to protect it. (without 8 cm diameter compact discs) CD IN indicator: CD IN indicator appears on the display when the CD is loaded with the system on.

ANTENNA Window antenna

The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear window.

CAUTION
Do not place metalized film near the rear window glass or attach any metal parts to it. This may cause poor reception or noise. When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window antenna.

4-24

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

Lightly wipe along the antenna with a dampened soft cloth. If equipped with a genuine NISSAN cellular phone, your NISSAN features a nondirectional microphone in the steering column cover, so it is not necessary to look at or speak directly into the microphone when calling. To do so could detract from the driving operation and cause an accident. See the car phone manual for operation. Some models are pre-wired to accept the genuine NISSAN cellular phone. In addition, the same model has the phone antenna built into the rear glass window. When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following cautions, otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the Engine control system and other electronic parts. If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode (if so equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. If a conversation in a moving vehicle requires you to take notes, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so.

CAUTION
Keep the antenna as far as possible away from the Engine Control Module (ECM). Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the Multiport Fuel Injection harness. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness. Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer.
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

WARNING
A cellular telephone should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular telephones while driving.

4-25

 Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body. For details, consult an authorized NISSAN dealer.

4-26

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving...................... 5-2 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) .............................. 5-2 Three way catalyst .................................................... 5-3 Avoiding collision and rollover................................... 5-3 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving............................ 5-4 Ignition switch............................................................ 5-4 Automatic transmission ............................................. 5-4 Manual transmission ................................................. 5-5 Key positions ............................................................. 5-6 Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System ......................... 5-6 Before starting the engine......................................... 5-7 Starting the engine .................................................... 5-7 Driving the vehicle..................................................... 5-8 Automatic transmission ............................................. 5-8 Manual transmission ............................................... 5-11 Parking brake .......................................................... 5-13 Cruise control .......................................................... 5-14 Precautions on cruise control.................................. 5-14

Cruise control operations ........................................ Break-in schedule ................................................... Increasing fuel economy ......................................... Parking/parking on hills ........................................... Power steering ........................................................ Brake system .......................................................... Braking precautions ................................................ Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ................................ Traction control system (if so equipped)................. Cold weather driving ............................................... Freeing a frozen door lock ...................................... Anti-freeze ............................................................... Battery ..................................................................... Draining of coolant water ........................................ Tire equipment ........................................................ Special winter equipment ........................................ Driving on snow or ice ............................................ Engine block heater (if so equipped) ......................

5-14 5-16 5-16 5-17 5-18 5-18 5-18 5-19 5-20 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-22 5-22

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING
Do not leave children, impaired adults, or pets alone in your vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked with the trunk closed when not in use, and prevent childrens access to car keys.

tain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death. If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately. Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage. Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time. Keep the trunk lid closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with the trunk lid open, follow these precautions: 1. Open all the windows. 2. Set the air recirculation switch OFF and the fan control at 4 (high) to circulate the air. If electrical wiring or other cable con-

nections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the trunk lid or the body, follow the manufacturers recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle. If a special body or other equipment is added for recreational or other usage, follow the manufacturers recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle. (Some recreational vehicle appliances such as stoves, refrigerator, heaters, etc. may also generate carbon monoxide.) The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever: a. The vehicle is raised for service. b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment. c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system.

EXHAUST GAS (Carbon monoxide)

WARNING
Do not breathe exhaust gases; they con-

5-2

Starting and driving

d. You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

CAUTION
Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline seriously reduce the three way catalysts ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants. Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected promptly by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three way catalyst. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER

WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident. Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with any vehicle, a loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects, or cause the vehicle to rollover, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt. See Seat Belts in the 1. Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems section. And also instruct your passengers to do so.
Starting and driving

THREE WAY CATALYST

The three way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the converter are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING
The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components. Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

5-3

IGNITION SWITCH DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING

your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgment. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in the accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury. NISSAN is committed to safe driving. But, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol related accidents. Although the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol. Remember, drinking and driving dont mix! And thats true for drugs too (over the counter, prescription, and illegal drugs). Dont drive if

SSD0083

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
On automatic transmission models, the ignition lock is designed so that the key cannot be turned to LOCK and removed until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park) position. When removing the key from the ignition, make sure the selector lever is in the P (Park) position. If the selector lever is not returned to P (Park) position, the key cannot be moved toward LOCK. When the key cannot be turned toward the

5-4

Starting and driving

LOCK position, proceed as follows to remove the key: 1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park) position. 2. Turn the ignition key slightly in the ON direction. 3. Turn the key toward the LOCK position. 4. Remove the key. If the key is removed from the ignition switch, the selector lever cannot be moved from P (Park) position. The selector lever can be moved if the ignition switch is in the ACC position. This allows the vehicle to be moved if the battery is discharged. The selector lever can also be moved if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed. There is an OFF position in between LOCK and ACC, although it does not show on the lock cylinder. When the ignition is in OFF the steering wheel is not locked. In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/6 of a turn counterclockwise from the straight up position. To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to the LOCK position. Remove the key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key

and turn it gently while rotating the steering wheel slightly right and left.

WARNING
Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK position while driving. The steering wheel will lock. This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
SSD0082C

MANUAL TRANSMISSION
The switch includes an anti-theft steering lock device. LOCK Normal parking position (0) The ignition key can only be removed when the switch is in this position. On manual transmission models, to turn the ignition key to LOCK from ACC or ON, first turn the key to OFF and turn the key to LOCK while pushing the key in. In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/6 of a turn clockwise from the straight up position.
Starting and driving

5-5

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to the LOCK position. Remove the key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steering wheel slightly right and left.

KEY POSITIONS
The switch includes an anti-theft steering lock device. LOCK (Normal parking position) (0) The ignition key can only be removed when the switch is in this position. OFF (1) The engine can be turned off without locking the steering wheel. ACC (Accessories) (2) This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running. ON (Normal operating position) (3) This position turns on the ignition system and the electrical accessories. START (4) This position activates the starter motor, starting the engine.

the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key. If the engine fails to start using the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key, it may be due to interference caused by another Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key, an automated toll road device or automated payment device on the key ring. Restart the engine using the following procedures: 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 5 seconds. 3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again. 4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key. If this procedure allows the engine to start, NISSAN recommends placing the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.

WARNING
Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK position while driving. The steering wheel will lock. This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM

The Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of

5-6

Starting and driving

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear. Maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically, e.g., each time you check engine oil. Check that all windows and lights are clean. Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation. Lock all doors. Position seat and adjust head restraints. Adjust inside and outside mirrors. Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise. Check the operation of warning lights when key is turned to the ON (3) position.

STARTING THE ENGINE

1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Automatic transmission: Move the selector lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). (P preferred.) The selector lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) position and into any of the other gear positions if the key is removed from the switch. The starter is designed not to operate if the selector lever is in one of the driving positions. Manual transmission: Move the shift lever to N (Neutral) position, and depress the clutch pedal to the floor while cranking the engine. The starter is designed not to operate unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed. 3. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to START. Release the key when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure. If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold or hot weather, depress the accelerator pedal and hold it to help start the engine.
Starting and driving

In the summer, when restarting the engine within 30 minutes after it has been stopped, keep the accelerator pedal fully depressed while starting.

CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than 10 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, turn the key off and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged. 4. Warm-up Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather.

5-7

DRIVING THE VEHICLE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

The automatic transmission in your vehicle is electronically controlled by a transmission control module to produce maximum power and smooth operation. Shown on the following pages are the recommended operating procedures for this transmission. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment. shift into a driving gear. 2. Release the parking brake and foot brake, then gradually start the vehicle in motion.

CAUTION
When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brakes should be used for this purpose.

WARNING
Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P or N to R, D, 2 or 1. Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident. Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up. On slippery roads, do not downshift. This may cause a loss of control. Never shift to P or R while vehicle is moving. This could cause an accident.

Starting the vehicle

After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal and push the selector lever button before shifting the selector lever to the R, N, D, 2 or 1 position. Be sure the vehicle is fully stopped before attempting to shift the selector lever. This automatic transmission is designed so that the foot brake pedal must be depressed before shifting from P (Park) position to any drive position while the ignition switch is ON. The selector lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) position and into any of the other gear positions if the key is removed from the switch. 1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and

5-8

Starting and driving

the parking brake first, then shift the lever into the P (Park) position. R (Reverse): Use this position to back up. Always be sure the vehicle is completely stopped. With the brake pedal depressed, push in the select lever button and move the lever to the R (Reverse) position N (Neutral): Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to N (Neutral) position and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving. D (Drive): Use this position for all normal forward driving. 2 (Second gear): Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades. Do not exceed 69 MPH (110 km/h) in the 2 (Second gear) position. 1 (Low gear): Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades.

Do not exceed 37 MPH (60 km/h) in the 1 (Low gear) position.

SD1003M

Shifting
Push the button to shift into P, R or from D to 2. All other positions can be selected without pushing the button. P (Park): Use this selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Always be sure the vehicle is at a complete stop. For maximum safety, depress the brake pedal, then push in the select lever button and move the lever to the P (Park) position. Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply

Starting and driving

5-9

To move the select lever, push the shift lock release button and select lever button. The select lever can be moved to N (Neutral). To push the shift lock release button using a screwdriver or other tool, follow the procedure as illustrated. If there is any problem moving the lever out of P (Park) have your NISSAN dealer check the automatic transmission system as soon as possible.

WARNING
SSD0110

If the selector lever cannot be moved from the P position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.
SSD0151

Overdrive switch
Each time your vehicle is started, the transmission is automatically reset to overdrive ON. ON: For normal driving the overdrive switch is engaged. The transmission is upshifted into overdrive as the vehicle speed increases. The overdrive does not engage until the engine has warmed up. OFF: Changed for driving up and down long slopes where engine braking would be advantageous, push the overdrive switch. The O/D OFF light illuminates.

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low, the select lever may not move from the P position even with the brake pedal depressed and the select lever button pushed.

Accelerator downshift In D position

For rapid passing or hill climbing, fully depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into second gear or first gear, depending on the vehicle speed.

5-10

Starting and driving

When cruising at a low speed or climbing a gentle slope, you may feel uncomfortable shift shocks as the transmission shifts between third and overdrive repeatedly. In this case, press the overdrive switch. The O/D OFF indicator light comes on at this time. When driving conditions change, press the overdrive switch again. The O/D OFF indicator light goes out. Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time with the O/D OFF light illuminated. This reduces the fuel economy.

OFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then turn the key back to the ON position. The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have your NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair if necessary.

SSD0002

Fail-safe
When the fail-safe operation occurs, the next time the key is turned to the ON position, the O/D OFF light will blink for approximately 8 seconds after coming on for 2 seconds. While the vehicle can be driven under these circumstances please note that the automatic transmission will be locked in third gear. If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be activated. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, turn the ignition key

MANUAL TRANSMISSION Shifting

To change gears, or when up shifting or down shifting depress the clutch pedal fully, shift into the appropriate gear then release the clutch slowly and smoothly. On the five-speed transmission model, you cannot shift directly from fifth gear into the R (Reverse) position. First shift into the N (Neutral) position, then into the R (Reverse) position. If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R (Reverse) or 1 (Low gear), shift into N (NeuStarting and driving

5-11

tral), then release the clutch pedal and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (Low gear) again.

applied.

Suggested up-shift speeds

Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance. Actual up-shift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather and individual driving habits. For normal acceleration in low altitude areas [less than 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]: Gear change 1st to 2nd 2nd to 3rd 3rd to 4th 4th to 5th ACCEL shift point MPH (km/h) 13 (21) 23 (37) 33 (53) 39 (63) CRUISE shift point MPH (km/h) 13 (21) 16 (26) 27 (43) 36 (58)

WARNING
Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear. This may cause a loss of control or engine damage.

CAUTION
Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This may cause clutch damage. Stop your vehicle completely before shifting into R (Reverse). When the vehicle is stopped for a period of time, for example at a stop light, shift to N (Neutral) and release the clutch pedal with the foot brake

For quick acceleration when the engine is cold or in high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]: Gear change 1st to 2nd 2nd to 3rd 3rd to 4th 4th to 5th MPH 15 25 40 45 (km/h) (24) (40) (64) (72)

5-12

Starting and driving

PARKING BRAKE Suggested maximum speed in each gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate. Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the highest gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits, and drive according to the road conditions, which will ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control. Gear 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th MPH (km/h) 30 (48) 55 (88) 80 (128) To apply: pull the lever up. To release: 1. Firmly apply foot brake. 2. Automatic transmission models: Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position. Manual transmission models: Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position. 3. While pulling up on the lever slightly, push the button and lower completely.
Starting and driving

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out.

WARNING
Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident. Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle.
SSD0018

Do not use the gear shift in place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged. Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle. They could release the parking brake and cause an accident.

5-13

CRUISE CONTROL

WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions: it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed. in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed. on winding or hilly roads. on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.). in very windy areas. Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

engine damage.

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL

If the cruise control system malfunctions, it cancels automatically. The SET indicator light on the meter panel then blinks to warn the driver. If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the cruise control main switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. The SET indicator light may blink when the cruise control main switch is turned on while pushing the RES/ACCEL, COAST/ SET, or CANCEL switch (located on the steering wheel). To properly set the cruise control system, perform the preceding steps in the order indicated.
SSD0152

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. To turn on the cruise control, push the main switch on. The CRUISE indicator light on the meter panel will come on. To set at cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. (The SET indicator light will come on.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.

CAUTION
On manual transmission models, do not shift into N (Neutral) without depressing the clutch pedal when the cruise control is set. Should this occur, depress the clutch pedal and turn the main switch off immediately. Failure to do so may cause

5-14

Starting and driving

c) Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISE indicator and SET indicator lights will go out. If you depress the brake pedal while pushing the RES/ACCEL set switch and reset at the cruising speed, turn the main switch off once and then turn it on again. The cruise control will automatically be cancelled if the vehicle slows down below approximately 8 MPH (13 km/h). Depress the clutch pedal (manual transmission), or move the selector lever to N (Neutral) position (automatic transmission). The SET indicator light will go out. To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: a) Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the COAST/SET switch. b) Push and hold the RES/ACCEL set switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch. c) Push, then quickly release the RES/ACCEL set switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: a) Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. b) Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed. c) Push, then quickly release the COAST/ SET switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES/ACCEL set switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

SSD0153

To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed. The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the cruise control. To cancel the preset speed, follow either of these three methods: a) Push the cancel switch; The SET indicator light will go out. b) Tap the brake pedal; The SET indicator light will go out.

Starting and driving

5-15

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
During the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km), follow these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life. Do not drive over the legal speed limit and do not run the engine over 4,000 rpm. Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow. Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear. Avoid quick starts. Avoid hard braking as much as possible. Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km).

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

Keep your engine tuned up. Follow the recommended periodic maintenance schedule. Keep the tires inflated at the correct pressure. Low pressure will increase tire wear and waste fuel. Keep the front wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment will cause not only tire wear but also lower fuel economy. Air conditioner operation lowers fuel economy. Use the air conditioner only when necessary.
SD1001M

Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position. Drive at moderate speeds on the highway. Driving at high speed will lower fuel economy. Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a safe distance behind other vehicles. Use a proper gear range which suits road conditions. On level roads, shift into high gear as soon as possible. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

When cruising at highway speeds, it is more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to reduce drag.

5-16

Starting and driving

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

WARNING
Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P (Park) for automatic transmission models or in an appropriate gear for manual transmission models. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident.
MSD0002

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

WARNING
Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire. Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

2. Automatic transmission models: Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position. Manual transmission models: Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) position. When parking on an uphill grade, place the shift lever in the 1 (Low gear) position.

Make sure the automatic transmission selector lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the button at the end of the lever. 3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into the street when parked on a sloping drive way, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
1 HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: k

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.
Starting and driving

5-17

POWER STEERING
2 HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: k

BRAKE SYSTEM BRAKING PRECAUTIONS

The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit develops a problem, you will still have braking at two wheels. Vacuum assisted brake The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and the stopping distance will be longer. Wet brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking. To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat-up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly. Using the brakes Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This overheats the brakes, increases wear on the brake linings and pads, and reduces gas mileage.

Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb. HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO 3 CURB: k Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves. 4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove the key.

The power assisted steering is designed to use a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering. If the engine stops or drive belt breaks, you will still have control of the vehicle. However, much greater steering effort is needed, especially in sharp turns or at low speeds.

WARNING
If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be much harder to operate.

5-18

Starting and driving

To help save the brakes and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control.

system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.

conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving.

Self-test feature
The anti-lock brake system consists of electronic sensors, electric pumps, and hydraulic solenoids controlled by a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of any malfunction. If the computer senses any malfunction, it switches the antilock brake system OFF and turns on the ABS warning light in the dashboard. The brake system will then behave normally, but without anti-lock assistance. If the light comes on during the self check, or while you are driving, you should take your vehicle to your NISSAN dealer for repair at your earliest convenience.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

WARNING
While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident. If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder.

WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances.

Normal operation
The anti-lock brake system will not operate at speeds below 3 to 6 MPH (5 to 10 km/h) to completely stop the vehicle. (The speeds will vary according to road conditions.) When the anti-lock system senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator (under the hood) rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure (like pumping the brakes very quickly). While the actuator is working, you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from the actuator under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the anti-lock system is working properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

The anti-lock brake system controls the brakes at each wheel so the wheels will not lock when braking abruptly or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing wheel lockup, the

WARNING
The anti-lock brake system is a sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent acStarting and driving

5-19

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (if so equipped)

cidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces, but remember that the stopping distance on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces, even with the anti-lock system. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the responsibility for safety of self and others rests in the hands of the driver. Tire type and condition of tires may also affect braking effectiveness. When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels. When installing a spare tire, make sure it is the proper size and type as specified on the tire placard. See Vehicle identification in the 10. Technical and consumer information section for tire placard location. On slippery surfaces such as wet asphalt roads, vehicle wheels may spin when the vehicle is accelerated. This wheel spin reduces acceleration, or causes the vehicle to swerve, thus decreasing vehicle stability. The traction control system helps limit wheel spin on slippery roads. The system operates only if it senses one or both of the front wheels spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the system reduces engine power and may also upshift the transmission to help limit wheel spin. Indicator light If a malfunction occurs in the traction control system, the SLIP and indicator lights come on in the meter panel. As long as these warning lights are on, the traction control function is canceled. The vehicle will behaves like a model without the traction control system. on, this could cause the three way catalyst to overheat and be damaged. To avoid this, the TCS will automatically turn off. Shifting the gear selector to D will reactivate the TCS.

WARNING
This system is designed to prevent the wheels from spinning. However, it does not prevent vehicle slipping or spinning due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Be especially careful when driving on slippery surfaces and always drive safely.

CAUTION
The traction control system is most effective when the transmission gear selector is in the D position. If you drive in gear 1 or 2 with the TCS

5-20

Starting and driving

COLD WEATHER DRIVING FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer or glycerin to it through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole. the 8. Do-it-yourself section for changing engine coolant. installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturers suggestions. Use only SAE Class S chains. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected. Never install tire chains on a T-type spare tire. Do not use tire chains on dry roads.

TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires are of a tread design to provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels. Please consult your NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability information. 2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some provinces and states prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires. 3. Tire chains may be used if desired. Make sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturers suggestions. Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before

ANTI-FREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32F (0C), check anti-freeze (ethylene glycol base) to assure proper winter protection. For additional information, see Engine Cooling System in the 8. Do-it-yourself section.

BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. For additional information, see Battery in the 8. Do-ityourself section.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter: a scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades. a sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support.
Starting and driving

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-freeze, drain the cooling system by opening the drain valves located under the radiator and on the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. See Engine cooling system in

5-21

 a shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts. extra window washer fluid to refill the reservoir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING
Wet ice (32F, 0C and freezing rain), very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have a lot less traction or grip under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded. Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction. Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement. Allow greater following distances on slippery roads.

Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while actually on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads. Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle.

pronged (cheater) adapters. You can be injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so equipped)

An engine block heater to assist extreme cold temperature starting is available through your NISSAN dealer.

WARNING
Do not use your heater with an ungrounded electrical system or two-

5-22

Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Flat tire ...................................................................... Changing a flat tire.................................................... Jump starting............................................................. Push starting .............................................................

6-2 6-2 6-7 6-9

If your vehicle overheats ......................................... Towing your vehicle ................................................ Towing recommended by NISSAN ......................... Vehicle recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle).............

6-10 6-11 6-11 6-12

FLAT TIRE CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below. verse), or the automatic transmission into P (Park). Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous. Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road away from traffic. 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. 3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Shift the manual transmission into R (Reverse) position (automatic transmission in P (Park) position). 4. Turn off the engine. 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance. 6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

MCE0001

Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up.

WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and could cause personal injury.

WARNING
Make sure that the parking brake is securely applied and the manual transmission is shifted into R (Re-

6-2

In case of emergency

SCE0289

Removing wheel cover

CAUTION
Do not use your hands to pry off wheel caps. Doing so could result in personal injury.

SCE0299

SCE0288

Getting the spare tire and tools

Remove jacking tools and spare tire from the storage area located inside the trunk as illustrated.

In case of emergency

6-3

SCE0286

CE1089

Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire

Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instructions. 1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point as illustrated above so that top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack up point. Align the jack head between the two notches in the front or the rear as shown. Also fit the groove of the jack head between the notches as shown.

6-4

In case of emergency

 Use the correct jack up points; never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support. Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary. Never use blocks on or under the jack. Do not start or run engine while vehicle is on the jack, as it may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slid differential carriers. Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack.

CE1092

The jack should be used on level firm ground. 2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground. 3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands as shown above. Remove the wheel nuts, and then remove the tire.

WARNING
Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed only for lifting your vehicle during a tire change.

In case of emergency

6-5

WARNING
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident. Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose. As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench. Wheel nut tightening torque: 72 to 87 ft-lb (98 to 118 Nm) Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure. COLD pressure: After vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire placard affixed to the center console lid.

WARNING
Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).

SCE0039

Installing the spare tire

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub. 2. Carefully put the wheel on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight. 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly until they are tight. 4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence as illustrated.

6-6

In case of emergency

JUMP STARTING
spare tire are designed for emergency use. See Tires and wheels in the 8. Do-it-yourself section. To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be followed.

WARNING
If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle. Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery. Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, cloth or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulphuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water. Keep battery out of the reach of children.

SCE0040

Stowing the damaged tire and tools

Securely store the spare tire and jacking equipment in the vehicle.

WARNING
Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly secured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop. The T-type spare tire and small size

In case of emergency

6-7

 The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle. Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting. Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause serious injury. Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it.
SCE0154A

WARNING
Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury. 1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the two vehicles to bring their batteries into close proximity to each other. Do not allow the two vehicles to touch. 2. Apply parking brake. Move the shift lever to

the N (Neutral) position (On automatic transmission models, move the selector lever to the P (Park) position). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (light, heater, air conditioner, etc.). 3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so equipped). Cover the battery with an old cloth to reduce explosion hazard. 4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as illustrated.

6-8

In case of emergency

PUSH STARTING

CAUTION
Always connect positive (+) to positive (+) and negative () to body ground (for example, strut mounting bolt, etc. not to the battery). Make sure that cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that clamps do not contact any other metal. 5. Start the engine of the other vehicle and let it run for a few minutes. 6. Keep the engine speed of the other vehicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start your engine in the normal manner.

7. After starting your engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable. 8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid.

CAUTION
Automatic transmission models cannot be push started. This may cause transmission damage. Three way catalyst equipped models should not be started by pushing since the three way catalyst may be damaged. Never try to start the vehicle by towing it; when the engine starts, the forward surge could cause the vehicle to collide with the tow vehicle.

CAUTION
Do not keep starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, turn the key off and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

In case of emergency

6-9

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

WARNING
Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause a vehicle fire. To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the radiator cap while the engine is still hot. When the radiator cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury. Do not open the hood if steam is coming out. If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take the following steps: 1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position (automatic transmission to the P (Park) position). Do not stop the engine. 2. Turn off the air conditioner switch. Open all the windows, move the heater or air condi-

tioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed. 3. If engine overheating is caused by climbing a long hill on a hot day, run the engine at a fast idle (approximately 1,500 rpm) until the temperature gauge indication returns to normal. 4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. Wait until no steam or coolant can be seen before proceeding. 5. Open the engine hood.

WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or to get caught in the cooling fan, or drive belt. The engine cooling fan can start at any time when the coolant temperature is high. 7. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the reservoir tank with the engine running. Add coolant to the reservoir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at the nearest NISSAN dealer.

WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting burned. 6. Visually check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine.

6-10

In case of emergency

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in Canada) and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from your NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions. and powertrain are in working condition. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used. Always attach safety chains before towing.

WARNING
Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed. Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck.
SCE0202

CAUTION
When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system,

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground as illustrated.
In case of emergency

6-11

CAUTION
Always release the parking brake when towing with the rear wheels on the ground. When towing manual transmission models with the front wheels on the ground (If you do not use a towing dolly): Turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never place the ignition key in the LOCK position. This will result in damage to the steering lock mechanism. Move the gearshift lever to the N (Neutral) position.
SCE0199

ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised, always use a towing dollies under the front wheels. Never tow an automatic transmission model from the rear (that is, backward) with four wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (Freeing a stuck vehicle)

Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle. Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or cooling systems. Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull on the vehicle at an angle. Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in

CAUTION
Never tow an automatic transmission models with the front wheels on the

6-12

In case of emergency

vehicle towing or recovery. Stand clear of an stuck vehicle.

WARNING
Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.

In case of emergency

6-13

MEMO

6-14

In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ....................................................... Washing .................................................................... Waxing ...................................................................... Removing spots ........................................................ Underbody ................................................................. Glass ......................................................................... Aluminum alloy wheels.............................................. Chrome parts ............................................................ Cleaning interior ........................................................

7-2 7-2 7-2 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-4 7-4 7-4

Floor mats ................................................................. Seat belts .................................................................. Corrosion protection .................................................. Most common factors contributing to vehicle corrosion.................................................................... Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion.................................................................... To protect your vehicle from corrosion .....................

7-4 7-5 7-5 7-5 7-5 7-6

CLEANING EXTERIOR
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area. When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover. Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover. Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so that the paint surface is not scratched or damaged. Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of clean water. Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be regularly cleaned. Make sure that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt. Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle.

WASHING
Thoroughly rinse surface dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and plenty of clean water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap such as Nissan Car Wash, or a general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

MAI0001

In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it. In the following cases, please wash your vehicle as soon as possible to protect the paint surface. After a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain After driving on coastal roads When contaminants such as soot, bird droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface When dust or mud builds up on the surface

CAUTION
Do not use strong household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents. Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted.

WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. After waxing, polishing is recommended to remove built-up residue and to avoid a weathered appearance. If you wish to wax your vehicle, only use a wax

7-2

Appearance and care

specified for use over clear coats, such as Nissan Liquid or Spray Wax. Your Nissan dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product. Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax. Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish. If the surface does not polish easily, use a road tar remover and wax again. Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

causing underbody and suspension corrosion. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

SAI0014A

GLASS
When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier to clean if the high-mounted stop light is removed first. Be careful when removing the high-mounted stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the high-mounted stop light wires. The high-mounted stop light must be properly reinstalled before driving your vehicle. Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner
Appearance and care

REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at your NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store.

UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, the underbody must be cleaned regularly. This will prevent dirt and salt from building up and

7-3

CLEANING INTERIOR
and a soft cloth will easily remove this film. Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry soft cloth. Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturers recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material. Use a cloth dampened only with water, to clean the meter and gauge lens.

FLOOR MATS
The use of Genuine Nissan floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. No matter what mats are used, be sure they are fitted for your vehicle and are properly positioned in the footwell to prevent interference with pedal operation. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.

CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the window, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defogger elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash regularly, especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. Salt could discolor the wheel if not removed.

CAUTION
Never use gasoline, thinner, or any similar material. The leather seats should be regularly coated with a leather wax like saddle soap. Never use car wax. Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer. Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens cover.

CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

7-4

Appearance and care

CORROSION PROTECTION SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely before using them.

MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION:

The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas. Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents.

WARNING
Do not allow wet belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or chemical solvents since these may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.
SAI0012

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION: Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle, and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.

Floor mat positioning aid (Driver side only)

This model includes a front floor mat bracket to act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your vehicle model. The drivers side floor mat has a grommet hole incorporated in it. Simply position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket through the floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in the floorpan contour. Periodically check to make certain that the mats are properly positioned.

Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used.
Appearance and care

7-5

Temperature
A temperature increase will accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

CAUTION
NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom. Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them. Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders. In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically. For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, consult your local NISSAN dealer.

Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will also accelerate the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION:

Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean. Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible. Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation. Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible.

7-6

Appearance and care

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions .......................................... 8-2 Engine compartment check locations ....................... 8-4 Engine cooling system .............................................. 8-5 Checking engine coolant level .................................. 8-5 Changing engine coolant .......................................... 8-6 Engine oil .................................................................. 8-7 Checking engine oil level .......................................... 8-7 Changing engine oil .................................................. 8-8 Changing engine oil filter .......................................... 8-9 Automatic transmission fluid ................................... 8-10 Temperature conditions for checking...................... 8-10 Power steering fluid ................................................ 8-11 Brake and clutch fluid ............................................. 8-12 Window washer fluid ............................................... 8-12 Battery ..................................................................... 8-13 Drive belts ............................................................... 8-15 Spark plugs ............................................................. 8-15 Replacing spark plugs............................................. 8-16 Air cleaner ............................................................... 8-17 Windshield wiper blades ......................................... 8-18

Cleaning .................................................................. Replacement ........................................................... Parking brake and brake pedal............................... Checking parking brake .......................................... Checking brake pedal ............................................. Brake booster .......................................................... Clutch pedal ............................................................ Fuses....................................................................... Engine compartment ............................................... Passenger compartment ......................................... Multi-remote controller battery replacement ........... Lights....................................................................... Headlights ............................................................... Exterior and interior lights ....................................... Tires and wheels ..................................................... Tire pressure ........................................................... Types of tires .......................................................... Tire chains............................................................... Changing tires and wheels......................................

8-18 8-19 8-20 8-20 8-20 8-21 8-21 8-21 8-22 8-23 8-24 8-25 8-26 8-27 8-32 8-32 8-32 8-33 8-34

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed. nect the negative battery cable before working near the fan. If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts. It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle. Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle. If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape. Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands. Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks away from fuel and the battery. On gasoline engine models with the Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System, the fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off.

WARNING
Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. For a manual transmission, move the shift lever to N (Neutral) position. For an automatic transmission, move the selector lever to P (Park) position. Be sure the ignition key is OFF or LOCK when performing any parts replacement or repairs. Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition key is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always discon-

CAUTION
Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn off the engine and wait until it cools down. Never connect or disconnect either the battery or any transistorized component connector while the ignition key is on. Never leave the engine or the automatic transmission related component harness connector disconnected while the ignition key is on. Avoid direct contact with used engine oil. Improperly disposed motor oil

8-2

Do-it-yourself

and/or other vehicle fluids can hurt the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid. This 8. Do-it-yourself section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform. You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect your warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, have it done by your NISSAN dealer.

Do-it-yourself

8-3

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

SDI0959

8-4

Do-it-yourself

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, year-round, antifreeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors, therefore additional cooling system additives are not necessary.

WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. See If your vehicle overheats in the 6. In case of emergency section. The radiator is equipped with a pressure cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap.
SDI0960

CAUTION
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only a genuine NISSAN antifreeze coolant or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized water/distilled water. The use of other types of coolant solutions may damage your engine cooling system.
Demineralized water/ distilled water 50%

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below MIN, add coolant up to the MAX level. If the reservoir tank is empty, check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir tank up to the MAX level. If the engine cooling system frequently requires coolant, have it checked by your NISSAN dealer.
Do-it-yourself

Outside temperature down to C 35 F 30

Antifreeze

50%

8-5

 Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheating.

WARNING
To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. 1. Open the radiator cap and drain plug. 2. Open the drain plug on the engine block. 3. Flush the cooling system by running fresh water through the radiator. 4. Close the radiator drain plug and the drain plug on the engine block securely. 5. See Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the 10. Technical and consumer information section for cooling system capacity. Fill the radiator slowly with the proper mixture of coolant and water. Fill the reservoir tank up to the MAX level. Then install the radiator cap.

SDI0114

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

Major cooling system repairs should be performed by your NISSAN dealer. The service procedures can be found in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual.

8-6

Do-it-yourself

ENGINE OIL

SDI0973

SDI0115

6. Start the engine, and warm it up until the radiator fan operates. Then race the engine two or three times under no load. Watch the coolant temperature gauge for signs of overheating. 7. Stop the engine. After it completely cools down, refill the radiator up to the filler opening. Fill the reservoir tank up to the MAX level. 8. Check the radiator drain plug and the drain plug on the engine block for any sign of leakage.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply parking brake. 2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature. 3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way.

Do-it-yourself

8-7

CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating with insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.

SDI0534

SDI0974

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be between the H and L marks. If the oil level is below the L mark, remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening. Do not overfill. 6. Recheck oil level with dipstick. It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature. 3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. 4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug. 5. Remove the oil filler cap.

8-8

Do-it-yourself

6. Remove the drain plug with a wrench and completely drain the oil. If oil filter is to be changed, remove and replace it at this time. See later in Engine oil for changing engine oil filter.

depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine. 9. Start the engine. Check for leakage around the drain plug. Correct as required. 10.Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary. 11.Dispose of waste oil in the proper manner.
SDI0975

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot. Waste oil must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations. 7. Clean and re-install the drain plug and new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Drain plug tightening torque: 22 to 29 ft-lb (29 to 39 Nm) Do not use excessive force. 8. Refill engine with recommended oil and install the cap securely. See Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the 10. Technical and consumer information section for drain and refill capacity. The drain and refill capacity

WARNING
Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. Keep used engine oil out of reach of children.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Turn the engine off. 3. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench. (Depending on the engine model, a special cap type wrench may be required. See your NISSAN dealer if in doubt.) Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

Do-it-yourself

8-9

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil may be hot. 4. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with a clean rag. Be sure to remove any old rubber gasket remaining on the mounting surface of the engine. 5. Coat the rubber gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil. 6. Screw in the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten additionally more than 2/3 turn. Oil filter tightening torque: 10.85 to 15.19 ft-lb (14.7 to 20.6 Nm) 7. Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter. Correct as required. 8. Turn the engine off and wait several minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if necessary.
SSD0161

TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS FOR CHECKING

The fluid level should be checked using the HOT range on the dipstick after the following conditions have been met: a) the engine should be warmed up to operating temperature. b) the vehicle should be driven at least 5 minutes. c) the automatic transmission fluid should be warmed to between 122 and 176F (50 and 80C). The fluid can be checked at fluid temperatures of 86 to 122F (30 to 50C) using the COLD range on the dipstick after the engine is warmed up and before driving. However, the fluid should be re-checked using the HOT range. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the parking brake. 2. Start the engine and then move the selector lever through each gear range. Move the selector lever to P (Park) position after you have moved it through all ranges.

WARNING
When engine is running, keep hands, jewelry and clothing away from any moving parts such as cooling fan and drive belt. Automatic transmission fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children.

8-10

Do-it-yourself

POWER STEERING FLUID

CAUTION
Do not overfill. Use only NISSAN Matic D (Continental US and Alaska) or Canada Nissan automatic transmission fluid. DexronTMIII/MerconTM or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental US and Alaska contact a NISSAN dealer for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of DexronTM III/MerconTM automatic transmission fluid. NOTE: If the vehicle has been driven for a long time at high speeds, or in city traffic in hot weather, or if it is being used to pull a trailer, the accurate fluid level cannot be read. You should wait until the fluid has cooled down (about 30 minutes).

SDI0496

SDI0118

3. Check the fluid level with the engine idling. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean with lint-free paper. 5. Reinsert the dipstick into the charging pipe as far as it will go. 6. Remove the dipstick and note the reading. If the level is at the low side of either range, add fluid to the charging pipe.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir tank. The fluid level should be checked using the HOT range at fluid temperatures of 122 to 176F (50 to 80C) or using the COLD range at fluid temperatures of 32 to 86F (0 to 30C).

CAUTION
Do not overfill. Use Genuine Nissan PSFII or equivalent.

Do-it-yourself

8-11

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID

tem and affect the vehicles stopping ability.

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, wash with water.

SDI0119

SDI0961

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is below the MIN line or the brake warning light comes on, add DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be thoroughly checked by your NISSAN dealer.

Type A: Add fluid when the low washer fluid warning light comes on. Add a washer solvent to the water for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer anti-freeze. Follow the manufacturers instructions for the mixture ratio.

WARNING
Use only new fluid. Old, inferior, or contaminated fluid may damage the brake and clutch systems. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake sys-

8-12

Do-it-yourself

BATTERY

WARNING
Anti-freeze is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children.

Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Any corrosion should be washed off with a solution of baking soda and water. Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened. If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the () negative battery terminal cable to prevent discharge.

CAUTION
Do not substitute engine anti-freeze coolant for window washer solution. This may result in damage to the paint.

WARNING
Do not expose the battery to flames or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas generated by battery action is explosive. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry.
Do-it-yourself

SDI0962

Type B: To check the fluid level, use your finger to plug the center hole of the cap (as shown above), then remove it from the tank. If there is no fluid in the tube, add fluid. Add a washer solvent to the water for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer anti-freeze. Follow the manufacturers instructions for the mixture ratio.

8-13

 Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

If jump starting is necessary, see Jump starting the 6. In case of emergency section. If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. Contact your NISSAN dealer.

DI0137M

Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX and MIN lines. If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level to the indicator in each filler opening. Do not overfill. 1. Remove the cell plugs. 2. Add distilled water up to the MAX level. 3. Tighten cell plugs.

8-14

Do-it-yourself

DRIVE BELTS
tion and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual.

SPARK PLUGS

WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.

CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs.

SDI0141

WARNING
Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCK position. The engine could rotate unexpectedly. 1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying, oil adhesion or looseness. If the belt is in poor condition or loose, have it replaced or adjusted by your NISSAN dealer. 2. Have the belts checked regularly for condiDo-it-yourself

8-15

SDI0122

SDI0123

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

1. Remove the rocker cover ornament using a suitable hexagon socket. (Front side) 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Loosen the ignition coil fixing bolts. And remove the ignition coil to give access to the spark plugs. 4. Remove the spark plugs with a spark plug socket. The plug socket has a rubber seal that holds the spark plug so that it will not fall when it is pulled out. Make sure that each

spark plug is snugly fitted into the plug socket. 5. Fit the new plugs, one at a time, into the spark plug socket and install them. Turn each plug in several full turns by hand, then tighten with a spark plug socket to the correct torque. Do not overtighten. Spark plug tightening torque: 14 to 22 ft-lb (20 to 29 Nm)

6. Holding the ignition coil, re-connect each ignition coil to its proper spark plug by pushing it on until you feel a snap. 7. Tighten all ignition coils.

8-16

Do-it-yourself

AIR CLEANER

SDI0498

SDI0145

SDI0963

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace the platinumtipped spark plugs as frequently as the conventional type spark plugs since they will last much longer. Follow the maintenance schedule but, do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping. Always replace with recommended platinum-tipped spark plugs.

The filter element should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance intervals. See Periodic maintenance schedules in the 9. Maintenance section for maintenance intervals. When replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp cloth.

WARNING
Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner
Do-it-yourself

8-17

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

not only cleans the air, it stops flame if the engine backfires. If it is not there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner removed and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed. Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury.

CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield. Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water. Clean the blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blade with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.

8-18

Do-it-yourself

DI1018M

REPLACEMENT
1. Pull the wiper arm. 2. Push the lock pin, then remove the wiper blade. 3. Insert the new wiper blade to the wiper arm until a click sounds.

CAUTION
After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position. Otherwise it may be damaged when the engine hood is opened. Make sure the wiper blade contacts the glass, otherwise the arm may be damaged from wind pressure.
SDI0146

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle. This may cause clogging or improper windshield washer operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin.
Do-it-yourself

8-19

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE PEDAL

WARNING
See your NISSAN dealer and have it checked if the brake pedal height does not return to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched scraping or screeching sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard. Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system. Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For additional information, see Periodic maintenance schedules in the 9. Maintenance section for maintenance intervals.

SDI0125

DI1020MF

CHECKING PARKING BRAKE

From the released position, pull the parking brake lever up slowly and firmly. If the number of clicks is out of the range listed above, see your NISSAN dealer.

CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL

With the engine running, check the distance between the upper surface of the pedal and the metal floor. If it is out of the range shown above, see your NISSAN dealer.

Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes. The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied.

8-20

Do-it-yourself

CLUTCH PEDAL BRAKE BOOSTER

Check the brake booster function as follows: 1. With the engine off, press and release the brake pedal several times. When brake pedal movement (distance of travel) remains the same from one pedal application to the next, continue on to the next step. 2. While depressing the brake pedal, start the engine. The pedal height should drop a little. 3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the engine. Keeping the pedal depressed for about 30 seconds, the pedal height should not change. 4. Run the engine for one minute without depressing the brake pedal, then turn it off. Depress the brake pedal several times. The pedal travel distance will decrease gradually with each depression as the vacuum is released from the booster. If the brakes do not operate properly, see your NISSAN dealer.

FUSES

CAUTION
Never use a fuse of higher amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire.

DI1021MC

Press the pedal by hand and be sure the free travel is within the limits shown above. If free travel is too little or too much, see your NISSAN dealer.

Do-it-yourself

8-21

system checked and repaired by your NISSAN dealer.

SDI0964

SDI0965

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition key and headlight switch are OFF. 2. Open the engine hood. 3. Remove the fusible link cover. 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. 5. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse. 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

Fusible links
If any electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace only with genuine NISSAN parts.

8-22

Do-it-yourself

SDI0966

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition key and the headlight switch are OFF. 2. Pull to open the fuse box lid. 3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. 4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse. 5. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by your NISSAN dealer.
Do-it-yourself

8-23

MULTI-REMOTE CONTROLLER BATTERY REPLACEMENT

Make sure that the side faces the bottom case. 3. Close the lid securely. 4. Push the remote controller button two or three times to check its operation. See your NISSAN dealer if you need any assistance for replacement. If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement, perform step 4 above. Be careful not to touch a circuit board and a battery terminal. An improperly disposed battery can harm the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal. The remote controller is water-resistant; however, if it does get wet, immediately wipe completely dry.
SPA1046

Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

When changing batteries, do not let dust or oil get on the controller. FCC Notice: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of

Replace the battery as follows: 1. Open the lid using a suitable tool. 2. Replace the battery with a new one. Recommended battery: Sanyo CR2025 or equivalent

8-24

Do-it-yourself

LIGHTS

SDI0976

Do-it-yourself

8-25

HEADLIGHTS
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. A bulb can be replaced from inside the engine compartment without removing the headlight assembly.

Replacing the headlight bulb

1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the rear end of the bulb. 3. Pull off the rubber cap. 4. Push and turn the retaining pin to loosen it. 5. Remove the headlight bulb. Do not shake or rotate the bulb when removing it. 6. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of removal. Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact your NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION
High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped. When handling the bulb, do not touch the glass envelope.

SDI0967

8-26

Do-it-yourself

CAUTION
Do not touch the bulb. Use the same number and wattage as originally installed: Wattage 60/55 Bulb no. HB2 Do not leave the bulb out of the headlight reflector for a long period of time as dust, moisture, and smoke may enter the headlight body and affect the performance of the headlight.

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Front turn signal/Clearance light Front side marker light Front fog light (if so equipped) Rear combination light Turn signal Stop/Tail Back-up Rear side marker light License plate light High-mounted stop light (if so equipped) Interior light Front personal light Step light Trunk light Vanity mirror light (if so equipped) 21 21/5 13 3.8 5 21 10 10 2.7 3.4 1.4 161 158 T20 PY21W T20 T16 T10 Wattage (W) 27/8 3.8 See an authorized NISSAN dealer for assistance. Bulb No. S25 T10

Do-it-yourself

8-27

SDI0968

MDI0006

Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or cover.
SDI0969

8-28

Do-it-yourself

SDI0970

Do-it-yourself

8-29

SDI0972

8-30

Do-it-yourself

SDI0333A

SDI0971

SDI0756

Do-it-yourself

8-31

TIRES AND WHEELS

less than 1 mile (1.6 km). COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire placard affixed to the glove box lid. with high speed capability tires. Driving faster than 85 MPH (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury.

WARNING
Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident. The vehicle capacity weight is indicated on the tire placard. Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components. Before taking a long trip, or whenever you have loaded your vehicle heavily, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressure is at the specified level. Do not drive your vehicle over 85 MPH (140 km/h) unless it is equipped

TYPES OF TIRES

CAUTION
When changing or replacing tires, be sure all four tires are of the same type (i.e., summer, all season or snow) and construction. Your NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability. Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

DI1033M

If you have a flat tire, see Flat tire in the 6. In case of emergency section.

TIRE PRESSURE Maximum inflation pressure

Do not exceed the maximum inflation pressures shown on the side wall of the tire.

Tire inflation pressure

Periodically check the tire pressure (including spare). Incorrect tire pressure may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling. Tire pressure should be checked when tires are COLD. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven

All season tires

NISSAN specifies all season tires on some models to provide good performance for use

8-32

Do-it-yourself

all year around, including snowy and icy road conditions. All season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than all season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of snow or all season tires on all four wheels. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some provinces and states prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

Never install tire chains on a T-type spare tire. Do not use the chains on dry roads.

Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance in snow and ice will be substantially reduced. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire sidewall. If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of snow or all season tires on all four wheels.

TIRE CHAINS
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturers suggestions. Use only SAE class S chains. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or undercarriage. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected.
Do-it-yourself

Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Generally, snow tires will have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

8-33

WARNING
After rotating the tires, adjust the tire pressure. Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). Do not include the T-type spare tire or any other small size spare tire in the tire rotation.
DI0048-B MDI0004

CHANGING TIRES AND WHEELS Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends that tires be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). Wheel nut tightening torque: 72 to 87 ft-lb (98 to 118 Nm) See Flat tire in the 6. In case of emergency section for tire replacing procedures.

Tire wear and damage

WARNING
Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging, or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging, or deep cuts are found, the tire should be replaced. The original tires have a built-in tread wear indicator. When the wear indicator is visible, the tire should be replaced.

8-34

Do-it-yourself

Improper service for a T-type spare tire may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the T-type spare tire, contact your NISSAN dealer.

accidents and could result in serious personal injury. If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels which have the same offset dimension. Wheels of a different offset could cause early tire wear, possibly degraded vehicle handling characteristics and/or interference with the brake discs. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad wear. Do not install a deformed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning. The use of retread tire is not recommended.

Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the front wheels on the vehicle could lead to transmission damage.

Care of wheels
Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance. Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed. Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels. Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead. NISSAN recommends that the road wheels be waxed to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter.

Replacing tires and wheels

When replacing a tire, use the same size, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. See Specifications in the 10. Technical and consumer information section for recommended types and sizes of tires and wheels.

WARNING
The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to

Spare tire (T-type spare tire)

US only. Canadian vehicles are equipped with a full size spare tire. Observe the following precautions if the T-type spare tire must be used, otherwise your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident.
Do-it-yourself

Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required.

8-35

CAUTION
The T-type spare tire should be used only for emergency. It should be replaced by the standard tire at the first opportunity. Drive carefully while the T-type spare tire is installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving. Periodically check the T-type spare tire inflation pressure, and always keep it at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar). Always keep the pressure of the full size spare tire (if so equipped) at the recommended pressure for standard tires, as indicated on the tire placard. For tire placard location, see Tire placard in the 10. Technical and consumer information. Do not drive your vehicle at speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h). Do not use tire chains on a T-type

spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly on the T-type spare tire and may cause damage to the vehicle. When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, the T-type spare tire should be used on the rear wheel and the original tire used on the front wheels (drive wheels). Use tire chains only on the front two original tires. Tire tread of the T-type spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the original tire. Replace the T-type spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear. Because the T-type spare tire is smaller than the original tire, ground clearance is reduced. To avoid damage to the vehicle do not drive over obstacles. Also do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught. Do not use the T-type spare tire on other vehicles. Do not use more than one T-type

spare tire at the same time. Do not tow a trailer while the T-type spare tire is installed.

8-36

Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance

General maintenance ................................................ 9-3 Explanation of maintenance items ............................ 9-3 Periodic maintenance schedules .............................. 9-5

Schedule 1 ................................................................ 9-5 Schedule 2 ................................................................ 9-5 Explanation of maintenance items .......................... 9-10

Your new NISSAN has been designed to have minimum maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save you both time and money. However, some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your NISSANs good mechanical condition, as well as its emission and engine performance. It is the owners responsibility to make sure that the specified maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed. As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper maintenance care. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain. General maintenance: General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal dayto-day operation of the vehicle. They are essential if your vehicle is to continue to operate properly. It is your responsibility to perform these procedures regularly as prescribed. These checks or inspections can be done by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, your NISSAN dealer. Periodic maintenance: The maintenance items listed in this part are required to be serviced at regular intervals.

However, under severe driving conditions, additional or more frequent maintenance will be required. Where to go for service: If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and tuned by an authorized NISSAN dealer. NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership training programs. They are completely qualified to work on NISSANs vehicles before they work on your vehicle, rather than after they have worked on it. You can be confident that your NISSAN dealers service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle in a reliable and economic way.

9-2

Maintenance

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smell, be sure to check for the cause or have your NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you should notify your NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required. When performing any checks or maintenance work, see Maintenance precautions in the 8. Do-it-yourself section. loose nuts. Tighten if necessary. Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle pulls to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed. Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. Doors and engine hood: Check that all doors and the engine hood operate smoothly as well as the trunk lid or back hatch. Also make sure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released. When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently. performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc. Lights*: Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim. Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that all warning lights and chimes are operating properly. Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak. Windshield defroster: Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in good quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner. Steering wheel: Check for changes in the steering conditions, such as excessive free play, hard steering or strange noises. Seats: Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks (if equipped) hold securely in all latched positions. Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt
Maintenance

EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following items with * is found in the 8. Do-ityourself section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified. Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge periodically when at a service station, including the spare, and adjust to the specified pressure if necessary. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear. Wheel nuts*: When checking the tires, make sure no nuts are missing, and check for any

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when

9-3

system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage. Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mats away from the pedal. Clutch pedal*: Make sure the pedal operates smoothly and check that it has the proper free play. Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied. Brake pedal and booster*: Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure it has the proper distance under it when depressed fully. Check the brake booster function. Be sure to keep floor mats away from the pedal. Parking brake*: Check that the lever has the proper travel and make sure that the vehicle is held securely on a fairly steep hill when only the parking brake is applied. Automatic transaxle P (Park) position mechanism: On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

Under the hood and the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel). Windshield washer fluid*: Check that there is adequate fluid in the tank. Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level when the engine is cold. Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, deterioration or loose connections. Brake and clutch fluid levels*: Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid levels are between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir. Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily. Engine oil level*: Check the level on the dipstick after parking the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the engine. Power steering fluid level* and lines: Check the level in the reservoir tank with the engine

off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. Automatic transaxle fluid level*: Check the level on the dipstick after putting the selector lever in P (Park) position with the engine idling. Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately locate the trouble and correct it. (See Precautions when starting and driving in the 5. Starting and driving section for exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).) Underbody: The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances, otherwise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, being careful to clean those areas where mud and dirt may accumulate. For additional information, see Cleaning exterior in the 7. Appearance and care section. Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If

9-4

Maintenance

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately. To ensure smooth, trouble-free, safe and economical driving, NISSAN provides two different maintenance schedules that may be used, depending upon the conditions in which you usually drive. These schedules contain both distance and time intervals, up to 60,000 miles (96,000 km)/48 months. For most people, the odometer reading will indicate when service is needed. However, if you drive very little, your vehicle should be serviced at the regular time intervals shown in the schedule. After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, continue the periodic maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals. driving in dusty conditions. driving on rough, muddy, or salt spread roads. towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier.

SCHEDULE 2
Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 2 if none of the driving conditions shown in Schedule 1 apply to your driving habits.

SCHEDULE 1
Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 1 if your driving habits frequently include one or more of the following driving conditions: repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km). repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing. operating in hot weather in stop-and-go rush hour traffic. extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use.
Maintenance

9-5

Schedule 1
Abbreviations: R = Replace I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 3.8 (6) 3 7.5 (12) 6 11.3 (18) 9 15 (24) 12 18.8 (30) 15 22.5 (36) 18 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 26.3 30 33.8 37.5 41.3 (42) (48) (54) (60) (66) 21 24 27 30 33

]: At the mileage intervals only

45 (72) 36 48.8 (78) 39 52.5 (84) 42 56.3 (90) 45 60 (96) 48 I* [R] I* I* R* R R

Emission control system maintenance

Drive belts See NOTE (1) Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) EVAP vapor lines Fuel lines Fuel filter See NOTE (3) Engine coolant See NOTE (4) Engine oil Engine oil filter (Use part No. 15208-31U01 or equivalent) Spark plugs (Use PLATINUM-TIPPED type) Intake & exhaust valve clearSee NOTE (5) ance* [R] I* I*

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R R R R R R R R R R R Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km)

R R

R R

R R

R R

NOTE: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) 5

After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required. Maintenance free item After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance. Maintenance items and intervals with * are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

9-6

Maintenance

Schedule 1
Abbreviations: I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION Miles x 1,000 Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) Months 3.8 (6) 3 7.5 (12) 6 11.3 (18) 9 15 (24) 12 18.8 (30) 15 22.5 (36) 18 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 26.3 (42) 21 30 (48) 24 33.8 (54) 27 37.5 (60) 30 41.3 (66) 33 45 (72) 36 48.8 (78) 39 52.5 (84) 42 56.3 (90) 45 60 (96) 48

Chassis and body maintenance

Brake lines & cables Brake pads & rotors Manual transaxle oil or automatic transaxle fluid Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Tire rotation Exhaust system Front drive shaft boots Supplemental air bag system and supplemental side air bag systems See NOTE (2). I I I I See NOTE (3). I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I See NOTE (1). I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) vacuum hoses

NOTE: (1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. (2) Inspect the supplemental air bag systems 10 years after the date of manufacture noted on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label. (3) Refer to Tire rotation under the General maintenance heading earlier in this section.
Maintenance

9-7

Schedule 2
Abbreviations: R = Replace I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION Miles x 1,000 Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) Months 7.5 (12) 6 15 (24) 12 22.5 (36) 18 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 30 (48) 24 37.5 (60) 30 45 (72) 36 52.5 (84) 42 60 (96) 48 I* [R] I* I* See NOTE (2) See NOTE (3) R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R* R R [R] I* I*

]: At the mileage intervals only

Emission control system maintenance

Drive belts Air cleaner filter EVAP vapor lines Fuel lines Fuel filter Engine coolant Engine oil Engine oil filter (Use part No. 15208-31U01 or equivalent) Spark plugs (Use PLATINUM-TIPPED type) Intake & exhaust valve clearance* See NOTE (4) See NOTE (1)

Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km)

NOTE: (1) (2) (3) (4) 5

After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Maintenance free item After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance. Maintenance items and intervals with * are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

9-8

Maintenance

Schedule 2
Abbreviations: I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. MAINTENANCE OPERATION Miles x 1,000 Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) Months 7.5 (12) 6 15 (24) 12 22.5 (36) 18 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 30 (48) 24 37.5 (60) 30 45 (72) 36 52.5 (84) 42 60 (96) 48

Chassis and body maintenance

Brake lines & cables Brake pads & rotors Manual transaxle oil & automatic transaxle fluid Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Tire rotation Exhaust system Front drive shaft boots Supplemental air bag system and supplemental side air bag systems See NOTE (1). I I I I I See NOTE (2). I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) vacuum hoses

NOTE: (1) Inspect the supplemental air bag systems 10 years after the date of manufacture noted on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label. (2) Refer to Tire rotation under the General maintenance heading earlier in this section.

Maintenance

9-9

EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following items with * is found in the 8. Do-ityourself section.

conditions, the engine oil and oil filter should be replaced in accordance with the maintenance schedule. However, under severe driving conditions, they may have to be replaced more frequently. Spark plugs*: Replace with new plugs having the correct heat range. Intake & exhaust valve clearance: Check the valve clearance if valve noise increases.

damage, looseness and leakage of oil or grease. Under severe driving conditions, they may have to be inspected more frequently. Exhaust system: Visually check the exhaust pipes, muffler, and hangers for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, chafing, abrasion, deterioration, etc. Under severe driving conditions, inspection should be performed more frequently. Supplemental air bag, and supplemental side air bag (if so equipped) systems: Maintenance for the supplemental air bags or supplemental side air bags should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) vacuum hoses: Check vacuum hose (between ASCD actuator and ASCD pump) for breakage, cracks or fracture.

Emission control system maintenance

Drive belts*: Check drive belts for wear, fraying or cracking and also for proper tension. Replace the drive belts if found damaged. Air cleaner filter: Under normal driving conditions, the air cleaner filter should be replaced in accordance with the maintenance schedule. However, driving the vehicle in dusty areas may cause more rapid clogging of the element. Consequently, the element may have to be replaced more frequently. EVAP vapor lines: Check EVAP vapor lines and connections for failure or looseness. If leaks are found, replace them. Fuel lines: Check the fuel hoses, piping and connections for leaks, looseness or deterioration. Replace any parts if they are damaged. Engine coolant*: Drain and flush the cooling system. Engine oil & oil filter*: Under normal driving

Chassis and body maintenance

Brake lines & cables: Check the brake lines and hoses (including brake booster vacuum hoses, connections & check valve) and parking brake cables for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, chafing, abrasion, deterioration, etc. Brake pads & rotors: Check these and the other neighboring brake components for wear, deterioration and leaks. Under severe driving conditions, they may have to be inspected more frequently. Manual transaxle oil & automatic transaxle fluid*: Check the fluid level and visually inspect for signs of leakage. Under severe driving conditions, the oil should be replaced at the specified interval. Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts, and front drive shaft boots: Check for

9-10

Maintenance

10 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ......... 10-2 Fuel recommendation ............................................. 10-3 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation................. 10-5 Recommended SAE viscosity number.................... 10-6 Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations .................................................... 10-6 Specifications .......................................................... 10-7 Engine ..................................................................... 10-7 Tires and wheels ..................................................... 10-9 Dimensions and weights ......................................... 10-9 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country ..................................................... 10-10 Vehicle identification ............................................. 10-10 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate.............. 10-10 Vehicle identification number (Chassis number) .................................................. 10-10 Engine serial number ............................................ 10-11

F.M.V.S.S. certification label ................................. Emission control information label ........................ Tire placard ........................................................... Air conditioner specification label.......................... Installing front license plate................................... Vehicle loading information ................................... Terms .................................................................... Determining vehicle load capacity ........................ Loading tips ........................................................... Towing a trailer ..................................................... Maximum load limits.............................................. Towing safety ........................................................ Uniform tire quality grading ................................... Emission control system warranty ........................ Reporting safety defects (US only) ....................... Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test (US only) ...............................................................

10-11 10-11 10-12 10-12 10-13 10-14 10-14 10-14 10-15 10-15 10-16 10-17 10-19 10-20 10-20 10-21

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure instructed in the 8. Do-it-yourself section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (Approximate) US measure Fuel Engine oil*6 Drain and refill With oil filter change Without oil filter change Cooling system With reservoir Reservoir Manual transmission gear oil Automatic transmission fluid Power steering fluid Brake and clutch fluid Multi-purpose grease Air conditioning system refrigerant Air conditioning system lubricants Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in the 8. Do-it-yourself section. 8-1/8 qt 3/4 qt 6-3/4 qt 5/8 qt 7.7 0.7 Genuine NISSAN anti-freeze coolant or equivalent API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-90 only Nissan Matic D (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid*4 Genuine Nissan PSFII or equivalent*8 Genuine Nissan Brake Fluid*5 or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116) NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base) HFC-134a (R-134a)*7 Nissan A/C System Oil Type S or exact equivalent 4-1/4 qt 3-7/8 qt 3-1/2 qt 3-1/4 qt 4.0 3.7 API Certification Mark*2, *3 API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API grade SJ, Energy Conserving*2, *3 ILSAC grade GF-I & GF-II*2, *3 18-1/2 gal Imp measure 15-3/8 gal Liter 70 Recommended specifications Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (RON 96)*1

*1: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for fuel recommendation. *2: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for engine oil and oil filter recommendation. *3: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for recommended SAE viscosity number. *4: DexronTMIII/MerconTM or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental United States and Alaska contact a NISSAN dealer for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of DexronTMIII/MerconTM automatic transmission fluid. *5: Available in mainland US through your NISSAN dealer. *6: For additional information, see Engine oil in the 8. Do-it-yourself section for changing engine oil. *7: For additional information, see Vehicle identification in this section for air conditioner specification label. *8: Genuine Nissan PSFII, Canada Nissan Automatic Transmission fluid, DexronTMIII/MerconTM or equivalent ATF may also be used.

10-2

Technical and consumer information

FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96) If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Research octane number 91) can be used. However, for maximum vehicle performance, the use of unleaded premium gasoline is recommended.

NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager. If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage. The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline. If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a methanol blend, is used, it should contain no more than 10% oxygenate. (MTBE may, however, be added up to 15%.) If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should also contain a suitable amount of appro-

priate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles. If any undesirable driveability problems such as engine stalling and hard hot starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE. Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage.

CAUTION
Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control devices and systems, and could also affect the warranty coverage. Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, since this will damage the three-way catalyst.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of any fuel additives (i.e. fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvent or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions.

Technical and consumer information

10-3

Octane rating tips

In most parts of North America, you should use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 or 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number. However, you may use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating as low as 85 AKI number in these high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)] such as: Colorado, Montana, New Mexico, Utah, Wyoming, northeastern Nevada, southern Idaho, western South Dakota, western Nebraska, and that part of Texas which is directly south of New Mexico. Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than stated above can cause persistent, heavy spark knock. (Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, have your dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible. Incorrect ignition timing will result in knocking, after-run or overheating. This in turn may cause excessive fuel consumption or damage to the engine. If any of the above symptoms

are encountered, have your vehicle checked at a NISSAN dealer or other competent service facility. However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is no cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load.

10-4

Technical and consumer information

however, meet the API quality and SAE viscosity ratings specified for your vehicle. Do not mix mineral based and synthetic type oils in the engine at the same time.

Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed. Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used.
STI0077

Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important that the engine oil viscosity be selected based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. The recommended SAE viscosity number chart shows the recommended oil viscosities for the expected ambient temperatures. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage.

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATION Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct quality, and viscosity oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. NISSAN recommends the use of a low friction oil (energy conserving oil) in order to improve fuel economy and conserve energy. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage. Only those engine oils with the American Petroleum Institute (API) certification mark on the

front of the container should be used. This type of oil supersedes the existing API SG or SH and Energy Conserving I & II categories. If you cannot find engine oil with the API certification mark, use an API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API grade SJ, Energy conserving oil. An oil with a single designation SG or SH, or in combination with other categories (for example, SG/CC or SG/CD) may also be used if one with the API certification mark cannot be found. An ILSAC grade GF-I & GF-II oil can also be used. Mineral based or synthetic type oils may be used in your NISSAN vehicle. These oils must

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new vehicle is equipped with a highquality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use the genuine oil filter or its equivalent
Technical and consumer information

10-5

for the reason described in change intervals.

Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Oil and filter other than the specified quality, or oil and filter change intervals longer than recommended could reduce engine life. Damage to engines caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the new NISSAN vehicle warranties. Your engine was filled with a high quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle. Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes. repeated short distance driving at cold outside temperatures, driving in dusty conditions, extensive idling, towing a trailer.

RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY NUMBER

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioning system in this NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lubricant, Nissan A/C System Oil Type S or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system components. The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your NISSAN vehicle will not harm the earths ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earths atmosphere, certain governmental regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioning system service. Your NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioning system refrigerant.

TI1028-C

SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all ambient temperatures. SAE 10W-30, 10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if the ambient temperature is above 0F (18C).

10-6

Technical and consumer information

SPECIFICATIONS
Contact your NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioning system.

ENGINE
Model Type Cylinder arrangement Bore x Stroke Displacement Firing order Idle speed Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) CO percentage at idle speed Spark plug Spark plug gap (Normal) Camshaft operation Alternator belt size Width x Length in (mm) 0.8409 x 43.11 (21.36 x 1,095) rpm degree/rpm [No air] % Standard Service option in (mm) PFR5G-11 PFR4G-11, PFR6G-11 0.043 (1.1) Timing chain See the emission control label on the underside of the hood. in (mm) cu in (cm3) VQ30DE Gasoline, 4-cycle 6-cylinder, V-slanted at 60 3.66 x 2.886 (93.0 x 73.3) 182.33 (2,988) 1-2-3-4-5-6*

TI1009-A

Technical and consumer information

10-7

The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

10-8

Technical and consumer information

TIRES AND WHEELS

Type Steel Road wheel 16 x 6.5JJ Aluminum 17 x 7JJ (option) Conventional Tire Spare 1.75 (45) 1.57 (40) Size 15 x 6JJ Offset 1.57 (40) in (mm)

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Sedan Overall length Overall width Overall height Front tread Rear tread Wheelbase Gross vehicle weight rating Gross axle weight rating Front Rear lb (kg) lb (kg) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) lb (kg) See the F.M.V.S.S. certification label on the drivers side lock pillar. 190.4 (4,838) 70.3 (1,785) 56.5 (1,435) 60.2 (1,530)*1 59.8 (1,520)*2 59.4 (1,510)*1 59.1 (1,500)*2 108.3 (2,750)

P205/65R15 92H P215/55R16 91H P225/50R17 93V (option) Conventional*1 T125/70D16*2 T125/90D16*2, *3 T135/90D16*2, *4

*1: *2: *3: *4:

For For For For

CANADA US models with Viscous LSD models equipped with 17 size tire (option)

*1: For models with road wheel size - 15 x 6JJ, 16 x 6.5JJ *2: For models with aluminum wheel size - 17 x 7JJ

Technical and consumer information

10-9

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

When planning to travel in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicles engine. Using fuel with too low an octane rating may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded engine gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available. When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations. The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ. When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation, and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

STI0038

STI0187

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number plate is attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (Chassis number)

The number is stamped as shown.

10-10

Technical and consumer information

STI0047

STI0186

STI0188

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (F.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is attached as shown.

Technical and consumer information

10-11

STI0206

STI0189

TIRE PLACARD
The cold tire pressure is shown on the tire placard affixed to the console box lid.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is affixed inside of the hood as shown.

10-12

Technical and consumer information

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

Use the following steps to mount the license plate: Before mounting the license plate, confirm that the following parts are enclosed in the vinyl bag. License plate bracket J-nut x 2 Screw x 2 Screw grommet x 2 1. Temporarily place the license plate bracket A of the front bumper while aligning points k B in the license plate fascia with holes k bracket. 2. Remove the license plate bracket.
A using a 0.39 3. Carefully drill two pilot holes k in (10 mm) drill bit at the marked locations. (Be sure that the drill only goes through the fascia, or damage to the nut may occur.)

4. Insert grommets into the hole on the fascia. 5. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the grommet hole to add 90 turn onto the part k C .
STI0191

6. Insert a J-nut into the license plate bracket

Technical and consumer information

10-13

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

before placing the license plate bracket on the fascia. 7. Install the license plate bracket with screws. 8. Install the license plate with bolts that are no longer than 0.55 in (14 mm).

WARNING
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle.

DETERMINING VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

The load capacity of this vehicle is determined by weight, not by available cargo space. For example, a luggage rack, bike carrier, cartop carrier or similar equipment does not increase load carrying capacity of your vehicle. To determine vehicle load capacity:

TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle: Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not include passengers and cargo. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo.

Vehicle weight can be determined by using a commercial-grade scale, found at places such as a truck stop, gravel quarry, grain elevator, or a scrap metal recycling facility. 1. Determine the curb weight of your vehicle. 2. Compare the curb weight amount to the GVWR specified for your vehicle to determine how much more weight your vehicle can carry. 3. After loading (cargo and passengers), reweigh your vehicle to determine if either GVWR or GAWR for your vehicle is ex-

10-14

Technical and consumer information

TOWING A TRAILER
ceeded. If GVWR is exceeded, remove cargo as necessary. If either the front or rear GAWR is exceeded, shift the load or remove cargo as necessary. and cause personal injury. Overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by your warranty.

LOADING TIPS
The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label. Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.

WARNING
Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control

TI1011M

Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember that towing a trailer will place additional loads on your vehicles engine, drive train, steering, braking and other systems. Information on trailer towing ability and the special equipment required should be obtained from your Nissan dealer. He can obtain a Nissan Trailer Towing Guide for you.

Technical and consumer information

10-15

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed 1,000 lb (454 kg). The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight. Towing loads greater than 1,000 lb (454 kg) or using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance. The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appropriate for level highway driving may have to be reduced on very steep grades or in low traction situations (for example, on slippery boat ramps).

equipment required may be obtained from an authorized NISSAN dealer.

Tongue load
Keep the tongue load between 9 and 11% of the total trailer load. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load.

TI1012M

Maximum gross vehicle weight/ maximum gross axle weight

The gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle must not exceed. GVWR shown on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label. The gross vehicle weight equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. In addition, front or rear gross axle weight must not exceed GAWR shown on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label.

WARNING
Vehicle damage and/or personal injury resulting from improper towing procedures are not covered by NISSAN warranties. A Nissan Trailer Towing Guide (U.S. only) containing information on trailer towing ability and the special

10-16

Technical and consumer information

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART Unit: lb (kg) MAXIMUM TOWING LOAD MAXIMUM TONGUE LOAD 1,000 (454) 110 (49)

Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, etc. to install a trailer hitch. To reduce the possibility of additional damage if your vehicle is struck from the rear, where practical, remove the hitch and/or receiver when not in use. After the hitch is removed, seal the bolt holes to prevent exhaust fumes, water or dust from entering the passenger compartment. Regularly check that all hitch mounting bolts are securely mounted.

vehicle and the trailer. The chain should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave enough slack in the chain to permit turning corners.

Trailer lights
Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or local regulations. When wiring the vehicle for towing, connect the stop and tail light pickup into the vehicle electrical circuit at a point between the sensor and stop light or light switch.

TOWING SAFETY Trailer hitch

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer. A genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available from your NISSAN dealer (Canada only). Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle, to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system, make sure it conforms to federal and/or local regulations and that it is properly installed.

Tire pressures
When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the tire placard (located on the inside of the center console lid). Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturers specifications.

CAUTION
Do not use axle-mounted hitches. The hitch should not be attached to or affect the operation of the impactabsorbing bumper.

WARNING
Never connect a trailer brake system directly to the vehicle brake system.

Safety chain
Always use a suitable chain between your

Pre-towing tips
Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded and/or unloaded
Technical and consumer information

10-17

trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down condition; check for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shifts while driving. Be certain your rear view mirrors conform to all federal, state or local regulations. If not, install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle.

slope is not recommended; however, if you must do so, and if your vehicle is equipped with automatic transmission, first block the wheels and apply the parking brake, and then move the transmission selector lever into the P (Park) position. If you move the selector lever to the P (Park) position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake, transmission damage could occur. When going down a hill, shift into a lower gear and use the engine braking effect. When ascending a long grade, downshift the transmission to a lower gear and reduce speed to reduce chances of engine overloading and/or overheating. If the engine coolant rises to an extremely high temperature when the air conditioning system is on, turn off the air conditioner. Coolant heat can be additionally vented by opening the windows, switching the fan control to high and setting the temperature control to the HOT position. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances. Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km). Have your vehicle serviced more often than

at intervals specified in the recommended maintenance schedule. When making a turn, your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make a larger than normal turning radius during the turn. Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly causing vehicle sway. When being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect vehicle handling. If swaying does occur, firmly grip the steering wheel, steer straight ahead, and immediately (but gradually) reduce vehicle speed. This combination will help stabilize the vehicle. Never increase speed. Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing while towing a trailer requires considerably more distance than normal passing. Remember the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes. To maintain engine braking efficiency and electrical charging performance, do not use fifth gear (manual transmission) or overdrive (automatic transmission).

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicles behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic. Steering stability, and braking performance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving. Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops. Avoid sharp turns or lane changes. Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed. Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking. Parking on a

10-18

Technical and consumer information

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency. When towing a trailer, change oil in the transmission more frequently. See Periodic maintenance schedules in the 9. Maintenance section. DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING
The traction grade assigned to your vehicle tires is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Treadwear
Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on tire wear rate when tested under controlled conditions on specified government test courses. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1-1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. However, relative tire performance depends on actual driving conditions, and may vary significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Temperature A, B and C
Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C. They represent a tires resistance to heat build-up, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause tire material to degenerate, reducing tire life. Excessive temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a performance level which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades A and B represent higher levels of performance on laboratory test wheels than the minimum required by law.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt

Technical and consumer information

10-19

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY

WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Your NISSAN is covered by the following emission warranties. For US: Emission Defects Warranty Emissions Performance Warranty For Canada: Emission Control System Warranty Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information and Maintenance Log Booklet that comes with your NISSAN. If you did not receive a Warranty Information and Maintenance Log Booklet, or it has become lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to: Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 191 Gardena. CA. 90248-0191 Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US only) If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, tollfree, at 1-800-NISSAN-1. In Hawaii call (808) 836-0888.

10-20

Technical and consumer information

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US only)

Due to legal requirements in some states/ areas, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the ready condition for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system. The vehicle is set to the ready condition when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle. If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a not ready condition. Before taking the I/M test, drive the vehicle through the following pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. If you cannot or do not want to perform the driving pattern, an NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you. points between the C and H (normal operating temperature). 2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h), then quickly release the accelerator pedal completely and keep it released for at least 6 seconds. 3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of 53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96 km/h) for at least 5 minutes. 4. Stop the vehicle. 5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h) and maintain the speed for 20 seconds. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 3 times. 7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h) and maintain the speed for at least 3 minutes. 8. Stop the vehicle (shift lever in the P or N position). 9. Rev the engine up between 2,500 and 3,500 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes, then release the accelerator pedal completely. 10.Wait 5 second at idle. 11.Rev the engine up between 2,000 and
Technical and consumer information

3,000 rpm and maintain it for 5 consecutive minutes. 12.Turn the engine off. 13.Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least one more time. If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeat the preceding step. Any safe driving mode is acceptable between steps. Do not stop the engine until step 7 is completed.

WARNING
Always drive the vehicle in a safe and prudent manner according to traffic conditions, and obey all traffic laws. 1. Start the engine when the engine coolant temperature gauge needle points to C. Allow the engine to idle until the gauge needle

10-21

OWNERS MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Owners Manuals for the 2000 model year and prior, see an authorized NISSAN dealer, or contact: Dyment Distribution Services 20770 Westwood Dr. Strongsville OH 44136 1-800-247-5321 In Canada: To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owners Manual please contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN Dealer in your area call the NISSAN Satisfaction Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you. Also available are Genuine NISSAN Service and Owners Manuals for older NISSAN models.

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment procedures, this manual is the same one used by the factory trained technicians working at authorized NISSAN dealerships. Also available are genuine NISSAN Owners Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Service and Owners Manuals for older NISSAN models.

In the USA: For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model year, contact: Tweddle Litho Company 1-800-639-8841 www.nissan-techinfo.com For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model year and prior, see an authorized NISSAN dealer, or contact: Dyment Distribution Services 20770 Westwood Dr. Strongsville OH 44136 1-800-247-5321

10-22

Technical and consumer information

11 Index
A ABS (Anti-lock brake system)......................... 5-19 Air bag Warning labels........................................... 1-18 Warning light ...................................... 1-19, 2-8 Air bag system (See supplemental restraint system) ........ 1-13 Side (See supplemental side air bag system) ...................................................... 1-15 Air cleaner housing filter ................................. 8-17 Air conditioner Air conditioner operation ............................. 4-3 Air conditioner service ....................... 4-3, 4-11 Air conditioner specification label .... 4-3, 10-12 Air conditioner system refrigerant and lubrication recommendations ...................... 4-3 Heater and air conditioner controls ............. 4-3 Servicing air conditioner.............................. 4-3 Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations ........................................... 10-6 Air flow charts ................................................... 4-6 Alcohol, drugs and driving ................................ 5-4 AM-FM radio with cassette player .................. 4-12 AM-FM radio with cassette player and compact disc player....................................................... 4-12 AM-FM radio with compact disc player .......... 4-12 Ambient temperature switch (AMB), Air conditioner ...................................................... 4-11 Anchor point locations, Top tether strap ........ 1-35 Antenna Manual....................................................... 4-24 Power ........................................................ 4-24 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)........................ 5-19 Anti-lock brake warning light............................. 2-9 Appearance care Exterior appearance care............................ 7-2 Interior appearance care ............................. 7-4 Armrest ............................................................. 1-8 Audio system .................................................. 4-12 Automatic Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ........... 8-10 Driving with automatic transmission............ 5-8 Sunroof ...................................................... 2-29 Transmission selector lever lock release .... 5-9 Avoiding collision and rollover .......................... 5-3 Brake and clutch fluid................................ 8-12 Brake booster ............................................ 8-21 Brake pedal ............................................... 8-20 Brake pedal check..................................... 8-20 Parking brake check ........................ 5-13, 8-20 Parking brake operation ............................ 5-13 System....................................................... 5-18 Warning light ............................................... 2-9 Break-in schedule ........................................... 5-16 Bulb check/instrument panel ............................ 2-7 Bulb replacement ............................................ 8-25

C Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants .................................................. 10-2 Car phone ....................................................... 4-25 Car phone or CB radio ................................... 4-25 Cassette player (See audio system) .............. 4-16 Cassette tape operation ................................. 4-12 Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst............ 5-3 Child restraints ................................................ 1-28 Installation on front passenger seat.......... 1-36 Installation on rear seat outboard or center positions .................................................... 1-30 Precautions on child restraints.................. 1-28 Top tether strap anchor point locations .... 1-35 Child safety ..................................................... 1-22

B Battery............................................................. 8-13 Battery replacement, (See multi-remote control system) ............................................................. 3-7 Battery, Battery saver system ........................ 2-18 Before starting the engine ................................ 5-7 Belts (See drive belts) .................................... 8-15 Brake Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ................... 5-19

Child safety rear door lock................................ 3-4 Chimes ............................................................ 2-11 Cigarette lighter (accessory) and ashtray....... 2-23 Circuit breaker, Fusible link ............................ 8-22 Cleaning exterior and interior .................... 7-2, 7-4 Clock ............................................................... 2-30 Clutch Clutch pedal .............................................. 8-21 Fluid........................................................... 8-12 Cold weather driving ....................................... 5-21 Compact Disc (CD) player (See audio system) ........................................................... 4-23 Compact disc (CD) player operation .............. 4-12 Compact spare tire ......................................... 8-35 Console box .................................................... 2-26 Controls Audio controls............................................ 4-12 Audio controls (rear).................................. 4-12 Audio controls (steering wheel)................. 4-12 Heater and air conditioner controls ............. 4-3 Heater and semiautomatic air conditioner ................................................... 4-3 Coolant Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants ................................................... 10-2 Changing engine coolant ............................ 8-6 Checking engine coolant level .................... 8-5 Corrosion protection ......................................... 7-5 Cruise control.................................................. 5-14 Cup holder ...................................................... 2-24

D Daytime running light system ......................... 2-19 Defogger switch, Rear window and outside mirror defogger switch............................................... 2-16 Dimensions and weights................................. 10-9 Door open warning light ................................... 2-8 Drive belts ....................................................... 8-15 Driving Cold weather driving ................................. 5-21 Driving with automatic transmission............ 5-8 Driving with manual transmission ............. 5-11 Precautions when starting and driving ........ 5-2

Engine oil..................................................... 8-7 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation... 10-5 Engine oil viscosity.................................... 10-5 Engine serial number .............................. 10-11 Engine specifications................................. 10-7 If your engine overheats ........................... 6-10 Starting the engine ...................................... 5-7 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ...................... 5-2

F F.M.V.S.S. certification label......................... 10-11 Filter, Air cleaner housing filter....................... 8-17 Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) ............................................................. 2-20 Flat tire .............................................................. 6-2 Floor mat cleaning ............................................ 7-4 Fluid Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ........... 8-10 Brake and clutch fluid................................ 8-12 Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants ................................................... 10-2 Engine coolant............................................. 8-5 Engine oil..................................................... 8-7 Power steering fluid................................... 8-11 Window washer fluid ................................. 8-12 Fog light switch ............................................... 2-19 Front manual seat adjustment .......................... 1-2 Front power seat adjustment ............................ 1-4 Fuel Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants ................................................... 10-2 Filler cap.................................................... 3-10

E Economy, Fuel ................................................ 5-16 Emission control information label................ 10-11 Emission control system warranty ................ 10-20 Engine Before starting the engine........................... 5-7 Block heater .............................................. 5-22 Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants ................................................... 10-2 Changing engine coolant ............................ 8-6 Changing engine oil .................................... 8-8 Changing engine oil filter ............................ 8-9 Checking engine coolant level .................... 8-5 Checking engine oil level ............................ 8-7 Coolant temperature gauge ........................ 2-5 Engine compartment check locations ......... 8-4 Engine cooling system ................................ 8-5

11-2

Filler lid ...................................................... 3-10 Filler lid and cap........................................ 3-10 Filler lid opener lever................................. 3-10 Fuel economy............................................ 5-16 Fuel octane rating ..................................... 10-3 Fuel recommendation................................ 10-3 Gauge.......................................................... 2-5 Fuses .............................................................. 8-21 Fusible links .................................................... 8-22

Headlights, Headlight switch........................... 2-17 Heated seats................................................... 2-21 Heater Engine coolant heater ............................... 5-22 Heater and air conditioner controls ............. 4-3 Heater operation.......................................... 4-3 Operation, Semiautomatic air conditioner ... 4-4 HomeLink Universal Transceiver.................. 2-33 Hood, release ................................................... 3-8 Horn ................................................................ 2-20 How to stop alarm, Theft warning .................. 2-13

J Jump starting .................................................... 6-7

K Keyless entry, (See multi-remote control system) ............................................................. 3-4 Keys .................................................................. 3-2

G Garage door opener, Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver ..................................... 2-33 Gas cap .......................................................... 3-10 Gauge ............................................................... 2-3 Engine coolant temperature gauge............. 2-5 Fuel gauge .................................................. 2-5 Odometer..................................................... 2-4 Speedometer ............................................... 2-4 Tachometer ................................................. 2-4 General maintenance ................................ 9-2, 9-3 Glasses case .................................................. 2-24 Glove box........................................................ 2-25 Glove box lock ................................................ 2-25 I Ignition switch ................................................... 5-4 Automatic transmission models .................. 5-4 Key positions ............................................... 5-6 Manual transmission models....................... 5-5 Immobilizer system ......................................... 2-13 Indicator lights and chimes (See warning/indicator lights and chimes)............................................. 2-9 Inside mirror .................................................... 3-13 Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test................. 10-20 Instrument panel ............................................... 2-2 Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver ..................................................... 2-33 Interior and cargo light.................................... 2-30 Interior light ..................................................... 2-30 Interior light replacement ................................ 8-27 L Label, Air conditioner specification label ...... 10-12 Label, Emission control information label..... 10-11 Label, F.M.V.S.S. certification label.............. 10-11 Labels Air bag warning labels............................... 1-19 Air conditioner specification label................ 4-3 Engine serial number .............................. 10-11 Vehicle identification number (VIN)......... 10-10 License plate, Installing front license plate... 10-13 Light Air bag warning light ................................. 1-18 Bulb replacement ...................................... 8-25 Fog light switch ......................................... 2-19 Headlamps (Bulb replacement)................. 8-26 Headlight switch ........................................ 2-17 Headlights (Bulb replacement).................. 8-26 Interior and cargo light .............................. 2-30 Interior light................................................ 2-30 Personal light............................................. 2-31

H Hazard warning flasher switch........................ 2-20 Head restraints ................................................. 1-7 Headlamps, (Bulb replacement) ..................... 8-26 Headlights, (Bulb replacement) ...................... 8-26

11-3

Replacement ............................................. 8-25 Trunk light.................................................. 2-33 Vanity mirror light ...................................... 2-32 Warning/indicator lights and chimes .... 2-7, 2-9 Lights, Exterior and interior light replacement .................................................... 8-27 Loading information (See vehicle loading information) ................................................... 10-14 Lock Door locks ................................................... 3-2 Glove box lock........................................... 2-25 Power door lock .......................................... 3-2 Trunk lid lock opener lever.......................... 3-9 Low fuel warning light ....................................... 2-9 Luggage net .................................................... 2-26

Outside mirror control................................ 3-13 Outside mirrors.......................................... 3-13 Multi-remote control system.............................. 3-4

P Parking Brake check............................................... 8-20 Parking brake check.................................. 5-13 Parking brake operation ............................ 5-13 Parking on hills.......................................... 5-13 Parking/parking on hills .................................. 5-17 Periodic maintenance schedules ...................... 9-5 Personal light .................................................. 2-31 Power Front seat adjustment ................................. 1-4 Power door lock .......................................... 3-2 Power steering fluid................................... 8-11 Power steering system.............................. 5-18 Power windows ......................................... 2-27 Pre-tensioner seat belt system ....................... 1-17 Precautions Braking precautions................................... 5-18 Cruise control precautions ........................ 5-13 Maintenance precautions ............................ 8-2 On child restraints ..................................... 1-28 On seat belt usage.................................... 1-20 On supplemental restraint system .............. 1-8 Precautions when starting and driving ........ 5-2 Push starting ..................................................... 6-9

N Net, Luggage net ............................................ 2-26 New vehicle break-in ...................................... 5-15 Nissan vehicle Immobilizer System ................ 2-12 Engine start ................................................. 5-6

O Odometer .......................................................... 2-4 Oil Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants ................................................... 10-2 Changing engine oil .................................... 8-8 Changing engine oil filter ............................ 8-9 Checking engine oil level ............................ 8-7 Engine oil..................................................... 8-7 Engine oil viscosity.................................... 10-5 Outside mirror ................................................. 3-13 Outside mirror control ..................................... 3-13 Outside mirrors ............................................... 3-13 Overdrive switch ............................................. 5-10 Overheat, If your vehicle overheats................ 6-10

M Maintenance Battery ....................................................... 8-13 Explanation of maintenance items..... 9-3, 9-10 General maintenance........................... 9-2, 9-3 Inside the vehicle ................................. 9-2, 9-3 Maintenance precautions ............................ 8-2 Outside the vehicle .............................. 9-2, 9-3 Periodic maintenance schedules ................ 9-5 Seat belt maintenance .............................. 1-27 Under the hood and vehicle........................ 9-4 Manual front seat adjustment ........................... 1-2 Meters and gauges ........................................... 2-3 Mirror Inside mirror .............................................. 3-13 Outside mirror............................................ 3-13

R Radio, car phone or CB radio......................... 4-25 Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test (USA only) .................................................... 10-21

11-4

Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock...... 3-4 Rear seat adjustment ....................................... 1-6 Rear window and outside mirror defogger switch .............................................................. 2-16 Registering your vehicle in another country .......................................................... 10-10 Remote keyless entry, (See multi-remote control system) ............................................................. 3-4 Reporting safety defects (USA only) ............ 10-20 Rollover ............................................................. 5-3

S Safety Child seat belts.......................................... 1-22 Reporting safety defects (USA only)....... 10-20 Towing safety .......................................... 10-17 Seat adjustment Front manual seat adjustment .................... 1-2 Front power seat adjustment ...................... 1-4 Rear seat adjustment .................................. 1-6 Seat belt extenders......................................... 1-27 Seat belt maintenance .................................... 1-27 Seat belt warning light .................................... 1-20 Seat belt warning light and chime .................... 2-8 Seat belt(s) Child safety................................................ 1-22 Infants and small children ......................... 1-23 Injured persons.......................................... 1-24 Larger children .......................................... 1-23 Pre-tensioner seat belt system ................. 1-17 Precautions on seat belt usage ................ 1-20 Pregnant women ....................................... 1-23

Seat belt cleaning........................................ 7-5 Seat belts .................................................. 1-20 Three-point type with retractor .................. 1-24 Seat(s), Seats ................................................... 1-2 Seats, Heated seats ....................................... 2-21 Security system (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System), Engine start ..................................... 2-13 Security systems (See theft warning)............. 2-12 Servicing air conditioner .......................... 4-3, 4-11 Shift lock release ............................................ 5-10 Shifting Automatic transmission ............................... 5-8 Manual transmission ................................. 5-11 Shoulder belt height adjustment, For front seats ............................................................... 1-27 Side air bag system (See supplemental side air bag system) .................................................... 1-16 Spark plugs ..................................................... 8-15 Speedometer .................................................... 2-4 Starting Before starting the engine........................... 5-7 Jump starting............................................... 6-7 Precautions when starting and driving ........ 5-2 Push starting ............................................... 6-9 Starting the engine ...................................... 5-7 Steering Power steering fluid................................... 8-11 Power steering system.............................. 5-18 Tilting steering wheel ................................ 3-12 Storage ........................................................... 2-23 Sun shade....................................................... 2-29 Sun visors ....................................................... 3-12 Sunroof, Automatic sunroof ............................ 2-29 Supplemental air bag system ......................... 1-14

Supplemental air bag warning labels ............. 1-18 Supplemental air bag warning light......... 1-19, 2-8 Supplemental restraint system ......................... 1-8 Precautions on supplemental restraint system ......................................................... 1-8 Supplemental side air bag system ................. 1-16 Switch Fog light switch ......................................... 2-19 Hazard warning flasher switch .................. 2-20 Headlight switch ........................................ 2-17 Ignition switch.............................................. 5-4 Ignition switch automatic transmission models ......................................................... 5-4 Ignition switch manual transmission models ......................................................... 5-5 Overdrive switch........................................ 5-10 Power door lock switch ............................... 3-3 Rear window and outside mirror defogger switch......................................................... 2-16 Traction control system cancel switch ...... 2-22 Turn signal switch ..................................... 2-19

T Tachometer ....................................................... 2-4 Temperature gauge, Engine coolant temperature gauge ................................................................ 2-5 Theft (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System), Engine start..................................................... 2-13 Theft warning .................................................. 2-12 Three way catalyst............................................ 5-3 Tilting steering wheel ...................................... 3-12

11-5

Tire Flat tire ........................................................ 6-2 Tire and wheels......................................... 8-32 Uniform tire quality grading ..................... 10-19 Wheel/tire size........................................... 10-9 Tires, Spare tire .............................................. 8-35 Tires, Tire chains ............................................ 8-33 Tires, Tire placard......................................... 10-12 Tires, Tire pressure ........................................ 8-32 Tires, Tire rotation .......................................... 8-34 Tires, Type of tires.......................................... 8-32 Top tether strap child restraint........................ 1-34 Towing Tow truck towing ....................................... 6-11 Towing a trailer........................................ 10-15 Towing load/specification chart ............... 10-15 Towing safety .......................................... 10-17 Traction control system .................................. 5-20 Traction control system (TCS) cancel switch .............................................................. 2-22 Trailer towing ................................................ 10-15 Transceiver, Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver ..................................................... 2-33 Transmission Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ........... 8-10 Driving with automatic transmission............ 5-8 Driving with manual transmission ............. 5-11 Transmission selector lever lock release .... 5-9 Transmitter (See multi-remote control system) ............................................................. 3-4 Traveling or registering your vehicle in another country .......................................................... 10-10 Trunk access through rear seat........................ 1-6 Trunk lid lock opener lever ............................... 3-9

Trunk light ....................................................... 2-33 Turn signal switch ........................................... 2-19

U Underbody cleaning .......................................... 7-3 Uniform tire quality grading........................... 10-19

V Vanity mirror light............................................ 2-32 Vehicle Dimensions and weights ........................... 10-9 Identification number (VIN) ..................... 10-10 Loading information................................. 10-14 Recovery, (freeing a stuck vehicle)........... 6-12 Ventilators ......................................................... 4-2

Warning/indicator lights and chimes................. 2-7 Warranty, Emission control system warranty ........................................................ 10-20 Washer switch, Windshield wiper and washer switch .............................................................. 2-15 Washing ............................................................ 7-2 Waxing .............................................................. 7-2 Weights (See dimensions and weights) ......... 10-9 Wheels and tires, Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels ............................................................... 7-4 Window washer fluid....................................... 8-12 Window(s) Cleaning ...................................................... 7-3 Power windows ......................................... 2-27 Windshield wiper and washer switch.............. 2-15 Wiper Blades........................................................ 8-18 Windshield wiper and washer switch ........ 2-15

W Warning Hazard warning flasher switch .................. 2-20 Theft warning............................................. 2-12 Warning labels, Air bag warning labels .......... 1-18 Warning light Air bag warning light .......................... 1-19, 2-8 Brake warning light...................................... 2-9 Door open.................................................... 2-8 Low fuel warning light ................................. 2-9 Seat belt warning light and chime............... 2-8

11-6

GAS STATION INFORMATION FUEL RECOMMENDATION:

Unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96). If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Research octane number 91) can be used. However, for maximum vehicle performance, the use of unleaded premium gasoline is recommended.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

API Certification Mark API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving II or API grade SJ, Energy Conserving ILSAC grade GF-II SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all ambient temperatures. SAE 10W-30 viscosity oil may be used for ambient temperatures above 0F (18C). See Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants in the 10. Technical and consumer information section for engine oil and oil filter recommendation.

or shortened engine life.

CAUTION
Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control systems, and may also affect warranty coverage. Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, since this will damage the three way catalyst. For additional information, see Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the 10. Technical and consumer information section.

COLD TIRE PRESSURES:

See tire placard affixed to the center console lid.

NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURES RECOMMENDATION:

During the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of vehicle use, follow the recommendations outlined in the Break-in schedule Information found in the 5. Starting and driving section of this Owners Manual. Follow these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage

Windshield washer fluid 8-12

Engine coolant 8-5 Meters and gauges 2-3 Engine oil 8-7

Hood release 3-8 Seat 1-2 Trunk release 3-9 Seat belt 1-20

Audio system 4-12 Air conditioner 4-3

Key 3-2

Fuel 3-10, 10-2 Spare tire 6-3, 8-35

STI0205

Foreword
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence. It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control. This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle. A separate Warranty Information and Maintenance Log Booklet (in U.S.), Warranty and Roadside Assistance Information booklet (in Canada) explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle and vehicle maintenance schedules. Additionally, a separate Customer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, as well as clarify your rights under your states lemon law. Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have any questions, he will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to him. tenance requirements, assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modification may not be covered under NISSAN warranties.

WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS FOR SAFETY!
Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers! Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Always observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions. Always use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat. Always provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle. Always review this Owners Manual for important safety information.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for all options available on this model. Therefore, you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle. All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or design at any time without notice.

READ FIRST THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Before driving your vehicle please read your Owners Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and main-

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways:

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

WARNING
Engine Exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.
SIC0697

CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means Do not do this or Do not let this happen.

2000 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD. TOKYO, JAPAN

All rights reserved. No part of this Owners Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.

Welcome To The World Of NISSAN

portation services to the supply of lubricants, parts and accessories. NISSAN pioneered the use of electronics and computers in automobiles, and has led the industry in improving both performance and fuel efficiency through new engine designs and the use of synthetic materials to reduce vehicle weight. The company has also developed ways to build quality into its vehicles at each stage of the production process, both through extensive use of automation and most importantly through an awareness that people are the central element in quality control. From the time the parts arrived from our suppliers until you took delivery of your new Nissan, dozens of checks were made to ensure that only the best job was being done in producing and delivering your vehicle. NISSAN also takes great care to ensure that when you take your NISSAN to your dealer for maintenance, the service technician will perform his work according to the quality standards that have been established by the factory. Safety has also been built into your NISSAN. As you know, seat belts are an integral part of the safety systems that will help protect you and your passengers in the event of a sudden stop or an accident. We urge you to use the seat belts every time you drive the vehicle. The NISSAN story of growth and achievement reflects our major goal: to provide you, our customer, with a vehicle that is built with quality and craftsmanship a product that we can be proud to build and you can be proud to own.

WFW0002

Your new NISSAN is the result of our dedication to produce the finest in safe, reliable and economical transportation. Your vehicle is the product of a successful worldwide company that manufactures cars and trucks in over 17 countries and distributes them in 170 nations. NISSAN vehicles are designed and manufactured by Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. which was founded in Tokyo, Japan in 1933, and NISSAN affiliates world wide, collectively growing to become the fifth largest automaker in the world. In addition to cars and trucks, NISSAN also makes forklift trucks, marine engines, boats and other diversified products. NISSAN has made a substantial and growing investment in North America. NISSANS commitment is nearly $4 billion dollars in capital investments in facilities across the continent. Some of

the facilities include the Nissan Manufacturing facility in Smyrna, Tennessee, vehicle styling design at Nissan Design International in San Diego, California, and engineering at Nissan Technical Center North America in Farmington Hills, Michigan. Additionally, NISSAN employs nearly 18,000 people throughout the United States, Canada, and Mexico. An additional 71,000 people work for the 1,500 NISSAN and INFINITI dealers across North America. NISSAN is also a substantial contributor to the Canadian economy. Nissan Canada Inc., its suppliers and over 140 dealers employ approximately 4,500 people. These include company employees and the staffs of NISSAN dealers all across Canada. In addition, many Canadians work for companies that supply NISSAN and NISSAN dealers with materials and services ranging from operation of port facilities and trans-

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

NISSAN CARES ... Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions, please contact our (NISSANs) Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number:

For U.S. mainland customers 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261) For Hawaii customers (808) 836-0888 (Oahu Number) For Canadian customers 1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information: Your name, address, and telephone number Vehicle identification number (on dashboard) Date of purchase Current odometer reading Your NISSAN dealers name Your comments or questions OR

You can write to NISSAN with the information on the left at: For U.S. mainland and Alaska customers Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 191 Gardena, California 90248-0191 For Hawaii customers Nissan Motor Corporation in Hawaii 2880 Kilihau St. Honolulu, Hawaii 96819 For Canada customers Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

Table of Contents

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems Instruments and controls Pre-driving checks and adjustments Heater, air conditioner and audio systems Starting and driving In case of emergency Appearance and care Do-it-yourself Maintenance Technical and consumer information Index

1 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Seats ......................................................................... 1-2 Front manual seat adjustment ............................. 1-2 Front power seat adjustment ............................... 1-4 Folding rear seat ................................................. 1-6 Head restraint adjustment .................................... 1-7 Active head restraint (front seats) ........................ 1-8 Armrest ................................................................. 1-9 Supplemental restraint system.................................. 1-9 Precautions on supplemental restraint system .... 1-9 Supplemental air bag warning labels ................. 1-19 Supplemental air bag warning light.................... 1-19 Seat belts ................................................................ 1-21 Precautions on seat belt usage ......................... 1-21 Child safety......................................................... 1-23 Pregnant women ................................................ Injured persons................................................... Three-point type seat belt with retractor ............ Seat belt extenders ............................................ Seat belt maintenance ....................................... Child restraints ........................................................ Precautions on child restraints ........................... Installation on rear seat outboard or center positions ............................................................. LATCH (Lower anchors and tether for children) system ................................................................ Top tether strap child restraint ........................... Installation on front passenger seat ................... 1-24 1-24 1-24 1-27 1-28 1-28 1-28 1-30 1-35 1-36 1-37

SEATS FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT

WARNING
Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of control of the vehicle. After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked.

SSS0133

WARNING
Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

For most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly. See Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section.

1-2

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SPA0097

SPA0099A

Forward and backward

Pull the lever up while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean back. To bring the seatback forward again, pull the lever and move your body forward. The seatback moves forward.

Seat lifter (Drivers seat)

Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion to the desired position.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-3

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT

WARNING
Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

SPA0467

Lumbar support (Drivers seat)

The lumbar support feature provides lower back support to the driver. Move the lever up or down to adjust the seat lumbar area.

Operating tips
The motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate the switch. Do not operate the power support seat for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery.

1-4

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SSS0148

SSS0147

Forward and backward

Moving the switch forward or backward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position.

Reclining
Move the recline switch backward until the desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback forward again, move the switch forward and move your body forward. The seatback will move forward.

Seat lifter (Drivers seat)

Push the front or rear end of the switch up or down to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-5

 Rear seats will not fold when the lock levers are in lock position for security of the trunk.

WARNING
When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain that they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured in the right position, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop. Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraint can be extremely dangerous in an accident or sudden stop.
SSS0149

SPA0467

Lumbar support (Drivers seat)

The lumbar support feature provides lower back support to the driver. Move the lever up or down to adjust the seat lumbar area.

FOLDING REAR SEAT Interior trunk access

The trunk can be readily accessible from the rear seat for loading and unloading, as shown.

Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

1-6

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

 Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked with the rear seatback securely latched when not in use, and prevent childrens access to car keys.

ment after someone else uses the seat.

SSS0125

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT

To raise the head restraint, just pull it up. To lower, push the lock knob and push the head restraint down.

WARNING
Head restraints should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident. Do not remove them. Check the adjust-

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-7

 Active head restraints are designed to supplement other safety systems. Always wear seat belts. No system can prevent all injuries in any accident. Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks. Doing so could impair active head restraint function. The head restraint moves forward utilizing the force that the seatback receives from the occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement of the head restraint helps support the occupants head by reducing its backward movement and helping absorb some of the forces that may lead to whiplash type injuries. Active head restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it is said that whiplash injury occurs most. Active head restraints operate only in certain rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head restraints return to their original positions. Properly adjust the active head restraints as described in the previous section.

SSS0178

SPA1025

Adjust the head restraints so the center is level with the center of your ears.

ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT (front seats)

WARNING
Always adjust the head restraints properly as specified in the previous section. Failure to do so can reduce the effectiveness of the active head restraint.

1-8

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) section contains important information concerning the driver and passenger supplemental air bags, supplemental side air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts. Supplemental front air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the face and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions. Supplemental side air bag system (if so equipped): This system can help cushion the impact force to the head and the chest area of the driver and front passenger in certain side impact collisions. The supplemental side air bag is designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. These supplemental restraint systems are designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and front passenger seat belts and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the driver and front passenger seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and front door finishers. (See Seat belts later in this section for

instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.) After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

SSS0150

ARMREST
Pull the armrest forward until it is horizontal.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-9

wheel or instrument panel. Always use the seat belts. Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the supplemental front air bag inflates.

SSS0131

WARNING
The supplemental front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, roll over, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents. The seat belts and the supplemental front air bags are most effective when

you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. Front air bags inflate with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash and may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the supplemental front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering

1-10

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SSS0132

SSS0006

SSS0007

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-11

WARNING
Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations. Children may be severely injured or killed when the supplemental front air bag or supplemental side air bag inflates if they are not properly restrained. Also never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating supplemental front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. For additional information, see Child restraints later in this section.

SSS0008

SSS0099

SSS0009

SSS0100

1-12

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SSS0101

SSS0140

SSS0159

WARNING
Supplemental equipped): side air bag (if so

The supplemental side air bag ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear impact or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

The seat belts and the supplemental side air bag are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The side air bag inflates with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seat to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illus-

trations. When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the supplemental side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with supplemental side air bag inflation.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-13

SSS0162

SSS0173

Supplemental front air bag system

The driver supplemental air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel; the front passenger supplemental air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. These systems are designed to meet optional certification requirements under U.S. regulations. They are also permitted in Canada. The optional certification allows front air bags to be designed to inflate somewhat less forcefully than previously. However, all of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed. The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental air bag operation. When the supplemental front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire, but care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.

1-14

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Supplemental front air bags along with the use of seat belts, helps to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body. The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or dash board. Since the supplemental front air bags inflates quickly in order to help protect the front occupants, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against the air bag module during inflation. The air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over. After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental front air bag inflates. Right after inflation, several air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental front air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the air bag or damage to the air bag system. Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicles electrical system, suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the supplemental air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in

serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad, above the dashboard, or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system. Work around and on the supplemental front air bag system should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system. * The SRS wiring harnesses are covered with yellow insulation either just before the harness connectors or over the complete harness for easy identification. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the supplemental front

WARNING
Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-15

air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual.

When the supplemental side air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire, but care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. Supplemental side air bags along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the head and the chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body. The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the supplemental side air bag. Since the side air bag inflates quickly in order to help protect the front occupants, the force of the side air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against the side air bag module during inflation. The side air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over. After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7

SSS0165

Supplemental side air bag system (if so equipped)

The supplemental side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats. The supplemental side air bag (on the driver or front passenger seat) is designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although it may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity side impact. It is designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. It may not inflate in certain side collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental side air bag operation.

1-16

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING
Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental side air bag inflates. Right after inflation, several supplemental side air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental side air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the side air bag or damage to the side air bag system. Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicles electrical system, suspension system or side panel.

This could affect proper operation of the supplemental side air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the front seats assembly by placing material near the seatback of the front seat, or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag system. Work around and on the supplemental side air bag system should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag system. * The SRS wiring harnesses are covered with yellow insulation either just

before the harness connectors or over the complete harness for easy identification. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the supplemental side air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual.

Pre-tensioner seat belt system (For front seats)

WARNING
The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be reused after activation. It must be replaced together with the retractor as a unit. If the vehicle becomes involved in a frontal collision but the pre-tensioner is not activated, be sure to have the pre-tensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced by your NISSAN dealer. No unauthorized changes should be

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-17

made to any components or wiring of the pre-tensioner seat belt system. This is to prevent accidental activation of the pre-tensioner seat belt or damage to the pre-tensioner seat belt operation. Tampering with the pretensioner seat belt system may result in serious personal injury. Work around and on the pretensioner system should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner seat belt system. If you need to dispose of the pretensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact an authorized NISSAN dealer. Correct pre-tensioner disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt system activates in conjunction with the supplemental front air bag. Working with the seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt the instant the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, thereby restraining seat occupants. The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat belts retractor. These seat belts are used the same as conventional seat belts. When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. The smoke is not harmful, but care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensioner system, the supplemental air bag warning light will not come on, will flash intermittently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on after the ignition key has been turned to the ON or START position. In this case, the pretensioner seat belt may not function properly. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat belt system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual.

1-18

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SPA0945B

SPA1097

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light, displaying in the instrument panel, monitors the circuits of the supplemental front air bag and supplemental side air bag systems, and pre-tensioner seat belt. The circuits monitored by the air bag warning light are the diagnosis sensor unit, satellite sensors, front air bag modules, side air bag modules and all related wiring, and pre-tensioner seat belt. After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning
Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-19

light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. If any of the following conditions occur, the supplemental front air bag system, supplemental side air bag system, and pre-tensioner seat belt need servicing: The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds. The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently. The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all. Under these conditions, the supplemental front air bags, supplemental side air bags and/or pre-tensioner seat belt may not operate properly. They must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest authorized NISSAN dealer.

Repair and replacement procedure

The supplemental front air bags, supplemental side air bags and pre-tensioner seat belt are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light will remain illuminated after inflation has occurred. Repair and replacement of these systems should be done only by authorized NISSAN dealers. To ensure long-term functioning, these systems must be inspected 10 years after the date of manufacture noted on the certification label located on the driver side center pillar. When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the supplemental front air bags, supplemental side air bags, related parts and pre-tensioner seat belt should be pointed out to the person conducting the maintenance. The ignition key should always be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle.

tensioner seat belt has in flated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. The module should be replaced by an authorized NISSAN dealer. The supplemental front air bag module or supplemental side air bag module cannot be repaired. The supplemental front air bag system, supplemental side air bag system and pre-tensioner seat belt should be inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle. If you need to dispose of these supplemental systems or scrap the vehicle, contact an authorized NISSAN dealer. Correct disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the supplemental front air bag system, supplemental side air bag system and/or pre-tensioner seat belt will not operate in an accident.

WARNING
Once the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag and/or pre-

1-20

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SEAT BELTS PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE

Your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced if you are wearing your seat belt and it is properly adjusted. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag. Most states, provinces or territories require that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0134

WARNING
Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be properly restrained and, if appropriate, in a child restraint. The belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly. Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the belt behind your back under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-21

 Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible around the hips, not the waist. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident. Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle. Do not wear the belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness. Do not allow more than one person to use the same belt. Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts. If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. Once the pre-tensioner seat belt has activated, it cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor. See your NISSAN dealer. Removal and installation of the pretensioner seat belt system components should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. All seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision by your NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be
SSS0136

replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.

1-22

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

All US states and provinces of Canada require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. (See Child restraints later in this section.) In addition, there are many types of child restraints available for larger children which should be used for maximum protection. NISSAN recommends that all preteens and children be restrained in the rear seat if possible. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
SSS0016 SSS0014

CHILD SAFETY
Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly restrained. The proper restraint depends on the childs size. Generally, infants (up to about 1 year and less than 20 lb (9 kg) should be placed in rear facing child restraints. Front facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear facing child restraints.

WARNING
Infants and children need special protection. The vehicles seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints.

This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (air bag system) for the front passenger (see Supplemental Restraint System earlier in this section for precautions).

Infants and small children

NISSAN recommends that infants and small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturers instructions for installation and use.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-23

Larger children
Children who are too large for child restraint systems should be seated and restrained by the seat belts which are provided. If the childs seating position has a shoulder belt that fits close to the face or neck, the use of a booster seat (commercially available) may help overcome this. The booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top, middle portion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck, use the shoulder belt without the booster seat.

PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug, and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations.

SSS0018

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING
Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident

WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is moving. The child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident or a sudden stop.

1-24

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SSS0020

SSS0102

SSS0061

you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. For most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly.

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. 2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until it snaps. The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion will permit the belt to move, and allow you some freedom of movement in the seat.

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown. 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack. The front passenger and rear seat belts have a cinching mechanism for child restraint installation. It is referred to as the automatic locking mode. When the cinching mechanism is activated the seat belt cannot be withdrawn again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. For additional information, see Child restraints later in this section.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-25

The automatic locking mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by a passenger, the locking mode should not be activated. If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension.

forward. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement. If the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any questions about belt operation, see your NISSAN dealer.

WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain that seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured in the right position, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

SSS0021

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the belt, press the button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract.

Checking seat belt operation

Your seat belt retractors are designed to lock belt movement using two separate methods: when the belt is pulled quickly from the retractor. when the vehicle slows down rapidly. You can check their operation as follows: grasp the shoulder belt and pull quickly

1-26

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

WARNING
After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the shoulder belt down to make sure it is securely fixed in position. The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident.

SPA0829

SSS0152

Center of rear seat (if so equipped)

Selecting correct set of seat belts: The center seat belt buckle is identified by the CENTER mark. The center seat belt tongue can be fastened only into the center seat belt buckle.

Shoulder belt height adjustment (For front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best suited for you. (See Precautions on seat belt usage earlier in this section.) To lower, push the release button, and then move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position, so that the belt passes over the shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position. To raise, move the adjuster up to the desired position without pushing the button.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender is available which is compatible with the installed seat belts. The extender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. See your NISSAN dealer for assistance if the extender is required.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-27

CHILD RESTRAINTS

WARNING
Only NISSAN belt extenders, made by the same company which made the original equipment belts, should be used with NISSAN belts. Persons who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident.

buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire belt assembly should be replaced.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS

WARNING
Infants and small children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint while riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a child restraint can result in serious injury or death. Infants and small children should never be carried on your lap. It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident. The child could be crushed between the adult and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the same seat belt around both your child and yourself. Never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating supplemental air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. A rear facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

To clean the seat belt webbings, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpets. Then brush the webbing, wipe it with a cloth and allow it to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry. If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth. Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components such as

1-28

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

 NISSAN recommends that the child restraint be installed in the rear seat. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. An improperly installed child restraint could lead to serious injury or death in an accident. In general, child restraints are designed to be installed with the lap portion of a three-point type seat belt. In addition, this vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint lower anchor system, referred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) system. Some child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these lower anchors. For details, see LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) SYSTEM later in this section. Child restraints for infants and children of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind: choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicles seat and seat belt system. Choose a child restraint that meets the guidelines of the Society of Automotive Engineers recommended practice J1819 for child restraint installation. if the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Always follow all recommended procedures. All US states and Canadian provinces require that infants and small children be restrained in approved child restraints at all times while the vehicle is being operated.

WARNING
Improper use of a child restraint can result in increased injuries for both the infant or child and other occupants in the vehicle.

Follow all of the child restraint manufacturers instructions for installation and use. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure to select one which will fit your child and vehicle. It may not be possible to properly install some types of child restraints in your vehicle. If the child restraint is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases. Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to fit the child restraint, but as upright as possible. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Tilt it from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. For a front facing child restraint, check to make sure the shoulder belt

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-29

does not go in front of the childs face or neck. If it does, put the shoulder belt behind the child restraint. If you must install a front facing child restraint in the front seat, see instructions later in this section. When your child restraint is not in use, store it in the trunk or keep it secured with a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown around in case of a sudden stop or accident.

INSTALLATION ON REAR SEAT OUTBOARD OR CENTER POSITIONS

WARNING
The three-point belt on your vehicle is equipped with a locking mode retractor which must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to do so will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. It could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision.

SSS0153

CAUTION
Remember that a child restraint left in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the child restraint.

Front facing
When you install a child restraint in a rear outboard or center seat, follow these steps: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. It can be placed in a front facing direction, depending on the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manufacturers instructions.

1-30

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SSS0154

SSS0043

SSS0107

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for belt routing.

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts back to emergency locking mode when the belt is fully retracted.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-31

retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt only locks during a sudden stop or impact.

SSS0062

SSS0108

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is allowed to wind back into the

1-32

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SSS0155

SSS0156

SSS0046

Rear facing
When you install a child restraint in a rear outboard or center seat, follow these steps: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. The direction of the child restraint depends on the type of the child restraint and the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manufacturers instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for belt routing.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-33

SSS0045A

SSS0109

SSS0110

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts back to emergency locking mode when the belt is fully retracted.

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is allowed to wind back into the

1-34

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt only locks during a sudden stop or impact.

Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the child restraint lower anchors. The child restraint will not be secured properly. The LATCH system anchors are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstance are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses.
SSS0177A

LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM

WARNING
Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown. If a child restraint is not secured properly, your child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident.

Some child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. This system is known as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) system. This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH system compatible child restraints. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with the LATCH system. This information may also be in the child restraint owners manual. If you have such a

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-35

child restraint, refer to the illustration for the rear seating positions equipped with LATCH system anchors which can be used to secure the child restraint. The LATCH system anchors are located at the rear of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the LATCH system anchors. Some child restraints may also require the use of a top tether strap. See Top tether strap child restraint later in this section for installation instructions. When installing a child restraint, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint. When you install a LATCH system compatible child restraint to the lower anchor attachments in the rear seat, follow these steps.

restraint will not be secured properly if the LATCH system anchors are obstructed. 1. To install the LATCH system compatible child restraint, insert the child restraint LATCH system anchor attachments into the anchor points on the rear seat. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether, see Top tether strap child restraint later in this section for installation instructions. 2. After attaching the child restraint and before placing the child in it, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side and tug it forward to make sure that the child restraint is securely held in place. 3. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use.

SSS0157

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT

If your child restraint has a top tether strap, it must be secured to the provided anchor point. First, secure the child restraint with the rear seat belt. Remove the anchor cover from the anchor point which is located directly behind the child seat. Secure the top tether strap to the anchor bracket. Keep the removed cover in a secured place to prevent loss or damage to the cover.

WARNING
Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor area and feeling to make sure there are no obstructions over the LATCH system anchors, such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child

1-36

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

WARNING
The child restraint anchor point is designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstance is it to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses.

Anchor point locations

Anchor points are located on the rear parcel shelf finisher. If you have any questions when installing a top strap child restraint on the rear seat, consult your NISSAN dealer for details.
SSS0129

INSTALLATION ON FRONT PASSENGER SEAT

WARNING
Never install a rear facing child restraint in the front passenger seat. Supplemental air bags inflate with great force. A rear facing child restraint could be struck by the supplemental air bag in a crash and could seriously injure or kill your child.

NISSAN recommends that child restraints be installed in the rear seat. However, if you must install a front facing child restraint in the front passenger seat, move the passenger seat to the rearmost position. A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat. The three-point belt in your vehicle is equipped with a locking mode retractor which must be used when install-

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-37

ing a child restraint. Failure to use the retractors locking mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The child restraint could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision.

SSS0135

SSS0055

Front facing
If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, follow these steps: 1. Position the child restraint on the front passenger seat. It should be placed in a front facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Always follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for belt routing.

1-38

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SSS0113

SSS0056

SSS0114

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts back to emergency locking mode when the belt is fully retracted.

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the lap belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-39

seat belt is allowed to wind back into the retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt only locks during a sudden stop or impact.

1-40

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

MEMO

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-41

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel ....................................................... 2-2 Meters and gauges ................................................... 2-3 Speedometer and odometer ................................ 2-4 Tachometer .......................................................... 2-4 Engine coolant temperature gauge ...................... 2-5 Fuel gauge ........................................................... 2-5 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders........ 2-7 Checking bulbs ..................................................... 2-7 Warning lights....................................................... 2-7 Indicator lights ...................................................... 2-9 Audible reminders .............................................. 2-11 Brake pad wear warning .................................... 2-12 Security systems ..................................................... 2-12 Vehivle security system...................................... 2-12 Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System .................. 2-13 Windshield wiper and washer switch ...................... 2-14 Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defogger switch ....................................................... 2-15 Headlight and turn signal switch ............................. 2-16 Headlight switch ................................................. 2-16 Turn signal switch .............................................. 2-18 Fog light switch (if so equipped) ............................. 2-18 Hazard warning flasher switch ................................ 2-19 Horn......................................................................... 2-19

Heated seats (if so equipped)................................. Traction control system (TCS) cancel switch (if so equipped) ....................................................... Power outlet ............................................................ Cigarette lighter and ashtray (accessory) ............... Storage .................................................................... Trays................................................................... Glasses case ...................................................... Cup holder .......................................................... Glove box ........................................................... Console box ....................................................... Cargo net (if so equipped) ................................. Windows .................................................................. Power windows .................................................. Sunroof (if so equipped) ......................................... Automatic sunroof .............................................. Clock ....................................................................... Adjusting the time............................................... Interior light ............................................................. Ceiling................................................................. Personal light .......................................................... Vanity mirror light (if so equipped).......................... Trunk light ...............................................................

2-20 2-21 2-21 2-22 2-22 2-22 2-23 2-23 2-24 2-25 2-25 2-26 2-26 2-28 2-28 2-29 2-29 2-29 2-29 2-30 2-31 2-32

Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver (if so equipped) ....................................................... Programming HomeLink ................................... Programming HomeLink for Canadian customers ........................................................... Operating the integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver .........................................................

2-32 2-33 2-33 2-34

Programming problem-Diagnosis ....................... Clearing the programmed information................ Rolling code programming ................................. Reprogramming a single HomeLink button...... If your vehicle is stolen ......................................

2-34 2-34 2-34 2-35 2-35

INSTRUMENT PANEL
Windshield wiper/washer switch (P.2-14) Traction control system (TCS) cancel switch (if so equipped) (P.2-21)

Ventilator (P.4-2) Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defogger switch (P.2-15) Heater/air conditioner control (P.4-3) Clock (P.2-29) Security indicator light (P.2-12) Radio/cassette player (P.4-14)/CD player (P.4-19) Passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-9)

Meters/gauges (P.2-3) Instrument brightness control switch (P.2-17) Headlight, fog light (if so equipped) and turn signal switch (P.2-16)

Glove box (P.2-24) Fuse box cover (P.8-21) Outside mirror remote control (P.3-15) Steering switch for audio control (if so equipped) (P.4-24) Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-9) Tilting steering wheel lock lever (P.3-13) Tray (P.2-22) or ashtray (accessory) (P.2-22) Cruise control main/set switch (P.5-14) Hazard warning flasher switch (P.2-19) Ignition switch/steering lock (P.5-4) Power outlet (P.2-21) or cigarette lighter (accessory) (P.2-22)

See the page indicated in parentheses for operating details.

SIC1566

2-2

Instruments and controls

METERS AND GAUGES

SIC1321

Instruments and controls

2-3

Changing the display: Pushing the reset knob changes the display as follows: TRIP A , TRIP B , TRIP A Resetting the trip odometer: Pushing the reset knob for more than 1 second resets the trip odometer to zero.

SIC1227

SIC1249

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (r/min).

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer/twin trip odometer are displayed when the ignition key is in the ON position. The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.

CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.

2-4

Instruments and controls

CAUTION
If the gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. See If your vehicle overheats in the 6. In case of emergency section for immediate action required.
SIC0173 SIC1565

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant temperature will vary with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.

FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank. The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hill. The gauge needle is designed to move to the E (Empty) position when the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers Empty.

Instruments and controls

2-5

The low fuel warning light comes on when the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the gauge reaches E. There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E. The indicates that the fuel filler lid is located on the drivers side of the vehicle.

CAUTION
If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving trips, the lamp should turn off. If the lamp remains on after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see the Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) later in this section.

2-6

Instruments and controls

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Engine oil pressure warning light Charge warning light Door open warning light Seat belt warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Trunk lid open warning light Low washer fluid warning light (if so equipped) or or Brake warning light Anti-lock brake warning light (if so equipped) High beam indicator light (Blue) Cruise main switch indicator light Cruise set indicator light Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) Traction control system indicator light (if so equipped) Slip indicator light (if so equipped)

Low fuel warning light Overdrive off indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator light

CHECKING BULBS
Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition key to ON without starting the engine. The following lights will come on: , or , , , ,

WARNING LIGHTS Engine oil pressure warning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop. The oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. See Engine oil in the 8. Do-it-yourself section.

CAUTION
Running the engine with the oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.

The following lights come on briefly and then go off: , or , If any light fails to come on, it may indicate a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system. Have the system repaired promptly.

Charge warning light

If the light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate that the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the enInstruments and controls

2-7

gine off and check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing or if the light remains on, see your NISSAN dealer immediately.

Supplemental air bag warning light

After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light will illuminate. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. If any of the following conditions occur, the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt needs servicing and your vehicle must be taken to your nearest authorized NISSAN dealer. The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds. The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently. The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all. Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental Restraint System and/or the pre-tensioner seat belt may not function properly. For additional information, see Supplemental restraint system in the 1. Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems section.

WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the supplemental air bag system, supplemental side air bag system (if so equipped) and/or pretensioner seat belt will not operate in an accident.

CAUTION
Do not continue driving if the belt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors are not closed securely while the ignition key is ON.

Trunk lid open warning light

This light comes on when the trunk lid is not closed securely while the ignition key is ON.

Seat belt warning light and chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition key is turned to ON, and will remain illuminated until the drivers seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime will sound for about 6 seconds unless the drivers seat belt is securely fastened. See Seat belts in the 1. Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems section for precautions on seat belt usage.

Low washer fluid warning light (if so equipped)

This light comes on when the washer tank fluid is at a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary. See Window washer fluid in the 8. Do-it-yourself section.

or

Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems. Parking brake indicator: When the ignition key is in the ON position, the

2-8

Instruments and controls

light comes on when the parking brake is applied. Low brake fluid warning light: The light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following: 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. See Brake and clutch fluid in the Do-it-yourself section.

pedal effort as well as greater pedal travel. If the brake fluid level is below the MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked at a NISSAN dealer. 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warning system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If the light comes on while you are driving, contact your NISSAN dealer for repair.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel in the tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E. There will be a small reserve of fuel remaining in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E.

INDICATOR LIGHTS Overdrive off indicator light

This light comes on during driving when the overdrive switch is pressed to prevent overdrive operation. The O/D OFF indicator light comes on for 2 seconds each time the ignition key is turned ON. This shows the light is functioning properly. If the O/D OFF indicator light blinks for approximately 8 seconds after coming on for 2 seconds, have your NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair it if necessary. The automatic transmission is equipped with an electronic fail-safe mode. This system allows the vehicle to be driven even in the event of damage to the electrical circuits. If this
Instruments and controls

WARNING
Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous. Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or low brake fluid level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater

or

Anti-lock brake warning light (if so equipped)

After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the light will illuminate. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate that the anti-lock brake system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. If an abnormality occurs in the system, the anti-lock function will cease but the ordinary brakes will continue to operate normally.

2-9

occurs, the gears automatically engage and lock into third gear. See the Driving the vehicle in the 5. Starting and driving section for fail-safe before visiting your NISSAN dealer.

indicate the cruise control system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer.

Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction. The malfunction indicator lamp may also come on steady if the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel filler cap is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least three gallons of fuel in the fuel tank. After a few driving trips, the lamp should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists. Operation The malfunction indicator lamp will come on in one of two ways: Malfunction indicator lamp on steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected. Check the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the

lamp should turn off after vehicle. The a few driving trips. If the lamp does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer. Malfunction indicator lamp blinking An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To reduce or avoid emission control system damage: a) Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH (72 km/h). b) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration. c) Avoid steep uphill grades. d) If possible, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed. The malfunction indicator lamp may stop blinking and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

The light flashes when the turn signal switch lever or hazard switch is turned on.

High beam indicator light (Blue)

This light comes on when the headlight high beam is on and goes out when the low beam is selected.

Cruise main switch indicator light

The light comes on when the cruise control main switch is pushed. The light goes out when the main switch is pushed again. When the cruise main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise control system is operational.

Cruise set indicator light

The light comes on while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control system. If the light blinks while the engine is running, it may

CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system

2-10

Instruments and controls

checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission control system.

b) If engine speed is above 4,000 rpm in a selected gear. Use D range on low friction road surfaces. If the traction control system indicator light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on, have your vehicle checked by your NISSAN dealer.

mission only as high as the indicated shift lever position.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS Key reminder chime

The chime will sound if the driver side door is opened while the key is left in the ignition switch (ignition switch is turned off). Remove the key and take it with you when leaving the vehicle.

Traction control system indicator light (if so equipped)

The traction control system indicator light should come on when you turn the ignition key to ON. The light will go off as you start the engine. If the indicator light does not come on or go off, have the TCS checked by your NISSAN dealer. If the light stays on or comes on when you are driving, there may be a problem with your traction control system and it may not operate properly. Have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. The traction control system indicator light may come on for the following reasons. a) If the system is turned off by pressing the button on the instrument panel, the indicator light will come on and stay on. To turn the system back on, press the button again. The indicator light will go off.

Slip indicator light (if so equipped)

This light will blink on when your traction control system is limiting wheel spin. Slippery road conditions may exist if the slip indicator light blinks on. If this happens, adjust your driving accordingly. You may feel or hear the system working, but this is normal. The light will blink on for a few seconds after the traction control system stops limiting wheel spin. The slip indicator light also comes on when you turn the ignition key to ON. The light will go off as you start the engine. If the light does not come on or go off, have the TCS checked by your NISSAN dealer. The traction control system operates in all transmission shift lever positions. But the system can upshift the trans-

Light reminder chime

The headlights will turn off when the front door is opened with the light switch on unless the ignition key is in the ON position. When you turn the headlight switch ON again after the lights automatically turn off and when you open the drivers door, the lights will not turn off automatically and a chime will sound instead. See the battery saver system under Headlight switch in this section for details. Make sure to turn the light switch off when you leave the vehicle.

Seat belt warning chime

The chime will sound for about 6 seconds unless the drivers seat belt is securely fastened.
Instruments and controls

2-11

SECURITY SYSTEMS BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

IC0005

SIC1228

Your vehicle has two types of security systems, as follows: Vehicle Security System Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System The security condition will be shown by the security indicator light.

How to activate the vehicle security system

1. Close all windows. The system can be activated even if the windows are open. 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 3. Close and lock all doors, hood and trunk lid. Lock all doors by pressing the LOCK button on the multi-remote controller. When using the multi-remote controller, the hazard indicators flash twice to indicate all doors are locked.

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual and audio alarm signals if parts of the vehicle are disturbed.

2-12

Instruments and controls

4. Confirm that the SECURITY indicator light comes on. The SECURITY light glows for about 30 seconds and then blink. The system is now activated. If, during this 30 second time period, the door is unlocked by the key or the multi-remote controller, or the ignition key is turned to ACC or ON, the system will not activate. If the key is turned slowly toward the front of the vehicle when locking the door, the system may not activate. If the key is returned beyond the vertical position toward the rear of the vehicle to remove the key, the system may be deactivated. If the indicator light fails to glow for 30 seconds, unlock the door once and lock it again. Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will activate with all doors, hood and trunk lid locked and ignition key off. Turn the ignition key to ACC to turn the system off.

The alarm automatically turns off after approximately 1 minute. However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking a door or trunk lid with the key, or by pressing the UNLOCK button on the multiremote controller. The alarm is activated by: Opening the door without using the key or multi-remote controller. Opening the trunk lid without using the key or multi-remote controller. Opening the hood.

the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key. If the engine fails to start using the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key, it may be due to interference caused by another Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key, an automated toll road device or automated payment device on the key ring. Restart the engine using the following procedures: 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 10 seconds. 3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again. 4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key. If this procedure allows the engine to start, NISSAN recommends placing the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices. Statement related to section 15 of FCC rules for Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System (CONT ASSY-IMMOBILIZER)
Instruments and controls

How to stop alarm

The alarm will stop only by unlocking a door or trunk lid with the key, or by pressing the UNLOCK button on multi-remote controller. The alarm will not stop if the ignition switch is turned to ACC or ON. If the system does not operate as described above, have it checked by your NISSAN dealer.

Vehicle security system operation

The security system will give the following alarm: The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM

The Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of

2-13

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

SIC1228

SIC1322A

Security indicator light

If Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the ignition key is in the ON position. If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, see your NISSAN dealer for Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System service as soon as possible. Please bring all Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have when visiting your NISSAN dealer for service.

The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition key is in the ON position. Push the lever down to operate the wiper. Intermittent operation can be adjusted from 2 to 13 seconds by turning the knob. Pull the lever toward you to operate the washer. Then the wiper will also operate several times.

2-14

Instruments and controls

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR (if so equipped) DEFOGGER SWITCH

WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defogger.

CAUTION
SIC1502

The following could damage the washer system: Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds. Do not operate the washer if the reservoir tank is empty.

To defog/defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors, start the engine and push the switch on. The indicator light will come on. Push the switch again to turn the defogger off. It will automatically turn off in approximately 15 minutes.

Instruments and controls

2-15

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

position, the headlight low or high beam will turn off. Turn the switch to the position: The front clearance, side marker, tail, license plate and instrument lights will come on. Turn the switch to the position: Headlights will come on and all the other lights remain on.

SIC1229

HEADLIGHT SWITCH Lighting

Turn the switch to the AUTO position: When the ignition key is in the ON position, the

tail light, headlight, instrument light and other lights turn on automatically, depending on the brightness of the surroundings. When the ignition key is turned to the OFF position, the light will turn off automatically. When the light switch is turned to the

2-16

Instruments and controls

passengers door is opened. When the headlight switch remains in the or position after the lights automatically turn off, the lights will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position from the OFF position.

CAUTION
When you turn on the headlight switch after the lights automatically turn off, the lights will not turn off automatically. Be sure to turn the light switch to the OFF position when you leave the vehicle for extended periods of time, otherwise the battery will go dead. Never leave the light switch on when the engine is not running for extended periods of time even if the headlights turn off automatically.

SIC1230

IC1284MA

Be sure not to put anything on top of the photo sensor located on the top left-hand side of the instrument panel. The photo sensor controls the autolamp; if it is covered, the photo sensor reacts as if it is dark and the headlights will illuminate.

Instrument brightness control

The instrument brightness control operates when the light switch is in the or position. Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instrument panel lights (except clock) and power window switch lights. When the control is turned to the right until a click sound is heard, the light intensity will be at maximum. When the control is turned to the left until a click sound is heard, the light will be turned off.

Battery saver system

When the headlight switch is in the or position while the ignition switch is in the ON position, the lights (including the front fog light) will automatically turn off 45 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position. However, the lights will turn off if the drivers or front

Instruments and controls

2-17

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped) Headlight beam select

To select the high beam, push the lever forward. Pull it back to select the low beam.

WARNING
When the daytime running light system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

Passing signal
Pulling the lever toward you will flash the headlight high beam.

Daytime running light system (Canada only)

The headlights automatically illuminate at a reduced intensity when the engine is started with the parking brake released. The daytime running lights operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position or in the position. Turn the headlight switch to the position for full illumination when driving at night. If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the daytime running lights do not illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate once the parking brake is released. The daytime running lights will remain on until the ignition switch is turned off.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Turn signal

Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signals cancel automatically.
SIC0880

Lane change signal

To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or down to the point where lights begin flashing.

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch to the position, then turn the switch to the position. To turn them off, turn the switch to the OFF position. The headlights must be on for the fog lights to operate.

2-18

Instruments and controls

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic. Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on. The flasher can be actuated with the ignition switch either off or on.
SIC1232

HORN

SIC1280

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights will flash. Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving.

To sound the horn, push the center pad area of the steering wheel.

WARNING
If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road.

Instruments and controls

2-19

HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)

The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on. 3. When the vehicles interior is warmed, or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off. Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth. When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, thinner, or any similar materials. If any abnormalities are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION
The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running. Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat. Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated. Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.

SIC0693

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The switches located on the center console can be operated independently of each other. 1. Start the engine. 2. Select heat range. For low heat, press the top of the switch. For high heat, press the bottom of the switch. For no heat, the switch has a center OFF position between low and high. The indicator light in the switch will illuminate when low or high is selected.

2-20

Instruments and controls

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS) CANCEL SWITCH (if so equipped)

POWER OUTLET
draw. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory. Use this power outlet with the engine running. (If the engine is stopped, this could result in a discharged battery.) Avoid using when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defogger is on. Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure to turn off the power switch of electrical accessory being used or the ACC power of the vehicle. Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may blow. When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water to contact the socket.

SIC1065

SIC1533

To cancel the Traction Control System (TCS), push the TCS cancel switch. The indicator will come on. Push it again to turn the system back on. See Traction control system in the 5. Starting and driving section.

The power outlet is for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones.

CAUTION
Use caution as the socket and plug may be hot during or immediately after use. This power outlet is not designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power

Instruments and controls

2-21

CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND ASHTRAY (accessory)

STORAGE

WARNING
The cigarette lighter should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

CAUTION
The cigarette lighter socket is a power source for the cigarette lighter element only. The use of the cigarette lighter socket as a power source for any other accessory is not recommended.

SIC1233

SIC1243

The cigarette lighter element is an accessory. A genuine NISSAN cigarette lighter unit can be purchased from your local NISSAN dealer. The cigarette lighter operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. Push the lighter in all the way. When the lighter is heated, it will spring out. Return the lighter to its original position after use.

TRAYS

WARNING
The storage tray should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

2-22

Instruments and controls

CAUTION
Do not use for anything other than glasses. Do not leave glasses in the glasses case while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the glasses.

SIC1238

SIC1279A

GLASSES CASE
The glasses case can be opened by pushing the button.

CUP HOLDER

WARNING
The cup holder should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. For larger cups, remove the inside tray.

WARNING
The glasses case should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

Instruments and controls

2-23

SIC1235

SPA0388

CAUTION
Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger. Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.

GLOVE BOX
When locking or unlocking the glove box, use the master key. The glove box may be opened by pulling the handle.

WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

2-24

Instruments and controls

SIC1242A

CARGO NET (if so equipped)

The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargo area from moving around while your vehicle is driven. To install the cargo net, attach the hooks to the retainers.
SIC1236

CONSOLE BOX

To remove the cargo net, detach the hooks from the cargo net retainers.

WARNING
The center console box should not be

used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

Instruments and controls

2-25

WINDOWS

WARNING
Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Be sure to secure hooks into the retainers. The cargo restrained in the net must not exceed 30 lb (13.6 kg) or the net may not stay secured.

and become trapped in a window. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents. The power windows operate when the ignition key is in the ON position and for about 45 seconds, after the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. If the drivers door or the front passengers door is opened during this period of about 45 seconds, power to the windows is canceled.
SIC0929

POWER WINDOWS

To open or close the window, push down or pull up the switch and hold it. The main switch (driver side switches) will open or close all the windows.

WARNING
Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc. inside the vehicle before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls

2-26

Instruments and controls

The auto reverse function can be activated when the drivers window is closed by automatic operation when the ignition key is in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window occurs.

WARNING
SIC0627B SPA0980

The passenger side switch will open or close only the corresponding window. To open or close the window, hold the switch down or up.

Automatic operation
To fully open or close the drivers side window, completely press or lift the switch and release it; it need not be held. The window will automatically open or close all the way. To stop the window, just press the switch on the opposite side.

Locking passengers windows

When the lock button is pushed in, only the driver side window can be opened or closed. Push it in again to cancel.

There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window.

Auto reverse function (For drivers window)

If the control unit detects something caught in the drivers window as it moves up, the window will be immediately lowered.
Instruments and controls

2-27

SUNROOF (if so equipped)

To close the roof, press and hold the switch to side. the

WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the sunroof.

Automatic operation
To fully open or close the roof, completely press the switch to the or side and release it; it need not be held. The roof will automatically open or close all the way. To stop the roof, just press the switch toward the opposite. A light press on the switch will cause the roof to open or close until the switch is released.
SIC1293

Tilting the sunroof

To tilt up, first close the sunroof, then press and hold the side of the tilt switch. To tilt down the sunroof, press and hold the side.

AUTOMATIC SUNROOF
The sunroof will only operate when the ignition key is in the ON position. The automatic sunroof is operational for about 45 seconds, even if the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. If the drivers door or the front passengers door is opened during this period of about 45 seconds, power to the sunroof is canceled.

Auto reverse function (When closing the sunroof)

If the control unit detects something caught in the sunroof as it moves to the front, the sunroof will immediately open backward. The auto reverse function can be activated when the sunroof is closed by automatic operation when the ignition key is in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the sunroof occurs.

Sun shade
Open or close the sun shade by sliding it backward or forward. The shade will open automatically when the sunroof is opened. However, it must be closed manually.

Sliding the sunroof

To open the roof, press and hold the switch to the side.

2-28

Instruments and controls

CLOCK

INTERIOR LIGHT

WARNING
In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open sunroof. Always use seat belts and child restraints. Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the sunroof is closing.
SIC0910 IC1226

CAUTION
Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from the sunroof before opening. Do not place any heavy object on the sunroof or surrounding area.

The digital clock displays time when the ignition key is in ACC or ON. If the power supply is disconnected, the clock will not indicate the correct time. Readjust the time.

CEILING
The ceiling light has a three-position switch. When the switch is in the center k position, the light will illuminate when a door is opened. The light will stay on for about 30 seconds when: The doors are unlocked by the multi-remote controller, a key or the lock-unlock switch while all doors are closed. The drivers door is opened and then closed while the key is removed from the ignition switch.
Instruments and controls

ADJUSTING THE TIME

Push the H button to adjust the hour. Push the M button to adjust the minute.

If the sunroof does not close

Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the sunroof.

2-29

PERSONAL LIGHT
The key is removed from the ignition switch while all doors are closed. The ceiling light will turn off while the 30 second timer is activated, when: The drivers door is locked either with the multi-remote controller, a key, or the lockunlock switch. The ignition switch is turned ON. When the interior light switch or personal light switch is in the ON position, the interior, personal, and vanity mirror lights will automatically turn off 30 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position. To turn on the light again, insert the key into the ignition switch and move it to the ON position. After the above procedure, the interior, personal, and vanity mirror lights will automatically turn off 30 minutes after the latest operation of the following with the ignition switch in the ACC or OFF position: Opening or closing any door Locking or unlocking with the multi-remote controller, a key or the lock-unlock switch. Inserting or removing a key from the ignition switch These lights will turn on again when any of the above operations is performed after the lights have turned off automatically. (The lights will turn off 30 minutes after the latest operation of the above as well.)

CAUTION
Turn off the interior, personal and vanity mirror lights when you leave the vehicle. Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

IC1019-B

When the interior light or the personal light switch is in the ON position, the interior, personal, and vanity mirror lights will automatically turn off 30 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position. To turn on the light again, insert the key into the ignition switch and move it to the ON position. After the above procedure, the interior, personal, or vanity mirror lights will automatically turn off 30 minutes after the latest operation of the following with the ignition switch in the ACC or OFF position: Opening or closing any door

2-30

Instruments and controls

VANITY MIRROR LIGHT (if so equipped)

CAUTION
Turn off the interior, personal and vanity mirror lights when you leave the vehicle. Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

IC1163-B

SIC0186

Locking or unlocking with the multi-remote controller, a key or the lock-unlock switch. Inserting or removing a key from the ignition switch These lights will turn on again when any of the above operations is performed after the lights have turned off automatically. (The lights will turn off 30 minutes after the latest operation of the above as well.)

The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when the cover on the vanity mirror is opened. When the interior light or the personal light switch is in the ON position, the interior, personal, and vanity mirror lights will automatically turn off 30 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position. To turn on the light again, insert the key into the ignition switch and move it to the ON position.

Instruments and controls

2-31

TRUNK LIGHT
The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the light will go off.

INTEGRATED HomeLink UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

The Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device. The Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver power will automatically turn off 30 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned to the off position. Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver: Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) devices such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and security systems. Is powered by your vehicles battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehicles battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink will retain all programming. Once the Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures (i.e., new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes. For additional information, refer to Programming HomeLink later in this section.

WARNING
Do not use the Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models manufactured after April 1, 1982). A garage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death. During programming, your garage door or gate may open or close. Make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate that you are programming. Your vehicles engine should be turned off while programming the In-

2-32

Instruments and controls

tegrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver.

3. Using both hands, simultaneously push the hand-held transmitter button and the desired HomeLink button. Do not release the buttons until step 4 has been completed. NOTE: Some garage door openers may require the procedures noted under Canadian Programming. 4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapid flashing light indicates the Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver has been successfully programmed. To program the remaining two buttons, follow steps 2 through 4. If, after repeated attempts, you do not successfully program the Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver to learn the signal of the hand-held transmitter, refer to Rolling Code Programming later in this section.

SPA0609A

PROGRAMMING HomeLink
1. With the ignition key in the OFF position, press and hold the two outside buttons, and release when the indicator light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds). This procedure erases the factory set default codes and does not have to be followed when programming additional hand-held transmitters. 2. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter (from the device you wish to train) approximately 2 to 5 inches (50 to 127 mm) away from the surface of HomeLink keeping the indicator light in view.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 seconds. To program your hand-held
Instruments and controls

2-33

transmitter to HomeLink , continue to press and hold the HomeLink button (note steps 2 through 4 under Programming HomeLink ) while you press and re-press (cycle) your hand-held transmitter every 2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly (indicating successful programming). NOTE: If programming a garage door opener, etc., it is advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener components.

replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries. position the hand-held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink surface. press and hold both the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons without interruption. position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 inches (50 to 127 mm) away from the HomeLink surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink is not programmed within that time, try holding the transmitter in another position - keeping the indicator light in view at all times. If you continue to have programming difficulties, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department. The phone numbers are located in the Foreword of this Owners Manual.

indicator light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).

ROLLING CODE PROGRAMMING

Rolling code garage door openers (or other rolling code devices) which are code protected and manufactured after 1996, may be determined by the following. A. Reference the garage door opener Owners Manual for verification. B. The hand-held transmitter appears to program the Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver but does not activate the garage door. C. Press and hold the trained HomeLink button. If the garage door opener has the rolling code feature, the HomeLink indicator light will flash rapidly, then remains on after 2 seconds. To program the Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver to a garage door opener with the rolling code feature, follow these instructions after completing the Programming HomeLink (the aid of a second person may make the following procedures quicker and easier). 1. Locate the training button on the garage door opener motor unit. Exact location and

OPERATING THE INTEGRATED HomeLink UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver (once programmed) may now be used to activate the garage door, etc. To operate, simply press the appropriate programmed Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver button. The red indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.

PROGRAMMING PROBLEM-DIAGNOSIS
If the HomeLink does not quickly learn the hand-held transmitter information:

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION

Individual buttons cannot be cleared, however to clear all programming, press and hold the two outside buttons and release when the

2-34

Instruments and controls

color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand. If there is difficulty locating the training button, reference the garage door opener Owners Manual. 2. Press the training button on the garage door opener motor unit (which may activate a training light). NOTE: Following step 2, there are 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3. 3. Firmly press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Press and release the HomeLink button a second time to complete the training process. (Some garage door openers may require you to do this procedure a third time to complete the training.) The garage door opener should now recognize the Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver and activate when the HomeLink button is pressed. The remaining two buttons may now be programmed (if not yet programmed, follow steps 2 through 4 in the Programming HomeLink procedures earlier in this section).

versal Transceiver button, complete the following. 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do not release the button until step 4 has been completed. 2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after 20 seconds), position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 inches (50 to 127 mm) away from the HomeLink surface. 3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button. 4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly, release both buttons. The Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink buttons.

manufacturer or dealer of those devices for additional information. When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the Integrated Universal Transceiver with HomeLink your new transmitter information. FCC Notice: This device complies with FCC rules part 15. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference and (2) This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the device. DOC: ISTC 1763K1313 FCC I.D.: CB2V67690

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the codes of any non-rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink . Consult the Owners Manual of each device or call the
Instruments and controls

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HomeLink BUTTON

To reprogram an Integrated HomeLink Uni-

2-35

MEMO

2-36

Instruments and controls

MEMO

Instruments and controls

2-37

MEMO

2-38

Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys .......................................................................... 3-2 Doors ......................................................................... 3-3 Locking with key ................................................... 3-3 Locking with inside lock knob............................... 3-3 Locking with power door lock switch.................... 3-4 Child safety rear door lock ................................... 3-4 Multi-remote control system ...................................... 3-4 How to use multi-remote control system.............. 3-5 Battery replacement ............................................. 3-8 Hood .......................................................................... 3-9 Trunk lid .................................................................. 3-10 Opener operation ............................................... 3-10 Key operation ..................................................... 3-11

Interior trunk lid release ..................................... Fuel filler lid ............................................................. Opener operation ............................................... Fuel filler cap ...................................................... Steering wheel ........................................................ Tilt operation....................................................... Sun visors ............................................................... Mirrors ..................................................................... Inside mirror ....................................................... Automatic anti-dazzling inside mirror (if so equipped)............................................................ Outside mirrors ...................................................

3-11 3-12 3-12 3-12 3-13 3-13 3-14 3-14 3-14 3-14 3-15

KEYS
hicle. New keys must be registered to the Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle by your NISSAN dealer. At this time, you should bring all Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because the registration process will erase all memory of the Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System components.

SIC1239B

SPA1207B

You can only drive your vehicle using the master or valet keys which are registered to the Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in the key head. The master key can be used for all the locks. The valet key cannot be used for the trunk lid or glove box locks. To protect belongings when you leave a key with someone, give them the valet key only. Never leave these keys in the vehicle. Record the key number on the key number plate supplied with your keys and keep it in a

safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. NISSAN does not record any key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate. A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, this key can be duplicated by your NISSAN dealer. Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System KEY Master and Valet keys: The key number is necessary when you need extra Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. As many as 5 Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one ve-

3-2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

DOORS

WARNING
Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out intruders. Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.
SPA0084 SPA0085

LOCKING WITH KEY Power

The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors simultaneously. Turning the drivers door key to the front of the vehicle will lock all doors. Turning the drivers door key one time to the rear of the vehicle will unlock the corresponding door. From that position, returning the key to neutral (where the key can only be removed and inserted) and turning it to the rear again within 5 seconds will unlock all doors.

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

To individually lock the doors from the outside move the inside lock knob to the LOCK position, then close the door. To unlock, pull up the inside lock knob to the unlock position. When locking the door without a key, be sure not to leave the key inside the vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-3

MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors to release the trunk lid and activate the panic alarm by using the remote controller from outside the vehicle. Before locking the doors, make sure the key is not left in the vehicle. The remote controller can operate at a distance of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. (The effective distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.) As many as four remote controllers can be used with one vehicle. For information concerning the purchase and use of additional remote controllers, contact your NISSAN dealer. The multi-remote controller will not function when: the battery is dead, the distance between the vehicle and the remote controller is over 33 ft (10 m). The panic alarm will not activate when the key is in the ignition switch.

SPA0944

SPA0086

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

All door locks will be engaged when the power door lock switch is moved to the LOCK position with the drivers or front passengers door open. Then close the door and all doors will be locked. When the power door lock switch is moved to the LOCK position with front doors open while a key is in the ignition switch, all doors will lock once and then unlock automatically.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety locking helps prevent doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle. When the lever is in the lock position, the rear door can be opened only from the outside.

CAUTION
The following conditions or occurrences will damage the remote controller.

3-4

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

 Do not allow the remote controller to become wet. Do not drop the remote controller. Do not strike the remote controller sharply against another object. Do not place the remote controller for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140F (60C). If a multi-remote controller is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that controller. This will prevent the controller from unauthorized use to unlock the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, please contact an authorized NISSAN dealer.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the LOCK button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once. When the UNLOCK button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes once. If hazard indicator and horn mode is not necessary, you can switch to hazard indicator only mode by following the switching procedure. In hazard indicator only mode, when the LOCK button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes twice. When the UNLOCK button is pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the horn operates. (Switching procedure) Push the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the multi-remote controller simultaneously for more than 2 seconds to switch from one mode to the other. When pushing the buttons to set hazard indicator only mode, the hazard indicator flashes 3 times. When pushing the buttons to set hazard indicator and horn mode, the hazard indicator flashes once and the horn chirps once.

HOW TO USE MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM Setting hazard indicator and horn mode
This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn mode when you first receive the vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-5

SPA1260

Locking doors
1. Remove the ignition key.*1 2. Close all the doors.*2 3. Push the LOCK button on the multi-remote controller. 4. All the doors will lock. All of the doors will lock when the LOCK button on the multi-remote controller is pushed even though a door remains open and/or the ignition key is in the ON position.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once. When the LOCK button is pushed with all doors locked, the hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once as a reminder that the doors are already locked. *1: Doors lock with the remote controller while a key is in the ignition switch. However, the panic alarm will not activate when the key is in the ignition switch. *2: Doors lock with the remote controller while any door is open. However, hazard indicator and horn mode will not function.

3-6

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

in the center k position with the ignition key in any position except the ON position. 2. Push the UNLOCK button on the multiremote controller again within 5 seconds. All doors unlock The hazard indicator flashes once if all doors are completely closed. If the following operation is not carried out within 5 minutes after pressing the UNLOCK button, all doors will be locked automatically. When any door is not opened. When the ignition key is not set in the ON position. The interior light can be turned off without waiting for 30 seconds by turning the ignition switch to the ON position or by locking the doors with the multi-remote controller.
SPA0981

Releasing the trunk lid

1. Push the trunk button on the multi-remote controller for longer than 0.5 second with the key removed from the ignition key cylinder. 2. The trunk lid opens. The trunk lid will not open when the trunk lid
Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Unlocking doors
1. Push the UNLOCK button on the multiremote controller once. Only the drivers door unlocks

The hazard indicator flashes once if all doors are completely closed with the ignition key in any position except the ON position. The interior light turns on and the light timer activates for 30 seconds when the switch is

3-7

cancel lever is in the CANCEL position. It can be opened only with the key. See Trunk lid later in this section for cancel lever.

Recommended battery: Sanyo CR2025 or equivalent Make sure that the side faces the bottom case. 3. Close the lid securely. 4. Push the remote controller button two or three times to check its operation. See your NISSAN dealer if you need any assistance for replacement. If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement, perform step 4 above. Be careful not to touch a circuit board and a battery terminal. An improperly disposed battery can harm the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.
SPA1046

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the alarm to call attention as follows: 1. Push the PANIC button on the remote controller for longer than 0.5 seconds. 2. The theft warning alarm and headlights will stay on for 30 seconds. 3. The panic alarm stops when: It has run for 30 seconds, or The LOCK or the UNLOCK button is pressed, or The panic button or the trunk lid release button is pushed on the multi-remote controller for longer than 0.5 seconds.

The remote controller is water-resistant; however, if it does get wet, immediately wipe completely dry. When changing batteries, do not let dust or oil get on the controller. FCC Notice: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer compliance

BATTERY REPLACEMENT
Replace the battery as follows: 1. Open the lid using a suitable tool. 2. Replace the battery with a new one.

3-8

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

HOOD
could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

SPA0984 1 lo1. Pull the hood lock release handle k cated below the instrument panel; the hood will then spring up slightly. 2 at the front of the hood 2. Move the lever k with your fingertips and raise the hood.

WARNING
Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident. If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood.

3. When closing the hood, slowly close the hood and make sure it locks into place.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-9

TRUNK LID

WARNING
Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See Precautions when starting and driving in the 5. Starting and driving section for exhaust gas. Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked with the trunk closed when not in use, and prevent childrens access to car keys.

SPA0095

Cancel lever
When the lever is in the cancel position, the trunk lid cannot be opened with the trunk lid release button. It can be opened only with the master key.
SPA0985

OPENER OPERATION
The trunk lid release button is located under the drivers arm rest. To open the trunk lid, pull the release button. To close, push the trunk lid down securely.

3-10

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

vides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become locked inside the trunk. The handle is located on the back side of the trunk lid inside the trunk compartment. To open the trunk lid from the inside, pull the release handle towards you until the lock releases and push up on the trunk lid. The release lever is made of a material that glows in the dark after a brief exposure to ambient light.

SPA0992

SPA1208

KEY OPERATION
To open the trunk lid, turn the key clockwise. To close, lower and push the trunk lid down securely.

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

WARNING
Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the trunk closed, when not in use, and prevent childrens access to car keys. The interior trunk lid release mechanism proPre-driving checks and adjustments

3-11

FUEL FILLER LID

SPA0986

SPA0653

OPENER OPERATION
To open the fuel filler lid, push the opener switch. To lock, close the fuel filler lid securely.

FUEL FILLER CAP

The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type. Tighten the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are heard. Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder while refueling.

ously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling. Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the cap one-half turn, and wait for any hissing sound to stop to prevent fuel from spraying out and possible personal injury. Then remove the cap. Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank

WARNING
Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seri-

3-12

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

STEERING WHEEL
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle. lamp illuminates minate. If the because the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The lamp should turn off after a few driving trips. If the lamp does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see the Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) in the 2. Instruments and controls section.

SPA0234

TILT OPERATION
Pull the lock lever and while holding down, adjust the steering wheel up or down to the desired position. Push the lock lever back into place to lock the steering wheel in place.

CAUTION
If fuel is spilled on the car body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage. Tighten until the fuel filler cap clicks. Failure to tighten the fuel filler cap properly may cause the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to illu-

WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-13

SUN VISORS

MIRRORS

SPA0991

SPA0470

SPA1109

CAUTION
Store the main sun visor after storing the extension sun visor.

INSIDE MIRROR
The night position will reduce glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you at night.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-DAZZLING INSIDE MIRROR (if so equipped)

The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically changes reflection according to the intensity of the headlight of the following vehicle. When the inside mirror is in the AUTO position, excessive glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind you will be reduced. When the switch of the inside mirror is in the OFF position, the inside mirror will operate normally.

WARNING
Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

3-14

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. Turn the control knob to right or left to select the right or left outside mirror, then adjust.

SPA0987

MPA0008

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

Foldable outside mirrors

Push the outside mirror backward to fold it.

WARNING
Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects. The outside mirror will operate only when the

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-15

MEMO

3-16

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

4 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Ventilators ................................................................. 4-2 Heater and air conditioner (Manual) ......................... 4-3 Controls ................................................................ 4-3 Heater operation................................................... 4-4 Air conditioner operation ...................................... 4-5 Air flow charts....................................................... 4-6 Heater and air conditioner (Automatic) (if so equipped) .................................................................. 4-9 Automatic operation ............................................. 4-9 Manual operation................................................ 4-10 Ambient temperature switch (AMB) ................... 4-11 Operating tips ..................................................... 4-11 Servicing air conditioner.......................................... 4-11

Audio system........................................................... FM radio reception ............................................. AM radio reception ............................................. Audio operation precautions .............................. FM-AM radio with cassette player...................... FM-AM radio with cassette player and compact (CD) player ......................................................... CD care and cleaning ........................................ Steering switch for audio control (if so equipped)............................................................ Antenna .............................................................. Car phone or CB radio ...........................................

4-12 4-12 4-13 4-13 4-15 disc 4-19 4-24 4-24 4-25 4-25

VENTILATORS

SAA0373

SAA0374

Adjust the air flow direction of ventilators.

Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction of ventilators. : This symbol indicates that the vents are closed when the vent switch is moved to the left. : This symbol indicates that the vents are open when the vent switch is moved to the right.

4-2

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (Manual) CONTROLS Fan control dial

This dial turns the fan on and off, and controls fan speed.

Air flow control buttons

These buttons allow you to select the air flow outlets. Air flows from center and side ventilators.
SAA0468

Air flows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets. Air flows mainly from foot outlets. Air flows from defroster outlets and foot outlets. Air flows mainly from defroster outlets.

WARNING
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. Do not leave children, impaired adults, or pets alone in your vehicle. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or

animals. Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls should not be done while driving, so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

Temperature control/MAX A/C lever

This lever allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air. MAX A/C: When the temperature control/MAX A/C lever is moved to the left end, the air conditioner cooling will start automatically and the A/C
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-3

indicator and air recirculation lights will turn on.

HEATER OPERATION Heating

This mode is used to direct hot air from the floor outlets. Some air will also come from the defrost vents. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position for normal heating. 2. Push the button in.

Air recirculation button

OFF position: Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment. Use the off position for normal heater, or air conditioner operation. ON position (Indicator light ON): Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the air recirculation button to the ON position when driving on a dusty road or to avoid traffic fumes and for maximum cooling when using the air conditioner.

4. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position.

Defrosting or defogging
This mode is used to defrost/defog the windows. 1. Push the button in. 2. Turn on the fan control dial. 3. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position between the middle and the HOT position. To quickly remove ice or fog from the windows, turn on the fan control dial to 4 and the temperature control lever to the full HOT position. When the button is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on to defog the windshield, and the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position between the middle and the HOT position. For quick heating, move the air recirculation button to the ON position. Be sure to return the air recirculation button to the OFF position for normal heating.

Air conditioning button

Start the engine, move the fan control dial to the desired (1 to 4) position and push the air conditioning button to turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light will come on when the air conditioner is on. To stop the air conditioner, push the switch again to return it to the original position. The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Ventilation
This mode directs outside air from the side and center vents. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in.

3. Turn on the fan control dial.

4-4

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Bi-level heating
This mode directs outside air from the side and center vents and hot air from the floor outlets. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in. 3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Normally move the temperature control lever to the midpoint between HOT and COLD.

recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

recirculation button to the OFF position for normal cooling.

Dehumidified heating
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION

Start the engine, move the fan control dial to the desired (1 to 4) position and push in the air conditioning button to activate the air conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions will be added to the heater operation.

3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Push on the air conditioning button. The indicator light will come on. 5. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position.

Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs the windshield. 1. Push the button in. 2. Turn on the fan control dial. 3. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position between the middle and the HOT position.

Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in. 3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Push on the air conditioning button. The indicator light will come on. 5. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position. For quick cooling when the outside temperature is high, move the air recirculation button to the ON position. Be sure to return the air

Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows and dehumidify. 1. Push the button in. 2. Turn on the fan control dial. 3. Push on the air conditioning button. The indicator light will come on. 4. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position. When the button is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on to deHeater, air conditioner and audio systems

Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and air inlet in front of the windshield. This will improve heater operation. When the button is pushed, the air

4-5

fog the windshield, and the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

quick heating, cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation button should be in the OFF position for normal cooling, heating and defrosting.

Operating tips
Keep the windows and sun roof closed while the air conditioner is in operation. After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3 minutes with the windows open to vent hot air from the passenger compartment. Then, close the windows. This will allow the air conditioner to cool the interior more quickly. The air conditioning system should be operated for about 10 minutes at least once a month. This helps prevent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication. If the coolant temperature gauge exceeds the HOT position, turn the air conditioning off. For additional information, see If your vehicle overheats in the 6. In case of emergency section.

AIR FLOW CHARTS

The charts on the following pages show the button and lever positions for maximum and

4-6

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

SAA0469

SAA0470

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-7

SAA0471

SAA0472

4-8

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (Automatic) (if so equipped)

On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls should not be done while driving, so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION
SAA0463

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO)

This mode may be normally used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

WARNING
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is run-

ning. Do not leave children, impaired adults, or pets alone in your vehicle.

4-9

1. Push the AUTO button on. (AUTO will be displayed.) 2. Turn the temperature set dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature. Adjust the temperature set dial to about 75F (24C) for normal operation. The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.

Dehumidified defogging
1. Push the DEF button on. (The indicator light on the button will come on.) 2. Turn the temperature set dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature. To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows, push the manual fan control button and set to the maximum position . As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, push the AUTO button to return to the auto mode. When the DEF button is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 23F (5C) to defog the windshield, and the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

Push the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.

Air recirculation
Push the air recirculation button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator light on the switch will come on. Push it again to make the air inlet controlled automatically (FRESH, REC/FRE and RECIRCULATION). The indicator will go out. The air recirculation button will not be activated when the air conditioner is in DEF mode.

Heating (ECON)
The air conditioner does not activate. When you need to heat only, use this mode. 1. Push the ECON (Economy) button on. (ECON will be displayed.) 2. Turn the temperature set dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature. The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically. Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature. Otherwise the system may not work properly. Not recommended if windows fog up.

Air flow control

Pushing the manual air flow control button selects the air outlet to: : : : : Air flows from center and side ventilators. Air flows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets. Air flows mainly from foot outlets. Air flow from defroster and foot outlets.

MANUAL OPERATION Fan speed control

Push the fan control button control the fan speed. to manually

To turn system off

Push the OFF button.

4-10

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SWITCH (AMB)

Push the ambient temperature switch. The outside ambient temperature will be displayed for approximately 5 seconds. The ambient temperature sensor is located in front of the radiator. The sensor may be affected by road or engine heat, wind direction and other driving conditions. The display may differ from the actual ambient temperature or the temperature displayed on various signs or billboards. The air conditioning system in your NISSAN vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind. This refrigerant will not harm the earths ozone layer. However, special charging equipment and lubricant are required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioning system. See Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the 10. Technical and consumer information section for air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations.
HA1011

OPERATING TIPS
When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature warms up, the air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally.

The sensor on the instrument panel helps maintain a constant temperature; do not put anything on or around this sensor.

Your NISSAN dealer will be able to service your environmentally friendly air conditioning system.

WARNING
The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced technician with proper equipment.

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-11

AUDIO SYSTEM
Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON and press the power on switch to turn on the radio. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, the key should be turned to the ACC position. Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other external influences. Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences. Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may influence radio reception quality. change. Buildings, terrain, signal distance and interference from other vehicles can work against ideal reception. Described below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception.

Radio reception
Your radio system is equipped with state-ofthe-art electronic circuits to enhance radio reception. These circuits are designed to extend reception range, and to enhance the quality of that reception. However there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even when the finest equipment is used. These characteristics are completely normal in a given reception area, and do not indicate any malfunction in your radio system. Remember that a moving vehicle is not the ideal place to listen to a radio. Because of the movement, reception conditions will constantly

SAA0306

FM RADIO RECEPTION
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to 30 miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM having slightly more range than stereo FM. External influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is within 25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same characteristics as light. For example they will reflect off objects. Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away

4-12

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

from a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade and/or drift. Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to antenna position, usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter, static or flutter can be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the treble control counterclockwise to reduce treble response. Multipath reception: Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time. The signals may cancel each other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.

power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS Cassette player

To maintain good quality sound, NISSAN recommends using cassette tapes of 60 minutes or shorter in length. Cassette tapes should be removed from the player when not in use. Store cassettes in their protective cases and away from direct sunlight, heat, dust, moisture and magnetic sources. Direct sunlight can cause the cassette to become deformed. The use of deformed cassettes may cause the cassette to jam in the player. Do not use cassettes with labels which are peeling and loose. If used, the label could jam in the player. If a cassette has loose tape, insert a pencil through one of the cassette hubs and rewind the tape firmly around the hubs. Loose tape may cause tape jamming and wavering sound quality. Over a period of time, the playback

head, capstan and pinch roller may collect a tape coating residue as the tape is played. This residue accumulation can cause weak or wavering sound, and should be removed periodically with a head cleaning tape. If the residue is not removed periodically, the player may need to be disassembled for cleaning.

AM RADIO RECEPTION
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can bend around objects and skip along the ground. In addition, the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of these characteristics. AM signals are also subject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver. Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings. It can also occur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist. Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-13

disc DIGITAL AUDIO logo on the disc or packaging. During cold weather or rainy days, the player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely. The player may skip while driving on rough roads. The CD player sometimes cannot function when the compartment temperature is extremely high. Decrease the temperature before use. Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight. CDs that are of poor quality, dirty, scratched, covered with fingerprints, or that have pin holes may not work properly.
SAA0480

CDs that are warped, scratched, or have abnormal edges

Do not use the following CDs as they may cause the CD player to malfunction. 8 cm (3.1 in) discs with an adapter Recordable compact discs (CD-R) Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) CDs that are not round CDs with a paper label

Compact Disc (CD) player

Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm) round discs that have the COMPACT

4-14

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

FM-AM RADIO WITH CASSETTE PLAYER Audio main operation

Power/Volume control: Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, then push the Power/Volume control knob. The mode (radio or cassette) which was playing immediately before the system was turned off resumes playing. When no cassette is loaded, the radio comes on. Pushing the Power/ Volume control knob again turns the system off. Turn the Power/Volume control knob to adjust the volume.

SAA0263

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-15

FM-AM radio operation

FM-AM band select: Push the FM-AM band select button to listen to the radio and tune in the desired station. Pushing the FM-AM band select button will change the band FM1, FM2 or AM. The FM stereo indicator, ST illuminates during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception. TUNE (Tuning):
SAA0235

Adjusting tone quality and speaker balance: To adjust BASSTREBFADERBAL (Bass, Treble, Fader, Balance), press the AUDIO button until the desired mode (BAS, TRE, FAD or BAL) appears in the display. Press the or button to adjust BASS and TREB to the desired level. Use the or button to adjust FADER or BAL modes. FADER adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and BAL adjusts the sound level between the right and left speakers. After 10 seconds, the radio or cassette tape

display reappears. Once the sound quality is set to the desired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedly until the radio or cassette tape display appears.

WARNING
The radio should not be tuned while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Push either manual tuning button . SEEK/SCAN tuning: Push the SEEK/SCAN tuning button or for less than 1.5 seconds. SEEK tuning begins from high to low or low to high frequencies and stops at the next broadcasting staor

Radio/Cassette tape priority mode

In this mode, the radio station illuminates in the display during radio operation. During cassette tape operation, TAPE illuminates in the display.

4-16

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

tion. Pushing the button again continues the SEEK function. Once the highest broadcasting station is reached, the radio continues in the SEEK mode at the lowest broadcast station. Push the SEEK/SCAN tuning button or for more than 1.5 seconds. SCAN illuminates in the display window. SCAN tuning begins from high to low or low to high frequencies and stops at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again during this 5 second period stops SCAN tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.

Station memory operations: Six stations can be set for the AM band. 12 stations can be set for the FM band (six for FM1, six for FM2). 1. Push the FM-AM band select button to select AM, FM1, or FM2. The selected band illuminates in the display. 2. Tune to the desired station. 3. Push the desired select than 1.5 seconds. For illustrations ch2 is to be radio mutes when the pushed. button for more example, in the memorized. The select button is

4. When the sound resumes, memorizing is complete. 5. Other station select buttons can be set in the same manner. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the radio fuse opens, the radio memory is cancelled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

Cassette tape player operation

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, then carefully insert a cassette tape into the tape door.
SAA0264

The cassette tape automatically pulls into the player. The word TAPE and moving digital
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-17

squares illuminate on the right side of the display window.

or REW button again, or the PLAY/STOP button. APS (automatic program search) FF, APS REW: Push either the APS FF or APS REW button while the cassette tape is playing. The tape runs quickly, stops, then plays the next selection. Either the FF or REW symbol flashes in the display while searching for the selection. This system searches at the blank intervals between selections. If there is a blank interval within one selection or there is no interval between selections, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location. PROG (program): Push the PROG button. The moving digital squares illuminate on either the right or left side of the display window to indicate the side of program play. Dolby NR (Noise Reduction): Push the Dolby NR button for Dolby NR encoded tapes to reduce high frequency tape noise. The indicator light comes on. Dolby NR is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. DOLBY NR and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Metal or chrome tape usage: The cassette player is automatically set to high performance play when playing a metal or chrome cassette tape. Ejecting the cassette tape: Push the EJECT button. The cassette tape automatically comes out.

CAUTION
Do not force the cassette tape into the tape door. This could cause player damage. The cassette tape automatically changes directions to play the other side when the first side is complete. At this time, the moving digital squares illuminate on the left side of the display window. PLAY/STOP: Push the PLAY/STOP button while the cassette tape is playing to stop the tape. Push the button again to play the tape. FF (fast forward), REW (rewind): Push either the FF or REW button for the desired direction. The FF or REW symbol illuminates in the display. To stop the FF or REW function, press the FF

4-18

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

FM-AM RADIO WITH CASSETTE PLAYER AND COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER Audio main operation
Head unit The radio has an FM diversity reception system, which employs two antennas. One is a rod type antenna; the other is an antenna printed on the window. This system automatically switches to the antenna which is receiving less noise. The tape deck employs a permalloy head which allows for improved reproduction of high frequency ranges. Noise is also greatly reduced by the combined use of the Dolby NR (Noise Reduction) system. The auto loudness circuit enhances the low frequency range automatically in both radio reception and tape and CD playback. ONOFF/Volume control: Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then push the ONOFF/VOL control knob while the system is off to call up the mode (radio, tape or CD) which was playing immediately before the system was turned off. When no CD or tape is loaded, the radio will come on. While the system is on, pushing the ONOFF/VOL conHeater, air conditioner and audio systems

SAA0380

4-19

When FM/AM band select button is pushed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON, the radio will come on at the station last played. The last station played will also come on when the power knob is turned to ON. If a compact disc or tape is playing when the FM/AM band select button is turned to ON, the compact disc or tape will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on.
SAA0381

trol knob turns the system off. To turn the radio off, press the ONOFF/VOL control knob. Turn the ONOFF/VOL control knob to adjust the volume. Adjusting tone quality and speaker balance: To adjust BASS, TRE (Treble), BAL (Balance) and FAD (Fader), press the AUDIO button until the desired mode BAS, TRE, FAD or BAL appears in the display. Press the or button to adjust Bass (BAS) and Treble (TRE) to the desired level. Use the or

button also to adjust Fader (FAD) or Balance (BAL) modes. FAD adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and BAL adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers. After 10 seconds, the radio or cassette tape display reappears. Once the sound quality is set to the desired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedly until the radio or cassette tape display appears.

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception. TUNE (Tuning):

WARNING
The radio should not be tuned while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Use these buttons for manual tuning. To move quickly through the channels, hold either of the

FM-AM radio operation

FM/AM band select: Pushing the FM/AM band select button will change the band FM1, FM2 or AM.

4-20

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

TUNE buttons down for more than 0.5 seconds. SEEK/SCAN tuning: SEEK tuning: Push the SEEK/SCAN tuning button or for less than 1.5 seconds. SEEK tuning begins from high to low or low to high frequencies and stops at the next broadcasting station. SCAN tuning: Push the SEEK/SCAN tuning button or for more than 1.5 seconds. SCAN tuning begins from high to low or low to high frequencies and stops at each broadcasting station for 10 seconds. Pushing the button again during this 10 seconds period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station. If the SEEK/SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 10 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station.

Station memory operations: Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (six for FM1, six for FM2). Six stations can be set for the AM band. 1. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK/SCAN or TUNE button. 2. Push the desired station select button for more than 1.5 seconds. (For example, in the diagram ch2 is to be memorized. The radio mutes when the select button is pushed.) 3. The indicator ch2 will then come on and the sound will resume. Memorizing is now complete. 4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse blows, the radio memory will be cancelled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

Cassette tape player operation

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then lightly insert the cassette tape into the tape door. The cassette tape will be automatically pulled into the player.
SAA0382

The radio or CD will turn off (if it is on) and the cassette tape will begin to play.
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-21

CAUTION
Do not force the cassette tape into the tape door. This could cause player damage. If the system is turned off by pushing the ONOFF/VOL control knob with the cassette tape still in the player, the tape will resume playing when the system is turned back on. PLAY: When the TAPE button is pushed with the system turned off and a tape loaded, the system will come on and the tape will play. When the TAPE button is pushed with either the radio or compact disc turned on and the tape loaded, the compact disc or the radio will automatically be turned off and the tape will play. FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind): Push the (fast forward) button to fast forward the tape. To rewind the tape, push the (rewind) button. Either the FF or REW symbol illuminates on the right side of the display window. To stop the FF or REW func-

(fast forward) or tion, press the wind) again, or the TAPE button.

(re-

APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS REW: When the (APS FF) button is pushed while the tape is being played, the next program will start to play from the beginning. Push the (APS FF) button several times to skip through programs. The tape will advance the number of times the button is pushed (up to nine programs). When the (APS REW) button is pushed once, the program being played starts over from the beginning. Push the (APS REW) button several times to skip back several selections. The tape will go back the number of times the button is pushed. Either the FF or REW symbol flashes on the right side of the display window while searching for the selection. This system searches for the blank intervals between selections. If there is a blank interval within one program or there is no interval between programs, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location. PROG (Program): Push the PROG button to change the tape side while the tape is being played.

The cassette tape will automatically change directions to play the other side when the first side is completed. Dolby NR (Noise Reduction): Push the Dolby NR button for Dolby NR encoded tapes to reduce high frequency tape noise. The indicator will come on. Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby NR and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Metal or chrome tape usage: The cassette player will be automatically set to high performance play when playing a metal or chrome cassette tape. TAPE EJECT: When this button is pushed with the tape loaded, the tape will be ejected. When the tape is ejected while it is being played, the system will be turned off.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up. The compact disc will

4-22

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

be guided automatically into the slot and start playing. After loading the disc, the number of tracks on the disc and the play time will appear on the display. If the radio or tape is already operating, it will automatically turn off and the compact disc will play.

playing, the tape or radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play. FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind): When the (fast forward) or (rewind) button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the compact disc will return to normal play speed. APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS REW: When the (APS FF) button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the program next to the present one will start to play from its beginning. Push several times to skip through programs. The compact disc will advance the number of times the button is pushed. (When the last program on the compact disc is skipped through, the first program will be played.) When the (APS REW) button is pushed, the program being played returns to its beginning. Push several times to skip back through programs. The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pushed.

PROG (Program): When the PROG button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the play pattern will change as follows: no mark: All the programs will be played repeatedly in sequence. 1: Only one program (the one being played when the PROG button is pushed) will be repeated. RANDOM: Programs will be played at random, not following the sequence on the compact disc. The same program may be repeated twice. When the compact disc is ejected, the play pattern will automatically change to no mark. CD EJECT: When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be ejected. When this button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will come out and the system will turn off. If the compact disc comes out and is not removed, it will be pulled back into the slot
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

CAUTION
Do not force the compact disc into the slot. This could damage the player. If the system has been turned off while the compact disc was playing, pushing the ONOFF/VOL control knob will start the compact disc. 8 cm diameter compact discs can also be used without an adapter. PLAY: When the CD/CHG button is pushed with the system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play. When the CD/CHG button is pushed with the compact disc loaded but the tape or the radio

4-23

to protect it. (without 8 cm diameter compact discs) CD IN indicator: CD IN indicator appears on the display when the CD is loaded with the system on.

SAA0451

SAA0464

CD CARE AND CLEANING

Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch the surface of the disc. Do not bend the disc. Always place the discs in the storage case when they are not being used. To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion. Do not use a conventional record cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use. A new disc may be rough on its inner and outer edges. Remove the rough edges using the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

STEERING SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)

The audio system can be operated using the controls on the steering wheel.

MODE select switch

Push the mode select switch to change the mode in the sequence of AM, FM1, FM2, CD and CD autochanger (if so equipped) and Tape.

Volume control switches

Push the upper or lower side switch to increase or decrease the volume.

4-24

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO Tuning

Memory change (radio): Push the tuning switch or for less than 1.5 seconds to change the radio frequency. Seek tuning (radio): Push the tuning switch or for more than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previous radio station. APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS REW (tape/CD or CD changer): Push the tuning switch or for less 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the present program or skip to the next program. Push several times to skip back or skip through programs. This system searches for the blank intervals between selections. If there is a blank interval within one program or there is no interval between programs, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location. FF REW (tape or CD changer): Push the tuning switch or for more than 1.5 seconds to rewind or fast forward the tape or to change the playing disc up or down. To stop the FF or REW function, press the
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

or onds again.

button for more than 1.5 sec-

ANTENNA Window antenna

The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear window.

If equipped with a genuine NISSAN cellular phone, your NISSAN features a nondirectional microphone in the steering column cover, so it is not necessary to look at or speak directly into the microphone when calling. To do so could detract from the driving operation and cause an accident. See the car phone manual for operation. Some models are pre-wired to accept the genuine NISSAN cellular phone. In addition, the same model has the phone antenna built into the rear glass window. When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following cautions, otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the Engine control system and other electronic parts.

CAUTION
Do not place metalized film near the rear window glass or attach any metal parts to it. This may cause poor reception or noise. When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window antenna. Lightly wipe along the antenna with a dampened soft cloth.

WARNING
A cellular telephone should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular telephones while driving.

4-25

 If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode (if so equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. If a conversation in a moving vehicle requires you to take notes, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so.

Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body. For details, consult an authorized NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION
Keep the antenna as far as possible away from the Engine Control Module (ECM). Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the Multiport Fuel Injection harness. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness. Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer.

4-26

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving...................... 5-2 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide).......................... 5-2 Three way catalyst ............................................... 5-3 Avoiding collision and rollover.............................. 5-3 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ....................... 5-4 Ignition switch............................................................ 5-4 Automatic transmission ........................................ 5-4 Manual transmission ............................................ 5-5 Key positions ........................................................ 5-6 Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System .................... 5-6 Before starting the engine......................................... 5-7 Starting the engine .................................................... 5-7 Driving the vehicle..................................................... 5-8 Automatic transmission ........................................ 5-8 Manual transmission .......................................... 5-11 Parking brake .......................................................... 5-13 Cruise control .......................................................... 5-13 Precautions on cruise control............................. 5-14

Cruise control operations ................................... Break-in schedule ................................................... Increasing fuel economy ......................................... Parking/parking on hills ........................................... Power steering ........................................................ Brake system .......................................................... Braking precautions............................................ Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ........................... Traction control system (if so equipped)................. Cold weather driving ............................................... Freeing a frozen door lock ................................. Anti-freeze .......................................................... Battery ................................................................ Draining of coolant water ................................... Tire equipment ................................................... Special winter equipment ................................... Driving on snow or ice ....................................... Engine block heater (if so equipped) .................

5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 5-18 5-18 5-19 5-20 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-22 5-22

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING
Do not leave children, impaired adults, or pets alone in your vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked with the trunk closed when not in use, and prevent childrens access to car keys.

tain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death. If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately. Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage. Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time. Keep the trunk lid closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with the trunk lid open, follow these precautions: 1. Open all the windows. 2. Set the air recirculation switch OFF and the fan control at 4 (high) to circulate the air. If electrical wiring or other cable con-

nections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the trunk lid or the body, follow the manufacturers recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle. If a special body or other equipment is added for recreational or other usage, follow the manufacturers recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle. (Some recreational vehicle appliances such as stoves, refrigerator, heaters, etc. may also generate carbon monoxide.) The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever: a. The vehicle is raised for service. b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment. c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system.

EXHAUST GAS (Carbon monoxide)

WARNING
Do not breathe exhaust gases; they con-

5-2

Starting and driving

d. You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

CAUTION
Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline seriously reduce the three way catalysts ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants. Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected promptly by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three way catalyst. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER

WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident. Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with any vehicle, a loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects, or cause the vehicle to rollover, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt. See Seat Belts in the 1. Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems section. And also instruct your passengers to do so.
Starting and driving

THREE WAY CATALYST

The three way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the converter are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING
The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components. Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

5-3

IGNITION SWITCH DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING

your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgment. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in the accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury. NISSAN is committed to safe driving. But, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol related accidents. Although the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol. Remember, drinking and driving dont mix! And thats true for drugs too (over the counter, prescription, and illegal drugs). Dont drive if

SSD0083

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
On automatic transmission models, the ignition lock is designed so that the key cannot be turned to LOCK and removed until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park) position. When removing the key from the ignition, make sure the selector lever is in the P (Park) position. If the selector lever is not returned to P (Park) position, the key cannot be moved toward LOCK. When the key cannot be turned toward the

5-4

Starting and driving

LOCK position, proceed as follows to remove the key: 1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park) position. 2. Turn the ignition key slightly in the ON direction. 3. Turn the key toward the LOCK position. 4. Remove the key. If the key is removed from the ignition switch, the selector lever cannot be moved from P (Park) position. The selector lever can be moved if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed. There is an OFF position in between LOCK and ACC, although it does not show on the lock cylinder. When the ignition is in OFF the steering wheel is not locked. In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/6 of a turn counterclockwise from the straight up position. To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to the LOCK position. Remove the key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steering wheel slightly right and left.

WARNING
Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK position while driving. The steering wheel will lock. This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

SSD0082C

MANUAL TRANSMISSION
The switch includes an anti-theft steering lock device. LOCK Normal parking position (0) The ignition key can only be removed when the switch is in this position. On manual transmission models, to turn the ignition key to LOCK from ACC or ON, first turn the key to OFF and turn the key to LOCK while pushing the key in. In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/6 of a turn clockwise from the straight up position.
Starting and driving

5-5

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to the LOCK position. Remove the key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steering wheel slightly right and left.

KEY POSITIONS
The switch includes an anti-theft steering lock device. LOCK (Normal parking position) (0) The ignition key can only be removed when the switch is in this position. OFF (1) The engine can be turned off without locking the steering wheel. ACC (Accessories) (2) This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running. ON (Normal operating position) (3) This position turns on the ignition system and the electrical accessories. START (4) This position activates the starter motor, starting the engine.

the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key. If the engine fails to start using the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key, it may be due to interference caused by another Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key, an automated toll road device or automated payment device on the key ring. Restart the engine using the following procedures: 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 10 seconds. 3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again. 4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key. If this procedure allows the engine to start, NISSAN recommends placing the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.

WARNING
Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK position while driving. The steering wheel will lock. This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM

The Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of

5-6

Starting and driving

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear. Maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically, e.g., each time you check engine oil. Check that all windows and lights are clean. Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation. Lock all doors. Position seat and adjust head restraints. Adjust inside and outside mirrors. Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise. Check the operation of warning lights when key is turned to the ON (3) position.

STARTING THE ENGINE

1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Automatic transmission: Move the selector lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). (P preferred.) The selector lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) position and into any of the other gear positions if the key is removed from the switch. The starter is designed not to operate if the selector lever is in one of the driving positions. Manual transmission: Move the shift lever to N (Neutral) position, and depress the clutch pedal to the floor while cranking the engine. The starter is designed not to operate unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed. 3. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to START. Release the key when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure. If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold or hot weather, depress the accelerator pedal and hold it to help start the engine.
Starting and driving

In the summer, when restarting the engine within 30 minutes after it has been stopped, keep the accelerator pedal fully depressed while starting.

CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, turn the key off and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged. 4. Warm-up Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather.

5-7

DRIVING THE VEHICLE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

The automatic transmission in your vehicle is electronically controlled by a transmission control module to produce maximum power and smooth operation. Shown on the following pages are the recommended operating procedures for this transmission. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment. shift into a driving gear. 2. Release the parking brake and foot brake, then gradually start the vehicle in motion.

CAUTION
When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brakes should be used for this purpose.

WARNING
Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P or N to R, D, 2 or 1. Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident. Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up. On slippery roads, do not downshift. This may cause a loss of control. Never shift to P or R while vehicle is moving. This could cause an accident.

Starting the vehicle

After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal and push the selector lever button before shifting the selector lever to the R, N, D, 2 or 1 position. Be sure the vehicle is fully stopped before attempting to shift the selector lever. This automatic transmission is designed so that the foot brake pedal must be depressed before shifting from P (Park) position to any drive position while the ignition switch is ON. The selector lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) position and into any of the other gear positions if the key is removed from the switch. 1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and

5-8

Starting and driving

the parking brake first, then shift the lever into the P (Park) position. R (Reverse): Use this position to back up. Always be sure the vehicle is completely stopped. With the brake pedal depressed, push in the select lever button and move the lever to the R (Reverse) position N (Neutral): Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to N (Neutral) position and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving. D (Drive): Use this position for all normal forward driving. 2 (Second gear): Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades. Do not exceed 69 MPH (110 km/h) in the 2 (Second gear) position. 1 (Low gear): Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades.

Do not exceed 37 MPH (60 km/h) in the 1 (Low gear) position.

SD1003M

Shifting
Push the button to shift into P, R or from D to 2. All other positions can be selected without pushing the button. P (Park): Use this selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Always be sure the vehicle is at a complete stop. For maximum safety, depress the brake pedal, then push in the select lever button and move the lever to the P (Park) position. Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply

Starting and driving

5-9

To move the select lever, push the shift lock release button and select lever button. The select lever can be moved to N (Neutral). To push the shift lock release button using a screwdriver or other tool, follow the procedure as illustrated. If the lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) have your NISSAN dealer check the automatic transmission system as soon as possible.

WARNING
If the selector lever cannot be moved from the P position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.
SSD0110

Overdrive switch
Each time your vehicle is started, the transmission is automatically reset to overdrive ON. ON: For normal driving the overdrive switch is engaged. The transmission is upshifted into overdrive as the vehicle speed increases. The overdrive does not engage until the engine has warmed up. OFF: Changed for driving up and down long slopes where engine braking would be advantageous, push the overdrive switch. The O/D OFF light illuminates.

SSD0151

Accelerator downshift In D position

For rapid passing or hill climbing, fully depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into second gear or first gear, depending on the vehicle speed.

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low, the select lever may not move from the P position even with the brake pedal depressed and the select lever button pushed.

5-10

Starting and driving

When cruising at a low speed or climbing a gentle slope, you may feel uncomfortable shift shocks as the transmission shifts between third and overdrive repeatedly. In this case, press the overdrive switch. The O/D OFF indicator light comes on at this time. When driving conditions change, press the overdrive switch again. The O/D OFF indicator light goes out. Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time with the O/D OFF light illuminated. This reduces the fuel economy.

OFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then turn the key back to the ON position. The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have your NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair if necessary.

SSD0002

Fail-safe
When the fail-safe operation occurs, the next time the key is turned to the ON position, the O/D OFF light will blink for approximately 8 seconds after coming on for 2 seconds. While the vehicle can be driven under these circumstances please note that the automatic transmission will be locked in third gear. If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be activated. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, turn the ignition key

MANUAL TRANSMISSION Shifting

To change gears, or when up shifting or down shifting depress the clutch pedal fully, shift into the appropriate gear then release the clutch slowly and smoothly. On the five-speed transmission model, you cannot shift directly from fifth gear into the R (Reverse) position. First shift into the N (Neutral) position, then into the R (Reverse) position. If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R (Reverse) or 1 (Low gear), shift into N (NeuStarting and driving

5-11

tral), then release the clutch pedal and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (Low gear) again.

Suggested up-shift speeds

Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance. Actual up-shift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather and individual driving habits. For normal acceleration in low altitude areas [less than 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]: Gear change 1st to 2nd 2nd to 3rd 3rd to 4th 4th to 5th ACCEL shift point MPH (km/h) 13 (21) 23 (37) 33 (53) 39 (63) CRUISE shift point MPH (km/h) 13 (21) 16 (26) 27 (43) 36 (58)

Suggested maximum speed in each gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate. Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the highest gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits, and drive according to the road conditions, which will ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control. Gear 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th MPH (km/h) 30 (48) 55 (88) 80 (128)

WARNING
Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear. This may cause a loss of control or engine damage.

CAUTION
Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This may cause clutch damage. Stop your vehicle completely before shifting into R (Reverse). When the vehicle is stopped for a period of time, for example at a stop light, shift to N (Neutral) and release the clutch pedal with the foot brake applied.

For quick acceleration when the engine is cold or in high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]: Gear change 1st to 2nd 2nd to 3rd 3rd to 4th 4th to 5th MPH 15 25 40 45 (km/h) (24) (40) (64) (72)

5-12

Starting and driving

PARKING BRAKE
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out.

CRUISE CONTROL

WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions: it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed. in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed. on winding or hilly roads. on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.). in very windy areas. Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

WARNING
Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident. Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle.
SSD0018

To apply: pull the lever up. To release: 1. Firmly apply foot brake. 2. Automatic transmission models: Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position. Manual transmission models: Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position. 3. While pulling up on the lever slightly, push the button and lower completely.

Do not use the gear shift in place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged. Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle. They could release the parking brake and cause an accident.

CAUTION
On manual transmission models, do not shift into N (Neutral) without depressing the clutch pedal when the cruise control is set. Should this occur, depress the clutch pedal and turn the main switch off immediately. Failure to do so may cause
Starting and driving

5-13

engine damage.

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL

If the cruise control system malfunctions, it cancels automatically. The SET indicator light on the meter panel then blinks to warn the driver. If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the cruise control main switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. The SET indicator light may blink when the cruise control main switch is turned on while pushing the RES/ACCEL, COAST/ SET, or CANCEL switch (located on the steering wheel). To properly set the cruise control system, perform the preceding steps in the order indicated.
SSD0193

To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed. The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the cruise control. To cancel the preset speed, follow either of these three methods: a) Push the cancel switch; The SET indicator light will go out. b) Tap the brake pedal; The SET indicator light will go out. c) Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISE indicator and SET indicator lights will go out. If you depress the brake pedal while pushing the RES/ACCEL set switch and reset at the cruising speed, turn the main switch off once and then turn it on again. The cruise control will automatically be cancelled if the vehicle slows down below approximately 8 MPH (13 km/h). Depress the clutch pedal (manual transmission), or move the selector lever to N (Neutral) position (automatic transmission). The SET indicator light will go out.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. To turn on the cruise control, push the main switch on. The CRUISE indicator light on the meter panel will come on. To set at cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. (The SET indicator light will come on.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.

5-14

Starting and driving

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: a) Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the COAST/SET switch. b) Push and hold the RES/ACCEL set switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch. c) Push, then quickly release the RES/ACCEL set switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: a) Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. b) Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed. c) Push, then quickly release the COAST/ SET switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES/ACCEL set switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when
Starting and driving

the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

During the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km), follow these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow. Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear. Avoid quick starts. Avoid hard braking as much as possible. Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km).

5-15

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

Keep your engine tuned up. Follow the recommended periodic maintenance schedule. Keep the tires inflated at the correct pressure. Low pressure will increase tire wear and waste fuel. Keep the front wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment will cause not only tire wear but also lower fuel economy. Air conditioner operation lowers fuel economy. Use the air conditioner only when necessary.
SD1001M

Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position. Drive at moderate speeds on the highway. Driving at high speed will lower fuel economy. Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a safe distance behind other vehicles. Use a proper gear range which suits road conditions. On level roads, shift into high gear as soon as possible. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

When cruising at highway speeds, it is more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to reduce drag.

5-16

Starting and driving

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

WARNING
Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P (Park) for automatic transmission models or in an appropriate gear for manual transmission models. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident.
MSD0002

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

WARNING
Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire. Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

2. Automatic transmission models: Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position. Manual transmission models: Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) position. When parking on an uphill grade, place the shift lever in the 1 (Low gear) position.

Make sure the automatic transmission selector lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the button at the end of the lever. 3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into the street when parked on a sloping drive way, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
1 HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: k

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.
Starting and driving

5-17

POWER STEERING
2 HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: k

BRAKE SYSTEM BRAKING PRECAUTIONS

The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking at two wheels. Vacuum assisted brake The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and the stopping distance will be longer. Wet brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking. To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat-up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly. Using the brakes Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This overheats the brakes, increases wear on the brake linings and pads, and reduces gas mileage.

Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb. HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO 3 CURB: k Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves. 4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove the key.

The power assisted steering is designed to use a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering. If the engine stops or drive belt breaks, you will still have control of the vehicle. However, much greater steering effort is needed, especially in sharp turns or at low speeds.

WARNING
If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be much harder to operate.

5-18

Starting and driving

To help save the brakes and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control.

system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.

conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving.

Self-test feature
The anti-lock brake system consists of electronic sensors, electric pumps, and hydraulic solenoids controlled by a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of any malfunction. If the computer senses any malfunction, it switches the antilock brake system OFF and turns on the ABS warning light in the dashboard. The brake system will then behave normally, but without anti-lock assistance. If the light comes on during the self check, or while you are driving, you should take your vehicle to your NISSAN dealer for repair at your earliest convenience.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

WARNING
While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident. If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder.

WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances.

Normal operation
The anti-lock brake system will not operate at speeds below 3 to 6 MPH (5 to 10 km/h) to completely stop the vehicle. (The speeds will vary according to road conditions.) When the anti-lock system senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator (under the hood) rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure (like pumping the brakes very quickly). While the actuator is working, you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from the actuator under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the anti-lock system is working properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

The anti-lock brake system controls the brakes at each wheel so the wheels will not lock when braking abruptly or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing wheel lockup, the

WARNING
The anti-lock brake system is a sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent acStarting and driving

5-19

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (if so equipped)

cidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces, but remember that the stopping distance on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces, even with the anti-lock system. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the responsibility for safety of self and others rests in the hands of the driver. Tire type and condition of tires may also affect braking effectiveness. When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels. When installing a spare tire, make sure it is the proper size and type as specified on the tire placard. See Vehicle identification in the 10. Technical and consumer information section for tire placard location. On slippery surfaces such as wet asphalt roads, vehicle wheels may spin when the vehicle is accelerated. This wheel spin reduces acceleration, or causes the vehicle to swerve, thus decreasing vehicle stability. The traction control system helps limit wheel spin on slippery roads. The system operates only if it senses one or both of the front wheels spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the system reduces engine power and may also upshift the transmission to help limit wheel spin. Indicator light If a malfunction occurs in the traction control system, the SLIP and indicator lights come on in the meter panel. As long as these warning lights are on, the traction control function is canceled. The vehicle will behaves like a model without the traction control system. on, this could cause the three way catalyst to overheat and be damaged. To avoid this, the TCS will automatically turn off. Shifting the gear selector to D will reactivate the TCS.

WARNING
This system is designed to prevent the wheels from spinning. However, it does not prevent vehicle slipping or spinning due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Be especially careful when driving on slippery surfaces and always drive safely.

CAUTION
The traction control system is most effective when the transmission gear selector is in the D position. If you drive in gear 1 or 2 with the TCS

5-20

Starting and driving

COLD WEATHER DRIVING FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer or glycerin to it through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole. the 8. Do-it-yourself section for changing engine coolant. installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturers suggestions. Use only SAE Class S chains. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected. Never install tire chains on a T-type spare tire. Do not use tire chains on dry roads.

TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires are of a tread design to provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels. Please consult your NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability information. 2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some provinces and states prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires. 3. Tire chains may be used if desired. Make sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturers suggestions. Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before

ANTI-FREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32F (0C), check anti-freeze (ethylene glycol base) to assure proper winter protection. For additional information, see Engine Cooling System in the 8. Do-it-yourself section.

BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. For additional information, see Battery in the 8. Do-ityourself section.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter: a scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades. a sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support.
Starting and driving

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-freeze, drain the cooling system by opening the drain valves located under the radiator and on the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. See Engine cooling system in

5-21

 a shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts. extra window washer fluid to refill the reservoir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING
Wet ice (32F, 0C and freezing rain), very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have a lot less traction or grip under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded. Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction. Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement. Allow greater following distances on slippery roads.

Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while actually on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads. Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle.

pronged (cheater) adapters. You can be injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so equipped)

An engine block heater to assist extreme cold temperature starting is available through your NISSAN dealer.

WARNING
Do not use your heater with an ungrounded electrical system or two-

5-22

Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Flat tire ...................................................................... Changing a flat tire ............................................... Jump starting............................................................. Push starting .............................................................

6-2 6-2 6-7 6-9

If your vehicle overheats ......................................... Towing your vehicle ................................................ Towing recommended by NISSAN .................... Vehicle recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle) ........

6-10 6-11 6-11 6-12

FLAT TIRE CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below. verse), or the automatic transmission into P (Park). Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous. Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road away from traffic. 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. 3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Shift the manual transmission into R (Reverse) position (automatic transmission in P (Park) position). 4. Turn off the engine. 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance. 6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

MCE0001

Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up.

WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and could cause personal injury.

WARNING
Make sure that the parking brake is securely applied and the manual transmission is shifted into R (Re-

6-2

In case of emergency

SCE0289

Removing wheel cover

CAUTION
Do not use your hands to pry off wheel caps. Doing so could result in personal injury.

SCE0299

SCE0288

Getting the spare tire and tools

Remove jacking tools and spare tire from the storage area located inside the trunk as illustrated.

In case of emergency

6-3

SCE0286

CE1089

Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire

Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instructions. 1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point as illustrated above so that top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack up point. Align the jack head between the two notches in the front or the rear as shown. Also fit the groove of the jack head between the notches as shown.

6-4

In case of emergency

 Use the correct jack up points; never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support. Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary. Never use blocks on or under the jack. Do not start or run engine while vehicle is on the jack, as it may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slid differential carriers. Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack.

CE1092

The jack should be used on level firm ground. 2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground. 3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands as shown above. Remove the wheel nuts, and then remove the tire.

WARNING
Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed only for lifting your vehicle during a tire change.

In case of emergency

6-5

WARNING
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident. Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose. As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench. Wheel nut tightening torque: 80 ft-lb (108 Nm) Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure. COLD pressure: After vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire placard affixed to the center console lid.

WARNING
Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).

SCE0039

Installing the spare tire

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub. 2. Carefully put the wheel on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight. 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly until they are tight. 4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence as illustrated.

6-6

In case of emergency

JUMP STARTING
spare tire are designed for emergency use. See Tires and wheels in the 8. Do-it-yourself section. To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be followed.

WARNING
If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle. Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery. Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, cloth or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulphuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water. Keep battery out of the reach of children.

SCE0040

Stowing the damaged tire and tools

Securely store the spare tire and jacking equipment in the vehicle.

WARNING
Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly secured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop. The T-type spare tire and small size

In case of emergency

6-7

 The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle. Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting. Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause serious injury. Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it.
SCE0154A

WARNING
Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury. 1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the two vehicles to bring their batteries into close proximity to each other. Do not allow the two vehicles to touch. 2. Apply parking brake. Move the shift lever to

the N (Neutral) position (On automatic transmission models, move the selector lever to the P (Park) position). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (light, heater, air conditioner, etc.). 3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so equipped). Cover the battery with an old cloth to reduce explosion hazard. 4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as illustrated.

6-8

In case of emergency

PUSH STARTING

CAUTION
Always connect positive (+) to positive (+) and negative () to body ground (for example, strut mounting bolt, etc. not to the battery). Make sure that cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that clamps do not contact any other metal. 5. Start the engine of the other vehicle and let it run for a few minutes. 6. Keep the engine speed of the other vehicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start your engine in the normal manner.

7. After starting your engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable. 8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid.

CAUTION
Automatic transmission models cannot be push started. This may cause transmission damage. Three way catalyst equipped models should not be started by pushing since the three way catalyst may be damaged. Never try to start the vehicle by towing it; when the engine starts, the forward surge could cause the vehicle to collide with the tow vehicle.

CAUTION
Do not keep starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, turn the key off and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

In case of emergency

6-9

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

WARNING
Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause a vehicle fire. To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the radiator cap while the engine is still hot. When the radiator cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury. Do not open the hood if steam is coming out. If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take the following steps: 1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position (automatic transmission to the P (Park) position). Do not stop the engine. 2. Turn off the air conditioner switch. Open all the windows, move the heater or air condi-

tioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed. 3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. Wait until no steam or coolant can be seen before proceeding. 4. Open the engine hood.

contact with, or to get caught in the cooling fan, or drive belt. The engine cooling fan can start at any time when the coolant temperature is high. 6. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the reservoir tank with the engine running. Add coolant to the reservoir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at the nearest NISSAN dealer.

WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting burned. 5. Visually check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine.

WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into

6-10

In case of emergency

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in Canada) and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from an authorized NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions. and powertrain are in working condition. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used. Always attach safety chains before towing.

WARNING
Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed. Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck.
SCE0202

CAUTION
When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.
In case of emergency

6-11

ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or backward) as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised, always use towing dollies under the front wheels. When towing automatic transmission models with the front wheels on towing dollies, or when towing manual transmission models with the front wheels on the ground: Turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by turning the ignition key to the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanism. Move the gearshift lever to the N (Neutral) position. When towing automatic or manual

transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground (if you do not use towing dollies): Always release the parking brake.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (Freeing a stuck vehicle)

Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle. Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or cooling systems. Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull on the vehicle at an angle. Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery. Stand clear of an stuck vehicle.

SCE0199

CAUTION
Never tow automatic transmission models with the front wheels on the

6-12

In case of emergency

WARNING
Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.

In case of emergency

6-13

MEMO

6-14

In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ....................................................... Washing................................................................ Waxing.................................................................. Removing spots.................................................... Underbody ............................................................ Glass .................................................................... Aluminum alloy wheels......................................... Chrome parts........................................................ Cleaning interior ........................................................

7-2 7-2 7-2 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-4 7-4 7-4

Floor mats ............................................................ Seat belts ............................................................. Corrosion protection .................................................. Most common factors contributing to vehicle corrosion............................................................... Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion............................................................... To protect your vehicle from corrosion ................

7-4 7-5 7-5 7-5 7-5 7-6

CLEANING EXTERIOR
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area. When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover. Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover. Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so that the paint surface is not scratched or damaged. Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of clean water. Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be regularly cleaned. Make sure that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt. Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle.

WASHING
Thoroughly rinse surface dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and plenty of clean water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap such as Nissan Car Wash, or a general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

MAI0001

In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it. In the following cases, please wash your vehicle as soon as possible to protect the paint surface. After a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain After driving on coastal roads When contaminants such as soot, bird droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface When dust or mud builds up on the surface

CAUTION
Do not use strong household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents. Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted.

WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. After waxing, polishing is recommended to remove built-up residue and to avoid a weathered appearance. If you wish to wax your vehicle, only use a wax

7-2

Appearance and care

specified for use over clear coats, such as Nissan Liquid or Spray Wax. Your Nissan dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product. Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax. Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish. If the surface does not polish easily, use a road tar remover and wax again. Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

causing underbody and suspension corrosion. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

SAI0014A

GLASS
When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier to clean if the high-mounted stop light is removed first. Be careful when removing the high-mounted stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the high-mounted stop light wires. The high-mounted stop light must be properly reinstalled before driving your vehicle. Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner
Appearance and care

REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at your NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store.

UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, the underbody must be cleaned regularly. This will prevent dirt and salt from building up and

7-3

CLEANING INTERIOR
and a soft cloth will easily remove this film. Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry soft cloth. Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturers recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material. Use a cloth dampened only with water, to clean the meter and gauge lens.

FLOOR MATS
The use of Genuine Nissan floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. No matter what mats are used, be sure they are fitted for your vehicle and are properly positioned in the footwell to prevent interference with pedal operation. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.

CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the window, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defogger elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash regularly, especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. Salt could discolor the wheel if not removed.

CAUTION
Never use gasoline, thinner, or any similar material. The leather seats should be regularly coated with a leather wax like saddle soap. Never use car wax. Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer. Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens cover.

CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

7-4

Appearance and care

CORROSION PROTECTION SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely before using them.

MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION:

The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas. Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents.

WARNING
Do not allow wet belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or chemical solvents since these may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.
SAI0012

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION: Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle, and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.

Floor mat positioning aid (Driver side only)

This model includes a front floor mat bracket to act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your vehicle model. The drivers side floor mat has a grommet hole incorporated in it. Simply position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket through the floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in the floorpan contour. Periodically check to make certain that the mats are properly positioned.

Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used.
Appearance and care

7-5

Temperature
A temperature increase will accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

CAUTION
NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom. Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them. Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders. In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically. For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, consult your local NISSAN dealer.

Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will also accelerate the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION:

Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean. Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible. Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation. Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible.

7-6

Appearance and care

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions .......................................... 8-2 Engine compartment check locations ....................... 8-4 Engine cooling system .............................................. 8-5 Checking engine coolant level ............................. 8-5 Changing engine coolant ..................................... 8-6 Engine oil .................................................................. 8-7 Checking engine oil level ..................................... 8-7 Changing engine oil ............................................. 8-8 Changing engine oil filter ..................................... 8-9 Automatic transmission fluid ................................... 8-10 Temperature conditions for checking ................. 8-10 Power steering fluid ................................................ 8-11 Brake and clutch fluid ............................................. 8-12 Window washer fluid ............................................... 8-12 Battery ..................................................................... 8-13 Drive belts ............................................................... 8-15 Spark plugs ............................................................. 8-15 Replacing spark plugs ........................................ 8-16 Air cleaner ............................................................... 8-16 Windshield wiper blades ......................................... 8-17

Cleaning ............................................................. Replacement ...................................................... Parking brake and brake pedal............................... Checking parking brake ..................................... Checking brake pedal ........................................ Brake booster ..................................................... Clutch pedal ............................................................ Fuses....................................................................... Engine compartment .......................................... Passenger compartment .................................... Multi-remote controller battery replacement ........... Lights....................................................................... Headlights........................................................... Exterior and interior lights .................................. Tires and wheels ..................................................... Tire pressure ...................................................... Types of tires...................................................... Tire chains .......................................................... Changing tires and wheels.................................

8-17 8-17 8-18 8-18 8-18 8-19 8-19 8-20 8-20 8-21 8-22 8-23 8-24 8-25 8-30 8-30 8-30 8-31 8-32

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed. nect the negative battery cable before working near the fan. If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts. It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle. Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle. If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape. Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands. Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks away from fuel and the battery. On gasoline engine models with the Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System, the fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off.

WARNING
Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. For a manual transmission, move the shift lever to N (Neutral) position. For an automatic transmission, move the selector lever to P (Park) position. Be sure the ignition key is OFF or LOCK when performing any parts replacement or repairs. Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition key is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always discon-

CAUTION
Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn off the engine and wait until it cools down. Never connect or disconnect either the battery or any transistorized component connector while the ignition key is on. Never leave the engine or the automatic transmission related component harness connector disconnected while the ignition key is on. Avoid direct contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improperly disposed

8-2

Do-it-yourself

engine oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle fluids can hurt the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid. This 8. Do-it-yourself section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform. A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also available. See Owners Manual/Service Manual order information in the 10. Technical and consurner information section. You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect your warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, have it done by your NISSAN dealer.

Do-it-yourself

8-3

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

SDI1183

8-4

Do-it-yourself

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, year-round, antifreeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors, therefore additional cooling system additives are not necessary.

WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. See If your vehicle overheats in the 6. In case of emergency section. The radiator is equipped with a pressure cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap.
SDI0960

CAUTION
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only a genuine NISSAN antifreeze coolant or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized water/distilled water. The use of other types of coolant solutions may damage your engine cooling system.
Demineralized water/ distilled water 50%

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below MIN, add coolant up to the MAX level. If the reservoir tank is empty, check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir tank up to the MAX level. If the engine cooling system frequently requires coolant, have it checked by your NISSAN dealer.
Do-it-yourself

Outside temperature down to C 35 F 30

Antifreeze

50%

8-5

 Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheating.

4. Close the radiator drain plug and the drain plug on the engine block securely. 5. See Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the 10. Technical and consumer information section for cooling system capacity. Fill the radiator slowly with the proper mixture of coolant and water. Fill the reservoir tank up to the MAX level. Then install the radiator cap.

WARNING
To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. Keep coolant out of reach of children and pets.
SDI0114

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

Major cooling system repairs should be performed by your NISSAN dealer. The service procedures can be found in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual.

1. Open the radiator cap and drain plug. Waste coolant must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations. 2. Open the drain plug on the engine block. 3. Flush the cooling system by running fresh water through the radiator.

8-6

Do-it-yourself

ENGINE OIL

SDI0973

SDI0115

6. Start the engine, and warm it up until the radiator fan operates. Then race the engine two or three times under no load. Watch the coolant temperature gauge for signs of overheating. 7. Stop the engine. After it completely cools down, refill the radiator up to the filler opening. Fill the reservoir tank up to the MAX level. 8. Check the radiator drain plug and the drain plug on the engine block for any sign of leakage.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply parking brake. 2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature. 3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way.

Do-it-yourself

8-7

CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating with insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.

SDI0534

SDI0974

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be between the H and L marks. If the oil level is below the L mark, remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening. Do not overfill. 6. Recheck oil level with dipstick. It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature. 3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. 4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug. 5. Remove the oil filler cap.

8-8

Do-it-yourself

6. Remove the drain plug with a wrench and completely drain the oil. If oil filter is to be changed, remove and replace it at this time. See later in Engine oil for changing engine oil filter.

refill capacity. The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine. 9. Start the engine. Check for leakage around the drain plug. Correct as required. 10.Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary. 11.Dispose of waste oil in the proper manner.
SDI0975

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot. Waste oil must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations. 7. Clean and re-install the drain plug and new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Drain plug tightening torque: 22 to 29 ft-lb (29 to 39 Nm) Do not use excessive force. 8. Refill engine with recommended oil and install the cap securely. See Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the 10. Technical and consumer information section for drain and

WARNING
Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. Keep used engine oil out of reach of children.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Turn the engine off. 3. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench. (Depending on the engine model, a special cap type wrench may be required. See your NISSAN dealer if in doubt.) Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

Do-it-yourself

8-9

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil may be hot. 4. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with a clean rag. Be sure to remove any old rubber gasket remaining on the mounting surface of the engine. 5. Coat the rubber gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil. 6. Screw in the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten additionally more than 2/3 turn. Oil filter tightening torque: 10.85 to 15.19 ft-lb (14.7 to 20.6 Nm) 7. Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter. Correct as required. 8. Turn the engine off and wait several minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if necessary.
SSD0161

TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS FOR CHECKING

The fluid level should be checked using the HOT range on the dipstick after the following conditions have been met: a) the engine should be warmed up to operating temperature. b) the vehicle should be driven at least 5 minutes. c) the automatic transmission fluid should be warmed to between 122 and 176F (50 and 80C). The fluid can be checked at fluid temperatures of 86 to 122F (30 to 50C) using the COLD range on the dipstick after the engine is warmed up and before driving. However, the fluid should be re-checked using the HOT range. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the parking brake. 2. Start the engine and then move the selector lever through each gear range. Move the selector lever to P (Park) position after you have moved it through all ranges.

WARNING
When engine is running, keep hands, jewelry and clothing away from any moving parts such as cooling fan and drive belt. Automatic transmission fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children.

8-10

Do-it-yourself

POWER STEERING FLUID

CAUTION
Do not overfill. Use only NISSAN Matic D (Continental US and Alaska) or Canada Nissan automatic transmission fluid. DexronTMIII/MerconTM or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental US and Alaska contact a NISSAN dealer for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of DexronTM III/MerconTM automatic transmission fluid. NOTE: If the vehicle has been driven for a long time at high speeds, or in city traffic in hot weather, or if it is being used to pull a trailer, the accurate fluid level cannot be read. You should wait until the fluid has cooled down (about 30 minutes).

SDI1232

SDI1076

3. Check the fluid level with the engine idling. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean with lint-free paper. 5. Reinsert the dipstick into the charging pipe as far as it will go. 6. Remove the dipstick and note the reading. If the level is at the low side of either range, add fluid to the charging pipe.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir tank. The fluid level should be checked using the HOT range at fluid temperatures of 122 to 176F (50 to 80C) or using the COLD range at fluid temperatures of 32 to 86F (0 to 30C).

CAUTION
Do not overfill. Use Genuine Nissan PSFII or equivalent.

Do-it-yourself

8-11

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID

tem and affect the vehicles stopping ability.

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, wash with water.

SDI0119

SDI0961

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is below the MIN line or the brake warning light comes on, add DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be thoroughly checked by your NISSAN dealer.

Type A: Add fluid when the low washer fluid warning light comes on. Add a washer solvent to the water for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer anti-freeze. Follow the manufacturers instructions for the mixture ratio.

WARNING
Use only new fluid. Old, inferior, or contaminated fluid may damage the brake and clutch systems. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake sys-

8-12

Do-it-yourself

BATTERY

WARNING
Anti-freeze is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children.

Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Any corrosion should be washed off with a solution of baking soda and water. Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened. If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the () negative battery terminal cable to prevent discharge.

CAUTION
Do not substitute engine anti-freeze coolant for window washer solution. This may result in damage to the paint.

WARNING
Do not expose the battery to flames or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas generated by battery action is explosive. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the batDo-it-yourself

SDI0962

Type B: To check the fluid level, use your finger to plug the center hole of the cap (as shown above), then remove it from the tank. If there is no fluid in the tube, add fluid. Add a washer solvent to the water for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer anti-freeze. Follow the manufacturers instructions for the mixture ratio.

8-13

tery which can generate heat, reduce battery life, and in some cases lead to an explosion. When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.
DI0137M

If jump starting is necessary, see Jump starting the 6. In case of emergency section. If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. Contact your NISSAN dealer.

Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX and MIN lines. If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level to the indicator in each filler opening. Do not overfill. 1. Remove the cell plugs. 2. Add distilled water up to the MAX level. 3. Tighten cell plugs.

8-14

Do-it-yourself

DRIVE BELTS
tion and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual.

SPARK PLUGS

WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.

CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs.

SDI0141

WARNING
Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCK position. The engine could rotate unexpectedly. 1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying, oil adhesion or looseness. If the belt is in poor condition or loose, have it replaced or adjusted by your NISSAN dealer. 2. Have the belts checked regularly for condiDo-it-yourself

8-15

AIR CLEANER
not only cleans the air, it stops flame if the engine backfires. If it is not there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner removed and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed. Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury.
SDI0145 SDI0963

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace the platinumtipped spark plugs as frequently as the conventional type spark plugs since they will last much longer. Follow the maintenance schedule but, do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping. If replacement is required, see your NISSAN dealer for servicing. Always replace with recommended platinum-tipped spark plugs.

The filter element should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance intervals. See Periodic maintenance schedules in the 9. Maintenance section for maintenance intervals. When replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp cloth.

WARNING
Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner

8-16

Do-it-yourself

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield. Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water. Clean the blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blade with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.

DI1018M

REPLACEMENT
1. Pull the wiper arm. 2. Push the lock pin, then remove the wiper blade. 3. Insert the new wiper blade to the wiper arm until a click sounds.

CAUTION
After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position. Otherwise it may be damaged when the engine hood is opened. Make sure the wiper blade contacts the glass, otherwise the arm may be damaged from wind pressure.

Do-it-yourself

8-17

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE PEDAL

SDI0125

DI1020MH

CHECKING PARKING BRAKE

From the released position, pull the parking brake lever up slowly and firmly. If the number of clicks is out of the range listed above, see your NISSAN dealer.
SDI0146

CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL

With the engine running, check the distance between the upper surface of the pedal and the metal floor. If it is out of the range shown above, see your NISSAN dealer.

Self-adjusting brakes
If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle. This may cause clogging or improper windshield washer operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin. Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes. The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied.

8-18

Do-it-yourself

CLUTCH PEDAL

WARNING
See your NISSAN dealer and have it checked if the brake pedal height does not return to normal.

BRAKE BOOSTER
Check the brake booster function as follows: 1. With the engine off, press and release the brake pedal several times. When brake pedal movement (distance of travel) remains the same from one pedal application to the next, continue on to the next step. 2. While depressing the brake pedal, start the engine. The pedal height should drop a little. 3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the engine. Keeping the pedal depressed for about 30 seconds, the pedal height should not change. 4. Run the engine for one minute without depressing the brake pedal, then turn it off. Depress the brake pedal several times. The pedal travel distance will decrease gradually with each depression as the vacuum is released from the booster. If the brakes do not operate properly, see your NISSAN dealer.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched scraping or screeching sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard. Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system. Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For additional information, see Periodic maintenance schedules in the 9. Maintenance section for maintenance intervals.

DI1021MC

Press the pedal by hand and be sure the free travel is within the limits shown above. If free travel is too little or too much, see your NISSAN dealer.

Do-it-yourself

8-19

FUSES

CAUTION
Never use a fuse of higher amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire.

system checked and repaired by your NISSAN dealer.

SDI0964

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition key and headlight switch are OFF. 2. Open the engine hood. 3. Remove the fusible link cover. 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. 5. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse. 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

8-20

Do-it-yourself

SDI0965

SDI0966

Fusible links
If any electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace only with genuine NISSAN parts.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition key and the headlight switch are OFF. 2. Pull to open the fuse box lid. 3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. 4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse. 5. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by your NISSAN dealer.
Do-it-yourself

8-21

MULTI-REMOTE CONTROLLER BATTERY REPLACEMENT

Make sure that the side faces the bottom case. 3. Close the lid securely. 4. Push the remote controller button two or three times to check its operation. See your NISSAN dealer if you need any assistance for replacement. If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement, perform step 4 above. Be careful not to touch a circuit board and a battery terminal. An improperly disposed battery can harm the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal. The remote controller is water-resistant; however, if it does get wet, immediately wipe completely dry.
SPA1046

Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

When changing batteries, do not let dust or oil get on the controller. FCC Notice: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of

Replace the battery as follows: 1. Open the lid using a suitable tool. 2. Replace the battery with a new one. Recommended battery: Sanyo CR2025 or equivalent

8-22

Do-it-yourself

LIGHTS

SDI0976

Do-it-yourself

8-23

HEADLIGHTS
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. A bulb can be replaced from inside the engine compartment without removing the headlight assembly.

Replacing the headlight bulb

1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the rear end of the bulb. 3. Pull off the rubber cap. 4. Push and turn the retaining pin to loosen it. 5. Remove the headlight bulb. Do not shake or rotate the bulb when removing it. 6. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of removal. Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact your NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION
High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped. When handling the bulb, do not touch the glass envelope.

SDI0967

8-24

Do-it-yourself

CAUTION
Do not touch the bulb. Use the same number and wattage as originally installed: Wattage 60/55 Bulb no. HB2 Do not leave the bulb out of the headlight reflector for a long period of time as dust, moisture, and smoke may enter the headlight body and affect the performance of the headlight.

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Front turn signal/Clearance light Front side marker light Front fog light (if so equipped) Rear combination light Turn signal Stop/Tail Back-up Rear side marker light License plate light High-mounted stop light (if so equipped) Interior light Front personal light Step light Trunk light Vanity mirror light (if so equipped) 21 21/5 13 3.8 5 21 10 10 2.7 3.4 1.4 161 158 T20 PY21W T20 T16 T10 Wattage (W) 27/8 3.8 See an authorized NISSAN dealer for assistance. Bulb No. S25 T10

Do-it-yourself

8-25

SDI0968

MDI0006

Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or cover.
SDI0969

8-26

Do-it-yourself

SDI0970

Do-it-yourself

8-27

SDI0972

8-28

Do-it-yourself

SDI0333A

SDI0971

SDI0756

Do-it-yourself

8-29

TIRES AND WHEELS

less than 1 mile (1.6 km). COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire placard affixed to the glove box lid. with high speed capability tires. Driving faster than 85 MPH (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury.

WARNING
Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident. The vehicle capacity weight is indicated on the tire placard. Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components. Before taking a long trip, or whenever you have loaded your vehicle heavily, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressure is at the specified level. Do not drive your vehicle over 85 MPH (140 km/h) unless it is equipped

TYPES OF TIRES

CAUTION
When changing or replacing tires, be sure all four tires are of the same type (i.e., summer, all season or snow) and construction. Your NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability. Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

DI1033M

If you have a flat tire, see Flat tire in the 6. In case of emergency section.

TIRE PRESSURE Maximum inflation pressure

Do not exceed the maximum inflation pressures shown on the side wall of the tire.

Tire inflation pressure

Periodically check the tire pressure (including spare). Incorrect tire pressure may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling. Tire pressure should be checked when tires are COLD. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven

All season tires

NISSAN specifies all season tires on some models to provide good performance for use

8-30

Do-it-yourself

all year around, including snowy and icy road conditions. All season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than all season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of snow or all season tires on all four wheels. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some provinces and states prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

Never install tire chains on a T-type spare tire. Do not use the chains on dry roads.

Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance in snow and ice will be substantially reduced. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire sidewall. If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of snow or all season tires on all four wheels.

TIRE CHAINS
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturers suggestions. Use only SAE class S chains. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or undercarriage. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected.
Do-it-yourself

Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Generally, snow tires will have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

8-31

WARNING
After rotating the tires, adjust the tire pressure. Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). Do not include the T-type spare tire or any other small size spare tire in the tire rotation.
DI0048-B MDI0004

CHANGING TIRES AND WHEELS Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends that tires be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). Wheel nut tightening torque: 80 ft-lb (108 Nm) See Flat tire in the 6. In case of emergency section for tire replacing procedures.

Tire wear and damage

WARNING
Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging, or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging, or deep cuts are found, the tire should be replaced. The original tires have a built-in tread wear indicator. When the wear indicator is visible, the tire should be replaced.

8-32

Do-it-yourself

Improper service for a T-type spare tire may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the T-type spare tire, contact your NISSAN dealer.

accidents and could result in serious personal injury. If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels which have the same offset dimension. Wheels of a different offset could cause early tire wear, possibly degraded vehicle handling characteristics and/or interference with the brake discs. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad wear. Do not install a deformed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning. The use of retread tire is not recommended.

Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the front wheels on the vehicle could lead to transmission damage.

Care of wheels
Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance. Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed. Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels. Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead. NISSAN recommends that the road wheels be waxed to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter.

Replacing tires and wheels

When replacing a tire, use the same size, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. See Specifications in the 10. Technical and consumer information section for recommended types and sizes of tires and wheels.

WARNING
The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to

Spare tire (T-type spare tire)

US only. Canadian vehicles are equipped with a full size spare tire. Observe the following precautions if the T-type spare tire must be used, otherwise your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident.
Do-it-yourself

Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required.

8-33

CAUTION
The T-type spare tire should be used only for emergency. It should be replaced by the standard tire at the first opportunity. Drive carefully while the T-type spare tire is installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving. Periodically check the T-type spare tire inflation pressure, and always keep it at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar). Always keep the pressure of the full size spare tire (if so equipped) at the recommended pressure for standard tires, as indicated on the tire placard. For tire placard location, see Tire placard in the 10. Technical and consumer information. Do not drive your vehicle at speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h). Do not use tire chains on a T-type

spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly on the T-type spare tire and may cause damage to the vehicle. When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, the T-type spare tire should be used on the rear wheel and the original tire used on the front wheels (drive wheels). Use tire chains only on the front two original tires. Tire tread of the T-type spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the original tire. Replace the T-type spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear. Because the T-type spare tire is smaller than the original tire, ground clearance is reduced. To avoid damage to the vehicle do not drive over obstacles. Also do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught. Do not use the T-type spare tire on other vehicles. Do not use more than one T-type

spare tire at the same time. Do not tow a trailer while the T-type spare tire is installed.

8-34

Do-it-yourself

MEMO

Do-it-yourself

8-35

MEMO

8-36

Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance

General maintenance ................................................ 9-3 Explanation of maintenance items ....................... 9-3 Periodic maintenance schedules .............................. 9-5

Schedule 1 ........................................................... 9-5 Schedule 2 ........................................................... 9-5 Explanation of maintenance items ..................... 9-10

Your new NISSAN has been designed to have minimum maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save you both time and money. However, some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your NISSANs good mechanical condition, as well as its emission and engine performance. It is the owners responsibility to make sure that the specified maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed. As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper maintenance care. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain. General maintenance: General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal dayto-day operation of the vehicle. They are essential if your vehicle is to continue to operate properly. It is your responsibility to perform these procedures regularly as prescribed. These checks or inspections can be done by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, your NISSAN dealer. Periodic maintenance: The maintenance items listed in this part are required to be serviced at regular intervals.

However, under severe driving conditions, additional or more frequent maintenance will be required. Where to go for service: If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and tuned by an authorized NISSAN dealer. NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership training programs. They are completely qualified to work on NISSANs vehicles before they work on your vehicle, rather than after they have worked on it. You can be confident that your NISSAN dealers service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle in a reliable and economic way.

9-2

Maintenance

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smell, be sure to check for the cause or have your NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you should notify your NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required. When performing any checks or maintenance work, see Maintenance precautions in the 8. Do-it-yourself section. loose nuts. Tighten if necessary. Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle pulls to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed. Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. Doors and engine hood: Check that all doors and the engine hood operate smoothly as well as the trunk lid or back hatch. Also make sure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released. When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently. performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc. Lights*: Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim. Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that all warning lights and chimes are operating properly. Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak. Windshield defroster: Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in good quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner. Steering wheel: Check for changes in the steering conditions, such as excessive free play, hard steering or strange noises. Seats: Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks (if equipped) hold securely in all latched positions. Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt
Maintenance

EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following items with * is found in the 8. Do-ityourself section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified. Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge periodically when at a service station, including the spare, and adjust to the specified pressure if necessary. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear. Wheel nuts*: When checking the tires, make sure no nuts are missing, and check for any

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when

9-3

system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage. Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mats away from the pedal. Clutch pedal*: Make sure the pedal operates smoothly and check that it has the proper free play. Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied. Brake pedal and booster*: Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure it has the proper distance under it when depressed fully. Check the brake booster function. Be sure to keep floor mats away from the pedal. Parking brake*: Check that the lever has the proper travel and make sure that the vehicle is held securely on a fairly steep hill when only the parking brake is applied. Automatic transaxle P (Park) position mechanism: On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

Under the hood and the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel). Windshield washer fluid*: Check that there is adequate fluid in the tank. Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level when the engine is cold. Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, deterioration or loose connections. Brake and clutch fluid levels*: Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid levels are between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir. Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily. Engine oil level*: Check the level on the dipstick after parking the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the engine. Power steering fluid level* and lines: Check the level in the reservoir tank with the engine

off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. Automatic transaxle fluid level*: Check the level on the dipstick after putting the selector lever in P (Park) position with the engine idling. Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately locate the trouble and correct it. (See Precautions when starting and driving in the 5. Starting and driving section for exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).) Underbody: The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances, otherwise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, being careful to clean those areas where mud and dirt may accumulate. For additional information, see Cleaning exterior in the 7. Appearance and care section. Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If

9-4

Maintenance

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately. To ensure smooth, trouble-free, safe and economical driving, NISSAN provides two different maintenance schedules that may be used, depending upon the conditions in which you usually drive. These schedules contain both distance and time intervals, up to 60,000 miles (96,000 km)/48 months. For most people, the odometer reading will indicate when service is needed. However, if you drive very little, your vehicle should be serviced at the regular time intervals shown in the schedule. After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, continue the periodic maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals. driving in dusty conditions. driving on rough, muddy, or salt spread roads. towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier.

SCHEDULE 2
Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 2 if none of the driving conditions shown in Schedule 1 apply to your driving habits.

SCHEDULE 1
Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 1 if your driving habits frequently include one or more of the following driving conditions: repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km). repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing. operating in hot weather in stop-and-go rush hour traffic. extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use.
Maintenance

9-5

Schedule 1
Abbreviations: R = Replace I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 3.8 (6) 3 7.5 (12) 6 11.3 (18) 9 15 (24) 12 18.8 (30) 15 22.5 (36) 18 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 26.3 30 33.8 37.5 41.3 (42) (48) (54) (60) (66) 21 24 27 30 33

]: At the mileage intervals only

45 (72) 36 48.8 (78) 39 52.5 (84) 42 56.3 (90) 45 60 (96) 48 I* [R] I* I* R* R R

Emission control system maintenance

Drive belts See NOTE (1) Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) EVAP vapor lines Fuel lines Fuel filter See NOTE (3) Engine coolant See NOTE (4) Engine oil Engine oil filter (Use part No. 15208-31U01 or equivalent) Spark plugs (Use PLATINUM-TIPPED type) Intake & exhaust valve clearSee NOTE (5) ance* [R] I* I*

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R

R R R R R R R R R R R R Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km)

R R

R R

R R

R R

NOTE: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) 5

After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required. Maintenance free item After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance. Maintenance items and intervals with * are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

9-6

Maintenance

Schedule 1
Abbreviations: I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION Miles x 1,000 Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) Months 3.8 (6) 3 7.5 (12) 6 11.3 (18) 9 15 (24) 12 18.8 (30) 15 22.5 (36) 18 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 26.3 (42) 21 30 (48) 24 33.8 (54) 27 37.5 (60) 30 41.3 (66) 33 45 (72) 36 48.8 (78) 39 52.5 (84) 42 56.3 (90) 45 60 (96) 48

Chassis and body maintenance

Brake lines & cables Brake pads & rotors Manual transaxle oil or automatic transaxle fluid Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Tire rotation Exhaust system Front drive shaft boots Supplemental air bag system and supplemental side air bag systems See NOTE (2). I I I I See NOTE (3). I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I See NOTE (1). I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) vacuum hoses

NOTE: (1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. (2) Inspect the supplemental air bag systems 10 years after the date of manufacture noted on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label. (3) Refer to Tire rotation under the General maintenance heading earlier in this section.
Maintenance

9-7

Schedule 2
Abbreviations: R = Replace I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION Miles x 1,000 Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) Months 7.5 (12) 6 15 (24) 12 22.5 (36) 18 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 30 (48) 24 37.5 (60) 30 45 (72) 36 52.5 (84) 42 60 (96) 48 I* [R] I* I* See NOTE (2) See NOTE (3) R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R* R R [R] I* I*

]: At the mileage intervals only

Emission control system maintenance

Drive belts Air cleaner filter EVAP vapor lines Fuel lines Fuel filter Engine coolant Engine oil Engine oil filter (Use part No. 15208-31U01 or equivalent) Spark plugs (Use PLATINUM-TIPPED type) Intake & exhaust valve clearance* See NOTE (4) See NOTE (1)

Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km)

NOTE: (1) (2) (3) (4) 5

After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Maintenance free item After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance. Maintenance items and intervals with * are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

9-8

Maintenance

Schedule 2
Abbreviations: I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. MAINTENANCE OPERATION Miles x 1,000 Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) Months 7.5 (12) 6 15 (24) 12 22.5 (36) 18 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 30 (48) 24 37.5 (60) 30 45 (72) 36 52.5 (84) 42 60 (96) 48

Chassis and body maintenance

Brake lines & cables Brake pads & rotors Manual transaxle oil & automatic transaxle fluid Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Tire rotation Exhaust system Front drive shaft boots Supplemental air bag system and supplemental side air bag systems See NOTE (1). I I I I I See NOTE (2). I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) vacuum hoses

NOTE: (1) Inspect the supplemental air bag systems 10 years after the date of manufacture noted on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label. (2) Refer to Tire rotation under the General maintenance heading earlier in this section.

Maintenance

9-9

EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following items with * is found in the 8. Do-ityourself section.

conditions, the engine oil and oil filter should be replaced in accordance with the maintenance schedule. However, under severe driving conditions, they may have to be replaced more frequently. Spark plugs*: Replace with new plugs having the correct heat range. Intake & exhaust valve clearance: Check the valve clearance if valve noise increases.

damage, looseness and leakage of oil or grease. Under severe driving conditions, they may have to be inspected more frequently. Exhaust system: Visually check the exhaust pipes, muffler, and hangers for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, chafing, abrasion, deterioration, etc. Under severe driving conditions, inspection should be performed more frequently. Supplemental air bag, and supplemental side air bag (if so equipped) systems: Maintenance for the supplemental air bags or supplemental side air bags should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) vacuum hoses: Check vacuum hose (between ASCD actuator and ASCD pump) for breakage, cracks or fracture.

Emission control system maintenance

Drive belts*: Check drive belts for wear, fraying or cracking and also for proper tension. Replace the drive belts if found damaged. Air cleaner filter: Under normal driving conditions, the air cleaner filter should be replaced in accordance with the maintenance schedule. However, driving the vehicle in dusty areas may cause more rapid clogging of the element. Consequently, the element may have to be replaced more frequently. EVAP vapor lines: Check EVAP vapor lines and connections for failure or looseness. If leaks are found, replace them. Fuel lines: Check the fuel hoses, piping and connections for leaks, looseness or deterioration. Replace any parts if they are damaged. Engine coolant*: Drain and flush the cooling system. Engine oil & oil filter*: Under normal driving

Chassis and body maintenance

Brake lines & cables: Check the brake lines and hoses (including brake booster vacuum hoses, connections & check valve) and parking brake cables for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, chafing, abrasion, deterioration, etc. Brake pads & rotors: Check these and the other neighboring brake components for wear, deterioration and leaks. Under severe driving conditions, they may have to be inspected more frequently. Manual transaxle oil & automatic transaxle fluid*: Check the fluid level and visually inspect for signs of leakage. Under severe driving conditions, the oil should be replaced at the specified interval. Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts, and front drive shaft boots: Check for

9-10

Maintenance

10 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ......... 10-2 Fuel recommendation......................................... 10-3 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation............ 10-5 Recommended SAE viscosity number............... 10-6 Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations ............................................... 10-6 Specifications .......................................................... 10-7 Engine ................................................................ 10-7 Tires and wheels ................................................ 10-9 Dimensions and weights .................................... 10-9 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country ..................................................... 10-10 Vehicle identification ............................................. 10-10 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate......... 10-10 Vehicle identification number (Chassis number) ............................................. 10-10 Engine serial number ....................................... 10-11 F.M.V.S.S. certification label ............................ 10-11 Emission control information label ................... 10-11

Tire placard ...................................................... Air conditioner specification label..................... Installing front license plate................................... Vehicle loading information ................................... Terms ............................................................... Determining vehicle load capacity.................... Loading tips ...................................................... Towing a trailer ..................................................... Maximum load limits......................................... Towing safety ................................................... Uniform tire quality grading ................................... Emission control system warranty ........................ Reporting safety defects (US only) ....................... Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test (US only) ............................................................... Owners Manual/Service Manual order information............................................................. In the event of a collision ......................................

10-12 10-12 10-13 10-14 10-14 10-14 10-15 10-15 10-16 10-17 10-19 10-20 10-20 10-21 10-22 10-22

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure instructed in the 8. Do-it-yourself section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (Approximate) US measure Fuel Engine oil*6 Drain and refill With oil filter change Without oil filter change Cooling system With reservoir Reservoir Manual transmission gear oil Automatic transmission fluid Power steering fluid Brake and clutch fluid Multi-purpose grease Air conditioning system refrigerant Air conditioning system lubricants Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in the 8. Do-it-yourself section. 8-1/8 qt 3/4 qt 6-3/4 qt 5/8 qt 7.7 0.7 Genuine NISSAN anti-freeze coolant or equivalent API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-90 only Nissan Matic D (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid*4 Genuine Nissan PSFII or equivalent*8 Genuine Nissan Brake Fluid*5 or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116) NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base) HFC-134a (R-134a)*7 Nissan A/C System Oil Type S or exact equivalent 4-1/4 qt 3-7/8 qt 3-1/2 qt 3-1/4 qt 4.0 3.7 API Certification Mark*2, *3 API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API grade SJ, Energy Conserving*2, *3 ILSAC grade GF-I & GF-II*2, *3 18-1/2 gal Imp measure 15-3/8 gal Liter 70 Recommended specifications Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (RON 96)*1

*1: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for fuel recommendation. *2: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for engine oil and oil filter recommendation. *3: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for recommended SAE viscosity number. *4: DexronTMIII/MerconTM or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental United States and Alaska contact a NISSAN dealer for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of DexronTMIII/MerconTM automatic transmission fluid. *5: Available in mainland US through your NISSAN dealer. *6: For additional information, see Engine oil in the 8. Do-it-yourself section for changing engine oil. *7: For additional information, see Vehicle identification in this section for air conditioner specification label. *8: Genuine Nissan PSFII, Canada Nissan Automatic Transmission fluid, DexronTMIII/MerconTM or equivalent ATF may also be used.

10-2

Technical and consumer information

FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96) If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Research octane number 91) can be used. However, for maximum vehicle performance, the use of unleaded premium gasoline is recommended.

NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager. If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage. The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline. If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a methanol blend, is used, it should contain no more than 10% oxygenate. (MTBE may, however, be added up to 15%.) If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should also contain a suitable amount of appro-

priate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles. If any undesirable driveability problems such as engine stalling and hard hot starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE. Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage.

CAUTION
Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control devices and systems, and could also affect the warranty coverage. Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, since this will damage the three-way catalyst.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of any fuel additives (i.e. fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvent or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions.

Technical and consumer information

10-3

Octane rating tips

In most parts of North America, you should use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 or 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number. However, you may use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating as low as 85 AKI number in these high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)] such as: Colorado, Montana, New Mexico, Utah, Wyoming, northeastern Nevada, southern Idaho, western South Dakota, western Nebraska, and that part of Texas which is directly south of New Mexico. Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than stated above can cause persistent, heavy spark knock. (Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, have your dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible. Incorrect ignition timing will result in knocking, after-run or overheating. This in turn may cause excessive fuel consumption or damage to the engine. If any of the above symptoms

are encountered, have your vehicle checked at a NISSAN dealer or other competent service facility. However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is no cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load.

10-4

Technical and consumer information

however, meet the API quality and SAE viscosity ratings specified for your vehicle. Do not mix mineral based and synthetic type oils in the engine at the same time.

Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed. Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used.
STI0077

Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important that the engine oil viscosity be selected based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. The recommended SAE viscosity number chart shows the recommended oil viscosities for the expected ambient temperatures. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage.

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATION Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct quality, and viscosity oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. NISSAN recommends the use of a low friction oil (energy conserving oil) in order to improve fuel economy and conserve energy. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage. Only those engine oils with the American Petroleum Institute (API) certification mark on the

front of the container should be used. This type of oil supersedes the existing API SG or SH and Energy Conserving I & II categories. If you cannot find engine oil with the API certification mark, use an API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API grade SJ, Energy conserving oil. An oil with a single designation SG or SH, or in combination with other categories (for example, SG/CC or SG/CD) may also be used if one with the API certification mark cannot be found. An ILSAC grade GF-I & GF-II oil can also be used. Mineral based or synthetic type oils may be used in your NISSAN vehicle. These oils must

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new vehicle is equipped with a highquality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use the genuine oil filter or its equivalent
Technical and consumer information

10-5

for the reason described in change intervals.

Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Oil and filter other than the specified quality, or oil and filter change intervals longer than recommended could reduce engine life. Damage to engines caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the new NISSAN vehicle warranties. Your engine was filled with a high quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle. Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes. repeated short distance driving at cold outside temperatures, driving in dusty conditions, extensive idling, towing a trailer.

RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY NUMBER

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioning system in this NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lubricant, Nissan A/C System Oil Type S or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system components. The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your NISSAN vehicle will not harm the earths ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earths atmosphere, certain governmental regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioning system service. Your NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioning system refrigerant.

TI1028-C

SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all ambient temperatures. SAE 10W-30, 10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if the ambient temperature is above 0F (18C).

10-6

Technical and consumer information

SPECIFICATIONS
Contact your NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioning system.

ENGINE
Model Type Cylinder arrangement Bore x Stroke Displacement Firing order Idle speed Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) CO percentage at idle speed Spark plug Spark plug gap (Normal) Camshaft operation Alternator belt size Width x Length in (mm) 0.8409 x 43.11 (21.36 x 1,095) rpm degree/rpm [No air] % Standard Service option in (mm) PFR5G-11 PFR4G-11, PFR6G-11 0.043 (1.1) Timing chain See the emission control label on the underside of the hood. in (mm) cu in (cm3) VQ30DE Gasoline, 4-cycle 6-cylinder, V-slanted at 60 3.66 x 2.886 (93.0 x 73.3) 182.33 (2,988) 1-2-3-4-5-6*

TI1009-A

Technical and consumer information

10-7

The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

10-8

Technical and consumer information

TIRES AND WHEELS

Type Steel Road wheel 16 x 6.5JJ Aluminum 17 x 7JJ (option) Conventional Tire Spare 1.75 (45) 1.57 (40) Size 15 x 6JJ Offset 1.57 (40) in (mm)

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Sedan Overall length Overall width Overall height Front tread Rear tread Wheelbase Gross vehicle weight rating Gross axle weight rating Front Rear lb (kg) lb (kg) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) lb (kg) See the F.M.V.S.S. certification label on the drivers side lock pillar. 190.4 (4,838) 70.3 (1,785) 56.5 (1,435) 60.2 (1,530)*1 59.8 (1,520)*2 59.4 (1,510)*1 59.1 (1,500)*2 108.3 (2,750)

P205/65R15 92H P215/55R16 91H P225/50R17 93V (option) Conventional*1 T125/70D16*2 T125/90D16*3 T135/90D16*4

*1: *2: *3: *4:

For For For For

option standard models equipped with 15 and 16 size tires (option) models equipped with 17 size tire (option)

*1: For models with road wheel size - 15 x 6JJ, 16 x 6.5JJ *2: For models with aluminum wheel size - 17 x 7JJ

Technical and consumer information

10-9

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

When planning to travel in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicles engine. Using fuel with too low an octane rating may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded engine gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available. When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations. The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ. When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation, and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

STI0038

STI0187

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number plate is attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (Chassis number)

The number is stamped as shown.

10-10

Technical and consumer information

STI0047

STI0186

STI0188

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (F.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is attached as shown.

Technical and consumer information

10-11

STI0206

STI0189

TIRE PLACARD
The cold tire pressure is shown on the tire placard affixed to the console box lid.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is affixed inside of the hood as shown.

10-12

Technical and consumer information

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

Use the following steps to mount the license plate: Before mounting the license plate, confirm that the following parts are enclosed in the vinyl bag. License plate bracket J-nut x 2 Screw x 2 Screw grommet x 2 1. Temporarily place the license plate bracket A of the front bumper while aligning points k B in the license plate fascia with holes k bracket. 2. Remove the license plate bracket.
A using a 0.39 3. Carefully drill two pilot holes k in (10 mm) drill bit at the marked locations. (Be sure that the drill only goes through the fascia, or damage to the nut may occur.)

4. Insert grommets into the hole on the fascia. 5. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the grommet hole to add 90 turn onto the part k C .
STI0191

6. Insert a J-nut into the license plate bracket

Technical and consumer information

10-13

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

before placing the license plate bracket on the fascia. 7. Install the license plate bracket with screws. 8. Install the license plate with bolts that are no longer than 0.55 in (14 mm).

WARNING
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle.

DETERMINING VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

The load capacity of this vehicle is determined by weight, not by available cargo space. For example, a luggage rack, bike carrier, cartop carrier or similar equipment does not increase load carrying capacity of your vehicle. To determine vehicle load capacity:

TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle: Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not include passengers and cargo. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo.

Vehicle weight can be determined by using a commercial-grade scale, found at places such as a truck stop, gravel quarry, grain elevator, or a scrap metal recycling facility. 1. Determine the curb weight of your vehicle. 2. Compare the curb weight amount to the GVWR specified for your vehicle to determine how much more weight your vehicle can carry. 3. After loading (cargo and passengers), reweigh your vehicle to determine if either GVWR or GAWR for your vehicle is ex-

10-14

Technical and consumer information

TOWING A TRAILER
ceeded. If GVWR is exceeded, remove cargo as necessary. If either the front or rear GAWR is exceeded, shift the load or remove cargo as necessary. and cause personal injury. Overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by your warranty.

LOADING TIPS
The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label. Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.

WARNING
Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control

TI1011M

Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember that towing a trailer will place additional loads on your vehicles engine, drive train, steering, braking and other systems. Information on trailer towing ability and the special equipment required should be obtained from your Nissan dealer. He can obtain a Nissan Trailer Towing Guide for you.

Technical and consumer information

10-15

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed 1,000 lb (454 kg). The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight. Towing loads greater than 1,000 lb (454 kg) or using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance. The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appropriate for level highway driving may have to be reduced on very steep grades or in low traction situations (for example, on slippery boat ramps).

equipment required may be obtained from an authorized NISSAN dealer.

Tongue load
Keep the tongue load between 9 and 11% of the total trailer load. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load.

TI1012M

Maximum gross vehicle weight/ maximum gross axle weight

The gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle must not exceed. GVWR shown on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label. The gross vehicle weight equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. In addition, front or rear gross axle weight must not exceed GAWR shown on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label.

WARNING
Vehicle damage and/or personal injury resulting from improper towing procedures are not covered by NISSAN warranties. A Nissan Trailer Towing Guide (U.S. only) containing information on trailer towing ability and the special

10-16

Technical and consumer information

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART Unit: lb (kg) MAXIMUM TOWING LOAD MAXIMUM TONGUE LOAD 1,000 (454) 110 (49)

Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, etc. to install a trailer hitch. To reduce the possibility of additional damage if your vehicle is struck from the rear, where practical, remove the hitch and/or receiver when not in use. After the hitch is removed, seal the bolt holes to prevent exhaust fumes, water or dust from entering the passenger compartment. Regularly check that all hitch mounting bolts are securely mounted.

vehicle and the trailer. The chain should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave enough slack in the chain to permit turning corners.

Trailer lights
Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or local regulations. When wiring the vehicle for towing, connect the stop and tail light pickup into the vehicle electrical circuit at a point between the sensor and stop light or light switch.

TOWING SAFETY Trailer hitch

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer. A genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available from your NISSAN dealer (Canada only). Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle, to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system, make sure it conforms to federal and/or local regulations and that it is properly installed.

Tire pressures
When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the tire placard (located on the inside of the center console lid). Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturers specifications.

CAUTION
Do not use axle-mounted hitches. The hitch should not be attached to or affect the operation of the impactabsorbing bumper.

WARNING
Never connect a trailer brake system directly to the vehicle brake system.

Safety chain
Always use a suitable chain between your

Pre-towing tips
Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded and/or unloaded
Technical and consumer information

10-17

trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down condition; check for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shifts while driving. Be certain your rear view mirrors conform to all federal, state or local regulations. If not, install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle.

slope is not recommended; however, if you must do so, and if your vehicle is equipped with automatic transmission, first block the wheels and apply the parking brake, and then move the transmission selector lever into the P (Park) position. If you move the selector lever to the P (Park) position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake, transmission damage could occur. When going down a hill, shift into a lower gear and use the engine braking effect. When ascending a long grade, downshift the transmission to a lower gear and reduce speed to reduce chances of engine overloading and/or overheating. If the engine coolant rises to an extremely high temperature when the air conditioning system is on, turn off the air conditioner. Coolant heat can be additionally vented by opening the windows, switching the fan control to high and setting the temperature control to the HOT position. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances. Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km). Have your vehicle serviced more often than

at intervals specified in the recommended maintenance schedule. When making a turn, your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make a larger than normal turning radius during the turn. Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly causing vehicle sway. When being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect vehicle handling. If swaying does occur, firmly grip the steering wheel, steer straight ahead, and immediately (but gradually) reduce vehicle speed. This combination will help stabilize the vehicle. Never increase speed. Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing while towing a trailer requires considerably more distance than normal passing. Remember the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes. To maintain engine braking efficiency and electrical charging performance, do not use fifth gear (manual transmission) or overdrive (automatic transmission).

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicles behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic. Steering stability, and braking performance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving. Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops. Avoid sharp turns or lane changes. Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed. Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking. Parking on a

10-18

Technical and consumer information

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency. When towing a trailer, change oil in the transmission more frequently. See Periodic maintenance schedules in the 9. Maintenance section. DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING
The traction grade assigned to your vehicle tires is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Treadwear
Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on tire wear rate when tested under controlled conditions on specified government test courses. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1-1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. However, relative tire performance depends on actual driving conditions, and may vary significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Temperature A, B and C
Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C. They represent a tires resistance to heat build-up, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause tire material to degenerate, reducing tire life. Excessive temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a performance level which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades A and B represent higher levels of performance on laboratory test wheels than the minimum required by law.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt

Technical and consumer information

10-19

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY

WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Your NISSAN is covered by the following emission warranties. For US: Emission Defects Warranty Emissions Performance Warranty For Canada: Emission Control System Warranty Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet (Warranty and Roadside Assistance Information (Canada only)) that comes with your NISSAN. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet (Warranty and Roadside Assistance Information (Canada only)), or it has become lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to: Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 191 Gardena. CA. 90248-0191 Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US only) If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, tollfree, at 1-800-NISSAN-1. In Hawaii call (808) 836-0888.

10-20

Technical and consumer information

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US only)

Due to legal requirements in some states/ areas, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the ready condition for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system. The vehicle is set to the ready condition when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle. If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a not ready condition. Before taking the I/M test, drive the vehicle through the following pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. If you cannot or do not want to perform the driving pattern, an NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you. points between the C and H (normal operating temperature). 2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h), then quickly release the accelerator pedal completely and keep it released for at least 6 seconds. 3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of 53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96 km/h) for at least 5 minutes. 4. Stop the vehicle. 5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h) and maintain the speed for 20 seconds. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 3 times. 7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h) and maintain the speed for at least 3 minutes. 8. Stop the vehicle (shift lever in the P or N position). 9. Rev the engine up between 2,500 and 3,500 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes, then release the accelerator pedal completely. 10.Wait 5 second at idle. 11.Rev the engine up between 2,000 and
Technical and consumer information

3,000 rpm and maintain it for 5 consecutive minutes. 12.Turn the engine off. 13.Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least one more time. If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeat the preceding step. Any safe driving mode is acceptable between steps. Do not stop the engine until step 7 is completed.

WARNING
Always drive the vehicle in a safe and prudent manner according to traffic conditions, and obey all traffic laws. 1. Start the engine when the engine coolant temperature gauge needle points to C. Allow the engine to idle until the gauge needle

10-21

OWNERS MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Owners Manuals for the 2000 model year and prior, see an authorized NISSAN dealer, or contact: DDS Distribution Services, Ltd. 20770 Westwood Dr. Strongsville OH 44136 1-800-247-5321 In Canada: To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owners Manual please contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN Dealer in your area call the NISSAN Satisfaction Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you. Also available are Genuine NISSAN Service and Owners Manuals for older NISSAN models.

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment procedures, this manual is the same one used by the factory trained technicians working at authorized NISSAN dealerships. Also available are genuine NISSAN Owners Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Service and Owners Manuals for older NISSAN models.

In the USA: For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model year, contact: Tweddle Litho Company 1-800-639-8841 www.nissan-techinfo.com For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model year and prior, see an authorized NISSAN dealer, or contact: DDS Distribution Services, Ltd. 20770 Westwood Dr. Strongsville OH 44136 1-800-247-5321

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikely event, there is some important information you should know. Many insurance companies routinely authorize the use of nongenuine collision parts in order to cut costs, among other reasons.

10-22

Technical and consumer information

Insist on the use of Genuine Nissan Collision Parts!

If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts made to Nissans original exacting specifications if you want to help it to last and hold its resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your insurance agent and your repair shop to only use Genuine Nissan Collision Parts. Nissan does not warrant non-Nissan parts, nor does Nissans warranty apply to damage caused by a non-genuine part. Using Genuine Nissan Parts can help protect your personal safety, preserve your warranty protection and maintain the resale value of your vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using Genuine Nissan Parts may prevent or limit unnecessary excess wear and tear expenses at the end of your lease. Nissan designs its hoods with crumple zones to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide such built in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts often show premature wear, rust and corrosion.

your vehicle. And some states have enacted laws that restrict insurance companies from authorizing the use of non-genuine collision parts during the new vehicle warranty. These laws help protect you, so you can take action to protect yourself.

Its your right!

If you should need further information visit us at: www.nissandriven.com.

Why should you take a chance?

In over 40 states, the law says you must be advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair
Technical and consumer information

10-23

MEMO

10-24

Technical and consumer information

11 Index
A ABS (Anti-lock brake system)......................... 5-19 Air bag system Front (See supplemental front airbag system) ...................................................... 1-14 Side (See supplemental side air bag system) ...................................................... 1-16 Air bag warning labels .................................... 1-19 Air bag warning light................................ 1-19, 2-8 Air cleaner housing filter ................................. 8-16 Air conditioner Air conditioner operation ............................. 4-3 Air conditioner service ....................... 4-3, 4-11 Air conditioner specification label .... 4-3, 10-12 Air conditioner system refrigerant and lubrication recommendations ...................... 4-3 Heater and air conditioner controls ............. 4-3 Servicing air conditioner.............................. 4-3 Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations ........................................... 10-6 Air flow charts ................................................... 4-6 Alcohol, drugs and driving ................................ 5-4 AM-FM radio with cassette player .................. 4-12 AM-FM radio with cassette player and compact disc player....................................................... 4-12 AM-FM radio with compact disc player .......... 4-12 Ambient temperature switch (AMB), Air conditioner ...................................................... 4-11 Anchor point locations Top tether strap......................................... 1-36 Antenna Manual....................................................... 4-25 Power ........................................................ 4-25 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)........................ 5-19 Anti-lock brake warning light............................. 2-9 Appearance care Exterior appearance care............................ 7-2 Interior appearance care ............................. 7-4 Armrest ............................................................. 1-9 Audible reminders ........................................... 2-11 Audio system .................................................. 4-12 Automatic Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ........... 8-10 Driving with automatic transmission............ 5-8 Transmission selector lever lock release....................................................... 5-10 Avoiding collision and rollover .......................... 5-3 B Battery............................................................. 8-13 Battery saver system................................. 2-17 Battery replacement, (See multi-remote control system) ............................................................. 3-8 Before starting the engine ................................ 5-7 Belts (See drive belts) .................................... 8-15 Brake Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ................... 5-19 Brake and clutch fluid................................ 8-12 Brake booster ............................................ 8-19 Brake pedal ............................................... 8-18 Brake pedal check..................................... 8-18 Parking brake check ........................ 5-13, 8-18 Parking brake operation ............................ 5-13 System....................................................... 5-18 Warning light ............................................... 2-8 Break-in schedule ........................................... 5-15 Bulb check/instrument panel ............................ 2-7 Bulb replacement ............................................ 8-23 C Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants .................................................. 10-2 Car phone ....................................................... 4-25 Car phone or CB radio ................................... 4-25 Cargo (See vehicle loading information) ........ 2-25 Cargo net ........................................................ 2-25 Cassette player (See audio system) .............. 4-16 Cassette tape operation ................................. 4-12 Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst............ 5-3 CD care and cleaning ..................................... 4-24 Child restraints ................................................ 1-28 Installation on front passenger seat.......... 1-37 Precautions on child restraints.................. 1-28

Top tether strap anchor point locations .... 1-36 With top tether strap.................................. 1-36 Child safety ..................................................... 1-23 Child safety rear door lock................................ 3-4 Chimes ............................................................ 2-11 Circuit breaker, Fusible link ............................ 8-21 Cleaning exterior and interior .................... 7-2, 7-4 Clock ............................................................... 2-29 Clutch Clutch pedal .............................................. 8-19 Fluid........................................................... 8-12 Cold weather driving ....................................... 5-21 Compact Disc (CD) player (See audio system) ........................................................... 4-22 Compact disc (CD) player operation .............. 4-12 Compact spare tire ......................................... 8-33 Console box .................................................... 2-25 Controls Audio controls............................................ 4-12 Audio controls (rear).................................. 4-12 Audio controls (steering wheel)................. 4-12 Heater and air conditioner controls ............. 4-3 Heater and semiautomatic air conditioner ................................................... 4-3 Coolant Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants ................................................... 10-2 Changing engine coolant ............................ 8-6 Checking engine coolant level .................... 8-5 Corrosion protection ......................................... 7-5 Cruise control.................................................. 5-13 Cup holder ...................................................... 2-23

D Daytime running light system ......................... 2-18 Defogger switch, Rear window and outside mirror defogger switch............................................... 2-15 Dimensions and weights................................. 10-9 Door open warning light ................................... 2-8 Drive belts ....................................................... 8-15 Driving Cold weather driving ................................. 5-21 Driving with automatic transmission............ 5-8 Driving with manual transmission ............. 5-11 Precautions when starting and driving ........ 5-2 E Economy, Fuel ................................................ 5-16 Emission control information label................ 10-11 Emission control system warranty ................ 10-20 Engine Before starting the engine........................... 5-7 Block heater .............................................. 5-22 Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants ................................................... 10-2 Changing engine coolant ............................ 8-6 Changing engine oil .................................... 8-8 Changing engine oil filter ............................ 8-9 Checking engine coolant level .................... 8-5 Checking engine oil level ............................ 8-7 Coolant temperature gauge ........................ 2-5 Engine compartment check locations ......... 8-4 Engine cooling system ................................ 8-5 Engine oil..................................................... 8-7

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation... 10-5 Engine oil viscosity.................................... 10-5 Engine serial number .............................. 10-11 Engine specifications................................. 10-7 If your engine overheats ........................... 6-10 Starting the engine ...................................... 5-7 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ...................... 5-2 F F.M.V.S.S. certification label......................... 10-11 Filter, Air cleaner housing filter....................... 8-16 Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) ............................................................. 2-19 Flat tire .............................................................. 6-2 Floor mat cleaning ............................................ 7-4 Fluid Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ........... 8-10 Brake and clutch fluid................................ 8-12 Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants ................................................... 10-2 Engine coolant............................................. 8-5 Engine oil..................................................... 8-7 Power steering fluid................................... 8-11 Window washer fluid ................................. 8-12 Folding rear seat............................................... 1-6 Front air bag system (See supplemental restraint system) ........................................................... 1-14 Front manual seat adjustment .......................... 1-2 Front power seat adjustment ............................ 1-4 Fuel Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants ................................................... 10-2 Filler cap.................................................... 3-12

11-2

Filler lid ...................................................... 3-12 Filler lid and cap........................................ 3-12 Filler lid opener lever................................. 3-12 Fuel economy............................................ 5-16 Fuel octane rating ..................................... 10-3 Fuel recommendation................................ 10-3 Gauge.......................................................... 2-5 Fuses .............................................................. 8-20 Fusible links .................................................... 8-21 G Garage door opener, Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver ..................................... 2-32 Gas cap .......................................................... 3-12 Gauge ............................................................... 2-3 Engine coolant temperature gauge............. 2-5 Fuel gauge .................................................. 2-5 Odometer..................................................... 2-4 Speedometer ............................................... 2-4 Tachometer ................................................. 2-4 General maintenance ................................ 9-2, 9-3 Glasses case .................................................. 2-23 Glove box........................................................ 2-24 Glove box lock ................................................ 2-24 H Hazard warning flasher switch........................ 2-19 Head restraints ................................................. 1-7 Headlamps, (Bulb replacement) ..................... 8-24 Headlights (Bulb replacement) .................................... 8-24

Headlight switch ........................................ 2-16 Heated seats................................................... 2-20 Heater Engine coolant heater ............................... 5-22 Heater and air conditioner controls ............. 4-3 Heater operation.......................................... 4-3 Heater operation, Semiautomatic air conditioner ........................................................ 4-4 HomeLink Universal Transceiver.................. 2-32 Hood, release ................................................... 3-9 Horn ................................................................ 2-19 How to stop alarm, Vehicle security system............................................................. 2-13 I Ignition switch ................................................... 5-4 Automatic transmission models .................. 5-4 Key positions ............................................... 5-6 Manual transmission models....................... 5-5 Immobilizer system ......................................... 2-13 Indicator lights and chimes (See warning/indicator lights and chimes)............................................. 2-9 Inside mirror .................................................... 3-14 Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test................. 10-21 Instrument panel ............................................... 2-2 Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver ..................................................... 2-32 Interior and cargo light.................................... 2-29 Interior light ..................................................... 2-29 Interior light replacement ................................ 8-25

J Jump starting .................................................... 6-7 K Keyless entry, (See multi-remote control system) ............................................................. 3-4 Keys .................................................................. 3-2 L Label, Air conditioner specification label ...... 10-12 Label, Emission control information label..... 10-11 Label, F.M.V.S.S. certification label.............. 10-11 Labels Air bag warning labels............................... 1-19 Air conditioner specification label................ 4-3 Engine serial number .............................. 10-11 Vehicle identification number (VIN)......... 10-10 License plate, Installing front license plate... 10-13 Light Air bag warning light ................................. 1-19 Bulb replacement ...................................... 8-23 Headlamps (Bulb replacement)................. 8-24 Headlight switch ........................................ 2-16 Headlights (Bulb replacement).................. 8-24 Interior and cargo light .............................. 2-29 Interior light................................................ 2-29 Personal light............................................. 2-30 Replacement ............................................. 8-23 Trunk light.................................................. 2-32 Vanity mirror light ...................................... 2-31

11-3

Warning/indicator lights and chimes .... 2-7, 2-9 Lights, Exterior and interior light replacement .................................................... 8-25 Loading information (See vehicle loading information) ................................................... 10-14 Lock Door locks ................................................... 3-3 Glove box lock........................................... 2-24 Power door lock .......................................... 3-3 Trunk lid lock opener lever........................ 3-10 Low fuel warning light ....................................... 2-9 M Maintenance Battery ....................................................... 8-13 Explanation of maintenance items..... 9-3, 9-10 General maintenance........................... 9-2, 9-3 Inside the vehicle ................................. 9-2, 9-3 Maintenance precautions ............................ 8-2 Outside the vehicle .............................. 9-2, 9-3 Periodic maintenance schedules ................ 9-5 Seat belt maintenance .............................. 1-27 Manual front seat adjustment ........................... 1-2 Meters and gauges ........................................... 2-3 Mirror Inside mirror .............................................. 3-14 Outside mirror............................................ 3-15 Outside mirror control................................ 3-15 Outside mirrors.......................................... 3-15 Multi-remote control system.............................. 3-4

N Net, Cargo net ................................................ 2-25 New vehicle break-in ...................................... 5-15 Nissan Vehicle immobilizer system ................ 2-12 Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System, Engine start ................................................................... 5-6 O Odometer .......................................................... 2-4 Oil Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants ................................................... 10-2 Changing engine oil .................................... 8-8 Changing engine oil filter ............................ 8-9 Checking engine oil level ............................ 8-7 Engine oil..................................................... 8-7 Engine oil viscosity.................................... 10-5 Outside mirror ................................................. 3-15 Outside mirror control ..................................... 3-15 Outside mirrors ............................................... 3-15 Overdrive switch ............................................. 5-10 Overheat, If your vehicle overheats................ 6-10 P Parking Brake check............................................... Parking brake check.................................. Parking brake operation ............................ Parking on hills.......................................... Parking/parking on hills ..................................

Periodic maintenance schedules ...................... 9-5 Personal light .................................................. 2-30 Power Front seat adjustment ................................. 1-4 Power door lock .......................................... 3-3 Power outlet .............................................. 2-21 Power steering fluid................................... 8-11 Power steering system.............................. 5-18 Power windows ......................................... 2-26 Pre-tensioner seat belt system ....................... 1-17 Precautions Braking precautions................................... 5-18 Cruise control precautions ........................ 5-14 Maintenance precautions ............................ 8-2 On child restraints ..................................... 1-28 On seat belt usage.................................... 1-21 On supplemental restraint system .............. 1-9 Precautions when starting and driving ........ 5-2 Push starting ..................................................... 6-9 R Radio, Car phone or CB radio........................ 4-25 Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test (US only) ....................................................... 10-21 Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock...... 3-4 Rear power point ............................................ 2-21 Rear window and outside mirror defogger switch .............................................................. 2-15 Registering your vehicle in another country .......................................................... 10-10 Remote keyless entry, (See multi-remote control system) ............................................................. 3-4 Reporting safety defects (US only)............... 10-20

8-18 5-13 5-13 5-13 5-17

11-4

Rollover ............................................................. 5-3 S Safety Child seat belts.......................................... 1-23 Reporting safety defects (US only) ......... 10-20 Towing safety .......................................... 10-17 Seat Belt extenders ........................................... 1-27 Belt maintenance....................................... 1-28 Belt warning light....................................... 1-21 Belt warning light and chime....................... 2-8 Seat adjustment Front manual seat adjustment .................... 1-2 Front power seat adjustment ...................... 1-4 Seat belt(s) Child safety................................................ 1-23 Infants and small children ......................... 1-23 Injured persons.......................................... 1-24 Larger children .......................................... 1-24 Pre-tensioner seat belt system ................. 1-17 Precautions on seat belt usage ................ 1-21 Pregnant women ....................................... 1-24 Seat belt cleaning........................................ 7-5 Seat belts .................................................. 1-21 Three-point type with retractor .................. 1-24 Seat(s), Seats ................................................... 1-2 Seats, Heated seats ....................................... 2-20 Security system (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System), Engine start ..................................... 2-13 Security systems (See theft warning)............. 2-12 Servicing air conditioner .......................... 4-3, 4-11 Shift lock release ............................................ 5-10

Shifting Automatic transmission ............................... 5-8 Manual transmission ................................. 5-11 Shoulder belt height adjustment, For front seats ............................................................... 1-27 Side air bag system (See supplemental side air bag system) .................................................... 1-16 Spark plugs ..................................................... 8-15 Speedometer .................................................... 2-4 Starting Before starting the engine........................... 5-7 Jump starting............................................... 6-7 Precautions when starting and driving ........ 5-2 Push starting ............................................... 6-9 Starting the engine ...................................... 5-7 Steering Power steering fluid................................... 8-11 Power steering system.............................. 5-18 Tilting steering wheel ................................ 3-13 Storage ........................................................... 2-22 Sun shade....................................................... 2-28 Sun visors ....................................................... 3-14 Supplemental air bag warning labels ............. 1-19 Supplemental air bag warning light......... 1-19, 2-8 Supplemental front air bag system................. 1-14 Supplemental restraint system ......................... 1-9 Precautions on supplemental restraint system ......................................................... 1-9 Supplemental side air bag system ................. 1-16 Switch Hazard warning flasher switch .................. 2-19 Headlight switch ........................................ 2-16 Ignition switch.............................................. 5-4

Ignition switch automatic transmission models ......................................................... 5-4 Ignition switch manual transmission models ......................................................... 5-5 Overdrive switch........................................ 5-10 Power door lock switch ............................... 3-4 Rear window and outside mirror defogger switch......................................................... 2-15 Traction control system cancel switch ...... 2-21 Turn signal switch ..................................... 2-18 T Tachometer ....................................................... 2-4 Temperature gauge, Engine coolant temperature gauge ................................................................ 2-5 Theft (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System), Engine start..................................................... 2-13 Three way catalyst............................................ 5-3 Tilting steering wheel ...................................... 3-13 Tire Flat tire ........................................................ 6-2 Uniform tire quality grading ..................... 10-19 Tires Spare tire................................................... 8-35 Tire chains................................................. 8-33 Tire placard ............................................. 10-12 Tire pressure ............................................. 8-30 Tire rotation ............................................... 8-32 Type of tires .............................................. 8-30 Top tether strap child restraints...................... 1-36 Towing Tow truck towing ....................................... 6-11 Towing a trailer........................................ 10-15

11-5

Towing load/specification chart ............... 10-15 Towing safety .......................................... 10-17 Traction control system .................................. 5-20 Traction control system (TCS) cancel switch .............................................................. 2-21 Trailer towing ................................................ 10-15 Transceiver, Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver ..................................................... 2-32 Transmission Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ........... 8-10 Driving with automatic transmission............ 5-8 Driving with manual transmission ............. 5-11 Transmission selector lever lock release....................................................... 5-10 Transmitter (See multi-remote control system) ............................................................. 3-4 Traveling or registering your vehicle in another country .......................................................... 10-10 Trunk Access through rear seat ............................ 1-6 Lid lock opener lever................................. 3-10 Light........................................................... 2-32 Turn signal switch ........................................... 2-18 U Underbody cleaning .......................................... 7-3 Uniform tire quality grading........................... 10-19 V Vanity mirror light............................................ 2-31 Vehicle Dimensions and weights ........................... 10-9

Identification number (VIN) ..................... 10-10 Loading information................................. 10-14 Vehicle recovery, (freeing a stuck vehicle)..... 6-12 Ventilators ......................................................... 4-2 W Warning, Hazard warning flasher switch ........ 2-19 Warning labels, Air bag warning labels .......... 1-19 Warning light Air bag warning light .......................... 1-19, 2-8 Brake warning light...................................... 2-8 Door open.................................................... 2-8 Low fuel warning light ................................. 2-9 Seat belt warning light and chime............... 2-8 Warning/indicator lights and chimes................. 2-7 Warranty, Emission control system warranty ........................................................ 10-20 Washer switch, Windshield wiper and washer switch .............................................................. 2-14 Washing ............................................................ 7-2 Waxing .............................................................. 7-2 Weights (See dimensions and weights) ......... 10-9 Wheels and tires, Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels ............................................................... 7-4 Window washer fluid....................................... 8-12 Window(s) Cleaning ...................................................... 7-3 Power windows ......................................... 2-26 Windshield wiper and washer switch.............. 2-14 Wiper Blades........................................................ 8-17 Windshield wiper and washer switch ........ 2-14

11-6

GAS STATION INFORMATION FUEL RECOMMENDATION:

Unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96). If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Research octane number 91) can be used. However, for maximum vehicle performance, the use of unleaded premium gasoline is recommended.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

API Certification Mark API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving II or API grade SJ, Energy Conserving ILSAC grade GF-II SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all ambient temperatures. SAE 10W-30 viscosity oil may be used for ambient temperatures above 0F (18C). See Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants in the 10. Technical and consumer information section for engine oil and oil filter recommendation.

CAUTION
Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control systems, and may also affect warranty coverage. Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, since this will damage the three way catalyst. For additional information, see Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the 10. Technical and consumer information section.

COLD TIRE PRESSURES:

See tire placard affixed to the center console lid.

NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURES RECOMMENDATION:

During the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of vehicle use, follow the recommendations outlined in the Break-in schedule Information found in the 5. Starting and driving section of this Owners Manual. Follow these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle.

Windshield washer fluid 8-12

Engine coolant 8-5 Meters and gauges 2-3 Engine oil 8-7

Hood release 3-9 Seat 1-2 Trunk release 3-10 Seat belt 1-21

Audio system 4-12 Air conditioner 4-3

Key 3-2

Fuel 3-12, 10-2 Spare tire 6-3, 8-33

STI0205

Foreword
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence. It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control. This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle. A separate Service and Maintenance Guide and Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle and vehicle maintenance schedules. Additionally, a separate Customer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, as well as clarify your rights under your states lemon law. Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have any questions, he will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to him. safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS FOR SAFETY!
Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers! Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Always observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions. Always use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat. Always provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle. Always review this Owners Manual for important safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modification may not be covered under NISSAN warranties.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for all options available on this model. Therefore, you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle. All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or design at any time without notice.

READ FIRST THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Before driving your vehicle please read your Owners Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in the

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways:

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

WARNING
Engine Exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.
SIC0697

CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means Do not do this or Do not let this happen.

2001 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD. TOKYO, JAPAN

All rights reserved. No part of this Owners Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.

Welcome To The World Of NISSAN

portation services to the supply of lubricants, parts and accessories. NISSAN pioneered the use of electronics and computers in automobiles, and has led the industry in improving both performance and fuel efficiency through new engine designs and the use of synthetic materials to reduce vehicle weight. The company has also developed ways to build quality into its vehicles at each stage of the production process, both through extensive use of automation and most importantly through an awareness that people are the central element in quality control. From the time the parts arrived from our suppliers until you took delivery of your new Nissan, dozens of checks were made to ensure that only the best job was being done in producing and delivering your vehicle. NISSAN also takes great care to ensure that when you take your NISSAN to your dealer for maintenance, the service technician will perform his work according to the quality standards that have been established by the factory. Safety has also been built into your NISSAN. As you know, seat belts are an integral part of the safety systems that will help protect you and your passengers in the event of a sudden stop or an accident. We urge you to use the seat belts every time you drive the vehicle. The NISSAN story of growth and achievement reflects our major goal: to provide you, our customer, with a vehicle that is built with quality and craftsmanship a product that we can be proud to build and you can be proud to own.

WFW0002

Your new NISSAN is the result of our dedication to produce the finest in safe, reliable and economical transportation. Your vehicle is the product of a successful worldwide company that manufactures cars and trucks in over 17 countries and distributes them in 170 nations. NISSAN vehicles are designed and manufactured by Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. which was founded in Tokyo, Japan in 1933, and NISSAN affiliates world wide, collectively growing to become the fifth largest automaker in the world. In addition to cars and trucks, NISSAN also makes forklift trucks, marine engines, boats and other diversified products. NISSAN has made a substantial and growing investment in North America. NISSANS commitment is nearly $4 billion dollars in capital investments in facilities across the continent. Some of

the facilities include the Nissan Manufacturing facility in Smyrna, Tennessee, vehicle styling design at Nissan Design International in San Diego, California, and engineering at Nissan Technical Center North America in Farmington Hills, Michigan. Additionally, NISSAN employs nearly 18,000 people throughout the United States, Canada, and Mexico. An additional 71,000 people work for the 1,500 NISSAN and INFINITI dealers across North America. NISSAN is also a substantial contributor to the Canadian economy. Nissan Canada Inc., its suppliers and over 140 dealers employ approximately 4,500 people. These include company employees and the staffs of NISSAN dealers all across Canada. In addition, many Canadians work for companies that supply NISSAN and NISSAN dealers with materials and services ranging from operation of port facilities and trans-

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

NISSAN CARES ... Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions, please contact our (NISSANs) Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number:

For U.S. mainland customers 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261) For Hawaii customers (808) 836-0888 (Oahu Number) For Canadian customers 1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information: Your name, address, and telephone number Vehicle identification number (on dashboard) Date of purchase Current odometer reading Your NISSAN dealers name Your comments or questions OR

You can write to NISSAN with the information on the left at: For U.S. mainland and Alaska customers Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 191 Gardena, California 90248-0191 For Hawaii customers Nissan Motor Corporation in Hawaii 2880 Kilihau St. Honolulu, Hawaii 96819 For Canada customers Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

Table of Contents

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems Instruments and controls Pre-driving checks and adjustments Heater, air conditioner and audio systems Starting and driving In case of emergency Appearance and care Maintenance and do-it-yourself Technical and consumer information Index

1 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Seats ......................................................................... 1-2 Front manual seat adjustment ............................. 1-2 Front power seat adjustment ............................... 1-3 Folding rear seat ................................................. 1-5 Head restraint adjustment .................................... 1-6 Active head restraint (front seats) ........................ 1-7 Armrest ................................................................. 1-8 Supplemental restraint system.................................. 1-8 Precautions on supplemental restraint system .... 1-8 Supplemental air bag warning labels ................. 1-18 Supplemental air bag warning light.................... 1-18 Seat belts ................................................................ 1-20 Precautions on seat belt usage ......................... 1-20 Child safety......................................................... 1-22 Pregnant women ................................................ 1-23 Injured persons................................................... 1-23 Three-point type seat belt with retractor ............ 1-23 Seat belt extenders ............................................ 1-26 Seat belt maintenance ....................................... 1-26 Child restraints ........................................................ 1-27 Precautions on child restraints ........................... 1-27 Installation on rear seat outboard or center positions ............................................................. 1-29 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) system ................................................................ 1-34 Top tether strap child restraint ........................... 1-35 Installation on front passenger seat ................... 1-36

SEATS FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT Passenger side

WARNING
After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked.

SSS0133

WARNING
Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

For most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly. See Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section.

1-2

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT

WARNING
Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

SSS0179

Forward and backward

Pull the lever up while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean back. To bring the seatback forward again, pull the lever and move your body forward. The seatback moves forward.

Operating tips
The seat motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate the switch. Do not operate the power support seat for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-3

SSS0148

SSS0166

Forward and backward

Moving the switch forward or backward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position.

Reclining
Move the recline switch backward until the desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback forward again, move the switch forward and move your body forward. The seatback will move forward.

Seat lifter (Drivers seat)

Push the front or rear end of the switch up or down to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion.

1-4

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

The rear seats can be locked using the master key to prevent unauthorized access.

WARNING
When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain that they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured in the right position, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop. Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraint can be extremely dangerous in an accident or sudden stop.
SSS0180

SPA0467

Lumbar support (Drivers seat)

The lumbar support feature provides lower back support to the driver. Move the lever up or down to adjust the seat lumbar area.

FOLDING REAR SEAT Interior trunk access

Pull up on the release knob to access the trunk from the rear seat.

Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-5

 Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked with the rear seatback securely latched when not in use, and prevent childrens access to car keys.

ment after someone else uses the seat.

SSS0125

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT

To raise the head restraint, just pull it up. To lower, push the lock knob and push the head restraint down.

WARNING
Head restraints should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident. Do not remove them. Check the adjust-

1-6

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

 Active head restraints are designed to supplement other safety systems. Always wear seat belts. No system can prevent all injuries in any accident. Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks. Doing so could impair active head restraint function. The head restraint moves forward utilizing the force that the seatback receives from the occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement of the head restraint helps support the occupants head by reducing its backward movement and helping absorb some of the forces that may lead to whiplash type injuries. Active head restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it is said that whiplash injury occurs most. Active head restraints operate only in certain rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head restraints return to their original positions. Properly adjust the active head restraints as described in the previous section.

SSS0178

SPA1025

Adjust the head restraints so the center is level with the center of your ears.

ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT (front seats)

WARNING
Always adjust the head restraints properly as specified in the previous section. Failure to do so can reduce the effectiveness of the active head restraint.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-7

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) section contains important information concerning the driver and passenger supplemental air bags, supplemental side air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts. Supplemental front air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the face and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions. Supplemental side air bag system (if so equipped): This system can help cushion the impact force to the head and the chest area of the driver and front passenger in certain side impact collisions. The supplemental side air bag is designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. These supplemental restraint systems are designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and front passenger seat belts and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the driver and front passenger seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and front door finishers. (See Seat belts later in this section for

instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.) After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

SSS0150

ARMREST
Pull the armrest forward until it is horizontal.

1-8

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

wheel or instrument panel. Always use the seat belts. The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The air bag system monitors the severity of a collision and then inflates the air bags based on belt usage. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.
SSS0131

WARNING
The supplemental front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, roll over, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents. The seat belts and the supplemental front air bags are most effective when

you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. Front air bags inflate with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the supplemental front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering

Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the supplemental front air bag inflates.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-9

SSS0132

SSS0006

SSS0007

1-10

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

WARNING
Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations. Children may be severely injured or killed when the supplemental front air bag or supplemental side air bag inflates if they are not properly restrained. Also never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating supplemental front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. For additional information, see Child restraints later in this section.

SSS0008

SSS0099

SSS0009

SSS0100

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-11

SSS0101

SSS0140

SSS0159

WARNING
Supplemental equipped): side air bag (if so

The supplemental side air bag ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear impact or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

The seat belts and the supplemental side air bag are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The side air bag inflates with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seat to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illus-

trations. When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the supplemental side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with supplemental side air bag inflation.

1-12

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SSS0162

SSS0173

Supplemental front air bag system

The driver supplemental air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel; the front passenger supplemental air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. These systems are designed to meet optional certification requirements under U.S. regulations. They are also permitted in Canada. The optional certification allows front air bags to be designed to inflate somewhat less forcefully than previously. However, all of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed. The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental air bag operation. The supplemental air bag system has dual stage inflators for both the driver and passenger air bags. The system monitors information from the crash zone sensor, the diagnosis sensor unit and seat belt buckle sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened, inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and whether the seat belts are being used.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-13

When the supplemental front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. Supplemental front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, helps to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body. The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or dash board. The supplemental front air bags inflates quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the air bag module during inflation. The air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over. After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING
Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental front air bag inflates. Right after inflation, several air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental front air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the air bag or damage to the air bag system. Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicles electrical system,

suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the supplemental air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad, above the dashboard, or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system. Work around and on the supplemental front air bag system should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system. * The SRS wiring harnesses are cov-

1-14

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

ered with yellow insulation either just before the harness connectors or over the complete harness for easy identification. A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield could affect inflation of the supplemental air bag system. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the supplemental front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual.

When the supplemental side air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire, but care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. Supplemental side air bags along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the head and the chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body. The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the supplemental side air bag. The side air bag inflates quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the side air bag module during inflation. The side air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over. After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

SSS0165

Supplemental side air bag system (if so equipped)

The supplemental side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats. The supplemental side air bag (on the driver or front passenger seat) is designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although it may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity side impact. It is designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. It may not inflate in certain side collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental side air bag operation.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-15

warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING
Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental side air bag inflates. Right after inflation, several supplemental side air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental side air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the side air bag or damage to the side air bag system. Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicles electrical system,

suspension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the supplemental side air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seat assembly by placing material near the seatback of the front seat, or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag system. Work around and on the supplemental side air bag system should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag system. * The SRS wiring harnesses are cov-

ered with yellow insulation either just before the harness connectors or over the complete harness for easy identification. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the supplemental side air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual.

Pre-tensioner seat belt system (For front seats)

WARNING
The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be reused after activation. It must be replaced together with the retractor as a unit. If the vehicle becomes involved in a frontal collision but the pre-tensioner is not activated, be sure to have the pre-tensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced by your NISSAN dealer.

1-16

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

 No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pre-tensioner seat belt system. This is to prevent accidental activation of the pre-tensioner seat belt or damage to the pre-tensioner seat belt operation. Tampering with the pretensioner seat belt system may result in serious personal injury. Work around and on the pretensioner system should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner seat belt system. If you need to dispose of the pretensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact an authorized NISSAN dealer. Correct pre-tensioner disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt system activates in conjunction with the supplemental front air bag. Working with the seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt the instant the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, thereby restraining seat occupants. The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat belts retractor. These seat belts are used the same as conventional seat belts. When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. The smoke is not harmful, but care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensioner system, the supplemental air bag warning light will not come on, will flash intermittently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on after the ignition key has been turned to the ON or START position. In this case, the pretensioner seat belt may not function properly. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat belt system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-17

SPA0945B

SPA1097

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light, displaying in the instrument panel, monitors the circuits of the supplemental front air bag and supplemental side air bag systems, and pre-tensioner seat belt. The circuits monitored by the air bag warning light are the diagnosis sensor unit, satellite sensors, front air bag modules, side air bag modules and all related wiring, and pre-tensioner seat belt. After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning

1-18

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. If any of the following conditions occur, the supplemental front air bag system, supplemental side air bag system, and pre-tensioner seat belt need servicing: The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds. The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently. The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all. Under these conditions, the supplemental front air bags, supplemental side air bags and/or pre-tensioner seat belt may not operate properly. They must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest authorized NISSAN dealer.

Repair and replacement procedure

The supplemental front air bags, supplemental side air bags and pre-tensioner seat belt are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light will remain illuminated after inflation has occurred. Repair and replacement of these systems should be done only by authorized NISSAN dealers. When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the supplemental front air bags, supplemental side air bags, pre-tensioner seat belt and related parts should be pointed out to the person conducting the maintenance. The ignition key should always be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle.

belts must also be replaced. The module should be replaced by an authorized NISSAN dealer. The supplemental front air bag module or supplemental side air bag module cannot be repaired. The supplemental front air bag system, supplemental side air bag system and pre-tensioner seat belt should be inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle. If you need to dispose of these supplemental systems or scrap the vehicle, contact an authorized NISSAN dealer. Correct disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the supplemental front air bag system, supplemental side air bag system and/or pre-tensioner seat belt will not operate in an accident.

WARNING
Once the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag and/or pretensioner seat belt have activated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced, additionally, if any of the supplemental air bags inflate, the pre-tensioner seat

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-19

SEAT BELTS PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE

Your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced if you are wearing your seat belt and it is properly adjusted. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag. Most states, provinces or territories require that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0134

WARNING
Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be properly restrained and, if appropriate, in a child restraint. The belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly. Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the belt behind your back under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

1-20

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

 Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible around the hips, not the waist. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident. Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle. Do not wear the belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness. Do not allow more than one person to use the same belt. Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts. If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. Once the pre-tensioner seat belt has activated, it cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor. See your NISSAN dealer. Removal and installation of the pretensioner seat belt system components should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. All seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision by your NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage
SSS0136

and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint manufacturers inspection instructions and replacement recommendations. The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-21

All US states and provinces of Canada require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. (See Child restraints later in this section.) In addition, there are many types of child restraints available for larger children which should be used for maximum protection. NISSAN recommends that all preteens and children be restrained in the rear seat if possible. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
SSS0016 SSS0014

CHILD SAFETY
Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly restrained. The proper restraint depends on the childs size. Generally, infants (up to about 1 year and less than 20 lb (9 kg) should be placed in rear facing child restraints. Front facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear facing child restraints.

WARNING
Infants and children need special protection. The vehicles seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints.

This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (air bag system) for the front passenger (see Supplemental Restraint System earlier in this section for precautions).

Infants and small children

NISSAN recommends that infants and small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturers instructions for installation and use.

1-22

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Larger children
Children who are too large for child restraint systems should be seated and restrained by the seat belts which are provided. If the childs seating position has a shoulder belt that fits close to the face or neck, the use of a booster seat (commercially available) may help overcome this. The booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top, middle portion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck, use the shoulder belt without the booster seat.

PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug, and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations.

SSS0018

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING
Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident

WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is moving. The child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident or a sudden stop.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-23

SSS0020

SSS0102

SSS0061

you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. For most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly.

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. 2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until it snaps. The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion will permit the belt to move, and allow you some freedom of movement in the seat.

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown. 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack. The front passenger and rear seat belts have a cinching mechanism for child restraint installation. It is referred to as the automatic locking mode. When the cinching mechanism is activated the seat belt cannot be withdrawn again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. For additional information, see Child restraints later in this section.

1-24

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

The automatic locking mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by a passenger, the locking mode should not be activated. If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension.

forward. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement. If the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any questions about belt operation, see your NISSAN dealer.

WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain that seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured in the right position, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

SSS0021

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the belt, press the button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract.

Checking seat belt operation

Your seat belt retractors are designed to lock belt movement using two separate methods: when the belt is pulled quickly from the retractor. when the vehicle slows down rapidly. You can check their operation as follows: grasp the shoulder belt and pull quickly
Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-25

WARNING
After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the shoulder belt down to make sure it is securely fixed in position. The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident.

WARNING
Only NISSAN belt extenders, made by the same company which made the original equipment belts, should be used with NISSAN belts. Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident. Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the child could be seriously injured in a collision or a sudden stop.

SSS0152

Shoulder belt height adjustment (For front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best suited for you. (See Precautions on seat belt usage earlier in this section.) To lower, push the release button, and then move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position, so that the belt passes over the shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position. To raise, move the adjuster up to the desired position without pushing the button.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender is available which is compatible with the installed seat belts. The extender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. See your NISSAN dealer for assistance if the extender is required.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

To clean the seat belt webbings, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpets. Then brush the webbing, wipe it with a cloth and allow it to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry.

1-26

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

CHILD RESTRAINTS
If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth. Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire belt assembly should be replaced.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS

WARNING
Infants and small children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint while riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a child restraint can result in serious injury or death. Infants and small children should never be carried on your lap. It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident. The child could be crushed between the adult and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the same seat belt around both your child and yourself. Never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating supplemental air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. A rear facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat.

NISSAN recommends that the child restraint be installed in the rear seat. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. An improperly installed child restraint could lead to serious injury or death in an accident. In general, child restraints are designed to be installed with the lap portion of a three-point type seat belt. In addition, this vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint lower anchor system, referred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) system. Some child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these lower anchors. For details, see LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) SYSTEM later in this section. Child restraints for infants and children of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind: choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-27

Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicles seat and seat belt system. Choose a child restraint that meets the guidelines of the Society of Automotive Engineers recommended practice J1819 for child restraint installation. if the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Always follow all recommended procedures. All US states and Canadian provinces require that infants and small children be restrained in approved child restraints at all times while the vehicle is being operated.

WARNING
Improper use of a child restraint can result in increased injuries for both the infant or child and other occupants in the vehicle.

Follow all of the child restraint manufacturers instructions for installation and use. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure to select one which will fit your child and vehicle. It may not be possible to properly install some types of child restraints in your vehicle. If the child restraint is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases. Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to fit the child restraint, but as upright as possible. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Tilt it from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. For a front facing child restraint, check to make sure the shoulder belt

does not go in front of the childs face or neck. If it does, put the shoulder belt behind the child restraint. If you must install a front facing child restraint in the front seat, see instructions later in this section. When your child restraint is not in use, store it in the trunk or keep it secured with a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown around in case of a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION
Remember that a child restraint left in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the child restraint.

1-28

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

INSTALLATION ON REAR SEAT OUTBOARD OR CENTER POSITIONS

WARNING
The three-point belt on your vehicle is equipped with a locking mode retractor which must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to do so will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. It could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision.

SSS0153

SSS0154

Front facing
When you install a child restraint in a rear outboard or center seat, follow these steps: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. It can be placed in a front facing direction, depending on the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manufacturers instructions.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-29

SSS0043

SSS0107

SSS0062

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for belt routing.

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts back to emergency locking mode when the belt is fully retracted.

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt to remove any slack in the belt.

1-30

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt only locks during a sudden stop or impact.

SSS0108

SSS0155

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is allowed to wind back into the

Rear facing
When you install a child restraint in a rear outboard or center seat, follow these steps: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. The direction of the child restraint depends on the type of the child restraint and the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manufacturers instructions.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-31

SSS0156

SSS0046

SSS0045A

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for belt routing.

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts back to emergency locking mode when the belt is fully retracted.

1-32

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt only locks during a sudden stop or impact.

SSS0109

SSS0110

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is allowed to wind back into the
Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-33

 Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the child restraint lower anchors. The child restraint will not be secured properly. The LATCH system anchors are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstance are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses.
SSS0177A

child restraint, refer to the illustration for the rear seating positions equipped with LATCH system anchors which can be used to secure the child restraint. The LATCH system anchors are located at the rear of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the LATCH system anchors. Some child restraints may also require the use of a top tether strap. See Top tether strap child restraint later in this section for installation instructions. When installing a child restraint, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint. When you install a LATCH system compatible child restraint to the lower anchor attachments in the rear seat, follow these steps.

LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM

WARNING
Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown. If a child restraint is not secured properly, your child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident.

Some child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. This system is known as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) system. This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH system compatible child restraints. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with the LATCH system. This information may also be in the child restraint owners manual. If you have such a

WARNING
Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor area and feeling to make sure there are no obstructions over the LATCH system anchors, such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child

1-34

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

restraint will not be secured properly if the LATCH system anchors are obstructed. 1. To install the LATCH system compatible child restraint, insert the child restraint LATCH system anchor attachments into the anchor points on the rear seat. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether, see Top tether strap child restraint later in this section for installation instructions. 2. After attaching the child restraint and before placing the child in it, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side and tug it forward to make sure that the child restraint is securely held in place. 3. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use.

WARNING
The child restraint anchor point is designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstance is it to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses.

Anchor point locations

SSS0157

Anchor points are located on the rear parcel shelf finisher. If you have any questions when installing a top strap child restraint on the rear seat, consult your NISSAN dealer for details.

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT

If your child restraint has a top tether strap, it must be secured to the provided anchor point. First, secure the child restraint with the rear seat belt. Remove the anchor cover from the anchor point which is located directly behind the child seat. Secure the top tether strap to the anchor bracket. Keep the removed cover in a secured place to prevent loss or damage to the cover.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-35

ing a child restraint. Failure to use the retractors locking mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The child restraint could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision.

SSS0129

INSTALLATION ON FRONT PASSENGER SEAT

WARNING
Never install a rear facing child restraint in the front passenger seat. Supplemental air bags inflate with great force. A rear facing child restraint could be struck by the supplemental air bag in a crash and could seriously injure or kill your child.

NISSAN recommends that child restraints be installed in the rear seat. However, if you must install a front facing child restraint in the front passenger seat, move the passenger seat to the rearmost position. A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat. The three-point belt in your vehicle is equipped with a locking mode retractor which must be used when install-

1-36

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SSS0135

SSS0055

SSS0113

Front facing
If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, follow these steps: 1. Position the child restraint on the front passenger seat. It should be placed in a front facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Always follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for belt routing.

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts back to emergency locking mode when the belt is fully retracted.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-37

seat belt is allowed to wind back into the retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt only locks during a sudden stop or impact.

SSS0056

SSS0114

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the lap belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the

1-38

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

MEMO

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-39

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel ....................................................... 2-2 Meters and gauges ................................................... 2-3 Speedometer and odometer ................................ 2-4 Tachometer .......................................................... 2-4 Engine coolant temperature gauge ...................... 2-5 Fuel gauge ........................................................... 2-5 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders........ 2-7 Checking bulbs ..................................................... 2-7 Warning lights....................................................... 2-7 Indicator lights .................................................... 2-10 Audible reminders .............................................. 2-11 Security systems ..................................................... 2-12 Vehivle security system...................................... 2-12 Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System .................. 2-13 Windshield wiper and washer switch ...................... 2-14 Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defogger switch ....................................................... 2-15 Headlight and turn signal switch ............................. 2-16 Xenon headlights................................................ 2-16 Headlight switch ................................................. 2-17 Turn signal switch .............................................. 2-19 Fog light switch (if so equipped) ............................. 2-19 Hazard warning flasher switch ................................ 2-19 Horn......................................................................... 2-20

Heated seats (if so equipped)................................. Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) .................. Traction control system (TCS) cancel switch (if so equipped) ....................................................... Power outlet ............................................................ Cigarette lighter and ashtray (accessory) ............... Storage .................................................................... Trays................................................................... Glasses case ...................................................... Cup holder .......................................................... Glove box ........................................................... Console box ....................................................... Cargo net (if so equipped) ................................. Windows .................................................................. Power windows .................................................. Sunroof (if so equipped) ......................................... Automatic sunroof .............................................. Clock ....................................................................... Adjusting the time............................................... Trip computer .......................................................... Interior light ............................................................. Ceiling................................................................. Personal light .......................................................... Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)..........................

2-20 2-21 2-22 2-22 2-23 2-23 2-23 2-24 2-24 2-25 2-26 2-26 2-27 2-27 2-29 2-29 2-30 2-30 2-30 2-32 2-32 2-33 2-34

Trunk light ............................................................... HomeLink Universal Transceiver (if so equipped) ....................................................... Programming HomeLink ................................... Programming HomeLink for Canadian customers ........................................................... Operating the HomeLink Universal Transceiver .........................................................

2-34 2-35 2-36 2-36 2-36

Programming trouble diagnosis.......................... Clearing the programmed information................ Rolling code programming ................................. Reprogramming a single HomeLink button...... If your vehicle is stolen ......................................

2-36 2-37 2-37 2-37 2-38

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Instrument brightness control switch (P.2-18) 2. Headlight, fog light (if so equipped) and turn signal switch (P.2-16) 3. Traction control system (TCS) cancel switch (if so equipped) (P.2-22) 4. Meters/gauges (P.2-3) 5. Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defogger switch type B (P.2-15) 6. Windshield wiper/washer switch (P.2-14) 7. Ventilator (P.4-2) 8. Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defogger switch type A (P.2-15) 9. Heater/air conditioner control (P.4-3) or radio/cassette player (4-16) 10. Clock (P.2-30) 11. Security indicator light (P.2-14) 12. Radio/cassette player (P.4-16)/CD player (P.4-16) or Navigation system* 13. Passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-8) 14. Fuse box cover (P.8-24) 15. Automatic drive positioner system cancel switch (if so equipped) (P.3-18) 16. Heated steering switch (if so equipped) (P.2-21) 17. Outside mirror remote control (P.3-15) 18. Steering switch for audio control (P.4-28) and trip computer (P.2-30) 19. Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-8) 20. Tilting steering wheel lock lever (P.3-14) 21. Cruise control main/set switch (P.5-14) 22. Ignition switch/steering lock (P.5-4)

SIC1736

2-2

Instruments and controls

METERS AND GAUGES

23. Power outlet (P.2-22) or cigarette lighter (accessory) (P.2-23) 24. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.2-19) 25. Tray (P.2-23) or ashtray (accessory) (P.2-23) 26. Glove box (P.2-25) See the page indicated in parentheses for operating details. *: Refer to the separate Navigation System Owners Manual.

SIC1737

1. Fuel gauge 2. Speedometer 3. Warning/Indicator lights 4. Tachometer 5. Engine coolant temperature gauge

6. Warning/Indicator lights 7. Odometer (Total/Twin trip) 8. Reset knob for trip odometer 9. Trip computer 10.Warning/Indicator lights
Instruments and controls

2-3

Changing the display: Pushing the reset knob changes the display as follows: TRIP A , TRIP B , TRIP A Resetting the trip odometer: Pushing the reset knob for more than 1 second resets the trip odometer to zero.

SIC1227

SIC1249

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (r/min).

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer/twin trip odometer are displayed when the ignition key is in the ON position. The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.

CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.

2-4

Instruments and controls

CAUTION
If the gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. See If your vehicle overheats in the 6. In case of emergency section for immediate action required.
SIC0173 SIC1738

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant temperature will vary with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.

FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank. The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hill. The gauge needle is designed to move to the E (Empty) position when the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers Empty.

Instruments and controls

2-5

The low fuel warning light comes on when the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the gauge reaches E. There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E. The indicates that the fuel filler lid is located on the drivers side of the vehicle.

CAUTION
If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving trips, the lamp should turn off. If the lamp remains on after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see the Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) later in this section.

2-6

Instruments and controls

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

or Anti-lock brake warning light A/T check warning light (A/T models) or Brake warning light Charge warning light Door open warning light Engine oil pressure warning light Low fuel warning light Low washer fluid warning light Seat belt warning light Stop/tail warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Trunk lid open warning light Cruise main switch indicator light Cruise set indicator light High beam indicator light (Blue) Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) Slip indicator light Traction control system indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

CHECKING BULBS
Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition key to ON without starting the engine. The following lights will come on: , or , , The following lights come on briefly and then go off: , or , , , If any light fails to come on, it may indicate a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the elec-

trical system. Have the system repaired promptly.

WARNING LIGHTS or Anti-lock brake warning light

running, it may indicate that the anti-lock brake system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. If an abnormality occurs in the system, the anti-lock function will cease but the ordinary brakes will continue to operate normally. If the light comes on while you are driving, contact your NISSAN dealer for repair.

After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the light will illuminate. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light comes on while the engine is

Instruments and controls

2-7

A/T check warning light (A/T models)

When the ignition switch is turned ON, the light comes on for 2 seconds. If the light blinks for approximately 8 seconds, it may indicate the automatic transmission system is not functioning properly. Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the transmission.

WARNING
Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous. Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or low brake fluid level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as greater pedal travel. If the brake fluid level is below the MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked at a NISSAN dealer. 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warning system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Charge warning light

If the light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate that the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off and check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing or if the light remains on, see your NISSAN dealer immediately.

or

Brake warning light

CAUTION
Do not continue driving if the belt is loose, broken or missing.

This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems. Parking brake indicator: When the ignition key is in the ON position, the light comes on when the parking brake is applied. Low brake fluid warning light: The light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following: 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. See Brake and clutch fluid in the 8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself section.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors are not closed securely while the ignition key is ON.

Engine oil pressure warning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop. The oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. See Engine

2-8

Instruments and controls

oil in the 8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself section.

Seat belt warning light and chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition key is turned to ON, and will remain illuminated until the drivers seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime will sound for about 6 seconds unless the drivers seat belt is securely fastened. See Seat belts in the 1. Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems section for precautions on seat belt usage.

CAUTION
Running the engine with the oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.

air bag (if so equipped) and pre-tensioner seat belt needs servicing and your vehicle must be taken to your nearest authorized NISSAN dealer. The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds. The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently. The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all. Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental Restraint System and/or the pre-tensioner seat belt may not function properly. For additional information, see Supplemental restraint system in the 1. Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems section.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel in the tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E. There will be a small reserve of fuel remaining in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E.

Stop/tail warning light

If the light comes on with the engine running when the light switch is on or the brake pedal is depressed, one or more stop/tail light bulbs are burned out. Replace the stop/tail light bulb.

WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the supplemental air bag system, supplemental side air bag system (if so equipped) and/or pretensioner seat belt system will not operate in an accident.

Low washer fluid warning light (if so equipped)

This light comes on when the washer tank fluid is at a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary. See Window washer fluid in the 8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself section.

Supplemental air bag warning light

After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light will illuminate. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. If any of the following conditions occur, the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side

Instruments and controls

2-9

Trunk lid open warning light

This light comes on when the trunk lid is not closed securely while the ignition key is ON.

Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction. The malfunction indicator lamp may also come on steady if the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel filler cap is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least three gallons of fuel in the fuel tank. After a few driving trips, the lamp should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists. Operation The malfunction indicator lamp will come on in one of two ways: Malfunction indicator lamp on steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected. Check the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The lamp should turn off after a few driving trips. If the lamp does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the

vehicle inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer. Malfunction indicator lamp blinking An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To reduce or avoid emission control system damage: a) Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH (72 km/h). b) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration. c) Avoid steep uphill grades. d) If possible, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed. The malfunction indicator lamp may stop blinking and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

INDICATOR LIGHTS Cruise main switch indicator light

The light comes on when the cruise control main switch is pushed. The light goes out when the main switch is pushed again. When the cruise main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise control system is operational.

Cruise set indicator light

The light comes on while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control system. If the light blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate the cruise control system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer.

High beam indicator light (Blue)

This light comes on when the headlight high beam is on and goes out when the low beam is selected.

CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced

2-10

Instruments and controls

fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission control system.

Traction control system indicator light (if so equipped)

After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the light will illuminate. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the traction control system (TCS) is operational. If the light stays on or comes on when you are driving, it may indicate the traction control system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. The traction control system indicator light may come on for the following reasons. a) If the system is turned off by pressing the button on the instrument panel, the indicator light will come on and stay on. To turn the system back on, press the button again. The indicator light will go off. b) If engine speed is above 4,000 rpm in a selected gear. Use D range on low friction road surfaces. If the traction control system indicator light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on, have your vehicle checked by your NISSAN dealer.

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

The light flashes when the turn signal switch lever or hazard switch is turned on.

Slip indicator light (if so equipped)

This light will blink on when your traction control system (TCS) is limiting wheel spin. Slippery road conditions may exist if the slip indicator light blinks on. If this happens, adjust your driving accordingly. You may feel or hear the system working, but this is normal. The light will blink on for a few seconds after the traction control system stops limiting wheel spin. The slip indicator light also comes on when you turn the ignition key to ON. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light does not come on or go off, have the traction control system checked by your NISSAN dealer. The system operates in all transmission shift lever positions. But the system can upshift the transmission only as high as the indicated shift lever position.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS Key reminder chime

The chime will sound if the drivers side door is opened while the key is left in the ignition switch (ignition switch is turned off). Remove the key and take it with you when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime

The chime will sound when the front door is opened with the headlight switch on unless the ignition key is in the ON position. Make sure to turn the light switch off when you leave the vehicle.

Seat belt warning chime

The chime will sound for about 6 seconds unless the drivers seat belt is securely fastened.

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a brake pad requires replacement,
Instruments and controls

2-11

SECURITY SYSTEMS
it will make a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

IC0005

SIC1228

Your vehicle has two types of security systems, as follows: Vehicle Security System Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System The security condition will be shown by the security indicator light.

How to activate the vehicle security system

1. Close all windows. The system can be activated even if the windows are open. 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 3. Close and lock all doors, hood and trunk lid. Lock all doors by pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob. When using the keyfob, the hazard indicators flash twice to indicate all doors are locked. 4. Confirm that the SECURITY indicator light

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual and audio alarm signals if parts of the vehicle are disturbed.

2-12

Instruments and controls

comes on. The SECURITY indicator light glows for about 30 seconds and then blinks. The system is now activated. If, during this 30 second time period, the door is unlocked by the key or the keyfob, or the ignition key is turned to ACC or ON, the system will not activate. If the key is turned slowly toward the front of the vehicle when locking the door, the system may not activate. If the key is returned beyond the vertical position toward the rear of the vehicle to remove the key, the system may be deactivated. If the indicator light fails to glow for 30 seconds, unlock the door once and lock it again. Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will activate with all doors, hood and trunk lid locked and ignition key off. Turn the ignition key to ACC to turn the system off.

proximately 1 minute. However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking a door or trunk lid with the key, or by pressing the UNLOCK button on the keyfob. The alarm is activated by: Opening the door without using the key or keyfob. Opening the trunk lid without using the key or keyfob. Opening the hood.

the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key. If the engine fails to start using the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key, it may be due to interference caused by another Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key, an automated toll road device or automated payment device on the key ring. Restart the engine using the following procedures: 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 10 seconds. 3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again. 4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key. If this procedure allows the engine to start, NISSAN recommends placing the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices. Statement related to section 15 of FCC rules for Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System (CONT ASSY-IMMOBILIZER)
Instruments and controls

How to stop alarm

The alarm will stop only by unlocking a door or trunk lid with the key, or by pressing the UNLOCK button on keyfob. The alarm will not stop if the ignition switch is turned to ACC or ON. If the system does not operate as described above, have it checked by your NISSAN dealer.

Vehicle security system operation

The security system will give the following alarm: The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently. The alarm automatically turns off after ap-

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM

The Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of

2-13

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

SIC1228

SIC1739

Security indicator light

If Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the ignition key is in the ON position. If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, see your NISSAN dealer for Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System service as soon as possible. Please bring all Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have when visiting your NISSAN dealer for service.

The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition key is in the ON position. Push the lever down to operate the wiper. Intermittent operation can be adjusted from 2 to 13 seconds by turning the knob. Pull the lever toward you to operate the washer. Then the wiper will also operate several times.

2-14

Instruments and controls

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR (if so equipped) DEFOGGER SWITCH

WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION
SIC1502A SIC1740

The following could damage the washer system: Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds. Do not operate the washer if the reservoir tank is empty.

To defog/defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors, start the engine and push the switch on. The indicator light will come on. Push the switch again to turn the defogger off. It will automatically turn off in approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defogger.

Instruments and controls

2-15

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH XENON HEADLIGHTS

WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE When xenon headlights are on, they produce a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to modify or disassemble. Always have your xenon headlights replaced at an authorized NISSAN dealer. Xenon headlights provide considerably more light than conventional headlights. If they are not correctly aimed, they might temporarily blind an oncoming driver or the driver ahead of you and cause a serious accident. If headlights are not aimed correctly, immediately take your vehicle to an authorized NISSAN dealer and have the headlights adjusted correctly. When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, its brightness or color varies slightly. However, the color and brightness will soon stabilize.

SIC1741

2-16

Instruments and controls

 The life of xenon headlights will be shortened by frequent on-off operation. It is generally desirable not to turn off the headlights for short intervals, (for example, when the vehicle stops at a traffic signal). Even when the daytime running lights are active (Canada only), the xenon headlights do not turn on. This way the life of the xenon headlights is not reduced. If the xenon headlight bulb is close to burning out, the brightness will drastically decrease, the light will start blinking, or the color of the light will become reddish. If one or more of the above signs appear, contact a NISSAN dealer.

The headlight will also automatically turn off 45 seconds after a front door is opened and closed. poWhen the light switch is turned to the sition, the headlight low or high beam will turn off. Turn the switch to the position: The front clearance, side marker, tail, license plate and instrument lights will come on. Turn the switch to the position: Headlights will come on and all the other lights remain on.

SIC1230

HEADLIGHT SWITCH Lighting

Turn the switch to the AUTO position: When the ignition key is in the ON position, the tail light, headlight, instrument light and other lights turn on automatically, depending on the brightness of the surroundings. The headlight will automatically turn off 5 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position and the drivers or front passengers door is opened.

Be sure not to put anything on top of the photo sensor located on the top left-hand side of the instrument panel. The photo sensor controls the autolamp; if it is covered, the photo sensor reacts as if it is dark and the headlights will illuminate.

Battery saver system

When the headlight switch is in the or position while the ignition switch is in the ON position, the lights (including the front fog light) will automatically turn off 5 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position.
Instruments and controls

2-17

 When the headlight switch remains in the or position after the lights automatically turn off, the lights will turn on for 5 minutes when the headlight switch is turned to the OFF position and turn to the or position.

Headlight beam select

To select the high beam, push the lever forward. Pull it back to select the low beam.

Passing signal
Pulling the lever toward you will flash the headlight high beam.

CAUTION
When you turn on the headlight switch after the lights automatically turn off, the lights will not turn off automatically. Be sure to turn the light switch to the OFF position when you leave the vehicle for extended periods of time, otherwise the battery will go dead. Never leave the light switch on when the engine is not running for extended periods of time even if the headlights turn off automatically.

Daytime running light system (Canada only)

The headlights automatically illuminate at a reduced intensity when the engine is started with the parking brake released. The daytime running lights operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position or in the position. Turn the headlight switch to the position for full illumination when driving at night. If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the daytime running lights do not illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate once the parking brake is released. The daytime running lights will remain on until the ignition switch is turned off.

IC1284MA

Instrument brightness control

The instrument brightness control operates when the light switch is in the or position. Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instrument panel lights (except clock) and power window switch lights. When the control is turned to the right until a click sound is heard, the light intensity will be at maximum. When the control is turned to the left until a click sound is heard, the light will be turned off.

2-18

Instruments and controls

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

WARNING
When the daytime running light system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Turn signal

Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signals cancel automatically.
SIC1760 SIC1232

Lane change signal

To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or down to the point where lights begin flashing.

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch to the position, then turn the switch to the position. To turn them off, turn the switch to the OFF position. The headlights must be on for the fog lights to operate.

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights will flash. Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving.

WARNING
If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road.

Instruments and controls

2-19

HORN
Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic. Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on. The flasher can be actuated with the ignition switch either off or on.
SIC1280

HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)

SIC1742

To sound the horn, push the center pad area of the steering wheel.

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The switches located on the center console can be operated independently of each other. 1. Start the engine. 2. Select heat range. For low heat, press the of the switch. For high heat, press the side of the switch. (Low) side (High)

WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury.

For no heat, the switch has a center OFF position between low and high. The indicator light in the switch will illumi-

2-20

Instruments and controls

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if so equipped)

nate when low or high is selected. The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on. 3. When the vehicles interior is warmed, or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch to the off position (center). Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth. When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, thinner, or any similar materials. If any abnormalities are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer.
SIC1748

CAUTION
The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running. Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat. Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated. Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.

Push the heated steering switch to warm the steering wheel after the engine starts. The indicator lights will come on. Push the switch again to turn the heated steering off. It will automatically turn off in approximately 30 minutes.

Instruments and controls

2-21

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS) CANCEL SWITCH (if so equipped)

POWER OUTLET
draw. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory. Use this power outlet with the engine running. (If the engine is stopped, this could result in a discharged battery.) Avoid using when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defogger is on. Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure to turn off the power switch of electrical accessory being used or the ACC power of the vehicle. Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may blow. When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water to contact the socket.

SIC1065

SIC1533

To cancel the Traction Control System (TCS), push the TCS cancel switch. The indicator will come on. Push it again or restart the engine to turn the system back on. See Traction control system in the 5. Starting and driving section.

The power outlet is for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones.

CAUTION
Use caution as the socket and plug may be hot during or immediately after use. This power outlet is not designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power

2-22

Instruments and controls

CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND ASHTRAY (accessory)

STORAGE

WARNING
The cigarette lighter should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

CAUTION
The cigarette lighter socket is a power source for the cigarette lighter element only. The use of the cigarette lighter socket as a power source for any other accessory is not recommended.

SIC1233A

SIC1743

The cigarette lighter element is an accessory. A genuine NISSAN cigarette lighter unit can be purchased from your local NISSAN dealer. The cigarette lighter operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. Push the lighter in all the way. When the lighter is heated, it will spring out. Return the lighter to its original position after use.

TRAYS

WARNING
The storage tray should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

Instruments and controls

2-23

CAUTION
Do not use for anything other than glasses. Do not leave glasses in the glasses case while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the glasses.

SIC1744

SIC1745

GLASSES CASE
The glasses case can be opened by pushing the lid.

CUP HOLDER

WARNING
The cup holder should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Front: For larger cups, remove the inside tray.

WARNING
The glasses case should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

2-24

Instruments and controls

SIC1235

SPA0388

CAUTION
Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger. Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.

GLOVE BOX
When locking or unlocking the glove box, use the master key. The glove box may be opened by pulling the handle.

WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

Instruments and controls

2-25

SIC1242A

CARGO NET (if so equipped)

The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargo area from moving around while your vehicle is driven. To install the cargo net, attach the hooks to the retainers.
SIC1236

CONSOLE BOX

To remove the cargo net, detach the hooks from the cargo net retainers.

WARNING
The center console box should not be

used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

2-26

Instruments and controls

WINDOWS

WARNING
Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Be sure to secure hooks into the retainers. The cargo restrained in the net must not exceed 30 lb (13.6 kg) or the net may not stay secured.

and become trapped in a window. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents. The power windows operate when the ignition key is in the ON position and for about 45 seconds, after the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. If the drivers door or the front passengers door is opened during this period of about 45 seconds, power to the windows is canceled.
SIC1464

POWER WINDOWS

To open or close the window, push down or pull up the switch and hold it. The main switch (driver side switches) will open or close all the windows.

WARNING
Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc. inside the vehicle before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls
Instruments and controls

2-27

The auto reverse function can be activated when a front window is closed by automatic operation when the ignition key is in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window occurs.

WARNING
SIC0627B SPA1157

The passenger side switch will open or close only the corresponding window. To open or close the window, hold the switch down or up.

Automatic operation
To fully open or close the drivers or front passengers side window, completely press or lift the switch and release it; it need not be held. The window will automatically open or close all the way. To stop the window, just press or lift the switch on the opposite side.

Locking passengers windows

When the lock button is pushed in, only the driver side window can be opened or closed. Push it in again to cancel.

There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window.

Auto reverse function (For front window)

If the control unit detects something caught in a front window as it moves up, the window will be immediately lowered.

2-28

Instruments and controls

SUNROOF (if so equipped)

To close the roof, press the switch to the side. Sliding position of lid can be chosen according to sliding amount of switch. To fully open or close the roof, completely move the switch to the or side. position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the sunroof occurs.

Restarting the sunroof sliding switch

The sliding switch will become inoperable after the battery terminal is disconnected, the electrical supply interrupted and/or some abnormality detected. Use the following re-set procedure to return sunroof operation to normal.
SIC1746

WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the sunroof.

AUTOMATIC SUNROOF
The sunroof will only operate when the ignition key is in the ON position. The automatic sunroof is operational for about 45 seconds, even if the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. If the drivers door or the front passengers door is opened during this period of about 45 seconds, power to the sunroof is canceled.

1. If the sunroof lid is open, push the tilting switch repeatedly toward tilt DOWN to fully close the lid. 2. After the lid has closed all the way, keep pushing the tilting switch toward tilt DOWN for more than 1 second.

Tilting the sunroof

To tilt up, first close the sunroof, then press and hold the side of the tilt switch. To tilt down the sunroof, press and hold the side.

Auto reverse function (When closing the sunroof)

If the control unit detects something caught in the sunroof as it moves to the front, the sunroof will immediately open backward. The auto reverse function can be activated when the sunroof is closed by automatic operation when the ignition key is in the ON

Sliding the sunroof

To open the roof, press the switch to the side.

Sun shade
Open or close the sun shade by sliding it backward or forward. The shade will open automatically when the
Instruments and controls

2-29

CLOCK
sunroof is opened. However, it must be closed manually.

TRIP COMPUTER

WARNING
In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open sunroof. Always use seat belts and child restraints. Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the sunroof is closing.

SIC0910

SIC1749

The digital clock displays time when the ignition key is in ACC or ON. If the power supply is disconnected, the clock will not indicate the correct time. Readjust the time.

CAUTION
Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from the sunroof before opening. Do not place any heavy object on the sunroof or surrounding area.

The display of the trip computer is situated in the tachometer display. When the ignition switch is turned to ON, the display scrolls all the modes of the trip computer and then shows the mode chosen before the ignition switch is turned OFF. If the battery terminal is disconnected, push the trip computer mode switch more than 1 second to activate the computer.

ADJUSTING THE TIME

Push the H button to adjust the hour. Push the M button to adjust the minute.

If the sunroof does not close

Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the sunroof.

2-30

Instruments and controls

tion. Press the mode switch if you wish to return to the mode that was selected before the warning occurred. The ICY indicator will continue blinking as long as the temperature remains below 39F (4C).

play just before the ignition switch is turned OFF may continue to be displayed. When driving uphill or rounding curves, the fuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarily change the display.

Distance to empty (dte mile or km)

The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling. The dte is constantly being calculated, based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display is updated every 30 seconds. The dte mode includes a low range warning feature: when the fuel level is low, the dte mode is automatically selected and the digits blink in order to draw the drivers attention. Press the mode switch if you wish to return to the mode that was selected before the warning occurred. The dte mark (dte) will remain blinking until the vehicle is refuelled. When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte display will change to ( ). NOTE: If the amount of fuel added while the ignition switch is OFF is small, the dis-

Average fuel consumption ( or )

The Average fuel consumption mode shows the average fuel consumption since the last reset. Resetting is done by pressing the mode switch for more than approximately 1 second. The display is updated every 30 seconds. At about the first 1/3 miles (500 m) after a reset, the display shows ( ).

SIC1750

When the ignition switch is turned to ON, modes of the trip computer can be selected by pushing once on the trip mode switch. The following modes can be selected:

Average speed (

or

Outside air temperature (ICY F or C)

The outside air temperature is displayed in F or C. The outside air temperature mode includes a low temperature warning feature: below 37F (3C), the outside air temperature mode is automatically selected and ICY indicator will illuminate in order to draw the drivers atten-

The average speed mode shows the average vehicle speed since last reset. Resetting is done by pressing the mode switch for more than approximately 1 minute. The display is updated every 30 seconds. The first 30 seconds after a reset, the display shows ( ).

Journey time
The journey time mode shows the time since the last reset. The displayed time can be reset by pressing the mode switch for more than approximately 1 second.
Instruments and controls

2-31

INTERIOR LIGHT
NOTE: If a low temperature warning and low range warning occur simultaneously, other display modes switch automatically to the outside temperature display. When the mode switch is pushed, the display switches to the mode chosen before the warning display, and the ICY indicator will blink. The key is removed from the ignition switch while all doors are closed. The ceiling light will turn off while the 30 second timer is activated, when: The drivers door is locked either with the keyfob, a key, or the lock-unlock switch. The ignition switch is turned ON. When the interior light switch or personal light switch is in the ON position, the interior, personal, and vanity mirror lights will automatically turn off 30 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position. To turn on the light again, insert the key into the ignition switch and move it to the ON position. After the above procedure, the interior, personal, and vanity mirror lights will automatically turn off 30 minutes after the latest operation of the following with the ignition switch in the ACC or OFF position: Opening or closing any door Locking or unlocking with the keyfob, a key or the lock-unlock switch. Inserting or removing a key from the ignition switch These lights will turn on again when any of the

IC1226

CEILING
The ceiling light has a three-position switch. When the switch is in the center k position, the light will illuminate when a door is opened. The light will stay on for about 30 seconds when: The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, a key or the lock-unlock switch while all doors are closed. The drivers door is opened and then closed while the key is removed from the ignition switch.

2-32

Instruments and controls

PERSONAL LIGHT
above operations is performed after the lights have turned off automatically. (The lights will turn off 30 minutes after the latest operation of the above as well.)

CAUTION
Turn off the interior, personal and vanity mirror lights when you leave the vehicle. Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

IC1019-B

SIC1747

When the interior light or the personal light switch is in the ON position, the interior, personal, and vanity mirror lights will automatically turn off 30 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position. To turn on the light again, insert the key into the ignition switch and move it to the ON position. After the above procedure, the interior, personal, or vanity mirror lights will automatically turn off 30 minutes after the latest operation of the following with the ignition switch in the ACC or OFF position: Opening or closing any door

Locking or unlocking with the keyfob, a key or the lock-unlock switch. Inserting or removing a key from the ignition switch These lights will turn on again when any of the above operations is performed after the lights have turned off automatically. (The lights will turn off 30 minutes after the latest operation of the above as well.)

Instruments and controls

2-33

VANITY MIRROR LIGHT (if so equipped)

TRUNK LIGHT
The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the light will go off.

CAUTION
Turn off the interior, personal and vanity mirror lights when you leave the vehicle. Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

SIC0186

The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when the cover on the vanity mirror is opened. When the interior light or the personal light switch is in the ON position, the interior, personal, and vanity mirror lights will automatically turn off 30 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position. To turn on the light again, insert the key into the ignition switch and move it to the ON position.

2-34

Instruments and controls

HomeLink UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device. The HomeLink Universal Transceiver power will automatically turn off 30 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned to the off position. HomeLink Universal Transceiver: Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) devices such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and security systems. Is powered by your vehicles battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehicles battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink will retain all programming. Once the HomeLink Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures (i.e., new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes. For additional information, refer to Programming HomeLink later in this section.

WARNING
Do not use the HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models manufactured after April 1, 1982). A garage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death. During programming, your garage door or gate may open or close. Make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate that you are programming. Your vehicles engine should be turned off while programming the

HomeLink Universal Transceiver.

Instruments and controls

2-35

3. Using both hands, simultaneously push the hand-held transmitter button and the desired HomeLink button. Do not release the buttons until step 4 has been completed. NOTE: Some garage door openers may require the procedures noted under Canadian Programming. 4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapid flashing light indicates the HomeLink Universal Transceiver has been successfully programmed. To program the remaining two buttons, follow steps 2 through 4. If, after repeated attempts, you do not successfully program the HomeLink Universal Transceiver to learn the signal of the handheld transmitter, refer to Rolling Code Programming later in this section.

and hold the HomeLink button (note steps 2 through 4 under Programming HomeLink ) while you press and re-press (cycle) your hand-held transmitter every 2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly (indicating successful programming). NOTE: If programming a garage door opener, etc., it is advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener components.

SPA0609A

OPERATING THE HomeLink UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver (once programmed) may now be used to activate the garage door, etc. To operate, simply press the appropriate programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver button. The red indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink
1. With the ignition key in the OFF position, press and hold the two outside buttons, and release when the indicator light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds). This procedure erases the factory set default codes and does not have to be followed when programming additional hand-held transmitters. 2. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter (from the device you wish to train) approximately 2 to 5 inches (50 to 127 mm) away from the surface of HomeLink keeping the indicator light in view.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 seconds. To program your hand-held transmitter to HomeLink , continue to press

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

If the HomeLink does not quickly learn the hand-held transmitter information: replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries.

2-36

Instruments and controls

 position the hand-held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink surface. press and hold both the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons without interruption. position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 inches (50 to 127 mm) away from the HomeLink surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink is not programmed within that time, try holding the transmitter in another position - keeping the indicator light in view at all times. If you continue to have programming difficulties, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department. The phone numbers are located in the Foreword of this Owners Manual.

ROLLING CODE PROGRAMMING

Rolling code garage door openers (or other rolling code devices) which are code protected and manufactured after 1996, may be determined by the following. A. Reference the garage door opener Owners Manual for verification. B. The hand-held transmitter appears to program the HomeLink Universal Transceiver but does not activate the garage door. C. Press and hold the trained HomeLink button. If the garage door opener has the rolling code feature, the HomeLink indicator light will flash rapidly, then remains on after 2 seconds. To program the HomeLink Universal Transceiver to a garage door opener with the rolling code feature, follow these instructions after completing the Programming HomeLink (the aid of a second person may make the following procedures quicker and easier). 1. Locate the training button on the garage door opener motor unit. Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand. If there is difficulty locating the training button, reference the garage door opener Owners Manual.

2. Press the training button on the garage door opener motor unit (which may activate a training light). NOTE: Following step 2, there are 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3. 3. Firmly press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Press and release the HomeLink button a second time to complete the training process. (Some garage door openers may require you to do this procedure a third time to complete the training.) The garage door opener should now recognize the HomeLink Universal Transceiver and activate when the HomeLink button is pressed. The remaining two buttons may now be programmed (if not yet programmed, follow steps 2 through 4 in the Programming HomeLink procedures earlier in this section).

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION

Individual buttons cannot be cleared, however to clear all programming, press and hold the two outside buttons and release when the indicator light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HomeLink BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink Universal Transceiver button, complete the following. 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do not release the button until step 4 has been completed.
Instruments and controls

2-37

2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after 20 seconds), position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 inches (50 to 127 mm) away from the HomeLink surface. 3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button. 4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly, release both buttons. The HomeLink Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink buttons.

FCC Notice: This device complies with FCC rules part 15. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference and (2) This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the device. DOC: ISTC 1763K1313 FCC I.D.: CB2V67690

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the codes of any non-rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink . Consult the Owners Manual of each device or call the manufacturer or dealer of those devices for additional information. When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the HomeLink Universal Transceiver with your new transmitter information.

2-38

Instruments and controls

MEMO

Instruments and controls

2-39

MEMO

2-40

Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys .......................................................................... 3-2 Doors ......................................................................... 3-2 Locking with key ................................................... 3-3 Front window open/close with key ....................... 3-3 Locking with inside lock knob............................... 3-3 Locking with power door lock switch.................... 3-4 Child safety rear door lock ................................... 3-4 Remote keyless entry system ................................... 3-4 How to use remote keyless entry system ............ 3-5 Battery replacement ............................................. 3-8 Hood ........................................................................ 3-10 Trunk lid .................................................................. 3-10 Opener operation ............................................... 3-11 Key operation ..................................................... 3-11

Interior trunk lid release ..................................... 3-12 Fuel filler lid ............................................................. 3-12 Opener operation ............................................... 3-12 Fuel filler cap ...................................................... 3-13 Steering wheel ........................................................ 3-14 Tilt operation....................................................... 3-14 Sun visors ............................................................... 3-14 Mirrors ..................................................................... 3-15 Automatic anti-glare inside mirror ...................... 3-15 Outside mirrors ................................................... 3-15 Automatic seat positioner (if so equipped) ............. 3-16 Automatic seat positioner operation (A/T models only).................................................................... 3-16 Procedure for storing memory............................ 3-17

KEYS
safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. NISSAN does not record any key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate. A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, this key can be duplicated by your NISSAN dealer. Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System KEY Master and Valet keys: The key number is necessary when you need extra Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. As many as 5 Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one vehicle. New keys must be registered to the Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle by your NISSAN dealer. At this time, you should bring all Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because the registration process will erase all memory of the Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System components.

DOORS

WARNING
Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out intruders. Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

SPA1379

You can only drive your vehicle using the master or valet keys which are registered to the Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in the key head. The master key can be used for all the locks. The valet key cannot be used for the trunk lid or glove box locks. To protect belongings when you leave a key with someone, give them the valet key only. Never leave these keys in the vehicle. Record the key number on the key number plate supplied with your keys and keep it in a

3-2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

FRONT WINDOW OPEN/CLOSE WITH KEY

Turn the drivers door key to the unlock position and hold for about 1 second, the front windows will begin to lower. To stop opening, turn the key to the neutral position. To close the front windows with the door key cylinder, turn the key to the lock position and hold for about 1 second. To stop closing, turn the key to the neutral position. In the event of a hand in the way, or other obstruction, the auto reverse function will activate.

SPA0084

SPA0085

LOCKING WITH KEY Power

The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors simultaneously. Turning the drivers door key to the front of the vehicle will lock all doors. Turning the drivers door key one time to the rear of the vehicle will unlock the corresponding door. From that position, returning the key to neutral (where the key can only be removed and inserted) and turning it to the rear again within 5 seconds will unlock all doors.

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

To individually lock the doors, move the inside lock knob to the LOCK position, then close the door. To unlock, pull up the inside lock knob to the UNLOCK position. When locking the door without a key, be sure not to leave the key inside the vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-3

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors to release the trunk lid and activate the panic alarm by using the keyfob from outside the vehicle. Before locking the doors, make sure the key is not left in the vehicle. The keyfob can operate at a distance of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. (The effective distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.) As many as four keyfobs can be used with one vehicle. For information concerning the purchase and use of additional keyfob, contact your NISSAN dealer.
SPA0944 SPA0086

The keyfob will not function when: the battery is dead, the distance between the vehicle and the keyfob is over 33 ft (10 m). The panic alarm will not activate when the key is in the ignition switch.

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

All door locks will be engaged when the power door lock switch is moved to the LOCK position with the drivers or front passengers door open. Then close the door and all doors will be locked. When the power door lock switch is moved to the LOCK position with front doors open while a key is in the ignition switch, all doors will lock once and then unlock automatically.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety locking helps prevent doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle. When the lever is in the lock position, the rear door can be opened only from the outside.

CAUTION
The following conditions or occurrences will damage the keyfob. Do not allow the keyfob to become wet.

3-4

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

 Do not drop the keyfob. Do not strike the keyfob sharply against another object. Do not place the keyfob for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140F (60C). If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that keyfob. This will prevent the keyfob from unauthorized use to unlock the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, please contact an authorized NISSAN dealer.

the UNLOCK button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes once. If hazard indicator and horn mode is not necessary, you can switch to hazard indicator only mode by following the switching procedure. In hazard indicator only mode, when the LOCK button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes twice. When the UNLOCK button is pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the horn operates. (Switching procedure) Push the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the keyfob simultaneously for more than 2 seconds to switch from one mode to the other. When pushing the buttons to set hazard indicator only mode, the hazard indicator flashes 3 times. When pushing the buttons to set hazard indicator and horn mode, the hazard indicator flashes once and the horn chirps once.

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Setting hazard indicator and horn mode
This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn mode when you first receive the vehicle. In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the LOCK button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once. When

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-5

SPA1260

Locking doors
1. Remove the ignition key.*1 2. Close all the doors.*2 3. Push the LOCK button on the keyfob. 4. All the doors will lock. All of the doors will lock when the LOCK button on the keyfob is pushed even though a door remains open and/or the ignition key is in the ON position. 5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once.

When the LOCK button is pushed with all doors locked, the hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once as a reminder that the doors are already locked. *1: Doors lock with the keyfob while a key is in the ignition switch. However, the panic alarm will not activate when the key is in the ignition switch. *2: Doors lock with the keyfob while any door is open. However, hazard indicator and horn mode will not function.

3-6

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

in the center k position with the ignition key in any position except the ON position. 2. Push the UNLOCK button on the keyfob again within 5 seconds. All doors unlock The hazard indicator flashes once if all doors are completely closed. All doors lock automatically within 5 minutes after pressing the UNLOCK button unless all of the following operations are performed: any door is opened a key is inserted into the ignition The interior light can be turned off without waiting for 30 seconds by turning the ignition switch to the ON position or by locking the doors with the keyfob.

Opening the front window

SPA1380

Push the UNLOCK button on the keyfob. The drivers door will unlock. Continue to press the UNLOCK button for 3 seconds. The drivers and front passengers windows will be lowered. Continue to press the UNLOCK button until windows are fully open.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Unlocking doors
1. Push the UNLOCK button on the keyfob once. Only the drivers door unlocks

The hazard indicator flashes once if all doors are completely closed with the ignition key in any position except the ON position. The interior light turns on and the light timer activates for 30 seconds when the switch is

3-7

To stop lowering the windows, release the UNLOCK button. To start lowering the windows, press the UNLOCK button again for 3 more seconds. This function will operate after the ignition switch is off and 45 seconds passed or either the front door is opened.

stay on for 30 seconds. 3. The panic alarm stops when: It has run for 30 seconds, or The LOCK or the UNLOCK button is pressed, or The panic button or the trunk lid release button is pushed on the keyfob for longer than 0.5 seconds.

Releasing the trunk lid

1. Push the TRUNK button on the keyfob for longer than 0.5 seconds with the key removed from the ignition key cylinder. 2. The trunk lid opens. The trunk lid will not open when the trunk lid cancel lever is in the CANCEL position. It can be opened only with the key. See Trunk lid later in this section for cancel lever.

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the alarm to call attention as follows: 1. Push the PANIC button on the keyfob for longer than 0.5 seconds with the key removed from the ignition key cylinder. 2. The theft warning alarm and headlights will
SPA1374

BATTERY REPLACEMENT
Replace the battery as follows: 1. Open the lid using a suitable tool. 2. Replace the battery with a new one.

3-8

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Recommended battery: Sanyo CR2025 or equivalent Make sure that the side faces the bottom case. 3. Close the lid securely. 4. Push the keyfob button two or three times to check its operation. See your NISSAN dealer if you need any assistance for replacement. If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement, perform step 4 above. Be careful not to touch a circuit board and a battery terminal. An improperly disposed battery can harm the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal. The keyfob is water-resistant; however, if it does get wet, immediately wipe completely dry. When changing batteries, do not let dust or oil get on the keyfob. FCC Notice: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer compliance

could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-9

HOOD

TRUNK LID

WARNING
Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See Precautions when starting and driving in the 5. Starting and driving section for exhaust gas. Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked with the trunk closed when not in use, and prevent childrens access to car keys.

SPA1381 1 lo1. Pull the hood lock release handle k cated below the instrument panel; the hood will then spring up slightly. 2 at the front of the hood 2. Move the lever k with your fingertips and raise the hood.

WARNING
Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident. If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood.

3. When closing the hood, slowly close the hood and make sure it locks into place.

3-10

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA0095

SPA0992

Cancel lever
When the lever is in the cancel position, the trunk lid cannot be opened with the trunk lid release button. It can be opened only with the master key.
SPA0985

KEY OPERATION
To open the trunk lid, turn the key clockwise. To close, lower and push the trunk lid down securely.

OPENER OPERATION
The trunk lid release button is located under the drivers arm rest. To open the trunk lid, pull the release button. To close, push the trunk lid down securely.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-11

FUEL FILLER LID

vides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become locked inside the trunk. The handle is located on the back side of the trunk lid inside the trunk compartment. To open the trunk lid from the inside, pull the release handle towards you until the lock releases and push up on the trunk lid. The release lever is made of a material that glows in the dark after a brief exposure to ambient light.

SPA1382

SPA0986

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

OPENER OPERATION
To open the fuel filler lid, push the opener switch. To lock, close the fuel filler lid securely.

WARNING
Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the trunk closed, when not in use, and prevent childrens access to car keys. The interior trunk lid release mechanism pro-

3-12

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. Use only an original equipment type fuel filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It malfunccould also cause the tion indicator lamp to come on. Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle.

SPA1396

FUEL FILLER CAP

The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type. Tighten the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are heard. Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder while refueling.

ously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling. Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the cap a quarter turn, and wait for any hissing sound to stop to prevent fuel from spraying out and possible personal injury. Then remove the cap. Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank

CAUTION
If fuel is spilled on the car body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage. Tighten until the fuel filler cap clicks. Failure to tighten the fuel filler cap
Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING
Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seri-

3-13

STEERING WHEEL
properly may cause the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to illuminate. If the lamp illuminates because the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The lamp should turn off after a few lamp does driving trips. If the not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see the Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) in the 2. Instruments and controls section.
SPA0234

SUN VISORS

SPA0991

TILT OPERATION
Pull the lock lever and while holding down, adjust the steering wheel up or down to the desired position. Push the lock lever back into place to lock the steering wheel in place.

CAUTION
Store the main sun visor after storing the extension sun visor.

WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

3-14

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

MIRRORS
When the inside mirror is in the AUTO position, excessive glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind you will be reduced. When the switch of the inside mirror is in the OFF position, the inside mirror will operate normally.

SPA1109

SPA1387

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE INSIDE MIRROR

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING WARNING
Use the AUTO position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity. The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically changes reflection according to the intensity of the headlight of the following vehicle. Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects. The outside mirror will operate only when the
Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-15

ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. Turn the control knob to right or left to select the right or left outside mirror, then adjust.

AUTOMATIC SEAT POSITIONER (if so equipped) AUTOMATIC SEAT POSITIONER OPERATION (A/T models only)
This system is designed so that the drivers seat will automatically move when the automatic transmission selector lever is in the P (Park) position. This allows the driver to get in and out of the drivers seat more easily. When one of the following conditions is met, the drivers seat will slide backward: When the key is removed from the ignition switch.
MPA0008

When the drivers door is opened with the key turned to ACC or LOCK. When the key is turned from ON to ACC with the drivers door open. When one of the following conditions is met, the drivers seat will return to the positions before being set. When the key is inserted into the ignition switch. When the drivers door is closed with the key turned to LOCK.

Foldable outside mirrors

Push the outside mirror backward to fold it.

3-16

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

PROCEDURE FOR STORING MEMORY

Two positions can be stored in the automatic drivers seat positioner memory. Follow these procedures to use the memory system.

During this step, do not turn the ignition to any positions other than ON. 4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, push the memory switch 1 or 2 fully for at least 1 second. The indicator light for the pushed memory switch will come on and stay on for approximately 5 seconds after pushing the switch. After the indicator light goes off, the selected positions are stored in the selected memory (1 or 2).
SPA1385

1. A/T models: Set the automatic transmission selector lever to the P (Park) position. M/T models: Apply the parking brake securely when the vehicle is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition ON. 3. Adjust the drivers seat and steering column to the desired positions by manually operating each adjusting switch. For additional information, see Seats in the 1. Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems section and Steering wheel earlier in this section.

If memory is stored in the same memory switch, the previous memory will be deleted.

Confirming memory storage

Turn the ignition ON and push the SET switch. If the main memory has not been stored, the indicator light will come on for approximately 0.5 seconds. When the memory has stored the position, the indicator light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse blows, the memory will be canceled. In such a case, reset the desired positions using the following procedures. 1. Open and close the drivers door more than
Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-17

two times with the ignition key in the LOCK position. 2. Reset the desired position using the previous procedure.

System operation
The automatic drive positioner system will not work or will stop operating under the following conditions: when the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7 km/h). when any two or more of the memory switches are simultaneously pressed while the automatic drive positioner is operating. when the adjusting switch for the drivers seat is turned on while the automatic drive positioner is operating. when the cancel switch located on the instrument panel is pushed to cancel. when the memory switch 1 or 2 is not pushed for at least 1 second. when the seat has already been moved to the memorized position. when no seat position is stored in the memory switch. when the parking brake is not applied. M/T models when the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7 km/h) while the parking brake is applied. M/T models To restart the drive positioner system,

move the parking brake to off and on. when the engine is started while moving the automatic drive positioner. M/T models

Selecting the memorized position

1. A/T models: Set the automatic transmission selector lever to the P (Park) position. M/T models: Apply the parking brake securely when the vehicle is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition ON. 3. Push the memory switch 1 or 2 fully for at least 1 second. The drivers seat will move to the memorized position with the indicator light flashing. Then the light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds. When memory switch 1 or 2 is pushed with the drivers door open and then the key inserted into the ignition switch within approximately 1 minute, the drivers seat will move to the memorized position. A/T models only

3-18

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA1386

CANCEL SWITCH
When the CANCEL side of the switch is pushed, the automatic drive positioner system will not function. When the AUTO side of the switch is pushed, the system will function.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-19

MEMO

3-20

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

4 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Ventilators ................................................................. 4-2 Heater and air conditioner (Manual) ......................... 4-3 Controls ................................................................ 4-3 Heater operation................................................... 4-4 Air conditioner operation ...................................... 4-5 Air flow charts....................................................... 4-6 Heater and air conditioner (Automatic) (if so equipped) .................................................................. 4-9 Automatic operation ............................................. 4-9 Manual operation................................................ 4-10 Operating tips ..................................................... 4-11 Ventilation air filter.............................................. 4-11 Servicing air conditioner.......................................... 4-12

Audio system........................................................... FM radio reception ............................................. AM radio reception ............................................. Audio operation precautions .............................. FM-AM radio with cassette player and compact (CD) player ......................................................... FM-AM radio with cassette player...................... CD care and cleaning ........................................ Steering switch for audio control ....................... Antenna .............................................................. Compact disc (CD) autochanger (if so equipped)............................................................ Car phone or CB radio ...........................................

4-12 4-13 4-13 4-13 disc 4-16 4-23 4-28 4-28 4-29 4-29 4-30

VENTILATORS

SAA0373

SAA0374

Adjust the air flow direction of ventilators.

Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction of ventilators. : This symbol indicates that the vents are closed when the vent switch is moved to the left. : This symbol indicates that the vents are open when the vent switch is moved to the right.

4-2

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (Manual) CONTROLS Fan control dial

This dial turns the fan on and off, and controls fan speed.

Air flow control buttons

These buttons allow you to select the air flow outlets. Air flows from center and side ventilators.
SAA0468

Air flows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets. Air flows mainly from foot outlets. Air flows from defroster outlets and foot outlets. Air flows mainly from defroster outlets.

WARNING
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. Do not leave children, impaired adults, or pets alone in your vehicle. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or

animals. Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls should not be done while driving, so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

Temperature control/MAX A/C lever

This lever allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air. MAX A/C: When the temperature control/MAX A/C lever is moved to the left end, the air conditioner cooling will start automatically and the A/C
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-3

indicator and air recirculation lights will turn on.

HEATER OPERATION Heating

This mode is used to direct hot air from the floor outlets. Some air will also come from the defrost vents. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position for normal heating. 2. Push the button in.

Air recirculation button

OFF position: Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment. Use the off position for normal heater, or air conditioner operation. ON position (Indicator light ON): Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the air recirculation button to the ON position when driving on a dusty road or to avoid traffic fumes and for maximum cooling when using the air conditioner.

4. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position.

Defrosting or defogging
This mode is used to defrost/defog the windows. 1. Push the button in. 2. Turn on the fan control dial. 3. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position between the middle and the HOT position. To quickly remove ice or fog from the windows, turn on the fan control dial to 4 and the temperature control lever to the full HOT position. When the button is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on to defog the windshield, and the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position between the middle and the HOT position. For quick heating, move the air recirculation button to the ON position. Be sure to return the air recirculation button to the OFF position for normal heating.

Air conditioning button

Start the engine, move the fan control dial to the desired (1 to 4) position and push the air conditioning button to turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light will come on when the air conditioner is on. To stop the air conditioner, push the switch again to return it to the original position. The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Ventilation
This mode directs outside air from the side and center vents. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in.

3. Turn on the fan control dial.

4-4

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Bi-level heating
This mode directs outside air from the side and center vents and hot air from the floor outlets. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in. 3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Normally move the temperature control lever to the midpoint between HOT and COLD.

recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

recirculation button to the OFF position for normal cooling.

Dehumidified heating
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION

Start the engine, move the fan control dial to the desired (1 to 4) position and push in the air conditioning button to activate the air conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions will be added to the heater operation.

3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Push on the air conditioning button. The indicator light will come on. 5. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position.

Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs the windshield. 1. Push the button in. 2. Turn on the fan control dial. 3. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position between the middle and the HOT position.

Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in. 3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Push on the air conditioning button. The indicator light will come on. 5. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position. For quick cooling when the outside temperature is high, move the air recirculation button to the ON position. Be sure to return the air

Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows and dehumidify. 1. Push the button in. 2. Turn on the fan control dial. 3. Push on the air conditioning button. The indicator light will come on. 4. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position. When the button is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on to deHeater, air conditioner and audio systems

Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and air inlet in front of the windshield. This will improve heater operation. When the button is pushed, the air

4-5

fog the windshield, and the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

quick heating, cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation button should be in the OFF position for normal cooling, heating and defrosting.

Operating tips
Keep the windows and sun roof closed while the air conditioner is in operation. After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3 minutes with the windows open to vent hot air from the passenger compartment. Then, close the windows. This will allow the air conditioner to cool the interior more quickly. The air conditioning system should be operated for about 10 minutes at least once a month. This helps prevent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication. If the coolant temperature gauge exceeds the HOT position, turn the air conditioning off. For additional information, see If your vehicle overheats in the 6. In case of emergency section.

AIR FLOW CHARTS

The charts on the following pages show the button and lever positions for maximum and

4-6

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

SAA0469

SAA0470

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-7

SAA0471

SAA0472

4-8

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (Automatic) (if so equipped)

On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls should not be done while driving, so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION
SAA0544

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO)

This mode may be normally used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

WARNING
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is run-

ning. Do not leave children, impaired adults, or pets alone in your vehicle.

4-9

1. Push the AUTO button on. (AUTO will be displayed.) 2. Turn the temperature set dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature. Adjust the temperature set dial to about 75F (24C) for normal operation. The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.

Dehumidified defogging
1. Push the DEF button on. (The indicator light on the button will come on.) 2. Turn the temperature set dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature. To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows, push the manual fan control button and set to the maximum position . As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, push the AUTO button to return to the auto mode. When the DEF button is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 23F (5C) to defog the windshield, and the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

Push the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.

Air recirculation
Push the air recirculation button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator light on the switch will come on. Push it again to make the air inlet controlled automatically (FRESH, REC/FRE and RECIRCULATION). The indicator will go out. The air recirculation button will not be activated when the air conditioner is in DEF mode.

Heating (ECON)
The air conditioner does not activate. When you need to heat only, use this mode. 1. Push the ECON (Economy) button on. (ECON will be displayed.) 2. Turn the temperature set dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature. The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically. Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature. Otherwise the system may not work properly. Not recommended if windows fog up.

Air flow control

Pushing the manual air flow control button selects the air outlet to: : : : : Air flows from center and side ventilators. Air flows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets. Air flows mainly from foot outlets. Air flows from defroster and foot outlets.

MANUAL OPERATION Fan speed control

Push the fan control button control the fan speed. to manually

To turn the system off

Push the OFF button.

4-10

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

OPERATING TIPS
When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature warms up, the air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally.

up easily when operating the heater or air conditioning system.

HA1011

The sensor on the instrument panel helps maintain a constant temperature; do not put anything on or around this sensor.

VENTILATION AIR FILTER

The air conditioning system is equipped with a ventilation air filter which collects dirt, pollen, dust, etc. To make sure air conditioner heats, defogs, and ventilates efficiently, replace the filter in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual. To replace the filter, contact your NISSAN dealer. The filter should be replaced if air flow decreases significantly or if windows fog
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-11

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

The air conditioning system in your NISSAN vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind. This refrigerant will not harm the earths ozone layer. However, special charging equipment and lubricant are required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioning system. See Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the 9. Technical and consumer information section for air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations. Your NISSAN dealer will be able to service your environmentally friendly air conditioning system.

AUDIO SYSTEM
Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON and press the power on switch to turn on the radio. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, the key should be turned to the ACC position. Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other external influences. Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences. Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may influence radio reception quality. change. Buildings, terrain, signal distance and interference from other vehicles can work against ideal reception. Described below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception.

Radio reception
Your radio system is equipped with state-ofthe-art electronic circuits to enhance radio reception. These circuits are designed to extend reception range, and to enhance the quality of that reception. However there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even when the finest equipment is used. These characteristics are completely normal in a given reception area, and do not indicate any malfunction in your radio system. Remember that a moving vehicle is not the ideal place to listen to a radio. Because of the movement, reception conditions will constantly

WARNING
The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced technician with proper equipment.

4-12

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

from a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade and/or drift. Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to antenna position, usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter, static or flutter can be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the treble control counterclockwise to reduce treble response. Multipath reception: Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time. The signals may cancel each other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.

power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS Cassette player

To maintain good quality sound, NISSAN recommends using cassette tapes of 60 minutes or shorter in length. Cassette tapes should be removed from the player when not in use. Store cassettes in their protective cases and away from direct sunlight, heat, dust, moisture and magnetic sources. Direct sunlight can cause the cassette to become deformed. The use of deformed cassettes may cause the cassette to jam in the player. Do not use cassettes with labels which are peeling and loose. If used, the label could jam in the player. If a cassette has loose tape, insert a pencil through one of the cassette hubs and rewind the tape firmly around the hubs. Loose tape may cause tape jamming and wavering sound quality. Over a period of time, the playback
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

SAA0306

FM RADIO RECEPTION
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to 30 miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM having slightly more range than stereo FM. External influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is within 25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same characteristics as light. For example they will reflect off objects. Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away

AM RADIO RECEPTION
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can bend around objects and skip along the ground. In addition, the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of these characteristics. AM signals are also subject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver. Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings. It can also occur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist. Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

4-13

head, capstan and pinch roller may collect a tape coating residue as the tape is played. This residue accumulation can cause weak or wavering sound, and should be removed periodically with a head cleaning tape. If the residue is not removed periodically, the player may need to be disassembled for cleaning.

During cold weather or rainy days, the player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely. The player may skip while driving on rough roads. The CD player sometimes cannot function when the compartment temperature is extremely high. Decrease the temperature before use. Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight. CDs that are of poor quality, dirty, scratched, covered with fingerprints, or that have pin holes may not work properly. Do not use the following CDs as they may cause the CD player to malfunction. 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter
SAA0480

Recordable compact discs (CD-R) Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) CDs that are not round CDs with a paper label CDs that are warped, scratched, or have abnormal edges

Compact Disc (CD) player

Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm) round discs that have the COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO logo on the disc or packaging.

4-14

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

1. CD LOAD button (Type B only) 2. SEEK/APS REW, APS FF/TRACK CHANGE button 3. CD play button 4. TAPE play button 5. FM/AM band select button 6. TAPE EJECT button 7. CD EJECT button 8. SCAN tuning button 9. ONOFF/VOLUME control knob
SAA0550

10. AUTOP (Automatic preset) button 11. Station and preset (FM/AM)/CD insert or CD play (Type B only) select button 12. RADIO TUNE/FFREW/AUDIO (Bass, treble, fader, and balance, (SCV and NR (Dolby) Type B only)) ADJUSTING button 13. AUDIO (BASS, TREBLE, FADER, and BALANCE, (SCV and NR (Dolby) Type B only)) button 14. RPT (repeat) play button 15. DOLBY button (Type A only) PTY button (Type B only)
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

SAA0551

4-15

FM-AM RADIO WITH CASSETTE PLAYER AND COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER/CD CHANGER Audio main operation
Head unit: The radio has an FM diversity reception system, which employs two antennas printed on the rear window. This system automatically switches to the antenna which is receiving less interference. The tape deck employs a permalloy head which allows for improved reproduction of high frequency ranges. Noise is also greatly reduced by the combined use of the Dolby NR (Noise Reduction) system. The auto loudness circuit enhances the low frequency range automatically in both radio reception and tape and CD playback. ONOFF/Volume control: Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then push the ONOFF/VOL control knob while the system is off to call up the mode (radio, tape or CD) which was playing immediately before the system was turned off. When no CD or tape is loaded, the radio will come on. While the system is on, pushing the ONOFF/VOL control knob turns the system off.

To turn the radio off, press the ONOFF/VOL control knob. Turn the ONOFF/VOL control knob to adjust the volume. This vehicle has Speed sensitive Control Volume (SCV) for audio (type B only). The audio volume changes as the driving speed changes. AUDIO button (BASS, TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, (SCV and NR (Dolby) type B only)): Press the AUDIO button to change the selecting mode as follows. BASS , TREBLE , FADER , BALANCE , SCV (type B only) , NR (when cassette playing type B only) , BASS To adjust BASS, Treble, Fader and Balance, press the AUDIO button until the desired mode BASS, TREBLE, FADER or BALANCE appears in the display. Press the TUNE ( ) or ( ) button to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. Use the or button also to adjust Fader or Balance modes. Fader adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers. To change the SCV mode to OFF, LOW, MID

or HIGH, press the ton (type B only).

or

(TUNE) but-

To change the NR (Dolby) mode to OFF or or (TUNE) button ON, press the while cassette tape is playing. When Dolby is ON, the display indicates the mark. After 10 seconds, the radio, cassette tape or CD display reappears. Once the sound quality is set to the desired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedly until the radio, cassette tape or CD display appears.

FM-AM radio operation

FM/AM band select: Pushing the FM/AM band select button will change the band as follows: AM , FM1 , FM2 , AM When FM/AM band select button is pushed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON, the radio will come on at the station last played. The last station played will also come on when the power knob is turned to ON. If a compact disc or tape is playing when the FM/AM band select button is turned to ON, the compact disc or tape will automatically be

4-16

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

turned off and the last radio station played will come on. The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception. TUNE (Tuning):

button again during this 5 seconds period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station. Station memory operations: Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (six for FM1, six for FM2) and six stations can be set for the AM band. 1. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK, SCAN or TUNE button. 2. Select the desired station and keep pushing any of the desired station memory buttons (1 to 6) until a beep sound is heard. (The radio mutes when the select button is pushed.) 3. The indicator ch2 will then come on and the sound will resume. Memorizing is now complete. 4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse blows, the radio memory will be cancelled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

(Automatic preset) button: To select the preset FM, AM or PTY station (type B only), push the AUTOP button for less than 1.5 seconds. To preset the FM, AM or PTY station, push the AUTOP button for more than 1.5 seconds. Program type type B only: When PTY button is pressed during FM mode, the PTY name of the current tuned station is displayed. During this time if the PTY data code is zero, or the data is unreadable; the display will show NONE. 1. PTY selection mode PTY name selection can be done by the up/down TUNE button or in the PTY selection mode. It is possible to shift the PTY name by one step, with one push of the up/down tuning button or . PTY name selection can also be achieved by pressing the preset buttons. Initial PTY names are stored in the preset buttons; but these can be changed by pressing the preset buttons for more than 1.5 seconds when the desired PTY name is in the display.

WARNING
The radio should not be tuned while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Use these buttons for manual tuning. To move quickly through the channels, hold either of the TUNE buttons down for more than 0.5 seconds. SEEK tuning: Push the SEEK button or , to tune from high to low or low to high frequencies and stops at the next broadcasting station. SCAN tuning: Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low to high frequencies and stops at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-17

button again during this 5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station.

system will come on and the tape will play. When the TAPE button is pushed with either the radio or compact disc turned on and the tape loaded, the compact disc or the radio will automatically be turned off and the tape will play. When the TAPE button is pushed with the TAPE playing, the tape will play the program recorded on the reverse side. FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind): Push the (fast forward) button to fast forward the tape. To rewind the tape, push the (rewind) button. Either the FF or REW symbol illuminates on the right side of the display window. To stop the FF or REW function, press the (fast forward) or (rewind) again, or the TAPE button. APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS REW: When the (APS FF) button is pushed while the tape is being played, the next program will start to play from the beginning. Push the (APS FF) button several times to skip through programs. The tape will advance the number of times the button is pushed (up to nine programs).

Cassette tape player operation

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then lightly insert the cassette tape into the tape door. The cassette tape will be automatically pulled into the player. The radio or CD will turn off (if it is on) and the cassette tape will begin to play.

CAUTION
2. PTY SEEK tuning After selecting a PTY name, push the SEEK button or within 10 seconds. Tuning to the PTY station will start. If you do not push the SEEK button within the 10 second period, the PTY mode will be canceled. 3. PTY SCAN tuning mode Push the SCAN tuning button to tune the PTY name station, and stop at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the Do not force the cassette tape into the tape door. This could cause player damage. If the system is turned off by pushing the ONOFF/VOL control knob with the cassette tape still in the player, the tape will resume playing when the system is turned back on. PLAY: When the TAPE button is pushed with the system turned off and a tape loaded, the

4-18

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

When the (APS REW) button is pushed once, the program being played starts over (APS from the beginning. Push the REW) button several times to skip back several selections. The tape will go back the number of times the button is pushed. Either the FF or REW symbol flashes on the right side of the display window while searching for the selection. This system searches for the blank intervals between selections. If there is a blank interval within one program or there is no interval between programs, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location. SCAN tuning: Push the SCAN tuning button while playing tape, and it stops at the next tape program for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again during this 5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and the tape program is continued. If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next tape program. Dolby NR (Noise Reduction) (Type A only): Push the Dolby NR button for Dolby NR encoded tapes to reduce high frequency tape noise. The indicator will come on. Dolby noise reduction manufactured under li-

cense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby NR and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Metal or chrome tape usage: The cassette player will be automatically set to high performance play when playing a metal or chrome cassette tape. TAPE EJECT: When this button is pushed with the tape loaded, the tape will be ejected. When the tape is ejected while it is being played, the system will be turned off.

CAUTION
Do not force the compact disc into the slot. This could damage the player. If the system has been turned off while the compact disc was playing, pushing the ONOFF/VOL control knob will start the compact disc. 8 cm diameter compact discs can also be used without an adapter. PLAY: When the CD button is pushed with the system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play. When the CD button is pushed with the compact disc loaded but the tape or the radio playing, the tape or radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play. FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind): When the (fast forward) or (rewind) button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will play while
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Compact disc (CD) player operation (Type A)

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up. The compact disc will be guided automatically into the slot and start playing. After loading the disc, the number of tracks on the disc and the play time will appear on the display. If the radio or tape is already operating, it will automatically turn off and the compact disc will play.

4-19

fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the compact disc will return to normal play speed. APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS REW: When the (APS FF) button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the program next to the present one will start to play from its beginning. Push several times to skip through programs. The compact disc will advance the number of times the button is pushed. (When the last program on the compact disc is skipped through, the first program will be played.) When the (APS REW) button is pushed, the program being played returns to its beginning. Push several times to skip back through programs. The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pushed. SCAN tuning: Push the SCAN tuning button while playing CD, and it stops the CD program for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again during this 5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and the CD program is continued. If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next CD program.

REPEAT (RPT): When the RPT play button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the play pattern can be changed as follows:
1 CD RPT 1 CD MIX

1 TR (Track) RPT

be guided automatically into the slot and start playing. After loading the disc, the number of tracks on the disc and the play time will appear on the display. If the radio or tape is already operating, it will automatically turn off and the compact disc will play.

CD EJECT: When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be ejected. When this button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will come out and the system will turn off. If the compact disc comes out and is not removed, it will be pulled back into the slot to protect it. (except 8 cm diameter compact discs) CD IN indicator: CD IN indicator appears on the display when the CD is loaded with the system on.

Compact disc (CD) changer operation (Type B)

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up. The compact disc will

4-20

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

CAUTION
Do not force the compact disc into the slot. This could damage the player. If the system has been turned off while the compact disc was playing, pushing the ONOFF/VOL control knob will start the compact disc. 8 cm diameter compact discs can also be used without an adapter. button: To insert a CD in the CD changer, push the LOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select the loading slot by pushing the CD insert select button (1 to 6), then insert the CD. To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, push the LOAD button for more than 1.5 seconds. The inserted slot numbers will illuminate on the display. PLAY: When the CD6 button is pushed with the system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD6 button is pushed with the compact disc loaded with the tape or the radio playing, the tape or radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play. FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind): When the (fast forward) or (rewind) button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the compact disc will return to normal play speed. APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS REW: When the (APS FF) button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the program next to the present one will start to play from its beginning. Push several times to skip through programs. The compact disc will advance the number of times the button is pushed. (When the last program on the compact disc is skipped through, the first program will be played.) When the (APS REW) button is pushed, the program being played returns to its beginning. Push several times to skip back through programs. The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pushed.

CD PLAY button: To change CD, push the CD play select button (1 to 6). SCAN tuning: When the SCAN tuning button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played, the beginning of all the CD programs in each track will be played for 10 seconds in sequence. When the SCAN tuning button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played, the first program in all the CDs will be played for 10 seconds. Pushing the button again during this 10 second period will stop SCAN tuning. If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 10 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next disc program. REPEAT (RPT): When the RPT button is pushed while the compact disc is played, the play pattern can be changed as follows:

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-21

DISPLAY CD TEXT: To indicate the CD mode text, push the PTY button during CD playing. To change the indicated text, push the PTY button. The text will change as follows:

removed, it will be pulled back into the slot to protect it. (except 8 cm diameter compact discs) CD IN indicator: CD IN indicator appears on the display when the CD is loaded with the system on.

If the text is more than 10 letters, push the AUTOP button to display the remaining text. (Type B only) CD EJECT: When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be ejected. To eject the discs selected by the EJECT button, push it for less than 1.5 seconds. To eject all the discs, push the EJECT button for more than 1.5 seconds. When this button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will come out and the system will turn off. If the compact disc comes out and is not

4-22

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

AUDIO button (BASS, TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, SCV): Press the AUDIO button to change the selecting mode as follows: BASS , TREBLE , FADER , BALANCE , SCV , BASS To adjust Bass, Treble, Fader, Balance, press the AUDIO button until the desired mode BASS, TREBLE, FADER or BALANCE appears in the display. or button to adjust Bass Press the and Treble to the desired level. Use the or button to adjust Fader or Balance modes. Fader adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound level between the right and left speakers. To change the SCV mode to OFF, LOW, MID or HIGH, press the or (TUNE) button. After 10 seconds, the radio or cassette tape display reappears. Once the sound quality is set to the desired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedly until the radio or cassette tape display appears.

SAA0546

FM-AM RADIO WITH CASSETTE PLAYER for navigation system equipped models
Refer to the separate Owners Manual for information about the navigation system.

the radio comes on. Pushing the ONOFF/Volume control dial again turns the system off. Turn the ONOFF/Volume control dial to adjust the volume. This vehicle has Speed sensitive Control Volume (SCV) for audio. The audio volume changes as the driving speed changes.

Audio main operation

ONOFF/Volume control: Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, then push the ONOFF/Volume control dial. The mode (radio or cassette) which was playing immediately before the system was turned off resumes playing. When no cassette is loaded,

Radio/Cassette tape priority mode

In this mode, the radio station illuminates in the
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-23

display during radio operation. During cassette tape operation, TAPE illuminates in the display.

TUNE (Tuning):

be set for the AM band. 1. Tune to the desired station using the SCAN or TUNE buttons. 2. Select the desired station and keep pushing any of the desired station memory buttons (1 to 6) until a beep sound is heard. The radio mutes when the select button is pushed.) 3. The indicator ch2 will come on and the sound will resume. Memorizing is now complete. 4. Other station select buttons can be set in the same manner. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the radio fuse opens, the radio memory is cancelled. In that case, reset the desired stations. Program type: When PTY button is pressed during FM mode, the PTY name of the current tuned station is displayed. During this time if the PTY data code is zero, or the data is unreadable; the display will show NONE. 1. PTY selection mode PTY name selection can be done by the up/down TUNE button or in the PTY selection mode.

FM-AM radio operation

FM-AM band select: Pushing the FM-AM band select button will change the band as follows: AM , AM (preset station) , FM1 , FM2 , FM (preset station) , AM When FM/AM band select button is pushed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON, the radio will come on at the station last played. The last station played will also come on when the power knob is turned to ON. If a compact disc or tape is playing when the FM/AM band select button is turned to ON, the compact disc or tape will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on. The FM stereo indicator, ST illuminates during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception.

WARNING
The radio should not be tuned while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Use these buttons for manual tuning. To move quickly through the channels, hold either of the TUNE buttons down for more than 0.5 seconds. SCAN tuning: Push the SCAN tuning button and SCAN will illuminate in the display window. SCAN tuning begins from high to low or low to high frequencies and stops at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again during this 5 second period stops SCAN tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station. If any of the SEEK/SCAN tuning buttons are not pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station. Station memory (and preset) operations: Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (six for FM1, six for FM2) and six stations can

4-24

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

It is possible to shift the PTY name by one step, with one push of the up/down tuning button or . PTY name selection can also be achieved by pressing the preset buttons. Initial PTY names are stored in the preset buttons; but these can be changed by pressing the preset buttons for more than 1.5 seconds when the desired PTY name is in the display.

2. PTY SEEK tuning After selecting a PTY name, push the TUNE button or within 10 seconds. Tuning to the PTY station will start. If you do not push the TUNE button within the 10 second period, the PTY mode will be canceled. 3. PTY SCAN tuning mode Push the SCAN tuning button to tune the PTY name station, and stop at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again during this 5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station.

CAUTION
Do not force the cassette tape into the tape door. This could cause player damage. The cassette tape automatically changes directions to play the other side when the first side is complete. At this time, the moving digital squares illuminate on the left side of the display window. PLAY: When the TAPE/CD button is pushed with the radio turned on and the tape loaded, the radio will automatically be turned off and the tape will play. If the TAPE/CD button is pushed during either the FF, REW, APS FF or APS REW function, the cassette tape enters the normal play mode. When the TAPE/CD button is pushed with the CD playing, the tape will play.

Cassette tape player operation

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, then carefully insert a cassette tape into the tape door. The cassette tape automatically pulls into the player. The word TAPE and moving digital squares illuminate on the right side of the display window.

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-25

FF (fast forward), REW (rewind): Push either the FF or REW button for the desired direction. The FF or REW symbol illuminates in the display. To stop the FF or REW function, press the FF or REW button again, or the TAPE/CD button. APS (automatic program search) FF, APS REW: Push either the APS FF or APS REW button while the cassette tape is playing. The tape runs quickly, stops, then plays the next selection. Either the FF or REW symbol flashes in the display while searching for the selection. This system searches at the blank intervals between selections. If there is a blank interval within one selection or there is no interval between selections, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location. PROG (program): Push the PROG button. The moving digital squares illuminate on either the right or left side of the display window to indicate the side of program play. If the PROG button is pushed during either the

FF or REW function the tape enters the normal play mode. Dolby NR (Noise Reduction): Push the Dolby NR button for Dolby NR encoded tapes to reduce high frequency tape noise. The indicator light comes on. Dolby NR is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. DOLBY NR and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Metal or chrome tape usage: The cassette player is automatically set to high performance play when playing a metal or chrome cassette tape. TAPE EJECT: Push the EJECT button. The cassette tape automatically comes out.

tracks will appear on the display. If the radio or tape is already operating, it will automatically turn off and the CD will play.

CAUTION
Do not force the CD into the slot. This could damage the player. If the system has been turned off while the CD was playing, pushing the ONOFF/VOL control knob will start the CD. 8 cm diameter CD can also be used without an adapter. PLAY: When the TAPE/CD button is pushed with the CD loaded in the player or CD autochanger (if so equipped): a) If the TAPE player (if cassette tape is inserted) is turn on, the mode (CD player or CD autochanger) will turn on. b) If the CD player turns on, the CD player will automatically be turned off and the CD autochanger will turn on. c) If the CD autochanger turns on, the CD autochanger will automatically be turned

Compact disc (CD) player/changer operation

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position. To play the CD, push the TAPE/CD button after loading the disc. If the disc loaded, the number of discs and

4-26

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

off and the TAPE player will turn on. When the TAPE/CD button is pushed with the CD loaded in only the CD autochanger, the CD autochanger will turn on. When the TAPE/CD button is pushed with no disc in either the player or CD autochanger, the TAPE player will change the tape side. DISC change: Use these buttons for selecting the compact disc inserted into the CD magazine. FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind): When the (fast forward) or (rewind) button is pushed while the CD is being played, the CD will play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the CD will return to normal play speed. APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS REW: When the (APS FF) button is pushed while the CD is being played, the program next to the present one will start to play from its beginning. Push several times to skip through programs. The CD will advance the number of times the button is pushed. (When the last program on the CD is skipped through, the first

(APS program will be played.) When the REW) button is pushed, the program being played returns to its beginning. Push several times to skip back through programs. The CD disc will go back the number of times the button is pushed. PROG (Program): When the PROG button is pushed while the CD is being played, the play pattern will change as follows: ALL , 1 , RANDOM , OFF , ALL ALL: All the programs will be played repeatedly in sequence. 1: Only one program (the one being played when the PROG button is pushed) will be repeated. RANDOM: Programs will be played at random, not following the sequence on the CD. To change the one disc random or all disc random, push the PROG button for a second. The same program may be repeated twice. When the CD is ejected, the play pattern will automatically change to all. CD EJECT: When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the CD loaded, the CD will be ejected.

When this button is pushed while the CD is being played, the CD will come out and the system will turn off. If the CD comes out and is not removed, it will be pulled back into the slot to protect it. (except 8 cm diameter compact discs) CD IN indicator: CD IN indicator appears on the display when the CD is loaded with the system on.

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-27

Tuning
Memory change (radio): Push the tuning switch or for less than 1.5 seconds to change the radio frequency. Seek tuning (radio): Push the tuning switch or for more than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previous radio station. APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS REW (tape/CD or CD changer):
SAA0451 SAA0545

CD CARE AND CLEANING

Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch the surface of the disc. Do not bend the disc. Always place the discs in the storage case when they are not being used. To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion. Do not use a conventional record cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use. A new disc may be rough on its inner and outer edges. Remove the rough edges using the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

STEERING SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL

The audio system can be operated using the controls on the steering wheel.

Push the tuning switch or for less 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the present program or skip to the next program. Push several times to skip back or skip through programs. This system searches for the blank intervals between selections. If there is a blank interval within one program or there is no interval between programs, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location. FF REW (tape or CD changer): Push the tuning switch or for more than 1.5 seconds to rewind or fast forward the tape or to change the playing disc up or down. To stop the FF or REW function, press the

MODE select switch

Push the mode select switch to change the mode in the sequence of AM, FM1, FM2, CD and CD autochanger (if so equipped) and Tape.

Volume control switches

Push the upper or lower side switch to increase or decrease the volume.

4-28

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

or onds again.

button for more than 1.5 sec-

ANTENNA Window antenna

The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear window.

CAUTION
Do not place metalized film near the rear window glass or attach any metal parts to it. This may cause poor reception or noise. When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window antenna. Lightly wipe along the antenna with a dampened soft cloth.

SAA0412

COMPACT DISC (CD) AUTOCHANGER (if so equipped) CD magazine

Insert the CD magazine into the changer with the label side facing up, as illustrated. Close the sliding lid of the CD autochanger. When ejecting the CD magazine, press the EJECT button located inside the CD autochanger.

SAA0396

Disc loading
Pull the disc holder from the magazine and turn over the magazine. Insert the CD with label side facing up then push the disc holder into the magazine.
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-29

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO Disc removal

Pull the * marked area with your fingers. Use your fingertips to grasp the center part of the disc and remove the disc. When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following cautions, otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the Engine control system and other electronic parts.

CAUTION
Keep the antenna as far as possible away from the Engine Control Module (ECM). Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the Multiport Fuel Injection harness. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness. Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer. Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body. For details, consult an authorized NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION
Do not touch the playing surface of the disc. Do not use 8 cm discs. They may cause player damage even if using with the optional adapter.

WARNING
A cellular telephone should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular telephones while driving. If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode (if so equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. If a conversation in a moving vehicle requires you to take notes, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so.

4-30

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving...................... 5-2 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide).......................... 5-2 Three way catalyst ............................................... 5-3 Avoiding collision and rollover.............................. 5-3 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ....................... 5-4 Ignition switch............................................................ 5-4 Automatic transmission ........................................ 5-4 Manual transmission ............................................ 5-5 Key positions ........................................................ 5-6 Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System .................... 5-6 Before starting the engine......................................... 5-7 Starting the engine .................................................... 5-7 Driving the vehicle..................................................... 5-8 Automatic transmission ........................................ 5-8 Manual transmission .......................................... 5-11 Parking brake .......................................................... 5-12 Cruise control .......................................................... 5-13 Precautions on cruise control............................. 5-13 Cruise control operations ................................... 5-14 Break-in schedule ................................................... 5-15 Increasing fuel economy ......................................... 5-15 Parking/parking on hills ........................................... 5-16 Power steering ........................................................ 5-17 Brake system .......................................................... 5-18

Braking precautions............................................ Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ........................... Traction control system (if so equipped)................. Cold weather driving ............................................... Freeing a frozen door lock ................................. Anti-freeze .......................................................... Battery ................................................................ Draining of coolant water ................................... Tire equipment ................................................... Special winter equipment ................................... Driving on snow or ice ....................................... Engine block heater (if so equipped) .................

5-18 5-18 5-19 5-20 5-20 5-20 5-20 5-20 5-20 5-21 5-21 5-21

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING
Do not leave children, impaired adults, or pets alone in your vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked with the trunk closed when not in use, and prevent childrens access to car keys.

tain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death. If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately. Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage. Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time. Keep the trunk lid closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with the trunk lid open, follow these precautions: 1. Open all the windows. 2. Set the air recirculation switch OFF and the fan control at 4 (high) to circulate the air. If electrical wiring or other cable con-

nections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the trunk lid or the body, follow the manufacturers recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle. If a special body or other equipment is added for recreational or other usage, follow the manufacturers recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle. (Some recreational vehicle appliances such as stoves, refrigerator, heaters, etc. may also generate carbon monoxide.) The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever: a. The vehicle is raised for service. b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment. c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system.

EXHAUST GAS (Carbon monoxide)

WARNING
Do not breathe exhaust gases; they con-

5-2

Starting and driving

d. You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

CAUTION
Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline seriously reduce the three way catalysts ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants. Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected promptly by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three way catalyst. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER

WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident. Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with any vehicle, a loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects, or cause the vehicle to rollover, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt. See Seat Belts in the 1. Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems section. Also instruct your passengers to do so.
Starting and driving

THREE WAY CATALYST

The three way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the converter are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING
The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components. Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

5-3

IGNITION SWITCH DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING

your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgment. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in the accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury. NISSAN is committed to safe driving. You must not drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol related accidents. Although the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol. Remember, drinking and driving dont mix! And thats true for drugs too (over the counter, prescription, and illegal drugs). Dont drive if

SSD0083

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
On automatic transmission models, the ignition lock is designed so that the key cannot be turned to LOCK and removed until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park) position. When removing the key from the ignition, make sure the selector lever is in the P (Park) position. If the selector lever is not returned to P (Park) position, the key cannot be moved toward LOCK. When the key cannot be turned toward the

5-4

Starting and driving

LOCK position, proceed as follows to remove the key: 1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park) position. 2. Turn the ignition key slightly in the ON direction. 3. Turn the key toward the LOCK position. 4. Remove the key. If the key is removed from the ignition switch, the selector lever cannot be moved from P (Park) position. The selector lever can be moved if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed. There is an OFF position in between LOCK and ACC, although it does not show on the lock cylinder. When the ignition is in OFF the steering wheel is not locked. In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/6 of a turn counterclockwise from the straight up position. To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to the LOCK position. Remove the key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steering wheel slightly right and left.

WARNING
Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK position while driving. The steering wheel will lock. This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage and/or personal injury.

SSD0082C

MANUAL TRANSMISSION
The switch includes an anti-theft steering lock device. LOCK Normal parking position (0) The ignition key can only be removed when the switch is in this position. On manual transmission models, to turn the ignition key to LOCK from ACC or ON, first turn the key to OFF and turn the key to LOCK while pushing the key in. In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/6 of a turn clockwise from the straight up position.
Starting and driving

5-5

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to the LOCK position. Remove the key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steering wheel slightly right and left.

KEY POSITIONS
The switch includes an anti-theft steering lock device. LOCK (Normal parking position) (0) The ignition key can only be removed when the switch is in this position. OFF (1) The engine can be turned off without locking the steering wheel. ACC (Accessories) (2) This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running. ON (Normal operating position) (3) This position turns on the ignition system and the electrical accessories. START (4) This position activates the starter motor, starting the engine.

the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key. If the engine fails to start using the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key, it may be due to interference caused by another Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key, an automated toll road device or automated payment device on the key ring. Restart the engine using the following procedures: 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 10 seconds. 3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again. 4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key. If this procedure allows the engine to start, NISSAN recommends placing the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.

WARNING
Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK position while driving. The steering wheel will lock. This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage and/or personal injury.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM

The Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of

5-6

Starting and driving

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear. Maintenance items should be checked periodically, e.g., each time you check engine oil. Check that all windows and lights are clean. Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also, check tires for proper inflation. Lock all doors. Position seat and adjust head restraints. Adjust inside and outside mirrors. Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise. Check the operation of warning lights when key is turned to the ON (3) position.

STARTING THE ENGINE

1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Automatic transmission: Move the selector lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). (P preferred.) The starter is designed not to operate if the selector lever is in one of the driving positions. Manual transmission: Move the shift lever to N (Neutral) position, and depress the clutch pedal to the floor while cranking the engine. The starter is designed not to operate unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed. 3. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to START. Release the key when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure. If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold or hot weather, depress the accelerator pedal and hold it to help start the engine. 4. Warm-up Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather.

CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, turn the key off and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged.

Starting and driving

5-7

DRIVING THE VEHICLE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Gate type shift

The automatic transmission in your vehicle is electronically controlled by a transmission control module to produce maximum power and smooth operation. Shown on the following pages are the recommended operating procedures for this transmission. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment. 1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and shift into a driving gear. 2. Release the parking brake and foot brake, then gradually start the vehicle in motion. is running and the brake pedal is depressed, the stoplights may not work. Malfunctioning stoplights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

WARNING
Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P or N to R, D or manual shift mode. Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident. Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up. On slippery roads, do not downshift. This may cause a loss of control. Never shift to P or R while vehicle is moving. This could cause an accident. If the selector lever cannot be moved from the P position while the engine

CAUTION
When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brakes should be used for this purpose.

Starting the vehicle

After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal before shifting the selector lever to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive), 3, 2 or 1 position. Be sure the vehicle is fully stopped before attempting to shift the selector lever. This automatic transmission model is designed so that the foot brake pedal must be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to any drive position while the ignition switch is ON. The selector lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) position and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition key is turned to the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the key is removed from the switch.

5-8

Starting and driving

or roll away and result in serious personal injury and/or property damage. If the key is turned to OFF or ACC for any reason while the vehicle is in R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or any D (Drive) position, the key cannot be turned to LOCK and be removed from the ignition switch. Additionally, the selector lever cannot be moved to P (Park) from N (Neutral) or any D (Drive) position. The selector lever can be moved from R (Reverse) to P (Park) with the key in the OFF or ACC position. If the key cannot be turned to LOCK, perform the following steps: 1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is stopped. 2. Turn the key to ON while depressing the foot brake pedal. 3. Move the selector lever to P (Park). 4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK to remove the key. P (Park): Use this selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake

pedal must be depressed to move the selector lever from N (Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first, then move the lever to the P (Park) position.

CAUTION
Use this position only when the vehicle is completely stopped. R (Reverse): Use this position to back up. Always be sure the vehicle is completely stopped when selecting R (Reverse). The brake pedal must be depressed to move the selector lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to R (Reverse). N (Neutral): Neither forward or reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving. D (Drive): Use this position for all normal forward driving.
Starting and driving

SSD0231

Shifting
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake pedal and shift the selector lever from P (Park) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), or any of the desired shift positions.

WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the selector lever is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly

5-9

3 (Third gear): For driving up or down long slopes where engine braking would be advantageous. 2 (Second gear): Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades. Do not exceed 68 MPH (110 km/h) in the 2 (Second gear) position. 1 (Low gear): Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades. Do not exceed 37 MPH (60 km/h) in the 1 (Low gear) position.

WARNING
If the selector lever cannot be moved from the P position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

Accelerator downshift In D position

SSD0232

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged, the select lever may not be moved from the P (Park) position even with the brake pedal depressed. To move the select lever, depress the brake pedal, and push the shift lock release button. The select lever can be moved to N (Neutral). This allows the vehicle to be moved if the battery is discharged. If the lever cannot be moved out of P (Park), have your NISSAN dealer check the automatic transmission system as soon as possible.

For rapid passing or hill climbing, fully depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into second gear or first gear, depending on the vehicle speed.

Fail-safe
When the fail-safe operation occurs, the next time the key is turned to the ON position, the light will blink for approximately 8 seconds after coming on for 2 seconds. While the vehicle can be driven under these circumstances please note that the automatic transmission will be locked in third gear. If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe

5-10

Starting and driving

system may be activated. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, turn the ignition key OFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then turn the key back to the ON position. The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have your NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair if necessary.

The pull ring returns to its original position when the shift lever is moved to the N position. If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R (Reverse) or 1 (Low gear), shift into N (Neutral), then release the clutch pedal and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (Low gear) again.

WARNING
Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.
SSD0233

MANUAL TRANSMISSION Shifting

To change gears, or when up shifting or down shifting fully depress the clutch pedal, shift into the appropriate gear then slowly and smoothly release the clutch. Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th up to 6th gear in sequence according to the vehicle speed. To back up, stop the vehicle and shift the lever into the N position, and then pull the ring upward to shift into the R position.

Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear. This may cause a loss of control or engine damage.

CAUTION
Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This may damage the clutch. Stop your vehicle completely before shifting into R (Reverse).

Starting and driving

5-11

PARKING BRAKE
When the vehicle is stopped for a period of time, for example at a stop light, shift to N (Neutral) and release the clutch pedal with the foot brake applied. Gear change 1st to 2nd 2nd to 3rd 3rd to 4th 4th to 5th 5th to 6th MPH 15 25 40 45 50 (km/h) (24) (40) (64) (72) (80)

Suggested up-shift speeds

Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance. Actual up-shift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather and individual driving habits. For normal acceleration in low altitude areas [less than 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]: Gear change 1st to 2nd 2nd to 3rd 3rd to 4th 4th to 5th 5th to 6th ACCEL shift point MPH (km/h) 13 (21) 23 (37) 33 (53) 39 (63) 50 (80) CRUISE shift point MPH (km/h) 13 (21) 16 (26) 27 (43) 36 (58) 50 (80)

Suggested maximum speed in each gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate. Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the highest gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits, and drive according to the road conditions, which will ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control. Gear 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th MPH (km/h) 30 (48) 55 (88) 80 (128)
SSD0018

To apply: pull the lever up. To release: 1. Firmly apply foot brake. 2. Automatic transmission models: Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position. Manual transmission models: Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position. 3. While pulling up on the lever slightly, push the button and lower completely.

For quick acceleration when the engine is cold or in high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:

5-12

Starting and driving

CRUISE CONTROL
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out.

WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions: it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed. in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed. on winding or hilly roads. on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.). in very windy areas. Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

engine damage.

WARNING
Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident. Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle. Do not use the gear shift in place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged. Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle. They could release the parking brake and cause an accident.

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL

If the cruise control system malfunctions, it cancels automatically. The SET indicator light on the meter panel then blinks to warn the driver. If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the cruise control main switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. The SET indicator light may blink when the cruise control main switch is turned on while pushing the RES/ACCEL, COAST/ SET, or CANCEL switch (located on the steering wheel). To properly set the cruise control system, perform the preceding steps in the order indicated.

CAUTION
On manual transmission models, do not shift into N (Neutral) without depressing the clutch pedal when the cruise control is set. Should this occur, depress the clutch pedal and turn the main switch off immediately. Failure to do so may cause

Starting and driving

5-13

 To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed. The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the cruise control. To cancel the preset speed, follow either of these three methods: a) Push the cancel switch; The SET indicator light will go out.
SSD0193

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: a) Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the COAST/SET switch. b) Push and hold the RES/ACCEL set switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch. c) Push, then quickly release the RES/ACCEL set switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: a) Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. b) Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed. c) Push, then quickly release the COAST/ SET switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES/ACCEL set switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when

b) Tap the brake pedal; The SET indicator light will go out. c) Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISE indicator and SET indicator lights will go out. If you depress the brake pedal while pushing the RES/ACCEL set switch and reset at the cruising speed, turn the main switch off once and then turn it on again. The cruise control will automatically be cancelled if the vehicle slows down below approximately 8 MPH (13 km/h). Depress the clutch pedal (manual transmission), or move the selector lever to N (Neutral) position (automatic transmission). The SET indicator light will go out.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. To turn on the cruise control, push the main switch on. The CRUISE indicator light on the meter panel will come on. To set at cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. (The SET indicator light will come on.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.

5-14

Starting and driving

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h). During the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km), follow these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow. Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear. Avoid quick starts. Avoid hard braking as much as possible. Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km).

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

SD1001M

Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position. Drive at moderate speeds on the highway. Driving at high speed will lower fuel economy. Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a safe distance behind other vehicles. Use a proper gear range which suits road conditions. On level roads, shift into high gear as soon as possible. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
Starting and driving

5-15

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
Keep your engine tuned up. Follow the recommended periodic maintenance schedule. Keep the tires inflated at the correct pressure. Low pressure will increase tire wear and waste fuel. Keep the front wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment will cause not only tire wear but also lower fuel economy. Air conditioner operation lowers fuel economy. Use the air conditioner only when necessary. When cruising at highway speeds, it is more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to reduce drag.
MSD0002

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

WARNING
Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire. Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

2. Automatic transmission models: Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position. Manual transmission models: Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) position. When parking on an uphill grade, place the shift lever in the 1 (Low gear) position.

5-16

Starting and driving

POWER STEERING

WARNING
Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P (Park) for automatic transmission models or in an appropriate gear for manual transmission models. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. Make sure the automatic transmission selector lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the button at the end of the lever. 3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into the street when parked on a sloping drive way, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
1 HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: k

2 HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: k

Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb. HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO 3 CURB: k Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves. 4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove the key.

The power assisted steering is designed to use a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering. If the engine stops or drive belt breaks, you will still have control of the vehicle. However, much greater steering effort is needed, especially in sharp turns or at low speeds.

WARNING
If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be much harder to operate.

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.
Starting and driving

5-17

BRAKE SYSTEM BRAKING PRECAUTIONS

The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking at two wheels. Vacuum assisted brake The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and the stopping distance will be longer. Wet brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking. To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat-up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly. Using the brakes Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This overheats the brakes, increases wear on the brake linings and pads, and reduces gas mileage. To help save the brakes and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control. system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

WARNING
While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident. If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder.

WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances.

Normal operation
The anti-lock brake system will not operate at speeds below 3 to 6 MPH (5 to 10 km/h) to completely stop the vehicle. (The speeds will vary according to road conditions.) When the anti-lock system senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator (under the hood) rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure (like pumping the brakes very quickly). While the actuator is working, you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from the actuator under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the anti-lock system is working properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

The anti-lock brake system controls the brakes at each wheel so the wheels will not lock when braking abruptly or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing wheel lockup, the

5-18

Starting and driving

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (if so equipped)

conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving. cidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces, but remember that the stopping distance on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces, even with the anti-lock system. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the responsibility for safety of self and others rests in the hands of the driver. Tire type and condition of tires may also affect braking effectiveness. When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels. When installing a spare tire, make sure it is the proper size and type as specified on the tire placard. See Vehicle identification in the 10. Technical and consumer information section for tire placard location. On slippery surfaces such as wet asphalt roads, vehicle wheels may spin when the vehicle is accelerated. This wheel spin reduces acceleration, or causes the vehicle to swerve, thus decreasing vehicle stability. The traction control system helps limit wheel spin on slippery roads. The system operates only if it senses one or both of the front wheels spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the system reduces engine power and may also upshift the transmission to help limit wheel spin. Indicator light If a malfunction occurs in the traction conindicator trol system, the SLIP and lights come on in the meter panel. As long as these warning lights are on, the traction control function is canceled. The vehicle will behaves like a model without the traction control system.

Self-test feature
The anti-lock brake system consists of electronic sensors, electric pumps, and hydraulic solenoids controlled by a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of any malfunction. If the computer senses any malfunction, it switches the antilock brake system OFF and turns on the ABS warning light in the dashboard. The brake system will then behave normally, but without anti-lock assistance. If the light comes on during the self check, or while you are driving, you should take your vehicle to your NISSAN dealer for repair at your earliest convenience.

CAUTION
The traction control system is most effective when the transmission gear selector is in the D position. If you drive in gear 1 or 2 with the TCS
Starting and driving

WARNING
The anti-lock brake system is a sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent ac-

5-19

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

on, this could cause the three way catalyst to overheat and be damaged. To avoid this, the TCS will automatically turn off. Shifting the gear selector to D will reactivate the TCS.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer or glycerin to it through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole.

for changing engine coolant.

TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires are of a tread design to provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels. Please consult your NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability information. 2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some provinces and states prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires. 3. Tire chains may be used if desired. Make sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturers suggestions. Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire

ANTI-FREEZE

WARNING
This system is designed to prevent the wheels from spinning. However, it does not prevent vehicle slipping or spinning due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Be especially careful when driving on slippery surfaces and always drive safely.

In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32F (0C), check anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection. For additional information, see Engine Cooling System in the 8. Maintenance and do-ityourself section.

BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. For additional information, see Battery in the 8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself section.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-freeze, drain the cooling system by opening the drain valves located under the radiator and on the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. See Engine cooling system in the 8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself section

5-20

Starting and driving

chains, make sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturers suggestions. Use only SAE Class S chains. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected. Never install tire chains on a T-type spare tire. Do not use tire chains on dry roads.

a shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts. extra window washer fluid to refill the reservoir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING
Wet ice (32F, 0C and freezing rain), very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have a lot less traction or grip under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded. Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction. Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement. Allow greater following distances on slippery roads.

Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while actually on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads. Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so equipped)

An engine block heater to assist extreme cold temperature starting is available through your NISSAN dealer.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter: a scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades. a sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support.

WARNING
Do not use your heater with an ungrounded electrical system or twoStarting and driving

5-21

pronged (cheater) adapters. You can be injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection.

5-22

Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Flat tire ...................................................................... Changing a flat tire ............................................... Jump starting............................................................. Push starting .............................................................

6-2 6-2 6-6 6-8

If your vehicle overheats ........................................... 6-9 Towing your vehicle ................................................ 6-10 Towing recommended by NISSAN .................... 6-10 Vehicle recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle) ........ 6-11

FLAT TIRE CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below. verse), or the automatic transmission into P (Park). Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous. Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road away from traffic. 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. 3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Shift the manual transmission into R (Reverse) position (automatic transmission in P (Park) position). 4. Turn off the engine. 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance. 6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

MCE0001

Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up.

WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and could cause personal injury.

WARNING
Make sure that the parking brake is securely applied and the manual transmission is shifted into R (Re-

6-2

In case of emergency

CE1089

Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire

Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instructions.
SCE0299 SCE0288

Getting the spare tire and tools

Remove jacking tools and spare tire from the storage area located inside the trunk as illustrated.

1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point as illustrated above so that top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack up point. Align the jack head between the two notches in the front or the rear as shown. Also fit the groove of the jack head between the notches as shown.

In case of emergency

6-3

 Use the correct jack up points; never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support. Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary. Never use blocks on or under the jack. Do not start or run engine while vehicle is on the jack, as it may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slid differential carriers. Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack.

CE1092

The jack should be used on level firm ground. 2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground. 3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands as shown above. Remove the wheel nuts, and then remove the tire.

WARNING
Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed only for lifting your vehicle during a tire change.

6-4

In case of emergency

WARNING
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident. Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose. As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench. Wheel nut tightening torque: 80 ft-lb (108 Nm) Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure. COLD pressure: After vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire placard affixed to the center console lid.

WARNING
Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).

SCE0039

Installing the spare tire

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub. 2. Carefully put the wheel on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight. 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly until they are tight. 4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence as illustrated.

In case of emergency

6-5

JUMP STARTING
spare tire are designed for emergency use. See Wheels and tires in the 8. Maintenance and do-ityourself section. To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be followed.

WARNING
If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle. Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery. Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, cloth or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulphuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water. Keep battery out of the reach of children.

SCE0040

Stowing the damaged tire and tools

Securely store the spare tire and jacking equipment in the vehicle.

WARNING
Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly secured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop. The T-type spare tire and small size

6-6

In case of emergency

 The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle. Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting. Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause serious injury. Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it.
SCE0154A

WARNING
Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury. 1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the two vehicles to bring their batteries into close proximity to each other. Do not allow the two vehicles to touch. 2. Apply parking brake. Move the shift lever to

the N (Neutral) position (On automatic transmission models, move the selector lever to the P (Park) position). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (light, heater, air conditioner, etc.). 3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so equipped). Cover the battery with an old cloth to reduce explosion hazard. 4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as illustrated.

In case of emergency

6-7

PUSH STARTING

CAUTION
Always connect positive (+) to positive (+) and negative () to body ground (for example, strut mounting bolt, etc. not to the battery). Make sure that cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that clamps do not contact any other metal. 5. Start the engine of the other vehicle and let it run for a few minutes. 6. Keep the engine speed of the other vehicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start your engine in the normal manner.

7. After starting your engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable. 8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid.

Do not start the engine by pushing.

CAUTION
Automatic transmission models cannot be push started. This may cause transmission damage. Three way catalyst equipped models should not be started by pushing since the three way catalyst may be damaged. Never try to start the vehicle by towing it; when the engine starts, the forward surge could cause the vehicle to collide with the tow vehicle.

CAUTION
Do not keep starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, turn the key off and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

6-8

In case of emergency

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

WARNING
Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause a vehicle fire. To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the radiator cap while the engine is still hot. When the radiator cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury. Do not open the hood if steam is coming out. If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take the following steps: 1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position (automatic transmission to the P (Park) position). Do not stop the engine. 2. Turn off the air conditioner switch. Open all the windows, move the heater or air condi-

tioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed. 3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. Wait until no steam or coolant can be seen before proceeding. 4. Open the engine hood.

contact with, or to get caught in the cooling fan, or drive belt. The engine cooling fan can start at any time when the coolant temperature is high. 6. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the reservoir tank with the engine running. Add coolant to the reservoir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at the nearest NISSAN dealer.

WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting burned. 5. Visually check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine.

WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into
In case of emergency

6-9

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in Canada) and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from an authorized NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions. and powertrain are in working condition. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used. Always attach safety chains before towing.

WARNING
Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed. Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck.
SCE0202

CAUTION
When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

6-10

In case of emergency

ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or backward) as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised, always use towing dollies under the front wheels. When towing automatic transmission models with the front wheels on towing dollies, or when towing manual transmission models with the front wheels on the ground: Turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by turning the ignition key to the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanism. Move the gearshift lever to the N (Neutral) position. When towing automatic or manual

transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground (if you do not use towing dollies): Always release the parking brake.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (Freeing a stuck vehicle)

Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle. Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or cooling systems. Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull on the vehicle at an angle. Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery. Stand clear of an stuck vehicle.

SCE0199

CAUTION
Never tow automatic transmission models with the front wheels on the

In case of emergency

6-11

WARNING
Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.

6-12

In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ....................................................... Washing................................................................ Waxing.................................................................. Removing spots.................................................... Underbody ............................................................ Glass .................................................................... Aluminum alloy wheels......................................... Chrome parts........................................................ Cleaning interior ........................................................

7-2 7-2 7-2 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-4 7-4 7-4

Floor mats ............................................................ Seat belts ............................................................. Corrosion protection .................................................. Most common factors contributing to vehicle corrosion............................................................... Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion............................................................... To protect your vehicle from corrosion ................

7-4 7-5 7-5 7-5 7-5 7-6

CLEANING EXTERIOR
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area. When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover. Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover. Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so that the paint surface is not scratched or damaged. Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of clean water. Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be regularly cleaned. Make sure that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt. Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle.

WASHING
Thoroughly rinse surface dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and plenty of clean water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap such as Nissan Car Wash, or a general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

MAI0001

In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it. In the following cases, please wash your vehicle as soon as possible to protect the paint surface. After a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain After driving on coastal roads When contaminants such as soot, bird droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface When dust or mud builds up on the surface

CAUTION
Do not use strong household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents. Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted.

WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. After waxing, polishing is recommended to remove built-up residue and to avoid a weathered appearance. If you wish to wax your vehicle, only use a wax

7-2

Appearance and care

specified for use over clear coats, such as Nissan Liquid or Spray Wax. Your Nissan dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product. Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax. Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish. If the surface does not polish easily, use a road tar remover and wax again. Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

causing underbody and suspension corrosion. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

SAI0014A

GLASS
When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier to clean if the high-mounted stop light is removed first. Be careful when removing the high-mounted stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the high-mounted stop light wires. The high-mounted stop light must be properly reinstalled before driving your vehicle. Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner
Appearance and care

REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at your NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store.

UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, the underbody must be cleaned regularly. This will prevent dirt and salt from building up and

7-3

CLEANING INTERIOR
and a soft cloth will easily remove this film. Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry soft cloth. Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturers recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material. Use a cloth dampened only with water, to clean the meter and gauge lens.

FLOOR MATS
The use of Genuine Nissan floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. No matter what mats are used, be sure they are fitted for your vehicle and are properly positioned in the footwell to prevent interference with pedal operation. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.

CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the window, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defogger elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash regularly, especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. Salt could discolor the wheel if not removed.

CAUTION
Never use gasoline, thinner, or any similar material. The leather seats should be regularly coated with a leather wax like saddle soap. Never use car wax. Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer. Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens cover.

CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

7-4

Appearance and care

CORROSION PROTECTION SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely before using them.

MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION:

The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas. Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents.

WARNING
Do not allow wet belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or chemical solvents since these may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.
SAI0012

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION: Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle, and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.

Floor mat positioning aid (Driver side only)

This model includes a front floor mat bracket to act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your vehicle model. The drivers side floor mat has a grommet hole incorporated in it. Simply position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket through the floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in the floorpan contour. Periodically check to make certain that the mats are properly positioned.

Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used.
Appearance and care

7-5

Temperature
A temperature increase will accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

CAUTION
NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom. Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them. Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders. In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically. For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, consult your local NISSAN dealer.

Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will also accelerate the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION:

Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean. Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible. Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation. Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible.

7-6

Appearance and care

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements........................................ 8-2 General maintenance ................................................ 8-2 Explanation of general maintenance items .......... 8-2 Maintenance precautions .......................................... 8-5 Engine compartment check locations ....................... 8-7 Engine cooling system .............................................. 8-8 Checking engine coolant level ............................. 8-8 Changing engine coolant ..................................... 8-9 Engine oil ................................................................ 8-10 Checking engine oil level ................................... 8-10 Changing engine oil ........................................... 8-11 Changing engine oil filter ................................... 8-12 Automatic transmission fluid ................................... 8-12 Temperature conditions for checking ................. 8-13 Power steering fluid ................................................ 8-14 Brake and clutch fluid ............................................. 8-14 Window washer fluid ............................................... 8-15 Battery ..................................................................... 8-15 Drive belts ............................................................... 8-17 Spark plugs ............................................................. 8-17 Replacing spark plugs ........................................ 8-18

Air cleaner ............................................................... Windshield wiper blades ......................................... Cleaning ............................................................. Replacing............................................................ Parking brake and brake pedal............................... Checking parking brake ..................................... Checking brake pedal ........................................ Brake booster ..................................................... Clutch pedal ............................................................ Fuses....................................................................... Engine compartment .......................................... Passenger compartment .................................... Keyfob battery replacement .................................... Lights ....................................................................... Headlights........................................................... Exterior and interior lights .................................. Wheels and tires ..................................................... Tire pressure ...................................................... Types of tires...................................................... Tire chains .......................................................... Changing wheels and tires.................................

8-18 8-19 8-19 8-20 8-21 8-21 8-21 8-22 8-22 8-22 8-23 8-24 8-24 8-26 8-27 8-28 8-33 8-33 8-33 8-34 8-35

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Your new NISSAN has been designed to have minimum maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save you both time and money. However, some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your NISSANs good mechanical condition, as well as its emission and engine performance. It is the owners responsibility to make sure that scheduled maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed. As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper maintenance care. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain. Scheduled maintenance: For your convenience, both required and optional scheduled maintenance items are described and listed in your Service and Maintenance Guide. You must refer to that guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals. General maintenance: General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal dayto-day operation of the vehicle. They are essential if your vehicle is to continue to operate properly. It is your responsibility to perform these procedures regularly as prescribed. Performing general maintenance checks require minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools. These checks or inspections can be done by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, your NISSAN dealer. Where to go for service: If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and tuned by an authorized NISSAN dealer. NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership training programs. They are completely qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before they work on your vehicle, rather than after they have worked on it. You can be confident that your NISSAN dealers service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements of your vehicle in a reliable and economic way.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smell, be sure to check for the cause or have your NISSAN dealer check it promptly. In addition, you should notify your NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required. When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe the Maintenance precautions later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following items with * is found later in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified. Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge at least once a month and always prior to long distance trips, including the spare, and adjust to the specified pressure if necessary. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear. Wheel nuts*: When checking the tires, make sure no nuts are missing, and check for any loose nuts. Tighten if necessary.

8-2

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle pulls to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed. For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information in the Warranty Information Booklet (US) or Tire Safety Information in the Warranty and Roadside Assistance Information booklet (Canada). Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility. Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. Doors and engine hood: Check that all doors and the engine hood operate smoothly as well as the trunk lid or back hatch. Also make sure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch

keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released. When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently. Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim.

play, hard steering or strange noises. Seats: Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks (if equipped) hold securely in all latched positions. Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage. Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mats away from the pedal. Clutch pedal*: Make sure the pedal operates smoothly and check that it has the proper free play. Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied. Brake pedal and booster*: Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure it has the proper distance under it when depressed fully. Check the brake booster function. Be sure to keep floor mats away from the pedal.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc. Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that all warning lights and chimes are operating properly. Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak. Windshield defroster: Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in good quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner. Steering wheel: Check for changes in the steering conditions, such as excessive free

8-3

Parking brake*: Check that the lever has the proper travel and make sure that the vehicle is held securely on a fairly steep hill when only the parking brake is applied. Automatic transaxle P (Park) position mechanism: On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level. Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily. Engine oil level*: Check the level on the dipstick after parking the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the engine. Power steering fluid level* and lines: Check the level in the reservoir tank with the engine off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. Automatic transaxle fluid level*: Check the level on the dipstick after putting the selector lever in P (Park) position with the engine idling. Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately locate the trouble and correct it. (See Precautions when starting and driving in the 5. Starting and driving section for exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).) Underbody: The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances, otherwise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel

lines and around the exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, being careful to clean those areas where mud and dirt may accumulate. For additional information, see Cleaning exterior in the 7. Appearance and care section. Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately.

Under the hood and the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel). Windshield washer fluid*: Check that there is adequate fluid in the tank. Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level when the engine is cold. Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, deterioration or loose connections. Brake and clutch fluid levels*: Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid levels are between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir. Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX and MIN lines.

8-4

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed. nect the negative battery cable before working near the fan. If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts. It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle. Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle. If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape. Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands. Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks away from fuel and the battery. On gasoline engine models with the Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System, the fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off.

WARNING
Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. For a manual transmission, move the shift lever to N (Neutral) position. For an automatic transmission, move the selector lever to P (Park) position. Be sure the ignition key is OFF or LOCK when performing any parts replacement or repairs. Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition key is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always discon-

CAUTION
Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn off the engine and wait until it cools down. Never connect or disconnect either the battery or any transistorized component connector while the ignition key is on. Never leave the engine or the automatic transmission related component harness connector disconnected while the ignition key is on. Avoid direct contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improperly disposed
Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-5

engine oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle fluids can hurt the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid. This 8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform. A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also available. See Owners Manual/Service Manual order information in the 9. Technical and consurner information section. You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect your warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, have it done by your NISSAN dealer.

8-6

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

SDI1337

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-7

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, year-round, antifreeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors, therefore additional cooling system additives are not necessary.

WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. See If your vehicle overheats in the 6. In case of emergency section. The radiator is equipped with a pressure cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap.
SDI0960

CAUTION
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only a genuine NISSAN antifreeze coolant or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized water/distilled water. The use of other types of coolant solutions may damage your engine cooling system.
Demineralized water/ distilled water 50%

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below MIN, add coolant up to the MAX level. If the reservoir tank is empty, check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir tank up to the MAX level. If the engine cooling system frequently requires coolant, have it checked by your NISSAN dealer.

Outside temperature down to C 35 F 30

Antifreeze

50%

8-8

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

 Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheating.

radiator, and remove radiator filler cap. Be careful not to allow coolant to contact drive belts. Waste coolant must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations. 3. Close the radiator drain valve securely after the coolant is drained. 4. Fill the radiator slowly with the proper mixture of anti-freeze solution and demineralized water/distilled water. Fill the reservoir tank up to the MAX level. Then install the radiator filler cap. 5. Start the engine and warm it up until it reaches normal operating temperature. Then race the engine 2 or 3 times under no load. Watch the engine coolant temperature gauge for signs of overheating. 6. Stop the engine. After it completely cools down, refill the radiator up to the filler opening. Fill the reservoir tank up to the MAX level. Check the drain valve for any sign of leakage. 7. Recheck the coolant level after the vehicle has been driven for a day.

WARNING
To avoid being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. Keep coolant out of reach of children and pets. 1. Perform the following procedure to open the heater water cock. Turn the ignition key from OFF to ON. Move the heater or air conditioner temperature control dial to the maximum hot position then turn the ignition key to OFF. 2. Open radiator drain valve at the bottom of

SDI0114

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

Major cooling system repairs should be performed by your NISSAN dealer. The service procedures can be found in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-9

ENGINE OIL

CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating with insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.

SDI0115

SDI0534

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply parking brake. 2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature. 3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be between the H and L marks. If the oil level is below the L mark, remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening. Do not overfill. 6. Recheck oil level with dipstick. It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.

8-10

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

6. Remove the drain plug with a wrench and completely drain the oil. If oil filter is to be changed, remove and replace it at this time. See later in Engine oil for changing engine oil filter.

refill capacity. The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine the proper amount of oil in the engine. 9. Start the engine. Check for leakage around the drain plug. Correct as required. 10.Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary. 11.Dispose of waste oil properly.

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot. Waste oil must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations. 7. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Drain plug tightening torque: 22 to 29 ft-lb (29 to 39 Nm) Do not use excessive force. 8. Refill engine with recommended oil and install the cap securely. See Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the 9. Technical and consumer information section for drain and

SDI0974

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature. 3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. 4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug. 5. Remove the oil filler cap.

WARNING
Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. Keep used engine oil out of reach of children.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-11

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil may be hot. 4. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with a clean rag. Be sure to remove any old rubber gasket remaining on the mounting surface of the engine.
SDI0975

5. Coat the rubber gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil. 6. Screw in the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten additionally more than 2/3 turn. Oil filter tightening torque: 10.85 to 15.19 ft-lb (14.7 to 20.6 Nm) 7. Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter. Correct as required. 8. Turn the engine off and wait several minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if necessary.

SDI1051

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Turn the engine off. 3. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench. (Depending on the engine model, a special cap type wrench may be required. See your NISSAN dealer if in doubt.) Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

WARNING
When engine is running, keep hands, jewelry and clothing away from any moving parts such as cooling fan and drive belt. Automatic transmission fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children.

8-12

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS FOR CHECKING

The fluid level should be checked using the HOT range on the dipstick after the following conditions have been met: a) the engine should be warmed up to operating temperature. b) the vehicle should be driven at least 5 minutes. c) the automatic transmission fluid should be warmed to between 122 and 176F (50 and 80C). The fluid can be checked at fluid temperatures of 86 to 122F (30 to 50C) using the COLD range on the dipstick after the engine is warmed up and before driving. However, the fluid should be re-checked using the HOT range. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the parking brake. 2. Start the engine and then move the selector lever through each gear range. Move the selector lever to P (Park) position after you have moved it through all ranges.

CAUTION
Do not overfill. Use only NISSAN Matic D (Continental US and Alaska) or Canada Nissan automatic transmission fluid. DexronTMIII/MerconTM or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental US and Alaska contact a NISSAN dealer for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of DexronTM III/MerconTM automatic transmission fluid. NOTE: If the vehicle has been driven for a long time at high speeds, or in city traffic in hot weather, or if it is being used to pull a trailer, the accurate fluid level cannot be read. You should wait until the fluid has cooled down (about 30 minutes).

SDI1343

3. Check the fluid level with the engine idling. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean with lint-free paper. 5. Reinsert the dipstick into the charging pipe as far as it will go. 6. Remove the dipstick and note the reading. If the level is at the low side of either range, add fluid to the charging pipe.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-13

POWER STEERING FLUID

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID

tem and affect the vehicles stopping ability.

CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, wash with water.

SDI1076

SDI0119

Check the fluid level in the reservoir tank. The fluid level should be checked using the HOT range at fluid temperatures of 122 to 176F (50 to 80C) or using the COLD range at fluid temperatures of 32 to 86F (0 to 30C).

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is below the MIN line or the brake warning light comes on, add DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be thoroughly checked by your NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION
Do not overfill. Use Genuine Nissan PSFII or equivalent.

WARNING
Use only new fluid. Old, inferior, or contaminated fluid may damage the brake and clutch systems. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake sys-

8-14

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

BATTERY

WARNING
Anti-freeze is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children.

Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Any corrosion should be washed off with a solution of baking soda and water. Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened. If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the () negative battery terminal cable to prevent discharging it.

CAUTION
Do not substitute engine anti-freeze coolant for window washer solution. This may result in damage to the paint.

WARNING
Do not expose the battery to flames or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas generated by battery action is explosive. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the batMaintenance and do-it-yourself

SDI0961A

Add fluid when the low washer fluid warning light comes on. Add a washer solvent to the water for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer anti-freeze. Follow the manufacturers instructions for the mixture ratio.

8-15

tery which can generate heat, reduce battery life, and in some cases lead to an explosion. When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.
DI0137M

JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see Jump starting in the 6. In case of emergency section. If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. Contact your NISSAN dealer.

Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX and MIN lines. If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level to the indicator in each filler opening. Do not overfill. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level. 1. Remove the cell plugs. 2. Add distilled water up to the MAX level. 3. Tighten cell plugs.

8-16

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

DRIVE BELTS
2. Have the belts checked regularly for condition and tension.

SPARK PLUGS

WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.

CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs.

SDI0141

WARNING
Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCK position. The engine could rotate unexpectedly. 1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying, oil adhesion or looseness. If the belt is in poor condition or loose, have it replaced or adjusted by your NISSAN dealer.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-17

AIR CLEANER
not only cleans the air, it stops flame if the engine backfires. If it is not there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner removed and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed. Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury.
SDI0145 SDI0963

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace the platinumtipped spark plugs as frequently as the conventional type spark plugs since they will last much longer. Follow the maintenance schedule but, do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping. If replacement is required, see your NISSAN dealer for servicing. Always replace with recommended platinum-tipped spark plugs.

The filter element should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance intervals. See the separate Service and Maintenance Guide. When replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp cloth.

WARNING
Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner

8-18

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

CAUTION
After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position. Otherwise it may be damaged when the engine hood is opened. Make sure the wiper blade contacts the glass, otherwise the arm may be damaged from wind pressure. Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver vision.

gent. Then rinse the blade with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.

CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield. Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water. Clean the blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild deterMaintenance and do-it-yourself

8-19

DI1018M

REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. 1. Pull the wiper arm. 2. Push the lock pin, then remove the wiper blade. 3. Insert the new wiper blade to the wiper arm until a click sounds.
SDI0146

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle. This may clog the nozzle that could cause improper windshield washer operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, unclog it with a needle or small pin.

8-20

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE PEDAL

WARNING
See your NISSAN dealer and have it checked if the brake pedal height does not return to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched scraping or screeching sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard. Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system. Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For additional information, see the separate Service and Maintenance Guide.

SDI0125

DI1020MH

CHECKING PARKING BRAKE

From the released position, pull the parking brake lever up slowly and firmly. If the number of clicks is out of the range listed above, see your NISSAN dealer.

CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL

With the engine running, check the distance between the upper surface of the pedal and the metal floor. If it is out of the range shown above, see your NISSAN dealer.

Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes. The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-21

CLUTCH PEDAL BRAKE BOOSTER

Check the brake booster function as follows: 1. With the engine off, press and release the brake pedal several times. When brake pedal movement (distance of travel) remains the same from one pedal application to the next, continue on to the next step. 2. While depressing the brake pedal, start the engine. The pedal height should drop a little. 3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the engine. Keeping the pedal depressed for about 30 seconds, the pedal height should not change. 4. Run the engine for one minute without depressing the brake pedal, then turn it off. Depress the brake pedal several times. The pedal travel distance will decrease gradually with each depression as the vacuum is released from the booster. If the brakes do not operate properly, see your NISSAN dealer.

FUSES

CAUTION
Never use a fuse of higher amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire.

DI1021MC

Press the pedal by hand and be sure the free travel is within the limits shown above. If free travel is too little or too much, see your NISSAN dealer.

8-22

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

system checked and repaired by your NISSAN dealer.

SDI0964

SDI0965

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition key and headlight switch are OFF. 2. Open the engine hood. 3. Remove the fusible link cover. 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. 5. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse. 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

Fusible links
If any electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace only with genuine NISSAN parts.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-23

KEYFOB BATTERY REPLACEMENT

SDI0966

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition key and the headlight switch are OFF. 2. Pull to open the fuse box lid. 3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. 4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse. 5. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by your NISSAN dealer. Replace the battery as follows: 1. Open the lid using a suitable tool. 2. Replace the battery with a new one. Recommended battery: Sanyo CR2025 or equivalent
SPA1374

8-24

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Make sure that the side faces the bottom case. 3. Close the lid securely. 4. Push the keyfob button two or three times to check its operation. See your NISSAN dealer if you need any assistance for replacement. If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement, perform step 4 above. Be careful not to touch a circuit board and a battery terminal. An improperly disposed battery can harm the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal. The keyfob is water-resistant; however, if it does get wet, immediately wipe completely dry. When changing batteries, do not let dust or oil get on the keyfob. FCC Notice: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-25

LIGHTS

SDI1336

8-26

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

HEADLIGHTS Replacing the xenon headlight bulb low beam

CAUTION
High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped. When handling the bulb, do not touch the glass envelope.

WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE When xenon headlights are on, they produce a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to modify or disassemble. Always have your xenon headlights replaced at an authorized NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see Headlight and turn signal switch in the 2. Instruments and controls section.

SDI1333

1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Turn the connector to loosen it. 3. Remove the headlight bulb. Do not shake or rotate the bulb when removing it. 4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of removal. Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact your NISSAN dealer.

Replacing the halogen headlight bulb high beam

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. A bulb can be replaced from inside the engine compartment without removing the headlight assembly.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-27

CAUTION
Do not touch the bulb. Use the same number and wattage as originally installed: Wattage 60 Bulb no. HB3 Do not leave the bulb out of the headlight reflector for a long period of time as dust, moisture, and smoke may enter the headlight body and affect the performance of the headlight.

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Front turn signal Clearance light Front side marker light Front fog light (if so equipped) Rear combination light Turn signal Stop/Tail Back-up Rear side marker light License plate light High-mounted stop light (if so equipped) Interior light Front personal light Step light Trunk light Vanity mirror light (if so equipped) 21 21/5 13 3.8 5 21 10 10 2.7 3.4 1.4 161 158 T20 T20 T20 T16 T10 Wattage (W) 21 5 3.8 See an authorized NISSAN dealer for assistance. Bulb No. T20 T10 T10

8-28

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

SDI1334

MDI0006

Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or cover.
SDI0969

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-29

SDI0970

8-30

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

SDI1335

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-31

SDI0333A

SDI1340

SDI0756

8-32

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WHEELS AND TIRES

vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire placard affixed to the console box lid. MPH (140 km/h) unless it is equipped with high speed capability tires. Driving faster than 85 MPH (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information in the Warranty Information Booklet (US) or Tire Safety Information in the Warranty Information booklet (Canada).

WARNING
Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident. The vehicle capacity weight is indicated on the tire placard. Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components. Before taking a long trip, or whenever you have loaded your vehicle heavily, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressure is at the specified level. Do not drive your vehicle over 85

DI1033M

If you have a flat tire, see Flat tire in the 6. In case of emergency section.

TYPES OF TIRES

TIRE PRESSURE Maximum inflation pressure

Do not exceed the maximum inflation pressures shown on the side wall of the tire.

CAUTION
When changing or replacing tires, be sure all four tires are of the same type (i.e., summer, all season or snow) and construction. Your NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability. Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the
Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressure (including spare) at least once a month and always prior to long distance trips. Incorrect tire pressure may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling. Tire pressure should be checked when tires are COLD. Tires are considered COLD after the

8-33

potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire. For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information in the Warranty Information Booklet (US) or Tire Safety Information in the Warranty Information booklet (Canada).

If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of snow or all season tires on all four wheels.

Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Generally, snow tires will have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire. If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of snow or all season tires on all four wheels. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some provinces and states prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies all season tires on some models to provide good performance for use all year around, including snowy and icy road conditions. All season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than all season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

ing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturers suggestions. Use only SAE class S chains. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or undercarriage. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected. Never install tire chains on a T-type spare tire. Do not use the chains on dry roads.

Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance in snow and ice will be substantially reduced. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire sidewall.

TIRE CHAINS
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before install-

8-34

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WARNING
After rotating the tires, adjust the tire pressure. Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). Do not include the T-type spare tire or any other small size spare tire in the tire rotation.
DI0048-B

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends that tires be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). Wheel nut tightening torque: 80 ft-lb (108 Nm) See Flat tire in the 6. In case of emergency section for tire replacing procedures.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information in the Warranty Information Booklet (US) or Tire Safety Information in the Warranty Information booklet (Canada).

MDI0004

Tire wear and damage

WARNING
Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging, or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging, or deep cuts are found, the tire should be replaced. The original tires have a built-in tread wear indicator. When the wear indicaMaintenance and do-it-yourself

8-35

tor is visible, the tire should be replaced. Improper service for a spare tire may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the spare tire, contact your NISSAN dealer. For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information in the Warranty Information Booklet (US) or Tire Safety Information in the Warranty Information booklet (Canada).

recommended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury. If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels which have the same offset dimension. Wheels of a different offset could cause early tire wear, possibly degraded vehicle handling characteristics and/or interference with the brake discs. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad wear. Do not install a deformed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warn-

ing. The use of retread tire is not recommended. For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information in the Warranty Information Booklet (US) or Tire Safety Information in the Warranty Information booklet (Canada).

Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required. Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the front wheels on the vehicle could lead to transmission damage. For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. See Specifications in the 9. Technical and consumer information section for recommended types and sizes of tires and wheels.

WARNING
The use of tires other than those

Care of wheels
Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle

8-36

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

to maintain their appearance. Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed. Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels. Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead. NISSAN recommends that the road wheels be waxed to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter.

Drive carefully while the T-type spare tire is installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving. Periodically check the T-type spare tire inflation pressure, and always keep it at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar). Always keep the pressure of the full size spare tire (if so equipped) at the recommended pressure for standard tires, as indicated on the tire placard. For tire placard location, see Tire placard in the 9. Technical and consumer information. Do not drive your vehicle at speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h). Do not use tire chains on a T-type spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly on the T-type spare tire and may cause damage to the vehicle. When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, the T-type spare tire should be used on the rear wheel and

the original tire used on the front wheels (drive wheels). Use tire chains only on the front two original tires. Tire tread of the T-type spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the original tire. Replace the T-type spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear. Because the T-type spare tire is smaller than the original tire, ground clearance is reduced. To avoid damage to the vehicle do not drive over obstacles. Also do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught. Do not use the T-type spare tire on other vehicles. Do not use more than one T-type spare tire at the same time. Do not tow a trailer while the T-type spare tire is installed.

Spare tire (T-type spare tire)

Observe the following precautions if the T-type spare tire must be used, otherwise your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident.

CAUTION
The T-type spare tire should be used only for emergency. It should be replaced by the standard tire at the first opportunity.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-37

MEMO

8-38

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

MEMO

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-39

MEMO

8-40

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ........... 9-2 Fuel recommendation........................................... 9-3 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation.............. 9-5 Recommended SAE viscosity number................. 9-6 Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations ................................................. 9-6 Specifications ............................................................ 9-7 Engine .................................................................. 9-7 Wheels and tires .................................................. 9-9 Dimensions and weights ...................................... 9-9 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country ....................................................... 9-10 Vehicle identification ............................................... 9-10 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate........... 9-10 Vehicle identification number (Chassis number) ............................................... 9-10 Engine serial number ......................................... 9-11 F.M.V.S.S. certification label .............................. 9-11 Emission control information label ..................... 9-11

Tire placard ........................................................ Air conditioner specification label....................... Installing front license plate..................................... Vehicle loading information ..................................... Terms ................................................................. Determining vehicle load capacity...................... Loading tips ........................................................ Towing a trailer ....................................................... Maximum load limits........................................... Towing safety ..................................................... Uniform tire quality grading ..................................... Emission control system warranty .......................... Reporting safety defects (US only) ......................... Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test (US only) ................................................................. Owners Manual/Service Manual order information............................................................... In the event of a collision ........................................

9-12 9-12 9-13 9-14 9-14 9-14 9-15 9-15 9-16 9-17 9-19 9-20 9-20 9-21 9-22 9-22

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure instructed in the 8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (Approximate) US measure Fuel Engine oil*6 Drain and refill With oil filter change Without oil filter change Cooling system With reservoir Reservoir Manual transmission gear oil Automatic transmission fluid Power steering fluid Brake and clutch fluid Multi-purpose grease Air conditioning system refrigerant Air conditioning system lubricants Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in the 8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself section. 8-1/8 qt 7/8 qt 6-3/4 qt 3/5 qt 7.7 0.8 Genuine NISSAN anti-freeze coolant or equivalent API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-90 only Nissan Matic D (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid*4 Genuine Nissan PSFII or equivalent*8 Genuine Nissan Brake Fluid*5 or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116) NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base) HFC-134a (R-134a)*7 Nissan A/C System Oil Type S or exact equivalent 4-1/4 qt 3-7/8 qt 3-1/2 qt 3-1/4 qt 4.0 3.7 API Certification Mark*2, *3 API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API grade SJ, Energy Conserving*2, *3 ILSAC grade GF-I & GF-II*2, *3 18-1/2 gal Imp measure 15-3/8 gal Liter 70 Recommended specifications Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (RON 96)*1

*1: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for fuel recommendation. *2: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for engine oil and oil filter recommendation. *3: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for recommended SAE viscosity number. *4: DexronTMIII/MerconTM or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental United States and Alaska contact a NISSAN dealer for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of DexronTMIII/MerconTM automatic transmission fluid. *5: Available in mainland US through your NISSAN dealer. *6: For additional information, see Engine oil in the 8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself section for changing engine oil. *7: For additional information, see Vehicle identification in this section for air conditioner specification label. *8: Genuine Nissan PSFII, Canada Nissan Automatic Transmission fluid, DexronTMIII/MerconTM or equivalent ATF may also be used.

9-2

Technical and consumer information

FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96) If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Research octane number 91) can be used. However, for maximum vehicle performance, the use of unleaded premium gasoline is recommended.

cially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager. If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage. The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline. If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a methanol blend, is used, it should contain no more than 10% oxygenate. (MTBE may, however, be added up to 15%.) If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should

also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles. If any undesirable driveability problems such as engine stalling and hard hot starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE. Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage.

CAUTION
Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control devices and systems, and could also affect the warranty coverage. Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, since this will damage the three-way catalyst.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of any fuel additives (i.e. fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvent or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are spe-

Technical and consumer information

9-3

Octane rating tips

In most parts of North America, you should use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 or 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number. However, you may use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating as low as 85 AKI number in these high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)] such as: Colorado, Montana, New Mexico, Utah, Wyoming, northeastern Nevada, southern Idaho, western South Dakota, western Nebraska, and that part of Texas which is directly south of New Mexico. Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than stated above can cause persistent, heavy spark knock. (Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, have your dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible. Incorrect ignition timing will result in knocking, after-run or overheating. This in turn may cause excessive fuel consumption or damage to the engine. If any of the above symptoms

are encountered, have your vehicle checked at a NISSAN dealer or other competent service facility. However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is no cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load.

9-4

Technical and consumer information

however, meet the API quality and SAE viscosity ratings specified for your vehicle. Do not mix mineral based and synthetic type oils in the engine at the same time.

Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed. Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used.
STI0293

Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important that the engine oil viscosity be selected based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. The recommended SAE viscosity number chart shows the recommended oil viscosities for the expected ambient temperatures. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage.

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATION Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct quality, and viscosity oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. NISSAN recommends the use of a low friction oil (energy conserving oil) in order to improve fuel economy and conserve energy. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage. Only those engine oils with the American Petroleum Institute (API) certification mark on the

front of the container should be used. This type of oil supersedes the existing API SG, SH, or SJ and Energy Conserving I & II categories. If you cannot find engine oil with the API certification mark, use an API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API grade SJ, Energy conserving oil. An oil with a single designation SG or SH, or in combination with other categories (for example, SG/CC or SG/CD) may also be used if one with the API certification mark cannot be found. An ILSAC grade GF-I & GF-II oil can also be used. Mineral based or synthetic type oils may be used in your NISSAN vehicle. These oils must

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new vehicle is equipped with a highquality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use the genuine oil filter or its equivalent
Technical and consumer information

9-5

for the reason described in change intervals.

Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Oil and filter other than the specified quality, or oil and filter change intervals longer than recommended could reduce engine life. Damage to engines caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the new NISSAN vehicle warranties. Your engine was filled with a high quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle. Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes. repeated short distance driving at cold outside temperatures, driving in dusty conditions, extensive idling, towing a trailer.

RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY NUMBER

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioning system in this NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lubricant, Nissan A/C System Oil Type S or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system components. The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your NISSAN vehicle will not harm the earths ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earths atmosphere, certain governmental regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioning system service. Your NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioning system refrigerant.

TI1028-C

SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all ambient temperatures. SAE 10W-30, 10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if the ambient temperature is above 0F (18C).

9-6

Technical and consumer information

SPECIFICATIONS
Contact your NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioning system.

ENGINE
Model Type Cylinder arrangement Bore x Stroke Displacement Firing order Idle speed Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) CO percentage at idle speed Spark plug Spark plug gap (Normal) Camshaft operation rpm degree/rpm [No air] % Standard Service option in (mm) PLFR5A-11 PLFR4A-11, PLFR6A-11 0.043 (1.1) Timing chain See the emission control label on the underside of the hood. in (mm) cu in (cm3) VQ35DE Gasoline, 4-cycle 6-cylinder, V-slanted at 60 3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4) 213.45 (3,498) 1-2-3-4-5-6*

Technical and consumer information

9-7

TI1009-A

The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

9-8

Technical and consumer information

WHEELS AND TIRES

Type Road wheel Aluminum Size 16 x 6-1/2JJ 17 x 7JJ 17 x 7JJ (option) P215/55R16 91H P215/55R17 93H P225/50R17 93V Conventional*1 T125/70D16 T125/90D16 T135/70D16 T135/90D16 Offset in (mm) 1.57 (40) 1.57 (40)*2 1.75 (45)*3

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Sedan Overall length Overall width Overall height in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) 191.5 (4,863) 70.3 (1,785) 56.3 (1,430)*3 56.7 (1,440)*4 57.1 (1,450)*5 60.2 (1,530)*1 59.8 (1,520)*2 59.4 (1,510)*1 59.1 (1,500)*2 108.3 (2,750)

Conventional

Tire Spare

Front tread Rear tread Wheelbase

in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) lb (kg)

*1: For option *2: For P215/55R17 91H *3: For P225/50R17 93V

Gross vehicle weight rating Gross axle weight rating Front Rear

lb (kg) lb (kg)

See the F.M.V.S.S. certification label on the drivers side lock pillar.

*1: For models with road wheel size - 16 x 6.5JJ, 17 x 7JJ (offset 1.57 in (40 mm)) *2: For models with aluminum wheel size - 17 x 7JJ (offset 1.75 in (45 mm)) *3: For models with the tire size P215/55R16 91H *4: For models with the tire size P225/50R17 93V *5: For models with the tire size P215/55R17 93H

Technical and consumer information

9-9

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

When planning to travel in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicles engine. Using fuel with too low an octane rating may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded engine gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available. When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations. The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ. When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation, and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

STI0038

STI0187

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number plate is attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (Chassis number)

The number is stamped as shown.

9-10

Technical and consumer information

STI0047

STI0186

STI0188

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (F.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is attached as shown.

Technical and consumer information

9-11

STI0206

STI0292

TIRE PLACARD
The cold tire pressure is shown on the tire placard affixed to the console box lid.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is affixed inside of the hood as shown.

9-12

Technical and consumer information

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

Use the following steps to mount the license plate: Before mounting the license plate, confirm that the following parts are enclosed in the vinyl bag. License plate bracket J-nut x 2 Screw x 2 Screw grommet x 2 1. Temporarily place the license plate bracket A of the front bumper while aligning points k B in the license plate fascia with holes k bracket. 2. Remove the license plate bracket.
A using a 0.39 3. Carefully drill two pilot holes k in (10 mm) drill bit at the marked locations. (Be sure that the drill only goes through the fascia, or damage to the nut may occur.)

4. Insert grommets into the hole on the fascia. 5. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the grommet hole to add 90 turn onto the part k C .
STI0191

6. Insert a J-nut into the license plate bracket

Technical and consumer information

9-13

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

before placing the license plate bracket on the fascia. 7. Install the license plate bracket with screws. 8. Install the license plate with bolts that are no longer than 0.55 in (14 mm).

WARNING
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle.

DETERMINING VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

The load capacity of this vehicle is determined by weight, not by available cargo space. For example, a luggage rack, bike carrier, cartop carrier or similar equipment does not increase load carrying capacity of your vehicle. To determine vehicle load capacity:

TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle: Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not include passengers and cargo. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo.

Vehicle weight can be determined by using a commercial-grade scale, found at places such as a truck stop, gravel quarry, grain elevator, or a scrap metal recycling facility. 1. Determine the curb weight of your vehicle. 2. Compare the curb weight amount to the GVWR specified for your vehicle to determine how much more weight your vehicle can carry. 3. After loading (cargo and passengers), reweigh your vehicle to determine if either GVWR or GAWR for your vehicle is ex-

9-14

Technical and consumer information

TOWING A TRAILER
ceeded. If GVWR is exceeded, remove cargo as necessary. If either the front or rear GAWR is exceeded, shift the load or remove cargo as necessary. and cause personal injury. Overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by your warranty.

LOADING TIPS
The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label. Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.

WARNING
Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control

TI1011M

Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember that towing a trailer will place additional loads on your vehicles engine, drive train, steering, braking and other systems. Information on trailer towing ability and the special equipment required should be obtained from your NISSAN dealer. He can obtain a Nissan Trailer Towing Guide for you.

Technical and consumer information

9-15

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed 1,000 lb (454 kg). The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight. Towing loads greater than 1,000 lb (454 kg) or using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance. The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appropriate for level highway driving may have to be reduced on very steep grades or in low traction situations (for example, on slippery boat ramps).

equipment required may be obtained from an authorized NISSAN dealer.

Tongue load
Keep the tongue load between 9 and 11% of the total trailer load. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load.

TI1012M

Maximum gross vehicle weight/ maximum gross axle weight

The gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle must not exceed. GVWR shown on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label. The gross vehicle weight equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. In addition, front or rear gross axle weight must not exceed GAWR shown on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label.

WARNING
Vehicle damage and/or personal injury resulting from improper towing procedures are not covered by NISSAN warranties. A Nissan Trailer Towing Guide (U.S. only) containing information on trailer towing ability and the special

9-16

Technical and consumer information

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART Unit: lb (kg) MAXIMUM TOWING LOAD MAXIMUM TONGUE LOAD 1,000 (454) 110 (49)

Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, etc. to install a trailer hitch. To reduce the possibility of additional damage if your vehicle is struck from the rear, where practical, remove the hitch and/or receiver when not in use. After the hitch is removed, seal the bolt holes to prevent exhaust fumes, water or dust from entering the passenger compartment. Regularly check that all hitch mounting bolts are securely mounted.

vehicle and the trailer. The chain should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave enough slack in the chain to permit turning corners.

Trailer lights
Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or local regulations. When wiring the vehicle for towing, connect the stop and tail light pickup into the vehicle electrical circuit at a point between the sensor and stop light or light switch.

TOWING SAFETY Trailer hitch

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer. A genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available from your NISSAN dealer (Canada only). Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle, to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system, make sure it conforms to federal and/or local regulations and that it is properly installed.

Tire pressures
When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the tire placard (located on the inside of the center console lid). Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturers specifications.

CAUTION
Do not use axle-mounted hitches. The hitch should not be attached to or affect the operation of the impactabsorbing bumper.

WARNING
Never connect a trailer brake system directly to the vehicle brake system.

Safety chain
Always use a suitable chain between your

Pre-towing tips
Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded and/or unloaded
Technical and consumer information

9-17

trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down condition; check for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shifts while driving. Be certain your rear view mirrors conform to all federal, state or local regulations. If not, install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle.

slope is not recommended; however, if you must do so, and if your vehicle is equipped with automatic transmission, first block the wheels and apply the parking brake, and then move the transmission selector lever into the P (Park) position. If you move the selector lever to the P (Park) position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake, transmission damage could occur. When going down a hill, shift into a lower gear and use the engine braking effect. When ascending a long grade, downshift the transmission to a lower gear and reduce speed to reduce chances of engine overloading and/or overheating. If the engine coolant rises to an extremely high temperature when the air conditioning system is on, turn off the air conditioner. Coolant heat can be additionally vented by opening the windows, switching the fan control to high and setting the temperature control to the HOT position. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances. Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km). Have your vehicle serviced more often than

at intervals specified in the recommended maintenance schedule. When making a turn, your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make a larger than normal turning radius during the turn. Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly causing vehicle sway. When being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect vehicle handling. If swaying does occur, firmly grip the steering wheel, steer straight ahead, and immediately (but gradually) reduce vehicle speed. This combination will help stabilize the vehicle. Never increase speed. Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing while towing a trailer requires considerably more distance than normal passing. Remember the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes. To maintain engine braking efficiency and electrical charging performance, do not use fifth gear (manual transmission) or overdrive (automatic transmission).

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicles behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic. Steering stability, and braking performance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving. Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops. Avoid sharp turns or lane changes. Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed. Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking. Parking on a

9-18

Technical and consumer information

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency. When towing a trailer, change oil in the transmission more frequently. See the Service and Maintenance Guide. DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING
The traction grade assigned to your vehicle tires is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Treadwear
Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on tire wear rate when tested under controlled conditions on specified government test courses. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1-1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. However, relative tire performance depends on actual driving conditions, and may vary significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Temperature A, B and C
Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C. They represent a tires resistance to heat build-up, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause tire material to degenerate, reducing tire life. Excessive temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a performance level which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades A and B represent higher levels of performance on laboratory test wheels than the minimum required by law.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt

Technical and consumer information

9-19

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US only)

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-3274236. If you reside in Hawaii, please call 808-836-0888. You may also write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1. In Hawaii call (808) 836-0888.

WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Your NISSAN is covered by the following emission warranties. For US: Emission Defects Warranty Emissions Performance Warranty For Canada: Emission Control System Warranty Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet that comes with your NISSAN. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet or it has become lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to: Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 191 Gardena. CA. 90248-0191 Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

9-20

Technical and consumer information

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US only)

Due to legal requirements in some states/ areas, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the ready condition for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system. The vehicle is set to the ready condition when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle. If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a not ready condition. Before taking the I/M test, drive the vehicle through the following pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. If you cannot or do not want to perform the driving pattern, an NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you. points between the C and H (normal operating temperature). 2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h), then quickly release the accelerator pedal completely and keep it released for at least 6 seconds. 3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of 53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96 km/h) for at least 5 minutes. 4. Stop the vehicle. 5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h) and maintain the speed for 20 seconds. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 3 times. 7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h) and maintain the speed for at least 3 minutes. 8. Stop the vehicle (shift lever in the P or N position). 9. Rev the engine up between 2,500 and 3,500 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes, then release the accelerator pedal completely. 10.Wait 5 second at idle. 11.Rev the engine up between 2,000 and
Technical and consumer information

3,000 rpm and maintain it for 5 consecutive minutes. 12.Turn the engine off. 13.Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least one more time. If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeat the preceding step. Any safe driving mode is acceptable between steps. Do not stop the engine until step 7 is completed.

WARNING
Always drive the vehicle in a safe and prudent manner according to traffic conditions, and obey all traffic laws. 1. Start the engine when the engine coolant temperature gauge needle points to C. Allow the engine to idle until the gauge needle

9-21

OWNERS MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Owners Manuals for the 2002 model year and prior, see an authorized NISSAN dealer, or contact: DDS Distribution Services, Ltd. 20770 Westwood Dr. Strongsville OH 44136 1-800-247-5321 In Canada: To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owners Manual please contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN Dealer in your area call the NISSAN Satisfaction Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you. Also available are Genuine NISSAN Service and Owners Manuals for older NISSAN models.

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment procedures, this manual is the same one used by the factory trained technicians working at authorized NISSAN dealerships. Also available are genuine NISSAN Owners Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Service and Owners Manuals for older NISSAN models.

In the USA: For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model year and later, contact: Tweddle Litho Company 1-800-639-8841 www.nissan-techinfo.com For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model year and prior, see an authorized NISSAN dealer, or contact: DDS Distribution Services, Ltd. 20770 Westwood Dr. Strongsville OH 44136 1-800-247-5321

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikely event, there is some important information you should know. Many insurance companies routinely authorize the use of nongenuine collision parts in order to cut costs, among other reasons.

9-22

Technical and consumer information

Insist on the use of Genuine Nissan Collision Parts!

If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts made to Nissans original exacting specifications if you want to help it to last and hold its resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your insurance agent and your repair shop to only use Genuine Nissan Collision Parts. Nissan does not warrant non-Nissan parts, nor does Nissans warranty apply to damage caused by a non-genuine part. Using Genuine Nissan Parts can help protect your personal safety, preserve your warranty protection and maintain the resale value of your vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using Genuine Nissan Parts may prevent or limit unnecessary excess wear and tear expenses at the end of your lease. Nissan designs its hoods with crumple zones to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide such built in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts often show premature wear, rust and corrosion.

your vehicle. And some states have enacted laws that restrict insurance companies from authorizing the use of non-genuine collision parts during the new vehicle warranty. These laws help protect you, so you can take action to protect yourself.

Its your right!

If you should need further information visit us at: www.nissandriven.com.

Why should you take a chance?

In over 40 states, the law says you must be advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair
Technical and consumer information

9-23

MEMO

9-24

Technical and consumer information

10 Index
A ABS (Anti-lock brake system)......................... 5-18 Air bag system Front (See supplemental front airbag system) ...................................................... 1-13 Side (See supplemental side air bag system) ...................................................... 1-15 Air bag warning labels .................................... 1-18 Air bag warning light................................ 1-18, 2-9 Air cleaner housing filter ................................. 8-18 Air conditioner Air conditioner operation ............................. 4-3 Air conditioner service ....................... 4-3, 4-12 Air conditioner specification label.............. 9-12 Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations................ 4-12, 9-6 Air filter ...................................................... 4-11 Heater and air conditioner controls ............. 4-3 Servicing air conditioner.............................. 4-3 Air conditioner operation, Semiautomatic......... 4-5 Air flow charts ................................................... 4-6 Alcohol, drugs and driving ................................ 5-4 Anchor point locations Top tether strap......................................... 1-35 Antenna........................................................... 4-29 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)........................ 5-18 Anti-lock brake warning light............................. 2-7 Appearance care Exterior appearance care............................ 7-2 Interior appearance care ............................. 7-4 Armrest ............................................................. 1-8 Audible reminders ........................................... 2-11 Audio operation precautions ........................... 4-13 Audio system .................................................. 4-12 Automatic Anti-glare inside mirror .............................. 3-15 Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ........... 8-12 Drive positioner ......................................... 3-16 Driving with automatic transmission .... 5-4, 5-8 Seat positioner, seat ................................. 3-16 Transmission selector lever lock release....................................................... 5-10 Avoiding collision and rollover .......................... 5-3 B Battery............................................................. 8-15 Battery saver system................................. 2-17 Battery replacement, (See multi-remote control system) ............................................................. 3-8 Before starting the engine ................................ 5-7 Belts (See drive belts) .................................... 8-17 Brake Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ................... 5-18 Brake and clutch fluid................................ 8-14 Brake booster ............................................ 8-22 Brake pedal ............................................... 8-21 Brake pedal check..................................... 8-21 Brake system............................................. 5-18 Parking brake check ........................ 5-12, 8-21 Parking brake operation ............................ 5-12 Warning light ............................................... 2-8 Break-in schedule ........................................... 5-15 Bulb check/instrument panel ............................ 2-7 Bulb replacement ............................................ 8-26 C Cabin air filter ................................................. 4-11 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants... 9-2 Car phone or CB radio ................................... 4-30 Cargo (See vehicle loading information) ........ 2-26 Cargo net ........................................................ 2-26 Cassette player (See audio system) ..... 4-18, 4-25 Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst............ 5-3 CD care and cleaning ..................................... 4-28 Child restraints ................................................ 1-27 Installation on front passenger seat.......... 1-36 Precautions on child restraints.................. 1-27 Top tether strap anchor point locations .... 1-35 With top tether strap.................................. 1-35 Child safety ..................................................... 1-22 Child safety rear door lock................................ 3-4 Chimes, Audible reminders............................. 2-11 Circuit breaker, Fusible link ............................ 8-23

Cleaning exterior and interior .................... 7-2, 7-4 Clock ............................................................... 2-30 Clutch Clutch pedal .............................................. 8-22 Fluid........................................................... 8-14 Cold weather driving ....................................... 5-20 Compact spare tire ......................................... 8-37 Console box .................................................... 2-26 Controls Heater and air conditioner controls ............. 4-3 Heater and semiautomatic air conditioner ................................................... 4-3 Coolant Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants ..................................................... 9-2 Changing engine coolant ............................ 8-9 Checking engine coolant level .................... 8-8 Corrosion protection ......................................... 7-5 Cruise control.................................................. 5-13 Cup holder ...................................................... 2-24 D Daytime running light system ......................... 2-18 Defogger switch, Rear window and outside mirror defogger switch............................................... 2-15 Dimensions and weights................................... 9-9 Door open warning light ................................... 2-8 Drive belts ....................................................... 8-17 Drive positioner, Automatic............................. 3-16 Driving Cold weather driving ................................. 5-20 Driving with automatic transmission .... 5-4, 5-8 Driving with manual transmission ...... 5-5, 5-11

Precautions when starting and driving ........ 5-2 E Economy, Fuel ................................................ 5-15 Emission control information label.................. 9-11 Emission control system warranty .................. 9-20 Engine Before starting the engine........................... 5-7 Block heater .............................................. 5-21 Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants ..................................................... 9-2 Changing engine coolant ............................ 8-9 Changing engine oil .................................. 8-11 Changing engine oil filter .......................... 8-12 Checking engine coolant level .................... 8-8 Checking engine oil level .......................... 8-10 Coolant temperature gauge ........................ 2-5 Engine compartment check locations ......... 8-7 Engine cooling system ................................ 8-8 Engine oil................................................... 8-10 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation..... 9-5 Engine oil viscosity...................................... 9-5 Engine serial number ................................ 9-11 Engine specifications................................... 9-7 If your vehicle overheats ............................. 6-9 Starting the engine ...................................... 5-7 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ...................... 5-2 F F.M.V.S.S. certification label........................... 9-11 Filter, Air cleaner housing filter....................... 8-18

Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) ............................................................. 2-19 Flat tire .............................................................. 6-2 Floor mat cleaning ............................................ 7-4 Fluid Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ........... 8-12 Brake and clutch fluid................................ 8-14 Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants ..................................................... 9-2 Engine coolant............................................. 8-8 Engine oil................................................... 8-10 Power steering fluid................................... 8-14 Window washer fluid ................................. 8-15 Fog light switch ............................................... 2-19 Folding rear seat............................................... 1-5 Front air bag system (See supplemental restraint system) ........................................................... 1-13 Front power seat adjustment ............................ 1-3 Fuel Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants ..................................................... 9-2 filler cap ..................................................... 3-12 filler lid ....................................................... 3-12 Fuel economy............................................ 5-15 Fuel octane rating ....................................... 9-3 Fuel recommendation.................................. 9-3 Gauge.......................................................... 2-5 Fuses .............................................................. 8-22 Fusible links .................................................... 8-23 G Gas cap .......................................................... 3-12 Gauge ............................................................... 2-3

10-2

Engine coolant temperature gauge............. 2-5 Fuel gauge .................................................. 2-5 Odometer..................................................... 2-4 Speedometer ............................................... 2-4 Tachometer ................................................. 2-4 General maintenance ....................................... 8-2 Glasses case .................................................. 2-24 Glove box........................................................ 2-25 Glove box lock ................................................ 2-25 H Hazard warning flasher switch........................ 2-19 Head restraints ................................................. 1-6 Headlights Bulb replacement ...................................... 8-27 Headlight switch ........................................ 2-17 Xenon headlights....................................... 2-16 Heated seats................................................... 2-20 Heated steering wheel (if so equipped).......... 2-21 Heater Engine coolant heater ............................... 5-21 Heater and air conditioner controls ............. 4-3 Heater operation.......................................... 4-3 Heater operation, Semiautomatic air conditioner ........................................................ 4-4 Hood, release ................................................. 3-10 Horn ................................................................ 2-20 How to stop alarm, Vehicle security ............... 2-13 I Ignition switch ................................................... 5-4

Automatic transmission models ........... 5-4, 5-8 Key positions ............................................... 5-6 Manual transmission models ............. 5-5, 5-11 Immobilizer system ......................................... 2-13 Indicator lights................................................. 2-10 Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test................... 9-21 Instrument panel ............................................... 2-2 Interior light ..................................................... 2-32 Interior light replacement ................................ 8-28 Interior trunk lid release .................................. 3-12 ISOFIX child restraint ..................................... 1-34 J Jump starting .................................................... 6-6 K Keys .................................................................. 3-2 L Label, Air conditioner specification label ........ Label, Emission control information label....... Label, F.M.V.S.S. certification label................ Labels Air bag warning labels............................... Engine serial number ................................ Vehicle identification number (VIN)........... LATCH system................................................ License plate, Installing front license plate..... Light Air bag warning light ................................. 9-12 9-11 9-11 1-18 9-11 9-10 1-34 9-13 1-18

Bulb replacement ...................................... 8-26 Fog light switch ......................................... 2-19 Headlight switch ........................................ 2-17 Headlights Bulb replacement .................... 8-27 Interior light................................................ 2-32 Personal light............................................. 2-33 Replacement ............................................. 8-26 Trunk light.................................................. 2-34 Vanity mirror light ...................................... 2-34 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ........................................... 2-7, 2-10 Xenon headlights....................................... 2-16 Lights, Exterior and interior light replacement .................................................... 8-28 Loading information (See vehicle loading information) ..................................................... 9-14 Lock Door locks ................................................... 3-2 Glove box lock........................................... 2-25 Power door lock .......................................... 3-2 Trunk lid lock opener lever........................ 3-10 Low fuel warning light ....................................... 2-9 M Maintenance Battery ....................................................... 8-15 General maintenance .................................. 8-2 Inside the vehicle ........................................ 8-3 Maintenance precautions ............................ 8-5 Outside the vehicle...................................... 8-2 Seat belt maintenance .............................. 1-26 Meters and gauges ........................................... 2-3

10-3

Mirror Outside mirror control................................ 3-15 Outside mirrors.......................................... 3-15 N Net, Cargo net ................................................ 2-26 New vehicle break-in ...................................... 5-15 Nissan vehicle Immobilizer System ................ 2-12 Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System, Engine start ................................................................... 5-6 O Odometer .......................................................... 2-4 Oil Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants ..................................................... 9-2 Changing engine oil .................................. 8-11 Changing engine oil filter .......................... 8-12 Checking engine oil level .......................... 8-10 Engine oil................................................... 8-10 Engine oil viscosity...................................... 9-5 Outside mirror control ..................................... 3-15 Outside mirrors ............................................... 3-15 Overheat, If your vehicle overheats.................. 6-9 P Parking Brake check............................................... 8-21 Parking brake check.................................. 5-12 Parking brake operation ............................ 5-12

Parking on hills.......................................... 5-12 Parking/parking on hills .................................. 5-16 Personal light .................................................. 2-33 Phone, Car phone or CB radio....................... 4-30 Power Front seat adjustment ................................. 1-3 Power door lock .......................................... 3-2 Power outlet .............................................. 2-22 Power steering fluid................................... 8-14 Power steering system.............................. 5-17 Power windows ......................................... 2-27 Pre-tensioner seat belt system ....................... 1-16 Precautions Audio operation precautions ..................... 4-13 Braking precautions................................... 5-18 Cruise control precautions ........................ 5-13 Maintenance precautions ............................ 8-5 On child restraints ..................................... 1-27 On seat belt usage.................................... 1-20 Precautions on supplemental restraint system ......................................................... 1-8 Precautions when starting and driving ........ 5-2 Push starting ..................................................... 6-8 R Radio, Car phone or CB radio........................ 4-30 Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test (US only) ......................................................... 9-21 Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock...... 3-4 Rear power point ............................................ 2-22 Rear window and outside mirror defogger switch .............................................................. 2-15 Registering your vehicle in another country ... 9-10

Reporting safety defects (US only)................. 9-20 Rollover ............................................................. 5-3 S Safety Child seat belts.......................................... 1-22 Reporting safety defects (US only) ........... 9-20 Towing safety ............................................ 9-17 Seat Belt warning light....................................... 1-20 Belt warning light and chime....................... 2-9 Seat adjustment, Front power seat adjustment ........................................................ 1-3 Seat belt(s) Child safety................................................ 1-22 Infants and small children ......................... 1-22 Injured persons.......................................... 1-23 Larger children .......................................... 1-23 Pre-tensioner seat belt system ................. 1-16 Precautions on seat belt usage ................ 1-20 Pregnant women ....................................... 1-23 Seat belt cleaning........................................ 7-5 Seat belt extenders ................................... 1-26 Seat belt maintenance .............................. 1-26 Seat belts .................................................. 1-20 Three-point type with retractor .................. 1-23 Seat(s) Heated seats ............................................. 2-20 Seats ........................................................... 1-2 Security system, vehicle security system ....... 2-12 Security systems (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System), Engine start ..................................... 2-13

10-4

Security systems (See vehicle security system) ........................................................... 2-12 Servicing air conditioner .......................... 4-3, 4-12 Shift lock release ............................................ 5-10 Shifting Automatic transmission........................ 5-4, 5-8 Manual transmission .......................... 5-5, 5-11 Shoulder belt height adjustment, For front seats ............................................................... 1-26 Side air bag system (See supplemental side air bag system) .................................................... 1-15 Spark plugs ..................................................... 8-17 Speedometer .................................................... 2-4 Starting Before starting the engine........................... 5-7 Jump starting............................................... 6-6 Precautions when starting and driving ........ 5-2 Push starting ............................................... 6-8 Starting the engine ...................................... 5-7 Steering Power steering fluid................................... 8-14 Power steering system.............................. 5-17 Tilting steering wheel ................................ 3-14 Storage ........................................................... 2-23 Sun shade....................................................... 2-29 Sun visors ....................................................... 3-14 Sunroof ........................................................... 2-29 Supplemental air bag warning labels ............. 1-18 Supplemental air bag warning light......... 1-18, 2-9 Supplemental front air bag system................. 1-13 Supplemental restraint system ......................... 1-8 Precautions on supplemental restraint system ......................................................... 1-8 Supplemental side air bag system ................. 1-15

Switch Fog light switch ......................................... 2-19 Hazard warning flasher switch .................. 2-19 Headlight switch ........................................ 2-17 Ignition switch.............................................. 5-4 Ignition switch automatic transmission models.................................................. 5-4, 5-8 Ignition switch manual transmission models................................................ 5-5, 5-11 Power door lock switch ............................... 3-4 Rear window and outside mirror defogger switch......................................................... 2-15 Traction control system cancel switch ...... 2-22 Turn signal switch ..................................... 2-19 T Tachometer ....................................................... 2-4 Temperature gauge, Engine coolant temperature gauge ................................................................ 2-5 Theft (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System), Engine start..................................................... 2-13 Three way catalyst............................................ 5-3 Tilting steering wheel ...................................... 3-14 Tire Flat tire ........................................................ 6-2 Uniform tire quality grading ....................... 9-19 Tires Spare tire................................................... 8-37 Tire chains................................................. 8-34 Tire placard ............................................... 9-12 Tire pressure ............................................. 8-33 Tire rotation ............................................... 8-35 Types of tires............................................. 8-33

wheel/tire size.............................................. 9-9 Wheels and tires ....................................... 8-33 Top tether strap child restraints...................... 1-35 Towing Tow truck towing ....................................... 6-10 Towing a trailer.......................................... 9-15 Towing load/specification chart ................. 9-15 Towing safety ............................................ 9-17 Traction control system .................................. 5-19 Traction control system (TCS) cancel switch .............................................................. 2-22 Trailer towing .................................................. 9-15 Transmission Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ........... 8-12 Driving with automatic transmission .... 5-4, 5-8 Driving with manual transmission ...... 5-5, 5-11 Transmission selector lever lock release....................................................... 5-10 Traveling or registering your vehicle in another country ............................................................ 9-10 Trip computer.................................................. 2-30 Trunk Access through rear seat ............................ 1-5 Interior trunk lid release ............................ 3-12 Lid lock opener lever................................. 3-10 Light........................................................... 2-34 Turn signal switch ........................................... 2-19 U Underbody cleaning .......................................... 7-3 Uniform tire quality grading............................. 9-19

10-5

V Vanity mirror light............................................ 2-34 Vehicle Dimensions and weights ............................. 9-9 Identification number (VIN) ....................... 9-10 Loading information................................... 9-14 Security system ......................................... 2-12 Vehicle recovery, (freeing a stuck vehicle)..... 6-11 Ventilators ......................................................... 4-2 W

Wheels and tires ............................................. 8-33 Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels Window washer fluid....................................... 8-15 Window(s) Cleaning ...................................................... 7-3 Power windows ......................................... 2-27 Windshield wiper and washer switch.............. 2-14 Wiper Windshield wiper and washer switch ........ 2-14 Wiper blades ............................................. 8-19 X Xenon headlights ............................................ 2-16

Warning labels, Air bag warning labels .......... 1-18 Warning light Air bag warning light .......................... 1-18, 2-9 Anti-lock brake............................................. 2-7 Brake warning light...................................... 2-8 Door open.................................................... 2-8 Low fuel warning light ................................. 2-9 Seat belt warning light and chime............... 2-9 Warning lights ................................................... 2-7 Warning, Hazard warning flasher switch ........ 2-19 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders .......................................................... 2-7 Warranty, Emission control system warranty .......................................................... 9-20 Washer switch, Windshield wiper and washer switch .............................................................. 2-14 Washing ............................................................ 7-2 Waxing .............................................................. 7-2 Weights (See dimensions and weights) ........... 9-9 Wheel/tire size .................................................. 9-9

10-6

GAS STATION INFORMATION FUEL RECOMMENDATION:

Unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96). If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Research octane number 91) can be used. However, for maximum vehicle performance, the use of unleaded premium gasoline is recommended.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

API Certification Mark API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving II or API grade SJ, Energy Conserving ILSAC grade GF-II SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all ambient temperatures. SAE 10W-30 viscosity oil may be used for ambient temperatures above 0F (18C). See Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants in the 9. Technical and consumer information section for engine oil and oil filter recommendation.

CAUTION
Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control systems, and may also affect warranty coverage. Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, since this will damage the three way catalyst. For additional information, see Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the 9. Technical and consumer information section.

COLD TIRE PRESSURES:

See tire placard affixed to the center console lid.

NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURES RECOMMENDATION:

During the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of vehicle use, follow the recommendations outlined in the Break-in schedule Information found in the 5. Starting and driving section of this Owners Manual.

Windshield washer fluid 8-15

Engine coolant 8-8 Meters and gauges 2-3 Engine oil 8-10

Hood release 3-10 Seat 1-2 Trunk release 3-10 Seat belt 1-20

Audio system 4-12 Air conditioner 4-3

Key 3-2

Fuel 3-12, 9-2 Spare tire 6-3, 8-37

STI0205

Foreword
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence. It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control. This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle. A separate Service and Maintenance Guide and Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle and vehicle maintenance schedules. Additionally, a separate Customer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, as well as clarify your rights under your states lemon law. Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have any questions, he will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to him. safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS FOR SAFETY!
Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers! Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Always observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions. Always use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat. Always provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle. Always review this Owners Manual for important safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modification may not be covered under NISSAN warranties.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for all options available on this model. Therefore, you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle. All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or design at any time without notice.

READ FIRST THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Before driving your vehicle please read your Owners Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in the

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways:

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

WARNING
Engine Exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.
SIC0697

CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means Do not do this or Do not let this happen.

2002 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD. TOKYO, JAPAN

All rights reserved. No part of this Owners Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.

Welcome To The World Of NISSAN

portation services to the supply of lubricants, parts and accessories. NISSAN pioneered the use of electronics and computers in automobiles, and has led the industry in improving both performance and fuel efficiency through new engine designs and the use of synthetic materials to reduce vehicle weight. The company has also developed ways to build quality into its vehicles at each stage of the production process, both through extensive use of automation and most importantly through an awareness that people are the central element in quality control. From the time the parts arrived from our suppliers until you took delivery of your new Nissan, dozens of checks were made to ensure that only the best job was being done in producing and delivering your vehicle. NISSAN also takes great care to ensure that when you take your NISSAN to your dealer for maintenance, the service technician will perform his work according to the quality standards that have been established by the factory. Safety has also been built into your NISSAN. As you know, seat belts are an integral part of the safety systems that will help protect you and your passengers in the event of a sudden stop or an accident. We urge you to use the seat belts every time you drive the vehicle. The NISSAN story of growth and achievement reflects our major goal: to provide you, our customer, with a vehicle that is built with quality and craftsmanship a product that we can be proud to build and you can be proud to own.

WFW0002

Your new NISSAN is the result of our dedication to produce the finest in safe, reliable and economical transportation. Your vehicle is the product of a successful worldwide company that manufactures cars and trucks in over 17 countries and distributes them in 170 nations. NISSAN vehicles are designed and manufactured by Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. which was founded in Tokyo, Japan in 1933, and NISSAN affiliates world wide, collectively growing to become the fifth largest automaker in the world. In addition to cars and trucks, NISSAN also makes forklift trucks, marine engines, boats and other diversified products. NISSAN has made a substantial and growing investment in North America. NISSANS commitment is nearly $4 billion dollars in capital investments in facilities across the continent. Some of

the facilities include the Nissan Manufacturing facility in Smyrna, Tennessee, vehicle styling design at Nissan Design America in San Diego, California, and engineering at Nissan Technical Center North America in Farmington Hills, Michigan. Additionally, NISSAN employs nearly 18,000 people throughout the United States, Canada, and Mexico. An additional 71,000 people work for the 1,500 NISSAN and INFINITI dealers across North America. NISSAN is also a substantial contributor to the Canadian economy. Nissan Canada Inc., its suppliers and over 140 dealers employ approximately 4,500 people. These include company employees and the staffs of NISSAN dealers all across Canada. In addition, many Canadians work for companies that supply NISSAN and NISSAN dealers with materials and services ranging from operation of port facilities and trans-

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

NISSAN CARES ... Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions, please contact our (NISSANs) Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number:

For U.S. mainland customers 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261) For Hawaii customers (808) 836-0888 (Oahu Number) For Canadian customers 1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information: Your name, address, and telephone number Vehicle identification number (on dash panel) Date of purchase Current odometer reading Your NISSAN dealers name Your comments or questions OR

You can write to NISSAN with the information on the left at: For U.S. mainland and Alaska customers Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 191 Gardena, California 90248-0191 For Hawaii customers Nissan Motor Corporation in Hawaii 2880 Kilihau St. Honolulu, Hawaii 96819 For Canada customers Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

Table of Contents

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems Instruments and controls Pre-driving checks and adjustments Heater, air conditioner and audio systems Starting and driving In case of emergency Appearance and care Maintenance and do-it-yourself Technical and consumer information Index

1 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Seats ......................................................................... 1-2 Front manual seat adjustment ............................. 1-2 Front power seat adjustment ............................... 1-3 Folding rear seat ................................................. 1-5 Head restraint adjustment .................................... 1-6 Active head restraint (front seats) ........................ 1-7 Armrest ................................................................. 1-8 Supplemental restraint system.................................. 1-8 Precautions on supplemental restraint system .... 1-8 Supplemental air bag warning labels ................. 1-18 Supplemental air bag warning light.................... 1-18 Seat belts ................................................................ 1-20 Precautions on seat belt usage ......................... 1-20 Child safety......................................................... 1-22 Pregnant women ................................................ 1-23 Injured persons................................................... 1-23 Three-point type seat belt with retractor ............ 1-23 Seat belt extenders ............................................ 1-26 Seat belt maintenance ....................................... 1-26 Child restraints ........................................................ 1-27 Precautions on child restraints ........................... 1-27 Installation on rear seat outboard or center positions ............................................................. 1-29 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) system ................................................................ 1-34 Top tether strap child restraint ........................... 1-35 Installation on front passenger seat ................... 1-36

SEATS FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT Passenger side

WARNING
After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked.

SSS0133

WARNING
Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

For most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly. See Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section.

1-2

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT

WARNING
Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

SSS0179

Forward and backward

Pull the lever up while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean back. To bring the seatback forward again, pull the lever and move your body forward. The seatback moves forward.

Operating tips
The seat motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate the switch. Do not operate the power support seat for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-3

SSS0148

SSS0166

Forward and backward

Moving the switch forward or backward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position.

Reclining
Move the recline switch backward until the desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback forward again, move the switch forward and move your body forward. The seatback will move forward.

Seat lifter (Drivers seat)

Push the front or rear end of the switch up or down to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion.

1-4

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

The rear seats can be locked using the master key to prevent unauthorized access.

WARNING
When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain that they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured in the right position, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop. Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraint can be extremely dangerous in an accident or sudden stop.
SSS0180

SPA0467

Lumbar support (Drivers seat)

The lumbar support feature provides lower back support to the driver. Move the lever up or down to adjust the seat lumbar area.

FOLDING REAR SEAT Interior trunk access

Pull up on the release knob to access the trunk from the rear seat.

Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-5

 Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked with the rear seatback securely latched when not in use, and prevent childrens access to car keys.

ment after someone else uses the seat.

SSS0125

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT

To raise the head restraint, just pull it up. To lower, push the lock knob and push the head restraint down.

WARNING
Head restraints should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident. Do not remove them. Check the adjust-

1-6

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

 Active head restraints are designed to supplement other safety systems. Always wear seat belts. No system can prevent all injuries in any accident. Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks. Doing so could impair active head restraint function. The head restraint moves forward utilizing the force that the seatback receives from the occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement of the head restraint helps support the occupants head by reducing its backward movement and helping absorb some of the forces that may lead to whiplash type injuries. Active head restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it is said that whiplash injury occurs most. Active head restraints operate only in certain rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head restraints return to their original positions. Properly adjust the active head restraints as described in the previous section.

SSS0178

SPA1025

Adjust the head restraints so the center is level with the center of your ears.

ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT (front seats)

WARNING
Always adjust the head restraints properly as specified in the previous section. Failure to do so can reduce the effectiveness of the active head restraint.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-7

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) section contains important information concerning the driver and passenger supplemental air bags, supplemental side air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts. Supplemental front air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the face and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions. Supplemental side air bag system (if so equipped): This system can help cushion the impact force to the head and the chest area of the driver and front passenger in certain side impact collisions. The supplemental side air bag is designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. These supplemental restraint systems are designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and front passenger seat belts and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the driver and front passenger seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and front door finishers. (See Seat belts later in this section for

instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.) After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

SSS0150

ARMREST
Pull the armrest forward until it is horizontal.

1-8

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

wheel or instrument panel. Always use the seat belts. The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The air bag system monitors the severity of a collision and then inflates the air bags based on belt usage. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.
SSS0131

WARNING
The supplemental front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, roll over, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents. The seat belts and the supplemental front air bags are most effective when

you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. Front air bags inflate with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the supplemental front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering

Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the supplemental front air bag inflates.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-9

SSS0132

SSS0006

SSS0007

1-10

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

WARNING
Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations. Children may be severely injured or killed when the supplemental front air bag or supplemental side air bag inflates if they are not properly restrained. Preteens and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat if possible. Also never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating supplemental front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. For additional information, see Child restraints later in this section.

SSS0008

SSS0099

SSS0009

SSS0100

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-11

SSS0101

SSS0140

SSS0159

WARNING
Supplemental equipped): side air bag (if so

The supplemental side air bag ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear impact or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

The seat belts and the supplemental side air bag are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The side air bag inflates with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seat to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illus-

trations. When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the supplemental side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with supplemental side air bag inflation.

1-12

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SSS0162

SSS0173

Supplemental front air bag system

The driver supplemental air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel; the front passenger supplemental air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. These systems are designed to meet optional certification requirements under U.S. regulations. They are also permitted in Canada. The optional certification allows front air bags to be designed to inflate somewhat less forcefully than previously. However, all of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed. The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental air bag operation. The supplemental air bag system has dual stage inflators for both the driver and passenger air bags. The system monitors information from the crash zone sensor, the diagnosis sensor unit and seat belt buckle sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened, inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and whether the seat belts are being used.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-13

Only one front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. This does not indicate improper performance of the system. If you have any questions about the performance of your air bag system, please contact your NISSAN dealer. When the supplemental front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. Supplemental front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, helps to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body. The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or dash board. The supplemental front air bags inflates quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of

injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the air bag module during inflation. The air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over. After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

the supplemental front air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the air bag or damage to the air bag system. Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicles electrical system, suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the supplemental air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad, above the dashboard, or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system. Work around and on the supplemental front air bag system should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. The SRS wir-

WARNING
Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental front air bag inflates. Right after inflation, several air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of

1-14

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

ing harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system. * The SRS wiring harnesses are covered with yellow insulation either just before the harness connectors or over the complete harness for easy identification. A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield could affect inflation of the supplemental air bag system. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the supplemental front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual.
SSS0165

When the supplemental side air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire, but care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. Supplemental side air bags along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the head and the chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body. The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the supplemental side air bag. The side air bag inflates quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the side air bag module during inflation. The side air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over. After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

Supplemental side air bag system (if so equipped)

The supplemental side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats. The supplemental side air bag (on the driver or front passenger seat) is designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although it may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity side impact. It is designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. It may not inflate in certain side collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental side air bag operation.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-15

warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING
Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental side air bag inflates. Right after inflation, several supplemental side air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental side air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the side air bag or damage to the side air bag system. Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicles electrical system,

suspension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the supplemental side air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seat assembly by placing material near the seatback of the front seat, or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag system. Work around and on the supplemental side air bag system should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag system. * The SRS wiring harnesses are cov-

ered with yellow insulation either just before the harness connectors or over the complete harness for easy identification. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the supplemental side air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual.

Pre-tensioner seat belt system (For front seats)

WARNING
The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be reused after activation. It must be replaced together with the retractor as a unit. If the vehicle becomes involved in a frontal collision but the pre-tensioner is not activated, be sure to have the pre-tensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced by your NISSAN dealer.

1-16

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

 No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pre-tensioner seat belt system. This is to prevent accidental activation of the pre-tensioner seat belt or damage to the pre-tensioner seat belt operation. Tampering with the pretensioner seat belt system may result in serious personal injury. Work around and on the pretensioner system should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner seat belt system. If you need to dispose of the pretensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact an authorized NISSAN dealer. Correct pre-tensioner disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt system activates in conjunction with the supplemental front air bag. Working with the seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt the instant the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, thereby restraining seat occupants. The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat belts retractor. These seat belts are used the same as conventional seat belts. When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. The smoke is not harmful, but care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensioner system, the supplemental air bag warning light will not come on, will flash intermittently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on after the ignition key has been turned to the ON or START position. In this case, the pretensioner seat belt may not function properly. The system should be inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat belt system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual.
Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-17

SPA0945B

SPA1097

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light, displaying in the instrument panel, monitors the circuits of the supplemental front air bag and supplemental side air bag systems, and pre-tensioner seat belt. The circuits monitored by the air bag warning light are the diagnosis sensor unit, satellite sensors, front air bag modules, side air bag modules and all related wiring, and pre-tensioner seat belt. After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning

1-18

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. If any of the following conditions occur, the supplemental front air bag system, supplemental side air bag system, and pre-tensioner seat belt need servicing: The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds. The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently. The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all. Under these conditions, the supplemental front air bags, supplemental side air bags and/or pre-tensioner seat belt may not operate properly. They must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest authorized NISSAN dealer.

Repair and replacement procedure

The supplemental front air bags, supplemental side air bags and pre-tensioner seat belt are designed to activate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light will remain illuminated after inflation has occurred. Repair and replacement of these systems should be done only by authorized NISSAN dealers. When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the supplemental front air bags, supplemental side air bags, pre-tensioner seat belt and related parts should be pointed out to the person conducting the maintenance. The ignition key should always be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle.

belts must also be replaced. The module should be replaced by an authorized NISSAN dealer. The supplemental front air bag module or supplemental side air bag module cannot be repaired. The supplemental front air bag system, supplemental side air bag system and pre-tensioner seat belt should be inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle. If you need to dispose of these supplemental systems or scrap the vehicle, contact an authorized NISSAN dealer. Correct disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the supplemental front air bag system, supplemental side air bag system and/or pre-tensioner seat belt will not operate in an accident.

WARNING
Once the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag and/or pretensioner seat belt have activated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced, additionally, if any of the supplemental air bags activate, the pre-tensioner seat

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-19

SEAT BELTS PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE

Your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced if you are wearing your seat belt and it is properly adjusted. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag. Most states, provinces or territories require that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0134

WARNING
Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be properly restrained in the rear seat and, if appropriate, in a child restraint. The belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly. Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the belt behind your back under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

1-20

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

 Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible around the hips, not the waist. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident. Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle. Do not wear the belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness. Do not allow more than one person to use the same belt. Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts. If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. Once the pre-tensioner seat belt has activated, it cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor. See your NISSAN dealer. Removal and installation of the pretensioner seat belt system components should be done by an authorized NISSAN dealer. All seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision by your NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage
SSS0136

and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint manufacturers inspection instructions and replacement recommendations. The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-21

All US states and provinces of Canada require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. (See Child restraints later in this section.) In addition, there are many types of child restraints available for larger children which should be used for maximum protection. NISSAN recommends that all preteens and children be restrained in the rear seat if possible. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
SSS0016 SSS0014

CHILD SAFETY
Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly restrained. The proper restraint depends on the childs size. Generally, infants (up to about 1 year and less than 20 lb (9 kg) should be placed in rear facing child restraints. Front facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear facing child restraints.

WARNING
Infants and children need special protection. The vehicles seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints.

This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (air bag system) for the front passenger (see Supplemental Restraint System earlier in this section for precautions).

Infants and small children

NISSAN recommends that infants and small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturers instructions for installation and use.

1-22

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Larger children
Children who are too large for child restraint systems should be seated and restrained by the seat belts which are provided. If the childs seating position has a shoulder belt that fits close to the face or neck, the use of a booster seat (commercially available) may help overcome this. The booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top, middle portion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck, use the shoulder belt without the booster seat.

PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug, and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations.

SSS0018

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING
Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident

WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is moving. The child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident or a sudden stop.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-23

SSS0020

SSS0102

SSS0061

you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. For most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly.

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. 2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until it snaps. The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion will permit the belt to move, and allow you some freedom of movement in the seat.

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown. 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack. The front passenger and rear seat belts have a cinching mechanism for child restraint installation. It is referred to as the automatic locking mode. When the cinching mechanism is activated the seat belt cannot be withdrawn again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. For additional information, see Child restraints later in this section.

1-24

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

The automatic locking mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by a passenger, the locking mode should not be activated. If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension.

forward. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement. If the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any questions about belt operation, see your NISSAN dealer.

WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain that seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured in the right position, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

SSS0021

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the belt, press the button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract.

Checking seat belt operation

Your seat belt retractors are designed to lock belt movement using two separate methods: when the belt is pulled quickly from the retractor. when the vehicle slows down rapidly. You can check their operation as follows: grasp the shoulder belt and pull quickly
Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-25

WARNING
After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the shoulder belt down to make sure it is securely fixed in position. The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident.

WARNING
Only NISSAN belt extenders, made by the same company which made the original equipment belts, should be used with NISSAN belts. Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident. Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the child could be seriously injured in a collision or a sudden stop.

SSS0152

Shoulder belt height adjustment (For front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best suited for you. (See Precautions on seat belt usage earlier in this section.) To lower, push the release button, and then move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position, so that the belt passes over the shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position. To raise, move the adjuster up to the desired position without pushing the button.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender is available which is compatible with the installed seat belts. The extender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. See your NISSAN dealer for assistance if the extender is required.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

To clean the seat belt webbings, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpets. Then brush the webbing, wipe it with a cloth and allow it to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry.

1-26

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

CHILD RESTRAINTS
If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth. Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire belt assembly should be replaced.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS

WARNING
Infants and small children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint while riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a child restraint can result in serious injury or death. Infants and small children should never be carried on your lap. It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident. The child could be crushed between the adult and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the same seat belt around both your child and yourself. Never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating supplemental air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. A rear facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat.

NISSAN recommends that the child restraint be installed in the rear seat. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. An improperly installed child restraint could lead to serious injury or death in an accident. In general, child restraints are designed to be installed with the lap portion of a three-point type seat belt. In addition, this vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint lower anchor system, referred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) system. Some child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these lower anchors. For details, see LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) SYSTEM later in this section. Child restraints for infants and children of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind: choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-27

Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicles seat and seat belt system. if the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Always follow all recommended procedures. All US states and Canadian provinces require that infants and small children be restrained in approved child restraints at all times while the vehicle is being operated.

WARNING
Improper use of a child restraint can result in increased injuries for both the infant or child and other occupants in the vehicle. Follow all of the child restraint manufacturers instructions for installation and use. When purchasing a child

restraint, be sure to select one which will fit your child and vehicle. It may not be possible to properly install some types of child restraints in your vehicle. If the child restraint is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases. Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to fit the child restraint, but as upright as possible. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Tilt it from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. For a front facing child restraint, check to make sure the shoulder belt does not go in front of the childs face or neck. If it does, put the shoulder belt behind the child restraint. If you

must install a front facing child restraint in the front seat, see instructions later in this section. When your child restraint is not in use, store it in the trunk or keep it secured with a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown around in case of a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION
Remember that a child restraint left in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the child restraint.

1-28

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

INSTALLATION ON REAR SEAT OUTBOARD OR CENTER POSITIONS

WARNING
The three-point belt on your vehicle is equipped with a locking mode retractor which must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to do so will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. It could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision.

SSS0153

SSS0154

Front facing
When you install a child restraint in a rear outboard or center seat, follow these steps: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. It can be placed in a front facing direction, depending on the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manufacturers instructions.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-29

SSS0043

SSS0107

SSS0062

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for belt routing.

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts back to emergency locking mode when the belt is fully retracted.

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt to remove any slack in the belt.

1-30

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt only locks during a sudden stop or impact.

SSS0108

SSS0155

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is allowed to wind back into the

Rear facing
When you install a child restraint in a rear outboard or center seat, follow these steps: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. The direction of the child restraint depends on the type of the child restraint and the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manufacturers instructions.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-31

SSS0156

SSS0046

SSS0045A

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for belt routing.

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts back to emergency locking mode when the belt is fully retracted.

1-32

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt only locks during a sudden stop or impact.

SSS0109

SSS0110

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is allowed to wind back into the
Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-33

 Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the child restraint lower anchors. The child restraint will not be secured properly. The LATCH system anchors are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstance are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses.
SSS0177A

child restraint, refer to the illustration for the rear seating positions equipped with LATCH system anchors which can be used to secure the child restraint. The LATCH system anchors are located at the rear of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the LATCH system anchors. Some child restraints may also require the use of a top tether strap. See Top tether strap child restraint later in this section for installation instructions. When installing a child restraint, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint. When you install a LATCH system compatible child restraint to the lower anchor attachments in the rear seat, follow these steps.

LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM

WARNING
Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown. If a child restraint is not secured properly, your child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident.

Some child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. This system is known as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) system. This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH system compatible child restraints. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with the LATCH system. This information may also be in the child restraint owners manual. If you have such a

WARNING
Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor area and feeling to make sure there are no obstructions over the LATCH system anchors, such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child

1-34

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

restraint will not be secured properly if the LATCH system anchors are obstructed. 1. To install the LATCH system compatible child restraint, insert the child restraint LATCH system anchor attachments into the anchor points on the rear seat. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether, see Top tether strap child restraint later in this section for installation instructions. 2. After attaching the child restraint and before placing the child in it, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side and tug it forward to make sure that the child restraint is securely held in place. 3. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use.

WARNING
The child restraint anchor point is designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstance is it to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses.

Anchor point locations

SSS0157

Anchor points are located on the rear parcel shelf finisher. If you have any questions when installing a top strap child restraint on the rear seat, consult your NISSAN dealer for details.

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT

If your child restraint has a top tether strap, it must be secured to the provided anchor point. First, secure the child restraint with the rear seat belt. Remove the anchor cover from the anchor point which is located directly behind the child seat. Secure the top tether strap to the anchor bracket. Keep the removed cover in a secured place to prevent loss or damage to the cover.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-35

ing a child restraint. Failure to use the retractors locking mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The child restraint could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision.

SSS0129

INSTALLATION ON FRONT PASSENGER SEAT

WARNING
Never install a rear facing child restraint in the front passenger seat. Supplemental air bags inflate with great force. A rear facing child restraint could be struck by the supplemental air bag in a crash and could seriously injure or kill your child.

NISSAN recommends that child restraints be installed in the rear seat. However, if you must install a front facing child restraint in the front passenger seat, move the passenger seat to the rearmost position. A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat. The three-point belt in your vehicle is equipped with a locking mode retractor which must be used when install-

1-36

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

SSS0135

SSS0055

SSS0113

Front facing
If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, follow these steps: 1. Position the child restraint on the front passenger seat. It should be placed in a front facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Always follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for belt routing.

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts back to emergency locking mode when the belt is fully retracted.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-37

seat belt is allowed to wind back into the retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt only locks during a sudden stop or impact.

SSS0056

SSS0114

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the lap belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the

1-38

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

MEMO

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

1-39

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel ....................................................... 2-2 Meters and gauges ................................................... 2-3 Speedometer and odometer ................................ 2-4 Tachometer .......................................................... 2-4 Engine coolant temperature gauge ...................... 2-5 Fuel gauge ........................................................... 2-5 Compass display (if so equipped)............................. 2-6 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders........ 2-9 Checking bulbs ..................................................... 2-9 Warning lights....................................................... 2-9 Indicator lights .................................................... 2-12 Audible reminders .............................................. 2-13 Security systems ..................................................... 2-14 Vehivle security system...................................... 2-14 Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System .................. 2-15 Windshield wiper and washer switch ...................... 2-16 Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defogger switch ....................................................... 2-17 Headlight and turn signal switch ............................. 2-18 Xenon headlights................................................ 2-19 Headlight switch ................................................. 2-19 Turn signal switch .............................................. 2-21 Fog light switch (if so equipped) ............................. 2-21 Hazard warning flasher switch ................................ 2-22

Horn......................................................................... Heated seats (if so equipped)................................. Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) .................. Traction control system (TCS) cancel switch (if so equipped) ....................................................... Power outlet ............................................................ Cigarette lighter and ashtray (accessory) ............... Storage .................................................................... Trays................................................................... Sunglasses holder .............................................. Cup holder .......................................................... Glove box ........................................................... Console box ....................................................... Cargo net (if so equipped) ................................. Windows .................................................................. Power windows .................................................. Sunroof (if so equipped) ......................................... Automatic sunroof .............................................. Clock ....................................................................... Adjusting the time............................................... Trip computer .......................................................... Interior light ............................................................. Ceiling................................................................. Personal light ..........................................................

2-22 2-23 2-24 2-24 2-24 2-25 2-26 2-26 2-26 2-27 2-27 2-28 2-28 2-29 2-29 2-31 2-31 2-32 2-32 2-32 2-34 2-34 2-35

Vanity mirror light (if so equipped).......................... Trunk light ............................................................... HomeLink Universal Transceiver (if so equipped) ....................................................... Programming HomeLink ................................... Programming HomeLink for Canadian customers ...........................................................

2-36 2-36 2-37 2-37 2-39

Operating the HomeLink Universal Transceiver ......................................................... Programming trouble diagnosis.......................... Clearing the programmed information................ Reprogramming a single HomeLink button...... If your vehicle is stolen ......................................

2-39 2-39 2-39 2-40 2-40

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Instrument brightness control switch (P.2-20) 2. Headlight, fog light (if so equipped) and turn signal switch (P.2-18) 3. Traction control system (TCS) cancel switch (if so equipped) (P.2-24) 4. Meters/gauges (P.2-3) 5. Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch type B (P.2-17) 6. Windshield wiper/washer switch (P.2-16) 7. Ventilator (P.4-2) 8. Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch Type Auto A/C (P.2-17) 9. Heater/air conditioner control (P.4-3) or radio/cassette player (4-16) 10. Clock (P.2-32) 11. Security indicator light (P.2-14) 12. Radio/cassette player (P.4-16)/CD player (P.4-16) or Navigation system* 13. Passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-8) 14. Fuse box cover (P.8-24) 15. Automatic drive positioner system cancel switch (if so equipped) (P.3-18) 16. Heated steering switch (if so equipped) (P.2-23) 17. Outside mirror remote control (P.3-15) 18. Steering switch for audio control (P.4-28) and trip computer (P.2-32) 19. Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-8) 20. Tilting steering wheel lock lever (P.3-14) 21. Cruise control main/set switch (P.5-14) 22. Ignition switch/steering lock (P.5-4)

SIC1736

2-2

Instruments and controls

METERS AND GAUGES

23. Power outlet (P.2-24) or cigarette lighter (accessory) (P.2-25) 24. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.2-22) 25. Tray (P.2-26) or ashtray (accessory) (P.2-25) 26. Glove box (P.2-27) See the page indicated in parentheses for operating details. *: Refer to the separate Navigation System Owners Manual.

SIC1737

1. Fuel gauge 2. Speedometer 3. Warning/Indicator lights 4. Tachometer 5. Engine coolant temperature gauge

6. Warning/Indicator lights 7. Odometer (Total/Twin trip) 8. Reset knob for trip odometer 9. Trip computer 10.Warning/Indicator lights
Instruments and controls

2-3

Changing the display: Pushing the reset knob changes the display as follows: TRIP A , TRIP B , TRIP A Resetting the trip odometer: Pushing the reset knob for more than 1 second resets the trip odometer to zero.

SIC1227

SIC1249

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (r/min).

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer/twin trip odometer are displayed when the ignition key is in the ON position. The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.

CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.

2-4

Instruments and controls

CAUTION
If the gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. See If your vehicle overheats in the 6. In case of emergency section for immediate action required.
SIC0173 SIC1738

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant temperature will vary with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.

FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank. The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hill. The gauge needle is designed to move to the E (Empty) position when the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers Empty.

Instruments and controls

2-5

COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)

The low fuel warning light comes on when the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the gauge reaches E. There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E. The indicates that the fuel filler lid is located on the drivers side of the vehicle.

CAUTION
If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving trips, the lamp should turn off. If the lamp remains on after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see the Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) later in this section.

SIC1931

When the COMPASS switch is in the ON position, the compass display will indicate the direction the vehicle is heading. N: north E: east S: south W: west If the display reads C, calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in 3 complete circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h). You can also calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle on your everyday route. The compass will be calibrated once it has tracked 3 complete circles.

2-6

Instruments and controls

Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic north and geographical north is known as variance. In some areas, this difference can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings. Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location if this happens: 1. Press the COMPASS switch for more than 3 seconds. The current zone number will appear in the display. 2. Find your current location and variance one number on the zone map. 3. Press the COMPASS switch until the new zone number appears in the display. After you stop pressing the switch in, the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds. Inaccurate compass direction: 1. With the display turned on, push the COMPASS switch for 3 seconds, until the zone selection comes up (a number will be displayed in the mirror compass window). 2. Toggle until correct zone is found and release switch.
SIC0611

3. The display will show all segments, and return to the normal compass mode within
Instruments and controls

2-7

10 seconds of no switch activity. 4. If the vehicle changes zone, repeat steps 1 thru 3. See map. If the compass deviates from the correct indication soon after repeated adjustment, have the compass checked at an authorized dealer. The compass may not indicate the correct compass point in tunnels or while driving up or down a steep hill. (The compass returns to the correct compass point when the vehicle moves to an area where the geomagnetism is stabilized.) it may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

CAUTION
Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc. which are attached to the vehicle by means of a magnet. They affect the operation of the compass. When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as

2-8

Instruments and controls

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

or Anti-lock brake warning light A/T check warning light (A/T models) or Brake warning light Charge warning light Door open warning light Engine oil pressure warning light Low fuel warning light Low washer fluid warning light Seat belt warning light Stop/tail warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Trunk lid open warning light Cruise main switch indicator light Cruise set indicator light High beam indicator light (Blue) Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) Slip indicator light Traction control system indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

CHECKING BULBS
Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition key to ON without starting the engine. The following lights will come on: , or , , The following lights come on briefly and then go off: , or , , , If any light fails to come on, it may indicate a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the elec-

trical system. Have the system repaired promptly.

WARNING LIGHTS or Anti-lock brake warning light

running, it may indicate that the anti-lock brake system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. If an abnormality occurs in the system, the anti-lock function will cease but the ordinary brakes will continue to operate normally. If the light comes on while you are driving, contact your NISSAN dealer for repair.

After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the light will illuminate. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light comes on while the engine is

Instruments and controls

2-9

A/T check warning light (A/T models)

When the ignition switch is turned ON, the light comes on for 2 seconds. If the light blinks for approximately 8 seconds, it may indicate the automatic transmission system is not functioning properly. Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the transmission.

WARNING
Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous. Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or low brake fluid level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as greater pedal travel. If the brake fluid level is below the MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked at a NISSAN dealer. 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warning system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Charge warning light

If the light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate that the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off and check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing or if the light remains on, see your NISSAN dealer immediately.

or

Brake warning light

CAUTION
Do not continue driving if the belt is loose, broken or missing.

This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems. Parking brake indicator: When the ignition key is in the ON position, the light comes on when the parking brake is applied. Low brake fluid warning light: The light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following: 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. See Brake and clutch fluid in the 8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself section.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors are not closed securely while the ignition key is ON.

Engine oil pressure warning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop. The oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. See Engine

2-10

Instruments and controls

oil in the 8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself section.

Seat belt warning light and chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition key is turned to ON, and will remain illuminated until the drivers seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime will sound for about 6 seconds unless the drivers seat belt is securely fastened. See Seat belts in the 1. Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems section for precautions on seat belt usage.

CAUTION
Running the engine with the oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.

air bag (if so equipped) and pre-tensioner seat belt needs servicing and your vehicle must be taken to your nearest authorized NISSAN dealer. The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds. The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently. The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all. Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental Restraint System and/or the pre-tensioner seat belt may not function properly. For additional information, see Supplemental restraint system in the 1. Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems section.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel in the tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E. There will be a small reserve of fuel remaining in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E.

Stop/tail warning light

If the light comes on with the engine running when the light switch is on or the brake pedal is depressed, one or more stop/tail light bulbs are burned out. Replace the stop/tail light bulb.

WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the supplemental air bag system, supplemental side air bag system (if so equipped) and/or pretensioner seat belt system will not operate in an accident.

Low washer fluid warning light (if so equipped)

This light comes on when the washer tank fluid is at a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary. See Window washer fluid in the 8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself section.

Supplemental air bag warning light

After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light will illuminate. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. If any of the following conditions occur, the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side

Instruments and controls

2-11

Trunk lid open warning light

This light comes on when the trunk lid is not closed securely while the ignition key is ON.

Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction. The malfunction indicator lamp may also come on steady if the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel filler cap is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least three gallons of fuel in the fuel tank. After a few driving trips, the lamp should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists. Operation The malfunction indicator lamp will come on in one of two ways: Malfunction indicator lamp on steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected. Check the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The lamp should turn off after a few driving trips. If the lamp does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the

vehicle inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer. Malfunction indicator lamp blinking An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To reduce or avoid emission control system damage: a) Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH (72 km/h). b) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration. c) Avoid steep uphill grades. d) If possible, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed. The malfunction indicator lamp may stop blinking and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

INDICATOR LIGHTS Cruise main switch indicator light

The light comes on when the cruise control main switch is pushed. The light goes out when the main switch is pushed again. When the cruise main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise control system is operational.

Cruise set indicator light

The light comes on while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control system. If the light blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate the cruise control system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer.

High beam indicator light (Blue)

This light comes on when the headlight high beam is on and goes out when the low beam is selected.

CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced

2-12

Instruments and controls

fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission control system.

Traction control system indicator light (if so equipped)

After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the light will illuminate. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the traction control system (TCS) is operational. If the light stays on or comes on when you are driving, it may indicate the traction control system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. The traction control system indicator light may come on for the following reasons. a) If the system is turned off by pressing the button on the instrument panel, the indicator light will come on and stay on. To turn the system back on, press the button again. The indicator light will go off. b) If engine speed is above 4,000 rpm in a selected gear. Use D range on low friction road surfaces. If the traction control system indicator light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on, have your vehicle checked by your NISSAN dealer.

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

The light flashes when the turn signal switch lever or hazard switch is turned on.

Slip indicator light (if so equipped)

This light will blink on when your traction control system (TCS) is limiting wheel spin. Slippery road conditions may exist if the slip indicator light blinks on. If this happens, adjust your driving accordingly. You may feel or hear the system working, but this is normal. The light will blink on for a few seconds after the traction control system stops limiting wheel spin. The slip indicator light also comes on when you turn the ignition key to ON. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light does not come on or go off, have the traction control system checked by your NISSAN dealer. The system operates in all transmission shift lever positions. But the system can upshift the transmission only as high as the indicated shift lever position.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS Key reminder chime

The chime will sound if the drivers side door is opened while the key is left in the ignition switch (ignition switch is turned off). Remove the key and take it with you when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime

The chime will sound when the front door is opened with the headlight switch on unless the ignition key is in the ON position. Make sure to turn the light switch off when you leave the vehicle.

Seat belt warning chime

The chime will sound for about 6 seconds unless the drivers seat belt is securely fastened.

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a brake pad requires replacement,
Instruments and controls

2-13

SECURITY SYSTEMS
it will make a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

IC0005

SIC1228

Your vehicle has two types of security systems, as follows: Vehicle Security System Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System The security condition will be shown by the security indicator light.

How to activate the vehicle security system

1. Close all windows. The system can be activated even if the windows are open. 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 3. Close and lock all doors, hood and trunk lid. Lock all doors by pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob. When using the keyfob, the hazard indicators flash twice to indicate all doors are locked. 4. Confirm that the SECURITY indicator light

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual and audio alarm signals if parts of the vehicle are disturbed.

2-14

Instruments and controls

comes on. The SECURITY indicator light glows for about 30 seconds and then blinks. The system is now activated. If, during this 30 second time period, the door is unlocked by the key or the keyfob, or the ignition key is turned to ACC or ON, the system will not activate. If the key is turned slowly toward the front of the vehicle when locking the door, the system may not activate. If the key is returned beyond the vertical position toward the rear of the vehicle to remove the key, the system may be deactivated. If the indicator light fails to glow for 30 seconds, unlock the door once and lock it again. Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will activate with all doors, hood and trunk lid locked and ignition key off. Turn the ignition key to ACC to turn the system off.

proximately 1 minute. However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking a door or trunk lid with the key, or by pressing the UNLOCK button on the keyfob. The alarm is activated by: Opening the door without using the key or keyfob. Opening the trunk lid without using the key or keyfob. Opening the hood.

the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key. If the engine fails to start using the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key, it may be due to interference caused by another Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key, an automated toll road device or automated payment device on the key ring. Restart the engine using the following procedures: 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 10 seconds. 3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again. 4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key. If this procedure allows the engine to start, NISSAN recommends placing the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices. Statement related to section 15 of FCC rules for Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer SysInstruments and controls

How to stop alarm

The alarm will stop only by unlocking a door or trunk lid with the key, or by pressing the UNLOCK button on keyfob. The alarm will not stop if the ignition switch is turned to ACC or ON. If the system does not operate as described above, have it checked by your NISSAN dealer.

Vehicle security system operation

The security system will give the following alarm: The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently. The alarm automatically turns off after ap-

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM

The Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of

2-15

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

tem (CONT ASSY-IMMOBILIZER, ASSY-IMMOBILIZER) ANT

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EXPRESSLY APPROVED BY THE MANUFACTURE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD VOID THE USERS AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT.

SIC1228

SIC1739

Security indicator light

If Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the ignition key is in the ON position. If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, see your NISSAN dealer for Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System service as soon as possible. Please bring all Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have when visiting your NISSAN dealer for service.

The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition key is in the ON position. Push the lever down to operate the wiper. Intermittent operation can be adjusted from 2 to 13 seconds by turning the knob. Pull the lever toward you to operate the washer. The wipers will automatically operate several times when the washer is activated. Push the lever up to cycle the wipers one time.

2-16

Instruments and controls

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR (if so equipped) DEFOGGER SWITCH

WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION
SIC1502A SIC1918

The following could damage the washer system: Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds. Do not operate the washer if the reservoir tank is empty.

To defog/defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors, start the engine and push the switch on. The indicator light will come on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off. It will automatically turn off in approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster.

Instruments and controls

2-17

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

SIC1740A

SIC1741

2-18

Instruments and controls

XENON HEADLIGHTS

WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE When xenon headlights are on, they produce a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to modify or disassemble. Always have your xenon headlights replaced at an authorized NISSAN dealer. Xenon headlights provide considerably more light than conventional headlights. If they are not correctly aimed, they might temporarily blind an oncoming driver or the driver ahead of you and cause a serious accident. If headlights are not aimed correctly, immediately take your vehicle to an authorized NISSAN dealer and have the headlights adjusted correctly. When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, its brightness or color varies slightly. However, the color and brightness will soon stabilize.

The life of xenon headlights will be shortened by frequent on-off operation. It is generally desirable not to turn off the headlights for short intervals, (for example, when the vehicle stops at a traffic signal). Even when the daytime running lights are active (Canada only), the xenon headlights do not turn on. This way the life of the xenon headlights is not reduced. If the xenon headlight bulb is close to burning out, the brightness will drastically decrease, the light will start blinking, or the color of the light will become reddish. If one or more of the above signs appear, contact a NISSAN dealer.

The headlight will also automatically turn off 45 seconds after a front door is opened and closed. poWhen the light switch is turned to the sition, the headlight low or high beam will turn off. Turn the switch to the position: The front clearance, side marker, tail, license plate and instrument lights will come on. Turn the switch to the position: Headlights will come on and all the other lights remain on.

HEADLIGHT SWITCH Lighting

Turn the switch to the AUTO position: When the ignition key is in the ON position, the tail light, headlight, instrument light and other lights turn on automatically, depending on the brightness of the surroundings. The headlight will automatically turn off 5 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position and the drivers or front passengers door is opened.
Instruments and controls

2-19

 When the headlight switch remains in the or position after the lights automatically turn off, the lights will turn on for 5 minutes when the headlight switch is turned to the OFF position and turn to the or position.

CAUTION
Be sure to turn the light switch to the OFF position when you leave the vehicle for extended periods of time, otherwise the battery will go dead.
SIC1230

Be sure not to put anything on top of the photo sensor located on the top left-hand side of the instrument panel. The photo sensor controls the autolamp; if it is covered, the photo sensor reacts as if it is dark and the headlights will illuminate.

Never leave the light switch on when the engine is not running for extended periods of time even if the headlights turn off automatically.

IC1284MA

Instrument brightness control

The instrument brightness control operates when the light switch is in the or position. Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instrument panel lights (except clock) and power window switch lights. When the control is turned to the right until a click sound is heard, the light intensity will be at maximum. When the control is turned to the left until a click sound is heard, the light will be turned off.

Battery saver system

When the headlight switch is in the or position while the ignition switch is in the ON position, the lights (including the front fog light) will automatically turn off 5 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position.

2-20

Instruments and controls

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped) Headlight beam select

To select the high beam, push the lever forward. Pull it back to select the low beam.

WARNING
When the daytime running light system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

Passing signal
Pulling the lever toward you will flash the headlight high beam.

Daytime running light system (Canada only)

The headlights automatically illuminate at a reduced intensity when the engine is started with the parking brake released. The daytime running lights operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position or in the position. Turn the headlight switch to the position for full illumination when driving at night. If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the daytime running lights do not illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate once the parking brake is released. The daytime running lights will remain on until the ignition switch is turned off.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Turn signal

Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signals cancel automatically.
SIC1760

Lane change signal

To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or down to the point where lights begin flashing.

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch to the position, then turn the switch to the position. To turn them off, turn the switch to the OFF position. The headlights must be on for the fog lights to operate.

Instruments and controls

2-21

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic. Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on. The flasher can be actuated with the ignition switch either off or on.
SIC1232

HORN

SIC1280

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights will flash. Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving.

To sound the horn, push the center pad area of the steering wheel.

WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury.

WARNING
If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road.

2-22

Instruments and controls

HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)

nate when low or high is selected. The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on. 3. When the vehicles interior is warmed, or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch to the off position (center). Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth. When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, thinner, or any similar materials. If any abnormalities are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION
SIC1742

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The switches located on the center console can be operated independently of each other. 1. Start the engine. 2. Select heat range. For low heat, press the of the switch. For high heat, press the side of the switch. (Low) side (High)

The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running. Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat. Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated. Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.
Instruments and controls

For no heat, the switch has a center OFF position between low and high. The indicator light in the switch will illumi-

2-23

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if so equipped)

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS) CANCEL SWITCH (if so equipped)

POWER OUTLET

SIC1748

SIC1065

SIC1533

Push the heated steering switch to warm the steering wheel after the engine starts. The indicator lights will come on. Push the switch again to turn the heated steering off. It will automatically turn off in approximately 30 minutes.

To cancel the Traction Control System (TCS), push the TCS cancel switch. The indicator will come on. Push it again or restart the engine to turn the system back on. See Traction control system in the 5. Starting and driving section.

The power outlet is for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones.

CAUTION
Use caution as the socket and plug may be hot during or immediately after use. This power outlet is not designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power

2-24

Instruments and controls

CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND ASHTRAY (accessory)

draw. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory. Use this power outlet with the engine running. (If the engine is stopped, this could result in a discharged battery.) Avoid using when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defogger is on. Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure to turn off the power switch of electrical accessory being used or the ACC power of the vehicle. Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may blow. When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water to contact the socket.

WARNING
The cigarette lighter should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

CAUTION
The cigarette lighter socket is a power source for the cigarette lighter element only. The use of the cigarette lighter socket as a power source for any other accessory is not recommended.

SIC1233A

The cigarette lighter element is an accessory. A genuine NISSAN cigarette lighter unit can be purchased from your local NISSAN dealer. The cigarette lighter operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. Push the lighter in all the way. When the lighter is heated, it will spring out. Return the lighter to its original position after use.

Instruments and controls

2-25

STORAGE

CAUTION
Do not use for anything other than glasses. Do not leave glasses in the sunglasses holder while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the glasses.

SIC1743

SIC1744

TRAYS

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

WARNING
The storage tray should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

The sunglasses holder can be opened by pushing the lid.

WARNING
The sunglasses holder should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

2-26

Instruments and controls

SIC1745

SIC1235

SPA0388

CUP HOLDER

CAUTION
Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger. Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.

GLOVE BOX
When locking or unlocking the glove box, use the master key. The glove box may be opened by pulling the handle.

WARNING
The cup holder should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Front: For larger cups, remove the inside tray.

WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

Instruments and controls

2-27

SIC1242A

CARGO NET (if so equipped)

The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargo area from moving around while your vehicle is driven. To install the cargo net, attach the hooks to the retainers.
SIC1236

CONSOLE BOX

To remove the cargo net, detach the hooks from the cargo net retainers.

WARNING
The center console box should not be

used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

2-28

Instruments and controls

WINDOWS

WARNING
Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Be sure to secure hooks into the retainers. The cargo restrained in the net must not exceed 30 lb (13.6 kg) or the net may not stay secured.

ingly activate switches or controls and become trapped in a window. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents. The power windows operate when the ignition key is in the ON position and for about 45 seconds, after the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. If the drivers door or the front passengers door is opened during this period of about 45 seconds, power to the windows is canceled.
SIC1891

POWER WINDOWS

To open or close the window, push down or pull up the switch and hold it. The main switch (driver side switches) will open or close all the windows.

WARNING
Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowInstruments and controls

2-29

The auto reverse function can be activated when a front window is closed by automatic operation when the ignition key is in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. The doors remain closed. Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window occurs.

WARNING
SIC1892 SIC1893

The passenger side switch will open or close only the corresponding window. To open or close the window, hold the switch down or up.

Automatic operation
To fully open or close the drivers or front passengers side window, completely press or lift the switch and release it; it need not be held. The window will automatically open or close all the way. To stop the window, just press or lift the switch on the opposite side.

Locking passengers windows

When the lock button is pushed in, only the driver side window can be opened or closed. Push it in again to cancel.

There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window.

Auto reverse function (For front window)

If the control unit detects something caught in a front window as it moves up, the window will be immediately lowered.

2-30

Instruments and controls

SUNROOF (if so equipped)

To close the roof, press the switch to the side. Sliding position of lid can be chosen according to sliding amount of switch. To fully open or close the roof, completely move the switch to the or side. position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the sunroof occurs.

Restarting the sunroof sliding switch

The sliding switch will become inoperable after the battery terminal is disconnected, the electrical supply interrupted and/or some abnormality detected. Use the following re-set procedure to return sunroof operation to normal.
SIC1746

WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the sunroof.

AUTOMATIC SUNROOF
The sunroof will only operate when the ignition key is in the ON position. The automatic sunroof is operational for about 45 seconds, even if the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. If the drivers door or the front passengers door is opened during this period of about 45 seconds, power to the sunroof is canceled.

1. If the sunroof lid is open, push the tilting switch repeatedly toward tilt DOWN to fully close the lid. 2. After the lid has closed all the way, keep pushing the tilting switch toward tilt DOWN for more than 1 second.

Tilting the sunroof

To tilt up, first close the sunroof, then press and hold the side of the tilt switch. To tilt down the sunroof, press and hold the side.

Auto reverse function (When closing the sunroof)

If the control unit detects something caught in the sunroof as it moves to the front, the sunroof will immediately open backward. The auto reverse function can be activated when the sunroof is closed by automatic operation when the ignition key is in the ON

Sliding the sunroof

To open the roof, press the switch to the side.

Sun shade
Open or close the sun shade by sliding it backward or forward. The shade will open automatically when the
Instruments and controls

2-31

CLOCK
sunroof is opened. However, it must be closed manually.

TRIP COMPUTER

WARNING
In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open sunroof. Always use seat belts and child restraints. Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the sunroof is closing.

SIC0910

SIC1749

The digital clock displays time when the ignition key is in ACC or ON. If the power supply is disconnected, the clock will not indicate the correct time. Readjust the time.

CAUTION
Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from the sunroof before opening. Do not place any heavy object on the sunroof or surrounding area.

The display of the trip computer is situated in the tachometer display. When the ignition switch is turned to ON, the display scrolls all the modes of the trip computer and then shows the mode chosen before the ignition switch is turned OFF. If the battery terminal is disconnected, push the trip computer mode switch more than 1 second to activate the computer.

ADJUSTING THE TIME

Push the H button to adjust the hour. Push the M button to adjust the minute.

If the sunroof does not close

Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the sunroof.

2-32

Instruments and controls

tion. Press the mode switch if you wish to return to the mode that was selected before the warning occurred. The ICY indicator will continue blinking as long as the temperature remains below 39F (4C).

play just before the ignition switch is turned OFF may continue to be displayed. When driving uphill or rounding curves, the fuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarily change the display.

Distance to empty (dte mile or km)

The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling. The dte is constantly being calculated, based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display is updated every 30 seconds. The dte mode includes a low range warning feature: when the fuel level is low, the dte mode is automatically selected and the digits blink in order to draw the drivers attention. Press the mode switch if you wish to return to the mode that was selected before the warning occurred. The dte mark (dte) will remain blinking until the vehicle is refuelled. When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte display will change to ( ). NOTE: If the amount of fuel added while the ignition switch is OFF is small, the dis-

Average fuel consumption ( or )

The Average fuel consumption mode shows the average fuel consumption since the last reset. Resetting is done by pressing the mode switch for more than approximately 1 second. The display is updated every 30 seconds. At about the first 1/3 miles (500 m) after a reset, the display shows ( ).

SIC1750

When the ignition switch is turned to ON, modes of the trip computer can be selected by pushing once on the trip mode switch. The following modes can be selected:

Average speed (

or

Outside air temperature (ICY F or C)

The outside air temperature is displayed in F or C. The outside air temperature mode includes a low temperature warning feature: below 37F (3C), the outside air temperature mode is automatically selected and ICY indicator will illuminate in order to draw the drivers atten-

The average speed mode shows the average vehicle speed since last reset. Resetting is done by pressing the mode switch for more than approximately 1 second. The display is updated every 30 seconds. The first 30 seconds after a reset, the display shows ( ).

Journey time
The journey time mode shows the time since the last reset. The displayed time can be reset by pressing the mode switch for more than approximately 1 second.
Instruments and controls

2-33

INTERIOR LIGHT
NOTE: If a low temperature warning and low range warning occur simultaneously, other display modes switch automatically to the outside temperature display. When the mode switch is pushed, the display switches to the mode chosen before the warning display, and the ICY indicator will blink. The key is removed from the ignition switch while all doors are closed. The ceiling light will turn off while the 30 second timer is activated, when: The drivers door is locked either with the keyfob, a key, or the lock-unlock switch. The ignition switch is turned ON. When the interior light switch or personal light switch is in the ON position, the interior, personal, and vanity mirror lights will automatically turn off 30 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position. To turn on the light again, insert the key into the ignition switch and move it to the ON position. After the above procedure, the interior, personal, and vanity mirror lights will automatically turn off 30 minutes after the latest operation of the following with the ignition switch in the ACC or OFF position: Opening or closing any door Locking or unlocking with the keyfob, a key or the lock-unlock switch. Inserting or removing a key from the ignition switch These lights will turn on again when any of the

IC1226

CEILING
The ceiling light has a three-position switch. When the switch is in the center k position, the light will illuminate when a door is opened. The light will stay on for about 30 seconds when: The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, a key or the lock-unlock switch while all doors are closed. The drivers door is opened and then closed while the key is removed from the ignition switch.

2-34

Instruments and controls

PERSONAL LIGHT
above operations is performed after the lights have turned off automatically. (The lights will turn off 30 minutes after the latest operation of the above as well.)

CAUTION
Turn off the interior, personal and vanity mirror lights when you leave the vehicle. Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

IC1019-B

SIC1747

When the interior light or the personal light switch is in the ON position, the interior, personal, and vanity mirror lights will automatically turn off 30 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position. To turn on the light again, insert the key into the ignition switch and move it to the ON position. After the above procedure, the interior, personal, or vanity mirror lights will automatically turn off 30 minutes after the latest operation of the following with the ignition switch in the ACC or OFF position: Opening or closing any door

Locking or unlocking with the keyfob, a key or the lock-unlock switch. Inserting or removing a key from the ignition switch These lights will turn on again when any of the above operations is performed after the lights have turned off automatically. (The lights will turn off 30 minutes after the latest operation of the above as well.)

Instruments and controls

2-35

VANITY MIRROR LIGHT (if so equipped)

TRUNK LIGHT
The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the light will go off.

CAUTION
Turn off the interior, personal and vanity mirror lights when you leave the vehicle. Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

SIC0186

The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when the cover on the vanity mirror is opened. When the interior light or the personal light switch is in the ON position, the interior, personal, and vanity mirror lights will automatically turn off 30 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position. To turn on the light again, insert the key into the ignition switch and move it to the ON position.

2-36

Instruments and controls

HomeLink UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device. The HomeLink Universal Transceiver power will automatically turn off 30 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned to the off position. HomeLink Universal Transceiver: Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) devices such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and security systems. Is powered by your vehicles battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehicles battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink will retain all programming. Once the HomeLink Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures (i.e., new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes. For additional information, refer to Programming HomeLink later in this section.

WARNING
Do not use the HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models manufactured after April 1, 1982). A garage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death. During programming, your garage door or gate may open or close. Make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate that you are programming. Your vehicles engine should be turned off while programming the

HomeLink Universal Transceiver.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink
To program your HomeLink Transceiver to operate a garage door, gate, or entry door opener, home or office lighting, you need to be at the same location as the device. Note: Garage door openers (manufactured after 1996) have rolling code protection. To program a garage door opener equipped with rolling code protection; you will need to use a ladder to get up to the garage door opener motor to be able to access the smart or learn program button.

Instruments and controls

2-37

programmed HomeLink button - releasing when the device begins to activate. 5. If the indicator light on the HomeLink blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns solid, HomeLink has picked up a rolling code garage door opener signal. You will need to proceed with the next steps to train the HomeLink to complete the programming which may require a ladder and another person for convenience. 6. Press and release the smart or learn program button located on the garage door openers motor to activate the training mode. This button is usually located near the antenna wire that hangs down from the motor. If the wire originates from under a light lens, you will need to remove the lens to access the program button. NOTE: Once you have pressed and released the program button on the garage door openers motor and the training light is lit, you have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7. Use the help of a second person for convenience to assist when performing this step. 7. Quickly within 30 seconds of pressing and releasing the garage door opener program

SIC2019

SIC2020

1. To begin, press and hold the 2 outer HomeLink buttons (to clear the memory) until the indicator light blinks slowly (after 20 seconds). Release both buttons. 2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter 1-3 inches away from the HomeLink surface.

3. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button. DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has been completed. 4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator light on the HomeLink flashes, changing from a slow blink to a rapidly flashing blink. This could take up to 90 seconds. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapidly flashing light indicates successful programming. To activate the garage door or other programmed device, press and hold the

2-38

Instruments and controls

button, firmly press and release the HomeLink button youve just programmed. Press and release the HomeLink button up to three times to complete the training. 8. Your HomeLink button should now be programmed. (To program the remaining HomeLink buttons for additional door or gate openers, follow steps 2-8 only. NOTE: Do not repeat step one unless you want to clear all previously programmed HomeLink buttons). If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons, please refer to the HomeLink web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-662-6200.

the indicator light flashes rapidly (indicating successful programming). NOTE: If programming a garage door opener, etc., it is advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener components.

press and hold both the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons without interruption. position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 inches (50 to 127 mm) away from the HomeLink surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink is not programmed within that time, try holding the transmitter in another position - keeping the indicator light in view at all times. If you continue to have programming difficulties, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department. The phone numbers are located in the Foreword of this Owners Manual.

OPERATING THE HomeLink UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver (once programmed) may now be used to activate the garage door, etc. To operate, simply press the appropriate programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver button. The red indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION

Individual buttons cannot be cleared, however to clear all programming, press and hold the two outside buttons and release when the indicator light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).

PROGRAMMING HomeLink FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 seconds. To program your hand-held transmitter to HomeLink , continue to press and hold the HomeLink button (note steps 2 through 4 under Programming HomeLink ) while you press and re-press (cycle) your hand-held transmitter every 2 seconds until

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

If the HomeLink does not quickly learn the hand-held transmitter information: replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries. position the hand-held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink surface.

Instruments and controls

2-39

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HomeLink BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink Universal Transceiver button, complete the following. 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do not release the button until step 4 has been completed. 2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after 20 seconds), position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 inches (50 to 127 mm) away from the HomeLink surface. 3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button. 4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly, release both buttons. The HomeLink Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink buttons.

codes of any non-rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink . Consult the Owners Manual of each device or call the manufacturer or dealer of those devices for additional information. When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the HomeLink Universal Transceiver with your new transmitter information. FCC Notice: This device complies with FCC rules part 15. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference and (2) This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the device. DOC: ISTC 1763K1313 FCC I.D.: CB2V67690

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the

2-40

Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys .......................................................................... 3-2 Doors ......................................................................... 3-2 Locking with key ................................................... 3-3 Locking with inside lock knob............................... 3-3 Locking with power door lock switch.................... 3-4 Child safety rear door lock ................................... 3-4 Remote keyless entry system ................................... 3-4 How to use remote keyless entry system ............ 3-5 Battery replacement ............................................. 3-8 Hood ........................................................................ 3-10 Trunk lid .................................................................. 3-10 Opener operation ............................................... 3-11 Key operation ..................................................... 3-11 Interior trunk lid release ..................................... 3-12

Fuel filler lid ............................................................. 3-12 Opener operation ............................................... 3-12 Fuel filler cap ...................................................... 3-13 Steering wheel ........................................................ 3-14 Tilt operation....................................................... 3-14 Sun visors ............................................................... 3-15 Mirrors ..................................................................... 3-15 Automatic anti-glare inside mirror ...................... 3-15 Outside mirrors ................................................... 3-16 Automatic seat positioner (if so equipped) ............. 3-17 Automatic seat positioner operation (A/T models only).................................................................... 3-17 Procedure for storing memory............................ 3-17 Cancel switch ..................................................... 3-19

KEYS
safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. NISSAN does not record any key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate. A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, this key can be duplicated by your NISSAN dealer. Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System KEY Master and Valet keys: The key number is necessary when you need extra Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. As many as 5 Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one vehicle. New keys must be registered to the Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle by your NISSAN dealer. At this time, you should bring all Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because the registration process will erase all memory of the Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System components.

DOORS

WARNING
Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out intruders. Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

SPA1379

You can only drive your vehicle using the master or valet keys which are registered to the Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in the key head. The master key can be used for all the locks. The valet key cannot be used for the trunk lid or glove box locks. To protect belongings when you leave a key with someone, give them the valet key only. Never leave these keys in the vehicle. Record the key number on the key number plate supplied with your keys and keep it in a

3-2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Opening and closing front windows

Turn the drivers door key to the unlock position and hold for about 1 second, the front windows will begin to lower. To stop opening, turn the key to the neutral position. To close the front windows with the door key cylinder, turn the key to the lock position and hold for about 1 second. To stop closing, turn the key to the neutral position.
SPA0084

LOCKING WITH KEY Power

The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors simultaneously. Turning the drivers door key to the front of the vehicle will lock all doors. Turning the drivers door key one time to the rear of the vehicle will unlock the corresponding door. From that position, returning the key to neutral (where the key can only be removed and inserted) and turning it to the rear again within 5 seconds will unlock all doors.

In the event of a hand in the way, or other obstruction, the auto reverse function will activate.

SPA0085

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

To individually lock the doors, move the inside lock knob to the LOCK position, then close the door. To unlock, pull up the inside lock knob to the UNLOCK position. When locking the door without a key, be sure not to leave the key inside the vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-3

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors to release the trunk lid and activate the panic alarm by using the keyfob from outside the vehicle. Before locking the doors, make sure the key is not left in the vehicle. The keyfob can operate at a distance of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. (The effective distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.) As many as four keyfobs can be used with one vehicle. For information concerning the purchase and use of additional keyfob, contact your NISSAN dealer.
SPA1443 SPA0086

The keyfob will not function when: the battery is dead, the distance between the vehicle and the keyfob is over 33 ft (10 m). The panic alarm will not activate when the key is in the ignition switch.

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

All door locks will be engaged when the power door lock switch is moved to the LOCK position with the drivers or front passengers door open. Then close the door and all doors will be locked. When the power door lock switch is moved to the LOCK position with front doors open while a key is in the ignition switch, all doors will lock once and then unlock automatically.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety locking helps prevent doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle. When the lever is in the lock position, the rear door can be opened only from the outside.

CAUTION
The following conditions or occurrences will damage the keyfob. Do not allow the keyfob to become wet.

3-4

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

 Do not drop the keyfob. Do not strike the keyfob sharply against another object. Do not place the keyfob for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140F (60C). If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that keyfob. This will prevent the keyfob from unauthorized use to unlock the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, please contact an authorized NISSAN dealer.

the UNLOCK button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes once. If hazard indicator and horn mode is not necessary, you can switch to hazard indicator only mode by following the switching procedure. In hazard indicator only mode, when the LOCK button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes twice. When the UNLOCK button is pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the horn operates. (Switching procedure) Push the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the keyfob simultaneously for more than 2 seconds to switch from one mode to the other. When pushing the buttons to set hazard indicator only mode, the hazard indicator flashes 3 times. When pushing the buttons to set hazard indicator and horn mode, the hazard indicator flashes once and the horn chirps once.

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Setting hazard indicator and horn mode
This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn mode when you first receive the vehicle. In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the LOCK button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once. When

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-5

SPA1260

Locking doors
1. Remove the ignition key.*1 2. Close all the doors.*2 3. Push the LOCK button on the keyfob. 4. All the doors will lock. All of the doors will lock when the LOCK button on the keyfob is pushed even though a door remains open and/or the ignition key is in the ON position. 5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once.

When the LOCK button is pushed with all doors locked, the hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once as a reminder that the doors are already locked. *1: Doors lock with the keyfob while a key is in the ignition switch. However, the panic alarm will not activate when the key is in the ignition switch. *2: Doors lock with the keyfob while any door is open. However, hazard indicator and horn mode will not function.

3-6

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

in the center k position with the ignition key in any position except the ON position. 2. Push the UNLOCK button on the keyfob again within 5 seconds. All doors unlock The hazard indicator flashes once if all doors are completely closed. All doors lock automatically within 5 minutes after pressing the UNLOCK button unless all of the following operations are performed: any door is opened a key is inserted into the ignition The interior light can be turned off without waiting for 30 seconds by turning the ignition switch to the ON position or by locking the doors with the keyfob.

Opening the front window

SPA1380

Push the UNLOCK button on the keyfob. The drivers door will unlock. Continue to press the UNLOCK button for 3 seconds. The drivers and front passengers windows will be lowered. Continue to press the UNLOCK button until windows are fully open.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Unlocking doors
1. Push the UNLOCK button on the keyfob once. Only the drivers door unlocks

The hazard indicator flashes once if all doors are completely closed with the ignition key in any position except the ON position. The interior light turns on and the light timer activates for 30 seconds when the switch is

3-7

To stop lowering the windows, release the UNLOCK button. To start lowering the windows, press the UNLOCK button again for 3 more seconds. This function will operate after the ignition switch is off and 45 seconds passed or either the front door is opened.

stay on for 30 seconds. 3. The panic alarm stops when: It has run for 30 seconds, or The LOCK or the UNLOCK button is pressed, or The panic button or the trunk lid release button is pushed on the keyfob for longer than 0.5 seconds.

Releasing the trunk lid

1. Push the TRUNK button on the keyfob for longer than 0.5 seconds with the key removed from the ignition key cylinder. 2. The trunk lid opens. The trunk lid will not open when the trunk lid cancel lever is in the CANCEL position. It can be opened only with the key. See Trunk lid later in this section for cancel lever.

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the alarm to call attention as follows: 1. Push the PANIC button on the keyfob for longer than 0.5 seconds with the key removed from the ignition key cylinder. 2. The theft warning alarm and headlights will
SPA1374

BATTERY REPLACEMENT
Replace the battery as follows: 1. Open the lid using a suitable tool. 2. Replace the battery with a new one.

3-8

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Recommended battery: Sanyo CR2025 or equivalent Make sure that the side faces the bottom case. 3. Close the lid securely. 4. Push the keyfob button two or three times to check its operation. See your NISSAN dealer if you need any assistance for replacement. If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement, perform step 4 above. Be careful not to touch a circuit board and a battery terminal. An improperly disposed battery can harm the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal. The keyfob is water-resistant; however, if it does get wet, immediately wipe completely dry. When changing batteries, do not let dust or oil get on the keyfob. FCC Notice: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer compliance

could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-9

HOOD

TRUNK LID

WARNING
Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See Precautions when starting and driving in the 5. Starting and driving section for exhaust gas. Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked with the trunk closed when not in use, and prevent childrens access to car keys.

SPA1381 1 lo1. Pull the hood lock release handle k cated below the instrument panel; the hood will then spring up slightly. 2 at the front of the hood 2. Move the lever k with your fingertips and raise the hood.

WARNING
Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident. If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood.

3. When closing the hood, slowly close the hood and make sure it locks into place.

3-10

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA0095

SPA0992

Cancel lever
When the lever is in the cancel position, the trunk lid cannot be opened with the trunk lid release button. It can be opened only with the master key.
SPA0985

KEY OPERATION
To open the trunk lid, turn the key clockwise. To close, lower and push the trunk lid down securely.

OPENER OPERATION
The trunk lid release button is located under the drivers arm rest. To open the trunk lid, pull the release button. To close, push the trunk lid down securely.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-11

FUEL FILLER LID

vides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become locked inside the trunk. The handle is located on the back side of the trunk lid inside the trunk compartment. To open the trunk lid from the inside, pull the release handle towards you until the lock releases and push up on the trunk lid. The release lever is made of a material that glows in the dark after a brief exposure to ambient light.

SPA1382

SPA0986

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

OPENER OPERATION
To open the fuel filler lid, push the opener switch. To lock, close the fuel filler lid securely.

WARNING
Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the trunk closed, when not in use, and prevent childrens access to car keys. The interior trunk lid release mechanism pro-

3-12

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. Use only an original equipment type fuel filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It malfunccould also cause the tion indicator lamp to come on. Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers: Always place the container on the ground when filling. Do not use electronic devices while filling.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA1396

FUEL FILLER CAP

The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type. Tighten the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are heard. Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder while refueling.

ously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling. Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the cap a quarter turn, and wait for any hissing sound to stop to prevent fuel from spraying out and possible personal injury. Then remove the cap. Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank

WARNING
Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seri-

3-13

STEERING WHEEL
Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are filling it. Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid. Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle. have the vehicle inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see the Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) in the 2. Instruments and controls section.

CAUTION
If fuel is spilled on the car body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage. Tighten until the fuel filler cap clicks. Failure to tighten the fuel filler cap properly may cause the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to illuminate. If the lamp illuminates because the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The lamp should turn off after a few driving trips. If the lamp does not turn off after a few driving trips,
SPA0234

TILT OPERATION
Pull the lock lever and while holding down, adjust the steering wheel up or down to the desired position. Push the lock lever back into place to lock the steering wheel in place.

WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

3-14

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SUN VISORS

MIRRORS

SPA0991

SPA1109A

SPA1490

CAUTION
Store the main sun visor after storing the extension sun visor.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE INSIDE MIRROR

WARNING
Use the AUTO position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity. The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically changes reflection according to the intensity of the headlight of the following vehicle.

When the mirror switch is in the ON position, AUTO indicator light remains on and excessive glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind you will be reduced automatically. When the switch is in the OFF position, the inside mirror will operate normally.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-15

ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. Turn the control knob to right or left to select the right or left outside mirror, then adjust.

SPA1387

MPA0008

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

Foldable outside mirrors

Push the outside mirror backward to fold it.

WARNING
Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects. The outside mirror will operate only when the

3-16

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

AUTOMATIC SEAT POSITIONER (if so equipped) AUTOMATIC SEAT POSITIONER OPERATION (A/T models only)
This system is designed so that the drivers seat will automatically move when the automatic transmission selector lever is in the P (Park) position. This allows the driver to get in and out of the drivers seat more easily. When one of the following conditions is met, the drivers seat will slide backward: When the key is removed from the ignition switch. When the drivers door is opened with the key turned to ACC or LOCK. When the key is turned from ON to ACC with the drivers door open. When one of the following conditions is met, the drivers seat will return to the positions before being set. When the key is inserted into the ignition switch. When the drivers door is closed with the key turned to LOCK.

PROCEDURE FOR STORING MEMORY

Two positions can be stored in the automatic drivers seat positioner memory. Follow these procedures to use the memory system.

SPA1385

1. A/T models: Set the automatic transmission selector lever to the P (Park) position. M/T models: Apply the parking brake securely when the vehicle is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition ON. 3. Adjust the drivers seat and steering column to the desired positions by manually operating each adjusting switch. For additional information, see Seats in the 1. Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems section and Steering wheel earlier in this section.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-17

During this step, do not turn the ignition to any positions other than ON. 4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, push the memory switch 1 or 2 fully for at least 1 second. The indicator light for the pushed memory switch will come on and stay on for approximately 5 seconds after pushing the switch. After the indicator light goes off, the selected positions are stored in the selected memory (1 or 2). If memory is stored in the same memory switch, the previous memory will be deleted.

two times with the ignition key in the LOCK position. 2. Reset the desired position using the previous procedure.

System operation
The automatic drive positioner system will not work or will stop operating under the following conditions: when the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7 km/h). when any two or more of the memory switches are simultaneously pressed while the automatic drive positioner is operating. when the adjusting switch for the drivers seat is turned on while the automatic drive positioner is operating. when the cancel switch located on the instrument panel is pushed to cancel. when the memory switch 1 or 2 is not pushed for at least 1 second. when the seat has already been moved to the memorized position. when no seat position is stored in the memory switch. when the parking brake is not applied. M/T models when the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7 km/h) while the parking brake is applied. M/T models To restart the drive positioner system,

Selecting the memorized position

1. A/T models: Set the automatic transmission selector lever to the P (Park) position. M/T models: Apply the parking brake securely when the vehicle is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition ON. 3. Push the memory switch 1 or 2 fully for at least 1 second. The drivers seat will move to the memorized position with the indicator light flashing. Then the light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds. When memory switch 1 or 2 is pushed with the drivers door open and then the key inserted into the ignition switch within approximately 1 minute, the drivers seat will move to the memorized position. A/T models only

Confirming memory storage

Turn the ignition ON and push the SET switch. If the main memory has not been stored, the indicator light will come on for approximately 0.5 seconds. When the memory has stored the position, the indicator light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse blows, the memory will be canceled. In such a case, reset the desired positions using the following procedures. 1. Open and close the drivers door more than

3-18

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

move the parking brake to off and on. when the engine is started while moving the automatic drive positioner. M/T models

SPA1386

CANCEL SWITCH
When the CANCEL side of the switch is pushed, the automatic drive positioner system will not function. When the AUTO side of the switch is pushed, the system will function.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-19

MEMO

3-20

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

4 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Ventilators ................................................................. 4-2 Heater and air conditioner (Manual) ......................... 4-3 Controls ................................................................ 4-3 Heater operation................................................... 4-4 Air conditioner operation ...................................... 4-5 Air flow charts....................................................... 4-6 Heater and air conditioner (Automatic) (if so equipped) .................................................................. 4-9 Automatic operation ............................................. 4-9 Manual operation................................................ 4-10 Operating tips ..................................................... 4-11 In-cabin microfilter .............................................. 4-11 Servicing air conditioner.......................................... 4-12

Audio system........................................................... FM radio reception ............................................. AM radio reception ............................................. Audio operation precautions .............................. FM-AM radio with cassette player and compact (CD) player ......................................................... FM-AM radio with cassette player...................... CD care and cleaning ........................................ Steering switch for audio control ....................... Antenna .............................................................. Compact disc (CD) autochanger (if so equipped)............................................................ Car phone or CB radio ...........................................

4-12 4-13 4-13 4-13 disc 4-16 4-23 4-28 4-28 4-29 4-29 4-30

VENTILATORS

SAA0373

SAA0374

Adjust the air flow direction of ventilators.

Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction of ventilators. : This symbol indicates that the vents are closed when the vent switch is moved to the left. : This symbol indicates that the vents are open when the vent switch is moved to the right.

4-2

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (Manual) CONTROLS Fan control dial

This dial turns the fan on and off, and controls fan speed.

Air flow control buttons

These buttons allow you to select the air flow outlets. Air flows from center and side ventilators.
SAA0591

Air flows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets. Air flows mainly from foot outlets. Air flows from defroster outlets and foot outlets. Air flows mainly from defroster outlets.

WARNING
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. Do not leave children, impaired adults, or pets alone in your vehicle. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or

animals. Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls should not be done while driving, so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

Temperature control/MAX A/C lever

This lever allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air. MAX A/C: When the temperature control/MAX A/C lever is moved to the left end, the air conditioner cooling will start automatically and the A/C
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-3

indicator and air recirculation lights will turn on.

HEATER OPERATION Heating

This mode is used to direct hot air from the floor outlets. Some air will also come from the defrost vents. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position for normal heating. 2. Push the button in.

Defrosting or defogging
This mode is used to defrost/defog the windows. 1. Push the button in.

Air recirculation button

OFF position: Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment. Use the off position for normal heater, or air conditioner operation. ON position (Indicator light ON): Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the air recirculation button to the ON position when driving on a dusty road or to avoid traffic fumes and for maximum cooling when using the air conditioner.

2. Turn on the fan control dial. 3. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position between the middle and the HOT position. To quickly remove ice or fog from the windows, turn on the fan control dial to 4 and the temperature control lever to the full HOT position. When the button is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on to defog the windshield, and the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position between the middle and the HOT position. When the button is pushed, the recirculation mode will automatically be turned off.

Air conditioning button

Start the engine, move the fan control dial to the desired (1 to 4) position and push the air conditioning button to turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light will come on when the air conditioner is on. To stop the air conditioner, push the switch again to return it to the original position. The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Ventilation
This mode directs outside air from the side and center vents. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in.

Bi-level heating
This mode directs outside air from the side and center vents and hot air from the floor outlets. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in.

3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position.

4-4

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Normally move the temperature control lever to the midpoint between HOT and COLD.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION

Start the engine, move the fan control dial to the desired (1 to 4) position and push in the air conditioning button to activate the air conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions will be added to the heater operation.

1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in.

Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs the windshield. 1. Push the button in. 2. Turn on the fan control dial. 3. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position between the middle and the HOT position.

3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Push on the air conditioning button. The indicator light will come on. 5. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position.

Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the OFF position. 2. Push the button in.

Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows and dehumidify. 1. Push the button in.

Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and air inlet in front of the windshield. This will improve heater operation. When the button is pushed, the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

3. Turn on the fan control dial. 4. Push on the air conditioning button. The indicator light will come on. 5. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position. For quick cooling when the outside temperature is high, move the air recirculation button to the ON position. Be sure to return the air recirculation button to the OFF position for normal cooling.

2. Turn on the fan control dial. 3. Push on the air conditioning button. The indicator light will come on. 4. Move the temperature control lever to the desired position. When the button is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on to defog the windshield, and the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Dehumidified heating
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify.

4-5

Operating tips
Keep the windows and sun roof closed while the air conditioner is in operation. After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3 minutes with the windows open to vent hot air from the passenger compartment. Then, close the windows. This will allow the air conditioner to cool the interior more quickly. The air conditioning system should be operated for about 10 minutes at least once a month. This helps prevent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication. If the coolant temperature gauge exceeds the HOT position, turn the air conditioning off. For additional information, see If your vehicle overheats in the 6. In case of emergency section.

AIR FLOW CHARTS

The charts on the following pages show the button and lever positions for maximum and quick heating, cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation button should be in the OFF position for normal cooling, heating and defrosting.

4-6

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

SAA0469

SAA0470

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-7

SAA0471

SAA0472

4-8

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (Automatic) (if so equipped)

On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls should not be done while driving, so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION
SAA0544A

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO)

This mode may be normally used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

WARNING
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is run-

ning. Do not leave children, impaired adults, or pets alone in your vehicle.

4-9

1. Push the AUTO button on. (AUTO will be displayed.) 2. Turn the temperature set dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature. Adjust the temperature set dial to about 75F (24C) for normal operation. The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Push the DEF button on. (The indicator light on the button will come on.) 2. Turn the temperature set dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature. To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows, push the manual fan control button and set to the maximum posi. tion As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, push the AUTO button to return to the auto mode. When the DEF button is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 23F (5C) to defog the windshield, and the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

Push the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.

Air recirculation
Push the air recirculation button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator light on the switch will come on. Push it again to make the air inlet controlled automatically (FRESH, REC/FRE and RECIRCULATION). The indicator will go out. The air recirculation button will not be activated when the air conditioner is in DEF mode.

Heating (ECON)
The air conditioner does not activate. When you need to heat only, use this mode. 1. Push the ECON (Economy) button on. (ECON will be displayed.) 2. Turn the temperature set dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature. The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically. Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature. Otherwise the system may not work properly. Not recommended if windows fog up.

Air flow control

Pushing the manual air flow control button selects the air outlet to: : : : : Air flows from center and side ventilators. Air flows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets. Air flows mainly from foot outlets. Air flows from defroster and foot outlets.

MANUAL OPERATION Fan speed control

Push the fan control button control the fan speed. to manually

To turn the system off

Push the OFF button.

4-10

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

OPERATING TIPS
When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature warms up, the air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally.

decreases significantly or if windows fog up easily when operating the heater or air conditioning system.

HA1011

The sensor on the instrument panel helps maintain a constant temperature; do not put anything on or around this sensor.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
The air conditioning system is equipped with an in-cabin microfilter which collects dirt, pollen, dust, etc. To make sure air conditioner heats, defogs, and ventilates efficiently, replace the filter according to the maintenance intervals. See the separate Service and Maintenance Guide. To replace the filter, contact your NISSAN dealer. The filter should be replaced if air flow
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-11

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

The air conditioning system in your NISSAN vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind. This refrigerant will not harm the earths ozone layer. However, special charging equipment and lubricant are required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioning system. See Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the 9. Technical and consumer information section for air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations. Your NISSAN dealer will be able to service your environmentally friendly air conditioning system.

AUDIO SYSTEM
Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON and press the power on switch to turn on the radio. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, the key should be turned to the ACC position. Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other external influences. Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences. Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may influence radio reception quality. change. Buildings, terrain, signal distance and interference from other vehicles can work against ideal reception. Described below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception.

Radio reception
Your radio system is equipped with state-ofthe-art electronic circuits to enhance radio reception. These circuits are designed to extend reception range, and to enhance the quality of that reception. However there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even when the finest equipment is used. These characteristics are completely normal in a given reception area, and do not indicate any malfunction in your radio system. Remember that a moving vehicle is not the ideal place to listen to a radio. Because of the movement, reception conditions will constantly

WARNING
The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced technician with proper equipment.

4-12

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

from a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade and/or drift. Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to antenna position, usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter, static or flutter can be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the treble control counterclockwise to reduce treble response. Multipath reception: Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time. The signals may cancel each other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.

power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS Cassette player

To maintain good quality sound, NISSAN recommends using cassette tapes of 60 minutes or shorter in length. Cassette tapes should be removed from the player when not in use. Store cassettes in their protective cases and away from direct sunlight, heat, dust, moisture and magnetic sources. Direct sunlight can cause the cassette to become deformed. The use of deformed cassettes may cause the cassette to jam in the player. Do not use cassettes with labels which are peeling and loose. If used, the label could jam in the player. If a cassette has loose tape, insert a pencil through one of the cassette hubs and rewind the tape firmly around the hubs. Loose tape may cause tape jamming and wavering sound quality. Over a period of time, the playback
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

SAA0306

FM RADIO RECEPTION
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to 30 miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM having slightly more range than stereo FM. External influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is within 25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same characteristics as light. For example they will reflect off objects. Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away

AM RADIO RECEPTION
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can bend around objects and skip along the ground. In addition, the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of these characteristics. AM signals are also subject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver. Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings. It can also occur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist. Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

4-13

head, capstan and pinch roller may collect a tape coating residue as the tape is played. This residue accumulation can cause weak or wavering sound, and should be removed periodically with a head cleaning tape. If the residue is not removed periodically, the player may need to be disassembled for cleaning.

The player may skip while driving on rough roads. The CD player sometimes cannot function when the compartment temperature is extremely high. Decrease the temperature before use. Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight. CDs that are of poor quality, dirty, scratched, covered with fingerprints, or that have pin holes may not work properly. The following CDs may not work properly. Copy control compact discs (CCCD) Recordable compact discs (CD-R) Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) Do not use the following CDs as they may cause the CD player to malfunction.
SAA0480

Compact Disc (CD) player

Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm) round discs that have the COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO logo on the disc or packaging.

3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter CDs that are not round CDs with a paper label CDs that are warped, scratched, or have abnormal edges

During cold weather or rainy days, the player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely.

4-14

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

1. CD LOAD button (Type B only) 2. SEEK/APS REW, APS FF/TRACK CHANGE button 3. CD play button 4. TAPE play button 5. FM/AM band select button 6. TAPE EJECT button 7. CD EJECT button 8. SCAN tuning button 9. ONOFF/VOLUME control knob
SAA0550

10. AUTO.P (Automatic preset) button 11. Station and preset (FM/AM)/CD insert or CD play (Type B only) select button 12. RADIO TUNE/FFREW/AUDIO (Bass, treble, fader, and balance, (SCV and NR (Dolby) Type B only)) ADJUSTING button 13. AUDIO (BASS, TREBLE, FADER, and BALANCE, (SCV and NR (Dolby) Type B only)) button 14. RPT (repeat) play button 15. DOLBY button (Type A only) PTY button (Type B only)
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

SAA0551

4-15

FM-AM RADIO WITH CASSETTE PLAYER AND COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER/CD CHANGER Audio main operation
Head unit: The radio has an FM diversity reception system, which employs two antennas printed on the rear window. This system automatically switches to the antenna which is receiving less interference. The tape deck employs a permalloy head which allows for improved reproduction of high frequency ranges. Noise is also greatly reduced by the combined use of the Dolby NR (Noise Reduction) system. The auto loudness circuit enhances the low frequency range automatically in both radio reception and tape and CD playback. ONOFF/Volume control: Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then push the ONOFF/VOL control knob while the system is off to call up the mode (radio, tape or CD) which was playing immediately before the system was turned off. When no CD or tape is loaded, the radio will come on. While the system is on, pushing the ONOFF/VOL control knob turns the system off.

To turn the radio off, press the ONOFF/VOL control knob. Turn the ONOFF/VOL control knob to adjust the volume. This vehicle has Speed sensitive Control Volume (SCV) for audio (type B only). The audio volume changes as the driving speed changes. AUDIO button (BASS, TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, (SCV and NR (Dolby) type B only)): Press the AUDIO button to change the selecting mode as follows. BASS , TREBLE , FADER , BALANCE , SCV (type B only) , NR (when cassette playing type B only) , BASS To adjust BASS, Treble, Fader and Balance, press the AUDIO button until the desired mode BASS, TREBLE, FADER or BALANCE appears in the display. Press the TUNE ( ) or ( ) button to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. Use the or button also to adjust Fader or Balance modes. Fader adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers. To change the SCV mode to OFF, LOW, MID

or HIGH, press the ton (type B only).

or

(TUNE) but-

To change the NR (Dolby) mode to OFF or ON, press the or (TUNE) button while cassette tape is playing. When Dolby is ON, the display indicates the mark. After 10 seconds, the radio, cassette tape or CD display reappears. Once the sound quality is set to the desired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedly until the radio, cassette tape or CD display appears.

FM-AM radio operation

FM/AM band select: Pushing the FM/AM band select button will change the band as follows: AM , FM1 , FM2 , AM When FM/AM band select button is pushed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON, the radio will come on at the station last played. The last station played will also come on when the power knob is turned to ON. If a compact disc or tape is playing when the FM/AM band select button is turned to ON, the compact disc or tape will automatically be

4-16

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

turned off and the last radio station played will come on. The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception. TUNE (Tuning):

button again during this 5 seconds period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station. Station memory operations: Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (six for FM1, six for FM2) and six stations can be set for the AM band. 1. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK, SCAN or TUNE button. 2. Select the desired station and keep pushing any of the desired station memory buttons (1 to 6) until a beep sound is heard. (The radio mutes when the select button is pushed.) 3. The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume. Memorizing is now complete. 4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse blows, the radio memory will be cancelled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

(Automatic preset) button: To select the preset FM, AM or PTY station (type B only), push the AUTO.P button for less than 1.5 seconds. To preset the FM, AM or PTY station, push the AUTO.P button for more than 1.5 seconds. Program type type B only: When PTY button is pressed during FM mode, the PTY name of the current tuned station is displayed. During this time if the PTY data code is zero, or the data is unreadable; the display will show NONE. 1. PTY selection mode PTY name selection can be done by the up/down TUNE button or in the PTY selection mode. It is possible to shift the PTY name by one step, with one push of the up/down tuning button or . PTY name selection can also be achieved by pressing the preset buttons. Initial PTY names are stored in the preset buttons; but these can be changed by pressing the preset buttons for more than 1.5 seconds when the desired PTY name is in the display.

WARNING
The radio should not be tuned while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Use these buttons for manual tuning. To move quickly through the channels, hold either of the TUNE buttons down for more than 0.5 seconds. SEEK tuning: Push the SEEK button or , to tune from high to low or low to high frequencies and stops at the next broadcasting station. SCAN tuning: Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low to high frequencies and stops at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-17

button again during this 5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station.

system will come on and the tape will play. When the TAPE button is pushed with either the radio or compact disc turned on and the tape loaded, the compact disc or the radio will automatically be turned off and the tape will play. When the TAPE button is pushed with the TAPE playing, the tape will play the program recorded on the reverse side. FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind): Push the (fast forward) button to fast forward the tape. To rewind the tape, push the (rewind) button. Either the FF or REW symbol illuminates on the right side of the display window. To stop the FF or REW function, press the (fast forward) or (rewind) again, or the TAPE button. APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS REW: When the (APS FF) button is pushed while the tape is being played, the next program will start to play from the beginning. Push the (APS FF) button several times to skip through programs. The tape will advance the number of times the button is pushed (up to nine programs).

Cassette tape player operation

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then lightly insert the cassette tape into the tape door. The cassette tape will be automatically pulled into the player. The radio or CD will turn off (if it is on) and the cassette tape will begin to play.

CAUTION
2. PTY SEEK tuning After selecting a PTY name, push the SEEK button or within 10 seconds. Tuning to the PTY station will start. If you do not push the SEEK button within the 10 second period, the PTY mode will be canceled. 3. PTY SCAN tuning mode Push the SCAN tuning button to tune the PTY name station, and stop at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the Do not force the cassette tape into the tape door. This could cause player damage. If the system is turned off by pushing the ONOFF/VOL control knob with the cassette tape still in the player, the tape will resume playing when the system is turned back on. PLAY: When the TAPE button is pushed with the system turned off and a tape loaded, the

4-18

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

When the (APS REW) button is pushed once, the program being played starts over from the beginning. Push the (APS REW) button several times to skip back several selections. The tape will go back the number of times the button is pushed. Either the FF or REW symbol flashes on the right side of the display window while searching for the selection. This system searches for the blank intervals between selections. If there is a blank interval within one program or there is no interval between programs, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location. SCAN tuning: Push the SCAN tuning button while playing tape, and it stops at the next tape program for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again during this 5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and the tape program is continued. If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next tape program. Dolby NR (Noise Reduction) (Type A only): Push the Dolby NR button for Dolby NR encoded tapes to reduce high frequency tape noise. The indicator will come on. Dolby noise reduction manufactured under li-

cense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby NR and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Metal or chrome tape usage: The cassette player will be automatically set to high performance play when playing a metal or chrome cassette tape. TAPE EJECT: When this button is pushed with the tape loaded, the tape will be ejected. When the tape is ejected while it is being played, the system will be turned off.

CAUTION
Do not force the compact disc into the slot. This could damage the player. If the system has been turned off while the compact disc was playing, pushing the ONOFF/VOL control knob will start the compact disc. 8 cm diameter compact discs can also be used without an adapter. PLAY: When the CD button is pushed with the system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play. When the CD button is pushed with the compact disc loaded but the tape or the radio playing, the tape or radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play. FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind): When the (fast forward) or (rewind) button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will play while
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Compact disc (CD) player operation (Type A)

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up. The compact disc will be guided automatically into the slot and start playing. After loading the disc, the number of tracks on the disc and the play time will appear on the display. If the radio or tape is already operating, it will automatically turn off and the compact disc will play.

4-19

fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the compact disc will return to normal play speed. APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS REW: When the (APS FF) button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the program next to the present one will start to play from its beginning. Push several times to skip through programs. The compact disc will advance the number of times the button is pushed. (When the last program on the compact disc is skipped through, the first program will be played.) When the (APS REW) button is pushed, the program being played returns to its beginning. Push several times to skip back through programs. The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pushed. SCAN tuning: Push the SCAN tuning button while playing CD, and it stops the CD program for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again during this 5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and the CD program is continued. If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next CD program.

REPEAT (RPT): When the RPT play button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the play pattern can be changed as follows:
1 CD RPT 1 CD MIX

1 TR (Track) RPT

be guided automatically into the slot and start playing. After loading the disc, the number of tracks on the disc and the play time will appear on the display. If the radio or tape is already operating, it will automatically turn off and the compact disc will play.

CD EJECT: When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be ejected. When this button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will come out and the system will turn off. If the compact disc comes out and is not removed, it will be pulled back into the slot to protect it. (except 8 cm diameter compact discs) CD IN indicator: CD IN indicator appears on the display when the CD is loaded with the system on.

Compact disc (CD) changer operation (Type B)

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up. The compact disc will

4-20

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

CAUTION
Do not force the compact disc into the slot. This could damage the player. If the system has been turned off while the compact disc was playing, pushing the ONOFF/VOL control knob will start the compact disc. button: To insert a CD in the CD changer, push the LOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select the loading slot by pushing the CD insert select button (1 to 6), then insert the CD. To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, push the LOAD button for more than 1.5 seconds. The inserted slot numbers will illuminate on the display. PLAY: When the CD6 button is pushed with the system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play. When the CD6 button is pushed with the compact disc loaded with the tape or the radio

playing, the tape or radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play. FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind): When the (fast forward) or (rewind) button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the compact disc will return to normal play speed. APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS REW: When the (APS FF) button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the program next to the present one will start to play from its beginning. Push several times to skip through programs. The compact disc will advance the number of times the button is pushed. (When the last program on the compact disc is skipped through, the first program will be played.) When the (APS REW) button is pushed, the program being played returns to its beginning. Push several times to skip back through programs. The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pushed.

CD PLAY button: To change CD, push the CD play select button (1 to 6). SCAN tuning: When the SCAN tuning button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played, the beginning of all the CD programs in each track will be played for 10 seconds in sequence. When the SCAN tuning button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played, the first program in all the CDs will be played for 10 seconds. Pushing the button again during this 10 second period will stop SCAN tuning. If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 10 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next disc program. REPEAT (RPT): When the RPT button is pushed while the compact disc is played, the play pattern can be changed as follows:

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-21

DISPLAY CD TEXT: To indicate the CD mode text, push the PTY button during CD playing. To change the indicated text, push the PTY button. The text will change as follows:

removed, it will be pulled back into the slot to protect it. (except 8 cm diameter compact discs) CD IN indicator: CD IN indicator appears on the display when the CD is loaded with the system on.

If the text is more than 10 letters, push the AUTOP button to display the remaining text. (Type B only) CD EJECT: When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be ejected. To eject the discs selected by the EJECT button, push it for less than 1.5 seconds. To eject all the discs, push the EJECT button for more than 1.5 seconds. When this button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will come out and the system will turn off. If the compact disc comes out and is not

4-22

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

AUDIO button (BASS, TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, SCV): Press the AUDIO button to change the selecting mode as follows: BASS , TREBLE , FADER , BALANCE , SCV , BASS To adjust Bass, Treble, Fader, Balance, press the AUDIO button until the desired mode BASS, TREBLE, FADER or BALANCE appears in the display. or button to adjust Bass Press the and Treble to the desired level. Use the or button to adjust Fader or Balance modes. Fader adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound level between the right and left speakers. To change the SCV mode to OFF, LOW, MID or HIGH, press the or (TUNE) button. After 10 seconds, the radio or cassette tape display reappears. Once the sound quality is set to the desired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedly until the radio or cassette tape display appears.

SAA0568

FM-AM RADIO WITH CASSETTE PLAYER for navigation system equipped models
Refer to the separate Owners Manual for information about the navigation system.

the radio comes on. Pushing the ONOFF/Volume control dial again turns the system off. Turn the ONOFF/Volume control dial to adjust the volume. This vehicle has Speed sensitive Control Volume (SCV) for audio. The audio volume changes as the driving speed changes.

Audio main operation

ONOFF/Volume control: Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, then push the ONOFF/Volume control dial. The mode (radio or cassette) which was playing immediately before the system was turned off resumes playing. When no cassette is loaded,

Radio/Cassette tape priority mode

In this mode, the radio station illuminates in the
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-23

display during radio operation. During cassette tape operation, TAPE illuminates in the display.

changes from stereo to monaural reception. TUNE (Tuning):

(six for FM1, six for FM2) and six stations can be set for the AM band. 1. Tune to the desired station using the SCAN or TUNE buttons. 2. Select the desired station and keep pushing any of the desired station memory buttons (1 to 6) until a beep sound is heard. The radio mutes when the select button is pushed.) 3. The channel indicator will come on and the sound will resume. Memorizing is now complete. 4. Other station select buttons can be set in the same manner. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the radio fuse opens, the radio memory is cancelled. In that case, reset the desired stations. Program type: When PTY button is pressed during FM mode, the PTY name of the current tuned station is displayed. During this time if the PTY data code is zero, or the data is unreadable; the display will show NONE. 1. PTY selection mode PTY name selection can be done by the

FM-AM radio operation

FM-AM band select and AUTO P: Pushing the FM-AM band select button will change the band as follows: AM , AM (preset station) , FM1 , FM2 , FM (preset station) , AM When FM/AM band select button is pushed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON, the radio will come on at the station last played. The last station played will also come on when the power knob is turned to ON. If a compact disc or tape is playing when the FM/AM band select button is turned to ON, the compact disc or tape will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on. To preset (AUTO.P) the AM or FM station, push the FM/AM button for more than 1.5 seconds. The FM stereo indicator, ST illuminates during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automatically

WARNING
The radio should not be tuned while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Use these buttons for manual tuning. To move quickly through the channels, hold either of the TUNE buttons down for more than 0.5 seconds. SCAN tuning: Push the SCAN tuning button and SCAN will illuminate in the display window. SCAN tuning begins from high to low or low to high frequencies and stops at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again during this 5 second period stops SCAN tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station. If any of the SCAN tuning buttons are not pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station. Station memory (and preset) operations: Twelve stations can be set for the FM band

4-24

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

up/down TUNE button PTY selection mode.

or

in the

2. PTY SEEK tuning After selecting a PTY name, push the TUNE button or within 10 seconds. Tuning to the PTY station will start. If you do not push the TUNE button within the 10 second period, the PTY mode will be canceled. 3. PTY SCAN tuning mode Push the SCAN tuning button to tune the PTY name station, and stop at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again during this 5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station.

CAUTION
Do not force the cassette tape into the tape door. This could cause player damage. The cassette tape automatically changes directions to play the other side when the first side is complete. At this time, the moving digital squares illuminate on the left side of the display window. PLAY: When the TAPE/CD button is pushed with the radio turned on and the tape loaded, the radio will automatically be turned off and the tape will play. If the TAPE/CD button is pushed during either the FF, REW, APS FF or APS REW function, the cassette tape enters the normal play mode. When the TAPE/CD button is pushed with the CD playing, the tape will play.

It is possible to shift the PTY name by one step, with one push of the up/down tuning button or . PTY name selection can also be achieved by pressing the preset buttons. Initial PTY names are stored in the preset buttons; but these can be changed by pressing the preset buttons for more than 1.5 seconds when the desired PTY name is in the display.

Cassette tape player operation

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, then carefully insert a cassette tape into the tape door. The cassette tape automatically pulls into the player. The word TAPE and moving digital squares illuminate on the right side of the display window.

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-25

FF (fast forward), REW (rewind): Push either the FF or REW button for the desired direction. The FF or REW symbol illuminates in the display. To stop the FF or REW function, press the FF or REW button again, or the TAPE/CD button. APS (automatic program search) FF, APS REW: Push either the APS FF or APS REW button while the cassette tape is playing. The tape runs quickly, stops, then plays the next selection. Either the FF or REW symbol flashes in the display while searching for the selection. This system searches at the blank intervals between selections. If there is a blank interval within one selection or there is no interval between selections, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location. PROG (program): Push the PROG button. The moving digital squares illuminate on either the right or left side of the display window to indicate the side of program play. If the PROG button is pushed during either the

FF or REW function the tape enters the normal play mode. Dolby NR (Noise Reduction): Push the Dolby NR button for Dolby NR encoded tapes to reduce high frequency tape noise. The indicator light comes on. Dolby NR is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. DOLBY NR and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Metal or chrome tape usage: The cassette player is automatically set to high performance play when playing a metal or chrome cassette tape. TAPE EJECT: Push the EJECT button. The cassette tape automatically comes out.

tracks will appear on the display. If the radio or tape is already operating, it will automatically turn off and the CD will play.

CAUTION
Do not force the CD into the slot. This could damage the player. If the system has been turned off while the CD was playing, pushing the ONOFF/VOL control knob will start the CD. 8 cm diameter CD can also be used without an adapter. PLAY: When the TAPE/CD button is pushed with the CD loaded in the player or CD autochanger (if so equipped): a) If the TAPE player (if cassette tape is inserted) is turn on, the mode (CD player or CD autochanger) will turn on. b) If the CD player turns on, the CD player will automatically be turned off and the CD autochanger will turn on. c) If the CD autochanger turns on, the CD autochanger will automatically be turned

Compact disc (CD) player/changer operation

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position. To play the CD, push the TAPE/CD button after loading the disc. If the disc loaded, the number of discs and

4-26

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

off and the TAPE player will turn on. When the TAPE/CD button is pushed with the CD loaded in only the CD autochanger, the CD autochanger will turn on. When the TAPE/CD button is pushed with no disc in either the player or CD autochanger, the TAPE player will change the tape side. DISC change: Use these buttons for selecting the compact disc inserted into the CD magazine. FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind): When the (fast forward) or (rewind) button is pushed while the CD is being played, the CD will play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the CD will return to normal play speed. APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS REW: When the (APS FF) button is pushed while the CD is being played, the program next to the present one will start to play from its beginning. Push several times to skip through programs. The CD will advance the number of times the button is pushed. (When the last program on the CD is skipped through, the first

(APS program will be played.) When the REW) button is pushed, the program being played returns to its beginning. Push several times to skip back through programs. The CD disc will go back the number of times the button is pushed. PROG (Program): When the PROG button is pushed while the CD is being played, the play pattern will change as follows: ALL , 1 , RANDOM , OFF , ALL ALL: All the programs will be played repeatedly in sequence. 1: Only one program (the one being played when the PROG button is pushed) will be repeated. RANDOM: Programs will be played at random, not following the sequence on the CD. To change the one disc random or all disc random, push the PROG button for a second. The same program may be repeated twice. When the CD is ejected, the play pattern will automatically change to all. CD EJECT: When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the CD loaded, the CD will be ejected.

When this button is pushed while the CD is being played, the CD will come out and the system will turn off. If the CD comes out and is not removed, it will be pulled back into the slot to protect it. (except 8 cm diameter compact discs) CD IN indicator: CD IN indicator appears on the display when the CD is loaded with the system on.

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-27

Tuning
Memory change (radio): Push the tuning switch or for less than 1.5 seconds to change the radio frequency. Seek tuning (radio): Push the tuning switch or for more than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previous radio station. APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS REW (tape/CD or CD changer):
SAA0451 SAA0545

CD CARE AND CLEANING

Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch the surface of the disc. Do not bend the disc. Always place the discs in the storage case when they are not being used. To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion. Do not use a conventional record cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use. A new disc may be rough on its inner and outer edges. Remove the rough edges using the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

STEERING SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL

The audio system can be operated using the controls on the steering wheel.

Push the tuning switch or for less 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the present program or skip to the next program. Push several times to skip back or skip through programs. This system searches for the blank intervals between selections. If there is a blank interval within one program or there is no interval between programs, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location. FF REW (tape or CD changer): Push the tuning switch or for more than 1.5 seconds to rewind or fast forward the tape or to change the playing disc up or down. To stop the FF or REW function, press the

MODE select switch

Push the mode select switch to change the mode in the sequence of AM, FM1, FM2, CD and CD autochanger (if so equipped) and Tape.

Volume control switches

Push the upper or lower side switch to increase or decrease the volume.

4-28

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

or onds again.

button for more than 1.5 sec-

ANTENNA Window antenna

The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear window.

CAUTION
Do not place metalized film near the rear window glass or attach any metal parts to it. This may cause poor reception or noise. When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window antenna. Lightly wipe along the antenna with a dampened soft cloth.

SAA0412

COMPACT DISC (CD) AUTOCHANGER (if so equipped) CD magazine

Insert the CD magazine into the changer with the label side facing up, as illustrated. Close the sliding lid of the CD autochanger. When ejecting the CD magazine, press the EJECT button located inside the CD autochanger.

SAA0597

Disc loading
Pull the disc holder from the magazine and turn over the magazine. Insert the CD with label side facing up then push the disc holder into the magazine.
Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

4-29

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO Disc removal

Pull the * marked area with your fingers. Use your fingertips to grasp the center part of the disc and remove the disc. When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following cautions, otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the Engine control system and other electronic parts.

CAUTION
Keep the antenna as far as possible away from the Engine Control Module (ECM). Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the Multiport Fuel Injection harness. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness. Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer. Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body. For details, consult an authorized NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION
Do not touch the playing surface of the disc. Do not use 8 cm discs. They may cause player damage even if using with the optional adapter.

WARNING
A cellular telephone should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular telephones while driving. If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode (if so equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. If a conversation in a moving vehicle requires you to take notes, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so.

4-30

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving...................... 5-2 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide).......................... 5-2 Three way catalyst ............................................... 5-3 Avoiding collision and rollover.............................. 5-3 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ....................... 5-4 Ignition switch............................................................ 5-4 Automatic transmission ........................................ 5-4 Manual transmission ............................................ 5-5 Key positions ........................................................ 5-6 Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System .................... 5-6 Before starting the engine......................................... 5-7 Starting the engine .................................................... 5-7 Driving the vehicle..................................................... 5-8 Automatic transmission ........................................ 5-8 Manual transmission .......................................... 5-11 Parking brake .......................................................... 5-12 Cruise control .......................................................... 5-13 Precautions on cruise control............................. 5-13 Cruise control operations ................................... 5-14 Break-in schedule ................................................... 5-15 Increasing fuel economy ......................................... 5-15 Parking/parking on hills ........................................... 5-16 Power steering ........................................................ 5-17 Brake system .......................................................... 5-18

Braking precautions............................................ Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ........................... Traction control system (if so equipped)................. Cold weather driving ............................................... Freeing a frozen door lock ................................. Anti-freeze .......................................................... Battery ................................................................ Draining of coolant water ................................... Tire equipment ................................................... Special winter equipment ................................... Driving on snow or ice ....................................... Engine block heater (if so equipped) .................

5-18 5-18 5-19 5-20 5-20 5-20 5-20 5-20 5-20 5-21 5-21 5-21

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING
Do not leave children, impaired adults, or pets alone in your vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked with the trunk closed when not in use, and prevent childrens access to car keys.

tain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death. If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately. Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage. Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time. Keep the trunk lid closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with the trunk lid open, follow these precautions: 1. Open all the windows. 2. Set the air recirculation switch OFF and the fan control at 4 (high) to circulate the air. If electrical wiring or other cable con-

nections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the trunk lid or the body, follow the manufacturers recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle. If a special body or other equipment is added for recreational or other usage, follow the manufacturers recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle. (Some recreational vehicle appliances such as stoves, refrigerator, heaters, etc. may also generate carbon monoxide.) The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever: a. The vehicle is raised for service. b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment. c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system.

EXHAUST GAS (Carbon monoxide)

WARNING
Do not breathe exhaust gases; they con-

5-2

Starting and driving

d. You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

CAUTION
Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline seriously reduce the three way catalysts ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants. Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected promptly by an authorized NISSAN dealer. Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three way catalyst. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER

WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident. Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with any vehicle, a loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects, or cause the vehicle to rollover, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt. See Seat Belts in the 1. Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems section. Also instruct your passengers to do so.
Starting and driving

THREE WAY CATALYST

The three way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the converter are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING
The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components. Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

5-3

IGNITION SWITCH DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING

your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgment. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in the accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury. NISSAN is committed to safe driving. You must not drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol related accidents. Although the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol. Remember, drinking and driving dont mix! And thats true for drugs too (over the counter, prescription, and illegal drugs). Dont drive if

SSD0083

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
On automatic transmission models, the ignition lock is designed so that the key cannot be turned to LOCK and removed until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park) position. When removing the key from the ignition, make sure the selector lever is in the P (Park) position. If the selector lever is not returned to P (Park) position, the key cannot be moved toward LOCK. When the key cannot be turned toward the

5-4

Starting and driving

LOCK position, proceed as follows to remove the key: 1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park) position. 2. Turn the ignition key slightly in the ON direction. 3. Turn the key toward the LOCK position. 4. Remove the key. If the key is removed from the ignition switch, the selector lever cannot be moved from P (Park) position. The selector lever can be moved if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed. There is an OFF position in between LOCK and ACC, although it does not show on the lock cylinder. When the ignition is in OFF the steering wheel is not locked. In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/6 of a turn counterclockwise from the straight up position. To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to the LOCK position. Remove the key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steering wheel slightly right and left.

WARNING
Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK position while driving. The steering wheel will lock. This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage and/or personal injury.

SSD0082C

MANUAL TRANSMISSION
The switch includes an anti-theft steering lock device. LOCK Normal parking position (0) The ignition key can only be removed when the switch is in this position. On manual transmission models, to turn the ignition key to LOCK from ACC or ON, first turn the key to OFF and turn the key to LOCK while pushing the key in. In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/6 of a turn clockwise from the straight up position.
Starting and driving

5-5

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to the LOCK position. Remove the key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steering wheel slightly right and left.

KEY POSITIONS
The switch includes an anti-theft steering lock device. LOCK (Normal parking position) (0) The ignition key can only be removed when the switch is in this position. OFF (1) The engine can be turned off without locking the steering wheel. ACC (Accessories) (2) This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running. ON (Normal operating position) (3) This position turns on the ignition system and the electrical accessories. START (4) This position activates the starter motor, starting the engine.

the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key. If the engine fails to start using the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key, it may be due to interference caused by another Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key, an automated toll road device or automated payment device on the key ring. Restart the engine using the following procedures: 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 10 seconds. 3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again. 4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key. If this procedure allows the engine to start, NISSAN recommends placing the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.

WARNING
Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK position while driving. The steering wheel will lock. This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage and/or personal injury.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM

The Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of

5-6

Starting and driving

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear. Maintenance items should be checked periodically, e.g., each time you check engine oil. Check that all windows and lights are clean. Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also, check tires for proper inflation. Lock all doors. Position seat and adjust head restraints. Adjust inside and outside mirrors. Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise. Check the operation of warning lights when key is turned to the ON (3) position.

STARTING THE ENGINE

1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Automatic transmission: Move the selector lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). (P preferred.) The starter is designed not to operate if the selector lever is in one of the driving positions. Manual transmission: Move the shift lever to N (Neutral) position, and depress the clutch pedal to the floor while cranking the engine. The starter is designed not to operate unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed. 3. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to START. Release the key when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure. When the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/5 to the floor) and hold it then crank the engine. Release the key and the accelerator pedal when the engine starts. When the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the acceleraStarting and driving

tor pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Crank the engine for 5 to 6 seconds. After cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to START. Release the key when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.

CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, turn the key off and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged. 4. Warm-up Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather.

5-7

DRIVING THE VEHICLE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Gate type shift

The automatic transmission in your vehicle is electronically controlled by a transmission control module to produce maximum power and smooth operation. Shown on the following pages are the recommended operating procedures for this transmission. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment. 1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and shift into a driving gear. 2. Release the parking brake and foot brake, then gradually start the vehicle in motion. is running and the brake pedal is depressed, the stoplights may not work. Malfunctioning stoplights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

WARNING
Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P or N to R, D or manual shift mode. Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident. Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up. On slippery roads, do not downshift. This may cause a loss of control. Never shift to P or R while vehicle is moving. This could cause an accident. If the selector lever cannot be moved from the P position while the engine

CAUTION
When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brakes should be used for this purpose.

Starting the vehicle

After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal before shifting the selector lever to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive), 3, 2 or 1 position. Be sure the vehicle is fully stopped before attempting to shift the selector lever. This automatic transmission model is designed so that the foot brake pedal must be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to any drive position while the ignition switch is ON. The selector lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) position and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition key is turned to the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the key is removed from the switch.

5-8

Starting and driving

or roll away and result in serious personal injury and/or property damage. If the key is turned to OFF or ACC for any reason while the vehicle is in R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or any D (Drive) position, the key cannot be turned to LOCK and be removed from the ignition switch. Additionally, the selector lever cannot be moved to P (Park) from N (Neutral) or any D (Drive) position. The selector lever can be moved from R (Reverse) to P (Park) with the key in the OFF or ACC position. If the key cannot be turned to LOCK, perform the following steps: 1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is stopped. 2. Turn the key to ON while depressing the foot brake pedal. 3. Move the selector lever to P (Park). 4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK to remove the key. P (Park): Use this selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake

pedal must be depressed to move the selector lever from N (Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first, then move the lever to the P (Park) position.

CAUTION
Use this position only when the vehicle is completely stopped. R (Reverse): Use this position to back up. Always be sure the vehicle is completely stopped when selecting R (Reverse). The brake pedal must be depressed to move the selector lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to R (Reverse). N (Neutral): Neither forward or reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving. D (Drive): Use this position for all normal forward driving.
Starting and driving

SSD0231

Shifting
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake pedal and shift the selector lever from P (Park) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), or any of the desired shift positions.

WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the selector lever is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly

5-9

3 (Third gear): For driving up or down long slopes where engine braking would be advantageous. 2 (Second gear): Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades. Do not exceed 68 MPH (110 km/h) in the 2 (Second gear) position. 1 (Low gear): Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades. Do not exceed 37 MPH (60 km/h) in the 1 (Low gear) position.

WARNING
If the selector lever cannot be moved from the P position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

Accelerator downshift In D position

SSD0232

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged, the select lever may not be moved from the P (Park) position even with the brake pedal depressed. To move the select lever, depress the brake pedal, and push the shift lock release button. The select lever can be moved to N (Neutral). This allows the vehicle to be moved if the battery is discharged. If the lever cannot be moved out of P (Park), have your NISSAN dealer check the automatic transmission system as soon as possible.

For rapid passing or hill climbing, fully depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into second gear or first gear, depending on the vehicle speed.

Fail-safe
When the fail-safe operation occurs, the next time the key is turned to the ON position, the light will blink for approximately 8 seconds after coming on for 2 seconds. While the vehicle can be driven under these circumstances please note that the automatic transmission will be locked in third gear. If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe

5-10

Starting and driving

system may be activated. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, turn the ignition key OFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then turn the key back to the ON position. The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have your NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair if necessary.

The pull ring returns to its original position when the shift lever is moved to the N position. If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R (Reverse) or 1 (Low gear), shift into N (Neutral), then release the clutch pedal and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (Low gear) again.

WARNING
Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.
SSD0233

MANUAL TRANSMISSION Shifting

To change gears, or when up shifting or down shifting fully depress the clutch pedal, shift into the appropriate gear then slowly and smoothly release the clutch. Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th up to 6th gear in sequence according to the vehicle speed. To back up, stop the vehicle and shift the lever into the N position, and then pull the ring upward to shift into the R position.

Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear. This may cause a loss of control or engine damage.

CAUTION
Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This may damage the clutch. Stop your vehicle completely before shifting into R (Reverse).

Starting and driving

5-11

PARKING BRAKE
When the vehicle is stopped for a period of time, for example at a stop light, shift to N (Neutral) and release the clutch pedal with the foot brake applied. Gear change 1st to 2nd 2nd to 3rd 3rd to 4th 4th to 5th 5th to 6th MPH 15 25 40 45 50 (km/h) (24) (40) (64) (72) (80)

Suggested up-shift speeds

Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance. Actual up-shift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather and individual driving habits. For normal acceleration in low altitude areas [less than 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]: Gear change 1st to 2nd 2nd to 3rd 3rd to 4th 4th to 5th 5th to 6th ACCEL shift point MPH (km/h) 13 (21) 23 (37) 33 (53) 39 (63) 50 (80) CRUISE shift point MPH (km/h) 13 (21) 16 (26) 27 (43) 36 (58) 50 (80)

Suggested maximum speed in each gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate. Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the highest gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits, and drive according to the road conditions, which will ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control. Gear 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th MPH (km/h) 30 (48) 55 (88) 80 (128)
SSD0018

To apply: pull the lever up. To release: 1. Firmly apply foot brake. 2. Automatic transmission models: Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position. Manual transmission models: Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position. 3. While pulling up on the lever slightly, push the button and lower completely.

For quick acceleration when the engine is cold or in high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:

5-12

Starting and driving

CRUISE CONTROL
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out.

WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions: it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed. in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed. on winding or hilly roads. on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.). in very windy areas. Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

engine damage.

WARNING
Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident. Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle. Do not use the gear shift in place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged. Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle. They could release the parking brake and cause an accident.

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL

If the cruise control system malfunctions, it cancels automatically. The SET indicator light on the meter panel then blinks to warn the driver. If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the cruise control main switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. The SET indicator light may blink when the cruise control main switch is turned on while pushing the RES/ACCEL, COAST/ SET, or CANCEL switch (located on the steering wheel). To properly set the cruise control system, perform the preceding steps in the order indicated.

CAUTION
On manual transmission models, do not shift into N (Neutral) without depressing the clutch pedal when the cruise control is set. Should this occur, depress the clutch pedal and turn the main switch off immediately. Failure to do so may cause

Starting and driving

5-13

 To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed. The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the cruise control. To cancel the preset speed, follow either of these three methods: a) Push the cancel switch; The SET indicator light will go out.
SSD0193

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: a) Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the COAST/SET switch. b) Push and hold the RES/ACCEL set switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch. c) Push, then quickly release the RES/ACCEL set switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: a) Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. b) Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed. c) Push, then quickly release the COAST/ SET switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES/ACCEL set switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when

b) Tap the brake pedal; The SET indicator light will go out. c) Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISE indicator and SET indicator lights will go out. If you depress the brake pedal while pushing the RES/ACCEL set switch and reset at the cruising speed, turn the main switch off once and then turn it on again. The cruise control will automatically be cancelled if the vehicle slows down below approximately 8 MPH (13 km/h). Depress the clutch pedal (manual transmission), or move the selector lever to N (Neutral) position (automatic transmission). The SET indicator light will go out.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. To turn on the cruise control, push the main switch on. The CRUISE indicator light on the meter panel will come on. To set at cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. (The SET indicator light will come on.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.

5-14

Starting and driving

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h). During the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km), follow these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow. Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear. Avoid quick starts. Avoid hard braking as much as possible. Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km).

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

SD1001M

Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position. Drive at moderate speeds on the highway. Driving at high speed will lower fuel economy. Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a safe distance behind other vehicles. Use a proper gear range which suits road conditions. On level roads, shift into high gear as soon as possible. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
Starting and driving

5-15

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
Keep your engine tuned up. Follow the recommended periodic maintenance schedule. Keep the tires inflated at the correct pressure. Low pressure will increase tire wear and waste fuel. Keep the front wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment will cause not only tire wear but also lower fuel economy. Air conditioner operation lowers fuel economy. Use the air conditioner only when necessary. When cruising at highway speeds, it is more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to reduce drag.
MSD0002

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

WARNING
Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire. Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

2. Automatic transmission models: Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position. Manual transmission models: Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) position. When parking on an uphill grade, place the shift lever in the 1 (Low gear) position.

5-16

Starting and driving

POWER STEERING

WARNING
Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P (Park) for automatic transmission models or in an appropriate gear for manual transmission models. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. Make sure the automatic transmission selector lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the button at the end of the lever. 3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into the street when parked on a sloping drive way, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
1 HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: k

2 HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: k

Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb. HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO 3 CURB: k Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves. 4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove the key.

The power assisted steering is designed to use a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering. If the engine stops or drive belt breaks, you will still have control of the vehicle. However, much greater steering effort is needed, especially in sharp turns or at low speeds.

WARNING
If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be much harder to operate.

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.
Starting and driving

5-17

BRAKE SYSTEM BRAKING PRECAUTIONS

The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking at two wheels. Vacuum assisted brake The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and the stopping distance will be longer. Wet brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking. To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat-up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly. Using the brakes Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This overheats the brakes, increases wear on the brake linings and pads, and reduces gas mileage. To help save the brakes and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control. system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

WARNING
While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident. If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder.

WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances.

Normal operation
The anti-lock brake system will not operate at speeds below 3 to 6 MPH (5 to 10 km/h) to completely stop the vehicle. (The speeds will vary according to road conditions.) When the anti-lock system senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator (under the hood) rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure (like pumping the brakes very quickly). While the actuator is working, you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from the actuator under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the anti-lock system is working properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

The anti-lock brake system controls the brakes at each wheel so the wheels will not lock when braking abruptly or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing wheel lockup, the

5-18

Starting and driving

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (if so equipped)

conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving. cidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces, but remember that the stopping distance on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces, even with the anti-lock system. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the responsibility for safety of self and others rests in the hands of the driver. Tire type and condition of tires may also affect braking effectiveness. When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels. When installing a spare tire, make sure it is the proper size and type as specified on the tire placard. See Vehicle identification in the 9. Technical and consumer information section for tire placard location. On slippery surfaces such as wet asphalt roads, vehicle wheels may spin when the vehicle is accelerated. This wheel spin reduces acceleration, or causes the vehicle to swerve, thus decreasing vehicle stability. The traction control system helps limit wheel spin on slippery roads. The system operates only if it senses one or both of the front wheels spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the system reduces engine power and may also upshift the transmission to help limit wheel spin. Indicator light If a malfunction occurs in the traction conindicator trol system, the SLIP and lights come on in the meter panel. As long as these warning lights are on, the traction control function is canceled. The vehicle will behaves like a model without the traction control system.

Self-test feature
The anti-lock brake system consists of electronic sensors, electric pumps, and hydraulic solenoids controlled by a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of any malfunction. If the computer senses any malfunction, it switches the antilock brake system OFF and turns on the ABS warning light in the dashboard. The brake system will then behave normally, but without anti-lock assistance. If the light comes on during the self check, or while you are driving, you should take your vehicle to your NISSAN dealer for repair at your earliest convenience.

CAUTION
The traction control system is most effective when the transmission gear selector is in the D position. If you drive in gear 1 or 2 with the TCS
Starting and driving

WARNING
The anti-lock brake system is a sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent ac-

5-19

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

on, this could cause the three way catalyst to overheat and be damaged. To avoid this, the TCS will automatically turn off. Shifting the gear selector to D will reactivate the TCS.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer or glycerin to it through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole.

for changing engine coolant.

TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires are of a tread design to provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels. Please consult your NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability information. 2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some provinces and states prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires. 3. Tire chains may be used if desired. Make sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturers suggestions. Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire

ANTI-FREEZE

WARNING
This system is designed to prevent the wheels from spinning. However, it does not prevent vehicle slipping or spinning due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Be especially careful when driving on slippery surfaces and always drive safely.

In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32F (0C), check anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection. For additional information, see Engine Cooling System in the 8. Maintenance and do-ityourself section.

BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. For additional information, see Battery in the 8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself section.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-freeze, drain the cooling system by opening the drain valves located under the radiator and on the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. See Engine cooling system in the 8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself section

5-20

Starting and driving

chains, make sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturers suggestions. Use only SAE Class S chains. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected. Never install tire chains on a T-type spare tire. Do not use tire chains on dry roads.

a shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts. extra window washer fluid to refill the reservoir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING
Wet ice (32F, 0C and freezing rain), very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have a lot less traction or grip under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded. Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction. Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement. Allow greater following distances on slippery roads.

Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while actually on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads. Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so equipped)

An engine block heater to assist extreme cold temperature starting is available through your NISSAN dealer.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter: a scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades. a sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support.

WARNING
Do not use your heater with an ungrounded electrical system or twoStarting and driving

5-21

pronged (cheater) adapters. You can be injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection.

5-22

Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Flat tire ...................................................................... Changing a flat tire ............................................... Jump starting............................................................. Push starting .............................................................

6-2 6-2 6-6 6-8

If your vehicle overheats ........................................... 6-9 Towing your vehicle ................................................ 6-10 Towing recommended by NISSAN .................... 6-10 Vehicle recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle) ........ 6-11

FLAT TIRE CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below. verse), or the automatic transmission into P (Park). Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous. Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road away from traffic. 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. 3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Shift the manual transmission into R (Reverse) position (automatic transmission in P (Park) position). 4. Turn off the engine. 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance. 6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

MCE0001

Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up.

WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and could cause personal injury.

WARNING
Make sure that the parking brake is securely applied and the manual transmission is shifted into R (Re-

6-2

In case of emergency

CE1089

Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire

Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instructions.
SCE0299 SCE0288

Getting the spare tire and tools

Remove jacking tools and spare tire from the storage area located inside the trunk as illustrated.

1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point as illustrated above so that top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack up point. Align the jack head between the two notches in the front or the rear as shown. Also fit the groove of the jack head between the notches as shown.

In case of emergency

6-3

 Use the correct jack up points; never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support. Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary. Never use blocks on or under the jack. Do not start or run engine while vehicle is on the jack, as it may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slid differential carriers. Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack.

CE1092

The jack should be used on level firm ground. 2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground. 3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands as shown above. Remove the wheel nuts, and then remove the tire.

WARNING
Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed only for lifting your vehicle during a tire change.

6-4

In case of emergency

WARNING
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident. Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose. As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench. Wheel nut tightening torque: 80 ft-lb (108 Nm) Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure. COLD pressure: After vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire placard affixed to the center console lid.

WARNING
Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).

SCE0039

Installing the spare tire

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub. 2. Carefully put the wheel on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight. 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly until they are tight. 4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence as illustrated.

In case of emergency

6-5

JUMP STARTING
spare tire are designed for emergency use. See Wheels and tires in the 8. Maintenance and do-ityourself section. To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be followed.

WARNING
If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle. Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery. Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, cloth or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulphuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water. Keep battery out of the reach of children.

SCE0040

Stowing the damaged tire and tools

Securely store the spare tire and jacking equipment in the vehicle.

WARNING
Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly secured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop. The T-type spare tire and small size

6-6

In case of emergency

 The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle. Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting. Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause serious injury. Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it.
SCE0392

WARNING
Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury. 1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the two vehicles to bring their batteries into close proximity to each other. Do not allow the two vehicles to touch. 2. Apply parking brake. Move the shift lever to

the N (Neutral) position (On automatic transmission models, move the selector lever to the P (Park) position). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (light, heater, air conditioner, etc.). 3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so equipped). Cover the battery with an old cloth to reduce explosion hazard. 4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as illustrated.

In case of emergency

6-7

PUSH STARTING

CAUTION
Always connect positive (+) to positive (+) and negative () to body ground (for example, strut mounting bolt, etc. not to the battery). Make sure that cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that clamps do not contact any other metal. 5. Start the engine of the other vehicle and let it run for a few minutes. 6. Keep the engine speed of the other vehicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start your engine in the normal manner.

7. After starting your engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable. 8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid.

Do not start the engine by pushing.

CAUTION
Automatic transmission models cannot be push started. This may cause transmission damage. Three way catalyst equipped models should not be started by pushing since the three way catalyst may be damaged. Never try to start the vehicle by towing it; when the engine starts, the forward surge could cause the vehicle to collide with the tow vehicle.

CAUTION
Do not keep starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, turn the key off and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

6-8

In case of emergency

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

WARNING
Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause a vehicle fire. To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the radiator cap while the engine is still hot. When the radiator cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury. Do not open the hood if steam is coming out. If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take the following steps: 1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position (automatic transmission to the P (Park) position). Do not stop the engine. 2. Turn off the air conditioner switch. Open all the windows, move the heater or air condi-

tioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed. 3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. Wait until no steam or coolant can be seen before proceeding. 4. Open the engine hood.

contact with, or to get caught in the cooling fan, or drive belt. The engine cooling fan can start at any time when the coolant temperature is high. 6. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the reservoir tank with the engine running. Add coolant to the reservoir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at the nearest NISSAN dealer.

WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting burned. 5. Visually check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine.

WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into
In case of emergency

6-9

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in Canada) and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from an authorized NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions. and powertrain are in working condition. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used. Always attach safety chains before towing.

WARNING
Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed. Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck.
SCE0202

CAUTION
When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

6-10

In case of emergency

ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or backward) as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised, always use towing dollies under the front wheels. When towing automatic transmission models with the front wheels on towing dollies, or when towing manual transmission models with the front wheels on the ground: Turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by turning the ignition key to the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanism. Move the gearshift lever to the N (Neutral) position. When towing automatic or manual

transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground (if you do not use towing dollies): Always release the parking brake.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (Freeing a stuck vehicle)

Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle. Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or cooling systems. Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull on the vehicle at an angle. Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery. Stand clear of an stuck vehicle.

SCE0199

CAUTION
Never tow automatic transmission models with the front wheels on the

In case of emergency

6-11

WARNING
Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.

6-12

In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ....................................................... Washing................................................................ Waxing.................................................................. Removing spots.................................................... Underbody ............................................................ Glass .................................................................... Aluminum alloy wheels......................................... Chrome parts........................................................ Cleaning interior ........................................................

7-2 7-2 7-2 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-4 7-4 7-4

Floor mats ............................................................ Seat belts ............................................................. Corrosion protection .................................................. Most common factors contributing to vehicle corrosion............................................................... Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion............................................................... To protect your vehicle from corrosion ................

7-4 7-5 7-5 7-5 7-5 7-6

CLEANING EXTERIOR
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area. When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover. Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover. Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so that the paint surface is not scratched or damaged. Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of clean water. Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be regularly cleaned. Make sure that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt. Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle.

WASHING
Thoroughly rinse surface dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and plenty of clean water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap such as Nissan Car Wash, or a general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

MAI0001

In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it. In the following cases, please wash your vehicle as soon as possible to protect the paint surface. After a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain After driving on coastal roads When contaminants such as soot, bird droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface When dust or mud builds up on the surface

CAUTION
Do not use strong household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents. Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted.

WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. After waxing, polishing is recommended to remove built-up residue and to avoid a weathered appearance. If you wish to wax your vehicle, only use a wax

7-2

Appearance and care

specified for use over clear coats, such as Nissan Liquid or Spray Wax. Your NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product. Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax. Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish. If the surface does not polish easily, use a road tar remover and wax again. Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

causing underbody and suspension corrosion. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

SAI0014A

GLASS
When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier to clean if the high-mounted stop light is removed first. Be careful when removing the high-mounted stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the high-mounted stop light wires. The high-mounted stop light must be properly reinstalled before driving your vehicle. Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner
Appearance and care

REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at your NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store.

UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, the underbody must be cleaned regularly. This will prevent dirt and salt from building up and

7-3

CLEANING INTERIOR
and a soft cloth will easily remove this film. Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry soft cloth. Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturers recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material. Use a cloth dampened only with water, to clean the meter and gauge lens.

FLOOR MATS
The use of Genuine Nissan floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. No matter what mats are used, be sure they are fitted for your vehicle and are properly positioned in the footwell to prevent interference with pedal operation. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.

CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the window, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defogger elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash regularly, especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. Salt could discolor the wheel if not removed.

CAUTION
Never use gasoline, thinner, or any similar material. The leather seats should be regularly coated with a leather wax like saddle soap. Never use car wax. Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer. Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens cover.

CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

7-4

Appearance and care

CORROSION PROTECTION SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely before using them.

MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION:

The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas. Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents.

WARNING
Do not allow wet belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or chemical solvents since these may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.
SAI0012

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION: Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle, and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.

Floor mat positioning aid (Driver side only)

This model includes a front floor mat bracket to act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your vehicle model. The drivers side floor mat has a grommet hole incorporated in it. Simply position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket through the floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in the floorpan contour. Periodically check to make certain that the mats are properly positioned.

Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used.
Appearance and care

7-5

Temperature
A temperature increase will accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

CAUTION
NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom. Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them. Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders. In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically. For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, consult your local NISSAN dealer.

Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will also accelerate the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION:

Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean. Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible. Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation. Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible.

7-6

Appearance and care

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements........................................ 8-2 General maintenance ................................................ 8-2 Explanation of general maintenance items .......... 8-2 Maintenance precautions .......................................... 8-5 Engine compartment check locations ....................... 8-7 Engine cooling system .............................................. 8-8 Checking engine coolant level ............................. 8-8 Changing engine coolant ..................................... 8-9 Engine oil ................................................................ 8-10 Checking engine oil level ................................... 8-10 Changing engine oil ........................................... 8-11 Changing engine oil filter ................................... 8-12 Automatic transmission fluid ................................... 8-12 Temperature conditions for checking ................. 8-13 Power steering fluid ................................................ 8-14 Brake and clutch fluid ............................................. 8-14 Window washer fluid ............................................... 8-15 Battery ..................................................................... 8-15 Drive belts ............................................................... 8-17 Spark plugs ............................................................. 8-17 Replacing spark plugs ........................................ 8-18

Air cleaner ............................................................... Windshield wiper blades ......................................... Cleaning ............................................................. Replacing............................................................ Parking brake and brake pedal............................... Checking parking brake ..................................... Checking brake pedal ........................................ Brake booster ..................................................... Fuses....................................................................... Engine compartment .......................................... Passenger compartment .................................... Keyfob battery replacement .................................... Lights ....................................................................... Headlights........................................................... Exterior and interior lights .................................. Wheels and tires ..................................................... Tire pressure ...................................................... Types of tires...................................................... Tire chains .......................................................... Changing wheels and tires.................................

8-18 8-19 8-19 8-20 8-21 8-21 8-21 8-22 8-22 8-22 8-24 8-24 8-26 8-27 8-28 8-33 8-33 8-33 8-34 8-35

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Your new NISSAN has been designed to have minimum maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save you both time and money. However, some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your NISSANs good mechanical condition, as well as its emission and engine performance. It is the owners responsibility to make sure that scheduled maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed. As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper maintenance care. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain. Scheduled maintenance: For your convenience, both required and optional scheduled maintenance items are described and listed in your Service and Maintenance Guide. You must refer to that guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals. General maintenance: General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal dayto-day operation of the vehicle. They are essential if your vehicle is to continue to operate properly. It is your responsibility to perform these procedures regularly as prescribed. Performing general maintenance checks require minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools. These checks or inspections can be done by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, your NISSAN dealer. Where to go for service: If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and tuned by an authorized NISSAN dealer. NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership training programs. They are completely qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before they work on your vehicle, rather than after they have worked on it. You can be confident that your NISSAN dealers service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements of your vehicle in a reliable and economic way.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smell, be sure to check for the cause or have your NISSAN dealer check it promptly. In addition, you should notify your NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required. When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe the Maintenance precautions later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following items with * is found later in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified. Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge at least once a month and always prior to long distance trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear. Wheel nuts*: When checking the tires, make sure no nuts are missing, and check for any

8-2

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

loose nuts. Tighten if necessary. Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle pulls to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed. For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information in the Warranty Information Booklet (US) or Tire Safety Information in the Warranty and Roadside Assistance Information booklet (Canada). Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility. Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. Doors and engine hood: Check that all doors and the engine hood operate smoothly as well as the trunk lid or back hatch. Also make sure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate if nec-

essary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released. When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently. Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim.

steering conditions, such as excessive free play, hard steering or strange noises. Seats: Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks (if equipped) hold securely in all latched positions. Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage. Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mats away from the pedal. Clutch pedal*: Make sure the pedal operates smoothly and check that it has the proper free play. Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied. Brake pedal and booster*: Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure it has the proper distance under it when depressed fully. Check the brake booster function. Be sure to
Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc. Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that all warning lights and chimes are operating properly. Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak. Windshield defroster: Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in good quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner. Steering wheel: Check for changes in the

8-3

keep floor mats away from the pedal. Parking brake*: Check that the lever has the proper travel and make sure that the vehicle is held securely on a fairly steep hill when only the parking brake is applied. Automatic transaxle P (Park) position mechanism: On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level. Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily. Engine oil level*: Check the level on the dipstick after parking the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the engine. Power steering fluid level* and lines: Check the level in the reservoir tank with the engine off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. Automatic transaxle fluid level*: Check the level on the dipstick after putting the selector lever in P (Park) position with the engine idling. Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately locate the trouble and correct it. (See Precautions when starting and driving in the 5. Starting and driving section for exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).) Underbody: The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very

important to remove these substances, otherwise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, being careful to clean those areas where mud and dirt may accumulate. For additional information, see Cleaning exterior in the 7. Appearance and care section. Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately.

Under the hood and the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel). Windshield washer fluid*: Check that there is adequate fluid in the tank. Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level when the engine is cold. Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, deterioration or loose connections. Brake and clutch fluid levels*: Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid levels are between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir.

8-4

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed. nect the negative battery cable before working near the fan. If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts. It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle. Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle. If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape. Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands. Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks away from fuel and the battery. On gasoline engine models with the Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System, the fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off.

WARNING
Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. For a manual transmission, move the shift lever to N (Neutral) position. For an automatic transmission, move the selector lever to P (Park) position. Be sure the ignition key is OFF or LOCK when performing any parts replacement or repairs. Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition key is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always discon-

CAUTION
Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn off the engine and wait until it cools down. Never connect or disconnect either the battery or any transistorized component connector while the ignition key is on. Never leave the engine or the automatic transmission related component harness connector disconnected while the ignition key is on. Avoid direct contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improperly disposed
Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-5

engine oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle fluids can hurt the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid. This 8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform. A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also available. See Owners Manual/Service Manual order information in the 9. Technical and consurner information section. You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect your warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, have it done by your NISSAN dealer.

8-6

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

SDI1337

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-7

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, year-round, antifreeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors, therefore additional cooling system additives are not necessary.

WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. See If your vehicle overheats in the 6. In case of emergency section. The radiator is equipped with a pressure cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap.
SDI0960

CAUTION
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only a genuine NISSAN antifreeze coolant or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized water/distilled water. The use of other types of coolant solutions may damage your engine cooling system.
Demineralized water/ distilled water 50%

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below MIN, add coolant up to the MAX level. If the reservoir tank is empty, check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir tank up to the MAX level. If the engine cooling system frequently requires coolant, have it checked by your NISSAN dealer.

Outside temperature down to C 35 F 30

Antifreeze

50%

8-8

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

 Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheating.

radiator, and remove radiator filler cap. Be careful not to allow coolant to contact drive belts. Waste coolant must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations. 3. Close the radiator drain valve securely after the coolant is drained. 4. Fill the radiator slowly with the proper mixture of anti-freeze solution and demineralized water/distilled water. Fill the reservoir tank up to the MAX level. Then install the radiator filler cap. 5. Start the engine and warm it up until it reaches normal operating temperature. Then race the engine 2 or 3 times under no load. Watch the engine coolant temperature gauge for signs of overheating. 6. Stop the engine. After it completely cools down, refill the radiator up to the filler opening. Fill the reservoir tank up to the MAX level. Check the drain valve for any sign of leakage. 7. Recheck the coolant level after the vehicle has been driven for a day.

WARNING
To avoid being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. Keep coolant out of reach of children and pets. 1. Perform the following procedure to open the heater water cock. Turn the ignition key from OFF to ON. Move the heater or air conditioner temperature control dial to the maximum hot position then turn the ignition key to OFF. 2. Open radiator drain valve at the bottom of

SDI0114

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

Major cooling system repairs should be performed by your NISSAN dealer. The service procedures can be found in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-9

ENGINE OIL

CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating with insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.

SDI0115

SDI0534

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply parking brake. 2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature. 3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be between the H and L marks. If the oil level is below the L mark, remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening. Do not overfill. 6. Recheck oil level with dipstick. It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.

8-10

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

6. Remove the drain plug with a wrench and completely drain the oil. If oil filter is to be changed, remove and replace it at this time. See later in Engine oil for changing engine oil filter.

refill capacity. The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine the proper amount of oil in the engine. 9. Start the engine. Check for leakage around the drain plug. Correct as required. 10.Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary. 11.Dispose of waste oil properly.

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot. Waste oil must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations. 7. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Drain plug tightening torque: 22 to 29 ft-lb (29 to 39 Nm) Do not use excessive force. 8. Refill engine with recommended oil and install the cap securely. See Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the 9. Technical and consumer information section for drain and

SDI0974

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature. 3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. 4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug. 5. Remove the oil filler cap.

WARNING
Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. Keep used engine oil out of reach of children.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-11

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil may be hot. 4. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with a clean rag. Be sure to remove any old rubber gasket remaining on the mounting surface of the engine.
SDI0975

5. Coat the rubber gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil. 6. Screw in the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten additionally more than 2/3 turn. Oil filter tightening torque: 10.85 to 15.19 ft-lb (14.7 to 20.6 Nm) 7. Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter. Correct as required. 8. Turn the engine off and wait several minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if necessary.

SDI1051

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Turn the engine off. 3. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench. (Depending on the engine model, a special cap type wrench may be required. See your NISSAN dealer if in doubt.) Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

WARNING
When engine is running, keep hands, jewelry and clothing away from any moving parts such as cooling fan and drive belt. Automatic transmission fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children.

8-12

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS FOR CHECKING

The fluid level should be checked using the HOT range on the dipstick after the following conditions have been met: a) the engine should be warmed up to operating temperature. b) the vehicle should be driven at least 5 minutes. c) the automatic transmission fluid should be warmed to between 122 and 176F (50 and 80C). The fluid can be checked at fluid temperatures of 86 to 122F (30 to 50C) using the COLD range on the dipstick after the engine is warmed up and before driving. However, the fluid should be re-checked using the HOT range. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the parking brake. 2. Start the engine and then move the selector lever through each gear range. Move the selector lever to P (Park) position after you have moved it through all ranges.

CAUTION
Do not overfill. Use only NISSAN Matic D (Continental US and Alaska) or Canada Nissan automatic transmission fluid. DexronTMIII/MerconTM or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental US and Alaska contact a NISSAN dealer for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of DexronTM III/MerconTM automatic transmission fluid. NOTE: If the vehicle has been driven for a long time at high speeds, or in city traffic in hot weather, or if it is being used to pull a trailer, the accurate fluid level cannot be read. You should wait until the fluid has cooled down (about 30 minutes).

SDI1343

3. Check the fluid level with the engine idling. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean with lint-free paper. 5. Reinsert the dipstick into the charging pipe as far as it will go. 6. Remove the dipstick and note the reading. If the level is at the low side of either range, add fluid to the charging pipe.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-13

POWER STEERING FLUID

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID

tem and affect the vehicles stopping ability.

CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, wash with water.

SDI1076

SDI0119

Check the fluid level in the reservoir tank. The fluid level should be checked using the HOT range at fluid temperatures of 122 to 176F (50 to 80C) or using the COLD range at fluid temperatures of 32 to 86F (0 to 30C).

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is below the MIN line or the brake warning light comes on, add DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be thoroughly checked by your NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION
Do not overfill. Use Genuine Nissan PSFII or equivalent.

WARNING
Use only new fluid. Old, inferior, or contaminated fluid may damage the brake and clutch systems. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake sys-

8-14

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

BATTERY

WARNING
Anti-freeze is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children.

Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Any corrosion should be washed off with a solution of baking soda and water. Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened. If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the () negative battery terminal cable to prevent discharging it.

CAUTION
Do not substitute engine anti-freeze coolant for window washer solution. This may result in damage to the paint.

WARNING
Do not expose the battery to flames or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas generated by battery action is explosive. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the batMaintenance and do-it-yourself

SDI0961A

Add fluid when the low washer fluid warning light comes on. Add a washer solvent to the water for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer anti-freeze. Follow the manufacturers instructions for the mixture ratio.

8-15

tery which can generate heat, reduce battery life, and in some cases lead to an explosion. When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.
DI0137M

JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see Jump starting in the 6. In case of emergency section. If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. Contact your NISSAN dealer.

Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX and MIN lines. If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level to the indicator in each filler opening. Do not overfill. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level. 1. Remove the cell plugs. 2. Add distilled water up to the MAX level. 3. Tighten cell plugs.

8-16

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

DRIVE BELTS
2. Have the belts checked regularly for condition and tension.

SPARK PLUGS

WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.

CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs.

SDI0141

WARNING
Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCK position. The engine could rotate unexpectedly. 1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying, oil adhesion or looseness. If the belt is in poor condition or loose, have it replaced or adjusted by your NISSAN dealer.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-17

AIR CLEANER
not only cleans the air, it stops flame if the engine backfires. If it is not there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner removed and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed. Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury.
SDI0145 SDI0963

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace the platinumtipped spark plugs as frequently as the conventional type spark plugs since they will last much longer. Follow the maintenance schedule but, do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping. If replacement is required, see your NISSAN dealer for servicing. Always replace with recommended platinum-tipped spark plugs.

The filter element should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance intervals. See the separate Service and Maintenance Guide. When replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp cloth.

WARNING
Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner

8-18

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

CAUTION
After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position. Otherwise it may be damaged when the engine hood is opened. Make sure the wiper blade contacts the glass, otherwise the arm may be damaged from wind pressure. Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver vision.

gent. Then rinse the blade with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.

CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield. Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water. Clean the blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild deterMaintenance and do-it-yourself

8-19

DI1018M

REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. 1. Pull the wiper arm. 2. Push the lock pin, then remove the wiper blade. 3. Insert the new wiper blade to the wiper arm until a click sounds.
SDI0146

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle. This may clog the nozzle that could cause improper windshield washer operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, unclog it with a needle or small pin.

8-20

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE PEDAL

WARNING
See your NISSAN dealer and have it checked if the brake pedal height does not return to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched scraping or screeching sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard. Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system. Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For additional information, see the separate Service and Maintenance Guide.

SDI0125

DI1020MH

CHECKING PARKING BRAKE

From the released position, pull the parking brake lever up slowly and firmly. If the number of clicks is out of the range listed above, see your NISSAN dealer.

CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL

With the engine running, check the distance between the upper surface of the pedal and the metal floor. If it is out of the range shown above, see your NISSAN dealer.

Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes. The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-21

FUSES BRAKE BOOSTER

Check the brake booster function as follows: 1. With the engine off, press and release the brake pedal several times. When brake pedal movement (distance of travel) remains the same from one pedal application to the next, continue on to the next step. 2. While depressing the brake pedal, start the engine. The pedal height should drop a little. 3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the engine. Keeping the pedal depressed for about 30 seconds, the pedal height should not change. 4. Run the engine for one minute without depressing the brake pedal, then turn it off. Depress the brake pedal several times. The pedal travel distance will decrease gradually with each depression as the vacuum is released from the booster. If the brakes do not operate properly, see your NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION
Never use a fuse of higher amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire.

SDI0964

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition key and headlight switch are OFF. 2. Open the engine hood. 3. Remove the fusible link cover. 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. 5. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse. 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

8-22

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

system checked and repaired by your NISSAN dealer.

SDI0965

Fusible links
If any electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace only with genuine NISSAN parts.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-23

KEYFOB BATTERY REPLACEMENT

SDI0966

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition key and the headlight switch are OFF. 2. Pull to open the fuse box lid. 3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. 4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse. 5. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by your NISSAN dealer. Replace the battery as follows: 1. Open the lid using a suitable tool. 2. Replace the battery with a new one. Recommended battery: Sanyo CR2025 or equivalent
SPA1374

8-24

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Make sure that the side faces the bottom case. 3. Close the lid securely. 4. Push the keyfob button two or three times to check its operation. See your NISSAN dealer if you need any assistance for replacement. If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement, perform step 4 above. Be careful not to touch a circuit board and a battery terminal. An improperly disposed battery can harm the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal. The keyfob is water-resistant; however, if it does get wet, immediately wipe completely dry. When changing batteries, do not let dust or oil get on the keyfob. FCC Notice: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-25

LIGHTS

SDI1336

8-26

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

HEADLIGHTS Replacing the xenon headlight bulb low beam

CAUTION
High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped. When handling the bulb, do not touch the glass envelope.

WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE When xenon headlights are on, they produce a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to modify or disassemble. Always have your xenon headlights replaced at an authorized NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see Headlight and turn signal switch in the 2. Instruments and controls section.

SDI1333

1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Turn the connector to loosen it. 3. Remove the headlight bulb. Do not shake or rotate the bulb when removing it. 4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of removal. Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact your NISSAN dealer.

Replacing the halogen headlight bulb high beam

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. A bulb can be replaced from inside the engine compartment without removing the headlight assembly.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-27

CAUTION
Do not touch the bulb. Use the same number and wattage as originally installed: Wattage 60 Bulb no. HB3 Do not leave the bulb out of the headlight reflector for a long period of time as dust, moisture, and smoke may enter the headlight body and affect the performance of the headlight.

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Front turn signal Clearance light Front side marker light Front fog light (if so equipped) Rear combination light Turn signal Stop/Tail Back-up Rear side marker light License plate light High-mounted stop light (if so equipped) Interior light Front personal light Step light Trunk light Vanity mirror light (if so equipped) 21 21/5 13 3.8 5 21 10 10 2.7 3.4 1.4 161 158 T20 T20 T20 T16 T10 Wattage (W) 21 5 3.8 See an authorized NISSAN dealer for assistance. Bulb No. T20 T10 T10

8-28

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

SDI1334

MDI0006

Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or cover.
SDI0969

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-29

SDI0970

8-30

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

SDI1335

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-31

SDI0333A

SDI1340

SDI0756

8-32

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WHEELS AND TIRES

vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire placard affixed to the console box lid. MPH (140 km/h) unless it is equipped with high speed capability tires. Driving faster than 85 MPH (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information in the Warranty Information Booklet (US) or Tire Safety Information in the Warranty Information booklet (Canada).

WARNING
Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident. The vehicle capacity weight is indicated on the tire placard. Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components. Before taking a long trip, or whenever you have loaded your vehicle heavily, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressure is at the specified level. Do not drive your vehicle over 85

DI1033M

If you have a flat tire, see Flat tire in the 6. In case of emergency section.

TYPES OF TIRES

TIRE PRESSURE Maximum inflation pressure

Do not exceed the maximum inflation pressures shown on the side wall of the tire.

CAUTION
When changing or replacing tires, be sure all four tires are of the same type (i.e., summer, all season or snow) and construction. Your NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability. Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may
Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressure (including spare) at least once a month and always prior to long distance trips. Incorrect tire pressure may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling. Tire pressure should be checked when tires are COLD. Tires are considered COLD after the

8-33

not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire. For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information in the Warranty Information Booklet (US) or Tire Safety Information in the Warranty Information booklet (Canada).

If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of snow or all season tires on all four wheels.

Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Generally, snow tires will have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire. If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of snow or all season tires on all four wheels. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some provinces and states prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies all season tires on some models to provide good performance for use all year around, including snowy and icy road conditions. All season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than all season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

ing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturers suggestions. Use only SAE class S chains. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or undercarriage. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected. Never install tire chains on a T-type spare tire. Do not use the chains on dry roads.

Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance in snow and ice will be substantially reduced. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire sidewall.

TIRE CHAINS
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before install-

8-34

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WARNING
After rotating the tires, adjust the tire pressure. Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). Do not include the T-type spare tire or any other small size spare tire in the tire rotation.
DI0048-B

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends that tires be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). Wheel nut tightening torque: 80 ft-lb (108 Nm) See Flat tire in the 6. In case of emergency section for tire replacing procedures.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information in the Warranty Information Booklet (US) or Tire Safety Information in the Warranty Information booklet (Canada).

MDI0004

Tire wear and damage

WARNING
Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging, or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging, or deep cuts are found, the tire should be replaced. The original tires have a built-in tread wear indicator. When the wear indicaMaintenance and do-it-yourself

8-35

tor is visible, the tire should be replaced. Improper service for a spare tire may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the spare tire, contact your NISSAN dealer. For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information in the Warranty Information Booklet (US) or Tire Safety Information in the Warranty Information booklet (Canada).

recommended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury. If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels which have the same offset dimension. Wheels of a different offset could cause early tire wear, possibly degraded vehicle handling characteristics and/or interference with the brake discs. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad wear. Do not install a deformed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warn-

ing. The use of retread tire is not recommended. For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information in the Warranty Information Booklet (US) or Tire Safety Information in the Warranty Information booklet (Canada).

Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required. Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the front wheels on the vehicle could lead to transmission damage. For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information in the Warranty Information Booklet (US) or Tire Safety Information in the Warranty Information booklet (Canada).

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. See Specifications in the 9. Technical and consumer information section for recommended types and sizes of tires and wheels.

WARNING
The use of tires other than those

8-36

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Care of wheels
Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance. Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed. Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels. Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead. NISSAN recommends that the road wheels be waxed to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter.

opportunity. Drive carefully while the T-type spare tire is installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving. Periodically check the T-type spare tire inflation pressure, and always keep it at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar). Always keep the pressure of the full size spare tire (if so equipped) at the recommended pressure for standard tires, as indicated on the tire placard. For tire placard location, see Tire placard in the 9. Technical and consumer information. Do not drive your vehicle at speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h). Do not use tire chains on a T-type spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly on the T-type spare tire and may cause damage to the vehicle. When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, the T-type spare tire

should be used on the rear wheel and the original tire used on the front wheels (drive wheels). Use tire chains only on the front two original tires. Tire tread of the T-type spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the original tire. Replace the T-type spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear. Because the T-type spare tire is smaller than the original tire, ground clearance is reduced. To avoid damage to the vehicle do not drive over obstacles. Also do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught. Do not use the T-type spare tire on other vehicles. Do not use more than one T-type spare tire at the same time. Do not tow a trailer while the T-type spare tire is installed.

Spare tire (T-type spare tire)

Observe the following precautions if the T-type spare tire must be used, otherwise your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident.

CAUTION
The T-type spare tire should be used only for emergency. It should be replaced by the standard tire at the first

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-37

MEMO

8-38

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

MEMO

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-39

MEMO

8-40

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ........... 9-2 Fuel recommendation........................................... 9-3 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation.............. 9-5 Recommended SAE viscosity number................. 9-6 Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations ................................................. 9-6 Specifications ............................................................ 9-7 Engine .................................................................. 9-7 Wheels and tires .................................................. 9-9 Dimensions and weights ...................................... 9-9 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country ....................................................... 9-10 Vehicle identification ............................................... 9-10 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate........... 9-10 Vehicle identification number (Chassis number) ............................................... 9-10 Engine serial number ......................................... 9-11 F.M.V.S.S. certification label .............................. 9-11 Emission control information label ..................... 9-11

Tire placard ........................................................ Air conditioner specification label....................... Installing front license plate..................................... Vehicle loading information ..................................... Terms ................................................................. Determining vehicle load capacity...................... Loading tips ........................................................ Towing a trailer ....................................................... Maximum load limits........................................... Towing safety ..................................................... Uniform tire quality grading ..................................... Emission control system warranty .......................... Reporting safety defects (US only) ......................... Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test (US only) ................................................................. Owners Manual/Service Manual order information............................................................... In the event of a collision ........................................

9-12 9-12 9-13 9-14 9-14 9-14 9-15 9-15 9-16 9-17 9-19 9-20 9-20 9-21 9-22 9-22

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure instructed in the 8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (Approximate) US measure Fuel Engine oil*6 Drain and refill With oil filter change Without oil filter change Cooling system With reservoir Reservoir Manual transmission gear oil Automatic transmission fluid Power steering fluid Brake and clutch fluid Multi-purpose grease Air conditioning system refrigerant Air conditioning system lubricants Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in the 8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself section. 8-1/8 qt 7/8 qt 6-3/4 qt 3/5 qt 7.7 0.8 Genuine NISSAN anti-freeze coolant or equivalent API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-90 or 75W-85 Nissan Matic D (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid*4 Genuine Nissan PSFII or equivalent*8 Genuine Nissan Brake Fluid*5 or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116) NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base) HFC-134a (R-134a)*7 Nissan A/C System Oil Type S or exact equivalent 4-1/4 qt 3-7/8 qt 3-1/2 qt 3-1/4 qt 4.0 3.7 API Certification Mark*2, *3 API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving*2, *3 ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II & GF-III*2, *3 18-1/2 gal Imp measure 15-3/8 gal Liter 70 Recommended specifications Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (RON 96)*1

*1: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for fuel recommendation. *2: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for engine oil and oil filter recommendation. *3: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for recommended SAE viscosity number. *4: DexronTMIII/MerconTM or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental United States and Alaska contact a NISSAN dealer for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of DexronTMIII/MerconTM automatic transmission fluid. *5: Available in mainland US through your NISSAN dealer. *6: For additional information, see Engine oil in the 8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself section for changing engine oil. *7: For additional information, see Vehicle identification in this section for air conditioner specification label. *8: Genuine Nissan PSFII, Canada Nissan Automatic Transmission fluid, DexronTMIII/MerconTM or equivalent ATF may also be used.

9-2

Technical and consumer information

FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91). For improved vehicle performance, NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI number (Research octane number 96).

and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager. If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage. The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline. If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a methanol blend, is used, it should contain no more than 10% oxygenate. (MTBE may, however, be added up to 15%.) If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibi-

tors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles. If any undesirable driveability problems such as engine stalling and hard hot starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE. Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage.

CAUTION
Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control devices and systems, and could also affect the warranty coverage. Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, since this will damage the three-way catalyst.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of any fuel additives (i.e. fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvent or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air

Octane rating tips

In most parts of North America, you should use
Technical and consumer information

9-3

unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 or 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number. However, you may use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating as low as 85 AKI number in these high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)] such as: Colorado, Montana, New Mexico, Utah, Wyoming, northeastern Nevada, southern Idaho, western South Dakota, western Nebraska, and that part of Texas which is directly south of New Mexico. Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than stated above can cause persistent, heavy spark knock. (Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, have your dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible. Incorrect ignition timing will result in knocking, after-run or overheating. This in turn may cause excessive fuel consumption or damage to the engine. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked at a NISSAN dealer or other competent service facility.

However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is no cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load.

9-4

Technical and consumer information

and SAE viscosity ratings specified for your vehicle.

Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed. Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity
STI0293

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATION Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct quality, and viscosity oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. NISSAN recommends the use of a low friction oil (energy conserving oil) in order to improve fuel economy and conserve energy. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage. Only those engine oils with the American Petroleum Institute (API) certification mark on the

front of the container should be used. This type of oil supersedes the existing API SG, SH, or SJ and Energy Conserving I & II categories. If you cannot find engine oil with the API certification mark, use an API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API grade SJ or SL, Energy conserving oil. An oil with a single designation SG or SH, or in combination with other categories (for example, SG/CC or SG/CD) may also be used if one with the API certification mark cannot be found. An ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II & GF-III oil can also be used. NISSAN recommends mineral based oils. These oils must however, meet the API quality

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important that the engine oil viscosity be selected based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. The recommended SAE viscosity number chart shows the recommended oil viscosities for the expected ambient temperatures. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new vehicle is equipped with a highquality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use the genuine oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in change intervals.
Technical and consumer information

9-5

Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Oil and filter other than the specified quality, or oil and filter change intervals longer than recommended could reduce engine life. Damage to engines caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the new NISSAN vehicle warranties. Your engine was filled with a high quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle. Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes. repeated short distance driving at cold outside temperatures, driving in dusty conditions, extensive idling, towing a trailer.

RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY NUMBER

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioning system in this NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lubricant, Nissan A/C System Oil Type S or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system components. The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your NISSAN vehicle will not harm the earths ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earths atmosphere, certain governmental regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioning system service. Your NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioning system refrigerant.

TI1028-C

SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all ambient temperatures. SAE 10W-30, 10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if the ambient temperature is above 0F (18C).

9-6

Technical and consumer information

SPECIFICATIONS
Contact your NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioning system.

ENGINE
Model Type Cylinder arrangement Bore x Stroke Displacement Firing order Idle speed Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) CO percentage at idle speed Spark plug Spark plug gap (Normal) Camshaft operation rpm degree/rpm [No air] % Standard Service option in (mm) PLFR5A-11 PLFR4A-11, PLFR6A-11 0.043 (1.1) Timing chain See the emission control label on the underside of the hood. in (mm) cu in (cm3) VQ35DE Gasoline, 4-cycle 6-cylinder, V-slanted at 60 3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4) 213.45 (3,498) 1-2-3-4-5-6*

Technical and consumer information

9-7

TI1009-A

The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

9-8

Technical and consumer information

WHEELS AND TIRES

Type Road wheel Aluminum Size 16 x 6-1/2JJ 17 x 7JJ 17 x 7JJ (option) P215/55R16 91H P215/55R17 93H P225/50R17 93V Conventional*1 T125/70D16 T125/90D16 T135/70D16 T135/90D16 Offset in (mm) 1.57 (40) 1.57 (40)*2 1.75 (45)*3

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Sedan Overall length Overall width Overall height in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) 191.5 (4,863) 70.3 (1,785) 56.3 (1,430)*3 56.7 (1,440)*4 57.1 (1,450)*5 60.2 (1,530)*1 59.8 (1,520)*2 59.4 (1,510)*1 59.1 (1,500)*2 108.3 (2,750)

Conventional

Tire Spare

Front tread Rear tread Wheelbase

in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) lb (kg)

*1: For option *2: For P215/55R17 91H *3: For P225/50R17 93V

Gross vehicle weight rating Gross axle weight rating Front Rear

lb (kg) lb (kg)

See the F.M.V.S.S. certification label on the drivers side lock pillar.

*1: For models with road wheel size - 16 x 6.5JJ, 17 x 7JJ (offset 1.57 in (40 mm)) *2: For models with aluminum wheel size - 17 x 7JJ (offset 1.75 in (45 mm)) *3: For models with the tire size P215/55R16 91H *4: For models with the tire size P225/50R17 93V *5: For models with the tire size P215/55R17 93H

Technical and consumer information

9-9

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

When planning to travel in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicles engine. Using fuel with too low an octane rating may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded engine gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available. When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations. The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ. When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation, and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

STI0038

STI0187

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number plate is attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (Chassis number)

The number is stamped as shown.

9-10

Technical and consumer information

STI0047

STI0186

STI0188

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (F.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is attached as shown.

Technical and consumer information

9-11

STI0206

STI0292

TIRE PLACARD
The cold tire pressure is shown on the tire placard affixed to the console box lid.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is affixed inside of the hood as shown.

9-12

Technical and consumer information

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

Use the following steps to mount the license plate: Before mounting the license plate, confirm that the following parts are enclosed in the vinyl bag. License plate bracket J-nut x 2 Screw x 2 Screw grommet x 2 1. Temporarily place the license plate bracket A of the front bumper while aligning points k B in the license plate fascia with holes k bracket. 2. Remove the license plate bracket.
A using a 0.39 3. Carefully drill two pilot holes k in (10 mm) drill bit at the marked locations. (Be sure that the drill only goes through the fascia, or damage to the nut may occur.)

4. Insert grommets into the hole on the fascia. 5. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the grommet hole to add 90 turn onto the part k C .
STI0191

6. Insert a J-nut into the license plate bracket

Technical and consumer information

9-13

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

before placing the license plate bracket on the fascia. 7. Install the license plate bracket with screws. 8. Install the license plate with bolts that are no longer than 0.55 in (14 mm).

WARNING
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle.

DETERMINING VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

The load capacity of this vehicle is determined by weight, not by available cargo space. For example, a luggage rack, bike carrier, cartop carrier or similar equipment does not increase load carrying capacity of your vehicle. To determine vehicle load capacity:

TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle: Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not include passengers and cargo. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo.

Vehicle weight can be determined by using a commercial-grade scale, found at places such as a truck stop, gravel quarry, grain elevator, or a scrap metal recycling facility. 1. Determine the curb weight of your vehicle. 2. Compare the curb weight amount to the GVWR specified for your vehicle to determine how much more weight your vehicle can carry. 3. After loading (cargo and passengers), reweigh your vehicle to determine if either GVWR or GAWR for your vehicle is ex-

9-14

Technical and consumer information

TOWING A TRAILER
ceeded. If GVWR is exceeded, remove cargo as necessary. If either the front or rear GAWR is exceeded, shift the load or remove cargo as necessary. and cause personal injury. Overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by your warranty.

LOADING TIPS
The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label. Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.

WARNING
Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control

TI1011M

Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember that towing a trailer will place additional loads on your vehicles engine, drive train, steering, braking and other systems. Information on trailer towing ability and the special equipment required should be obtained from your NISSAN dealer. He can obtain a Nissan Trailer Towing Guide for you.

Technical and consumer information

9-15

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed 1,000 lb (454 kg). The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight. Towing loads greater than 1,000 lb (454 kg) or using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance. The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appropriate for level highway driving may have to be reduced on very steep grades or in low traction situations (for example, on slippery boat ramps).

equipment required may be obtained from an authorized NISSAN dealer.

Tongue load
Keep the tongue load between 9 and 11% of the total trailer load. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load.

TI1012M

Maximum gross vehicle weight/ maximum gross axle weight

The gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle must not exceed. GVWR shown on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label. The gross vehicle weight equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. In addition, front or rear gross axle weight must not exceed GAWR shown on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label.

WARNING
Vehicle damage and/or personal injury resulting from improper towing procedures are not covered by NISSAN warranties. A Nissan Trailer Towing Guide (U.S. only) containing information on trailer towing ability and the special

9-16

Technical and consumer information

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART Unit: lb (kg) MAXIMUM TOWING LOAD MAXIMUM TONGUE LOAD 1,000 (454) 110 (49)

Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, etc. to install a trailer hitch. To reduce the possibility of additional damage if your vehicle is struck from the rear, where practical, remove the hitch and/or receiver when not in use. After the hitch is removed, seal the bolt holes to prevent exhaust fumes, water or dust from entering the passenger compartment. Regularly check that all hitch mounting bolts are securely mounted.

vehicle and the trailer. The chain should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave enough slack in the chain to permit turning corners.

Trailer lights
Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or local regulations. When wiring the vehicle for towing, connect the stop and tail light pickup into the vehicle electrical circuit at a point between the sensor and stop light or light switch.

TOWING SAFETY Trailer hitch

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer. A genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available from your NISSAN dealer (Canada only). Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle, to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system, make sure it conforms to federal and/or local regulations and that it is properly installed.

Tire pressures
When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the tire placard (located on the inside of the center console lid). Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturers specifications.

CAUTION
Do not use axle-mounted hitches. The hitch should not be attached to or affect the operation of the impactabsorbing bumper.

WARNING
Never connect a trailer brake system directly to the vehicle brake system.

Safety chain
Always use a suitable chain between your

Pre-towing tips
Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded and/or unloaded
Technical and consumer information

9-17

trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down condition; check for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shifts while driving. Be certain your rear view mirrors conform to all federal, state or local regulations. If not, install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle.

slope is not recommended; however, if you must do so, and if your vehicle is equipped with automatic transmission, first block the wheels and apply the parking brake, and then move the transmission selector lever into the P (Park) position. If you move the selector lever to the P (Park) position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake, transmission damage could occur. When going down a hill, shift into a lower gear and use the engine braking effect. When ascending a long grade, downshift the transmission to a lower gear and reduce speed to reduce chances of engine overloading and/or overheating. If the engine coolant rises to an extremely high temperature when the air conditioning system is on, turn off the air conditioner. Coolant heat can be additionally vented by opening the windows, switching the fan control to high and setting the temperature control to the HOT position. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances. Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km). Have your vehicle serviced more often than

at intervals specified in the recommended maintenance schedule. When making a turn, your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make a larger than normal turning radius during the turn. Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly causing vehicle sway. When being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect vehicle handling. If swaying does occur, firmly grip the steering wheel, steer straight ahead, and immediately (but gradually) reduce vehicle speed. This combination will help stabilize the vehicle. Never increase speed. Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing while towing a trailer requires considerably more distance than normal passing. Remember the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes. To maintain engine braking efficiency and electrical charging performance, do not use fifth gear (manual transmission) or overdrive (automatic transmission).

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicles behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic. Steering stability, and braking performance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving. Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops. Avoid sharp turns or lane changes. Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed. Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking. Parking on a

9-18

Technical and consumer information

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency. When towing a trailer, change oil in the transmission more frequently. See the Service and Maintenance Guide. DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING
The traction grade assigned to your vehicle tires is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Treadwear
Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on tire wear rate when tested under controlled conditions on specified government test courses. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1-1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. However, relative tire performance depends on actual driving conditions, and may vary significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Temperature A, B and C
Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C. They represent a tires resistance to heat build-up, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause tire material to degenerate, reducing tire life. Excessive temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a performance level which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades A and B represent higher levels of performance on laboratory test wheels than the minimum required by law.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt

Technical and consumer information

9-19

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US only)

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236. You may also write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1. In Hawaii call (808) 836-0888.

WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Your NISSAN is covered by the following emission warranties. For US: Emission Defects Warranty Emissions Performance Warranty For Canada: Emission Control System Warranty Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet that comes with your NISSAN. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet or it has become lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to: Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 191 Gardena. CA. 90248-0191 Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

9-20

Technical and consumer information

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US only)

Due to legal requirements in some states/ areas, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the ready condition for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system. The vehicle is set to the ready condition when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle. If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a not ready condition. Before taking the I/M test, drive the vehicle through the following pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. If you cannot or do not want to perform the driving pattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you. 2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h), then quickly release the accelerator pedal completely and keep it released for at least 6 seconds. 3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of 53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96 km/h) for at least 5 minutes. 4. Stop the vehicle. Leave the engine running. 5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h) and maintain the speed for 20 seconds. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 3 times. 7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h) and maintain the speed for at least 3 minutes. 8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmission gear shift lever in the P or N position. 9. Turn the engine off. 10.Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least one more time. If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeat the preceding step. Any safe driving mode is acceptable between steps. Do not stop the engine until step 7 is completed.

WARNING
Always drive the vehicle in a safe and prudent manner according to traffic conditions, and obey all traffic laws. 1. Start the engine. Allow the engine to idle until the engine coolant temperature gauge needle points between the C and H (normal operating temperature).

Technical and consumer information

9-21

OWNERS MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Owners Manuals for the 2002 model year and prior, see an authorized NISSAN dealer, or contact: DDS Distribution Services, Ltd. 20770 Westwood Dr. Strongsville OH 44136 1-800-247-5321 In Canada: To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owners Manual please contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN Dealer in your area call the NISSAN Satisfaction Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you. Also available are Genuine NISSAN Service and Owners Manuals for older NISSAN models.

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment procedures, this manual is the same one used by the factory trained technicians working at authorized NISSAN dealerships. Also available are genuine NISSAN Owners Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Service and Owners Manuals for older NISSAN models.

In the USA: For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model year and later, contact: Tweddle Litho Company 1-800-639-8841 www.nissan-techinfo.com For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model year and prior, see an authorized NISSAN dealer, or contact: DDS Distribution Services, Ltd. 20770 Westwood Dr. Strongsville OH 44136 1-800-247-5321

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikely event, there is some important information you should know. Many insurance companies routinely authorize the use of nongenuine collision parts in order to cut costs, among other reasons.

9-22

Technical and consumer information

Insist on the use of Genuine Nissan Collision Parts!

If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts made to Nissans original exacting specifications if you want to help it to last and hold its resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your insurance agent and your repair shop to only use Genuine Nissan Collision Parts. Nissan does not warrant non-Nissan parts, nor does Nissans warranty apply to damage caused by a non-genuine part. Using Genuine Nissan Parts can help protect your personal safety, preserve your warranty protection and maintain the resale value of your vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using Genuine Nissan Parts may prevent or limit unnecessary excess wear and tear expenses at the end of your lease. Nissan designs its hoods with crumple zones to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide such built in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts often show premature wear, rust and corrosion.

your vehicle. And some states have enacted laws that restrict insurance companies from authorizing the use of non-genuine collision parts during the new vehicle warranty. These laws help protect you, so you can take action to protect yourself.

Its your right!

If you should need further information visit us at: www.nissandriven.com.

Why should you take a chance?

In over 40 states, the law says you must be advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair
Technical and consumer information

9-23

MEMO

9-24

Technical and consumer information

10 Index
A ABS (Anti-lock brake system)......................... 5-18 Air bag system Front (See supplemental front airbag system) ...................................................... 1-13 Side (See supplemental side air bag system) ...................................................... 1-15 Air bag warning labels .................................... 1-18 Air bag warning light.............................. 1-18, 2-11 Air cleaner housing filter ................................. 8-18 Air conditioner Air conditioner operation ............................. 4-3 Air conditioner service ....................... 4-3, 4-12 Air conditioner specification label.............. 9-12 Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations................ 4-12, 9-6 Air filter ...................................................... 4-11 Heater and air conditioner controls ............. 4-3 Servicing air conditioner.............................. 4-3 Air conditioner operation, Semiautomatic......... 4-5 Air flow charts ................................................... 4-6 Alcohol, drugs and driving ................................ 5-4 Anchor point locations Top tether strap......................................... 1-35 Antenna........................................................... 4-29 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)........................ 5-18 Anti-lock brake warning light............................. 2-9 Appearance care Exterior appearance care............................ 7-2 Interior appearance care ............................. 7-4 Armrest ............................................................. 1-8 Audible reminders ........................................... 2-13 Audio operation precautions ........................... 4-13 Audio system .................................................. 4-12 Automatic Anti-glare inside mirror .............................. 3-15 Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ........... 8-12 Drive positioner ......................................... 3-16 Driving with automatic transmission .... 5-4, 5-8 Seat positioner, seat ................................. 3-17 Transmission selector lever lock release....................................................... 5-10 Avoiding collision and rollover .......................... 5-3 B Battery............................................................. 8-15 Battery saver system................................. 2-20 Battery replacement, (See multi-remote control system) ............................................................. 3-8 Before starting the engine ................................ 5-7 Belts (See drive belts) .................................... 8-17 Brake Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ................... 5-18 Brake and clutch fluid................................ 8-14 Brake booster ............................................ 8-22 Brake pedal ............................................... 8-21 Brake pedal check..................................... 8-21 Brake system............................................. 5-18 Parking brake check ........................ 5-12, 8-21 Parking brake operation ............................ 5-12 Warning light ............................................. 2-10 Break-in schedule ........................................... 5-15 Bulb check/instrument panel ............................ 2-9 Bulb replacement ............................................ 8-26 C Cabin air filter ................................................. 4-11 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants... 9-2 Car phone or CB radio ................................... 4-30 Cargo (See vehicle loading information) ........ 2-28 Cargo net ........................................................ 2-28 Cassette player (See audio system) ..... 4-18, 4-25 Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst............ 5-3 CD care and cleaning ..................................... 4-28 Child restraints ................................................ 1-27 Installation on front passenger seat.......... 1-36 Precautions on child restraints.................. 1-27 Top tether strap anchor point locations .... 1-35 With top tether strap.................................. 1-35 Child safety ..................................................... 1-22 Child safety rear door lock................................ 3-4 Chimes, Audible reminders............................. 2-13 Circuit breaker, Fusible link ............................ 8-23

Cleaning exterior and interior .................... 7-2, 7-4 Clock ............................................................... 2-32 Clutch Fluid........................................................... 8-14 Cold weather driving ....................................... 5-20 Compact spare tire ......................................... 8-37 Compass display .............................................. 2-6 Console box .................................................... 2-28 Controls Heater and air conditioner controls ............. 4-3 Heater and semiautomatic air conditioner ................................................... 4-3 Coolant Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants ..................................................... 9-2 Changing engine coolant ............................ 8-9 Checking engine coolant level .................... 8-8 Corrosion protection ......................................... 7-5 Cruise control.................................................. 5-13 Cup holder ...................................................... 2-27 D Daytime running light system ......................... 2-21 Defogger switch, Rear window and outside mirror defogger switch............................................... 2-17 Dimensions and weights................................... 9-9 Door open warning light ................................. 2-10 Drive belts ....................................................... 8-17 Drive positioner, Automatic............................. 3-16 Driving Cold weather driving ................................. 5-20 Driving with automatic transmission .... 5-4, 5-8 Driving with manual transmission ...... 5-5, 5-11

Precautions when starting and driving ........ 5-2 E Economy, Fuel ................................................ 5-15 Emission control information label.................. 9-11 Emission control system warranty .................. 9-20 Engine Before starting the engine........................... 5-7 Block heater .............................................. 5-21 Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants ..................................................... 9-2 Changing engine coolant ............................ 8-9 Changing engine oil .................................. 8-11 Changing engine oil filter .......................... 8-12 Checking engine coolant level .................... 8-8 Checking engine oil level .......................... 8-10 Coolant temperature gauge ........................ 2-5 Engine compartment check locations ......... 8-7 Engine cooling system ................................ 8-8 Engine oil................................................... 8-10 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation..... 9-5 Engine oil viscosity...................................... 9-5 Engine serial number ................................ 9-11 Engine specifications................................... 9-7 If your vehicle overheats ............................. 6-9 Starting the engine ...................................... 5-7 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ...................... 5-2 F

Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) ............................................................. 2-22 Flat tire .............................................................. 6-2 Floor mat cleaning ............................................ 7-4 Fluid Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ........... 8-12 Brake and clutch fluid................................ 8-14 Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants ..................................................... 9-2 Engine coolant............................................. 8-8 Engine oil................................................... 8-10 Power steering fluid................................... 8-14 Window washer fluid ................................. 8-15 Fog light switch ............................................... 2-21 Folding rear seat............................................... 1-5 Front air bag system (See supplemental restraint system) ........................................................... 1-13 Front manual seat adjustment .......................... 1-2 Front power seat adjustment ............................ 1-3 Fuel Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants ..................................................... 9-2 filler cap ..................................................... 3-12 filler lid ....................................................... 3-12 Fuel economy............................................ 5-15 Fuel octane rating ....................................... 9-3 Fuel recommendation.................................. 9-3 Gauge.......................................................... 2-5 Fuses .............................................................. 8-22 Fusible links .................................................... 8-23 G

F.M.V.S.S. certification label........................... 9-11 Filter, Air cleaner housing filter....................... 8-18

Garage door opener, HomeLink Universal... 2-37

10-2

Gas cap .......................................................... 3-12 Gauge ............................................................... 2-3 Engine coolant temperature gauge............. 2-5 Fuel gauge .................................................. 2-5 Odometer..................................................... 2-4 Speedometer ............................................... 2-4 Tachometer ................................................. 2-4 General maintenance ....................................... 8-2 Glove box........................................................ 2-27 Glove box lock ................................................ 2-27 H Hazard warning flasher switch........................ 2-22 Head restraints ................................................. 1-6 Headlights Bulb replacement ...................................... 8-27 Headlight switch ........................................ 2-19 Xenon headlights....................................... 2-19 Heated seats................................................... 2-23 Heated steering wheel (if so equipped).......... 2-24 Heater Engine coolant heater ............................... 5-21 Heater and air conditioner controls ............. 4-3 Heater operation.......................................... 4-3 Heater operation, Semiautomatic air conditioner ........................................................ 4-4 HomeLink Universal Transceiver.................. 2-37 Hood, release ................................................. 3-10 Horn ................................................................ 2-22 How to stop alarm, Vehicle security ............... 2-15

I Ignition switch ................................................... 5-4 Automatic transmission models ........... 5-4, 5-8 Key positions ............................................... 5-6 Manual transmission models ............. 5-5, 5-11 Immobilizer system ......................................... 2-15 Indicator lights................................................. 2-12 Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test................... 9-21 Instrument panel ............................................... 2-2 Interior light ..................................................... 2-34 Interior light replacement ................................ 8-28 Interior trunk lid release .................................. 3-12 ISOFIX child restraint ..................................... 1-34 J Jump starting .................................................... 6-6 K Keyless entry .................................................... 3-4 Keys .................................................................. 3-2 L Label, Air conditioner specification label ........ Label, Emission control information label....... Label, F.M.V.S.S. certification label................ Labels Air bag warning labels............................... Engine serial number ................................ 9-12 9-11 9-11 1-18 9-11

Vehicle identification number (VIN)........... 9-10 LATCH system................................................ 1-34 License plate, Installing front license plate..... 9-13 Light Air bag warning light ................................. 1-18 Bulb replacement ...................................... 8-26 Fog light switch ......................................... 2-21 Headlight switch ........................................ 2-19 Headlights Bulb replacement .................... 8-27 Interior light................................................ 2-34 Personal light............................................. 2-35 Replacement ............................................. 8-26 Trunk light.................................................. 2-36 Vanity mirror light ...................................... 2-36 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ........................................... 2-9, 2-12 Xenon headlights....................................... 2-19 Lights, Exterior and interior light replacement .................................................... 8-28 Loading information (See vehicle loading information) ..................................................... 9-14 Lock Door locks ................................................... 3-2 Glove box lock........................................... 2-27 Power door lock .......................................... 3-2 Trunk lid lock opener lever........................ 3-10 Low fuel warning light ..................................... 2-11 M Maintenance Battery ....................................................... 8-15 General maintenance .................................. 8-2 Inside the vehicle ........................................ 8-3

10-3

Maintenance precautions ............................ 8-5 Outside the vehicle...................................... 8-2 Seat belt maintenance .............................. 1-26 Manual front seat adjustment ........................... 1-2 Meters and gauges ........................................... 2-3 Mirror Outside mirror control................................ 3-15 Outside mirrors.......................................... 3-16 N Net, Cargo net ................................................ 2-28 New vehicle break-in ...................................... 5-15 Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System ............... 2-15 Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System, Engine start ................................................................... 5-6 O Odometer .......................................................... 2-4 Oil Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants ..................................................... 9-2 Changing engine oil .................................. 8-11 Changing engine oil filter .......................... 8-12 Checking engine oil level .......................... 8-10 Engine oil................................................... 8-10 Engine oil viscosity...................................... 9-5 Outside mirror control ..................................... 3-15 Outside mirrors ............................................... 3-16 Overheat, If your vehicle overheats.................. 6-9

P Parking Brake check............................................... 8-21 Parking brake check.................................. 5-12 Parking brake operation ............................ 5-12 Parking on hills.......................................... 5-12 Parking/parking on hills .................................. 5-16 Personal light .................................................. 2-35 Phone, Car phone or CB radio....................... 4-30 Power Front seat adjustment ................................. 1-3 Power door lock .......................................... 3-2 Power outlet .............................................. 2-24 Power steering fluid................................... 8-14 Power steering system.............................. 5-17 Power windows ......................................... 2-29 Pre-tensioner seat belt system ....................... 1-16 Precautions Audio operation precautions ..................... 4-13 Braking precautions................................... 5-18 Cruise control precautions ........................ 5-13 Maintenance precautions ............................ 8-5 On child restraints ..................................... 1-27 On seat belt usage.................................... 1-20 Precautions on supplemental restraint system ......................................................... 1-8 Precautions when starting and driving ........ 5-2 Push starting ..................................................... 6-8 R Radio, Car phone or CB radio........................ 4-30

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test (US only) ......................................................... 9-21 Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock...... 3-4 Rear power point ............................................ 2-24 Rear window and outside mirror defogger switch .............................................................. 2-17 Registering your vehicle in another country ... 9-10 Remote keyless entry system........................... 3-4 Reporting safety defects (US only)................. 9-20 Rollover ............................................................. 5-3 S Safety Child seat belts.......................................... 1-22 Reporting safety defects (US only) ........... 9-20 Towing safety ............................................ 9-17 Seat Belt warning light....................................... 1-20 Belt warning light and chime..................... 2-11 Seat adjustment Front manual seat adjustment .................... 1-2 Front power seat adjustment ...................... 1-3 Seat belt(s) Child safety................................................ 1-22 Infants and small children ......................... 1-22 Injured persons.......................................... 1-23 Larger children .......................................... 1-23 Pre-tensioner seat belt system ................. 1-16 Precautions on seat belt usage ................ 1-20 Pregnant women ....................................... 1-23 Seat belt cleaning........................................ 7-5 Seat belt extenders ................................... 1-26 Seat belt maintenance .............................. 1-26

10-4

Seat belts .................................................. 1-20 Three-point type with retractor .................. 1-23 Seat(s) Heated seats ............................................. 2-23 Seats ........................................................... 1-2 Security system, vehicle security system ....... 2-14 Security systems (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System), Engine start ..................................... 2-15 Security systems (See vehicle security system) ........................................................... 2-14 Servicing air conditioner .......................... 4-3, 4-12 Shift lock release ............................................ 5-10 Shifting Automatic transmission........................ 5-4, 5-8 Manual transmission .......................... 5-5, 5-11 Shoulder belt height adjustment, For front seats ............................................................... 1-26 Side air bag system (See supplemental side air bag system) .................................................... 1-15 Spark plugs ..................................................... 8-17 Speedometer .................................................... 2-4 Starting Before starting the engine........................... 5-7 Jump starting............................................... 6-6 Precautions when starting and driving ........ 5-2 Push starting ............................................... 6-8 Starting the engine ...................................... 5-7 Steering Power steering fluid................................... 8-14 Power steering system.............................. 5-17 Tilting steering wheel ................................ 3-14 Storage ........................................................... 2-26 Sunglasses holder .......................................... 2-26 Sun shade....................................................... 2-31

Sun visors ....................................................... 3-15 Sunroof ........................................................... 2-31 Supplemental air bag warning labels ............. 1-18 Supplemental air bag warning light....... 1-18, 2-11 Supplemental front air bag system................. 1-13 Supplemental restraint system ......................... 1-8 Precautions on supplemental restraint system ......................................................... 1-8 Supplemental side air bag system ................. 1-15 Switch Fog light switch ......................................... 2-21 Hazard warning flasher switch .................. 2-22 Headlight switch ........................................ 2-19 Ignition switch.............................................. 5-4 Ignition switch automatic transmission models.................................................. 5-4, 5-8 Ignition switch manual transmission models................................................ 5-5, 5-11 Power door lock switch ............................... 3-4 Rear window and outside mirror defogger switch......................................................... 2-17 Traction control system cancel switch ...... 2-24 Turn signal switch ..................................... 2-21 T Tachometer ....................................................... 2-4 Temperature gauge, Engine coolant temperature gauge ................................................................ 2-5 Theft (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System), Engine start..................................................... 2-15 Three way catalyst............................................ 5-3 Tilting steering wheel ...................................... 3-14

Tire Flat tire ........................................................ 6-2 Uniform tire quality grading ....................... 9-19 Tires Spare tire................................................... 8-37 Tire chains................................................. 8-34 Tire placard ............................................... 9-12 Tire pressure ............................................. 8-33 Tire rotation ............................................... 8-35 Types of tires............................................. 8-33 wheel/tire size.............................................. 9-9 Wheels and tires ....................................... 8-33 Top tether strap child restraints...................... 1-35 Towing Tow truck towing ....................................... 6-10 Towing a trailer.......................................... 9-15 Towing load/specification chart ................. 9-15 Towing safety ............................................ 9-17 Traction control system .................................. 5-19 Traction control system (TCS) cancel switch .............................................................. 2-24 Trailer towing .................................................. 9-15 Transceiver, HomeLink Universal Transceiver ..................................................... 2-37 Transmitter ........................................................ 3-4 Transmission Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ........... 8-12 Driving with automatic transmission .... 5-4, 5-8 Driving with manual transmission ...... 5-5, 5-11 Transmission selector lever lock release....................................................... 5-10 Traveling or registering your vehicle in another country ............................................................ 9-10 Trip computer.................................................. 2-32

10-5

Trunk Access through rear seat ............................ 1-5 Interior trunk lid release ............................ 3-12 Lid lock opener lever................................. 3-10 Light........................................................... 2-36 Turn signal switch ........................................... 2-21 U Underbody cleaning .......................................... 7-3 Uniform tire quality grading............................. 9-19 V Vanity mirror light............................................ 2-36 Vehicle Dimensions and weights ............................. 9-9 Identification number (VIN) ....................... 9-10 Loading information................................... 9-14 Security system ......................................... 2-14 Vehicle recovery, (freeing a stuck vehicle)..... 6-11 Ventilators ......................................................... 4-2 W Warning labels, Air bag warning labels .......... 1-18 Warning light Air bag warning light ........................ 1-18, 2-11 Anti-lock brake............................................. 2-9 Brake warning light.................................... 2-10 Door open.................................................. 2-10 Low fuel warning light ............................... 2-11 Seat belt warning light and chime............. 2-11

Warning lights ................................................... 2-9 Warning, Hazard warning flasher switch ........ 2-22 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders .......................................................... 2-9 Warranty, Emission control system warranty .......................................................... 9-20 Washer switch, Windshield wiper and washer switch .............................................................. 2-16 Washing ............................................................ 7-2 Waxing .............................................................. 7-2 Weights (See dimensions and weights) ........... 9-9 Wheel/tire size .................................................. 9-9 Wheels and tires ............................................. 8-33 Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels Window washer fluid....................................... 8-15 Window(s) Cleaning ...................................................... 7-3 Power windows ......................................... 2-29 Windshield wiper and washer switch.............. 2-16 Wiper Windshield wiper and washer switch ........ 2-16 Wiper blades ............................................. 8-19 X Xenon headlights ............................................ 2-19

10-6

GAS STATION INFORMATION FUEL RECOMMENDATION:

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91). For improved vehicle performance, NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI number (Research octane number 96).

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

API Certification Mark API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II & GF-III SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all ambient temperatures. SAE 10W-30, 10W-40 viscosity oil may be used for ambient temperatures above 0F (18C). See Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants in the 9. Technical and consumer information section for engine oil and oil filter recommendation.

CAUTION
Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control systems, and may also affect warranty coverage. Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, since this will damage the three way catalyst. For additional information, see Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the 9. Technical and consumer information section.

COLD TIRE PRESSURES:

See tire placard affixed to the center console lid.

NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURES RECOMMENDATION:

During the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of vehicle use, follow the recommendations outlined in the Break-in schedule Information found in the 5. Starting and driving section of this Owners Manual.

Windshield washer fluid 8-15

Engine coolant 8-8 Meters and gauges 2-3 Engine oil 8-10

Hood release 3-10 Seat 1-2 Trunk release 3-10 Seat belt 1-20

Audio system 4-12 Air conditioner 4-3

Key 3-2

Fuel 3-12, 9-2 Spare tire 6-3, 8-37

STI0205

FOREWORD
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence. It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control. This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle. A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle. The NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide explains details about maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a separate Customer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, as well as clarify your rights under your states lemon law. Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have any questions, they will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to them.

READ FIRSTTHEN DRIVE SAFELY

Before driving your vehicle please read this Owners Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

The inside pages of this manual contain a minimum of 50% recycled fibers, including 10% post-consumer fibers.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modifications may not be covered under NISSAN warranties.

WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS FOR SAFETY! Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and complete trip for you and your passengers! NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions. ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat. ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle. ALWAYS review this owners manual for important safety information.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for all options available on this model. Therefore, you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle. All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or design without notice and without obligation.

The inside pages of this manual contain a minimum of 50% recycled fibers, including 10% post-consumer fibers.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways:
APD1005

WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.

If you see this symbol, it means Do not do this or Do not let this happen. If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle. Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action. Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration.

CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully.

2003 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC. GARDENA, CALIFORNIA All rights reserved. No part of this Owners Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan North America, Inc., Gardena, California.

WELCOME TO THE WORLD OF NISSAN

improving both performance and fuel efficiency through new engine designs and the use of synthetic materials to reduce vehicle weight. The company has also developed ways to build quality into its vehicles at each stage of the production process, both through extensive use of automation and most importantly through an awareness that people are the central element in quality control. From the time the parts arrived from our suppliers until you took delivery of your new NISSAN, dozens of checks were made to ensure that only the best job was being done in producing and delivering your vehicle. NISSAN also takes great care to ensure that when you take your NISSAN to your dealer for maintenance, the service technician will perform his work according to the quality standards that have been established by NISSAN. Safety has also been built into your NISSAN. As you know, seat belts are an integral part of the safety systems that will help protect you and your passengers in the event of a sudden stop or an accident. We urge you to use the seat belts every time you drive the vehicle. The NISSAN story of growth and achievement reflects our major goal: to provide you, our customer, with a vehicle that is built with quality and craftsmanship a product that we can be proud to build and you can be proud to own.

WFW0002

Your new NISSAN is the result of our dedication to produce the finest in safe, reliable and economical transportation. Your vehicle is the product of a successful worldwide company that manufactures cars and trucks in over 17 countries and distributes them in 170 nations. NISSAN vehicles are designed and manufactured by Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. which was founded in Tokyo, Japan in 1933, and NISSAN affiliates worldwide, collectively growing to become the fifth largest automaker in the world. In addition to cars and trucks, NISSAN also makes forklift trucks, marine engines, boats and other diversified products. NISSAN has made a substantial and growing investment in North America. NISSANs commitment is over $6 billion dollars in capital investments in facilities across the continent. Some of the facilities include the Nissan Manufacturing facility in Smyrna, Tennessee, vehicle styling design at Nissan Design

America, Inc. in San Diego, California, and engineering at Nissan Technical Center North America in Farmington Hills, Michigan. Additionally, NISSAN employs nearly 19,000 people throughout the United States, Canada, and Mexico. An additional 60,000 people work for the 1,250 NISSAN and INFINITI dealers across North America. NISSAN is also a substantial contributor to the Canadian economy. Nissan Canada Inc., its suppliers and over 150 dealers employ approximately 4,500 people. These include company employees and the staffs of NISSAN dealers all across Canada. In addition, many Canadians work for companies that supply NISSAN and NISSAN dealers with materials and services ranging from the operation of port facilities and transportation services, to the supply of lubricants, parts and accessories. NISSAN pioneered the use of electronics and computers in automobiles, and has led the industry in

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

NISSAN CARES . . . Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number: For U.S. mainland and Alaska customers

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information:

For U.S. mainland and Alaska customers

Your name, address, and telephone number Vehicle identification number (attached to the top of the instrument panel on the drivers side) Date of purchase Current odometer reading Your NISSAN dealers name Your comments or questions
OR You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 191 Gardena, California 90248-0191
For Hawaii customers

1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261)
For Hawaii customers

1-808-836-0888 (Oahu Number)

For Canadian customers

Nissan Motor Corporation in Hawaii 2880 Kilihau St. Honolulu, Hawaii 96819
For Canadian customers

1-800-387-0122

Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

Table of Contents

Illustrated table of contents SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags Instruments and controls Pre-driving checks and adjustments Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems Starting and driving In case of emergency Appearance and care Maintenance and do-it-yourself Technical and consumer information Index

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

0 Illustrated table of contents

Airbags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2 Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3 Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4 Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6 Engine compartment locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-7 Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8

AIRBAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS

0

1.

Supplemental front impact air bags (P. 1-9) 2. Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag (P. 1-9) 3. Supplemental side impact air bag (P. 1-9) 4. Seat belt pretensioners (P. 1-20) 5. Front seat belts (P. 1-23) 6. Rear seat belts (P. 1-23) 7. Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-39) 8. LATCH (lower anchors and tether for children) (P. 1-37) 9. Seats (P. 1-2) 10. Front head restraint (P. 1-8, P. 1-9) 11. Rear head restraint (P. 1-8)

LII0001

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

EXTERIOR FRONT
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Engine hood (P. 3-9) Headlight and turn signal switch (P. 2-19) Replacing bulbs (P. 8-31) Windshield wiper and washer switch (P. 2-17) Windshield (P. 8-22) Sunroof (P. 2-35) Power windows (P. 2-33) Door locks, keyfob, keys (P. 3-3, 3-5, 3-2) Mirrors (P. 3-16) Tire pressure (P. 9-11) Flat tire (P. 6-2) Tire chains (P. 8-35) Fog light switch (P. 2-22) Tie down/towing hooks (P. 6-11)

LII0002

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

EXTERIOR REAR
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-18) Rear sun shade (P. 2-37) Interior trunk lid release (P. 3-11) Trunk lid (P. 3-10) Vehicle loading (P. 9-12) Tie-down/towing hook (P. 6-11) Replacing bulbs (P. 8-31) Fuel filler cap, fuel recommendation (P. 3-12, P. 9-3) 9. Fuel filler lid (P. 3-12) 10. Child safety locks (P. 3-5)

LII0003

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Automatic anti-glare inside mirror (P. 3-16) Interior lights, illuminated entry (P. 2-39, P. 2-41) Sun visors (P. 3-15) Glove box (P. 2-30) Sunroof (P. 2-35) Front seat (P. 1-2) Rear console (P. 2-31) Rear seat (P. 1-6) Rear cup holders (P. 2-29) Front console (P. 2-30) Front cup holders (P. 2-29) Park brake, parking on hills (P. 5-12, P. 5-16) Homelink (P. 2-41)

LII0004

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. Headlight and turn signal switch (P. 2-19) Meters and gauges (P. 2-3) Windshield wiper/washer switch (P. 2-17) Lefthand, center and righthand ventilators (P. 4-14) Security indicator light (P. 2-14) Display screen/Navigation system* (P. 4-2, P. 4-7) Audio system controls (P. 4-19) Climate controls (P. 4-16) Front passenger supplemental air bag (P. 1-9) Glove box (P. 2-30) Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-24) Cruise control main/set switches (P. 2-24) Driver supplemental air bag/horn (P. 1-9, P. 2-24) Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls (P. 3-14) Steering wheel switch for audio control (P. 4-31) Heated steering wheel switch (P. 2-25) Vehicle dynamics control (VDC) switch (if so equipped)/Traction control system (TCS) cancel switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-26, P. 2-26) Outside mirror controls (P. 3-17) Instrument brightness control (P. 2-20) Heated seat switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-25) Rear sunshade switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-37)

WII0005

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Owners Manual (if so equipped).

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

ENGINE COMPARTMENT LOCATIONS

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-14) Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9) Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-14) Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model) (P. 8-15) Air cleaner (P. 8-19) Battery (P. 8-16) Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-24) Transmission dipstick (A/T models) (P. 0-0) Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9) Radiator cap (P. 8-8) Fuse block (P. 8-24) Windshield washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-15) Coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)

WII0006

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning light or

Name Anti-lock brake warning light

Page 2-9

Warning light

Name Low fuel warning light Low washer fluid warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Supplemental air bag warning light

Page 2-11 2-11

Indicator light

Name Automatic transmission position indicator light (if so equipped) CRUISE main switch indicator light Cruise SET switch indicator light High beam indicator light (blue) Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)

Page 2-11

Automatic transmission check warning light or Brake warning light

2-10

2-11

2-12

2-10

2-11

2-12

Charge warning light Door open warning light Engine oil pressure light

2-10 2-10 2-10

Trunk lid open warning light

2-11

2-12

2-12

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

Indicator light

Name Slip indicator light (if so equipped) Traction control system off indicator light (if so equipped) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights Vehicle dynamics control off indicator light (if so equipped)

Page 2-12

2-13

2-13

2-13

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

MEMO

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

1 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Front manual seat adjustment passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Front power seat adjustment (for drivers seat and if so equipped for passengers seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Folding rear seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Head restraint adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Active head restraint (front seats). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-27 Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30 Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30 Installation on rear seat center (5-passenger models only) or outboard positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32 LATCH (lower anchors and tether for children) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37 Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39 Installation on front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40

SEATS FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT PASSENGER SIDE

WARNING
Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of control of the vehicle. After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked.
ARS1152

WARNING
Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat properly. See Precautions on Seat Belt Usage later in this section.

1-2 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags

LRS0244

LRS0245

Forward and backward

Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever up and lean your body forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position.

WARNING
After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked.

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-3

See Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) in Pre-driving checks and adjustments for automatic drive positioner operation.

Forward and backward

Moving the switch forward or backward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position.

Reclining
Move the recline switch backward until the desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback forward again, move the switch forward and move your body forward. The seatback will move forward.
0

WRS0163

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT (for drivers seat and if so equipped for passengers seat)
WARNING
Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of control of the vehicle.

Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls and become trapped in a window. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

Operating tips
The motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate the switch. Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery.

1-4 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags

WRS0164

LRS0239

LRS0238

Seat lifter (drivers seat)

Push the front or rear end of the switch up or down to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion.

Manual

Power

Lumbar support (drivers seat)

The lumbar support feature provides lower back support to the driver. Move the lever up or down (manual) or move the switch forward or backward (power) to adjust the seat lumbar area.

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-5

FOLDING REAR SEAT (if so equipped) Interior trunk access

For models without rear center console, the trunk can be accessed from the passenger side of the rear seat for loading and unloading, as shown.
1 2

Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured. If they are not completely secured in the latched position, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop. Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent childrens access to car keys.

Push down on the button on the rear parcel shelf. Fold down the passenger side seatback.

WARNING
Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury in an accident or sudden stop. The 4-passenger model has seating and seat belts for 4 occupants, 2 in the front seats and 2 in the rear seats. Never use the rear console as a seating position or for a child restraint.

LRS0246

1-6 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags

LRS0247

LIC0431

LIC0401

To fold down the driver side of the rear seat, reach 1 through the opening and pull on the strap located behind the seat. The rear seats can be locked using the master key to prevent unauthorized access. The valet key cannot be used to lock or unlock the release button.

For models with rear center console, the trunk can be accessed through the access panel between the rear seats. The panel can be locked using the master key to prevent unauthorized access. The valet key cannot be used to lock or unlock the access panel.

Center armrest
Pull the armrest forward until it is horizontal.

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-7

LRS0241

LRS0240

WRS0134

Type A Front

Type B Rear

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT

To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down. To adjust the head restraint forward or backward (Type A only), push it in the direction required.

WARNING
Head restraints should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident. Do not remove them. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat.

Adjust the head restraint so the center is level with the center of your ears.

1-8 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks. Doing so could impair active head restraint function. The head restraint moves forward utilizing the force that the seatback receives from the occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement of the head restraint helps support the occupants head by reducing its backward movement and helping absorb some of the forces that may lead to whiplash type injuries. Active head restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it is said that whiplash injury occurs most. Active head restraints operate only in certain rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head restraints return to their original positions. Properly adjust the active head restraints as described earlier in this section.

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) section contains important information concerning the driver and passenger supplemental front air bags, supplemental side air bags, curtain sideimpact air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts. Supplemental front impact air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the face and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions. Supplemental side-impact air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the driver and front passenger in certain side impact collisions. The supplemental side air bag is designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side impact collisions. The curtain side-impact air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. These supplemental restraint systems are designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and front passenger seat belts

SPA1025

ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT (front seats)

WARNING
Always adjust the head restraints properly as specified in the previous section. Failure to do so can reduce the effectiveness of the active head restraint. Active head restraints are designed to supplement other safety systems. Always wear seat belts. No system can prevent all injuries in any accident.

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-9

and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. (See Seat belts later in this section for instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.) The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position. After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

WRS0031

WARNING
The supplemental front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

The seat belts and the supplemental front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The front air bags inflate with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the supplemental front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always use the seat belts.

1-10 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags

 The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The air bag system monitors the severity of a collision and then inflates the air bags based on belt usage. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the supplemental front air bag inflates.
ARS1133

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-11

ARS1041

ARS1042

ARS1043

WARNING
Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.

1-12 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags

ARS1044

ARS1045

WRS0256

WARNING
Children may be severely injured or killed when the supplemental front air bags, side air bags or curtain sideimpact air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. Pre-teens and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible. Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating supplemental front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. See Child restraints later in this section for details.

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-13

SSS0101

SSS0188

WRS0032

WARNING
Supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag: The supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear impact, rollover or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

WARNING
The seat belts, the supplemental side air bags and curtain side-impact air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations.

WARNING
When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations. Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with supplemental side air bag inflation.

1-14 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags

SSS0159

SSS0162

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-15

Supplemental front air bag system

The driver supplemental front air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger supplemental front air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. These systems are designed to meet optional certification requirements under U.S. regulations. They are also permitted in Canada. The optional certification allows the front air bags to be designed to inflate somewhat less forcefully than previously. However, all of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed. The supplemental front air bag system is designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although it may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. It may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental front air bag system operation.
WRS0168

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

SRS curtain side-impact air bag (right) Supplemental side air bag modules SRS curtain side-impact air bag module Satellite sensors Seat belt pre-tensioner retractor

6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Diagnosis sensor unit Supplemental front air bag modules Crash zone sensor SRS curtain side-impact air bag (left) Seat belt buckle switches

The supplemental air bag system has dual stage inflators for both the driver and passenger air bags. The system monitors information from the crash zone sensor, the diagnosis sensor unit and seat belt buckle sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and whether the seat belts are being used. Only one front air bag may

1-16 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags

inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. This does not indicate improper performance of the system. If you have any questions about the performance of your air bag system, please contact your NISSAN dealer. When the supplemental front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. Supplemental front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body. Seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The supplemental front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the front air bag module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision. The supplemental front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position. After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system. Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicles electrical system, suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system.

WARNING
Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental front air bag inflates. Right after inflation, several front air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-17

 Work around and on the supplemental front air bag system should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) wiring should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system. A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield could affect inflation of the supplemental air bag system. The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the supplemental front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual.

to those of a higher severity side impact. They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag operation. When the supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. Supplemental side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the chest of the front occupants. Curtain sideimpact air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. Supplemental side air bags and curtain sideimpact air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body. The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as

LRS0259

Supplemental side-impact air bag and curtain side-impact air bags system
The supplemental side-impact air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats. The supplemental curtain side-impact air bags are located in the side roof rails. These systems are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-ofposition occupants. However, all of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed. The supplemental side air bags and curtain sideimpact air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar

1-18 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags

practical away from the supplemental side air bag. Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as practical from the door finishers and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain side-impact air bag inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag modules during inflation. The side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over. The supplemental side air bags and curtain side-impact air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START positions. After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING
Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental side air bag inflates. Right after inflation, several side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag or damage to the side air bag and curtain sideimpact air bag system. Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicles electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system.

Tampering with the supplemental side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material near the seatback or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag. Work around and on the side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag system. * The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual.

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-19

Pre-tensioner seat belt system (For front seats)

WARNING
The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be reused after activation. It must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a unit. If the vehicle becomes involved in a frontal collision but the pre-tensioner is not activated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced by your NISSAN dealer. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pre-tensioner seat belt system. This is to prevent accidental activation of the pre-tensioner seat belt or damage to the pre-tensioner seat belt operation. Tampering with the pre-tensioner seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.

Work around and on the pre-tensioner system should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pre-tensioner seat belt system. If you need to dispose of the pretensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Correct pre-tensioner disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury. The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt system activates in conjunction with the supplemental front air bag. Working with the seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt the instant the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, thereby restraining seat occupants. The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat belts retractor. These seat belts are used the same as conventional seat belts. When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensioner system, the supplemental air bag warning light will not come on, will flash intermittently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on after the ignition key has been turned to the ON or START position. In this case, the pre-tensioner seat belt may not function properly. They must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat belt system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual.

1-20 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags

When the ignition key is in the ON or START position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational. If any of the following conditions occur, the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag and pretensioner seat belt systems need servicing: The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds. The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.
WRS0169 LRS0100

1. 2.

SRS Air Bag Warning Labels (located on the sun visors) SRS Side Air Bag Warning Labels (located on the door pillar)

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light, displaying in the instrument panel, monitors the circuits of the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag, curtain side-impact air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt systems. The circuits monitored by the supplemental air bag warning light are the diagnosis sensor unit, crash zone sensor, satellite sensors, front air bag modules, side air bag modules, curtain side-impact air bag modules, pre-tensioner seat belts and all related wiring.

The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all. Under these conditions, the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bags and curtain side-impact air bag or pre-tensioner seat belt systems may not operate properly. It must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag and curtain sideimpact air bag systems are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-21

WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag, curtain side-impact air bag systems and/or pre-tensioner seat belt systems will not operate in an accident.

WARNING
Once a supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag or curtain side-impact air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. Additionally, if any of the supplemental front air bags inflate, the activated pre-tensioner seat belts must also be replaced. The air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt system should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer. The air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt system cannot be repaired. The supplemental front air bag, side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag systems, and the pre-tensioner seat belt system should be inspected by a NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle. If you need to dispose of the supplemental air bag, pre-tensioner seat belt system or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Correct supplemental air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt system disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

Repair and replacement procedure

The supplemental front air bags, supplemental side air bags, curtain side-impact air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred. Repair and replacement of these supplemental air bag systems should be done only by a NISSAN dealer. When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the supplemental front air bags, supplemental side air bags, curtain side-impact air bags, pre-tensioner seat belts and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the maintenance. The ignition key should always be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle.

1-22 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags

SEAT BELTS

SSS0136

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat, your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag. Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.
0

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-23

SSS0134

SSS0016

WARNING
Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be properly restrained in the rear seat and, if appropriate, in a child restraint.

WARNING
The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly.

1-24 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags

 Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle. Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness. Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt. Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts. The 4-passenger model has seating and seat belts for 4 occupants, 2 in the front seats and 2 in the rear seats.
SSS0014

All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware, should be inspected after any collision by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint manufacturers inspection instructions and replacement recommendations. The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged.

WARNING
Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the belt behind your back, under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident.

If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. Once the pre-tensioner seat belt has activated, it cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor. See your NISSAN dealer. Removal and installation of the pretensioner seat belt system components should be done by a NISSAN dealer.

CHILD SAFETY
Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly restrained. The proper restraint depends on the childs size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 pounds (9 kg) should be placed in rear facing child restraints. Front facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear facing child restraints.

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-25

WARNING
Infants and children need special protection. The vehicles seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints. All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. See Child Restraints later in this section. In addition, there are many types of child restraints available for larger children which should be used for maximum protection. NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens and children be restrained in the rear seat. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (Air bag system) for the front passenger. See Supplemental restraint system earlier in this section.

Infants and small children

NISSAN recommends that infants and small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturers instructions for installation and use.

WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is moving. The child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident or sudden stop.

PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug, and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.

Larger children
Children who are too large for child restraints should be seated and restrained by the seat belts which are provided. If the childs seating position has a shoulder belt that fits close to the face or neck, the use of a booster seat (commercially available) may help overcome this. The booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top, middle portion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck, use the shoulder belt without the booster seat.

INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations.

1-26 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING
Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly.

WRS0174

WRS0137 2

Fastening the seat belts

1

Adjust the seat. See Seats earlier in this section.

Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage.

The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move, and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat.

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-27

emergency locking mode. See Child restraints later in this section for more information. The automatic locking mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by a passenger, the locking mode should not be activated. If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension.

WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain that the seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

WRS0138 3 4

WRS0139

Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Make sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and is snug across your chest.

Unfastening the seat belts

1

To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on the buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods: When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the retractor. When the vehicle slows down rapidly. To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows.

The front passenger seat belt and the rear threepoint seat belts have a cinching mechanism for child restraint installation. It is referred to as the automatic locking mode. When automatic locking mode is activated the seat belt cannot be withdrawn again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. Once retracted, the seat belt is in the

1-28 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags

 Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement. If the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any questions about seat belt operation, see a NISSAN dealer.

WRS0170

LRS0242

Center of rear seat

Selecting correct set of seat belts: The center seat belt buckle is identified by the CENTER mark. The center seat belt tongue can be fastened only into the center seat belt buckle.

Shoulder belt height adjustment (For front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. (See Precautions on seat belt usage earlier in this section.) 1 and To adjust, pull out the adjustment button move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired 2 , so the belt passes over the center of position the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-29

CHILD RESTRAINTS
Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident. Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the child could be seriously injured in a collision or a sudden stop.

WARNING
After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position. The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry. If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth. Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components, such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors, work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire seat belt assembly should be replaced.
ARS1098

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender is available which is compatible with the installed seat belts. The extender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. See a NISSAN dealer for assistance if an extender is required.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS

WARNING
Infants and small children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint while riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a child restraint can result in serious injury or death.

WARNING
Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made by the same company which made the original equipment seat belts, should be used with NISSAN seat belts.

1-30 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags

 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating supplemental front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. A rearfacing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat. NISSAN recommends that the child restraint be installed in the rear seat. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. An improperly installed child restraint could lead to serious injury or death in an accident. In general, child restraints are designed to be installed with the lap portion of a three-point type seat belt. In addition, this vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint lower anchor system, referred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) system. Some child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these lower anchors. For details, see the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) system later in this section. Child restraints for infants and small children of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind:

Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicles seat and seat belt system. If the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Always follow all recommended procedures. All U.S. states and provinces of Canada require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated.

WRS0256

WARNING
Infants and small children should never be carried on your lap. It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident. The child could be crushed between the adult and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the same seat belt around both your child and yourself.

WARNING
Improper use of a child restraint can increase the risk or severity of injury for both the child and other occupants of the vehicle.

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-31

 Follow all of the child restraint manufacturers instructions for installation and use. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure to select one which will fit your child and vehicle. It may not be possible to properly install some types of child restraints in your vehicle. If the child restraint is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases. Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to fit the child restraint, but as upright as possible. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Tilt it from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again.

For a front-facing child restraint, check to make sure the shoulder belt does not go in front of the childs face or neck. If it does, put the shoulder belt behind the child restraint. If you must install a front facing child restraint in the front seat, see Installation on front passenger seat later in this section. When your child restraint is not in use, keep it secured with a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown around in case of a sudden stop or accident.

INSTALLATION ON REAR SEAT CENTER (5-passenger models only) OR OUTBOARD POSITIONS

WARNING
The three-point seat belt in your vehicle is equipped with an automatic locking mode retractor which must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the retractors locking mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision. The 4-passenger model has seating and seat belts for 4 occupants, 2 in the front seats and 2 in the rear seats. Never use the rear console as a seating position or for a child restraint.

CAUTION
Remember that a child restraint left in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the child restraint.

1-32 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags

WRS0248

WRS0249

WRS0250

Front Facing (outboard) step 1

Front facing
When you install a child restraint in the rear seat, follow these steps: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. It can be placed in a front facing direction, depending on the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manufacturers instructions.

Front Facing (center for 5-passenger models only) step 1

Front Facing step 2 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for belt routing.

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-33

WRS0251

WRS0146

WRS0252

Front Facing step 3 3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts back to emergency locking mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

Front Facing step 4 4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

Front Facing step 5 5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. It should not move more than 1 inch. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.

1-34 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags

After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

WRS0261

WRS0262

Rear Facing (outboard) step 1

Rear facing
When you install a child restraint in the rear seat, follow these steps: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. The direction of the child restraint depends on the type of the child restraint and the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manufacturers instructions.

Rear Facing (center for 5-passenger models only) step 1

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-35

WRS0150

WRS0260

WRS0253

Rear Facing step 2 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for belt routing.

Rear Facing step 3 3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to emergency locking mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

Rear Facing step 4 4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

1-36 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

WRS0254

WRS0172

Rear Facing step 5 5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. It should not move more than 1 inch. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more seat belt webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is in the automatic locking mode.

LATCH (lower anchors and tether for children) SYSTEM

WARNING
Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown. If a child restraint is not secured properly, your child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident. Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the LATCH system anchors. The child restraint will not be secured properly.

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-37

 The LATCH system anchors are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstance are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses. Some child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. This system is known as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) system. This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH system compatible child restraints. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with the LATCH system. This information may also be in the child restraint owners manual. If you have such a child restraint, refer to the illustration for the seating positions equipped with LATCH system anchors which can be used to secure the child restraint. The LATCH system anchors are located at the rear of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the LATCH system anchors.

LATCH child restraints generally require the use of a top tether strap. See Top tether strap child restraint later in this section for installation instructions. When installing a child restraint, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint. When you install a LATCH system compatible child restraint to the lower anchor attachments, follow these steps:

2. After attaching the child restraint and before placing the child in it, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side and tug it forward to make sure that the child restraint is securely held in place. It should not move more than 1 inch. 3. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use.

WARNING
Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor area and feeling to make sure there are no obstructions over the LATCH system anchors, such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child restraint will not be secured properly if the LATCH system anchors are obstructed. 1. To install the LATCH system compatible child restraint, insert the child restraint LATCH system anchor attachments into the anchor points on the seat. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether, see Top tether strap child restraint later in this section for installation instructions.

1-38 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags

First, secure the child restraint with the rear seat belt or the LATCH system (outboard positions), as applicable. Remove the head restraint from the seat back. Store it in a secure place. Flip up the anchor cover for the anchor point which is located directly behind the child seat. Position the top 1 and tether strap over the top of the seat back secure it to the tether anchor bracket that provides the straightest installation. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturers instructions to remove any slack.
LRS0243 LRS0296

5-passenger models

4-passenger models After removing a rear seat head restraint for top tether installation, store it securely to prevent it from causing injury to passengers or damage to the vehicle in case of sudden braking or an accident. Always replace it and adjust properly when top tether is no longer in use. If your child restraint has a top tether strap, it must be secured to the anchor point provided behind its position.

For best child restraint fit, see the child restraint installation instructions in this section and the child restraint manufacturers instructions.

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT

WARNING
Child restraint anchor points are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses.

Anchor point locations

Anchor points are located on the rear parcel shelf finisher. If you have any questions when installing a top strap child restraint on the rear seat, consult your NISSAN dealer for details.

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-39

 Failure to use the retractors locking mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision.

WRS0256

WRS0255

INSTALLATION ON FRONT PASSENGER SEAT

WARNING
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat. Supplemental front air bags inflate with great force. A rear-facing child restraint could be struck by the supplemental front air bag in a crash and could seriously injure or kill your child.

NISSAN recommends that child restraints be installed in the rear seat. However, if you must install a forwardfacing child restraint in the front passenger seat, move the passenger seat to the rearmost position. A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat. The three-point seat belt in your vehicle is equipped with an automatic locking mode retractor which must be used when installing a child restraint.

1-40 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags

WRS0258

WRS0159

WRS0160

Front Facing step 1 If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, follow these steps: 1. Position the child restraint on the front passenger seat. It should be placed in a front-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Always follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat.

Front Facing step 2 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for belt routing.

Front Facing step 3 3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to emergency locking mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-41

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

WRS0161

WRS0257

Front Facing step 4 4. Allow the seat belt to retract slightly. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

Front Facing step 5 5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. It should not move more than 1 inch. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is in the automatic locking mode.

1-42 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags

MEMO

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-43

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Compass display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Zone variation change procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . 2-9 Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Nissan vehicle immobilizer system (NVIS) . . . . . . . . 2-16 Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Xenon headlights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Autolight system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Heated seats (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Traction control system (TCS) cancel switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Rear center console (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 Covered storage box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 Cargo nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Skyview roof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Sunroof (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Automatic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Rear sun shade (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Illuminated entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Battery saver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

Homelink universal transceiver (if so equipped) . . . . . 2-41 Programming HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Programming HomeLink for Canadian customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Operating the HomeLink universal transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 Reprogramming a single HomeLink button . . . . . . 2-44 If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. Headlight and turn signal switch (P. 2-19) Meters and gauges (P. 2-3) Windshield wiper/washer switch (P. 2-17) Lefthand, center and righthand ventilators (P. 4-14) Security indicator light (P. 2-14) Display screen/Navigation system* (P. 4-2, P. 4-7) Audio system controls (P. 4-19) Climate controls (P. 4-16) Front passenger supplemental air bag (P. 1-9) Glove box (P. 2-30) Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-24) Cruise control main/set switches (P. 2-24) Driver supplemental air bag/horn (P. 1-9, P. 2-24) Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls (P. 3-14) Steering wheel switch for audio control (P. 4-31) Heated steering wheel switch (P. 2-25) Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch (if so equipped) or Traction control system (TCS) cancel switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-26, P. 2-26) Outside mirror controls (P. 3-17) Instrument brightness control (P. 2-20) Heated seat switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-25) Rear sunshade switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-37)

18. 19. 20. 21.

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Owners Manual (if so equipped).

LIC0380

See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

2-2 Instruments and controls

METERS AND GAUGES

LIC0381

1. 2. 3. 4.

Warning/indicator lights Speedometer Tachometer Warning/indicator lights

5. 6. 7. 8.

Change button for trip odometer Engine coolant temperature gauge Odometer (total/twin trip) Fuel gauge

Instruments and controls 2-3

LIC0382

LIC0432

1. 2. 3.

Speedometer Odometer/twin trip display Change button

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed when the ignition key is in the ON position. The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.

Changing the display: Pushing the change button changes the display as follows: Trip Trip Trip Resetting the trip odometer: Pushing the change button for more than 1 second resets the trip odometer to zero.

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour (km/h).

2-4 Instruments and controls

CAUTION
If the gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. See the In case of emergency section for immediate action required.

LIC0383

LIC0384

TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (r/min). Do not rev engine into 1 . the red zone

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant temperature is within the 1 when the gauge needle points normal range between the C and the H on the gauge. The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.

Instruments and controls 2-5

COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)

indicates that the fuel filler lid is The located on the drivers side of the vehicle.

CAUTION
If the vehicle runs out of fuel, malfunction indicator lamp the (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving trips, the lamp should turn off. If the lamp remains on after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer.
LIC0385

FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank. The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills. The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the ignition key is turned to OFF. The low fuel warning light comes on when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low. Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers E (Empty).

For additional information, see Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) later in this section.

LIC0422

When the COMPASS switch is in the ON posi1 will indicate the tion, the compass display direction the vehicle is heading. N: north E: east S: south W: west If the display reads C, calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at less than 5 MPH (8 km/h). You can also calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle on your everyday route. The compass will be calibrated once it has tracked three complete circles.

2-6 Instruments and controls

ZONE VARIATION CHANGE PROCEDURE

The difference between magnetic north and geographical north is known as variance. In some areas, this difference can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings. Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location if this happens: 1. Press the COMPASS switch for more than 3 seconds. The current zone number will appear in the display. 2. Find your current location on the zone map. Refer to the illustration. Record the zone number. 3. Press the COMPASS switch until the new zone number appears in the display. After you stop pressing the switch in, the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds.

WIC0355

Instruments and controls 2-7

Inaccurate compass direction:

1. With the display turned on, push the COMPASS switch for 3 seconds, until the zone selection comes up (a number will be displayed in the mirror compass window). 2. Toggle until correct zone is found and release switch. 3. The display will show all segments, and return to the normal compass mode within 10 seconds of no switch activity. 4. If the vehicle changes zone, repeat steps 1 through 3. See map. If the compass deviates from the correct indication soon after repeated adjustment, have the compass checked at an authorized dealer. The compass may not indicate the correct compass point in tunnels or while driving up or down a steep hill. (The compass returns to the correct compass point when the vehicle moves to an area where the geomagnetism is stabilized.)

CAUTION
Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc., which are attached to the vehicle by means of a magnet. They affect the operation of the compass. When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as it may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

2-8 Instruments and controls

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

or

Anti-lock brake warning light

Low washer fluid warning light Seat belt warning light and chime

High beam indicator light (Blue) Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)

Automatic transmission check warning light (if so equipped) or Brake warning light

Supplemental air bag warning light Trunk lid open warning light

Slip indicator light (if so equipped) Traction control system off indicator light (if so equipped) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Charge warning light

Door open warning light

Automatic transmission position indicator light (if so equipped) CRUISE main switch indicator light Cruise SET switch indicator light

Engine oil pressure warning light Low fuel warning light

Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light (if so equipped)

CHECKING BULBS
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake and turn the ignition key to the ON position without starting the engine. The following lights will come on: , or , , ,

If equipped, the following lights come on briefly and then go off: or , , , , ,

WARNING LIGHTS or Anti-lock brake warning light

If the light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the anti-lock brake system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If any light fails to come on, it may indicate a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system. Have the system repaired promptly.

Instruments and controls 2-9

Turn off the engine, and start it again by slowly turning the ignition key (quickly doing so may cause the ABS light to stay on when there is nothing wrong). If the light stays on, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. If an abnormality occurs in the system, the antilock function ceases, but the regular braking system continues to operate. If the light comes on while you are driving, contact a NISSAN dealer for repair.

the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following: 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. See Brake and clutch fluid in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section of this manual. 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the brake system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off and check the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN dealer immediately.

CAUTION
Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose, broken or missing.

WARNING
Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous. Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel. If the brake fluid MINIMUM or MIN fluid reservoir, do brake system has NISSAN dealer. level is below the mark on the brake not drive until the been checked at a

Automatic transmission check warning light (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is turned ON, the light comes on for 2 seconds. If the light blinks for approximately 8 seconds, it may indicate the automatic transmission system is not functioning properly. Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the transmission.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors are not closed securely while the ignition key is in the ON position.

Engine oil pressure warning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer. The engine oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. See Engine oil in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section of this manual.

or

Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems. When the ignition key is in the ON position, the light comes on when the parking brake is applied, and also warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with

2-10 Instruments and controls

CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Such damage is not covered by warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.

is fastened. At the same time, the chime sounds for about 7 seconds unless the drivers seat belt is securely fastened. Refer to Seat belts in the SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags section for precautions on seat belt usage.

For additional details see Supplemental restraint system in the SafetySeats, seat belts and air bags section of this manual.

WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag, curtain side-impact air bag systems (if so equipped) and/or pre-tensioner seat belt systems will not operate in an accident.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E (Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E (Empty).

Supplemental air bag warning light

When the ignition key is in the ON or START position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational. If any of the following conditions occur, the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag, curtain side-impact air bags, and pretensioner seat belt systems need servicing and your vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer: The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds. The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently. The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all. Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pretensioner seat belts may not function properly.

Trunk lid open warning light

This light comes on when the trunk lid is not securely closed while the ignition key is in the ON position.

Low washer fluid warning light

This light comes on when the washer fluid is at a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary. See the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section of this manual.

INDICATOR LIGHTS Automatic transmission position indicator light (if so equipped)

When the ignition key is turned to the ON position, the indicator in the speedometer shows the automatic transmission selector lever position. See Driving with automatic transmission in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Seat belt warning light and chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten your seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition key is turned to the ON or START position and remains illuminated until the drivers seat belt

Instruments and controls 2-11

Cruise main switch indicator light

The light comes on when the cruise control main switch is pushed. The light goes out when the main switch is pushed again. When the cruise main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise control system is operational.

Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)

If this indicator lamp comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction. The malfunction indicator lamp may also come on steady if the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel filler cap is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons of fuel in the fuel tank. After a few driving trips, the lamp should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists. Operation The malfunction indicator lamp will come on in one of two ways: Malfunction indicator lamp on steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected. Check the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The lamp should turn off after a few driving trips. If the lamp does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

Cruise set switch indicator light

The light comes on while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control system. If the light blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate the cruise control system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Malfunction indicator lamp blinking An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To reduce or avoid emission control system damage: do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH (72 km/h). avoid hard acceleration or deceleration. avoid steep uphill grades. if possible, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed.
The malfunction indicator lamp may stop blinking and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission control system.

High beam indicator light (Blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected. The high beam indicator light also comes on when the passing signal is activated.

Slip indicator light (if so equipped)

This indicator light will blink when the traction control system is limiting wheel spin. Slippery road conditions may exist if the slip indicator blinks on. If this happens, adjust your driving accordingly.

2-12 Instruments and controls

The slip indicator light also comes on when you turn the ignition key to the ON position. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light does not come on or go off, have the traction control system checked by a NISSAN dealer. The system operates in all transmission shift lever positions, but the system can upshift the transmission only as high as the indicated shift lever position.

While the traction control system is operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this is normal.

while you are driving, have the vehicle dynamic control system checked by a NISSAN dealer. While the vehicle dynamic control system is operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this is normal.

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch is activated. Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned on.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS Brake pad wear warning

The front disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a front brake pad requires replacement, it makes a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Traction control system off indicator light (if so equipped)

This indicator light comes on when the traction control off switch is pushed to OFF. This indicates the traction control system is not operating. Push the traction control off switch again or restart the engine and the system will operate normally. See Traction control system (TCS) in the Starting and driving section of this manual. The traction control light also comes on when you turn the ignition key to the ON position. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the traction control system (TCS) is operational. If the light stays on or comes on along with the SLIP indicator light while you are driving, have the traction control system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light (if so equipped)

This indicator light comes on when the vehicle dynamic control off switch is pushed to OFF. This indicates the vehicle dynamic control system is not operating. Push the vehicle dynamic control off switch again or restart the engine and the system will operate normally. See Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system in the Starting and driving section of this manual. The vehicle dynamic control light also comes on when you turn the ignition key to the ON position. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light stays on or comes on along with the SLIP indicator light

Key reminder chime

A chime sounds if the drivers door is opened while the key is left in the ignition switch. Remove the key and take it with you when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime

With the ignition switch in the OFF position, a chime sounds when the drivers door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on. Turn the headlight control switch off before leaving the vehicle.

Instruments and controls 2-13

SECURITY SYSTEMS

LIC0301

LIC0387

Your vehicle has two types of security systems: Vehicle security system NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer SystemNVIS

Security indicator light (Vehicle security system)

1 is located on the The security indicator light instrument panel near the windshield.

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual and audio alarm signals if parts of the vehicle are disturbed.

The security indicator light shows the status of the vehicle security system. The light operates whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF, or ACC position. The vehicle security system has four phases. For each phase the operation of the security indicator light is different.
LIC0053

How to arm the vehicle security system

1. Close all windows. (The system can be armed even if the windows are open.) 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

2-14 Instruments and controls

3. Close the trunk lid and all doors. Lock all doors. The doors can be locked with the key, power door lock switch or with the keyfob. Keyfob operation: Push the button on the keyfob. All doors lock. The hazard lights flash twice and the horn beeps once to indicate all doors are locked. button is pushed with When the all doors locked, the hazard lights flash twice and the horn beeps once as a reminder that the doors are already locked. The horn may or may not beep. Refer to Personalized settings menu (vehicles without navigation system) or Vehicle electronic systems (vehicles with navigation system) in the Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems section later in this manual.

4. Confirm that the SECURITY indicator light comes on. The SECURITY light stays on for about 30 seconds. The vehicle security system is now pre-armed. After about 30 seconds the vehicle security system automatically shifts into the armed phase. The SECURITY light begins to flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the 30-second pre-arm time period, the door is unlocked by the key or the keyfob, or the ignition key is turned to ACC or ON, the system will not arm. If the key is turned slowly when locking the door, the system may not arm. Furthermore, if the key is turned beyond the vertical position toward the unlock position to remove the key, the system may be disarmed when the key is removed. If the indicator light fails to glow for 30 seconds, unlock the door once and lock it again. Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will arm with all doors and trunk lid closed and locked with the ignition key in the OFF position.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the following alarm: The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently. The alarm automatically turns off after approximately 1 minute. However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking a door with the key, or by pressing the button on the keyfob. The alarm is activated by: opening the door or trunk lid without using the key or keyfob (even if the door is unlocked by releasing the door inside lock switch) or opening the trunk lid by operating the opener lever.

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm stops only by unlocking a door with the key, or by pressing the button on the keyfob.

Instruments and controls 2-15

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (NVIS)

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (NVIS) will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered NVIS key. If the engine fails to start using a registered NVIS key (for example, when interference is caused by another NVIS key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedures: 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position, and wait approximately 5 seconds. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2. 4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered NVIS key. If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered NVIS key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.

Statement related to Section 15 of FCC Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (CONT ASSY IMMOBILIZER, ANT ASSY IMMOBILIZER) This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EXPRESSLY APPROVED BY THE MANUFACTURER FOR COMPLIANCE COULD VOID THE USERS AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT.
LIC0387

Security indicator light (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System)

1 is located on the The security indicator light instrument panel near the windshield.

The security indicator light blinks every 3 seconds whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (NVIS) is operational. If the NVIS is malfunctioning, the light will remain on while the ignition key is in the ON position. If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for

2-16 Instruments and controls

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

NVIS service as soon as possible. Please bring all NVIS keys that you have when visiting your NISSAN dealer for service. NOTE: You can turn on or turn off the driving speed dependent intermittent wiper function. Refer to Personalized settings menu (vehicles without navigation system) or Vehicle electronic systems (vehicles with navigation system) in the Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems section later in this manual.
2 3 LIC0386

Low continuous low speed operation High continuous high speed operation

SWITCH OPERATION
The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition key is in the ON position. Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed:

4 to have one sweep operaPush the lever up tion of the wiper. 5 to operate the Pull the lever toward you washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield.

Intermittent intermittent operation can be A adjusted by turning the knob toward B (Faster). Also, the intermittent (Slower) or operation speed varies in accordance with the vehicle speed. (For example, when the vehicle speed is high, the intermittent operation speed will be faster.)

CAUTION
Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds.

Instruments and controls 2-17

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR (if so equipped) DEFROSTER SWITCH

Do not operate the washer if the reservoir tank is empty. Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reservoir tank. Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturers recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank. Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water. NOTE: The top few rows of wires on the rear window are not part of the rear window defroster system. These wires make up the antenna for the audio system.

LIC0388

To defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and push the rear window defroster switch on. The rear window defroster indicator light on the switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster.

2-18 Instruments and controls

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH XENON HEADLIGHTS (if so equipped)

WARNING
ample, when the vehicle stops at a traffic signal). Even when the daytime running lights are active (Canada only), the xenon headlights do not turn on. This way the life of the xenon headlights is not reduced. If the xenon headlight bulb is close to burning out, the brightness will drastically decrease, the light will start blinking, or the color of the light will become reddish. If one or more of the above signs appear, contact a NISSAN dealer.
LIC0389

HIGH

VOLTAGE

When xenon headlights are on, they produce a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to modify or disassemble. Always have your xenon headlights replaced at a NISSAN dealer. Xenon headlights provide considerably more light than conventional headlights. If they are not correctly aimed, they might temporarily blind an oncoming driver or the driver ahead of you and cause a serious accident. If headlights are not aimed correctly, immediately take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer and have the headlights adjusted correctly. When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, its brightness or color varies slightly. However, the color and brightness will soon stabilize. The life of xenon headlights will be shortened by frequent on-off operation. It is generally desirable not to turn off the headlights for short intervals (for ex-

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH Lighting

1 2

When turning the switch to the position, the front parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights come on. When turning the switch to the position, the headlights come on and all the other lights remain on.

Instruments and controls 2-19

LIC0390

LIC0391

LIC0392

Headlight beam select

1 2 3

Turn signal switch

Turn signal

Instrument brightness control

The instrument cluster illuminates when the ignition switch is in ON position. The instrument brightness control operates when the headlight control switch is in the or position. AUTO, Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instrument panel lights when driving at night. The instrument brightness control will not adjust the brightness when the headlights or parking lights are off.

To select the high beam function, push the lever forward. The high beam lights come on and the light illuminates. Pull the lever back to select the low beam. Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the headlight high beams on and off.

Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signals cancel automatically. To signal a lane change, move the lever up or down to the point where the indicator light begins to flash, but the lever does not latch.

Lane change signal

2

2-20 Instruments and controls

Daytime running light system (Canada only)

The daytime running lights automatically illuminate when the engine is started with the parking brake released. The daytime running lights operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position or in the position. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO or position for headlight illumination when driving at night. If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the daytime running lights do not illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate when the parking brake is released. The daytime running lights will remain on until the ignition switch is turned off.

NOTE: Autolight activation sensitivity and the time delay for autolight shutoff can be adjusted. See Personalized settings menu (vehicles without navigation system) or Vehicle electronic systems (vehicles with navigation system) in the Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems section later in this manual. To turn on the autolight system: 1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the AUTO position.
LIC0424

2. Turn the ignition key to ON. 3. The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off. Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and a door is opened and left open, the headlights remain ON for 5 minutes. If another door is opened during the 5 minutes, then the 5 minute timer is reset. To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to the OFF, , or position. Be sure you do not put anything on top of the autolight sensor located in the top driver side of the instrument panel. The autolight sensor controls the autolight; if it is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as if

AUTOLIGHT SYSTEM
1 is located on the instruThe autolight sensor ment panel.

WARNING
When the daytime running light system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

The autolight system allows the headlights to be set so they turn on and off automatically. The autolight system can: Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights automatically when it is dark. Turn off all the lights when it is light. Keep all the lights on for up to 180 seconds after you turn the key to OFF and all doors are closed.

Instruments and controls 2-21

FOG LIGHT SWITCH

it is dark out and the headlights will illuminate. If this occurs while parked with the engine off and the key in the ON position, your vehicles battery could become discharged.

AIC0102

LIC0393

CORNERING LIGHT
The cornering light provides additional illumination toward the turning direction. The cornering light will illuminate on the turning direction side when a turn is signaled with the headlights on.

Normal operation of the fog lights in the position: ON Headlight switch in the AUTO position; daytime operation Fog lights, front parking and tail lights come ON. Headlights do not come ON. Dash readouts dim unless the dimmer switch is on full bright. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position with the fog lights turned ON, a warning chime will sound indicating the fog lights were left ON.

2-22 Instruments and controls

The fog lights will be turned OFF by the Battery Saver function approximately 5 minutes after the last door is closed. If the ignition switch is turned to the ON position after the fog lights were turned OFF by the Battery Saver function, the fog lights will immediately come back ON. Headlight switch in the AUTO position; nighttime operation Fog lights, marker and taillights come ON. Headlights come ON. Dash readouts dim unless the dimmer switch is on full bright. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position with the fog lights turned ON, the fog lights will be turned OFF by the Twilight Sentinel function approximately 45 seconds after the last door is closed.

NOTE: Autolight activation sensitivity and the time delay for autolight shutoff can be adjusted. See Personalized settings menu (vehicles without navigation system) or Vehicle electronic systems (vehicles with navigation system) in the Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems section later in this manual. If any door is opened when the ignition switch is in the OFF position, the Twilight Sentinel function operates for approximately 5 minutes. After approximately 5 minutes, the lights will turn OFF due to the Battery Saver function. If the ignition switch is turned to the ON position after the fog lights were turned OFF by the Twilight Sentinel function, the fog lights and the headlights will come ON together when the Auto Light Sensor determines it is dark enough. The fog lights will now operate independently of the headlights only if the headlight switch is turned OFF. When the high beams are turned ON, the fog lights will turn OFF. The fog lights will come back ON when the high beams are turned OFF.

Headlights turned ON and OFF by the driver (no AUTO headlight function); day or nighttime operation Same operation as Headlight switch in the AUTO position; daytime operation described above. To turn the fog lights OFF, turn the switch to the OFF position. The fog lights automatically turn off whenever the high beam headlight function is selected.

Instruments and controls 2-23

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on. The flashers will operate with the ignition switch in any position. Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving.

HORN

LIC0394

LIC0395

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

To sound the horn, push the center pad area of the steering wheel.

WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury.

WARNING
If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road. Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic.

2-24 Instruments and controls

HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if so equipped)

CAUTION
Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat. Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated. Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.

LIC0136

The front and rear seats are warmed by built-in heaters (if so equipped). The switches are located on the center consoles. 1. Start the engine. 2. Push the low or high position of the switch, as desired. The indicator light in the switch will illuminate. The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on. 3. When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off.

Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth. When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar materials. If any abnormalities are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running.

LIC0421

The heated steering wheel system is designed to operate only when the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below approximately 68F (20C). Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm the steering wheel after the engine starts. The indicator light will come on. If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68F (20C), the system will heat the steering wheel to approximately 86F (30C), then turn off automatically. Push the switch again to turn the heated steering off manually. The indicator light will go off.

Instruments and controls 2-25

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS) CANCEL SWITCH (if so equipped)

NOTE: If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is above 68F (20C) when the switch is turned on, the system will not heat the steering wheel. This is not a malfunction.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

LIC0451

LIC0364

The vehicle should be driven with the Traction Control System (TCS) on for most driving conditions. When the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the TCS reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the TCS off. To turn off the TCS, push the TCS OFF switch. indicator will come on. The Push the TCS OFF switch again or restart the engine and the system will operate normally. See Traction control system in the Starting and driving section.

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control System (VDC) on for most driving conditions. When the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off. To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF switch. The indicator will come on. Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine and the system will operate normally. See Vehicle dynamic control system (VDC) in the Starting and driving section.

2-26 Instruments and controls

POWER OUTLET

LIC0396

LIC0398

LIC0397

Passenger compartment The power outlets are for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones. They are rated at 12 Volts 120 Watts maximum.

Front center console Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory. Use this power outlet with the engine running. (If the engine is stopped, this could result in a discharged battery.) Avoid using when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on.

Rear center console Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF. Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may blow. When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water to contact the outlet.

CAUTION
Take care as the outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use. This power outlet is not designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit.

Instruments and controls 2-27

STORAGE

CAUTION
Do not use for anything other than sunglasses. Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses holder while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the sunglasses.

LIC0016

LIC0399

SEATBACK POCKETS
The seatback pockets are located on the back of the driver and passenger seats. The pockets can be used to store maps.

SUNGLASSES HOLDER
To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

WARNING
The sunglasses case should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

2-28 Instruments and controls

LIC0400

LIC0423

LIC0402

Front

CUP HOLDERS
To open the front cup holders, push the cup holder lid. To close, lower the cup holder lid and push down until it clicks in place. The plastic cup insert may be removed for cleaning. The rear cup holders are located in the fold-down armrest in the rear seat back or in the rear center console.

Rear fold-down armrest To open the cup holders on the rear fold-down armrest, lift the cup holder lid. To close, lower the lid.

Rear center console To open the cup holders on the rear center console, push the button. The cup holder lid will open. To close, gently push the lid toward the center.

WARNING
The cup holder should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

Instruments and controls 2-29

CAUTION
Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger. Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.

CONSOLE BOX
WARNING
The center console box should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

CAUTION
This power outlet is not designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do not use accessories that exceed 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory.

LIC0403

GLOVE BOX
Open the glove box by pulling the handle. When 1 or unlocking 2 the glove box, use the locking master key. The valet key cannot be used to lock or unlock the glove box.

WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

2-30 Instruments and controls

LIC0404

LIC0405

LIC0426

Armrest
Push the button to elevate the armrest. To return armrest to regular position, hold the button in and push the armrest rearward until locked.

Console box storage

Pull up on the lever to open the console box. Remove the inside tray to store a large object. The console box may be used for storage of 1 cellular phones. Open the access hole cover to route a cord to the power socket.

REAR CENTER CONSOLE (if so equipped)

Pull up on the lever to open the console box.

Instruments and controls 2-31

LIC0406

LIC0425

COVERED STORAGE BOX

Push the bottom center of the lid to open.

CARGO NETS
The cargo nets (right, center and left) help keep packages in the cargo area from moving around while the vehicle is in motion. To install a cargo net, attach the hooks to the retainers. To remove a cargo net, detach the hooks from the retainers.

WARNING
Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. Be sure to secure hooks into the retainers. The cargo restrained in the net must not exceed 30 lbs. (13.6 kg) or the net may not stay secured.

2-32 Instruments and controls

WINDOWS POWER WINDOWS

WARNING
Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls and become trapped in a window. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents. is opened during this period of about 45 seconds, power to the windows is canceled. To open a window, push the switch and hold it down. To close a window, pull the switch and hold it up. To stop the opening or closing function at any time, simply release the switch. NOTE: The default for retained power is 45 seconds. The retained power can be disabled or adjusted to 2 minutes. See your NISSAN dealer to have the retained power adjusted.
LIC0407

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Door lock/unlock button Window lock button Front passenger side Right rear passenger side Left rear passenger side Driver side automatic switch

Drivers side power window switch

The drivers side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close all of the windows. The power windows operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position, or for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. If the drivers or passengers door

Instruments and controls 2-33

LIC0408

LIC0409

LIC0410

Front passenger power window switch

The passenger window switch operates only the corresponding passenger window. To open the 1 . To window push the switch and hold it down 2 . close the window, pull the switch up

Rear power window switch

The rear passenger window switches open or close only the corresponding passenger window. To open the window, push the switch and hold it 1 . To close the window, pull the switch up down 2 .

Automatic operation
To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation, press the window switch down (only drivers side shown) to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. The window automatically opens all the way. To stop the window, lift the switch up while the window is opening. To fully close a window equipped with automatic operation, pull the switch up to the second detent and release it; it need not be held.

Locking passengers windows

When the window lock button is depressed, only the driver side window can be opened or closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock function.

2-34 Instruments and controls

SKYVIEW ROOF (if so equipped) Auto-reverse function

The auto-reverse function can be activated when a window is closed by automatic operation and the ignition key is in the ON position or for 45 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window occurs.

SUNROOF (if so equipped)

WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window. If the control unit detects something caught in a window equipped with automatic operation as it is closing, the window will be immediately lowered.
LIC0411 LIC0412

Open or close the skyview roof shade by sliding it from side to side.

AUTOMATIC SUNROOF
The sunroof will only operate when the ignition key is in the ON position. The automatic sunroof is operational for about 45 seconds, even if the ignition key is turned to the ACC or OFF position. If the drivers door or the front passengers door is opened during this period of about 45 seconds, power to the sunroof is canceled.

Sliding the sunroof

To open the roof, slide the switch to the 1 . When the roof is tilted up, it will position automatically tilt down and then open.

Instruments and controls 2-35

To close the roof, slide the switch to the 2 . position The position of the sliding roof lid can be chosen by the position of the sliding switch. To fully open or close the roof, completely move the switch to the open or closed position.

2. After the lid has tilted up gradually, it will automatically close all the way. The sunroof will now operate normally.

When tilting down: If the control unit detects something caught in the sunroof as it tilts down, the sunroof will immediately tilt up. If the auto reverse function malfunctions and repeats opening or tilting up the sunroof, keep pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds after it happens, then the sunroof will fully close gradually. In this case, make sure nothing is caught in the sunroof.

Auto reverse function (when closing or tilting down the sunroof)

The auto reverse function can be activated when the sunroof is closed or tilted down by automatic operation when the ignition key is in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the sunroof occurs.

Tilting the sunroof

To tilt the sunroof up, push the tilt switch to 3 . When the roof is open, it the position will automatically close and then tilt up. To tilt the sunroof down, push the tilt switch to the 4 . position

Sun shade
Open and close the sun shade by sliding it forward or backward.

Restarting the sunroof sliding switch

The sliding switch will become inoperable after the battery terminal is disconnected, the electrical supply interrupted and/or some abnormality detected. Use the following reset procedure to return sunroof operation to normal. 1. Keep pushing the tilting switch toward the position.

WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window. When closing: If the control unit detects something caught in the sunroof as it moves to the front, the sunroof will immediately open backward.

WARNING
In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open sunroof. Always use seat belts and child restraints. Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the sunroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the sunroof is closing.

2-36 Instruments and controls

REAR SUN SHADE (if so equipped)

CAUTION
Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from the sunroof before opening. Do not place heavy objects on the sunroof or surrounding area.

CAUTION
To avoid personal injury, keep your hands, fingers and head away from the sun shade arm, arm rail and screen inlet port. Do not allow children near the rear sun shade system. They could be injured. Do not place objects on or near the rear sun shade. This could cause improper operation or damage it. Do not pull or push the rear sun shade. This could cause improper operation or damage it.

If the sunroof does not close

Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the sunroof.

Instruments and controls 2-37

1. 2. 3. 4.

Arm rail Screen Caution label Sun shade arms

Do not hang any object on the arm rail as this may result in improper operation or damage the screen. Do not forcefully pull the screen. Doing so may elongate the screen. Improper operation or damage to the screen may result.

The rear sun shade operates when the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position. The rear sun shade switches are located on the front and rear center consoles. To raise the screen, push the upper side of the switch. To lower the screen, push the lower side of the switch. The switch need not be held down.

CAUTION
Do not place objects (such as newspapers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the screen inlet port. Doing so may entangle these objects in the screen when it is extending or retracting, causing improper operation or damage to the screen. Do not push the sun shade arm with your hands, etc., as this may deform it. Improper operation or damage to the screen may result.
LIC0418

2-38 Instruments and controls

INTERIOR LIGHT
The lights will also go off after 30 minutes when doors are open.
3 , the When the switch is in the OFF position interior light does not illuminate, regardless of door position.

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

LIC0413

LIC0414

Without sunroof The interior light has a three-position switch and operates regardless of ignition switch position.
1 , the When the switch is in the ON position interior light illuminates, regardless of door position. The light will go off after 30 minutes unless the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position.

With sunroof Drivers door is unlocked. Lights remain on for a maximum of 30 seconds. Drivers door is opened. Lights remain on for a maximum of 30 seconds after drivers door is closed. Ignition key is removed from key cylinder. Lights remain on for a maximum of 30 seconds.
The lights will go off when the ignition key is in the ON position, or the drivers door is closed and locked.

When the switch is in the center DOOR posi2 , the front and rear personal lights will tion illuminate under the following conditions:

Instruments and controls 2-39

PERSONAL LIGHTS

LIC0416

LIC0415

LIC0417

Models without sunroof

Models with sunroof

FRONT
To turn the map lights on, press the switches. To turn them off, press the switches again.

REAR
To turn on both personal reading lights, press the 1 . To turn the lights switch to the position off, return the switch to the center position. To turn on a single personal reading light, press 2 . To turn a the switch to the position single personal reading light off, return the switch to the center position.

Console light
1 will turn on whenever the The console light headlights are illuminated. To turn the console light off while the headlights are illuminated, push the interior light switch to the OFF position.

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

2-40 Instruments and controls

TRUNK LIGHT
The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off. For bulb replacement procedures, refer to Bulb replacement in the Maintenance and do-ityourself section of this manual.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM

The interior lights illuminate when a front or rear door is opened. Once the doors are closed, these lights turn off in 30 seconds or turn off immediately when the key is turned to the ON position.

HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device. HomeLink Universal Transceiver: Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) devices such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and security systems. Is powered by your vehicles battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehicles battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink will retain all programming. Once the HomeLink Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures (i.e., new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes. For additional information refer to Programming the HomeLink Universal Transceiver later in this section.

BATTERY SAVER
If the vehicle doors are not fully closed and the interior lights remain illuminated, they eventually turn off automatically to prevent the battery from becoming discharged. Interior lights that illuminate when doors are opened turn off after approximately 30 minutes.

Instruments and controls 2-41

WARNING
Do not use the HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models manufactured after April 1, 1982). A garage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death. During the programming procedure your garage door or security gate will open and close (if the transmitter is within range). Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage door, gate, etc. that you are programming. Your vehicles engine should be turned off while programming the HomeLink Universal Transceiver.

LIC0419

LIC0420

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK
1. To begin, press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons (to clear the memory) until the indicator light blinks slowly (after 20 seconds). Release both buttons. 2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter 1-3 inches away from the HomeLink surface.

3. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button. DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has been completed.

2-42 Instruments and controls

4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator light on the HomeLink flashes, changing from a slow blink to a rapidly flashing blink. This could take up to 90 seconds. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapidly flashing light indicates successful programming. To activate the garage door or other programmed device, press and hold the programmed HomeLink button releasing when the device begins to activate. 5. If the indicator light on the HomeLink blinks rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid, HomeLink has picked up a rolling code garage door opener signal. You will need to proceed with the next steps to train the HomeLink to complete the programming which may require a ladder and another person for convenience. 6. Press and release the smart or learn program button located on the garage door openers motor to activate the training mode. This button is usually located near the antenna wire that hangs down from the motor. If the wire originates from under a light lens, you will need to remove the lens to access the program button.

NOTE: Once you have pressed and released the program button on the garage door openers motor and the training light is lit, you have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7. Use the help of a second person for convenience to assist when performing this step. 7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releasing the garage door opener program button, quickly and firmly press and release the HomeLink button youve just programmed. Press and release the HomeLink button up to 3 times to complete the training. 8. Your HomeLink button should now be programmed. (To program the remaining HomeLink buttons for additional door or gate openers, follow steps 2-8 only. NOTE: Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to clear all previously programmed HomeLink buttons). If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons, please refer to the HomeLink web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1800-647-7261).

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required handheld transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 seconds. To program your hand-held transmitter to HomeLink, continue to press and hold the HomeLink button (note step 2 - 4 under Programming HomeLink) while you press and repress (cycle) your hand-held transmitters every 2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly (indicating successful programming). NOTE: When programming a garage door opener, etc., it is advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener components.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver (once programmed) may now be used to activate the garage door, etc. To operate, simply press the appropriate programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver button. The red indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.

Instruments and controls 2-43

PROGRAMMING TROUBLEDIAGNOSIS
If the HomeLink does not quickly learn the handheld transmitter information: replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries. position the hand-held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink surface. press and hold both the HomeLink and handheld transmitter buttons without interruption. position the hand-held transmitter 1- 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the HomeLink surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink is not programmed within that time, try holding the transmitter in another position keeping the indicator light in view at all times. If you continue to have programming difficulties, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department. The phone numbers are located in the Foreword of this manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION

Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However, to clear all programming, press and hold the two outside buttons and release when the indicator light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink buttons.

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink Universal Transceiver button, complete the following. 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do not release, the button until step 4 has been completed. 2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after 20 seconds), position the hand-held transmitter 1- 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the HomeLink surface. 3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button. 4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly, release both buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the codes of any non-rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink. Consult the Owners Manual of each device or call the manufacturer or dealer of those devices for additional information. When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the HomeLink Universal Transceiver with your new transmitter information. FCC Notice: This device complies with FCC rules part 15. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference and (2) This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

2-44 Instruments and controls

This transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the device. DOC: ISTC 1763K1313 FCC I.D. CV2V67690

Instruments and controls 2-45

MEMO

2-46 Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Nissan vehicle immobilizer system (NVIS) keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Secondary trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Fuel filler cap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Telescopic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Automatic drive positioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

KEYS
from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer can duplicate it. cess, these components will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (NVIS) during registration. Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time of registration will no longer be able to start your vehicle.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (NVIS) KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using the master or valet keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in the key head. The master key can be used for all the locks.
WPD0128

The valet key cannot be used for the glove box lock or rear seatback lock. To protect belongings when you leave a key with someone, give them the valet key only. Never leave these keys in the vehicle. Additional or replacement keys: If you still have a key, the key number is not necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can duplicate your existing key. As many as five NVIS keys can be used with one vehicle. You should bring all NVIS keys that you have to your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because the registration process will erase the memory of all key codes previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. After the registration pro-

1. 2. 3. 4.

Master key (black) with transponder chip Valet key (red) with transponder chip Key number plate Transponder chip

A key number plate is supplied with your keys. Record the key number and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate. A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

DOORS Opening and closing windows

The drivers door key operation allows you to open and close windows equipped with automatic operation at the same time. To open the windows, turn the drivers door key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is unlocked. To close the windows, turn the drivers door key to the front of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is locked.

WARNING
Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out intruders. Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.
LPD0181

Drivers side

LOCKING WITH KEY

The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors at the same time.
1 of the vehicle Turning the key toward the front locks all doors. 2 of the Turning the key one time toward the rear vehicle unlocks that door. From that position, 3 (where the key can returning the key to neutral only be removed and inserted) and turning it toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks 4 . all doors

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch (driver or front passenger) is moved to the lock position with the key in the ignition and any door open, all doors will lock and unlock automatically. This helps to prevent the keys from being accidently locked inside the vehicle.

LPD0182

LPD0183

Inside lock

Door lock switch

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

To lock the door without the key, move the inside 1 , then close the lock knob to the lock position door. To unlock the door without the key, move the 2 . inside lock knob to the unlock position

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

To lock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver or front passenger side), to the 1 , then close the door. When lock position locking the door this way, be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle. To unlock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver or front passenger side) 2 . to the unlock position

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn the interior light on, and activate the panic alarm by using the keyfob from outside the vehicle. Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle before locking the doors. The keyfob can operate at a distance of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effective distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle. As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one vehicle. For information concerning the purchase and use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSAN dealer. The panic alarm will not activate when the key is in the ignition switch. If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that keyfob. This will prevent the keyfob from unauthorized use to unlock the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, please contact a NISSAN dealer.

APD1010

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle. The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors. When the lever is in the lock position, the door can be opened only from the outside.

CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the keyfob: Do not allow the keyfob to become wet. Do not drop the keyfob. Do not strike the keyfob sharply against another object. Do not place the keyfob for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140F (60C).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

button is pushed with all When the doors locked, the hazard lights flash twice and the horn beeps once as a reminder that the doors are already locked. If a door is open and you push the button, the doors will lock but the horn will not beep and the hazard lights will not flash. The horn may or may not beep. Refer to Personalized settings menu (vehicles without navigation system) or Vehicle electronic systems (vehicles with navigation system) in the Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems section later in this manual.
WPD0132 WPD0133

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Locking doors

1. Close all windows 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 3. Close the hood, trunk lid and all doors. 4. Push the button on the keyfob. All the doors lock. The hazard lights flash twice and the horn beeps once to indicate all doors are locked.

Unlocking doors
Push the button on the keyfob once. Only the drivers door unlocks. The hazard indicator flashes once if all doors are completely closed with the ignition key in any position except the ON position. The interior light turns on and the light timer activates for 30 seconds when the interior light switch is in the center DOOR position with the ignition key in any position except the ON position. Push the 5 seconds. button on the keyfob again within

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

 All doors unlock. The hazard indicator flashes once if all doors are completely closed. The interior lights can be turned off without waiting 30 seconds by inserting the key into the ignition and turning to the ON or START position, locking the doors with the keyfob or pushing the interior light switch to the OFF position.

Auto relock
When the button on the keyfob is pushed, all doors will lock automatically within 1 minute unless one of the following operations is performed: Any door is opened. A key is inserted into the ignition switch and the key is turned from OFF to ON.

WPD0134

WPD0135

Releasing the trunk lid

Push the button on the keyfob for longer than 0.5 second. The trunk release button on the keyfob will not operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The trunk lid opens. The trunk lid will open when using the keyfob even if the trunk lid release cancel switch is turned to OFF. See Trunk lid later in this section for cancel switch information.

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pushing and holding the PANIC button on the keyfob for longer than 0.5 second. The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25 seconds. The panic alarm stops when: it has run for 25 seconds, or any button is pushed on the keyfob.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

Using the interior light

The interior light can be turned off without waiting 30 seconds by inserting the key into the ignition, locking the doors with the keyfob or pushing the interior light button to OFF.

Opening windows
The keyfob allows you to open windows equipped with automatic operation simultaneously. To open the windows, press the button on the keyfob for longer than 3 seconds after the door is unlocked. The door windows will open while pressing the button on the keyfob. This opening windows function of the keyfob can be suspended using a CONSULT-II diagnostic tool. Please contact a NISSAN dealer. The door windows cannot be closed by using the keyfob.
WPD0136

BATTERY REPLACEMENT
Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:
1 2

Install a new battery with the + facing down.

Open the lid using a coin. Remove the battery.

Recommended battery: Sanyo CR2025 or equivalent.

4

Close the lid securely.

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

HOOD
5. Press the LOCK button, then the UNLOCK button two or three times to check the keyfob operation. If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement, perform step 5. An improperly disposed battery can hurt the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal. The keyfob is water-resistant; however, if it does get wet, immediately wipe completely dry. The operational range of the keyfob extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. This range may vary with conditions. FCC Notice: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

LPD0184 1

Pull the hood lock release handle located below the driver side instrument panel. The hood will spring up slightly. Push the lever at the front of the hood to the side as illustrated with your fingertips and raise the hood.

WARNING
Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident. If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood.

When closing the hood, lower it slowly and make sure it locks into place.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

TRUNK LID
Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent childrens access to car keys. The trunk lid opener lever is located below the armrest of the drivers door trim panel. To open the trunk lid, pull the opener lever out. To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk lid down securely.

LPD0185

LPD0186

Drivers side

OPENER OPERATION
WARNING
Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See Exhaust gas in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Cancel switch
When the cancel switch located inside the glove box is OFF, the trunk lid cannot be opened with the trunk lid release switch. It can be opened with the keyfob.

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD0200

LPD0201

LPD0187

Rear seat without center console

Rear seat with center console

SECONDARY TRUNK LID RELEASE

To open the trunk lid from the rear seat, fold down the rear seat or trunk compartment access lid (for models with rear console), and pull the rear seat trunk release handle. To close, push the trunk lid down securely.

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

WARNING
Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent childrens access to car keys. The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become locked inside the trunk.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

FUEL FILLER LID

To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illuminated release handle until the lock releases and push up on the trunk lid. The release handle is made of a material that glows in the dark after a brief exposure to ambient light. The handle is located inside the trunk compartment on the interior of the trunk lid.

LPD0188

LPD0189

OPENER OPERATION
The fuel filler lid release is located on drivers door. To open the fuel filler lid, push the release. To lock, close the fuel filler lid securely.

FUEL FILLER CAP

The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are heard.
1 while Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder refueling.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING
Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling. Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the cap a third turn, and wait for any hissing sound to stop to prevent fuel from spraying out and possibly causing personal injury. Then remove the cap. Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. Use only an original equipment type fuel filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It could also cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on. Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle.

Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers: Always place the container on the ground when filling. Do not use electronic devices when filling. Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are filling it. Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION
If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage. Tighten until the fuel filler cap clicks. Failure to tighten the fuel filler cap properly may cause the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to illuminate. If the lamp illuminates because the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The lamp should turn off after a lamp few driving trips. If the does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see the Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) in the Instruments and Controls section earlier in this manual.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

STEERING WHEEL
models equipped with automatic transmission. This lets the driver get into and out of the seat more easily.

TELESCOPIC OPERATION Manual

Push the lever down and adjust the steering wheel forward or backward to the desired position. Pull the lock lever up firmly to lock the steering wheel in place.
LPD0190 LPD0191

WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort. The drivers air bag inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel. Always use the seat belts.

Manual

Power

TILT OPERATION Manual

Pull the lock lever forward and adjust the steering wheel up or down to the desired position. Push the lock lever back to lock the steering wheel in place.

Power (if so equipped)

Push the lever to adjust the steering wheel up or down to the desired position.

WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. Entry/Exit function The automatic drive positioner system will make the steering wheel move up automatically on

WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SUN VISORS Power (if so equipped)

Push the lever to adjust the steering wheel forward or backward to the desired position.
1 2 3 4

To block glare from the front, swing down the main sun visor. To block glare from the side, remove the main sun visor from the center mount and swing the visor to the side. To block glare from the side and front, swing down the sub-sun visor. Slide the sun visor extension in or out as needed.

WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort. The drivers air bag inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel. Always use the seat belts.

CAUTION
Do not store the sun visor before returning it to its original position. Store the main sun visor after storing the extension sun visor and sub-sun visor. Do not pull the extension sun visor forcedly downward.

LPD0192

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

MIRRORS

LPD0193

LPD0194

LPD0195

VANITY MIRRORS
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor down and flip open the mirror cover. The vanity mirror will illuminate when the mirror cover is open.

Without compass With compass

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE INSIDE MIRROR

WARNING
Use automatic anti-glare only when necessary because it reduces rear view clarity. The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically changes reflection according to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

When the inside MIRROR or AUTO switch is in 1 will illumithe ON position, the indicator light nate and excessive glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind you will be reduced. When the switch of the inside mirror is in the OFF position, the inside mirror will operate normally. For information on HomeLink Universal Transceiver operation, see the HomeLink Universal Transceiver in the Instrument and controls section of this manual. For information on the compass display (if so equipped), see Compass display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.
SPA1449

WARNING
Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror remote control will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. Move the switch to select the right or left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

function. Press the switch again to deactivate, or the heating function will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.

MPA0008

LPD0196

Manual folding outside mirrors (if so equipped)

Push the mirrors backward to fold them.

Power folding outside mirrors (if so equipped)

CAUTION
Do not manually fold the power folding mirrors. Manually folding the mirrors can damage the mirrors. Press the switch to open or close the mirrors.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)

The electric control type outside mirrors (if so equipped) can be heated to defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. Press the rear window defogger switch to activate the heating

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if so equipped) AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER OPERATION

This system is designed so that the drivers seat, steering column and outside mirrors will automatically move when the automatic transmission selector lever is in the P (Park) position. This allows the driver to get into and out of the drivers seat more easily. (This feature is not available on models equipped with manual transmission.) The drivers seat will slide backward and the steering wheel will move up: When the key is removed from the ignition switch. When the drivers door is opened with the key turned to LOCK. When the key is turned from ACC to LOCK with the drivers door open while the automatic transmission selector lever is in the P (Park) position. The drivers seat and steering wheel will return to previous position: When the key is inserted into the ignition switch. When the drivers door is closed with the key turned to LOCK.
LPD0197

When the key is turned from ACC to ON while the automatic transmission selector lever is in the P (Park) position.

Procedure for storing memory

Two positions can be stored in the automatic drive positioner memory. Follow these procedures to use the memory system.

1. Set the automatic transmission selector lever to the P (Park) position. 2. Turn the ignition ON. 3. Adjust the drivers seat, steering column and outside mirrors to the desired positions by manually operating each adjusting switch. For additional information, see Seats in the SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental air bags section and Steering wheel and Outside mirrors earlier in this section. During this step, do not turn the ignition to any positions other than ON.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1 second. The indicator light for the pushed memory switch will come on and stay on for approximately 5 seconds after pushing the switch. After the indicator light goes off, the selected positions are stored in the selected memory (1 or 2). If memory is stored in the same memory switch, the previous memory will be deleted.

2. Reset the desired position using the previous procedure.

when the memory switch (1 or 2) is not pushed for at least 1 second. when the seat has been already moved to the memorized position. when no seat position is stored in the memory switch. The automatic drive positioner system can be adjusted and canceled. See Vehicle electronic systems in the Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems section of this manual.

Selecting the memorized position

1. Set the automatic transmission selector lever to the P (Park) position. 2. Turn the ignition ON. 3. Push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1 second. The drivers seat, steering column and outside mirrors will move to the memorized position with the indicator light flashing, and then the light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds.

Confirming memory storage

Turn the ignition ON and push the SET switch. If the main memory has not been stored, the indicator light will come on for approximately 0.5 seconds. When the memory has stored the position, the indicator light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse blows, the memory will be canceled. In such a case, reset the desired positions using the following procedures. 1. Open and close the drivers door more than two times with the ignition key in the LOCK position.

System operation
The automatic drive positioner system will not work or will stop operating under the following conditions: when the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7 km/h). when any two or more of the memory switches are simultaneously pushed while the automatic drive positioner is operating. when the adjusting switch for the drivers seat is turned on while the automatic drive positioner is operating.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Control panel buttons without navigation system. . . . 4-2 Names of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 How to use JOYSTICK and ENTER button . . . . . . . 4-3 How to use PREV button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 How to use TRIP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 How to use FUEL ECON button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 How to use E/M button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 How to use (maintenance) button . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 How to use the SETTING button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Control panel buttons with navigation system. . . . . . . 4-7 Names of the components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 How to use joystick and ENTER button . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 How to use PREV button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Setting up the start-up screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 How to use the TRIP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 How to use the SETTING button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Heater and air conditioner (automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Satellite radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 FM-AM-SAT radio with cassette player and compact disc (CD) player (Type A)/CD changer (Type B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 Steering wheel switch for audio control . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM

WARNING
Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls and display controls should not be done while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation. Do not disassemble or modify this system. If you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electrical shock. Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack of sound. Continued use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock. In case you notice any foreign object in the system hardware, spill liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell coming from it, stop using the system immediately and contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire or electrical shock. When you use this system, make sure the engine is running. If you use the system with the engine not running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long time, it will use up all the battery power, and the engine will not start. Reference symbols: ENTER button This is a button on the control panel.

LHA0249

4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Display key This is a select key on the screen. By selecting this key you can proceed to the next function.

HOW TO USE JOYSTICK AND ENTER BUTTON

Choose an item on the display using the joystick. Push the ENTER button only when the use of it is instructed on the display.

NAMES OF COMPONENTS
1. brightness control button (P. 4-6) 2. PREV (previous) button (P. 4-3) 3. Joystick and ENTER push button (P. 4-3) 4. SETTING button (P. 4-5) 5. (maintenance) button (P. 4-5) 6. TRIP drive computer button (P. 4-3) 7. FUEL ECON button (P. 4-4) 8. TRIP RESET button (P. 4-3) 9. E/M (English/metric) button (P. 4-4) 10. Clock adjust button (hours) (P. 4-4) 11. Clock adjust button (minutes) (P. 4-4) To turn off the screen, push the button for more than approximately 1.5 seconds. The screen will change to CONFIRM DISPLAY OFF YES or NO.

HOW TO USE PREV BUTTON

Finish setup: If you touch PREV button after the setup is completed, the setup will start over.

LHA0252

HOW TO USE TRIP BUTTON

When the TRIP button is pushed, the following modes will display on the screen. TRIP 1 (TIME, DIST, AVG) TRIP 2 (TIME, DIST, AVG) OFF TRIP 1 and TRIP 2 record journey time (TIME max 99 hours 59 minutes), trip odometer (DIST mile or km) and average speed (AVG MPH or km/h). To reset the TRIP 1 or TRIP 2, push the TRIP button or the TRIP RESET button for more than approximately 1.5 seconds.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-3

The display is updated every 30 seconds. For approximately the first 30 seconds and 1/3 miles (500 m) after a reset or connecting the battery cables, the display will show (----).

CLOCK
The digital clock displays time when the ignition key is in ACC or ON. If the power supply is disconnected, the clock will not indicate the correct time. Readjust the time.

Distance to empty (dte mile or km)

The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling. The dte is constantly being calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display is updated every 30 seconds.
LHA0253

Adjusting the time

To adjust the time, push the H or M button for more than approximately 1.5 seconds. The time indicator will flash. Touch the H button to adjust the hour. Touch the M button to adjust the minute. To finish the adjusting, press the PREV button or the screen will return to normal after 10 seconds.

When the fuel level is low, the dte display will change to (*). NOTE: If the amount of fuel added while the ignition switch is OFF is small, the display just before the ignition switch is turned OFF may continue to be displayed. When driving uphill or rounding curves, the fuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarily change the display.

HOW TO USE FUEL ECON BUTTON

The average fuel consumption (MPG or L/100 km) and the distance to empty (dte mi or km) will appear on the screen when the FUEL ECON button is pushed.

HOW TO USE E/M BUTTON

You can change the unit as follows using the E/M (English/Metric) button. Unit: US mile, F, MPG Metric km, C, L/100 km

Average fuel consumption (MPG or L/100 km)

The average fuel consumption mode shows the average fuel consumption since the last reset. Resetting is done by pressing the TRIP RESET or FUEL ECON button for more than approximately 1.5 seconds.

4-4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

HOW TO USE THE SETTING BUTTON

Pushing the SETTING button will change the settings menu as follows: DISPLAY ON/OFF LANGUAGE BEEP SET SERVICE ALERT PERSONALIZED SETTINGS MENU
LHA0250

Beep set
If the beep set OFF key is selected using the joystick, the beep sound will not operate (except some caution beep sounds).

Service alert
If the service alert ON key is selected, the information will be displayed when the engine oil and the tire rotation periods reach the preset driving distance.

Personalized settings menu

You can set the following electronic systems operating conditions using the joystick. Remote unlock door logic: This option allows you to select which doors will unlock first during an unlocking operation: Only the drivers door All the doors Horn chirp with remote: This option allows you to select the horn chirp mode that occurs when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob is pressed. Lamps flash with remote: This option allows you to select the hazard indicator flash mode that occurs when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob is pressed.

Display ON/OFF
To turn off the screen, select the OFF key of the Display ON/OFF using the joystick. The screen will change to CONFIRM DISPLAY OFF YES or NO. If YES key is selected using the joystick, the screen will turn off after a 2 beep sound and approximately 1 second. To turn on the screen, push the SETTING , trip control, air conditioner (except rear window defogger button) or audio button.

HOW TO USE BUTTON

(maintenance)

Pushing the button will change the maintenance menu as follows: ENGINE OIL TIRE ROTATION To reset the driving distance, push the button or TRIP RESET button for more than approximately 1.5 seconds. To set the distance, push the joystick to left or right.

Language
The language can be changed to English or Franais using the joystick.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-5

Auto relock time: This option allows you to set the length of time before the doors lock with the auto re-lock function. Auto headlamp sensitivity: This option allows you to set the sensitivity of the autolights. Auto headlamp off delay: This option allows you to select the length of time before the autolights turn off. Speed sensing wiper interval: This option allows you to turn on or turn off the driving speed dependent intermittent wiper function. Confirm reset settings: This option allows you to reset all options to their default settings.

If no operation is done within 10 seconds, or if the PREV button is pushed, the display will return to the previous display.

BUTTON
To change the display brightness, push the button. Pushing the button again will change the display to DAY or NIGHT display. Then, adjust the brightness moving the joystick right or left.

4-6 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Display key This is a select key on the screen. By selecting this key you can proceed to the next function.

NAMES OF THE COMPONENTS

1. brightness control button (P. 4-14) 2. PREV (previous) button (P. 4-8) 3. Joystick and ENTER push button (P. 4-8) 4. SETTING button (P. 4-10) 5. TRIP drive computer button (P. 4-8) 6. DEST button* 7. MAP button* 8. Zoom out button* 9. Zoom in button* 10. ROUTE button* 11. GUIDE VOICE button*
LHA0254

When you use this system, make sure the engine is running. If you use the system with the engine not running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long time, it will use up all the battery power, and the engine will not start.

Reference symbols: ENTER button This is a button on the control panel.

*For Navigation system control buttons, refer to the separate Navigation System Owners Manual.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-7

HOW TO USE JOYSTICK AND ENTER BUTTON

Choose an item on the display using the joystick and push the ENTER button for operation.

If you do not touch the button or screen key for more than 1 minute on the TRIP, SETTING or START-UP screen, the screen will change to TRIP screen automatically. To proceed to the next step, refer to the separate Navigation System Owners Manual.

HOW TO USE PREV BUTTON

This button has two functions. Go back to the previous display (cancel). If you touch PREV button during setup, the setup will be canceled and/or the display will return to the previous screen. Finish setup. If you touch this button after the setup is completed, the setup will start over, and the display will return to the climate control or audio mode and Navigation screen.

LHA0263

HOW TO USE THE TRIP BUTTON

When the TRIP button is pushed, the following modes will display on the screen. Warning message (if there are any) TRIP 1 (Elapsed Time, Driving Distance, Average Speed) TRIP 2 FUEL ECONOMY (Average Fuel Economy, Distance to Empty) MAINTENANCE (Engine Oil, Tire Rotation) OFF.

SETTING UP THE START-UP SCREEN

When you turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, the SYSTEM START-UP warning is displayed on the screen. Read the warning and select the I AGREE (English) or ENTER (Franais) key then push the ENTER button. If you do not push the ENTER button, the Navigation system will not proceed to the next step display.

4-8 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

LHA0264

LHA0265

LHA0266

Trip 1, trip 2 and fuel economy items

To reset the TRIP 1, TRIP 2 and FUEL ECONOMY, select the RESET key using the joystick and push the ENTER button or push the TRIP button for more than approximately 1.5 seconds.

Maintenance items
You can set the engine oil and the tire rotation interval. To display the setting of the maintenance interval, select the Engine Oil or Tire Rotation key using the joystick and push the ENTER button.

To set the maintenance interval, select the Maintenance Schedule key by using the joystick and push the joystick to right or left. To reset the maintenance interval, select the Reset key using the joystick and push the ENTER button. To display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automatically when set trip distance is reached, select the Display Maintenance Notification key and push the ENTER button.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-9

and push the ENTER button. You can then use the joystick to adjust the brightness to Darker or Brighter and the contrast to Lower or Higher. For information on Map Background, please refer to the separate Navigation System Owners Manual. Display Off: To turn off the screen, push the SETTING button and select the Display key and Display Off key. The indicator of the Display Off will turn to amber. When any mode button is pushed with the screen off, the screen turns on for further operation. The screen will turn off automatically 5 seconds after the operation is finished on the map display in the Audio, HVAC (Heater and air conditioner), SETTING or VEHICLE INFO modes. To turn on the screen, push the SETTING button and select the Display key and Display Off key, then set the screen to on by pushing the ENTER button. Setting Audio or HVAC display: Choose the Audio or HVAC (Heater and air conditioner) key to be displayed at the bottom, by using the joystick. The audio or HVAC setting condition will normally appear on the screen. To return to the setting screen, push the SETTING button or PREV button.

LHA0267

LHA0268

HOW TO USE THE SETTING BUTTON

The SETTING screen will appear when the SETTING button is pushed.

Display settings
The DISPLAY SETTINGS screen will appear after pushing the SETTING button, selecting Display key and pushing the ENTER button. Brightness/Contrast/Map Background: To adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen, select the Brightness/contrast key

4-10 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

LHA0259

LHA0260

LHA0261

Vehicle electronic systems

The VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS screen will appear when selecting the Vehicle Electronic Systems key with the joystick and pushing the ENTER button. To set the various electronic systems operating conditions, select the applicable item using the joystick, and push the ENTER button. The indicator light alternately turns on and off each time the ENTER button is pressed. Indicator light is illuminated ON Indicator light is not illuminated OFF

Adjust driver seat when exiting vehicle (automatic transmission only): With this option ON, the drivers seat automatically moves back and returns to the original position for ease of exit and entry. Lift steering column when exiting vehicle (automatic transmission only): With this option ON, the steering column automatically tilts up and returns to the original position for ease of exit and entry. Remote unlock drivers door first: This option allows you to select which doors will unlock first during an unlocking operation:

Only the drivers door All the doors Keyless remote response horn: This key allows you to change the horn chirp mode that occurs when pressing the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob. Keyless remote response lights: This key allows you to change the hazard indicator flash mode that occurs when pressing the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob. Auto re-lock time: This key allows you to set the length of time before doors auto re-lock.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-11

Sensitivity of automatic headlights: This key allows you to set the sensitivity of the autolights. Automatic headlights off delay: This key allows you to set the length of time before the autolights turn off. Speed dependent wiper: This key allows you to turn on or turn off the driving speed dependent intermittent wiper function. Return all settings to default: When this key is selected and turned on using the ENTER button, all settings made by VEHICLE ELECTRONICS will return to the default settings.
LHA0262 LHA0270

System settings
Language/Unit The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear when selecting the Language/Unit key and pushing the ENTER button. Language: English or French Unit: US mile, F, MPG Metric km, C, L/100 km You can select the language and unit using the joystick and ENTER button.

Clock Adjusting the time: Select the Hours or Minutes key and move the joystick to the right or left to adjust the time. The time will change step by step. After completion of the setting, press the PREV button.

4-12 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

LHA0271

LHA0272

LHA0273

Setting daylight savings time: Use the Daylight Saving Time key to adjust the clock to daylight savings time. ON: The displayed time advances by 1 hour. OFF: The current time is displayed.

Adjusting the time to the GPS: Select the Auto Adjust key. The time will be reset to the GPS time.

Selecting the time zone: 1. Select the Select Time Zone key. The [TIME ZONE] screen will appear.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-13

VENTILATORS
The GPS time (manual time) corresponding to the selected zone will be displayed. Pacific zone has been set as the initial (default) setting. Beep setting With this option ON, a beep will sound if any audio button is pushed.

BUTTON
To change the display brightness, push the button. Pushing the button again will change the display to DAY or NIGHT display. Then, adjust the brightness moving the joystick right or left.
LHA0274

2. Select one of the following zones depending on the current location. Pacific zone Mountain zone Central zone Eastern zone Atlantic zone Newfoundland zone After selection, the [CLOCK SETTINGS] screen will appear.

If no operation is done within 10 seconds, or if the PREV button is pushed, the display will return to the previous display.

LHA0255

Center Adjust air flow direction by moving the ventilator slides. Open or close the ventilators by using the dial. Move the dial toward the hollow circle to open the ventilators or toward the solid circle to close them.

4-14 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

LHA0257

LHA0258

Side

Rear

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-15

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (automatic)

Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. Positioning of the heater and/or air conditioner controls should not be done while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION
LHA0247

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Temperature control button (driver side) AUTO climate control ON button (fresh air) button (front defroster) button A/C (air conditioner) ON/OFF button (fan speed control) button MODE (manual air flow control) button Temperature control button (passenger side) 9. DUAL (passenger side temperature control) ON/OFF button 10. Rear window defroster switch 11. Air recirculation button

12.

OFF button for climate control system WARNING

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO)

This mode may be used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically. 1. Push the AUTO button on. (AUTO will be displayed.) 2. Push the temperature control button up or down to set the desired temperature. Adjust the temperature display to about 75 F (24 C) for normal operation. The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow

The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. Do not leave children, impaired adults, or pets alone in your vehicle. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.

4-16 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically. 3. You can individually set driver and front passenger side temperature using each temperature control button. When the DUAL button or passenger side temperature button is pushed, the DUAL indicator will come on. To turn off the passenger side temperature control, push the DUAL button.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Push the defroster button on. The indicator light on the button will come on. 2. Push the temperature control button up or down to set the desired temperature. To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows, set the fan speed to maximum. As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, push the AUTO button to return to the automatic mode. When the front defroster button is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 23F (5C). The air conditioning system will continue to operate until the fan control dial is turned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off, even if the air flow control button is used to select a position other than position. This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield. The air recirculate mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance.

MANUAL OPERATION Fan speed control

Push the fan control button control the fan speed. to manually

Push the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.

Air recirculation
Push the air recirculation button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator light on the button will come on. The air recirculation cannot be activated when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting mode.

Heating (A/C OFF)

The air conditioner does not activate. When you need to heat only, use this mode. 1. Push the A/C button. (A/C OFF will be displayed and A/C indicator will turn off.) 2. Push the temperature control button up or down to set the desired temperature. The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically. Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature. Otherwise the system may not work properly. Not recommended if windows fog up.

Fresh air
Push the button to draw outside air into the passenger compartment. The indicator light on the button will come on.

Automatic intake air control

In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be controlled automatically. To manually control the intake air, push the air recirculate or fresh air button. To return to the automatic control mode, push the same button for about 2 seconds. The indicator lights (both air recirculate and fresh air buttons) will flash twice, and then the intake air will be controlled automatically.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-17

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER Air flow control

Pushing the MODE (manual air flow control) button selects the air outlet to: The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind. This refrigerant does not harm the earths ozone layer. Special charging equipment and lubricant is required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system. See Air conditioner system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual.
WHA0209

Air flows from center and side ventilators. Air flows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets. Air flows mainly from foot outlets. Air flows from defroster outlets and foot outlets.

To turn system off

Push the OFF button.

OPERATING TIPS
When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature warms up, air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally.
0

The sunload sensor, located on the top passenger side of the instrument panel, helps the system maintain a constant temperature. Do not put anything on or around this sensor.

A NISSAN dealer is able to service your environmentally friendly air conditioning system.

WARNING
The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced technician with proper equipment.

4-18 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

AUDIO SYSTEM RADIO

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position and press the power on switch to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, the key should be turned to the ACC position. Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other external influences. Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences. Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may influence radio reception quality. Reception conditions will constantly change because of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain, signal distance and interference from other vehicles can work against ideal reception. Described below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception. Multipath reception: Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time. The signals may cancel each other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.

FM RADIO RECEPTION
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 - 30 miles (40 - 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM having slightly more range than stereo FM. External influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is within 25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same characteristics as light. For example they will reflect off objects. Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade and/or drift. Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to antenna position (usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter) static or flutter can be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the treble control to reduce treble response.

AM RADIO RECEPTION
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can bend around objects and skip along the ground. In addition, the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of these characteristics, AM signals are also subject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver. Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings. It can also occur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist. Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

Radio reception
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance radio reception. These circuits are designed to extend reception range, and to enhance the quality of that reception. However there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even when the finest equipment is used. These characteristics are completely normal in a given reception area, and do not indicate any malfunction in your NISSAN radio system.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-19

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION

When the satellite radio is first installed or the battery has been replaced, the satellite radio may not work properly. This is not a malfunction. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or large building for satellite radio to receive all of the necessary data. No satellite radio reception is available and NO SAT will be displayed when the SAT button is pressed unless optional satellite receiver and antenna were factory installed (late availability only/retrofit unavailable), and an XM or SIRIUS satellite radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio performance may be effected if cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio signal. If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite antenna.
LHA0099

Cassette tapes should be removed from the player when not in use. Store cassettes in their protective cases and away from direct sunlight, heat, dust, moisture and magnetic sources. Direct sunlight can cause the cassette to become deformed. The use of deformed cassettes may cause the cassette to jam in the player. Do not use cassettes with labels which are peeling and loose. If used, the label could jam in the player. If a cassette has loose tape, insert a pencil through one of the cassette hubs and rewind the tape firmly around the hubs. Loose tape may cause tape jamming and wavering sound quality. Over a period of time, the playback head, capstan and pinch roller may collect a tape coating residue as the tape is played. This residue accumulation can cause weak or wavering sound, and should be removed periodically with a head cleaning tape. If the residue is not removed periodically, the player may need to be disassembled for cleaning.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS Cassette player

To maintain good quality sound, NISSAN recommends using cassette tapes of 60 minutes or shorter in length.

4-20 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Compact disc (CD) player

Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm) round discs that have the COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO logo on the disc or packaging. During cold weather or rainy days, the player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely. The player may skip while driving on rough roads. The CD player sometimes cannot function when the compartment temperature is extremely high. Decrease the temperature before use. Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight. CDs that are of poor quality, dirty, scratched, covered with fingerprints, or that have pin holes may not work properly. The following CDs may not work properly: Copy control compact discs (CCCD) Recordable compact discs (CD-R) Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

Do not use the following CDs as they may cause the CD player to malfunction: 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter CDs that are not round CDs with a paper label CDs that are warped, scratched, or have abnormal edges

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-21

10. TAPE play/side select button 11. SAT (satellite) radio select button* 12. Tuning and AUDIO control knob (BASS, TREBLE, FADE and BALANCE) 13. CD insert slot 14. CD eject button 15. Cassette tape insert slot 16. Cassette tape eject button *No satellite radio reception is available and NO SAT will be displayed when the SAT button is pressed unless optional satellite receiver and antenna were factory installed (late availability only/retrofit unavailable), and an XM or SIRIUS satellite radio service subscription is active.

LHA0304

Type A

1. 2. 3. 4.

SEEK/APS REW, APS FF/TRACK change button TUNE/REW FF button PAUSE/MUTE button PROG/RPT button

5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

ONOFF/VOLUME control knob PRESET A-B-C select button Station select buttons (1 - 6) FM-AM band select button CD play button

4-22 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

10. TAPE play/side select button 11. SAT (satellite) radio select button* 12. Tuning and AUDIO control knob (BASS, TREBLE, FADE and BALANCE, SSV and NR (Dolby)) 13. CD load button 14. CD insert slot 15. CD eject button 16. Cassette tape insert slot 17. Cassette tape eject button *No satellite radio reception is available and NO SAT will be displayed when the SAT button is pressed unless optional satellite receiver and antenna were factory installed (late availability only/retrofit unavailable), and an XM or SIRIUS satellite radio service subscription is active.
LHA0248

Type B

1. 2. 3. 4.

SEEK/APS REW, APS FF/TRACK change button TUNE/REW FF button PAUSE/MUTE button PROG/RPT button

5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

ONOFF/VOLUME control knob PRESET A-B-C select button Station and CD select buttons (1 - 6) FM-AM band select button CD play button Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-23

FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH CASSETTE PLAYER AND COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type A)/CD CHANGER (Type B)
No satellite radio reception is available and NO SAT will be displayed when the SAT button is pressed unless optional satellite receiver and antenna were factory installed (late availability only/retrofit unavailable), and an XM or SIRIUS satellite radio service subscription is active.

Turn the ONOFF/Volume control knob to adjust the volume. This vehicle has speed sensitive control volume (SSV) for audio (type B only) . The audio volume changes as the driving speed changes. AUDIO knob (BASS, TREBLE, FADE, BALANCE, (SSV and NR (Dolby) Type B only)): Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode as follows: BASS TREBLE FADE BALANCE SSV (Type B only) NR (when cassette playing, Type B only) To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, press the AUDIO knob until the desired mode appears in the display. Turn the Tuning knob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. You can also use the Tuning knob to adjust Fader and Balance modes. Fader adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers. To change the SSV mode (Type B only) to OFF, LOW, MID or HIGH, turn the Tuning knob to right or left.

To change the NR (Dolby) mode to OFF or ON, turn the Tuning knob to right or left while cassette tape is playing. When Dolby is ON, the mark is displayed. Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby NR and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatedly until the radio, cassette tape or CD display reappears. Otherwise, the radio, cassette tape or CD display will automatically reappear after about 10 seconds. Display CD text: To change the text displayed while playing a CD, press the AUDIO knob until Display Mode appears. Turn the Tuning knob within 2 seconds. The text will change as follows: Track number Track title Disc title Track number Display satellite radio text: To change the text displayed while listening to satellite radio, press the AUDIO knob until Display Mode appears.

Audio main operation

The tape deck employs a permalloy head which allows for improved reproduction of high frequency ranges. Noise is also greatly reduced by the combined use of the Dolby NR (Noise Reduction) system. The auto loudness circuit enhances the low frequency range automatically in both radio reception and tape and CD playback. ONOFF/Volume control: Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then push the ONOFF/Volume control knob while the system is off to call up the mode (radio, tape or CD) which was playing immediately before the system was turned off. To turn the system off, press the ONOFF/Volume control knob.

4-24 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Turn the Tuning knob within 2 seconds. The text will change as follows: Channel number Channel name Artist Title Channel number Pause/mute button: To mute or pause the audio sound, push the PAUSE/MUTE button. To release the mute or pause, push the button again.

only/retrofit unavailable), and an XM or SIRIUS satellite radio service subscription is active. If a compact disc or tape is playing when the FM-AM or SAT radio select button is pushed, the compact disc or tape will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on. The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception. TUNE (Tuning):

SEEK tuning: Push the SEEK button ( or ) for less than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to low or low to high frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station. SCAN tuning: Push the or button for more than 1.5 seconds to stop at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again during this 5 seconds period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station. If or button is not pushed within 5 the seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station. Station memory operations: 18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT radio to the A, B and C preset button. 1. Choose preset channel A, B or C using the preset select button. 2. Tune to the desired station using manual, SEEk or SCAN tuning. Push and hold any of the desired station memory buttons (1 - 6) until a beep sound is heard. (The radio mutes when the select button is pushed.) 3. The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume. Memorizing is now complete.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM/AM/SAT radio select: Pushing the FM-AM or SAT radio select button will change the band as follows: AM FM or SAT (Satellite) When FM-AM or SAT radio select button is pushed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON, the radio will come on at the station last played. The last station played will also come on when the ONOFF/Volume control knob is depressed to ON. No satellite radio reception is available and NO SAT will be displayed when the SAT button is pressed unless optional satellite receiver and antenna were factory installed (late availability

WARNING
The radio should not be tuned while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. To manually tune the radio, push the TUNE button ( or ) or turn the tuning knob to right or left. To move quickly through the channels, hold either the or button down for more than 1.5 seconds.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-25

4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse blows, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations. Radio data system (RDS) (if so equipped): RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data information service transmitted by some radio stations on the FM band (not AM band) and/or SAT radio encoded within a regular radio broadcast. Currently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but many stations are now considering broadcasting RDS data. RDS can display: Station call sign, such as WHFR 98.3. Station name, such as The Groove. Music or programming type such as Classical, Country, or Rock. Traffic reports about delays or construction. If the station broadcasts RDS information, the RDS icon is displayed.

Program type (PTY): PTY can be used to search for a certain program type. Certain areas have a limited number of stations that transmit RDS. Many stations transmit call letters and frequencies only. Searching or scanning by program type may yield a limited number of selections. When PROG/RPT button is pressed for more than 1.5 seconds during FM or SAT mode, the PTY name of the current tuned station is displayed. During this time if the PTY data code is zero or the data is unreadable, the display will show NONE. To change the PTY: 1. Press the PROG/RPT button.

LHA0275

2. Press the TUNE button ( or ) to chose a specific program type. Refer to the illustration. The display will show SEEK, SCAN?

4-26 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

SEEK tuning: 3. After selecting a program type, push the SEEK button ( or ) for less than 1.5 seconds within 10 seconds. Tuning to the PTY station will start. If you do not push the SEEK button within the 10 second period, the PTY mode will be canceled. SCAN tuning: 4. Push the or button for more than 1.5 seconds to scan the PTY name stations and stop at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again during this 5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station. If the or button is not pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station.

WARNING
Do not force the cassette tape into the tape door. This could damage the player. If the system is turned off by pushing the ONOFF/VOL control knob with the cassette tape still in the player, the tape will resume playing when the system is turned back on. PLAY: When the TAPE button is pushed with the system turned off and a tape already loaded, the system will come on and the tape will play. When the TAPE button is pushed with either the radio or compact disc turned on and a tape already loaded, the compact disc or the radio will automatically be turned off and the tape will play. When the TAPE button is pushed with a TAPE playing, the tape will play the program recorded on the reverse side. REW (Rewind), FF (Fast Forward): Push the (rewind) button to rewind the tape. Push the (fast forward) button to fast forward the tape. Either the REW or FF symbol illuminates on the display window. To stop the

(rewind) REW or FF function, press the or (fast forward) again, or press the TAPE button. APS (Automatic Program Search) REW, APS FF: When the (APS REW) button is pushed once for less than 1.5 seconds while a tape is playing, the program being played will start over (APS REW) from the beginning. Push the button several times to skip back several selections. The tape will go back the number of times the button is pushed. When the (APS FF) button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while a tape is playing, the next program will start to play from the beginning. Push the (APS FF) button several times to skip through programs. The tape will advance the number of times the button is pushed (up to 9 programs). Either the REW or FF symbol flashes on the display window while searching for the selection. When pushing the (APS REW) or (APS FF) button for more than 1.5 seconds, each program will play for about 10 seconds. To stop playing, push the button again. This system searches for the blank intervals between selections. If there is a blank interval within

Cassette tape player operation

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, then lightly insert the cassette tape into the tape door. The cassette tape will be automatically pulled into the player. The radio or CD will turn off (if it is on) and the cassette tape will begin to play.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-27

a program or there is no interval between programs, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location. REPEAT (RPT): When the PROG/RPT play button is pushed while the tape is played, the tape program play is repeated. To stop the repeat play, push the PROG/RPT play button again. Metal or chrome tape usage: The cassette player will be automatically set to high performance play when playing a metal or chrome cassette tape. TAPE EJECT: When button is pushed with a tape loaded, the tape will be ejected. When a tape is ejected while it is being played, the system will be turned off.

Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed could damage the CD and/or CD changer. Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up. The compact disc will be guided automatically into the slot and start playing. If the radio or tape is already operating, it will automatically turn off and the compact disc will play. If the system has been turned off while the compact disc was playing, pushing the ONOFF/VOL control knob will start the compact disc. 3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discs can also be used without an adapter. CD button: When the CD button is pushed with the system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play. When the CD button is pushed with the compact disc loaded but the tape or the radio playing, the tape or radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play.

REW (Rewind), FF (Fast Forward): When the (rewind) button or (fast forward) is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will play while rewinding or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the compact disc will return to normal play speed. SEEK/TRACK: When the button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, the track being played returns to its beginning. Push several times to skip back through tracks. The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pushed. When the button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, the next track will start to play from its beginning. Push several times to skip through tracks. The compact disc will advance the number of times the button is pushed. (When the last track on the compact disc is skipped through, the first track will be played.) When the or button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds, each track will play for about 10 seconds. To stop playing, push the button.

Compact disc (CD) player operation (Type A)

CAUTION
Do not force the compact disc into the slot. This could damage the player.

4-28 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

REPEAT (RPT): When the PROG/RPT button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the play pattern can be changed as follows: ALL DISC RPT 1 TRACK RPT 1 DISC RDM ALL DISC RPT ALL DISC RPT: the entire disk will be repeated 1 TRACK RPT: the current track will be repeated 1 DISC RDM: all tracks will be played randomly CD EJECT: When the button is pushed with the compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be ejected. When button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will eject and the system will turn off. If the compact disc ejects and is not removed, it will be pulled back into the slot to protect it (except 3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discs). CD IN indicator: CD IN indicator appears on the display when the CD is loaded with the system on.

Compact disc (CD) changer operation (Type B)

CAUTION
Do not force a compact disc into the CD insert slot. This could damage the CD and/or CD changer/player. Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed could damage the CD and/or CD changer. Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up. The compact disc will be guided automatically into the slot and start playing. To insert the disc, first push the LOAD button. If the radio or tape is already operating, it will automatically turn off and the compact disc will play. If the system has been turned off while the compact disc was playing, pushing the ONOFF/VOL control knob will start the compact disc. LOAD button: To insert a CD in the CD changer, push the LOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select the loading slot by pushing the CD insert select button (1 - 6), then insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, push the LOAD button for more than 1.5 seconds. The slot numbers (1 - 6) will illuminate on the display when CDs are loaded into the changer. CD button: When the CD button is pushed with the system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play. When the CD button is pushed with the compact disc loaded with the tape or the radio playing, the tape or radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play. REW (Rewind), FF (Fast Forward): When the (rewind) or (fast forward) button is pushed while a compact disc is playing, the compact disc will play while rewinding or fast forwarding . When the button is released, the compact disc will return to normal play speed. SEEK/TRACK: When the button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, the track being played returns to its beginning. Push several times to skip back through tracks. The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pushed.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-29

When the button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing, the next track will start to play from its beginning. Push several times to skip through tracks. The compact disc will advance the number of times the button is pushed. (When the last track on the compact disc is skipped through, the first track will be played.) When pushing the or button for more than 1.5 seconds, each track will play for about 10 seconds. To stop playing, push the button again. CD select buttons: To play another CD that has been loaded, push a CD select button (1 - 6). REPEAT (RPT): When the PROG/RPT play button is pushed while the compact disc is played, the play pattern can be changed as follows: ALL DISC RPT 1 DISC RPT 1 TRACK RPT ALL DISC RDM 1 DISC RDM ALL DISC RPT ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated. 1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing will be repeated. 1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playing will be repeated

ALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will be played randomly 1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is currently playing will be played randomly CD EJECT: Current disc: Press the button. The compact disc will be ejected. If the disc is not removed within 15 seconds, the disc will reload (except 3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discs). Select a disc: Press the slot number (1 - 6) for the desired disc, then press the button. The compact disc will be ejected. If the disc is not removed within 15 seconds, the disc will reload (except 3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discs). All discs: Press and hold the button for more than 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will be ejected one by one. If a disc is not removed within 15 seconds, or the button is pressed again during the eject sequence, the entire disc eject sequence will be canceled.

When this button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will eject and the system will turn off. CD IN indicator: The slot numbers (1 - 6) will illuminate if CDs have been loaded into the changer.

4-30 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

MODE select switch

Push the mode select switch to change the mode in the following sequence: AM, FM, SAT, CD and Tape.

Volume control switches

Push the volume control switch to increase or decrease the volume.

Tuning
Memory change (radio):
LHA0049 LHA0269

Push the tuning switch ( or ) for less than 1.5 seconds to change the radio frequency. Seek tuning (radio): Push the tuning switch ( or ) for more than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previous radio station. FF, REW (tape and CD): Push the tuning switch ( or ) for less 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the present program or skip to the next program. Push several times to skip back or skip through programs. The automatic program search searches for the blank intervals between selections on cassette tapes. If there is a blank interval within a program or there is no interval between programs, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location.

CD CARE AND CLEANING

Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the disc. Never touch the surface of the disc. Always place the discs in the storage case when they are not being used. To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion. Do not use a conventional record cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use. A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges. Remove the rough edges by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

1. 2. 3. 4.

Volume control switch MODE select switch POWER on/off switch Tuning switch

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL

The audio system can be operated using the controls on the steering wheel.

POWER on/off switch

With the ignition key turned to the ACC or ON position, push the POWER switch to turn the audio system on or off.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-31

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

When playing a tape, push the tuning switch or ) for more than 1.5 seconds to ( rewind or fast forward the tape. To stop the FF or REW function, press the or button for less than 1.5 seconds again. When playing a CD in the CD changer (if so equipped), push the tuning switch ( or ) for more than 1.5 seconds to change between discs when multiple CDs are loaded. When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following cautions, otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the MFI (Multiport Fuel Injection) system and other electronic parts.

CAUTION
Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the Engine Control Module (ECM). Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the Multiport Fuel Injection harness. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness. Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer. Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body. For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING
A cellular telephone should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular telephones while driving. If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode (if so equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. If a conversation in a moving vehicle requires you to take notes, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so.

ANTENNA Window antenna

The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear window.

CAUTION
Do not place metalized film near the rear window glass or attach any metal parts to it. This may cause poor reception or noise. When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window antenna. Lightly wipe along the antenna with a dampened soft cloth.

4-32 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Nissan vehicle immobilizer system (NVIS) . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Automatic transmission (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Traction control system (TCS) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 5-19 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING
Do not leave children, impaired adults, or pets alone in your vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent childrens access to car keys. If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately. Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage. Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time. Keep the trunk lid closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with the trunk lid open, follow these precautions: 1. Open all the windows. air recirculation but2. Set the ton (if so equipped) to off and the fan control dial to high to circulate the air. If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the trunk lid or the body, follow the manufacturers recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle. The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever: a. The vehicle is raised for service. b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment. c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system. d. You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING
Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.

WARNING
The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components. Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

5-2 Starting and driving

CAUTION
Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously reduce the three-way catalysts ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants. Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected promptly by a NISSAN dealer. Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER

WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident. Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with any vehicle, loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects, or cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags section of this manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so. Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING

WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury. NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Although the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol. Remember, drinking and driving dont mix! And that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, prescription, and illegal drugs). Dont drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

Starting and driving 5-3

IGNITION SWITCH
2. Turn the ignition key slightly toward the ON position. 3. Turn the key to the LOCK position. 4. Remove the key. The shift selector lever is designed so it cannot moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition key is turned to OFF position or if the key is removed from the switch. The shift selector lever can be moved if the ignition switch is in the ACC position. This allows the vehicle to be moved if the battery is discharged. The shift selector lever can also be moved if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed. There is an OFF position between the LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position is indicated by a 1 on the key cylinder. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the steering wheel is not locked. In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwise from the straight up position. To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to the LOCK position. Remove the key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steering wheel slightly right and left.

WARNING
Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK position while driving. The steering wheel will lock. This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

WSD0041

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
On automatic transmission models, the ignition lock is designed so the key cannot be turned to LOCK position and removed until the shift selector lever is moved to the P (Park) position. When removing the key from the ignition, make sure the shift selector lever is in the P (Park) position. If the key cannot be turned to the LOCK position, proceed as follows to remove the key. 1. Move the shift selector lever into the P (Park) position.

5-4 Starting and driving

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to the LOCK position. Remove the key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steering wheel slightly right and left.

This position starts the engine. As soon as the engine has started, release the key. It automatically returns to the ON position.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (NVIS)

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (NVIS) will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered NVIS key. If the engine fails to start using the registered NVIS key, it may be due to interference caused by another NVIS key, an automated toll road device or automated payment device on the key ring. Restart the engine using the following procedures: 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 5 seconds. 3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again. 4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered NVIS key. If this procedure allows the engine to start, NISSAN recommends placing the registered NVIS key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.

WARNING
Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK position while driving. The steering wheel will lock. This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
WSD0058

KEY POSITIONS
LOCK: Normal parking position (0) OFF: (Manual transmission model) (1) The engine can be turned off without locking the steering wheel. ACC: (Accessories) (2) This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running. ON: Normal operating position (3) This position turns on the ignition system and the electrical accessories. START: (4)

MANUAL TRANSMISSION
The ignition switch includes a device that helps prevent accidental removal of the key while driving. The key can only be removed when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. On manual transmission models, to turn the ignition key to LOCK position from ACC or ON position, turn the key to OFF, push the key in, then turn the key to LOCK. In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwise from the straight up position.

Starting and driving 5-5

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear. Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant, brake and clutch fluid, and window washer fluid as frequently as possible, or at least whenever you refuel. Check that all windows and lights are clean. Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation. Lock all doors. Position seat and adjust head restraints. Adjust inside and outside mirrors. Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise. Check the operation of warning lights when the key is turned to the ON (3) position. See Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

STARTING THE ENGINE

1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Automatic transmission: Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended. The shift selector lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition key is turned to the OFF position or if the key is removed from the ignition switch. The starter is designed not to operate if the shift selector lever is in any of the driving positions. Manual transmission: Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). Depress the clutch pedal to the floor while cranking the engine. The starter is designed not to operate unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed. 3. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to START. Release the key when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure. When the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/5 to the floor) and hold it and then crank the engine. Release the key and the accelerator pedal when the engine starts. When the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. After cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to START. Release the key when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.

CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, turn the key off and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged. 4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather.

5-6 Starting and driving

DRIVING THE VEHICLE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (if so equipped)

WARNING
Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), 2 or 1. Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident. Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up. Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse) while the vehicle is moving. This could cause an accident. The automatic transmission in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and smooth operation. The recommended operating procedures for this transmission are shown on the following pages. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle

1. After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal before attempting to move the shift selector lever out of the P (Park) position. 2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift selector lever into a driving gear. 3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start the vehicle in motion. The automatic transmission is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to any drive position while the ignition switch is in the ON position. The shift selector lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition key is turned to the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the key is removed.
WSD0076

Shifting
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift selector lever out of the P (Park) position.

CAUTION
When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose. Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.

WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the selector lever is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage.

Starting and driving 5-7

If the key is turned to the OFF or ACC position for any reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), or any D (Drive) position, the shift selector lever cannot be moved to P (Park). Additionally, the key cannot be turned to the LOCK position and be removed from the ignition switch. If this occurs, perform the following steps: 1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is stopped. 2. Turn the key to the ON position. 3. Depress the foot brake pedal. 4. Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral) to restart the vehicle (P is preferred). Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) to park the vehicle and turn the ignition key to the LOCK position to remove the key. P (Park): Use this selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake pedal must be depressed to move the selector lever from N (Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first, then move the shift selector lever into the P (Park) position.

R (Reverse): Use this position to back up. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal must be depressed to move the selector lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to R (Reverse). N (Neutral): Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving. D (Drive): Use this position for all normal forward driving. 3 (Third gear): Use this position for driving up and down long slopes where engine braking would be advantageous. 2 (Second gear): Use this position for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades. Do not shift into the 2 position at speeds above 60 MPH (96 km/h). Do not exceed 60 MPH (96 km/h) in the 2 position.

1 (Low gear): Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or slow driving through deep snow, sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades. Do not shift into the 1 position at speeds above 37 MPH (60 km/h). Do not exceed 37 MPH (60 km/h) in the 1 position.

5-8 Starting and driving

M5 (Fifth): Use this position for all normal forward driving. M4 (Fourth): For driving up or down long slopes where engine braking would be advantageous. M3 (Third) and M2 (Second): Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades. M1 (First):
LSD0071

(For example, if you select the 3rd range, the transmission will shift up or down between the 1st and 3rd gears.) Moving the selector lever rapidly to the same side twice will shift the ranges in succession. When canceling the manual shift mode: Return the selector lever to the D position to return the transmission to the normal driving mode. In the manual shift mode, the transmission may not shift to the selected gear. This helps maintain driving performance and reduces the chance of vehicle damage or loss of control. In the manual shift mode, the transmission may shift up automatically to a higher range than selected if the engine speed is too high. When the vehicle speed decreases, the transmission automatically shifts down and shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle comes to a stop.

Manual shift mode

When the selector lever is shifted from D to the manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped or while driving, the transmission enters the manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manually. In the manual shift mode, the shift range is displayed on the position indicator in the meter. When shifting the shift lever to the manual shift gate, the position indicator first displays M4 (Fourth) Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows: M1 M2 M3 M4 M5

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades. Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time in lower than M4 range. This reduces fuel economy. When shifting up: Move the selector lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts to higher range.) When shifting down: Move the selector lever to the (down) side. (Shifts to lower range.) The transmission will automatically shift the gears between the 1st and the selected range.

Starting and driving 5-9

1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove the key 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Remove the shift lock release cover as shown. 4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lock release slot and push down. 5. Move the shift selector lever to the N (Neutral) position while holding down the shift lock release.
LSD0072

Accelerator downshift in D position

For passing or hill climbing, depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into a lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed.

Fail-safe
When the fail-safe operation occurs, the next time the key is turned to the ON position, the light in the instrument cluster of the selected shift position will blink for approximately 8 seconds after the ignition is turned ON. While the vehicle can be driven under these circumstances, please note that the automatic transmission will be locked in third gear. If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be activated. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, turn the ignition key OFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then turn the key back to the ON position. The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have a NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair it if necessary.

Shift lock release

If the battery is discharged, the shift selector lever may not be moved from the P (Park) position even with the brake pedal depressed. To move the shift selector lever, release the shift lock. The shift selector lever can be moved to N (Neutral). However, the steering wheel will be locked unless the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. This allows the vehicle to be moved if the battery is discharged. To push the shift lock release, complete the following procedure:

6. Turn the key to the ON position to unlock the steering wheel. Now the vehicle may be moved to the desired location. If the shift selector lever cannot be moved out of P (Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the automatic transmission system as soon as possible.

WARNING
If the selector lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

5-10 Starting and driving

MANUAL TRANSMISSION
WARNING
Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear. This may cause a loss of control or engine damage.

Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th up to 6th gear in sequence according to vehicle speed. To back up, lift up on the reverse lever and then move it to the R (Reverse) position after stopping the vehicle completely. If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), then release the clutch pedal. Depress the clutch pedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st).

CAUTION
Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This may cause clutch damage. Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting to help prevent transmission damage. Stop your vehicle completely before shifting into R (Reverse). When the vehicle is stopped with the engine running (for example, at a stop light), shift to N (Neutral) and release the clutch pedal with the foot brake applied.

Suggested upshift speeds

LSD0073

Shifting
To change gears, or when upshifting or downshifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift into the appropriate gear, then release the clutch slowly and smoothly. This vehicle is equipped with a short throw shifter manual transmission. To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever. If the clutch pedal is not fully depressed before the transmission is shifted, a gear noise may be heard. Transmission damage may occur.

The following are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance. Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather and individual driving habits. For quick acceleration in low altitude areas (less than 4,000 ft [1,219 m]) and normal acceleration in high altitude areas (over 4,000 ft [1,219 m]):

GEAR CHANGE 1st to 2nd 2nd to 3rd 3rd to 4th 4th to 5th 5th to 6th

MPH (km/h) 15 (24) 25 (40) 40 (64) 45 (72) 50 (80)

Starting and driving 5-11

PARKING BRAKE
For quick acceleration in high altitude areas (over 4,000 ft [1,219 m]):

WARNING
Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident. Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle. Do not use the gear shift in place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged. Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle. They could release the parking brake and cause an accident.

GEAR CHANGE 1st to 2nd 2nd to 3rd 3rd to 4th 4th to 5th 5th to 6th

MPH (km/h) 15 (24) 25 (40) 40 (65) 45 (75) 50 (80)

Suggested maximum speed in each gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate. Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the highest gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits, and drive according to the road conditions, which will ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control.
GEAR 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th MPH (km/h) 35 (55) 60 (95)

LSD0074 A. To engage: Pull the lever up To release: 1. Firmly apply the foot brake. 2. Manual transmission models: Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position. Automatic transmission models: Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park) position. 3. While pulling up on the parking brake lever slightly, push the button and lower comB. pletely

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out.

5-12 Starting and driving

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)

The SET indicator light may blink when the cruise control main switch is turned ON while pushing the RES/ACCEL, COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch (located on the steering wheel). To properly set the cruise control system, use the following procedures.

CAUTION
On manual transmission models, do not shift into N (Neutral) without depressing the clutch pedal when the cruise control is set. Should this occur, depress the clutch pedal and turn the main switch off immediately. Failure to do so may cause engine damage.

WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions: When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed.
LSD0075

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 30 - 90 MPH (48 - 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. To turn on the cruise control, push the main switch. The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument panel comes on. To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. The SET indicator light in the instrument panel comes on. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set speed. To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed. The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the cruise control.

1. 2. 3. 4.

Cruise control main switch RES/ACCEL switch CANCEL switch COAST/SET switch

In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed. On winding or hilly roads. On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.). In very windy areas. Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL

If the cruise control system malfunctions, it cancels automatically. The SET indicator light in the instrument panel then blinks to warn the driver. If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the cruise control main switch off and have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Starting and driving 5-13

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following three methods. Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicator light in the instrument panel goes out. Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator light goes out. Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator light in the instrument panel go out. The cruise control is automatically canceled and the SET light in the instrument panel goes out if: you depress the brake or clutch pedal while pushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch. The preset speed is deleted from memory. the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH (13 km/h) below the set speed. you depress the clutch pedal (manual transmission), or move the shift selector lever to N (Neutral) (automatic transmission). To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the COAST/SET switch. Push and hold the RES/ACCEL switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch. Push and release the RES/ACCEL switch. Each time you do this, the set speed increases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed. Push and release the COAST/SET switch. Each time you do this, the set speed decreases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES/ACCEL switch. The vehicle returns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 30 MPH (48 km/h). During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and ensure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in shortened engine life and reduced engine performance. Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the engine over 4,000 rpm. Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear. Avoid quick starts. Avoid hard braking as much as possible. Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km).

5-14 Starting and driving

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position. Drive at moderate speeds on the highway. Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy. Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a safe distance behind other vehicles. Use a proper gear range which suits road conditions. On level roads, shift into high gear as soon as possible. Avoid unnecessary engine idling. Keep your engine tuned up. Follow the recommended periodic maintenance schedule. Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy. Keep the front wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy. Air conditioner operation lowers fuel economy. Use the air conditioner only when necessary. When cruising at highway speeds, it is more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to reduce drag. Use the recommended viscosity engine oil. See Engine oil and oil filter recommendation in Technical and consumer information later in this manual.

Starting and driving 5-15

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents. 1. Firmly apply the parking brake. 2. Manual transmission models: Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) position. When parking on an uphill grade, place the shift lever in 1st gear. Automatic transmission models: Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park) position. 3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated. A HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb. B HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb. HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO C CURB: Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves.

WSD0050

WARNING
Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P (Park) for automatic transmission models or in an appropriate gear for manual transmission models. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. Make sure the shift lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal. Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended.

5-16 Starting and driving

POWER STEERING
4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove the key. The power assisted steering is designed to use a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering. If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you will still have control of the vehicle. However, much greater steering effort is needed, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds.

BRAKE SYSTEM
The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping distance will be longer.

WARNING
If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be much harder to operate.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the brake linings and pads faster, and reduce gas mileage. To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control.

Starting and driving 5-17

WARNING
While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident. If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder.

This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual and can be performed by a NISSAN dealer.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

The anti-lock brake system controls the brakes at each wheel so the wheels do not lock when braking abruptly or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing wheel lockup, the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly.

ing abruptly or when braking on a slippery road. Thus, difficult steering and swerving of the vehicle due to locked wheels is minimized. The system detects the wheel rotation rate and electronically controls the pressure applied to each brake. Slight vibration on the brake pedal accompanied by noise usually occurs while the ABS system is operating. Such vibration and noise encountered during abrupt braking is not a problem, but indicates that the system is functioning properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

Self-test feature
The anti-lock brake system consists of electronic sensors and hydraulic solenoids controlled by a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of any malfunction. If the computer senses any malfunction, it switches the anti-lock brake system off and turns on the ABS brake warning light on the instrument panel. The brake system then operates normally, but without antilock assistance.

WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances.

Parking brake bedding

The parking brake shoes must be bedded down whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drums are replaced, in order to assure the best brake performance.

Normal operation
The anti-lock brake system does not operate at speeds below 3 - 6 MPH (5 - 10 km/h). (The speeds vary according to road conditions.) When driving, the anti-lock brake system controls the wheels so they will not lock when brak-

5-18 Starting and driving

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS) (if so equipped)

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the antilock function will not operate, but the standard vehicle brake system will continue to operate normally. The ABS brake warning light will then come on. If the light comes on during the self-test or while driving, take the vehicle to a NISSAN dealer for repair. Tire type and condition of tires may also affect braking effectiveness. When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels. When installing a spare tire, make sure it is the proper size and type as specified on the tire placard. For tire placard location information, refer to Tire placard in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual. Refer to Wheels and tires in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section of this manual. When driving on slippery surfaces or suddenly avoiding obstacles on roads, the vehicle might swerve or slip. With the vehicle traction control system, sensors detect these movements and control the braking and engine output to help improve vehicle stability while driving. When the traction control system is operating, the slip indicator in the instrument panel blinks. If the slip indicator blinks, the vehicle is under slippery conditions. Be sure to drive carefully. See Slip indicator light and Traction control off indicator light in the Instruments and controls section of this manual. If a malfunction occurs in the system, the and indicator lights come on in the meter panel. As long as these warning lights are on, the traction control function is canceled. The vehicle will behave like a vehicle without the system.

WARNING
The anti-lock brake system is a sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces, but remember that the stopping distance on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with the anti-lock brake system. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the responsibility for safety of self and others rests in the hands of the driver.

Starting and driving 5-19

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM (if so equipped)

WARNING
The traction control system is designed to help improve driving stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully. If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs and bushings are not standard equipment or are extremely deteriorated, the traction control off indicator light may come on. When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the traction control system may not operate properly or the indicator light may come on. Do not drive on these types of roads. If tires other than the recommended ones are used, the traction control system may not operate properly or the indicator light may come on. The traction control system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road. When driving on slippery surfaces or suddenly avoiding obstacles on roads, the vehicle might swerve or slip. With the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system, sensors detect these movements and control the braking and engine output to help improve vehicle stability while driving. When the vehicle dynamic control system is operating, the slip indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When only the traction control system portion of the vehicle dynamic control system is operating, the slip indicator will also blink. If the slip indicator blinks, the vehicle is under slippery conditions. Be sure to drive carefully. See Slip indicator light, and Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light in the Instruments and controls section. Indicator light If malfunction occurs in the system, the and indicator lights come on in the instrument panel. As long as these warning lights are on, the traction control function is canceled. The VDC system uses a Brake Limited Slip Differential (LSD) system to improve vehicle traction. The brake LSD system works when one of the driving wheels is spinning on a slippery surface. The brake LSD system brakes the spinning wheel which distributes the driving power to the other drive wheel. If the vehicle is operated with the vehicle dynamic control system off, all VDC and TCS functions will be turned off. The brake LSD system and ABS will still operate with the VDC system OFF. If the brake LSD system or the ABS is activated, the slip indicator light will blink and you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal. While the VDC system is operating, you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working properly. The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction.

5-20 Starting and driving

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

The vehicle dynamic control system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.

WARNING
The vehicle dynamic control system is designed to help improve driving stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully. If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs and bushings are not standard equipment or are extremely deteriorated, the vehicle dynamic control off indicator light may come on. When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the vehicle dynamic control system may not operate properly or the vehicle dynamic control off indicator light may come on. Do not drive on these types of roads. If the tires other than the recommended ones are used, the vehicle dynamic control system may not operate properly or the vehicle dynamic control off indicator light may come on.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply deicer through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole.

ANTI-FREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32F (0C), check the anti-freeze (ethylene glycol base) to assure proper winter protection. For details, see Engine cooling system in the Maintenance and do-ityourself section of this manual.

BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. For details, see Battery in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section of this manual.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without antifreeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.

Starting and driving 5-21

For details, see Changing engine coolant in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section of this manual.

3. Tire chains may be used. Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturers suggestions. Use only SAE Class S chains. Class S chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class S chains are designed to meet the minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device (tire chains or cables). The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tire size. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected.

Never install tire chains on spare tires. Do not use tire chains on dry roads.

TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability information. 2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter: A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades. A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support. A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts. Extra window washer fluid to refill the reservoir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING
Wet ice (32F, 0C and freezing rain), very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have much less traction or grip under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded.

5-22 Starting and driving

 Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction. Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement. Allow greater following distances on slippery roads. Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads. Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so equipped)

An engine block heater to assist in extreme cold temperature starting is available through a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING
Do not use your heater with an ungrounded electrical system or twopronged (cheater) adapters. You can be injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection.

Starting and driving 5-23

MEMO

5-24 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

FLAT TIRE CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below. Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous. Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and away from traffic. 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. 3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Shift the manual transmission into R (Reverse), or the automatic transmission into P (Park). 4. Turn off the engine. 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance. 6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WCE0044

Blocking wheels
1 at both the front and Place suitable blocks back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire 2 to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up.

WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury.

WARNING
Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the manual transmission is shifted into R (Reverse), or the automatic transmission into P (Park).

6-2 In case of emergency

LCE0074

LCE0075

LCE0076

Getting the spare tire and tools

Open the trunk. Lift the trunk floor carpeting and 1 and wheel spare tire cover. Remove the jack 2 from the tool box. Remove the nut wrench spare tire.

Type A

Type B

In case of emergency 6-3

 Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support. Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary. Never use blocks on or under the jack. Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differential carriers.
CE1089

Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack. Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off the ground. It may cause the vehicle to move.

Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire

WARNING
Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change.

6-4 In case of emergency

LCE0020

WCE0056

Always refer to the proper illustrations for the correct placement and jack-up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type. Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instructions. 1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. Align the jack head between the two notches in the front or the rear as shown. Also fit the groove of the jack head between the notches as shown. The jack should be used on firm and level ground. 3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and then remove the tire.

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergency use. See specific instructions under the heading Wheels and tires in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section of this manual. 1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub. 2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight. 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until they are tight.

In case of emergency 6-5

JUMP STARTING
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely A, B, C, D, in the sequence illustrated ( E ). Lower the vehicle completely. Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure. COLD pressure: After vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire placard affixed to the center console. 5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equipment in the vehicle. 6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floor carpeting over the damaged tire. 7. Close the trunk. To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be followed.

WARNING
If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle. Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery. Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water. Keep battery out of the reach of children. The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.

WARNING
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident. Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose. Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench. Wheel nut tightening torque: 80 ft-lb (108 Nm) The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specifications at each lubrication interval.

WARNING
Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly secured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop. The spare tire is designed for emergency use. See specific instructions under the heading Wheels and tires in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section of this manual.

6-6 In case of emergency

 Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting. Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause serious injury. Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it.
WCE0054

WARNING
Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury. 1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the two vehicles to bring their batteries near each other. Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P (Park) (automatic transmission). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (lights, heater, air conditioner, etc.). 3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so equipped). Cover the battery with an old cloth to reduce explosion hazard. 4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence ilA, B, C, D ). lustrated (

In case of emergency 6-7

PUSH STARTING
8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid.

CAUTION
Always connect positive () to positive () and negative () to body ground (for example, strut mounting bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) not to the battery. Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal. 5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes. 6. Keep the engine speed of the booster vehicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the engine of the vehicle being jump started.

WARNING
Automatic transmission models cannot be push-started or tow-started. This may cause transmission or other vehicle damage. Three-way catalyst equipped models should not be started by pushing. The three-way catalyst may be damaged. Never try to start the vehicle by towing it. When the engine starts, the forward surge could cause the vehicle to collide with the tow vehicle.

WARNING
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, turn the key off and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again. 7. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable.

6-8 In case of emergency

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the following steps. 3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. (If steam or coolant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Wait until no steam or coolant can be seen before proceeding. 4. Open the engine hood. 6. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the reservoir tank with the engine running. Add coolant to the reservoir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING
Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause a vehicle fire. To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the radiator cap while the engine is still hot. When the radiator cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury. Do not open the hood if steam is coming out. 1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the shift lever to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P (Park) (automatic transmission). Do not stop the engine. 2. Turn off the air conditioner (if so equipped). Open all the windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed.

WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting burned. 5. Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is missing or loose, or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine.

WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or get caught in, engine belts or the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time when the coolant temperature is high.

In case of emergency 6-9

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in Canada) and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions:

WARNING
Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed. Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck.
ACE1001

WARNING
Never tow automatic transmission models with the front wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or backward), as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised always use towing dollies under the front wheels.

CAUTION
When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and powertrain are in working condition. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used. Always attach safety chains before towing.
ACE0511

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

6-10 In case of emergency

 When towing automatic transmission models with the front wheels on towing dollies, or when towing manual transmission models with the front wheels on the ground: Turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by turning the ignition key to the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanism. Move the gearshift lever to the N (Neutral) position. When towing automatic or manual transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground (if you do not use towing dollies): Always release the parking brake.
LCE0077

CAUTION
Use the towing hook only, not other parts of the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle body will be damaged. Use the towing hook only to free a vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc. Never tow the vehicle for a long distance using only the towing hook. The towing hook is under tremendous force when used to free a stuck vehicle. Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull the hook at an angle. Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or cooling systems. Pull devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle) Front

WARNING
Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.

Rear
WARNING
Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-11

 Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.

CAUTION
Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage. Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always tow forward, never backward.

Manual Transmission
Always tow with the manual transmission in Neutral. After towing 500 miles, start and idle the engine with the transmission in Neutral for two minutes. Failure to idle the engine after every 500 miles of towing may cause damage to the transmissions internal parts.

CAUTION
Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle. Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or cooling systems. Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull the vehicle at an angle. Pull devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery.

Automatic Transmission
CAUTION
DO NOT tow any automatic transmission vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication. For emergency towing procedures refer to Towing Recommended by NISSAN earlier in this chapter. To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicles drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturers recommendations when using their product.

FLAT TOWING
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing. This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home.

6-12 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Most common factors contributing to vehicle corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it. In the following cases, please wash your vehicle as soon as possible to protect the paint surface: after a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain. after driving on coastal roads. when contaminants such as soot, bird droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface. when dust or mud builds up on the surface. Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area. When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover. Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover.

CAUTION
Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents. Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted. Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean water. Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt. A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots.

WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. After waxing, polishing is recommended to remove built-up residue and to avoid a weathered appearance. A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product. Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax. Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish. If the surface does not polish easily, use a road tar remover and wax again. Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

WASHING
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store.

7-2 Appearance and care

UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the underbody and suspension. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, retreated.

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements.
LAI0008

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash the wheels regularly, especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. If not removed, road salt could discolor the wheels.

GLASS
When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier to clean if the high-mounted stop light is removed first. Be careful when removing the high-mounted stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the high-mounted stop light wires. To remove the high-mounted stop light:
1 2

CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

Push toward rear of vehicle. Lift to remove.

The high-mounted stop light must be properly reinstalled before driving your vehicle.

Appearance and care 7-3

CLEANING INTERIOR
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth. Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturers recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material. Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens.

FLOOR MATS
The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. No matter what mats are used, be sure they are fitted for your vehicle and are properly positioned in the footwell to prevent interference with pedal operation. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.

CAUTION
Never use benzine, thinner or any similar material. The leather seats should be regularly coated with a leather wax like saddle soap. Never use car wax. Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer. Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens cover.
WAI0006

Floor mat positioning aid (drivers side only)

This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket to act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your vehicle model. The drivers side floor mat has a grommet hole incorporated in it. Position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in the footwell. Periodically check to make certain the mats are properly positioned.

7-4 Appearance and care

CORROSION PROTECTION SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them. See Seat belt maintenance in the Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags section of this manual.

MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION

1. The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas. 2. Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents.

where road salt is used.

Temperature

High temperatures accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use accelerates the corrosion process. Road salt also accelerates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle, and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION

Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean. Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible. Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation. Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible.

Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated: in areas of high relative humidity. in areas where the temperatures stay above freezing. where atmospheric pollution exists.

Appearance and care 7-5

CAUTION
NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom. Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them. Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders. In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically. For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, consult a NISSAN dealer.

7-6 Appearance and care

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 4-Speed Automatic transmission fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Temperature conditions for checking. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 5-Speed Automatic transmission fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Brake and clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Window washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 Drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 Parking brake and brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23 Checking parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23 Checking brake pedal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23 Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26 Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28 Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33 Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33 Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35 Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Your new NISSAN has been designed to have minimum maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save you both time and money. However, some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your NISSANs good mechanical condition, as well as its emission and engine performance. It is the owners responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed. As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives proper maintenance. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain. Scheduled maintenance For your convenience, both required and optional scheduled maintenance items are described and listed in your NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide. You must refer to that guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals. General maintenance General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle. They are essential if your vehicle is to continue to operate properly. It is your responsibility to perform these maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed. Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools. These checks or inspections can be done by you, a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN dealer. Where to go for service If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists who are kept up-to-date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership training programs. They are completely qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before they work on your vehicle, rather than after they have worked on it. You can be confident that a NISSAN dealers service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle in a reliable and economic way.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required. When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe the Maintenance precautions later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following items with * is found later in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified. Doors and engine hood Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released. When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim. Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checking the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary. Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). Tire, wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed. For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Safety Information (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet . Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge at least once a month and always prior to long distance trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility. Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

the brake booster function. Be certain to keep the floor mat away from the pedal. Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied. Clutch pedal* Make sure the pedal operates smoothly and check that it has the proper free travel. Parking brake* Check that the lever has the proper travel and confirm that your vehicle is held securely on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied. Seats Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and the locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched positions. Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage. Steering wheel Check for changes in the steering system, such as excessive freeplay, hard steering or strange noises. Warning lights and chimes Make sure all warning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc. Additional information on the following items with an * is found later in this section. Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not bind or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal. Automatic transmission P (Park) position mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that your vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in the P position without applying any brakes. Brake pedal and booster* Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure it has the proper distance under it when depressed fully. Check

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

Windshield wiper and washer* Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak. Windshield defroster Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner.

Engine oil level* Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See the carbon monoxide warning in the Starting and driving section of this manual. Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately. Power steering fluid level* and lines Check the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. Radiator and hoses Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose connections.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel). Automatic transmission fluid level* Check the level after putting the selector lever in P with the engine idling at operating temperature. Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level. Brake and clutch fluid levels* Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir. Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level when the engine is cold. Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Underbody The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances from the underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, in those areas where mud and dirt may have accumulated. See the Appearance and care section of this manual. Windshield washer fluid* Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed. Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition key is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan. If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts. It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle. Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle. If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape. Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands. Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks away from the fuel tank and battery. On gasoline engine models with the multiport fuel injection (MFI) system, the fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off.

WARNING
Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. For manual transmission models, move the shift lever to N (Neutral). For automatic transmission models, move the selector lever to P (Park). Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs. Never leave the engine or automatic transmission related component harnesses disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position. Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

CAUTION
Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down. Avoid contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5

This Maintenance and do-it-yourself section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform. A genuine NISSAN service manual is also available. See Owners Manual/Service Manual order information in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual. You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Power steering fluid reservoir Engine oil filler cap Brake fluid reservoir Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model) Air cleaner Battery Fuse/Fusible link box Transmission dipstick (A/T models) Engine oil dipstick Radiator cap Fuse block Windshield washer fluid reservoir Coolant reservoir

NOTE: Engine cover removed for clarity.

LDI0330

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, year-round, anti-freeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors; therefore, additional engine cooling system additives are not necessary.

CAUTION
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only a Genuine Nissan Long Life Anti-Freeze Coolant (green) or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water. The use of other types of coolant solutions or coolant colors, such as orange, may damage the engine cooling system.

WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. The radiator is equipped with a pressure type radiator cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap.

WDI0332

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below the MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level. If the cooling system frequently requires coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Outside temperature down to C -35 F -30

Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze Coolant or equivalent 50%

Demineralized or distilled water

50%

8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ENGINE OIL CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant. The service procedure can be found in the NISSAN Service Manual. Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheating.

WARNING
To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. Keep coolant out of the reach of children and pets. Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations.
LDI0329 WDI0175

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature. 3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be between the H (High) and B . This is the normal operL (Low) marks ating oil level range. If the oil level is below A , remove the oil filler cap the L (Low) mark and pour recommended oil through the C. opening. Do not overfill 6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick. It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9

CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and replace it at this time. See Changing engine oil filter later in this section.

WARNING
Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. Keep used engine oil out of reach of children.

WDI0216

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature, then turn it off. 3. Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise. 4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug. 5. Remove the drain plug with a wrench by turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oil.

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot. Waste oil must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations. 6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Do not use excessive force. Drain plug tightening torque: 22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 Nm)

8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

7. Refill engine with recommended oil through the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler cap securely. See Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual for drain and refill capacity. The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine. 8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as required. 9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.
WDI0218

5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with a clean rag. Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the mounting surface of the engine. 6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil. 7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn. 8. Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter. Correct as required. 9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if necessary.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Turn the engine off. 3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter. 4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11

4-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

WARNING
When the engine is running, keep hands, jewelry and clothing away from any moving parts such as the cooling fan and drive belts. Automatic transmission fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children. The fluid can be checked at fluid temperatures of 86 - 122F (30 - 50C) using the COLD range on the dipstick after the engine is warmed up and before driving. However, the fluid should be re-checked using the HOT range. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the parking brake. 2. Start the engine and then move the shift selector lever through each gear range, ending in P (Park). 3. Check the fluid level with the engine idling.
LDI0321

TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS FOR CHECKING

The fluid level should be checked using the HOT range on the dipstick after the following conditions have been met: The engine should be warmed up to operating temperature. The vehicle should be driven at least 5 minutes. The automatic transmission fluid should be warmed to 122 - 176F (50 - 80C).

8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

5-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

CAUTION
DO NOT OVERFILL. Use ONLY NISSAN Matic Fluid D (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid. Dexron III/Mercon or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental United States and Alaska contact a NISSAN dealership for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of Dexron III/Mercon automatic transmission fluid.
WDI0334

When checking or replacement is required, we recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing.

CAUTION
Use only Genuine Nissan Matic Fluid K. Do not mix with other fluids. Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan Matic Fluid K will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. The specified automatic transmission fluid is also described on caution labels located in the engine compartment.

NOTE: If the vehicle has been driven for a long time at high speeds, or in city traffic in hot weather, or if it is being used to pull a trailer, the fluid level cannot be read accurately. You should wait until the fluid has cooled down (about 30 minutes) before checking fluid level.

4speed 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean with lint-free paper. 5. Reinsert the dipstick into the dipstick tube as far as it will go. 6. Remove the dipstick and note the reading. If the automatic transmission fluid level is B , no within the normal operating range additional fluid is required. If the fluid level is A add fluid through the dipstick tube. low

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13

POWER STEERING FLUID

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID

For further brake and clutch fluid specification information, refer to Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual.

WARNING
Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake and clutch systems. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehicles stopping ability.
WDI0256

CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, immediately wash the surface with water.

LDI0079

The fluid level should be checked using the HOT MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid temperatures of 122 - 176F (50 80C) or using the COLD MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid temperatures of 32 - 86F (0 - 30C). If the fluid is below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN PSF fluid. Remove the cap and fill through the opening.

BRAKE FLUID
Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be checked by a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION
DO NOT OVERFILL. Recommended fluid is NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Genuine

8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

WARNING
Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake and clutch systems. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehicles stopping ability.

CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, immediately wash the surface with water.

LDI0080

LDI0335

CLUTCH FLUID
Check the clutch fluid level in the reservoir (manual transmissions only). If the fluid level is below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be checked by a NISSAN dealer. For further brake and clutch fluid specification information, refer to Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual.

WINDOW WASHER FLUID RESERVOIR

Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically. Add window washer fluid when the light comes on (if so equipped). To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the cap off the reservoir tank and pour the window washer fluid into the tank opening. Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturers instructions for the mixture ratio.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15

BATTERY
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of window washer fluid. Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Any corrosion should be washed off with a solution of baking soda and water. Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened. If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent discharge. When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. Keep battery out of the reach of children.

CAUTION
Do not substitute engine anti-freeze coolant for window washer solution. This may result in damage to the paint. Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reservoir tank. Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturers recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank. Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water.

WARNING
Do not expose the battery to flames or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat, reduce battery life, and in some cases lead to an explosion.

8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see Jump starting in the In case of emergency section of this manual. If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. Contact a NISSAN dealer.

WDI0224

1. Remove the battery caps with a screwdriver as shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery case.

LDI0302

2. Check the fluid level in each cell If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level up to the bottom of the filler opening. Do not overfill.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17

DRIVE BELTS
1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer. 2. Have the belts checked regularly for condition and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule found in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide.

SPARK PLUGS

WDI0226

WDI0005

1. 2. 3. 4.

Power steering fluid pump Crankshaft Generator Air conditioner WARNING

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped spark plugs as frequently as conventional type spark plugs because they last much longer. Follow the maintenance schedule, but do not reuse the spark plugs by cleaning or regapping. Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.

Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCK position. The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

AIR CLEANER

WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.

WARNING
Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops the flame if the engine backfires. If it isnt there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed. Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury.

CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs. If replacement is required, please see your NISSAN dealer for assistance.
LDI0336

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance intervals shown in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide. When replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the cover with a damp cloth. To remove the air cleaner filter:
1 2 3

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of airborne dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors. The filter is located behind the glove box. Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for change intervals. To replace the filter, perform the following procedure:

Loosen the screw. Disconnect the electrical connector. Push down on the clips and remove the air cleaner cover. Remove the air cleaner filter.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19

LDI0323

LDI0324

LDI0325

1. Remove the 2 lower glove box hinge pins. Remove the glove box from the opening and let it hang by the cord.

2. Remove the filter cover from the intake unit by disengaging the 2 hook tabs at the bottom of the cover.

NOTE: The filter is marked UP with an arrow. The end of the filter with the arrow should face the rear of the vehicle. 3. Slide the filter into the housing.

8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

NOTE: Make sure the filter sits on top of the 2 supporting tabs on the housing. 4. Replace the cover by inserting the upper tabs inside the housing slot and pushing the hook tabs until they snap on to the housing lip. 5. Install the glove box door. 6. Fill out the date information on the small replacement label and attach it to the glove box lid.

LDI0157

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

WDI0194

CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield. Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water. Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver vision.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place.

CAUTION
After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position; otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened. Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass; otherwise the arms may be damaged from wind pressure.

REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
1 2 3

Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield. Push the release tab, then move the wiper blade down the wiper arm to remove. Remove the wiper blade.

8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE PEDAL

LDI0326

WDI0229

CHECKING PARKING BRAKE

From the released position, pull the parking brake lever up slowly and firmly. If the number of clicks is out of the range listed, see a NISSAN dealer. 7 - 8 clicks under pulling force of 44 lb (196 N).
WDI0337

CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL

With the engine running, check the distance A between the upper surface of the pedal and the metal floor. If it is out of the range shown, see a NISSAN dealer. Distance A: Under depression force of 110 lb (490 N)
Automatic Transmission 3 1/2 in (90 mm) or more Manual Transmission 3 1/3 in (84 mm) or more

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not 1 . This may to let wax get into the washer nozzle cause clogging or improper windshield washer operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it 2 . with a needle or small pin

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23

FUSES Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes. The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied. nance schedule information in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide.

BRAKE BOOSTER
Check the brake booster function as follows: 1. With the engine off, press and release the brake pedal several times. When brake pedal movement (distance of travel) remains the same from one pedal application to the next, continue on to the next step. 2. While depressing the brake pedal, start the engine. The pedal height should drop a little. 3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the engine. Keep the pedal depressed for about 30 seconds. The pedal height should not change. 4. Run the engine for one minute without depressing the brake pedal, then turn it off. Depress the brake pedal several times. The pedal travel distance will decrease gradually with each depression as the vacuum is released from the booster. If the brakes do not operate properly, have the brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.
LDI0327

WARNING
See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system check if the brake pedal height does not return to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement, a high pitched scraping or screeching sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard. Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system. Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For more information regarding brake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire. If any electrical equipment does not come on, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF. 2. Open the engine hood.

8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the tab and lifting the cover up. 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse block in the passenger compartment.

WDI0200

5. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse. 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer.

Fusible links
If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace with only genuine NISSAN parts.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25

LDI0328

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire. If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF. 2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove. 3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a known good fuse. 5. Push the fuse box cover to install. 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer.

8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

KEYFOB BATTERY REPLACEMENT

If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement, perform step 5. An improperly disposed battery can hurt the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal. The keyfob is water-resistant; however, if it does get wet, immediately wipe completely dry. The operational range of the keyfob extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. This range may vary with conditions. FCC Notice: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
WPD0136

Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:

1 2 3

Open the lid using a coin. Remove the battery. Install a new battery with the + facing down.

Recommended battery: Sanyo CR2025 or equivalent.

4

Close the lid securely. 5. Press the LOCK button, then the UNLOCK button two or three times to check the keyfob operation.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27

LIGHTS HEADLIGHTS Replacing the xenon headlight bulb

WARNING
Do not leave the headlight assembly open without a bulb installed for a long period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering the headlight body may affect bulb performance. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly just before a replacement bulb is installed. Only touch the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching the glass could significantly affect bulb life and/or headlight performance. High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped. Use the same number and wattage as originally installed: Low beam: Wattage: 55 Bulb no.: 9012* High beam: Wattage: 55 Bulb no.: 9012* *: Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

HIGH VOLTAGE

When xenon headlights are on, they produce a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to modify or disassemble. Always have your xenon headlights replaced at a NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see Headlight and turn signal switch in the Instruments and controls section.

Replacing the halogen headlight bulb

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Because the headlight assembly must be removed from the vehicle for bulb replacement, see your NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION
Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.

8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Headlight assembly High/low (Halogen) High/low (Xenon) Day time running lamp Park/Turn Cornering Front fog light Front personal/map lights Console box illumination Glove box light (if so equipped) Vanity mirror light Step light Rear personal lamps High-mounted stop light Trunk light Rear combination light Tail/Stop/Turn Backup (reversing) Sidemarker License plate light 27/5 13 5 5 3057K 912 168 168 55 35 27/8 27 55 3.4 3.4 2.1 3.8 8 5 3.4 9012 D2S 1156 1157NA 3156K H3 194 158 194 949 158 Wattage (W) Bulb No.*

*: Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Map light Rear personal lights Step light Cornering light Rear combination light License plate light Trunk light High-mount stoplight Headlamp assembly Fog light

LDI0331

8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WDI0263

LDI0338

LDI0339

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp and/or cover. Indicates bulb removal Indicates bulb installation

Front personal/map lights Type A 1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth

Front personal/map lights Type B 1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31

WDI0340

LDI0341

Vanity mirror light 1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth

Step light 1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth

WDI0342

Rear personal light 1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth

8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WHEELS AND TIRES

WDI0343

WDI0210

Trunk light

If you have a flat tire, see the In case of emergency section in this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE Maximum inflation pressure

WDI0344

High-mounted stop light

Do not exceed the maximum inflation pressures 1 . shown on the sidewall of the tire

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressure (including the spare) at least once a month and always prior to long distance trips. Incorrect tire pressure may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling. Tire pressure should be checked when tires are

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33

COLD. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for three or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire placard affixed to the center console lid.

WARNING
Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident. The vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label. Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components. Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level.

Do not drive your vehicle over 85 MPH (137 km/h) unless it is equipped with high speed rated tires. Driving faster than 85 MPH (137 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Safety Information (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Safety Information (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some models to provide good performance all year, including snowy and icy road conditions. All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

TYPES OF TIRES
WARNING
When changing or replacing tires, be sure all four tires are of the same type (i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and construction. A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability. Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire sidewall. If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.

Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the

8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire. If you install snow tires, they must be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device (tire chains or cables). The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tires. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected. Tire chains must be installed only on the front wheels and not on the rear wheels. Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress.

WDI0258

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). See Flat tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual for tire replacing procedures. As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench. Wheel nut tightening torque: 80 ft-lb (108 Nm)

TIRE CHAINS
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturers suggestions. Use only SAE class S chains. Class S chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class S chains are designed to meet the minimum clearances between

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specifications at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval.

The original tires have built-in tread wear indicators. When the wear indicators are visible, the tire(s) should be replaced. Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the spare tire, contact a NISSAN dealer. For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Safety Information (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
WDI0259

WARNING
After rotating the tires, check and adjust the tire pressure. Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation. For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Safety Information (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

1. 2.

Wear indicator Location mark

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread design, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. Recommended types and sizes are shown in Wheels/tire size in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual.

Tire wear and damage

WARNING
Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found, the tire(s) should be replaced.

8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WARNING
The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, ground clearance, body-totire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury. If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels which have the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a different off-set could cause premature tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics and/or interference with the brake discs/drums. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Refer to Wheel/tire size in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual for wheel off-set dimensions.

Do not install a deformed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning. The use of retread recommended. tires is not

Care of wheels
Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance. Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed. Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels. Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead. NISSAN recommends waxing the road wheels to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Safety Information (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required. Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage. For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Safety Information (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet .

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire) (if so equipped)

Observe the following precautions if the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident:

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37

WARNING
The spare tire should be used for emergency use only. It should be replaced with the standard tire at the first opportunity to avoid possible tire or differential damage. Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving. Periodically check spare tire inflation pressure. Always keep the pressure of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar). With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire installed do not drive the vehicle at speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h). When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire should be used on the rear wheels and the original tire used on the front wheels (drive wheels). Use tire chains only on the front (original) tires.

Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the standard tire. Replace the spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear. Do not use the spare tire on other vehicles. Do not use more than one spare tire at the same time. Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION
Do not use tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly and may cause damage to the vehicle. Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is smaller than the original tire, ground clearance is reduced. To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught.

8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Recommended SAE viscosity number . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Air conditioner system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Vehicle identification number (chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Tire placard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Determining vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 Towing load/specification chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . 9-18 Owners manual/service manual order information . . . . 9-20 In the event of a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure described in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (Approximate) US measure Imp measure 20 gal 16-5/8 gal 4-1/4 qt 3-7/8 qt 8-5/8 qt 4-7/8 pt 3-1/2 qt 3-1/4 qt 7-1/4 qt 4 pt Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Liter 75.8 4.0 3.7 8.2 2.3 Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91)*1 API Certification Mark *2 *3 API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving II or API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving *2 *3 ILSAC grade GF-II & GF-III*2 *3 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze Coolant or equivalent 50% Demineralized or distilled water API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 NISSAN Matic Fluid D (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid.*4 Genuine NISSAN Matic Fluid K *5 Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.*9 Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*6 or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116) NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base) HFC-134a (R-134a)*7 NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type DH-PS or equivalent*7 Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze

Fuel Engine oil *8 Drain and Refill With oil filter change Without oil filter change Cooling system With reservoir

Manual transmission gear oil Automatic transmission fluid 4 Speed 5 Speed Power steering fluid (PSF) Brake and clutch fluid Multi-purpose grease Air conditioning system refrigerant Air conditioning system lubricants Windshield washer fluid

Refill to the proper level according to the instructions in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section.

*1: For further details, see Fuel recommendation. *2: For further details, see Engine oil and oil filter recommendations. *3: For further details, see Recommended SAE engine oil viscosity. *4: Dexron III/Mercon or equivalent may also be used. Outside the Continental United States and Alaska contact a NISSAN dealership for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of Dexron III/Mercon Automatic Transmission Fluid. *5: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Nissan Genuine ATF Matic Fluid K will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle warranty. *6: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer. *7: For further details, see Air conditioner specification label. *8: For further details, see Changing engine oil. *9: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), Dexron III/Mercon, or equivalent ATF may also be used.

9-2 Technical and consumer information

FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91). For improved vehicle performance, NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI number (Research octane number 96).

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager. If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage. The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline. If an oxygenate-blend other than methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 10% oxygenate. (MTBE may, however, be added up to 15%.) If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may

cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles. If any driveability problems such as engine stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE. Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage.

CAUTION
Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage. Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of any fuel additives (for example, fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.

Technical and consumer information 9-3

Octane rating tips

In most parts of North America, you should use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number. However, you may use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating as low as 85 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number in high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)] such as: Colorado, Montana, New Mexico, Utah, Wyoming, northeastern Nevada, southern Idaho, western South Dakota, western Nebraska, and the part of Texas which is directly south of New Mexico. Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than stated above can cause persistent, heavy spark knock. (Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked at a NISSAN dealer. However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load.

9-4 Technical and consumer information

NISSAN recommends mineral based oils. These oils must, however, meet the API quality and SAE viscosity ratings specified for your vehicle.

Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed. Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity
WTI0033

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATION Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose engine oil with the correct quality and viscosity to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. NISSAN recommends the use of a low friction oil (energy conserving oil) in order to improve fuel economy and conserve energy. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage. Only those engine oils with the American Petroleum Institute (API) CERTIFICATION MARK on

the front of the container should be used. This type of oil supersedes the existing API SG, SH, or SJ and Energy Conserving II categories. If you cannot find engine oil with the API CERTIFICATION MARK, use an API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving II or API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving oil. An oil with a single designation SG or SH, or in combination with other categories (for example, SG/CC or SG/CD) may also be used if one with the API CERTIFICATION MARK cannot be found. An ILSAC grade GF-II & GF-III oil can also be used.

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. The chart Recommended SAE viscosity number shows the recommended oil viscosities for the expected ambient temperatures. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in Change intervals.

Technical and consumer information 9-5

Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding recommended oil and filter change intervals could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle warranty. Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle. Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes: repeated short distance driving at cold outside temperatures driving in dusty conditions extensive idling towing a trailer
ATI1028

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lubricant, NISSAN A/C system oil DH-PS or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system components. The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earths ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earths atmosphere, certain government regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner system service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refrigerant. Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner system.

RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY NUMBER

SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all temperatures. SAE 10W-30 or SAE 10W-40 viscosity oils may be used if the ambient temperature is above 0F (-18C).

9-6 Technical and consumer information

SPECIFICATIONS ENGINE
Model Type Cylinder arrangement Bore x Stroke Displacement Firing order Idle speed M/T A/T (in N position) Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed) CO % at idle Standard PLFR5A-11 Spark plug Spark plug gap (Nominal) Camshaft operation Hot PLFR4A-11 Cold PLFR6A-11 in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) Timing chain See the Emission Control label on the underside of the hood. VQ35DE Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60 in (mm) 3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4) cu in (cm3) 213.45 (3,498) 123456

The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

Technical and consumer information 9-7

WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheels 17 x 7JJ 18 x 7.5JJ Tires P225/55R17 P245/45R18 Spare tire Temporary Full size Speed rating 17 18 *: R or D depending on tire manufacturer T145/80*17 17 or 18 H V

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length Overall width Overall height Front tread 17 inch tire 18 inch tire Rear tread 17 inch tire 18 inch tire Wheelbase Gross vehicle weight rating Gross axle weight rating Front Rear in (mm) in (mm) lb (kg) 61.6(1,565) 61.2(1,554) in (mm) in (mm) 61.4(1,559) 61.0(1,549) in (mm) 193.5(4,915) in (mm) in (mm) 71.7(1,821) 58.3(1,481)

in (mm) 111.2(2,824) See the F.M.V.S.S. certification label on the center pillar between the lb (kg) drivers side front and rear doors. lb (kg)

9-8 Technical and consumer information

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

When planning to drive your NISSAN vehicle in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicles engine. Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available. When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations. The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ. When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation, and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

LTI0069

LTI0070

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (chassis number)

The vehicle identification number is located as shown.

Technical and consumer information 9-9

WTI0049

LTI0071

LTI0072

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is attached as shown.

9-10 Technical and consumer information

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

LTI0073

LTI0074

TIRE PLACARD
The cold tire pressure is shown on the tire placard. The tire placard is located under the center console lid.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is affixed as shown.

LTI0075

Technical and consumer information 9-11

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

Use the following steps to mount the front license plate: Before mounting the license plate, confirm that the following parts are enclosed in the plastic bag: License plate bracket License plate bracket screws x 2 License plate screws x 2 Screw grommets x 2 1. Make a shallow hole in the bumper fascia at the location marks (small dimples) using a 0.39 in (10 mm) drill. To avoid damaging the area behind the fascia, apply only light pressure to the drill. 2. Insert the grommets into the holes in the bumper fascia. 3. Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver into the grommet hole to turn the threaded part of the grommet 90. 4. Mount the license plate bracket using the two longer screws. 5. Use the two shorter hex head screws to mount the license plate to the license plate bracket. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle.

CAUTION
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

DETERMINING VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

The load capacity of this vehicle is determined by weight, not by available cargo space. For example, a luggage rack, bike carrier, cartop carrier or similar equipment does not increase load carrying capacity of your vehicle. To determine vehicle load capacity: Vehicle weight can be determined by using a commercial-grade scale, found at places such as a truck stop, gravel quarry, grain elevator, or a scrap metal recycling facility. 1. Determine the curb weight of your vehicle. 2. Compare the curb weight amount to the GVWR specified for your vehicle to determine how much more weight your vehicle can carry.

TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle: Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) vehicle weight including: standard and optional equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not include passengers and cargo. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle.

9-12 Technical and consumer information

TOWING A TRAILER
3. After loading (cargo and passengers), reweigh your vehicle to determine if either GVWR or GAWR for your vehicle is exceeded. If GVWR is exceeded, remove cargo as necessary. If either the front or rear GAWR is exceeded, shift the load or remove cargo as necessary. Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury. Overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the vehicles warranty. Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember that towing a trailer places additional loads on your vehicles engine, drive train, steering, braking and other systems. A Nissan Trailer Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available from a NISSAN dealer. This guide includes information on trailer towing ability and the special equipment required for proper towing.

LOADING TIPS
The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label. Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the value specified in the Towing Load/Specification Chart found later in this section. The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight. Towing loads greater than specified or using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance. The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appropriate for level highway driving may have to be reduced on very steep grades or in low traction situations (for example, on slippery boat ramps).

WARNING
Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

Technical and consumer information 9-13

WARNING
Vehicle damage and/or personal injury resulting from improper towing procedures are not covered by NISSAN warranties. A NISSAN Trailer Towing Guide (U.S. only) containing information on trailer towing ability and the special equipment required may be obtained from a NISSAN dealer.

CA0009

TI1012M

Tongue load
Keep the tongue load between 9 - 11 percent of the total trailer load within the maximum tongue load limits shown in the following Towing Load/Specification Chart. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load.

Maximum gross vehicle weight/maximum gross axle weight

The gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) shown on the F. M. V. S. S. certification label. The gross vehicle weight equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. In addition, front or rear gross axle weight must not exceed the gross axle weight rating (GAWR) shown on the F. M. V. S. S. certification label.

9-14 Technical and consumer information

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART

TOWING LOAD / SPECIFICATION CHART UNIT: lb (kg) MAXIMUM TOWING LOAD MAXIMUM TONGUE LOAD 1,000 (454) 100 (45)

Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, etc. to install a trailer hitch. To reduce the possibility of additional damage if your vehicle is struck from the rear, where practical, remove the hitch and/or receiver when not in use. After the hitch is removed, seal the bolt holes to prevent exhaust fumes, water or dust from entering the passenger compartment. Regularly check that all trailer hitch mounting bolts are securely mounted.

to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave enough slack in the chains to permit turning corners.

Trailer lights
Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or local regulations. When wiring the vehicle for towing, connect the stop and tail light pickup into the vehicle electrical circuit.

Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system, make sure it conforms to federal and/or local regulations and that it is properly installed.

TOWING SAFETY Trailer hitch

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer. A genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available from your NISSAN dealer (Canada only). Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle, to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

Tire pressures
When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the tire placard. Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturers specifications.

WARNING
Never connect a trailer brake system directly to the vehicle brake system.

Pre-towing tips
Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded and/or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down condition; check for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.

CAUTION
Do not use axle-mounted hitches. The hitch should not be attached to or affect the operation of the impactabsorbing bumper.

Safety chains
Always use suitable safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer. Safety chains should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch, not

Technical and consumer information 9-15

 Be certain your rear view mirrors conform to all federal, state or local regulations. If not, install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicles behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic. Steering stability and braking performance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving. Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops. Avoid sharp turns or lane changes. Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed. Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not recommended; however, if you must do so, and if your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission, first block the wheels and apply the parking brake, and then move the transmission shift selector lever into the P (Park) position. If you move the shift selector lever to the P (Park) position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake, transmission damage could occur.

When going down a hill, shift into a lower gear and use the engine braking effect. When going up a long grade, downshift the transmission to a lower gear and reduce speed to reduce chances of engine overloading and/or overheating. However, for long steep grades, do not stay in 1st or 2nd gear when driving above 35 MPH (56 km/h). If the engine coolant rises to an extremely high temperature when the air conditioner system is on, turn off the air conditioner. Coolant heat can be additionally vented by opening the windows, switching the fan control to high and setting the temperature control to the HOT position. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances. Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicles first 500 miles (805 km). Have your vehicle serviced more often than at intervals specified in the recommended Maintenance Schedule in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide. When making a turn, your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make a larger than normal turning radius during the turn.

Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly causing vehicle sway. When being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect vehicle handling. If swaying does occur, firmly grip the steering wheel, steer straight ahead, and immediately (but gradually) reduce vehicle speed. This combination will help stabilize the vehicle. Never increase speed. Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing while towing a trailer requires considerably more distance than normal passing. Remember, the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes. To maintain engine braking efficiency and electrical charging performance, do not use 5th gear (manual transmission) or overdrive (automatic transmission). Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency. When towing a trailer, transmission oil/fluid should be changed more frequently. For additional information, see the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section earlier in this manual.

9-16 Technical and consumer information

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A Treadwear Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on tire wear rate when tested under controlled conditions on specified government test courses. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1-1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. However, relative tire performance depends on actual driving conditions, and may vary significantly due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction AA, A, B and C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING
The traction grade assigned to your vehicle tires is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics. Temperature A, B and C Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C. They represent a tires resistance to heat build-up, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause tire material to degenerate, reducing tire life. Excessive temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a performance level which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades A and B represent higher levels of performance on laboratory test wheels than the minimum required by law.

WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible tire failure.

Technical and consumer information 9-17

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties: For US 1. Emission Defects Warranty 2. Emissions Performance Warranty Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to: Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 191 Gardena, CA 90248-0191 For Canada Emission Control System Warranty Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to: Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US only)

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236. You may also write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800NISSAN-1. In Hawaii call 1-808-836-0888.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

Due to legal requirements in some states and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the ready condition for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system. The vehicle is set to the ready condition when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle. If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a not ready condition. Before taking the I/M test, drive the vehicle through the following pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. If you cannot or do not want to perform the driving pattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.

WARNING
Always drive the vehicle in a safe and prudent manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws. 1. Start the engine when the engine coolant temperature gauge needle points to C. Allow the engine to idle until the gauge needle points between the C and H (normal operating temperature).

9-18 Technical and consumer information

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h), then quickly release the accelerator pedal completely and keep it released for at least 6 seconds. 3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of 53 - 60 MPH (86 - 96 km/h) for at least 5 minutes. 4. Stop the vehicle. 5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h) and maintain the speed for 20 seconds. 6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least three times. 7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h) and maintain the speed for at least 3 minutes. 8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmission selector lever in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position. 9. Turn the engine off. 10. Repeat steps 1 - 8 at least one more time. If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted, repeat the preceding step. Any safe driving mode is acceptable between steps. Do not stop the engine until step 7 is completed.

Technical and consumer information 9-19

OWNERS MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment procedures, this manual is the same one used by the factory trained technicians working at NISSAN dealerships. Also available are genuine NISSAN Owners Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Service and Owners Manuals for older NISSAN models. For USA For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model year and later contact: Tweddle Litho Company 1-800-639-8841 www.nissan-techinfo.com For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact: DDS Distribution Service, Ltd. 20770 Westwood Road Strongsville, OH 44136 1-800-247-5321

9-20 Technical and consumer information

For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Owners Manuals for the 2004 model year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact: DDS Distribution Service, Ltd. 20770 Westwood Road Strongsville, OH 44136 1-800-247-5321 For Canada To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owners Manual please contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you. Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and Owners Manuals for older NISSAN models.

Insist on the use of genuine NISSAN collision parts!

If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts made to NISSANs original exacting specifications if you want to help it to last and hold its resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your insurance agent and your repair shop to only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts. NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts, nor does NISSANs warranty apply to damage caused by a non-genuine part. Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect your personal safety, preserve your warranty protection and maintain the resale value of your vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit unnecessary excess wear and tear expenses at the end of your lease. NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Nongenuine (imitation) parts may not provide such built in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts often show premature wear, rust and corrosion.

Why should you take a chance?

In over 40 states, the law says you must be advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair your vehicle. And some states have enacted laws that restrict insurance companies from authorizing the use of non-genuine collision parts during the new vehicle warranty. These laws help protect you, so you can take action to protect yourself.

Its your right!

If you should need further information visit us at: www.nissanusa.com.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikely event, there is some important information you should know. Many insurance companies routinely authorize the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to cut costs, among other reasons.

Technical and consumer information 9-21

MEMO

9-22 Technical and consumer information

10 Index
A Active head restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9 Air bag (See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9 Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-21, 2-11 Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19 Air conditioner Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-18 Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11 Air conditioner system refrigerant and lubrication recommendations . . . . . . . .9-6 Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-18 Alarm system (See vehicle security system) . .2-14 Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-39 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . .5-18 Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-9 Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 Audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19 AM-FM radio with cassette player . . . . .4-27 Cassette player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27 Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . . . . .4-29 Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . .4-28 FM-AM-SAT radio with cassette player and compact disc (CD) changer. . . . . .4-24 FM-AM-SAT radio with cassette player and compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . .4-24 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19 Steering wheel audio control switch. . . .4-31 Autolamp switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . . . Automatic power window switch . . . . Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) . . . Driving with automatic transmission. . . Transmission selector lever lock release B Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16 Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Battery replacement (See remote keyless entry system) . . . . . . .3-8 Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6 Belts (See drive belts) . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18 Brake Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . .5-18 Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14 Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-29 Brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-13, 8-24 Parking brake check . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23 Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24 Break-in schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . . . .2-9 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29 .2-21 .3-19 .2-34 .8-12 . .5-7 .5-10 C Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . .9-2 Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32 Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-12 Cassette player (See audio system). . . . . .4-27 CD changer (See audio system). . . . . . . .4-29 CD player (See audio system) . . . . . . . . .4-28 Check engine indicator light (See malfunction indicator light) . . . . . . . .2-12 Child restraint with top tether strap . . . . . .1-39 Child restraints . . . . . . .1-25, 1-26, 1-30, 1-37 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . .1-30 Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5 Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . .7-2 Clutch Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15 Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . .4-28 Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6 Control panel buttons With navigation system . . . . . . . . . . .4-7 Without navigation system. . . . . . . . . .4-2 Controls Audio controls (steering wheel) . . . . . .4-31 Coolant Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-8

Engine coolant temperature gauge Cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. .2-5 .2-22 . .7-5 .5-13 .2-29

Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defroster switch Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . Drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . Driving with automatic transmission. . Driving with manual transmission . . . Precautions when starting and driving E Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . Emission control information label . Emission control system warranty . Engine Before starting the engine . . . Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . Changing engine coolant . . . Changing engine oil . . . . . .

. .2-21 . . . . . . . . . .2-18 . .9-8 . .3-3 .2-10 .8-18 .5-21 . .5-7 .5-11 . .5-2

Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . Engine compartment check locations. . Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine oil and oil filter recommendation Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . Engine specifications. . . . . . . . . . . Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch). . Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . Fluid Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . Folding rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . Front fog light switch . . . . . . . . . .

.8-11 . .8-8 . .8-9 . .8-8 . .2-5 . .8-8 . .8-9 . .9-5 .2-10 . .9-5 .9-10 . .9-7 . .5-6 . .5-2 .2-28

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . Fuel filler cap . . . . . . . . . . Fuel filler lid lock opener lever . Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . Fuel recommendation . . . . . Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . G

. . . . . . .1-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 .5-15 .3-12 .3-12 . .2-6 . .9-4 . .9-3 .8-24 .8-25

. . . .2-24 . . . . .6-2 . . . . .7-4 . . . .8-12 . . . .8-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 .8-15 . .8-8 . .8-9 .8-14 .8-15 .9-10 . .1-6 .2-22

Gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . General maintenance . . . . . . . . . Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . H Hazard warning flasher switch . . Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . Active head restraint . . . . . Headlight and turn signal switch. Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. .2-5 . .2-6 . .2-4 . .2-4 . .2-5 . .2-4 . .8-2 .2-30 .2-30

. . . . . .5-15 . . . . . .9-10 . . . . . .9-18 . . . . . . .5-6 . . . . . . .9-2 . . . . . . .8-9 . . . . . .8-10

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

.2-24 . .1-8 . .1-9 .2-19 .2-25 .2-25

10-2

Heater Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17 Homelink Transceiver Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41 Hood release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24 I Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . .2-16, 3-2, 5-5 Important vehicle information label. . . . . . .9-10 In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19 Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Indicator lights and audible reminders (See warning/indicator lights and audible reminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . .2-20 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2 Integrated HomeLink Universal Transceiver (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41 Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39 Interior trunk lid release. . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11 J Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6 K Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2

Keyless entry system (See remote keyless entry system) . . . . . . .3-5 L Labels Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11 Emission control information label . . . . .9-10 Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-10 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . .9-9 Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-21 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37 License plate Installing the license plate . . . . . . . . .9-11 Light Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . .1-21, 2-11 Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-29 Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . .2-9 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29 Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22 Front fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22 Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-19 Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39 Light bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28 Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . .2-11 Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40 Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9 Lock Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-5 Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3

Fuel filler lid lock opener lever . . . . . . Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk lid lock opener lever . . . . . . . . Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . M Maintenance General maintenance . . . . . Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . Maintenance precautions . . . Outside the vehicle. . . . . . . Seat belt maintenance . . . . . Under the hood and vehicle . . Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). . Manual front seat adjustment . . . Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . Mirror Outside mirror control . . . . . Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-remote control system (See remote keyless entry system) Multi-remote controller battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.3-12 .2-30 . .3-4 .3-10 .2-11 .9-12

. .8-2 . .8-3 . .8-5 . .8-2 .1-30 . .8-4 .2-12 . .1-2 . .2-3

. . . . . .3-17 . . . . . .3-16 . . . . . . .3-5 . . . . . .8-27

Nissan vehicle immobilizer system (NVIS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16, 3-2, 5-5

10-3

O Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . . . Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine oil and oil filter recommendation Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . . Overheat If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . Owners manual order form . . . . . . . . . Owners manual/service manual order information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P Parking Parking brake check . . Parking brake operation Parking/parking on hills. Personal lights . . . . . . . Power Power door locks . . . . Power outlet . . . . . . . Power steering fluid. . . Power steering system . Power windows . . . . . Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23 .5-12 .5-16 .2-40 . .3-4 .2-27 .8-14 .5-17 .2-33 .2-34 . .9-4 . .2-4 . .9-2 .8-10 .8-11 . .8-9 . .8-9 . .9-5 . .9-5 .3-17 . .6-9 .9-20 .9-20

Precautions Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . Precautions on child restraints . . . . . Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . Precautions on supplemental restraint system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Precautions when starting and driving Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R

. . .8-5 . .1-30 . .1-23 . . .1-9 . . .5-2 . . .6-8

Radio AM-FM radio with cassette player . . . . Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . . . . Steering wheel audio control switch. . . Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear sun shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . Registering your vehicle in another country. Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . S

.4-27 .4-32 .4-29 .4-31 .9-18 .2-34 . .1-6 .2-37 .2-18 . .9-6 . .9-9 . .3-5 .9-18

Safety Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-5 Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .9-18

Seat adjustment Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . Front power seat adjustment . . . . . Seat belt Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . Three-point type with retractor. . . . . Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . Seats Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . . Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . Shift lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shifting Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting Before starting the engine . . . . . . . Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Precautions when starting and driving Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . .

. . .1-2 . . .1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23 .1-30 .1-30 .1-23 .1-29 .1-27 .2-11 . .1-2 .3-19 . .1-2 .2-25 . .1-2 . .1-6 .8-24 .9-20 .4-18 .5-10 . .5-7 .5-11 .1-29 .8-18 . .2-4 .1-21 . . . . . .5-6 .6-6 .5-2 .6-8 .5-6

10-4

Steering Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . Power steering system . . . . . . . . . Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . Steering wheel audio control switch. . . . Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sunglasses case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supplemental restraint system Information and warning labels. . . . . Precautions on supplemental restraint system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supplemental restraint system (Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . Switch Autolamp switch . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic power window switch . . . Front fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield wiper and washer switch . T

. . . . . . . . .

.2-25 .8-14 .5-17 .3-14 .4-31 .8-29 .2-28 .2-28 .2-35

. .1-21 . . .1-9 . . .1-9 . . . . . . . .2-21 .2-34 .2-22 .2-24 .2-19 . .5-4 .2-17

Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33 Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35 Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34 Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . .9-17 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33 Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8 Towing Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12 Tow truck towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10 Towing load/specification chart . . . . . .9-15 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13 Transmission Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) . . . .8-12 Driving with automatic transmission. . . . .5-7 Driving with manual transmission . . . . .5-11 Selector lever lock release . . . . . . . . .5-10 Travel (See registering your vehicle in another country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9 Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 Trunk access through the rear seat . . . . . . .1-6 Trunk lid lock opener lever . . . . . . . . . . .3-10 Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41 Turn signal switch (See headlight and turn signal switch) . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19, 2-20 U Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . .9-17 V Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16 Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . .9-8 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . . . .5-20

Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9 Vehicle identification number (VIN) (Chassis number). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . .9-9 Vehicle loading information. . . . . . . . . . .9-12 Vehicle recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . .2-14, 4-18 W Warning Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . .1-21, 2-11 Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-9 Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-24 Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-11 Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-11 Vehicle security system . . . . . . .2-14, 4-18 Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-21 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9 Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . .9-8 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33 Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9 Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15 Windows Locking passengers windows . . . . . . .2-34 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34 Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . .2-17 Wiper Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-17 Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5 Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2 Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14 Tire Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2 Spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 8-37 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35 Tire placard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11

10-5

MEMO

MEMO

MEMO

MEMO

MEMO

GAS STATION INFORMATION RECOMMENDED FUEL:

For 2.5L engine Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at leat 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91). For 3.5L engine Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at leat 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91). For improved performance, NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI number (Research octane number 96).

RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:

API Certification Mark API grade SG/SH Energy Conserving II or API grade SJ or SL Energy Conserving ILSAC grade GF-II & GF-III 5W-30 Viscosity preferred See Engine oil and oil filter recommendation in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual.

TIRE COLD PRESSURE:

See tire placard.

CAUTION
Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage. Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst. For additional information, see Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle use, follow the recommendations outlined in the BREAK-IN SCHEDULE information found in the Starting and driving section of this manual. Follow these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life.

QUICK REFERENCE
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. Engine coolant 8-8 Window washer fluid 8-15 Engine oil 8-9 Passenger supplemental front impact air bag 1-9 Audio system 4-19; Air conditioner 4-16 Supplemental side-impact air bag 1-9 Front seats 1-2 Spare tire 6-2 Fuel filler lid release 3-12; Fuel recommendation 9-3 Keys 3-2 Supplemental side-impact air bag 1-9 Seat belts 1-23 Trunk release 3-10 Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag 1-9 Driver supplemental front impact air bag 1-9 Hood release 3-9 Meters and gauges 2-3

WGS0016